!!!catia V5R12 Mechanical Design Solutions 1

Part Design
Version 5 Release 12
Part
© Dassault Systèmes. 1994-2003 All rights reserved. Design
Preface
Using This Guide
Where to Find More Information
Conventions
What's New?
Getting Started
Entering the Part Design Workbench
Creating a Pad
Drafting a Face
Filleting an Edge
Editing the Pad
Mirroring the Part
Sketching a Circle from a Face
Creating a Pocket
Shelling the Part
Basic Tasks
Opening a New CATPart Document
Sketch-Based Features
Pad
Sub-Elements of a Sketch
Up to Next Pads
Up to Last Pad
Up to Plane Pad
Up to Surface Pad
Pad from Surface
Not Normal to Sketch Pad
Multi- Pad
Drafted Filleted Pad
Pocket
Multi-Length Pocket
Drafted Filleted Pocket
Thin Solids
Shaft
Groove
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/prtugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 5)10/18/2004 7:42:43 PM

Part Design
Hole
Locating Holes
Threaded Hole
Rib
More About Ribs
Slot
Stiffener
Multi-sections Solid
Removed Multi-sections Solid
Solid Combine
Dress-Up Features
Edge Fillet
Variable Radius Fillet
Reshaping Corners
Face-Face Fillet
Tritangent Fillet
Chamfer
Basic Draft
Advanced Draft
Variable Angle Draft
Draft with Parting Element
Draft from Reflect Lines
Shell
Thickness
Thread
Remove Faces
Replace Face
Surface-Based Features
Split
Thick Surface
Close Surface
Sew Surface
Transformation Features
Translation
Rotation
Symmetry
Mirror
Rectangular Pattern
Circular Pattern
User Pattern
Exploding Patterns
Scaling
Reference Elements
Creating Points

Part Design
Creating Lines
Creating Planes
Using Surfaces and Curves
Joining Surfaces or Curves
Extrapolating Surfaces
Extracting Geometry
Creating Intersections
Creating Projections
Creating Boundary Curves
Modifying Features
Editing parts, bodies, features
Reordering Features
Updating Parts
Deleting Features
Constraints
Setting 3D Constraints
Setting constraints
Modifying Constraints
Mean Dimensions
Replacing Elements
Replacing a Surface
Replacing a Body
Moving Sketches
Changing a Sketch Support
Displaying and Editing Properties
Part Properties
Bodies Properties
Features Properties
Annotations
Creating a Text With Leader
Flag Notes
Handling Parts in a Multi-Document Environment
Advanced Tasks
Associating Bodies
Inserting a Body
Inserting in a Body
Assembling Bodies
Intersecting Bodies
Adding Bodies
Removing Bodies
Trimming Bodies
Remove Lump
Changing a Boolean Operation Into Another One

Part Design
Tools
Editing a list of Elements
Scanning the Part and Defining In Work Objects
Performing a Draft Analysis
Performing a Surfacic Curvature Analysis
Tap-Thread Analysis
Creating Datums
Applying a Material
Extracting Geometry
Parents and Children
Axis System
Publishing Elements
PowerCopy
Creating PowerCopies
Instantiating PowerCopies
Saving PowerCopies into a Catalog
Reusing your Design
Cutting, Copying, Pasting
Workbench Description
Part Design Menu Bar
Sketch-Based Features Toolbar
Dress-Up Features Toolbar
Surface-Based Features Toolbar
Transformation Features Toolbar
Reference Elements Toolbar
Boolean Operations Toolbar
Sketcher Toolbar
Constraints Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar
Annotations Toolbar
Tools Toolbar
Insert Toolbar
Miscellaneous Symbols
Symbols Reflecting an Incident in the Geometry Building
Specification Tree
Customizing
Tree and Geometry View
General Settings
Constraint Appearance
CATPart Document
Tolerancing
Display

Part Design
Manipulators
View/Annotation Plane
Glossary
Index
Preface
The Version 5 Part Design application makes it possible to design precise 3D
mechanical parts with an intuitive and flexible user interface, from sketching in an
assembly context to iterative detailed design. Version 5 Part Design application will
enable you to accommodate design requirements for parts of various complexities,
from simple to advanced.
This application, which combines the power of feature-based design with the flexibility
of a Boolean approach, offers a highly productive and intuitive design environment
with multiple design methodologies, such as post-design and local 3D
parameterization.
As a scalable product, Part Design can be used in cooperation with other current or
future companion products such as Assembly Design and Generative Drafting. The
widest application portfolio in the industry is also accessible through interoperability
with CATIA Solutions Version 4 to enable support of the full product development
process from initial concept to product in operation.
The Part Design User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create a part.
There are several ways of creating a part and this book aims at illustrating the
several stages of creation you may encounter.
Using This Guide

Conventions

Preface
Preface
The Version 5 Part Design application makes it possible to design precise 3D mechanical
parts with an intuitive and flexible user interface, from sketching in an assembly context to
iterative detailed design. Version 5 Part Design application will enable you to
accommodate design requirements for parts of various complexities, from simple to
advanced.
This application, which combines the power of feature-based design with the flexibility of a
Boolean approach, offers a highly productive and intuitive design environment with multiple
design methodologies, such as post-design and local 3D parameterization.
As a scalable product, Part Design can be used in cooperation with other current or future
companion products such as Assembly Design and Generative Drafting. The widest
application portfolio in the industry is also accessible through interoperability with CATIA
Solutions Version 4 to enable support of the full product development process from initial
concept to product in operation.
The Part Design User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create a part. There
are several ways of creating a part and this book aims at illustrating the several stages of
creation you may encounter.
Using This Guide

Conventions
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugpr01.htm10/18/2004 7:42:56 PM
Using This Guide
Using This Guide

This book is intended for the user who needs to become quickly familiar with Part Design
product. The user should be familiar with basic Version 5 concepts such as document
windows, standard and view toolbars.
To get the most out of this guide, we suggest you start reading and performing the step-by-
step tutorial Getting Started. This tutorial will show you how to create a basic part from
scratch.
Once you have finished, you should move on to the next sections dealing with the handling
of CATPart data, then the creation and modification of various types of features you will
need to construct parts. This guide also presents other Part Design capabilities allowing you
to design complex parts. You can also take a look at the sections describing the Part Design
Workbench at the end of the guide.
To perform the scenarios, you will use sample documents contained in the C:\Program
Files\Dassault Systèmes\B12doc\online\prtug\samples folder.
When samples belong to capabilities common to different products, those samples will be
found in the C:\Program Files\Dassault Systèmes\B12doc\online\cfyug\samples
folder.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Prior to reading this book, we recommend that you read the Infrastructure User's Guide and
the Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide.
Other complementary product guides such as the Assembly Design User's Guide, the
Wireframe and Surface User's Guide, the Generative Drafting User's Guide and the Product
Knowledge Template User's Guide can prove useful too.
Click to find out more about the Conventions used in this guide.
[ Back ] [ Up ] [ Next ]
Conventions
Conventions
Certain conventions are used in CATIA, ENOVIA & DELMIA documentation to help you
recognize and understand important concepts and specifications. The following text
conventions may be used:
The titles of CATIA documents appear in this manner throughout the text.
File -> New identifies the commands to be used.
The use of the mouse differs according to the type of action you need to perform.
Use this
mouse button, whenever you read
Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...)

Click (icons, dialog box buttons, tabs, selection of a location in the
document window, ...)
Double-click
Shift-click
Ctrl-click
Check (check boxes)
Drag
Drag and drop (icons onto objects, objects onto objects)
Drag
Move
Right-click (to select contextual menu)
Graphic conventions are denoted as follows:

indicates the estimated time to accomplish a task.
indicates a target of a task.
indicates the prerequisites.
indicates the scenario of a task.
indicates tips
indicates a warning.
indicates information.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/icons_C2/conventions.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 7:43:22 PM

Conventions
indicates basic concepts.
indicates methodological information.
indicates reference information.
indicates information regarding settings, customization, etc.
indicates the end of a task.
indicates functionalities that are new or enhanced with this Release.

Enhancements can also be identified by a blue-colored background in the left-
hand margin or on the text itself.
indicates functionalities that are P1-specific.
allows you to switch back the full-window viewing mode.
These icons in the table of contents correspond to the entries or mode.

"Site Map".
"Split View" mode.
"What's New".
"Preface".
"Getting Started".
"Basic Tasks".
"User Tasks" or the "Advanced Tasks".
"Workbench Description".
"Customizing".
"Reference".

Conventions
"Methodology".
"Glossary".
"Index".

What's New?
What's New?
New Functionalities
Solid Combine
This new command lets you create a solid by computing the intersection of two or
more virtually extruded profiles.
Remove Faces
Faces of different types can be removed in order to make parts more simple prior to
computing finite elements for example.
Replace Face
You can now reshape a part by extruding its faces onto external faces.
List of Elements
A generic mechanism available from any command allowing multi-selection for input
elements lets you edit the list of these elements
Enhanced Functionalities
Shaft
You can now revolve surfaces about axes using the Shaft command.
Groove
You can now revolve surfaces about axes using the Groove command.
Hole
Tolerancing dimensions can now be defined for hole diameters.
Dress-Up Features
Edge Fillet
When the application detects that edges other than the edges you wish to fillet are
affected by the operation, now it issues an error message asking you if you wish to
select the edge as the "keep edge" or not.
Edge Fillet
When the update process detects that sharp edges interrupt fillet operations, it is
possible to continue filleting just by selecting an edge adjacent to the edge you wish
to fillet.
Tools
Publish
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwn.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:43:40 PM

What's New?
It is now possible to make all the features of a body or part body publicly available.
Creation Contextual Commands
Contextual commands for creating wireframe and surfacic elements, commands such
as "Create Line", "Create Plane", but also "Create Join", "Create Extrapol" or "Create
Extract", "Create Intersections", "Create Projections", "Create Boundary" are now
available from diverse existing capabilities:
❍ "Pad not normal to Sketch Plane", "Up to Plane Pad", "Up to Surface Pad"
❍ "Pocket"
❍ "Shaft"
❍ "Groove"
❍ "Hole"
❍ "Rib"
❍ "Slot"
❍ "Edge Fillet", "Face-Face Fillet" (Limiting Elements), (Spine), (Hold Curve), "Variable
Radius Fillet" (Points), (Limiting Elements), "Tritangent Fillet"
❍ "Draft Angle" (Pulling Directions), (Limiting Elements), "Variable Angle Draft" (Points),
"Draft From Reflect Lines" (Pulling Direction), (Parting Elements), (Limiting Elements),
"Advanced Draft" (Neutral Elements), (Pulling Direction)
❍ "Rectangular Pattern", "Circular Pattern", "User Pattern"
❍ "Split"
❍ "Mirror"
❍ "Thick Surface"
❍ "Close Surface"
Customizing
Customizing General Settings

The "Delete Referenced Sketches" option has been renamed as "Delete exclusive
parents". Now, when this option is checked, the Delete dialog box inherits this setting:
the Delete exclusive parents option is active in the Delete dialog box as well.
Customizing the Tree and the Geometry Views
A new option lets you customize the display of the geometry of the current body only.
A new option lets you define the size of axis systems in mm.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwn.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:43:40 PM

Getting Started
Getting Started
Before getting into the detailed instructions for using CATIA Version 5 parts, the following
tutorial aims at giving you a feel as to what you can do with the product. It provides a step-
by-step scenario showing you how to use key functionalities.
The main tasks described in this section are:

Creating a Pad
Drafting a Face
Filleting an Edge
Editing the Pad
Mirroring the Part
Creating a Pocket
Shelling the Part
All together, the tasks should take about ten minutes to complete.
The final part will look like this:
Now, let's get to sketching the profile!
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs01.htm10/18/2004 7:43:56 PM

This first task shows you how to enter the Part Design workbench.
1. Select the File -> New... commands (or click the New icon).
The New dialog box is displayed, allowing you to choose the type of document you
need.
2. Select Part in the List of Types field and click OK.
The Part Design workbench is loaded and an empty CATPart document opens.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs02.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:07 PM

The commands for creating and editing features are available in the workbench
toolbar. Now, let's perform the following task Creating a Pad.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Creating a Pad
Creating a Pad
This task will show you how to create a pad, that is extrude a profile sketched in the
Sketcher workbench. For more about this workbench, please refer to Dynamic
Sketcher User's Guide Version 5.
Open the GettingStarted1_R04.CATPart document to open the required profile.
Your profile belongs to Sketch.1 and was created on plane xy. It looks like
this:
1. Select the profile if not already selected and click the Pad icon .
The Pad Definition dialog box appears. Default options allow you to create a
basic pad.

Creating a Pad
2. As you prefer to create a larger pad, enter 60 mm in the Length field.
The application previews the pad to be created.
3. Click OK.
The pad is created. The extrusion is performed in a direction which is normal

to the sketch plane. The application displays this creation in the specification
tree:

Creating a Pad
The application lets you control the display of some of the part components.
To know more about the components you can display or hide, refer to
Customizing the Tree and Geometry Views.
For more about pads, refer to Pads, 'Up to Next' Pads, 'Up to Last' Pads, 'Up
to Plane' Pads, 'Up to Surface' Pads, Pads not Normal to Sketch Plane.

Drafting a Face
Drafting a Face
This task will show you how to draft a face.
1. Click the Draft Angle icon .
The Draft Definition dialog box appears. The application displays the default pulling
direction on the part.
2. Select the face as shown by the arrow as the face to be drafted.
The application detects all the faces to be drafted. The selected face is now in dark
red whereas the other faces are in a lighter red.
3. Click the Selection field of the Neutral Element frame and select the upper face.
The neutral element is now displayed in blue, the neutral curve in pink.
4.
Enter 9 degrees in the Angle field.

Drafting a Face
5. Click OK. The part is drafted:
For more about drafts, please refer to Basic Draft, and to Draft with Parting
Element.

Drafting a Face

Filleting an Edge
Filleting an Edge
In this task you will learn how to use one of the fillet commands designed to fillet edges.
1. Click the Edge Fillet icon .
The Edge Fillet Definition dialog box appears. It contains default values.
2.
Select the edge to be filleted, that is, to be rounded.
Clicking Preview lets you see what the default fillet would look like.
3. Enter 7 mm as the new radius value and Click OK.
Here is your part:

Filleting an Edge
For more about fillets, please refer to Edge Fillet, Face-Face Fillet, Tritangent Fillet ,
Variable Radius Fillet.

Editing the Pad
Editing the Pad

Actually, you would like the pad to be thicker. This task shows you how to edit the
pad, then how to color the part.
1. Double-click Pad.1.
You can do it in the specification tree if you wish.
2. In the Pad Definition dialog box that appears, enter 90 mm as the new length value.
3. Click OK.
The part is modified accordingly.
4. Now select Part Body.

Editing the Pad
5. Select the Edit -> Properties command and click the Graphic tab to change the
color of your part.
6. Set the color of your choice in the Color combo box and click OK.
To have details about how to change graphic properties, please refer to CATIA
Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5.
The part now looks like this:

Mirroring the Part
Mirroring the Part

Now, you are going to duplicate the part using the Mirror capability. This task will
show you how easy it is.
1. Select the reference face you need to duplicate the part. Select the face as shown:
2. Click the Mirror icon .
The name of this face appears in the Mirroring element field.
3. Click OK.
The part is mirrored and the specification tree indicates this operation.

Mirroring the Part
For more about mirror, please refer to Mirror.


In this task, you will learn how to:
● sketch a circle on an existing face
● use this circle in order to create a pocket
1. Select the upper face to define the working plane.
2. Click the Sketcher icon to enter the Sketcher workbench.
3. Once in the Sketcher workbench, click this Circle icon to create a basic circle.
4. Click the circle center in the middle of the face and drag the cursor to sketch the
circle.
5. Click once you are satisfied with the size of the circle.

6. Click the Exit Sketcher icon to return to the 3D world. This is your part:
For more about Sketcher elements, please refer to Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide
Version 5.

Creating a Pocket
Creating a Pocket
In this task, you will learn a method to create a pocket using the profile you have just
created.
1. Select the circle you have just sketched, if it is not already selected.
2. Click the Pocket icon .
The Pocket Definition dialog box is displayed and the application previews a pocket
with default parameters.
3. Set the Up to last option to define the limit of your pocket.
The application will limit the pocket onto the last possible face, that is the pad
bottom.
4. Click OK.
This is your pocket:

Creating a Pocket
For more about pockets, please refer to Pocket.

Shelling the Part
Shelling the Part

To end the scenario, you will learn how to shell the part.
1. Select the bottom face of the part.
2. Click the Shell icon .
The selected face turns purple and the

Shell Definition dialog box appears.
3. Enter 5mm as the inner thickness value.
4. Click OK to shell the part.
You have defined a positive value, which means that you are going to obtain a thin
part thickness.

Shelling the Part
For more about shells, please refer to Shell.
You have finished the scenario. Now, let's take a closer look at the application.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Basic Tasks
Basic Tasks
The basic tasks you will perform in the Part Design workbench are mainly the creation of
features and surfaces you will use to create your part. To create features you will
sometimes sketch profiles first or use existing features.
This section will explain and illustrate how to create various kinds of features and surfaces.
The table below lists the information you will find.

Dress-Up Features
Reference Elements
Modifying Features
Constraints
Replacing Elements
Annotations
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugbt0000.htm10/18/2004 7:45:36 PM

This task shows you how to open a new CATPart document.
1. Select the File -> New commands (or click the New icon).
The New dialog box is displayed, allowing you to choose the type of document you
need.
2. Select Part in the List of Types field and click OK.
The Part Design workbench is loaded and a CATPart document opens.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugbt0100.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:46:07 PM

The Part Design workbench document is divided into:

● the specification tree
● the geometry area
● specific toolbars : for information, please refer to Part Design Workbench
a number of contextual commands available in the specification tree and in the

geometry. Remember that these commands can also be accessed from the menu
bar.
You will notice that the application provides three planes to let you start your
design. Actually, designing a part from scratch will first require designing a sketch.
Sketching profiles is performed in the Sketcher workbench which is fully integrated
into Part Design. To open it, just click the Sketcher icon and select the work
plane of your choice.
The Sketcher workbench then provides a large number of tools allowing you to
sketch the profiles you need. For more information, refer to CATIA-Dynamic
Sketcher User's Guide Version 5.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Features are entities you combine to make up your part. The features presented here are
obtained by applying commands on initial profiles created in the Sketcher workbench (See
CATIA-Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide Version 5 ) or in the Generative Shape Design
workbench (See CATIA Generative Shape Design User's Guide Version 5) as well as surfaces.
Some operations consist in adding material, others in removing material. In this section,
you will learn how to create the following features:
Create a Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded and enter the
parameters you need in the dialog box.
Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch: right-click the Selection field from the Pad
or Pocket dialog box and select the Go to Profile Definition contextual command to
display the Profile Definition dialog box.
Create an 'Up to Next' Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, set
the Type option to Ùp to next' and enter the parameters you need in the dialog
box.
Create an 'Up to Last' Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, set the
Type option to Ùp to last' and enter the parameters you need in the dialog box.
Create an 'Up to Plane' Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, enter
the parameters you need, set the Type option to Ùp to plane' in the dialog box
and select the required plane.
Create an 'Up to Surface' Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded,
enter the parameters you need, set the Type option to Up to surface in the dialog
box and select the required surface.
Create a Pad from a Surface: Click this icon, select the surface to be extruded and
enter the parameters you need.

Create a Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane: Click this icon, select the profile to be
extruded, expand the dialog box, enter the required parameters, define a new
reference for the extrusion direction.
Create a Multi-Pad: Click this icon, select the sketch to be extruded and specify a
length value for each domain.
Create a Drafted Filleted Pad: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded and
enter the parameters you need in the dialog box.
Create a Pocket: Click this icon, select the profile and enter the parameters you
need in the dialog box.
Create a Pocket from a Surface: Click this icon, select the surface to be extruded
and enter the parameters you need.
Create a Multi-Pocket: Click this icon, select the sketch to be extruded and specify
a length value for each domain.
Create a Drafted Filleted Pocket: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded
and enter the parameters you need in the dialog box.
Create a Thin Solid: Click one of these icons, check the option "Thick" and enter
values to define the thickness.
Create a Shaft: Click this icon, select the profile to be revolved about the axis and
enter angle values.
Create a Groove: Click this icon, select the profile to be revolved about the axis
and enter angle values.
Create a Hole: Click this icon, select the face to locate the hole to be created and
enter the required parameters in the dialog box.
Locating Holes

Create a Threaded Hole: Click this icon, select the face to locate the hole, define
the hole shape, check Threaded, click Specifications and enter the required values
in the Thread dialog box..
Create a Rib: Click this icon, select the profile to be swept along a center curve,
select this center curve and set the position option in the dialog box.
Trimming Ribs or Slots
Create a Slot: Click this icon, select the profile to be swept along a center curve,
select this center curve and set the position option in the dialog box.
Create a Stiffener: Click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, and specify
whether this extrusion is to be done in two or three directions.
Create a Multi-sections Solid: Click this icon, select the section curves, the guide
curves and if necessary the spine of your choice.
Remove a Multi-sections Solid: Click this icon, select the section curves, the guide
curves, the closing points and if necessary the spine of your choice.
Create a Solid Combine: Click this icon, select the components which intersections
you want to compute.

Pad
Pad
Creating a pad means extruding a profile or a surface in one or two directions. The
application lets you choose the limits of creation as well as the direction of extrusion.
This task shows you how to create a basic pad using a closed profile, the Dimension
and Mirrored extent options.
Open the Pad1_R08.CATPart document.
1. Select Sketch.1 as the profile to be extruded.
About Profiles
● You can use profiles sketched in the Sketcher or planar geometrical elements
created in the Generative Shape Design workbench (except for lines).
● You can also select diverse elements constituting a sketch. For more
information, refer to Using the Sub-Elements of a Sketch.
● If you launch the Pad command with no profile previously defined, just access the
Sketcher by clicking the icon available in the dialog box and sketch the
profile you need.
You can select Generative Shape Design surfaces, non-planar faces and even CATIA
V4 surfaces. For more information, pleaser refer to "Pads from Surfaces".
● By default, if you extrude a profile, the application extrudes normal to the plane
used to create the profile. To see how to change the extrusion direction, refer to
Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane.
● If you extrude a geometrical element created in the Generative Shape Design

workbench, you need to select an element defining the direction because there is
no default direction.

Pad
2. Click the Pad icon .
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews the pad to be
created.
If you are not satisfied with the profile you selected, note that you can click the
Selection field and select another sketch.
Limits
You will notice that by default, the application specifies the length of your pad
(Type= Dimension option). But you can use the following options too:
● Up to Next
● Up to Last
● Up to Plane
● Up to Surface

Pad
● If you set the "Up to Plane" or "Up to Surface" option, contextual commands
creating new planes or surfaces you may need are then available from the Limit
field:
❍ Create Plane: see Create Planes
❍ XY Plane: the XY plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0)
becomes the limit.
❍ YZ Plane: the YZ plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0)
becomes the limit.
❍ ZX Plane: the ZX plane of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0)
becomes the limit.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays a line or a
plane in front of the Reference field as a reminder.
❍ Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. See Joining Surfaces or Curves.
❍ Create Extrapol: extrapolates surface boundaries. See Extrapolating Surfaces.
3. Enter 40 in the Length field to increase the length value.
You can increase or decrease length values by dragging LIM1 or LIM2 manipulators.
The length value cannot exceed 1 000 000 mm.
Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile. Once you
have done your modifications, you just need to quit the Sketcher. The Pad dialog
box then reappears to let you finish your design.
To know how to use the Thick option, refer to "Thin Solids".

The Reverse side button applies for open profiles only. This option lets you choose
which side of the profile is to be extruded.

Pad
4. Click the Mirrored extent option to extrude the profile in the opposite direction
using the same length value.
If you wish to define another length for this direction, you do not have to click the
Mirrored extent button. Just click the More button and define the second limit.
5. Click Preview to see the result.
6. Click OK.
The pad is created. The specification tree indicates that it has been created.
A Few Notes About Pads

Pad
● The application allows you to create pads from open profiles provided existing geometry
can trim the pads. The pad below has been created from an open profile which both
endpoints were stretched onto the inner vertical faces of the hexagon. The option used
for Limit 1 is "Up to next". The inner bottom face of the hexagon then stops the
extrusion. Conversely, the "Up to next" option could not be used for Limit2.
Preview Result
● Pads can also be created from sketches including several profiles. These profiles must not
intersect. In the following example, the sketch to be extruded is defined by a square and
a circle. Applying the Pad command on this sketch lets you obtain a cavity:
Preview Result
● Before clicking the Pad command, ensure that the profile to be used is not tangent with
itself.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Using the Sub-Elements of a Sketch
This task shows you how to select different elements belonging to the same sketch for creating pads.
The steps described here also apply for pockets, shafts, grooves, stiffeners, ribs and slots.
Sketch three rectangles in a Sketcher session.
The Pad Definition dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Selection field from the dialog box.
3. Right-click and select the Go to Profile Definition contextual command.
The Profile Definition dialog box is displayed.
4. You can define whether you need the Whole geometry, that is the whole sketch, or sub-elements only.
For the purposes of our scenario, check Sub-elements if not already done.
5. Select an edge.
The sketch name as well as the edge name appear in the dialog box. The application also previews the
pad.
6. Click Add to add another element.

7. Select an edge belonging to another profile.
The application now previews this pad too.

8. Repeat steps 4 and 5 using an edge belonging to the third profile.
9. Select edge2 from the starting elements field and click Remove to remove the associated profile from the
selection.
10. Click OK to validate your selection.
The Pad Definition dialog box reopens. You then just have to enter the parameters of your choice to
extrude two profiles.
Optionally click Preview before confirming the creation.
If you encounter complex profiles causing ambiguity cases, the application lets you determine which
lines you want to use as illustrated below:
The application detects an ambiguity as shown by The user has defined the line he needs to end the
the red symbol : the user can determine three selection.
different lines from this point.

Up to Next Pads
'Up to Next' Pads
This task shows you how to create a pad using the 'Up to Next' option. This creation
mode lets the application detect the existing material to be used for trimming the pad.
1. Select the profile to be extruded, that is the circle.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews a pad with a
default dimension value.
3. Click the arrow in the geometry area to reverse the extrusion direction (or click the
Reverse Direction button).
In the Type field, set the option to 'Up to

4.
next'.

Up to Next Pads
This option assumes an existing face can be

used to limit the pad. The application
previews the pad to be created. The already
existing body is going to limit the extrusion.
Optionally, click Preview to see the result.
5. Click OK.
The pad is created. The specification tree

indicates this creation.
By default, the application extrudes normal to the plane used to create the profile.
To learn how to change the direction, refer to Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane .

Up to Last Pad
'Up to Last' Pads

This task shows how to create pads using the Ùp to last' option.
1. Select the profile to be extruded, that is the circle.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews a pad with 10
mm as the default dimension value.
3. Click the arrow in the geometry area to reverse the extrusion direction (or click the
Reverse Direction button).
4. In the Type field, set the option to 'Up to

last'.
The last face encountered by the extrusion

is going to limit the pad.
Optionally, click Preview to see the result.

Up to Last Pad
5. Click OK.

To see how to change the direction, refer to Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane .

Up to Plane Pad
'Up to Plane' Pads

This task shows how to create pads using the Up to plane option.
1. Select the profile to be extruded.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews a pad with 10
mm as the default dimension value.
3. In the Type field, set the Type option to 'Up to plane'.
4. Select Plane.1. The application previews

the pad to be created. The plane is going
to limit the extrusion.
An Offset option is now displayed.

Up to Plane Pad
● Contextual commands creating the planes you need are now available from the
Limit field:
❍ Create Plane: see Creating Planes
becomes the trimming element.
If you create any of these elements, the

application then displays the plane icon
in front of the Limit field. Clicking this
icon enables you to edit the element.
5. Enter -20 as the offset value. This offset is the distance between the plane and the
top face of the pad to be created.
Optionally click Preview to see the result.

6. Click OK.


Up to Surface Pad
'Up to Surface' Pads

This task shows how to create pads using the 'Up to surface' option.
1. Select the profile to be extruded.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the application previews a pad with a
default dimension value.
3.
In the Type field, set the Type option to 'Up to surface'.
4. Select the vertical circular face. This face belongs to the same body as the existing
pad.
Using the 'Up to surface' option, you can select a face belonging to the same body
as the sketch or a face belonging to Part Body.
The face is going to limit the extrusion.
Contextual commands creating the surfaces you need are now available from the
Limit field:
● Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. See Joining Surfaces or Curves.
● Create Extrapol: extrapolates surface boundaries or curves. See Extrapolating
Surfaces and Extrapolating Curves.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the join or the
extrapol icon in front of the Limit field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the
element.

Up to Surface Pad
5. An Offset option is now available in the dialog box. Enter -30 as the offset value.
This offset is the distance between the plane and the top face of the pad to be
created.
6. Click OK.


Pad from Surface
Pads or Pockets from Surfaces

This task explains how to extrude surfaces in any direction. The scenario below shows
you how to create a pad, but the method and options described are also valid for
creating pockets.
Open the ThickSurface_R09.CATPart document.
1. Select Extrude.1 as the surface to be extruded.
The different surfaces you can select are: surfaces created in the Generative Shape
Design workbench, CATIA Version 4 surfaces and non-planar faces.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears. You need to define an extrusion direction.
To do so, either you select a geometric element after expanding the dialog box or
set the "Up to Plane" limit and select the plane of your choice. In that case, the
direction will be given by the normal to that plane (for more, see pockets).
3. For the purposes of our scenario, click More to expand the dialog box.
4. Click the Reference field and select Plane.1 as the plane defining the extrusion
direction. The direction is the normal to the plane.

Pad from Surface
Make sure that the surface to be extruded is not tangent to the extrusion direction
nor to the plane.
For both limits to be defined, you can use all the options described in the tasks
showing the pad creation:
● Dimension
● Up to Next
● Up to Last
● Up to Plane
● Up to Surface
5. Enter 21mm and 11mm as the first and second limit values respectively.
6. Click OK to confirm. The new element identified as Pad.XXX is added to the
specification tree.

Pad from Surface
Non-planar faces
If you create a pad or a pocket from a non-planar face, that face is displayed as a
datum in the specification tree.
Pockets
In the following example, two different types of limits are defined for trimming the
material extruded then removed from each side of the surface.
Initial part
Preview
The option used to define the first limit

"LIM 1" is "Up to plane" (the white arrow
points to the selected plane). The
extrusion direction is then defined by
this plane.
LIM2 is defined by a dimension type limit.

Pad from Surface
Result
Material has been removed from each

side of the surface.
The options for creating thin solids are not available when you select a surface as
the element to be extruded.

Pad not Normal to Sketch Plane

This task shows how to create a pad using a direction that is not normal to the plane
used to create the profile.
1. Select the profile you wish to extrude.
created.
3. Set the Up to plane option and select plane yz. For more about this type of
creation, refer to Up to Plane Pads.
4. Click the More button to display the whole dialog box.

Uncheck the Normal to profile option and select the line as shown to use it as a
5.
reference.
The application previews the pad with the

new creation direction.

Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from the
Reference field:
● Create Line: for more information, see Creating Lines
● Create Plane: see Creating Planes
● X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the
direction.
● Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the
direction.
● Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the
direction.

application then displays the line or the plane
icon in front of the Reference. Clicking this
When copying and pasting a pad using the As specified in Part document option
(for more, see Handling Parts in a Multi-Document Environment), please note that
if the extrusion direction used does not belong to the same body as the pad, this
direction is not taken into account by the Copy and Paste commands.
6. Click OK to confirm the creation.
The pad is created. The specification tree indicates this creation.

Multi- Pad
Multi-Pad
This task shows you how to extrude multiple profiles belonging to a same sketch using
different length values. The multi-pad capability lets you do this at one time. At the end
of the task you will see how to edit the resulting feature.
Click the Multi-Pad icon .

1.
2. Select Sketch.2 that contains the profiles to be extruded. Note that all profiles must
be closed and must not intersect. In case a profile would be open, the application
would not take it into account.
The Multi-Pad Definition dialog box appears and the profiles are highlighted in green.
For each of them, you can drag associated manipulators to define the extrusion
value.
The red arrow normal to the sketch indicates the proposed extrusion direction. To
reverse it, you just need to click it.
The Multi- Pad Definition dialog box displays the number of domains to be extruded.
In our example, the application has detected seven extrusions to perform, as
indicated in the Domains section.

Multi- Pad
3. Select Extrusion domain.1 from the dialog box.
Extrusion domain.1 now appears in blue in the geometry area.
4. Specify the length by entering a value. For example, enter 10mm.
5. You need to repeat the operation for each extrusion domain by entering the value of
your choice. For example, select Extrusion domain.2 and Extrusion domain.7 and
enter 30mm and 40mm respectively.
For complex sketches, the Preview button proves to be quite useful.

Multi- Pad
6. Note that you can multi-select

extrusion domains from the list before
defining a common length: multi-
select Extrusion domain.3, Extrusion
domain.4, Extrusion domain.5 and
Extrusion domain.6, then enter 50 as
the common length value.
One length value is now defined for each profile of Sketch.2.
7. Click the More button to expand the dialog box.
8. In the Second Limit field, you can specify a length value for the opposite direction.
For example, select Extrusion domain.1 and enter 40mm in the Length field.
Note that the Thickness section displays the sum of the two lengths. Extrusion
domain.1 's total length is 50 mm.

Multi- Pad
Unchecking the Normal to sketch option lets you specify a new extrusion direction.
Just select the geometry of your choice to use it as a reference.
9. Click OK to create the multi-pad.
The multi-pad (identified as Multi-Pad.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
Editing the Multi-Pad

The rest of the scenario shows you what happens when :
● Adding an Extrusion Domain
● Deleting an Extrusion Domain
Adding an Extrusion Domain
Example 1: the new profile is sketched outside existing extrusion domains
10. Double-click Sketch.2 to edit it: for

example, sketch a closed profile
outside Extrusion domain.1.

Multi- Pad
Quit the Sketcher. A warning message informs you that the application has detected
11.
that the initial geometry has been modified. Close the window.
Double-click MultiPad.1. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing the
12.
details of the modification.
13.
Click OK to close the window. The
Multi-Pocket Definition dialog box
reappears.
The new extrusion domain "Extrusion

domain.8" is indicated.
Select it and define the value of your

choice.
14. Click OK to confirm. Multi-pad.1 is now composed of eight pads.

Multi- Pad
Example 2: the new profile is sketched inside an existing extrusion domain
Double-click sketch.2 and for

15. example, add a closed profile inside
Extrusion domain.2.
Quit the Sketcher. A warning message informs you that the application has detected
16.
that the initial sketch has been modified. Close this window.
Double-click MultiPad.1. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing the
17.
details of the modification.

Multi- Pad
When sketching a profile inside an existing extrusion domain, the application

deletes that existing domain and replaces it with a new one. This is why the
message window displays :
● 1 extrusion domain deleted (Extrusion domain.2)
● 2 extrusion domains created (Extrusion domain.9, which replaces Extrusion
domain.2 and Extrusion domain.10)
18. Click OK to close the window. The

Multi-Pad Definition dialog box
reappears.
"Extrusion domain.2" is no more

displayed.
On the contrary, two new extrusion

domains "Extrusion domain.9"
"Extrusion domain.10" are indicated
with 0mm as their default thickness.
19. Select "Extrusion domain.9" if not already done and define 30mm as the length
value.
20. Select "Extrusion domain.10", that is the circle, and define 60mm as the length
value.
21.
Click OK to confirm. Multi-pad.1 is now composed of nine pads.
Deleting an Extrusion Domain

Multi- Pad
Double-click Sketch.2 and for

22.
example, delete Extrusion Domain.6.
Quit the Sketcher: the application has detected that the initial sketch has been
23.
modified:
24. To tackle the problem, you can:

● edit or delete MultiPad.1.
● or you can edit or delete Extrusion domain.6
Make sure that MultiPad.1 is selected and click the Edit button. The Feature
Definition Error window displays, providing the details of the modification.

Multi- Pad
25. Click OK to close the window. The

Multi-Pad Definition dialog box
reappears. Only eight extrusion
domains are indicated in the Domains
category.
26. Click OK to confirm. The new multi-pad feature is composed of eight pads.


This task shows you how to create a pad while drafting its faces and filleting its
edges.
We recommend you the use of this command to speed up your design.
Open the Hole1_R04.CATPart document and sketch a profile similar to the one below.
1. Quit the Sketcher and select the profile to be extruded.
2. Click the Drafted Filleted Pad icon .
created.

3. Enter 30 as the length value.
4. Selecting a second limit is mandatory. Select Pad1 top face as the second limit.
Note that planes can define second limits too.

5. Let's go on with the draft definition. Enter 7 as the draft angle value.
Drafting faces is optional. If you do not wish to use this capability, just uncheck
the Angle option.
6. Check the Second limit option to define the neutral element. So, Pad1 top face is
also used as the neutral element.
7. Enter a radius value for each edge type to define the three fillets.
● Lateral radius: defines the fillets on vertical edges
● First limit radius: defines the round corner fillets
● Second limit radius: defines the filets on the edges of the second limit.
Filleting edges is optional too. If you do not wish to use this capability, just
uncheck the options.
Clicking Preview previews the pad, the draft and the fillets and display them in
the specification tree. If you have deactivated the draft or fillet options, the draft
or the fillets are then displayed as deactivated features in the tree, i.e. with red
parentheses.
8. Click OK to create the features.
If you look at the specification tree, you will note that you have created:
● one pad
● one draft
● three fillets
This means that for edition purposes, you need to double-click the appropriate
feature.
This is your new part:


Pocket
Pocket
Creating a pocket consists in extruding a profile or a surface and removing the
material resulting from the extrusion. The application lets you choose the limits of
creation as well as the direction of extrusion. The limits you can use are the same as
those available for creating pads. To know how to use them, see Up to Next Pads , Up
to Last Pads, Up to Plane Pads, Up to Surface Pads.
This task first shows you how to create a pocket, that is a cavity, in an already existing
part, then you will edit this pocket to remove the material surrounding the initial
profile.
Open the Pocket1_R08.CATPart document.
1. Select the profile to extrude, that is Sketch.2.
About Profiles
● You can use profiles sketched in the Sketcher workbench or planar geometrical
elements created in the Generative Shape Design workbench (except for lines).
● You can create pockets from sketches including several closed profiles. These
profiles must not intersect.
● You can select diverse elements constituting a sketch too. For more information,
refer to Using the Sub-Elements of a Sketch.
Instead of selecting profiles, you can select surfaces created in the Generative
Shape Design workbench, non-planar faces and even CATIA V4 . To know how to
create a pocket from a surface, refer to Pads or Pockets from Surfaces.
The Pocket Definition dialog box is displayed and the application previews a pocket.

Pocket
If you launch the Pocket command with no profile previously defined, just click the
icon to access the Sketcher and sketch the profile you need.
You can define a specific depth for your pocket or set one of these options:
● up to next
● up to last
● up to plane
● up to surface
If you wish to use the Up to plane or Up to surface option, you can then define
an offset between the limit plane (or surface) and the bottom of the pocket. For
more information, refer to Up to Surface Pad.
3. To define a specific depth, set the Type parameter to Dimension, and enter
30mm.
Alternatively, select LIM1 manipulator and drag it downwards to 30.

Pocket
If you are not satisfied with the profile you selected, note that you can click the
Selection field and select another sketch.
Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile to modify
your pocket. Once you have done your modifications, you just need to quit the
Sketcher. The Pocket dialog box reappears to let you finish your design.
About Directions
● By default, if you extrude a profile, the application extrudes normal to the plane
used to create the profile. To specify another direction, click the More button to
display the whole Pocket Definition dialog box, uncheck the Normal to sketch
option and select a new creation direction in the geometry.
Limits
● If you set the "Up to Plane" or "Up to Surface" option, contextual commands
creating new planes or surfaces you may need are then available from the Limit
field:
becomes the limit.
becomes the limit.
becomes the limit.
❍ Create Extrapol: extrapolates surface boundaries. See Extrapolating Surfaces.

Pocket
If you create any of these

elements, the application then
displays the corresponding icon in
front of the Reference field.
Clicking this icon enables you to

edit the element.
● When copying and pasting a pocket using the As specified in Part document
option (for more, see Handling Parts in a Multi-Document Environment), please
note that if the extrusion direction used does not belong to the same body as the
pocket, this direction is not taken into account by the Copy and Paste commands.
● If you extrude a geometrical element created in Generative Shape Design, you
need to select a direction.
To know how to use the Thick option, refer to "Thin Solids".
4. Optionally click Preview to see the result.

Click OK to create the pocket.
The specification tree indicates this

creation. This is your pocket:
5. Double-click Pocket.1 to edit it. As the application now lets you choose the portion
of material to be kept, you are going to remove all the material surrounding the
initial profile.
The Reverse side option lets you choose between removing the material defined
within the profile, which is the application's default behavior, or the material
surrounding the profile.
6. Click the Reverse side button or alternatively click the arrow as shown:

Pocket
7. The arrow now indicates the opposite direction.
8. Click OK to confirm. The application has removed the material around the profile.
A Few Notes About Pockets

● The application allows you to create pockets from open profiles provided existing
geometry can trim the pockets.
● If your insert a new body and create a pocket as the first feature of this body, the
application creates material:

Pocket
● Pockets can also be created from sketches including several profiles. These profiles must
not intersect. In the following example, the initial sketch is made of eight profiles.
Applying the Pocket command on this sketch lets you create eight pockets:
● The Up to next limit is the first face the application detects while extruding the profile.
This face must stops the whole extrusion, not only a portion of it, and the hole goes thru
material, as shown in the figure below:

Pocket
Preview Result
● When using the Up to Surface option, remember that if the selected surface partly stops
the extrusion, the application continues to extrude the profile until it meets a surface that
can fully stop the operation.

Multi-Length Pocket
Multi-Pocket
This task shows you how to create a pocket feature from distinct profiles belonging to a
same sketch and this, using different length values. The multi-pocket capability lets you
do this at one time. At the end of the task, you will see how to edit the resulting multi-
pocket.
1. Click the Multi-Pocket icon .
2. Select Sketch.4 that contains the profiles to be extruded. Note that all profiles must
be closed and must not intersect. In case a profile would be open, the application
would not take it into account.
The Multi-Pocket Definition dialog box appears and the profiles are highlighted in
green. For each of them, you can drag associated manipulators to define the
extrusion value.
The red arrow normal to the sketch indicates the proposed extrusion direction. To
reverse it, you just need to click it.
The Multi-Pocket Definition dialog box displays the number of domains to be

removed. In our example, the application has detected six domains, as indicated in
the Domains section.

Multi-Length Pocket
3. Select Extrusion domain.1 from the dialog box.
Extrusion domain.1 now appears in blue in the geometry area.
4. Specify the length by entering a value. For example, enter 10mm.
5. You need to repeat the operation for each extrusion domain by entering the value of
your choice. For example, select Extrusion domain.2 and Extrusion domain.6 and
enter 30mm and 40mm respectively.
For complex sketches, the Preview button proves to be quite useful.
6. Note that you can multi-select

extrusion domains from the list before
defining a common length: multi-select
Extrusion domain.3, Extrusion
domain.4, and Extrusion domain.5,
then enter 50 as the common length
value.
7. Click the More button to expand the dialog box.

Multi-Length Pocket
In the Second Limit field, you can specify a length value for the direction opposite
to the direction previously defined.
Note that the Thickness section displays the sum of two lengths defined for a given
extrusion domain.
Unchecking the Normal to sketch option lets you specify a new extrusion direction.
Just select the geometry of your choice to use it as a reference.
8. Click OK to create the multi-pocket.
The multi-pocket (identified as Multi-Pocket.xxx) is added to the specification tree.

Multi-Length Pocket
Editing the Multi-Pocket

The rest of the scenario shows you what happens when :
● Adding an Extrusion Domain
● Deleting an Extrusion Domain
Adding an Extrusion Domain
Example 1: the new profile is sketched outside existing extrusion domains

9. Double-click Sketch.4 to edit it: for
example, sketch a closed profile
outside Extrusion domain.1.
10. Quit the Sketcher. A warning message informs you that the application has detected
that the initial geometry has been modified. Click OK to close the window.

Multi-Length Pocket
11. Double-click MultiPocket.1. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing
the details of the modification.
12. Click OK to close the window. The Multi-

Pocket Definition dialog box reappears.
The new extrusion domain "Extrusion

domain.7" is indicated.
Select it and define the value of your

choice.
13. Click OK to confirm. Multi-pocket.1 is now composed of seven pockets.
Example 2: the new profile is sketched inside an existing extrusion domain

Multi-Length Pocket
Double-click Sketch.2 to edit it: for

14. example, add a closed profile inside
Extrusion domain.2.
15. Quit the Sketcher. A warning message informs you that the application has detected
that the initial geometry has been modified. Close the window.
16.
Double-click MultiPocket.1. The Feature Definition Error window displays, providing
the details of the modification:
When sketching a profile inside an existing extrusion domain, the application

deletes that existing domain and replaces it with a new one. This is why the
message window displays :
● 1 extrusion domain deleted (Extrusion domain.2)
● 2 extrusion domains created (Extrusion domain.8 and Extrusion domain.9, that
replaces Extrusion domain.2)

Multi-Length Pocket

"Extrusion domain.2" is no more

displayed.
On the contrary, two new extrusion

domains "Extrusion domain.8"
"Extrusion domain.9" are indicated with
0mm as their default thickness.
18. Select "Extrusion domain.8" and define 40mm as the length value.
19. Select "Extrusion domain.9", that is the circle, and define 30mm as the length value.
20. Click OK to confirm. Multi-pocket.1 is now composed of eight pockets.
Deleting an Extrusion Domain

Multi-Length Pocket
Double-click Sketch.4 and delete

21.
Extrusion Domain.5.
Quit the Sketcher: the application has detected that the initial geometry has been
22.
modified:
23. To tackle the problem, you can:

● edit, deactivate or even delete MultiPocket1.
● or you can edit or delete Extrusion domain.5
Make sure that MultiPocket.1 is selected and click the Edit button. The Feature
Definition Error window displays, providing the details of the modification.

Multi-Length Pocket

Only seven extrusion domains are
indicated in the Domains category.
25. Click OK to confirm. The new multi-pocket feature is composed of seven pockets.


This task shows you how to create a pocket while drafting its faces and filleting its
edges.
We recommend you the use of this new command to speed up your design.
1. Select the profile to be extruded, that is Sketch.2.
2. Click the Drafted Filleted Pocket icon .
The Drafted Filleted Pocket Definition dialog box appears and the application
previews the pocket to be created.

3. Enter 22 as the pocket depth value.
4. Selecting a second limit is mandatory. Select Pad1 top face as the second limit.
Your specifications for creating the pocket are now defined.
5. Let's go on with the draft definition. Enter 7 as the draft angle value.
Drafting faces is optional. If you do not wish to use this capability, just uncheck
the Angle option.
6. Check the Second limit option to define the neutral element. So, note that the
pad top face is also used as the neutral element.

7. Enter 4 as the radius value to define the three fillets.

● Lateral radius: defines the fillets on vertical edges
● First limit radius: defines the round corner fillets
● Second limit radius: defines the filets on the edges of the second limit.
Filleting edges is optional too. If you do not wish to use this capability, just
uncheck the options.
Clicking Preview previews the pocket, the draft and the fillets and display them in
the specification tree. If you have deactivated the draft or fillet options, the draft
or the fillets are then displayed as deactivated features in the tree, i.e. with red
parentheses.
8. click Preview to check if the application can compute the fillets properly.
In the specification tree red parentheses

appear on EdgeFillet.1, meaning that it
cannot be computed by the application.
Looking more closely at this fillet you
can see that due to the shape of the
initial sketch, it is effectively impossible
to compute that fillet.
Note that there is a priority in the order of appearance of the fillets (from top to
bottom) in the specification tree. The first fillet corresponds to the Lateral radius
option in the dialog box, the second fillet to the First limit radius option and the
last fillet to the Second limit radius option.
9. Click OK to create the features.
If you look at the specification tree, you will note that you have created:
● one pocket
● one draft
● two fillets

This means that for edition purposes, you need to double-click the appropriate
feature.
This is your new part:

Thin Solids
Thin Solids
When creating pads, pockets and stiffeners, you can add thickness to both sides of their
profiles. The resulting features are then called "thin solids".
This task shows you how to add thickness to a pad. The method described here is also valid
for pockets. To know how to obtain a thin solid from a stiffener, refer to the task Stiffener.
You can create thin solids using the Shaft and Groove capabilities.
Open the GettingStarted1_R04.CATPart document and quit the Sketcher.
2. Select Sketch.1 if not already done.
3. Check the Thick option. This opens the whole Pad Definition dialog box. You can now
define your thin pad using the options available in the Thin Pad frame.
The options for creating thin solids are not available when you select a surface as the
element to be extruded.
4. Enter 18mm as Thickness1 's value, and click

Preview to see the result. A thickness has
been added to the profile as it is extruded.
The profile is previewed in dotted line.

Thin Solids
5. Enter 10mm as Thickness2 's value, and click

Preview to see the result. Material has been
added to the other side of the profile.
6. To add material equally to both sides of the

profile, check Neutral fiber and click
Preview to see the result.
The thickness you defined for Thickness 1 is

evenly distributed: a thickness of 9mm has
been added to each side of the profile.
This capability can be applied to several profiles contained in the same sketch.
"Thin Pad" options let you extrude profiles from networks
Using the "Thin Pad" options you can extrude profiles from networks.

Thin Solids
Thickness 1 and Thickness 2 are defined.
Checking the Merge Ends option trims

extrusions to existing material.
Keep in mind that the creation order of the

different elements constituting the profile
never affects the resulting extrusion.
If you decide to use the options Up to Plane or Up to Surface, the Merge ends
capability is not available.
How Extrusions are Trimmed
In the following example, the network goes beyond the edges of the part.
Initial profile is made of two intersecting lines The application trims extrusions to the
faces of the pocket

Thin Solids

Shaft
Shaft
This task illustrates how to create a shaft, that is a revolved feature, by using an open
profile.
Open the Revolution_R09.CATPart document.
1. Select Sketch.2 as the profile to be extruded. For the purposes of our scenario, the
profile and the axis belong to the same sketch.
2. Click the Shaft icon .
A message is issued warning you that the

application the sum of the two angles must be
less than 360degrees. This means that you
need to edit one or both default angle values.
3. Click OK to close the warning message and display the Shaft Definition dialog box.
The Shaft Definition dialog box is displayed.

Shaft
The application displays the name of the selected sketch in the Selection field from
the Profile frame. In our scenario, the profile and the axis belong to the same
sketch. Consequently, you do not have to select the axis.
About Profiles
● You can create shafts from sketches including several closed profiles. These
profiles must not intersect and they must be on the same side of the axis.
● Moreover, you can define whether you need the whole sketch, or sub-elements
only. For more information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch.
● If needed, you can change the sketch by clicking the field and by selecting
another sketch in the geometry or in the specification tree.
● But you can also edit your sketch by clicking the icon that opens the
Sketcher. Once you have done your modifications, the Shaft Definition dialog box
reappears to let you finish your design.
● If you launch the Shaft command with no profile previously defined, just click the
icon and select a plane to access the Sketcher, then sketch the profile you
need.
● You can use wireframe geometry as your profile and axes created with the Local
Axis capability.

Shaft
About Axes
● the Selection field in the Axis frame is reserved for the axes you explicitly
select.
● Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from
the Selection field:
❍ Create Line: see Creating Lines
❍ X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the
axis.
❍ Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the
axis.
❍ Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the
axis.

elements, the application then
displays the corresponding icon in
front of the Selection. Clicking
this icon enables you to edit the
element.
There are three ways of reversing the revolution direction: clicking the Reverse
Direction button, or using the Reverse direction contextual command available
on the arrow or just clicking the arrow. The application previews limits LIM1 that
corresponds to the first angle value, and LIM2 that corresponds to the second angle
value. The first angle value is by default 360 degrees.
4. The Reverse side option lets you choose between creating material between the
axis and the profile or between the profile and existing material. You can apply this
new option to open or closed profiles.
In our scenario, as our open profile cannot be trimmed if we use the default
direction, that is in the direction of the axis, click the Reverse Side button or
alternatively click the arrow as shown:

Shaft
The application previews the new shaft: the extrusion will be done in the direction
opposite to the the axis and it will be trimmed to existing material.
5. Enter the values of your choice in the fields First angle and Second angle.
Alternatively, select the LIM1 or LIM2 manipulator and drag them onto the value of
your choice.
6. Check the Thick Profile option and preview

the result.

Shaft
7. Click OK to confirm.
The shaft is created. The specification tree

mentions it has been created.
You can now create shafts by selecting a

surface as illustrated in this example:
Thin Solids
You can add thickness to both sides of the profile used to create the shaft.
In the example below, the shaft is created using the option "Thick". Checking this
option opens the whole Shaft Definition dialog box, which lets you then define
Thickness 1 and Thickness 2. To perform the scenario, please use Sketch.6.

Shaft
Initial profile Resulting shaft
The profile is previewed in dotted

line. Thickness has been added to
both sides of the profile.
Additional Options
● The 'Neutral Fiber' option adds material equally to both sides of the profile. The
thickness defined for Thickness 1 is evenly distributed to each side of the profile.
● The Merge Ends option attaches the profile endpoints to adjacent geometry
(axis or if possible to existing material) as illustrated below:

Shaft
Initial profile Resulting shaft
The profile has been attached to

the axis.
The 'Thin Shaft' capability does not allow you to extrude networks.

Groove
Groove
Grooves are revolved features that remove material from existing features. This task
shows you how to create a groove, that is how to revolve a profile about an axis (or
construction line).
Open the Revolution_R09.CATPart document.
1. Click the Groove icon .
2. Select Sketch.3 as the profile to be used.
The Groove Definition dialog box is displayed
About Axes
The application displays the name of the selected sketch in the Selection field from
the Profile frame.
● the Selection field in the Axis frame is reserved for the axes you explicitly
select. For the purposes of our scenario, the profile and the axis belong to the
same sketch. Consequently, you do not have to select the axis.

Groove
● Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from
the Selection field:
❍ Create Line: see Creating Lines
axis.
axis.
axis.

elements, the application
then displays the
corresponding icon in front
of the Selection. Clicking
this icon enables you to edit
the element.
The system previews a groove entirely

revolving about the axis.
About Profiles

Groove
● You can create grooves from sketches including several closed profiles. These
profiles must not intersect and they must be on the same side of the axis.
● If needed, you can change the sketch by clicking the Selection field and by
selecting another sketch in the geometry or in the specification tree.
● Moreover, you can define whether you need the whole sketch, or sub-elements
only. For more information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch.
● Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile. Once you
have done your modifications, the Groove Definition dialog box reappears to let
you finish your design.
● You can use wireframe geometry as your profile and axes created with the Local
Axis capability.
● If you launch the Groove command with no profile previously defined, just click
the icon and select a plane to access the Sketcher, then sketch the profile
you need.
3. The application previews the limits LIM1 and LIM2 of the groove to be created.
You can select these limits and drag them onto the desired value or enter angle
values in the appropriate fields. For our scenario, select LIM1 and drag it onto 100,
then enter 60 in the Second angle field.
4. Optionally click Preview to see the

result. Just a portion of material is going
to be removed now.
5. Click the Reverse Direction button to inverse the revolution direction, or use the
Reverse direction contextual command available from the arrow.
As an alternative, click the arrow to obtain the direction as shown:

Groove
6. Click OK to confirm the operation.
The application removes material around

the cylinder. The specification tree
indicates the groove has been created.
This is your groove:
6. The Reverse Side option lets you choose between creating material between the
axis and the profile, which is the default direction, or between the profile and
existing material. You can apply this option to open or closed profiles.
Double-click the groove to edit it. Now, you are going to remove the material
surrounding the profile.
7. Click the Reverse Side button or alternatively click the arrow in the geometry.
8. Enter 360 as the first angle value and 0 as the second angle value. The application
previews the new groove.
The material surrounding the profile has

been removed.

Groove
You can now create grooves by selecting

a surface as illustrated in this example:
Thin Solids
You can now add thickness to both sides of the profile to be used to create the
groove.
In the example below, the shaft is created using the Thick option. Checking this
option opens the whole Groove Definition dialog box, which lets you then define
Thickness 1 and Thickness 2. To perform the scenario, please use Sketch.8.

Groove
Initial profile Resulting groove
The profile is previewed in dotted line.

Thickness has been added to both sides of
the profile.
The Merge Ends option is used: the

application attaches the profile endpoints
to adjacent geometry (axis or if possible
to existing material).
Additional Option
● The Neutral Fiber option adds material equally to both sides of the profile. The
thickness defined for Thickness 1 is evenly distributed to each side of the profile.
● The Thin Groove capability does not allow you to extrude networks.

Hole
Hole
Creating a hole consists in removing material from a body. Various shapes of standard holes can be created. These
holes are:
Simple Tapered Counterbored
Countersunk Counterdrilled
This task illustrates how to create a countersunk hole while constraining its location.
Open the Hole1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Click the Hole icon .
2. Select the circular edge and upper face as shown.
The application can now define one distance constraint to

position the hole to be created. The hole will be concentric to
the circular edge.
Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then constrain the point defining the hole position. Once you
have quit the Sketcher, the Hole Definition dialog box reappears to let you define the hole feature. For more
about locating holes, please refer to Locating a Hole.
The Hole Definition dialog box appears and the application previews the hole to be created. The Sketcher grid is
displayed to help you create the hole.
About Limits
Whatever hole you choose, you need to specify the limit you want. There is a variety of limits:
Blind Up to Next Up to Last

Hole
Up to Plane Up to Surface
By default, the application previews a blind hole whose

diameter is 10mm and depth 10mm. Keep the Blind option.
● Contextual creation commands are available on the
BOTTOM text:
❍ Blind
❍ Up to next
❍ Up to last
❍ Up to plane
❍ Up to surface
❍ Flat bottom
❍ V bottom
● The Limit field is available if you set the Up to Plane or Up to Surface option.
● If you wish to use the Up to Plane or Up to Surface option , you can then define an offset between the limit
plane (or surface) and the bottom of the hole. For more information, refer to Up to Surface Pad.
● The Up to next limit is the first face the application detects while extruding the profile, but this face must
stops the whole extrusion, not only a portion of it, and the hole goes thru material.
Preview Result

Hole
● The application always limits the top of the hole using the
Up to Next option. In other words, the next face
encountered by the hole limits the hole. In the following
example, the hole encounters a fillet placed above the face
initially selected. The application redefines the hole's top
onto the fillet.
3. Now, define the hole you wish to create. Enter 24mm as the diameter value and 25mm as the depth value.
You can now define a tolerancing dimension for the hole
diameter just by clicking the icon to the right of the

Diameter field. This capability displays the Limit of Size
Definition dialog box that enables you to choose one method
among three for defining your tolerance:
● Checking the Numerical values option: uses the values
you enter to define the Upper Limit and optionally, the
value of the Lower Limit field if you unchecked the
Symetric Lower Limit option.
● Checking the Tabulated values option: uses normative
references.
● Checking the Single limit option: just enter a minimum or
maximum value. The Delta/nominal otions lets you enter
a value in relation to the nominal diameter value. For
example, if the nominal diameter value is 10 and if you
enter 1, then the tolerance value will be 11.
The Options frame displays options directly linked to the standard used in the application. To know or change
that normative reference, use the Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Functional Tolerancing and
Annotations, and in the Tolerancing Tab enter the new standard in the Default Standard at creation
option.
For more information, please refer to the 3D Tolerancing and Annotations User's Guide.
After you set a tolerancing dimension, the icon turns red: .
Note that this capability is not available for countersunk holes and that a Functional Dimensioning and
Tolerancing licence is required to be able to access this capability.
4. To define the shape of the end hole, you can choose between:
● flat or
● pointed.
Set the Bottom option to V-Bottom to create a pointed hole and enter 110 in the Angle field to define the
bottom shape.

Hole
About Directions
By default, the application creates the hole normal to the sketch face. But you can also define a creation
direction not normal to the face by unchecking the Normal to surface option and selecting an edge or a line.
● Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from the Reference field:
❍ Create Line: for more information, see Creating Lines
❍ X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis.
❍ Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis.
❍ Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the axis.

application then displays the line or the plane
icon in front of the Reference field. Clicking this
Thread Definition
You can also define a threaded hole by checking the Thread Definition tab and click the Specifications button
to access the parameters you need to define.
Hole Types

Hole
5. Now, click the Type tab to access the type of hole you wish to create.
If you choose to create a...

● Counterbored hole: the counterbore diameter must be greater than the hole diameter and the hole depth
must be greater than the counterbore depth.
● Countersunk hole: the countersink diameter must be greater than the hole diameter and the countersink
angle must be greater than 0 and less than 180 degrees.
● Counterdrilled hole: the counterdrill diameter must be greater than the hole diameter, the hole depth must
be greater than the counter drill depth and the counterdrill angle must be greater than 0 and less than 180
degrees.
6. You are going to create a countersunk hole. To create such a

hole you need to choose two parameters among the following
options:
● Depth & Angle
● Depth & Diameter
● Angle & Diameter
Set the Angle & Diameter parameters in the Mode field.
You will notice that the glyph assists you in defining the
desired hole.
7.
Enter 80degrees in the Angle field. The preview lets you see the new angle.
8.
Enter 35mm in the Diameter field. The preview lets you see the new diameter.
9. Click OK.
The hole is created. The specification tree indicates this

creation.
You will notice that the sketch used to create the hole also
appears under the hole's name. This sketch consists of the
point at the center of the hole.

Locating Holes
Locating a Hole
This task shows how to constrain the location of the hole to be created without using
the Sketcher workbench`s tools.
1. Multi-select both edges as shown and the upper face which is the face on which
you wish to position the hole.
The preview displays two constraints defining the distances between the hole's
center and the edges.
3. Define the parameters in the dialog box to create the desired hole (see Creating a
Hole).
The application previews the constraints you are creating.

4. To access the constraint values, double-click the constraint of interest. This
displays the Constraint Definition dialog box in which you can edit the value..
5. Click OK to create the hole.
The application positions the hole using constraints.

Locating Holes
The alternative way of accessing the constraints consists in double-clicking the

sketch in the specification tree to enter the Sketcher workbench. You can then edit
the constraints if you wish to reposition the hole.
Remember That...
● The area you click determines the location of the hole, but you can drag the hole onto
desired location during creation using the left mouse button. If the grid display option is
activated, you can use its properties.
● Selecting a circular face makes the hole concentric with this face. However, the
application creates no concentricity constraint.

Locating Holes
● Multi-selecting a circular edge and a face makes the hole concentric to the circular edge.
In this case, the application creates a concentricity constraint.
● Remember that the Sketcher workbench provides commands to constrain the point used
for locating the hole. See Setting Constraints.
● Selecting a line and a face positions the hole along the line.

Locating Holes
● Editing the line modifies the hole accordingly.
● Selecting an edge and a face allows the application to create one distance constraint.
While creating the hole, you can double-click this constraint to edit its value.

Threaded Hole
Threaded Holes
The Thread capability removes material surrounding the hole. To define a thread, you can
enter the values of your choice, but you can use standard values or personal values
available in files too.
This task shows you how to create a threaded hole using values previously defined in a file.
2. Select the face on which you wish to create the hole.
3. In the Hole Definition dialog box that displays, define the hole shape and enter the
parameters of your choice. For more information, refer to Hole.
4. Click the Thread tab.
5. Check Threaded to access the thread definition options.

Threaded Hole
In the Type field, you can choose among three different thread types:
● No Standard: uses values entered by the user
● Metric Thin Pitch: uses AFNOR standard values
● Metric Thick Pitch: uses AFNOR standard values
In addition to these three types, you can add your personal standards as described
in Reusing Values Already Defined in a File
● Metric Thin Pitch: AFNOR standard
Refer to (NF E03-053-1970). This normative reference is linked to NF E03-051-

1982)
The application uses the minimum standard values.

Threaded Hole
Nominaldiam Pitch Minordiam M
8.0 1.0 6.917

9.1 1.0 7.917
10.0 1.25 8.647
12. 1.25 10.647
14.0 1.5 12.376
16.0 1.5 14.376
18.0 1.5 16.376
20.0 1.5 18.376
22.0 1.5 20.376
24.0 2.0 21.835
27.0 2.0 24.835
30.0 2.0 27.835
33.0 2.0 30.835
36.0 3.0 32.752
39.0 3.0 35.752
● Metric Thick Pitch: AFNOR standard
Refer to (NF E03-053-1970). This normative reference is linked to NF E03-051-

1982)
The application uses the minimum standard values.
Nominaldiam Pitch Minordiam M
1 0.25 0.729
1.1 0.25 0.829
1.2 0.25 0.829
1.4 0.3 1.075
1.6 0.35 1.221
1.8 0.35 1.221
2.0 0.4 1.567
2.2 0.45 1.713

Threaded Hole
2.5 0.45 2.013

3.0 0.5 2.459
3.5 0.6 2.850
4.0 0.7 3.242
4.5 0.75 3.688
5.0 0.8 4.134
6.0 1.0 4.917
7.0 1.0 5.917
8.0 1.25 6.647
9.0 1.25 7.647
10.0 1.5 8.376
12.0 1.75 10.106
14.0 2.0 11.835
16.0 2.0 13.835
18.0 2.5 15.294
20.0 2.5 17.294
22.0 2.5 19.294
24.0 3.0 20.752
27.0 3.0 23.752
30.0 3.5 26.211
33.0 3.5 29.211
36.0 4.0 31.670
39.0 4.0 34.670
42.0 4.5 37.129
45.0 4.5 40.129
48.0 5.0 42.587
52.0 5.0 46.587
56.0 5.5 50.046
60.0 5.5 54.046
64.0 6.0 57.505
68.0 6.0 61.505
72.0 6.0 65.505
76.0 6.0 69.505

Threaded Hole
80.0 6.0 73.505

85.0 6.0 78.505
90.0 6.0 83.505
● No Standard
If you keep the No Standard option, the field available below is Thread
Diameter. You just need to enter the values you need in this field as well as in the
fields below.
The Edit formula... contextual command is available from the Thread Diameter
field, meaning that you can define formulas for managing diameters values.
● Reusing Values Already Defined in a File
There are two ways of accessing values listed in a file: either by navigating to the
file of interest or by making this data available prior to launching the Hole
command. For more, see "the file is already available".
By navigating to the file you need
6. Simply click Add to access this file.
A dialog box displays, in which you can navigate to reach the file containing your
own values. This file may be of one of the following types:
● Microsoft Excel files (general format)

● Lotus files
● tabulated files (in Unix environment)
The file types supported are the same as those used for design tables.
The values defined in your file will apply specifically to the part of your CATPart
document, not to other documents.
7. Navigate to StandardGaz.txt file and click Open to get the values it contains.
The Hole Definition dialog box reappears. Your file looks like this:

Threaded Hole
The file was created as follows:

Nominal
Pitch Minor Diameter Key
diameter
● the first row contains no numerical values
● the other rows below are reserved for numerical values, except for the last
column which contains descriptions very often represented by letters.
● the mandatory items are keys that define the names associated with the values.
Moreover, the name of the standard is the same as the name of the file without the
extension.
Please, remember these recommendations for creating your own personal files.
8. Set the Type option to 'StandardGaz'.
9. In the Thread Description field, set G7/8.

The Edit formula... contextual command is now available from the Thread
Description field, meaning that you can define formulas for managing diameters
values.
You can note that the values
associated with the 'G7/8' key (see
the contents of the StandardGaz file)
appear in the Hole Diameter field as
well as the Pitch field (distance
between each crest) are provided in
the corresponding fields.

Threaded Hole
You cannot edit these fields.
By selecting the file from the Type list: the file is already
available
This behavior is made possible only if the administrator has performed these
operations:
The administrator first needs to locate in a directory the source files used for the
standards. For example, he can select E:\user\standard as the directory containing
the StandardGaz.txt file. Then, he has to concatenate this path with the official
path in the CATReffilesPath environment variable as follows:
Set CATReffilesPath=Officialpath;E:\user\standard
The result is the following: whenever
the Hole command is launched, the
application identifies all standards
provided by the administrator. The
user does no need to navigate to the
file any longer.
Note:
Using the Remove function, you cannot remove standard files defined by the
administrator.
10.If necessary, edit the thread depth then the hole depth if you need to modify the
value you had previously set in the Extension tab. This value must not exceed the
thread diameter value.
11.Check the Left-Threaded option.

Threaded Hole
12.Click OK to confirm your operation and close the Hole Definition dialog box.
The application displays the hole in the geometry area but not the thread. Note
also that an icon specific to this feature is displayed in the specification tree.
A Few Words About Removing Files

The Remove button removes files
containing user-defined values. You
cannot remove files containing
standard values. Clicking the Remove
button displays the list of user-defined
files. You then just need to select or
multi-select (using ctrl key) the files
and Click OK to confirm the operation.
Note also that you cannot remove a standard file if it is used for a hole created in
the CATPart document.

More About Ribs
Trimming Ribs or Slots

This page illustrates two different cases of ribs obtained from open profiles, then the
use of the Merge rib's ends and Merge Ends options available in the Rib Definition
dialog box.
Open Profiles Trimmed by Existing Material

●
Initial Profile (in black) and Center Resulting Rib

Curve (in red)
The rib is obtained just by extending its
open profile onto existing material.
Open Profiles with No Trimming Material

●
If the rib cannot be trimmed by existing

material, the only way of obtaining a rib is
by using the Thick Profile option:
To create this, thickness has been added to

each side of the profile
Resulting Rib

More About Ribs
"Merge rib's ends" Option

●
The Merge rib'ends option extends and trims the center curve to existing material.
Each extremity of the rib is then trimmed to existing material. The example below
clearly shows how the blue rib is trimmed.
Without using the Merge rib's ends

Using the Merge rib's ends option
option
"Merge Ends" Option

●
The Merge Ends option is to be used for

thin ribs (or slots). It trims a set of profiles
to themselves while trimming them to
existing material too.
If you consider this initial sketch composed

of two curves :

More About Ribs
Without using the Merge Ends option, you

obtain this result:
Using the Merge Ends option, you obtain

this result:

Slot
Slot
This task shows you how to create a slot, that is how to sweep a profile along a center curve to remove
material.
To define a slot, you need a center curve, a planar profile, a reference element and optionally a pulling
direction.
To create slots you can combine the different elements as follows:
Closed profile Open profile
Open center curve

(Thick Profile Option)
Closed planar center curve
Closed 3D center curve

(Thick Profile Option)
Center Curves
Moreover, the following rules should be kept in mind:
● 3D center curves must be continuous in tangency.
● if the center curve is planar, it can be discontinuous in tangency.
● center curves must not be composed of several geometric elements
Open the Slot1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Click the Slot icon .
The Slot Definition dialog box is displayed.

Slot
2. Select the profile, i.e. Sketch.2.
The profile has been designed in a plane normal to the plane

used to define the center curve. It is closed.
About Profiles
● You can use wireframe geometry as your profile too.
● In some cases, you need to define whether you need the whole sketch, or sub-elements only. For more
information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a Sketch.
● Slots can also be created from sketches including several profiles. These profiles must be closed and
must not intersect.
● If you launch the Slot command with no profile previously defined, just click the icon to access the
Sketcher and then sketch the profile you need.
● You can use an open profile provided existing material can trim the slot. For more information, please
refer to Trimming Ribs or Slots.
3. Click the icon to open the Sketcher. This temporarily closes the dialog box.
4. Edit the profile. For example, enlarge it.
5. Quit the Sketcher. The Slot Definition dialog box reappears.

Slot
Profile Control
You can control the profile position by choosing one of the following options:
● Keep angle: keeps the angle value between the sketch plane used for the profile and the tangent of the
center curve.
● Pulling direction: sweeps the profile with respect to a specified direction. For example, you need to use
this option if your center curve is a helix. In this case, you will select the helix axis as the pulling
direction.
● Reference surface: the angle value between axis h and the reference surface is constant.
● Contextual commands creating the directions you need are now available from the Selection field:
❍ Create Line: For more information, see Creating Lines
❍ X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction.
❍ Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction.
❍ Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes the direction.
❍ Create Extrapol: extrapolates surface boundaries or curves. See Extrapolating Surfaces and
Extrapolating Curves.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front of the
Selection field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
6. To go on with our scenario, let's maintain the Keep angle option.
Now, select the center curve along which the application will sweep the profile.
The center curve is open. To create a slot you can use open profiles and closed center curves too. Center
curves can be discontinuous in tangency.
The application previews the slot.
Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher to let you edit the center curve.
The Merge slot's ends option is to be used in specific cases. It lets the application create material between
the ends of the slot and existing material. For an example, please refer to Trimming Ribs or Slots.

Slot
7. Check the Thick Profile option to add thickness to both

sides of Sketch.2. New options are then available:
8. Enter 2mm as Thickness1's value, and 5mm as Thickness2's value, then preview the result.
Material is added to each side of the profile.
Checking the Merge Ends option trims the rib to existing material. For an example, please refer to
Trimming Ribs or Slots.
9. To add material equally to both sides of the profile, check
Neutral fiber and preview the result.
The thickness you defined for Thickness1 (2mm) is now

evenly distributed: a thickness of 1mm has been added to
each side of the profile.
10.Click OK.
The slot is created. The specification tree indicates this creation.

Stiffener
Stiffener
This task shows you how to create a stiffener by specifying creation directions.
Open the Stiffener1_R09.CATPart document.
1. Select the profile to be extruded, that is Sketch.6 (located in the Part Body entity).
This open profile has been created in a plane normal to the face on which the
stiffener will lie.
About Profiles
● You can use wireframe geometry as your profile.
● In some cases, you can define whether you need the whole profile, or sub-
elements only. For more information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a
Sketch.
● Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile. Once
you have done your modifications, the Stiffener Definition dialog box reappears
to let you finish your design.
If you need to use an open profile, make sure that existing material can fully limit
the extrusion of this profile

Stiffener
2. Click the Stiffener icon .
The Stiffener Definition dialog box is displayed.
Two creation modes are available:

● From side: the extrusion is performed in the profile's plane and the thickness is
added normal to the plane.
● From top: the extrusion is performed normal to the profile's plane and the
thickness is added in the profile's plane.
The option From side is the default

option. The application previews a
stiffener which thickness is equal to
10mm.
The extrusion will be made in three

directions, two of which are opposite
directions. Arrows point in these
directions.

Stiffener
3. Uncheck the Neutral Fiber option.
The extrusion will be made in two

directions only.
To obtain the directions you need, you

can also click the arrows. Note that
you can access contextual menu items
on these arrows. These commands
are the same as those available in the
dialog box.
4. Check the Neutral Fiber option again.
This option adds material equally to both sides of the profile.

5. Enter 12 as the thickness value.
This thickness is now evenly distributed: a thickness of 6mm is added to each side
of the profile.

Stiffener
6. Click OK.
The stiffener is created. The specification tree indicates it has been created.
If you click the Selection field and select another sketch, the application
immediately creates the Stiffener.
Clicking the icon opens the Sketcher. You can then edit the profile to modify
your stiffener. Once you have done your modifications, you just need to quit the
Sketcher. The dialog box is closed and the icon is activated.
"From Top" Stiffeners

The From top option lets you create stiffeners from a network as illustrated below.
You can, if you wish, create this stiffener by working on Body.2. Prior to doing so,
ensure that Sketch.8 is the current object).
Figure 1: Sketch.8 includes several lines.
Figure 2: With the From top option on, the extrusion is performed normal to the
profile's plane and the thickness is added in the profile's plane. Note also that the
resulting stiffener is always trimmed to existing material.

Stiffener
There are two ways of defining the thickness.

● The Neutral fiber option adds the same thickness to both sides of the profile.
You just need to specify the value of your choice in "Thickness 1" field and this
thickness is evenly added to each side of the profile.
● Conversely, if you wish to add different thicknesses on both sides of the profile,
just uncheck the Neutral fiber option and then specify the value of your choice
in Thickness 2 field.
The creation of "from top" stiffeners is never done with respect to the creation
order of the profile.

Stiffener
Whatever the creation order of Line.1,

Line.2 and Line.3....
....the stiffener looks like this:

This task shows how to create a multi-sections solid.
You can generate it by sweeping one or more planar section curves along a computed
or user-defined spine. The feature can be made to respect one or more guide curves.
The resulting feature is a closed volume.
Open the Multi-sections.CATPart document.
1. Click the Multi-sections Solid icon .
The Multi-sections Solid Definition dialog box appears.
2. Select the three section curves as shown:
They are highlighted in the geometry area.

The Multi-sections Solid capability assumes that the section curves to be used
do not intersect.
In P1 mode, you can select two sections only.
3. Click Preview to preview the feature to be created.
You can note that by default, tangency discontinuity points are coupled:

Several coupling types are available in the Coupling tab:

● Ratio: the curves are coupled according to the curvilinear abscissa ratio.
● Tangency: the curves are coupled according to their tangency discontinuity
points. If they do not have the same number of points, they cannot be coupled
using this option.
● Tangency then curvature: the curves are coupled according to their
curvature discontinuity points. If they do not have the same number of points,
they cannot be coupled using this option.
● Vertices: the curves are coupled according to their vertices. If they do not
have the same number of vertices, they cannot be coupled using this option.
4. For the purpose of our scenario, you are going to use guide curves. Click the
Guide field and select the four joins. The curves to be used must be joined.
They are highlighted in the geometry area.
It is possible to edit the multi-sections solid reference elements by first selecting a

curve in the dialog box list then choosing a button to either:
● Remove the selected curve

● Replace the selected curve by another curve.
● Add another curve.
By default, the application computes a spine, but if you wish to impose a curve as
the spine to be used, you just need to click the Spine tab then the Spine field
and select the spine of your choice in the geometry.
The Relimitation tab lets you specify the feature relimitation type. You can
choose to limit the multi-sections solid only on the Start section, only on the End
section, on both, or on none.
● when one or both are checked: the multi-sections solid is limited to
corresponding section
● when one or both are when unchecked: the multi-sections solid is swept along
the spine:
● if the spine is a user spine, the multi-sections solid is limited by

the spine extremities
● if the spine is an automatically computed spine, and no guide is
selected: the feature is limited by the start and end sections
● if the spine is an automatically computed spine, and guides are
selected, the feature is limited by the guides extremities.

5. Click OK to create the volume.
The feature (identified as Multi-

sections Solid.xxx) is added to the
specification tree.

Solid Combine
Solid Combine
This task shows you how to create a solid combine, that is a solid resulting from the
intersection of two or more extruded profiles.
Open the Solid_Combine.CATPart document.
1. Click the Solid Combine icon .
The Combine Definition dialog box appears.
2. Select Sketch.1 as the first component to be extruded.
Sketches must contain closed profiles.
Note that if you launch the Solid Combine command with no profile previously
defined, just access the Sketcher by clicking the icon available in the dialog box
and sketch the profile you need.
Components
The components you can select are:

● Sketches
● Surfaces
● Sketches sub-elements (for more information, refer to Using the Sub-elements of a
Sketch)
● 3D planar curves

Solid Combine
3. Select Sketch.2 as the second component to be extruded. This sketch contains only
one profile, namely a rectangle.
The Solid Combine capability is going to compute the intersection between the
profiles virtually extruded. By default, each component is extruded in a plane
normal to its sketch plane. The application previews the result as soon as the
second component has been selected.
Extrusion Directions
There are two types of directions you can specify to compute the intersection. For the
first and the second components, you can choose:
● The Normal to profile option: this is the default option
● Another direction indicated by a geometrical element you select.
Note that
4. For the purposes of our scenario, uncheck the Normal to profile option for the
first component and select the line created in Sketch.3 to indicate the extrusion
direction.

Solid Combine
5. Click OK to confirm and create the solid combine feature.
The new element (identified as Combine.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Dress-Up Features
Dress-Up Features
Dressing up features is done by applying commands to one or more supports. The
application provides a large number of possibilities to achieve the features meeting your
needs. The application lets you create the following dress-up features:
Create an Edge Fillet: Click this icon, select the edge to be filleted, enter the
radius value and set the propagation mode in the dialog box.
Create a Variable Radius Fillet: Click this icon, select the edge to be filleted,
enter new radius values for both of the detected vertices, click as many points
as you wish on the edge and enter appropriate radius values for each of them. If
needed, define a new variation mode.
Create a Variable Radius Fillet Using a Spine: Click this icon, select the edges to
be filleted, enter an angle value for both vertices at the corner, check the Circle
Fillet option and select the spine.
Reshaping Corners: click the More button in the Edge Fillet or in the Variable
Radius Fillet dialog box, click the Blend corner(s) button to detect the corner
to reshape.
Create a Face-Face Fillet: Click this icon, select the faces to be filleted and enter
the radius value in the dialog box.
Create a Tritangent Fillet: Click this icon, select the faces to be filleted then the
face to be removed.
Create a Chamfer: Click this icon, select the edge to be chamfered, set the
creation mode then define the parameters you have set.
Create a Basic Draft : Click this icon, set the Selection by neutral face
selection mode or select the face to be drafted, then enter the required
parameters.
Advanced Draft: Click this icon, specify the type of operation you wish to
perform, then define the parameters you have set.
Create a Draft with a Parting Element: Click this icon, set the Selection by
neutral face selection mode or select the face to be drafted, expand the dialog
box then enter the required parameters.
Create a Draft from Reflect Lines: Click this icon, select the face to be drafted,
then enter the required parameters.

Dress-Up Features
Create a Variable Angle Draft: Click this icon, select the face to be drafted, click
as many points as you wish and then enter the required parameters.
Create a Shell : Click this icon, select the faces to be shelled and enter the
thickness values.
Create a Thickness: Click this icon, select the faces to be shelled and enter the
thickness value.
Create a Thread/Tap: Click this icon, select the cylindrical surface you wish to
thread, the planar limit face and enter the required values.
Remove a Face: Click this icon, select the face to be removed and the faces to
keep.
Replace a Face: Click this icon, select the replacing face and the face to be
removed.

Create a Split: Click this icon, select the body to be split then the splitting
element.
Create a Thick Surface: Click this icon, select the object to be thickened, define
the offset directions and enter offset values.
Create a Close Surface: Click this icon, select the body and select the object to
be closed.
Create a Sew Surface: Click this icon, select the body and the surface to be sewn.
Split
Split
You can split a body with a plane, face or surface. The purpose of this task is to show
how to split a body by means of a surface.
Open the Split1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Select the blue pad as the body to be split.
2. Click the Split icon .
3. Select the splitting surface.
The Split Definition dialog box is displayed, indicating the splitting element.
● Contextual commands creating the limiting elements you need are now available
from the Splitting Element field:
❍ Create Plane: for more information, see Creating Planes
❍ Create Extract: See Extracting Geometry.

Split
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the
corresponding icon in front of the Splitting Element field. Clicking this icon
enables you to edit the element.
An arrow appears indicating the portion of body that will be kept. If the arrow
points in the wrong direction, you can click it to reverse the direction.
4. Click OK.
The body is split. Material has been removed.
The specification tree indicates you performed the operation.
Avoid using input elements that are tangent to each other since this may result in
geometric instabilities in the tangency zone.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Thick Surface
Thick Surface
You can add material to a surface in two opposite directions by using the Thick
Surface capability. This task shows you how to do so.
Open the ThickSurface_R09.CATPart document.
1. Select the object you wish to thicken,

that is the extrude element.
● Two contextual commands creating the object you need are now available from
the Object to offset field:
❍ Create Join: joins surfaces or curves. For more information, see Joining
Surfaces or Curves.
corresponding icon in front of the Object to offset field. Clicking this icon
2. Click the Thick Surface icon .
The Thick Surface Definition dialog box is

displayed.

Thick Surface
In the geometry area, the arrow that

appears on the extrude element
indicates the first offset direction. If you
need to reverse the arrow, just click it.
3. Enter 10mm as the first offset value and

6mm as the second offset value .
4. Click OK.
The surface is thickened. The

specification tree indicates you performed
the operation.
Note that the resulting feature does not

keep the color of the original surface.
Extracting Geometry

Thick Surface
Sometimes, you will need to use the Extract command to be able to add thickness to
a face. The Extract capability lets you generate separate elements from initial
geometry, without deleting geometry. This command is available after clicking a
dialog box prompting you to deactivate the thickness feature and extract the
geometry. Once the operation has been done, a node "Extracted Geometry
(ThickSurface.1)" is displayed in the tree. This category includes the elements created
by the application.
The Extract capability is available if only one face was selected to perform the
thickness operation.
Note also that if you have Generative Shape Design installed, the geometry
resulting from the Extract operation is associative.

Close Surface
Close Surface
This task shows you to close surfaces.
Open the CloseSurface1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Select the surface to be closed, i.e. Trim.3.
2. Click the Close Surface icon .
The Close Surface Definition dialog box is displayed.
● Two contextual commands creating the object you need are now available from the Object to
close field:
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding icon in front
of the Object to close field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the element.
3. Click OK.
The surface is closed. The specification tree indicates you

performed the operation.
Sew Surface
Sew Surface
Sewing is a boolean operation combining a surface with a body. This capability adds
or removes material by modifying the surface of the solid.
You can sew all types of surfaces onto bodies. Depending on your geometry, two
kinds of sewing operations can be performed:
● If the surface has been designed so that its boundary entirely lays on the solid, you
can sew it using the surface boundary projection onto the solid. In this case you
can the option "Topology simplification" or not (unchecked option).
Sewing features (in boundary projection mode) is more productive (CPU cost) and
more stable (geometric tangency condition) than creating a solid using the Close
Surface command (when possible) because no surface/surface intersections are
computed.
● If the surface crosses the solid, you can make the application compute the
intersection of the surface with the solid prior to sewing the surface. In this case,
you need to use the "Intersection" option.
This task shows you both methods.
Open the SewSurface_R10.CATPart document.
The surface boundary is laid on the solid.

1. Select "Join.1" as the surface you wish to sew onto the body.

Sew Surface
2.
Click the Sew Surface icon .
The Sew Surface Definition dialog

box is displayed:
● With topology simplification
Keep the "Topology simplification" option active. Using this option, if in the
resulting solid there are connected faces defined on the same geometric support
(faces separated by smooth edges), these faces will be merged into one single
face.
3. Arrows appear indicating the side where material will be added or kept. Note that
clicking an arrow reverses the given direction.
The arrows must point towards the solid.

4. Click OK.
The surface is sewn onto the body. You may notice that the bottom of the solid is
made of one single face.
The specification tree indicates you performed the operation.
5. To see the simplification, just hide "Join.1".

Sew Surface
● Without topology simplification

6. Double-click "SewSurface.1" in the specification tree to edit it and deactivate the
"Topology simplification" option.
7. Click OK.
The bottom of the solid is made of three connected faces. The smooth edges
resulting from the sewing appear because no topological simplification has been
performed.
Using the "Intersection" option

You will use this option when the surface straightly crosses the solid without being
tangent. The application then needs to compute the intersection between the surface
and the solid, the portions of surface with "free edges" being eventually removed.
1. In the following example, the application can compute the intersection:
Checking "Intersection" in the Sew Surface Definition dialog box automatically

activates the "Topology simplification" option.

Sew Surface
2. The arrow indicates the portion of material that will be kept:
3. The surface is sewn onto the body. Some material has been removed.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Create a Translation: Click this icon, select the body to be translated, define the
translation direction and enter the distance value.
Create a Rotation: Click this icon, select the body to be rotated, define the rotation
axis and enter the angle value.
Create a Symmetry: Click this icon, select the body to be duplicated and define the
symmetry reference.
Create a Mirror: Click this icon, select the body to be mirrored and define the
reference.
Create a Rectangular Pattern: Click this icon, select the feature to be duplicated,
define the creation directions, choose the parameters you wish to define and set
these parameters.
Create a Circular Pattern: Click this icon, select the feature to be duplicated, define
the axial reference, the creation direction, choose the parameters you wish to define
and set these parameters.
Create a User Pattern: Click this icon, select the feature to be duplicated, set
whether you keep the original specifications or not and define the positions.
Exploding Patterns: Right-click the pattern you want to explode and select the
RectPattern.1object -> Explode... contextual command.
Create a Scaling: Click this icon, select the body to be scaled, define the reference
and enter a factor value.
Translation
Translation
The Translate command applies to current bodies.
This task shows you how to translate a body.

To perform this task, open the CATPart of your choice.
1.
Click the Translate icon .
The Translate Definition dialog box appears
2. Select a line to take its orientation as the translation direction or a plane to take its
normal as the translation direction. For example, select zx plane.
You can also specify the direction by means of X, Y, Z vector components by using
the contextual menu on the Direction area.
3. Specify the translation distance by entering a value or using the Drag manipulator.
For example, enter 100mm.
4. Click OK to create the translated element.
The element (identified as Translat.xxx) is added to

the specification tree

Translation
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Rotation
Rotation
This task shows you how to rotate geometry about an axis. The command applies to
current bodies.
Open the Rotate1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Click the Rotate icon .
The Rotate Definition dialog box appears.
2. Select an edge as the rotation axis.
3. Enter a value for the rotation angle.
The element is rotated. You can drag it by using the graphic manipulator to adjust
the rotation.

Rotation
4. Click OK to create the rotated element.
The element (identified as Rotate.xxx) is added to the specification tree.

Symmetry
Symmetry
This task shows how to transform geometry by means of a symmetry operation. The
Symmetry command applies to current bodies.
Open the Symmetry1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Click the Symmetry icon .
The Symmetry Definition dialog box appears.
2. Select a point, line or plane as reference element. For the purpose of our scenario,
select plane zx.
3. Click OK to create the symmetrical element.
The original element is no longer visible but remains in the specification tree.
The new element (identified as Symmetry.xxx) is added to the specification tree.

Symmetry

Mirror
Mirror
Mirroring a body or a list of features consists in duplicating these elements using a
symmetry. You can select a face or a plane to define the mirror reference.
This task shows how to mirror a list of features.
Open the EdgeFillet3_R04.CATPart document.
1. Multi-select both pads as the features to

be mirrored.
2. Click the Mirror icon .
The Mirror Definition dialog box appears.
3. Select the lateral face to define the mirror reference.
The application previews the material to be created.

4. Click OK to confirm the operation.
The pads are mirrored.
The specification tree mentions this

creation.
A Few Notes about Mirror

Mirror
● Using a plane to mirror a body lets you

obtain two independent portions of
material in a same body. The following
mirror is obtained by using plane zx as
the reference.
● When editing a mirror feature, contextual commands creating the mirror

references you need are now available from the Mirroring element field:
❍ Create Plane: for more information, see Creating Planes
corresponding icon in front of the Mirroring element field. Clicking this icon

Rectangular Pattern
Rectangular Pattern
You may need to duplicate the whole geometry of one or more features and to position this
geometry on a part. Patterns let you do so.
The application allows you to define three types of patterns: rectangular, circular and
user patterns. These features accelerate the creation process.
This task shows you how to duplicate the geometry of one pocket right away at the
location of your choice using a rectangular pattern. Then, you will learn how to modify
the location of the initial feature.
Open the RectangularPattern1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Select the feature you wish to copy, that is the pocket as shown:
2.
Click the Rectangular Pattern icon .
The Rectangular Pattern Definition dialog box that appears displays the name of
the geometry to pattern.
● If you click the Rectangular Pattern icon prior to selecting any

geometry, by default, the object to be patterned is the current solid. For more
information, refer to Patterning Current Solids.

Rectangular Pattern
● If you change your mind and decide to pattern the current solid, click the
Object field and use the Get current solid contextual command.
Each tab is dedicated to a direction you will use to define the location of the
duplicated feature. In this task, you will first set your specifications for the first
direction.
Checking the Keep specifications option creates instances with the limit Up to
Next ( Up to Last, Up to Plane or Up to Surface) defined for the original feature.
In the example below, the limit defined for the pad, i.e. the "Up to surface"
limit, applies to all instances. As the limiting surface is not planar, the instances
have different lengths.

Rectangular Pattern
But for the purposes of our scenario, as the pocket's height is specified, activating
the Keep specifications option is meaningless.
Reference Direction
3. Click the Reference element

field and select the edge as
shown below to specify the first
direction of creation.
An arrow is displayed on the

pad. If needed, check the
Reverse button or click the
arrow to modify the direction.
● To define a direction, you can select an edge or a planar face.

● Contextual commands creating the reference elements you need are now
available from the Reference element field:
❍ Create Line: For more information, see Creating Lines.
❍ X Axis: the X axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes
the direction.
❍ Y Axis: the Y axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes
the direction.
❍ Z Axis: the Z axis of the current coordinate system origin (0,0,0) becomes
the direction.
❍ Create Plane: see Creating Planes.
corresponding icon in front of the Reference element field. Clicking this icon

Rectangular Pattern
4. Let the Instances & Spacing options to define the parameters you wish to
specify.
The parameters you can choose are:
● Instances & Length

● Instances & Spacing
● Spacing & Length
Choosing Instances & Spacing dims the Length field because the application
no longer needs this specification to space the instances.
If you set Instances & Length or Spacing & Length parameters, note that you
cannot define the length by using formulas.
5. Enter 3 as the number of instances you wish to obtain in the first direction.
Deleting the instances of your choice is possible when creating the pattern. In the
pattern preview, just select the points materializing instances. Conversely,
selecting these points again will make the application create the corresponding
instances.
6. Define the spacing along the

grid: enter 14 mm.
Defining the spacing along the grid and length of your choice would make the
application compute the number of possible instances and space them at equal
distances.
7. Now, click the Second Direction tab to define other parameters.
Note that defining a second direction is not compulsory. Creating a rectangular

defining only one direction is possible.

Rectangular Pattern
8. Click the Reference element field and select the edge to the left to define the
second direction.
9. Check the Reverse option to make the arrow point in the opposite direction.
10. Let the Instances & Spacing option: enter 3 and 10 mm in the appropriate
fields.
11. click Preview to make sure the pattern meets your needs.
Additional pockets will be aligned along this second direction.

Rectangular Pattern
12. Click OK to repeat the pocket's geometry nine times.
This is the resulting pattern. The feature "RectPattern.1" is displayed in the

specification tree.
13. Let's now edit the pattern to make it more complex: double-click the pattern to
display the dialog box.
14. Click the More button to display the whole dialog box.
The options available makes it possible to position the pattern.

Rectangular Pattern
15. To modify the position of the pockets, enter -5 degrees as the rotation angle
value.
16. click Preview.
You will notice that all pockets have moved slightly:

Rectangular Pattern
17. Now, modify the location of the initial pocket. To do so, enter 2 in the Row in
Direction 1 field.
The application previews how the pattern will be moved. It will be moved along
the direction as indicated:
18. Finally, enter 2 in the Row in Direction 2 field.
The application previews how the pattern will be moved. It will be moved along
these two directions defined in steps 17 and 18:
● The Simplified representation option lightens the pattern's geometry. What

you need to do is just check the option and double-click the instances you do
not want to see. The instances are then represented in dashed lines during the
pattern definition and then are no longer visible after validating the pattern
creation. The specifications remain unchanged, whatever the number of
instances you view. This option is particularly used for patterns including a
large number of instances.

Rectangular Pattern
Remember that clicking an instance once removes the instance from the
specifications. Clicking once or double-clicking an instance does not lead to the
same result then.
19. Click OK.
The application has changed the location of all pockets. Only four of them remain
on the pad.
It is possible to create Cartesian patterns with variable steps. To do so, define

formulas. More explicitly, act on parameters i and j. For more information, refer
to CATIA- Knowledge Advisor User's Guide Version 5.
● During your design, you may need to rework instances specifically. You will
then have to use the Explode contextual command to delete your pattern
while keeping geometry. For more information, refer to Exploding Patterns.
Complex Patterns
You can pattern a list of Part Design features by proceeding as follows:
1. Multi-select the features to be duplicated.
These features must belong to the same body.

2. Click the Rectangular Pattern icon .
The features are indicated in the Object

field.

Rectangular Pattern
3. Set the parameters you need as shown in the task above.
These rules are to be kept in mind before patterning a list of features.

● When multi-selecting, the first feature you select must not be a dress-up feature.
● Your list of features cannot include any transformation features, nor shells, nor
splits, nor associated bodies.
● Your list of features cannot include any body.
Editing a List of Features
Editing a list of features consists in adding or removing features from the list. To do
so, you just have to click the Object field and select the feature of interest to add it
or remove it from the list.
Note however that adding a feature to a pattern is possible only if your pattern is
already based on a feature list. In other words, you cannot add any feature to a
basic pattern created using a single feature.
Patterning Current Solids

Rectangular Pattern
A current solid is composed of one or more features belonging to the same body. It
is the result of the operations as mentioned in the specification tree, the last
operation being the current one. For more about current features, see Scanning a
part and defining local objects.
To pattern a current solid, just click the Rectangular Pattern icon . There is no
need to select any geometry. By default, the object to pattern is the current solid.
You then just have to enter your specifications in the dialog box.
Note that if you change your mind and decide to pattern a feature, you just have to
click the object field and select the feature of your choice.
In the following example, the current solid is the result of one pad and one hole.
The instances created via the Pattern command are composed of pads and holes
only.
You cannot transform a patterned list of features into a patterned current solid and
vice-versa.

Circular Pattern
Circular Pattern
This task will show you how to duplicate geometry of one or more features right away at the
location of your choice using a circular pattern.
Make sure the item you wish to duplicate is correctly located in relation to the circular rotation
axis.
Open the CircularPattern1_R04.CATPart document.

1. Select the pad which geometry you
wish to copy.
2. Click the Circular Pattern icon
The Circular Pattern Definition

dialog box is displayed and the
feature's name appears in the
Object field.
● If you change your mind and decide to pattern the current solid, click the object field and
use the Get current solid contextual menu item. For more information, refer to Patterning
Current Solids.
Keeping Specifications
Checking the Keep specifications option creates instances with the limit Up to Next
(Up to Last, Up to Plane or Up to Surface) defined for the original feature. The
example below shows you that the limit defined for the pad, that is the Up to surface
limit, applies to all instances. As the limiting surface is not planar, the instances have
different lengths.

Circular Pattern
But for the purposes of our scenario, as the pad is going to be repeated on a planar
surface, activating the Keep specifications option is meaningless.
The Parameters field lets you choose the type of parameters you wish to specify so that
the application will be able to compute the location of the items copied.
These parameters are:

● Instances & total angle
● Instances & angular spacing
● Angular spacing & total angle
● Complete crown
If you set Instances & total angle or Angular spacing & total angle parameters,
note that you cannot define the total angle when using formulas.
3. Set the Instances & Angular spacing options to define the parameters you wish to
specify.
Choosing Instances & Angular spacing dims the Total angle field because the
application no longer needs this specification to space the instances.
4. Enter 7 as the number of pads you wish to obtain.
5. Enter 50 degrees as the angular spacing.
Reference Direction
6. Click the Reference element field and select the upper face to determine the rotation
axis. This axis will be normal to the face.
To define a direction, you can select an edge, a line, a planar face or a plane. After selecting an edge,
a line or a planar face, if necessary, you can also select a point to define the rotation center. If you
select a plane, selecting a point is mandatory.
Clicking the Reverse button reverses the direction.

Circular Pattern
Two arrows are then displayed on

the pad.
● Contextual commands creating the reference elements you need are now available
from the Reference element field:
❍ Create Line: For more information, see Creating Lines.
direction.
direction.
direction.
❍ Create Plane: see Creating Planes.
If you create any of these elements, the application then displays the corresponding
icon in front of the Reference element field. Clicking this icon enables you to edit the
element.

Circular Pattern
If you modify the angular spacing, the application previews the result: arrows 1 and 2 are
moved accordingly.
8. click Preview: the pad will be repeated seven times. The instances are green, just like
the original feature.
9. Now, you are going to add a crown to your part. To do so, click the Crown Definition
tab.
10. Set the Circle & Circle spacing options to define the parameters you wish to specify.
11. Enter 2 in the Circle(s) field.
12. Enter -18 mm in the Circle spacing field.
This figure may help you to define your parameters:

Circular Pattern
13. Click OK.
These are your new instances:
14. Now, you are going to modify the position of the initial pad. Such a modification will
affect all instances too. To do so, click the More button to display the whole dialog box.
15. Enter 20 in the Rotation angle field.
The application previews the rotation.

Circular Pattern
Applying the Delete command on one instance deletes the whole pattern. However,
deleting the instances of your choice is possible when creating or editing the pattern. To
do so, just select the points materializing instances in the pattern preview. Selecting
these points again will enable the application maintain the corresponding instances.
The "Simplified representation" option lets you lighten the pattern geometry. What
you need to do is just check the option and double-click the instances you do not want to
see. The instances are then represented in dashed lines during the pattern definition and
then are no longer visible after validating the pattern creation. The specifications remain
unchanged, whatever the number of instances you view. This option is particularly used
for patterns including a large number of instances.
Remember then that clicking once or double-clicking an instance does not lead to the
same result.
16. Click OK.
All instances are moved

accordingly.
The scenario above does not show the use of the "Radial alignment of instances" option.
In addition to performing the steps described, you could have used this option that allows you
to define the instance orientations.
The option is checked: all The option is unchecked: all instances are normal to
instances have the same the lines tangent to the circle.
orientation as the original feature.

Circular Pattern
The application offers the capability of creating polar patterns (for example, spiral patterns).
To do so, define formulas using parameters i and j. For more information about formulas, refer
to the CATIA- Knowledge Advisor User's Guide Version 5.
During your design, you may need to rework instances specifically. You will then have to use
the Explode contextual menu item to delete your pattern while keeping geometry. For more
information, refer to Exploding Patterns.
Complex Patterns
You can pattern a list of Part Design features by proceeding as follows:
1. Multi-select the features to be duplicated.
These features must belong to the same body.

2. Click the Circular Pattern icon
.
The features are indicated in

the Object field.
3. Set the parameters you need as shown in the task above.
These rules are to be kept in mind before patterning a list of features.

● When multi-selecting, the first feature you select must not be a dress-up feature.
● Your list of features cannot include any transformation feature, nor shell, nor split, nor
associated bodies.
● Your list of features cannot include any body.

Circular Pattern
Editing a list of features consists in adding or removing features from the list. To do so, you
just have to click the Object field and select the feature of interest to add it or remove it from
the list.
Note however that adding a feature to a pattern is possible only if your pattern is already
based on a feature list. In other words, you cannot add any feature to a basic pattern created
using a single feature.

User Pattern
User Pattern
The User Pattern command lets you duplicate a feature, a list of features or a body
resulting from an association of bodies. as many times as you wish at the locations of
your choice.
Locating instances consists in specifying anchor points. These points are created in the
Sketcher.
This task shows you how to duplicate a feature list including a pocket and a fillet at the
points defined in a same sketch plane.
Open the UserPattern1_R06.CATPart document.
1. Select the filleted pocket you wish to duplicate.
Note that whenever you are using a feature list, you need to multi-select the
features in the order they were created.
2. Click the User Pattern icon .
The User Pattern dialog box is displayed. The pocket and the fillet appear in the
Object field.
● If you click the User Pattern icon prior to selecting any geometry, by default,
the object to be patterned is the current solid. For more information, refer to
Patterning Current Solids.

User Pattern
● If you change your mind and decide to pattern the current solid, click the Object
field and use the Get current solid contextual menu item.
Checking the Keep specifications option creates instances with the limit Up to
Next ( Up to Last, Up to Plane or Up to Surface) defined for the original feature. In
our scenario, the hole was created using the Up to Next option, but as the support
for holes is a pad of an even thickness (20 mm), this makes the use of the option
meaningless.
The "Keep specifications" option is not available for feature lists.
3. Select 'Sketch 4' in the specification tree and

click Preview. The sketch includes the nine
points you need to locate the duplicated holes.

User Pattern
As you just need eight points, click both points

4.
you do not need to unselect them.
Anchor
By default, the application positions each instance with respect to the center of
gravity or the element to be duplicated. To change this position, use the anchor
field: click the Anchor field and select a vertex or a point.
● Contextual commands creating the anchors you need are now available from the
Anchor field:
❍ Create Point: for more information, see Creating Points
❍ Create Midpoint: creates the midpoint of the line you select
❍ Create Endpoint: creates the endpoint of the line you select
❍ Create Intersection: see Creating Intersections
❍ Create Projection: see Creating Projections
corresponding icon in front of the Anchor field. Clicking this icon enables you to
edit the element.
5. Click OK.
The pockets and fillets are created at the points of the sketch. The specification tree

User Pattern
Editing a list of features consists in adding or removing features from the list. To do
so, you just have to click the Object field and select the feature of interest to add it
or remove it from the list.
Note however that adding a feature to a pattern is possible only if your pattern is
already based on a feature list. In other words, you cannot add any feature to a
basic pattern created using a single feature.
Exploding Patterns
During your design, you may need to rework instances specifically. You will then
have to use the Explode contextual menu item to delete your pattern while
keeping geometry. For more information, refer to Exploding Patterns.

Exploding Patterns
Exploding Patterns
During your design you may decide to perform specific operations on a certain
number of instances created via the Pattern command. Before performing such
operations, you need to explode your pattern, which makes each instance
independent.
This task shows you how to delete a pattern while keeping geometry.
The Explode command can be applied to patterns created with features and feature
lists, not with bodies. This capability is available in P2 mode only.
Open the RectangularPattern1_R04.CATPart document and perform a basic pattern.

1. Right-click the pattern you want to explode.
2. Use the RectPattern.1object -> Explode... contextual command.
You obtain as many features in the specification tree as there were instances.
The geometry remains unchanged.

Exploding Patterns
Note that:
● if the original element you patterned contains a dress-up feature, for instance
a fillet, exploding the pattern does not delete the fillet defined on each
instance.
● However, if a dress-up feature has been defined on a pattern instance,
exploding the pattern will delete this dress-up feature.
3. You can now edit pockets individually. For example, you can move them to the
location of your choice.

Exploding Patterns

Scaling
Scaling
Scaling geometry means resizing it to the dimension you specify, using points, planes
or planar sufaces as scaling references.
This task shows how to scale a body in relation to a point.
Open the Scaling1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Select the body to be scaled.
2. Click the Scaling icon .
The Scaling Definition dialog box appears.
3. Select the reference point located on the body.
A graphic manipulator is displayed on the body.
4. Enter a value in the Ratio field or select the manipulator and drag it. The ratio
increases as you drag the manipulator in the direction pointed by the right end
arrow.

Scaling
5. Click OK.
The body is scaled. The specification tree indicates you performed this operation.
You can also resize a body in relation to a face or plane. In the example below, the
plane zx is the reference element and the ratio is 1.6. You obtain then an affinity.

Scaling
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Reference Elements
Reference Elements
You can display the Reference Elements toolbar using the View -> Tool bars ->
Reference Elements (extended/compact) command.
Create Points: Click this icon, choose the creation method then define the required
parameters.
Create Lines: Click this icon, choose the creation method then define the required
parameters.
Create Planes: Click this icon, choose the creation method then define the required
parameters.
Creating Points
Creating Points
This task shows the various methods for creating points:
● by coordinates
● on a curve
● on a plane
● on a surface
● at a circle center
● tangent point on a curve
● between
Open the Points3D-1.CATPart document.
1. Click the Point icon .
The Point Definition dialog box appears.
2. Use the combo to choose the desired point type.
Coordinates
● Enter the X, Y, Z coordinates in
the current axis-system.
● Optionally, select a reference
point.
The corresponding
point is displayed.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugpoint3D.htm (1 of 8)10/18/2004 7:54:56 PM

Creating Points
When creating a point within a user-defined axis-system, note that the Coordinates
in absolute axis-system check button is added to the dialog box, allowing you to be
define, or simply find out, the point's coordinates within the document's default axis-
system.
If you create a point using the coordinates method and an axis system is already
defined and set as current, the point's coordinates are defined according to current the
axis system. As a consequence, the point's coordinates are not displayed in the
specification tree.
The axis system must be different
from the absolute axis.
On curve
● Select a curve
point.
If this point is not on

the curve, it is
projected onto the
curve.
If no point is selected,
the curve's extremity
is used as reference.
● Select an option point to

determine whether the new
point is to be created:
❍ at a given distance along the
curve from the reference point
❍ a given ratio between the
reference point and the
curve's extremity.

Creating Points
● Enter the distance or ratio value.

If a distance is specified, it can
be:
❍ a geodesic distance: the
distance is measured along
the curve
❍ an Euclidean distance: the
distance is measured in
relation to the reference point
(absolute value).
The corresponding point is

displayed.
You can also:
● click the Nearest extremity button to display the point at the nearest extremity of
the curve.
● click the Middle Point button to display the mid-point of the curve.
● use the Reverse Direction button to display:
❍ the point on the other side of the reference point (if a point was selected
originally)
❍ the point from the other extremity (if no point was selected originally).
● click the Repeat object after OK if you wish to create equidistant points on the
curve, using the currently created point as the reference, as described in Creating
Multiple Points in the Wireframe and Surface User's Guide .
You will also be able to
create planes normal
to the curve at these
points, by checking
the Create normal
planes also button,
and to create all
instances in a new
Open Body by
checking the Create
in a new open body
button.
If the button is not
checked the instances
are created in the
current Open Body.

Creating Points
● If the curve is infinite and no reference point is explicitly given, by default, the
reference point is the projection of the model's origin
● If the curve is a closed curve, either the system detects a vertex on the curve that
can be used as a reference point, or it creates an extremum point, and highlights it
(you can then select another one if you wish) or the system prompts you to
manually select a reference point.
Extremum points created on a
closed curve are now aggregated
under their parent command and
put in no show in the specification
tree.
On plane
● Select a plane.
● Optionally, select a point to
define a reference for computing
coordinates in the plane.
If no point is selected,
the projection of the
model's origin on the
plane is taken as
reference.
● Optionally, select a surface on

which the point is projected
normally to the plane.
If no surface is
selected, the behavior
is the same.

Creating Points
Furthermore, the
reference direction (H
and V vectors) is
computed as follows:
With N the normal to
the selected plane
(reference plane), H
results from the
vectorial product of Z
and N (H = Z^N).
If the norm of H is
strictly positive then V
results from the
vectorial product of N
and H (V = N^H).
Otherwise, V = N^X
and H = V^N.
Would the plane move,

during an update for
example, the reference
direction would then
be projected on the
plane.
● Click in the plane to display a point.
On surface
● Select the surface where the
point is to be created.

Creating Points

point. By default, the surface's
middle point is taken as
reference.
● You can select an element to
take its orientation as reference
direction or a plane to take its
normal as reference direction.
You can also use the contextual
menu to specify the X, Y, Z
components of the reference
direction.
● Enter a distance along the
reference direction to display a
point.
Circle center
● Select a circle, circular arc, or
ellipse.
A point is displayed at
the center of the
selected element.
Tangent on curve
● Select a planar curve and a
direction line.
A point is displayed at
each tangent.

Creating Points
The Multi-Result
Management dialog
box is displayed
because several points
are generated.
● Click YES: you can then select a

reference element, to which only
the closest point is created.
● Click NO: all the points are
created.
Between
● Select any two points.
● Enter the ratio, that is the

percentage of the distance from
the first selected point, at which
the new point is to be.
You can also click Middle Point
button to create a point at the
exact midpoint (ratio = 0.5).
● Use the Reverse direction

button to measure the ratio from
the second selected point.
If the ratio value is greater than 1, the point is located on the virtual line beyond the
selected points.
3. Click OK to create the point.
The point (identified as Point.xxx) is added to the specification tree.

Creating Points

Creating Lines
Creating Lines
This task shows the various methods for creating lines:
● point to point
● point and direction
● angle or normal to curve
● tangent to curve
● normal to surface
● bisecting
Open the Lines1.CATPart document.
1. Click the Line icon .
The Line Definition dialog box appears.
2. Use the combo to choose the desired line type.
A line type will be proposed automatically in some cases depending on your first
element selection.
Point - Point
This command is only available with the

Generative Shape Design 2 product.
● Select two points.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugline3D.htm (1 of 11)10/18/2004 7:55:27 PM

Creating Lines
A line is displayed between

the two points.
Proposed Start and End
points of the new line are
shown.
● If needed, select a support surface.

In this case a geodesic line is
created, i.e. going from one point to
the other according to the shortest
distance along the surface geometry
(blue line in the illustration below).
If no surface is selected, the line is
created between the two points
based on the shortest distance.
If you select two points on closed
surface (a cylinder for example), the
result may be unstable. Therefore, it is
advised to split the surface and only
keep the part on which the geodesic
line will lie.
The geodesic line is not available with the Wireframe and Surface workbench.

Creating Lines
● Specify the Start and End points of the new line, that is the line endpoint location
in relation to the points initially selected. These Start and End points are
necessarily beyond the selected points, meaning the line cannot be shorter than the
distance between the initial points.
● Check the Mirrored extent option to create a line symmetrically in relation to the
selected Start and End points.
The projections of the 3D point(s) must already exist on the selected support.
Point - Direction
● Select a reference Point and a

Direction line.
A vector parallel to the direction line
is displayed at the reference point.
Proposed Start and End points of
the new line are shown.

Creating Lines
● Specify the Start and End points of

the new line.
The corresponding line is displayed.
The projections of the 3D point(s) must already exist on the selected support.
Angle or normal to curve
● Select a reference Curve and a

Support surface containing that
curve.

Creating Lines
- If the selected curve is

planar, then the Support
is set to Default (Plane).
- If an explicit Support
has been defined, a
contextual menu is
available to clear the
selection.
● Select a Point on the curve.

● Enter an Angle value.
A line is displayed at the

given angle with respect to
the tangent to the
reference curve at the
selected point. These
elements are displayed in
the plane tangent to the
surface at the selected
point.
You can click on the
Normal to Curve button
to specify an angle of 90
degrees.
Proposed Start and End
points of the line are
shown.
● Specify the Start and End points of the new line.


Creating Lines
● Click the Repeat object after OK if

you wish to create more lines with
the same definition as the currently
created line.
In this case, the Object Repetition
dialog box is displayed, and you key
in the number of instances to be
created before pressing OK.
As many lines as indicated in the dialog

box are created, each separated from
the initial line by a multiple of the
angle value.
You can select the Geometry on Support check box if you want to create a geodesic
line onto a support surface.
The figure below illustrates this case.
Geometry on support option not Geometry on support option checked

checked

Creating Lines
This line type enables to edit the line's parameters. Refer to Editing Parameters to find
out how to display these parameters in the 3D geometry.
Tangent to curve
● Select a reference Curve and a

point or another Curve to define the
tangency.
❍ if a point is selected (mono-
tangent mode): a vector tangent
to the curve is displayed at
the selected point.
❍ If a second curve is selected (or a
point in bi-tangent mode), you
need to select a support plane.
The line will be tangent to both
curves.
- If the selected curve is a

line, then the Support is
set to Default (Plane).
- If an explicit Support
has been defined, a
contextual menu is
available to clear the
selection.
When several solutions are

possible, you can choose
one (displayed in red)
directly in the geometry, or
using the Next Solution
button.

Creating Lines
Line tangent to curve at a given point Line tangent to two curves
● Specify Start and End points to define the new line.

Normal to surface
● Select a reference Surface and a

Point.
A vector normal to the surface is
displayed at the reference point.
Proposed Start and End points of
the new line are shown.

Creating Lines
● Specify Start and End points to

define the new line.
Bisecting
● Select two lines. Their bisecting line

is the line splitting in two equals
parts the angle between these two
lines.
● Select a point as the starting point
for the line. By default it is the
intersection of the bisecting line and
the first selected line.

Creating Lines
● Select the support surface onto

which the bisecting line is to be
projected, if needed.
● Specify the line's length in relation to
its starting point (Start and End
values for each side of the line in
relation to the default end points).
The corresponding bisecting line, is
displayed.
● You can choose between two
solutions, using the Next Solution
button, or directly clicking the
numbered arrows in the geometry.
3. Click OK to create the line.
The line (identified as Line.xxx) is added to the specification tree.

Creating Lines
● Regardless of the line type, Start and End values are specified by entering
distance values or by using the graphic manipulators.
● Start and End values should not be the same.
● Select the Length Type:

❍ Length: the line will be defined according to the Start and End points values
❍ Infinite: the line will be infinite
❍ Infinite Start Point: the line will be infinite from the Start point
❍ Infinite End Point: the line will be infinite from the End point
By default, the Length type is selected.

The Start and/or the End points values will be greyed when one of the Infinite
options is chosen.
● Check the Mirrored extent option to create a line symmetrically in relation to the
selected Start point.
● In most cases, you can select a support on which the line is to be created. In this
case, the selected point(s) is projected onto this support.
● You can reverse the direction of the line by either clicking the displayed vector or
selecting the Reverse Direction button (not available with the point-point line
type).

Creating Planes
Creating Planes
This task shows the various methods for creating planes:
● offset from a plane

● parallel through point ● through a planar
curve
● angle/normal to a
plane ● normal to a curve
● through three points ● tangent to a surface
● through two lines ● from its equation
● through a point and ● mean through points

a line
Open the Planes1.CATPart document.
1. Click the Plane icon .
The Plane Definition dialog box appears.
2. Use the combo to choose the desired Plane type.
Once you have defined the plane, it is represented by a red square symbol, which you
can move using the graphic manipulator.
Offset from plane
● Select a reference Plane then

enter an Offset value.
A plane is displayed offset from the

reference plane.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugplane3D.htm (1 of 11)10/18/2004 7:58:14 PM

Creating Planes
Use the Reverse Direction button

to reverse the change the offset
direction, or simply click on the
arrow in the geometry.
● Click the Repeat object after OK if you

wish to create more offset planes .
In this case, the Object Repetition dialog
box is displayed, and you key in the number
of instances to be created before pressing
OK.
As many planes as indicated in the

dialog box are created (including
the one you were currently
creating), each separated from the
initial plane by a multiple of the
Offset value.
Parallel through point
● Select a reference Plane and a

Point.

Creating Planes
A plane is displayed parallel to the

reference plane and passing
through the selected point.
Angle or normal to plane
● Select a reference Plane and a

Rotation axis.
This axis can be any line or an
implicit element, such as a
cylinder axis for example. To
select the latter press and hold
the Shift key while moving the
pointer over the element, then
click it.
● Enter an Angle value.

Creating Planes
A plane is displayed passing

through the rotation axis. It is
oriented at the specified angle to
the reference plane.
● Click the Repeat object after OK if you wish to create more planes at an angle
from the initial plane.
In this case, the Object Repetition dialog box is displayed, and you key in the
number of instances to be created before pressing OK.
As many planes as indicated in the
dialog box are created (including
the one you were currently
creating), each separated from the
initial plane by a multiple of the
Angle value.
Here we created five planes at an

angle of 20 degrees.
This plane type enables to edit the plane's parameters. Refer to Editing Parameters to
find out how to display these parameters in the 3D geometry.
Through three points
● Select three points.

Creating Planes
The plane passing through the

three points is displayed. You can
move it simply by dragging it to
the desired location.
Through two lines
● Select two lines.
The plane passing through the two

line directions is displayed.
When these two lines are not
coplanar, the vector of the second
line is moved to the first line
location to define the plane's
second direction.

Creating Planes
Check the Forbid non coplanar lines button to specify that both lines be in the
same plane.
Through point and line
● Select a Point and a Line.
The plane passing through the

point and the line is displayed.

Creating Planes
Through planar curve
● Select a planar Curve.
The plane containing the curve is

displayed.
Tangent to surface
● Select a reference Surface and

a Point.

Creating Planes
A plane is displayed tangent to the

surface at the specified point.
Normal to curve
● Select a reference Curve.

● You can select a Point. By
default, the curve's middle point
is selecte.

Creating Planes
A plane is displayed normal to the

curve at the specified point.
Mean through points
● Select three or more points to

display the mean plane through
these points.
It is possible to edit the plane by

first selecting a point in the dialog
box list then choosing an option to
either:
● Remove the selected point
● Replace the selected point by
another point.

Creating Planes
Equation
● Enter the A, B, C, D
components of the Ax + By +
Cz = D plane equation.
Select a point to position the plane

through this point, you are able to
modify A, B, and C components,
the D component becomes grayed.
Use the Normal to compass

button to position the plane
perpendicular to the compass
direction.
Use the Parallel to screen button

to parallel to the screen current
view.

Creating Planes
3. Click OK to create the plane.
The plane (identified as Plane.xxx) is added to the specification tree.

Join Surfaces or Curves: select at least two curves or surfaces to be joined.
Extrapolate Surfaces: select a surface boundary, specify the extrapolation type and
value.
Extract Geometry: select an edge or the face of a geometric element, and set the
propagation type.
Create Intersections: select the two elements to be intersected.
Create Projections: select the element to be projected and its support, specify the
projection direction.
Create Boundary Curves: select a surface's edge, set the propagation type, and re-
define the curve limits if needed.
Modifying Features
Modifying Parts
Redefine Feature Parameters Select the object to be edited, double-click it, then
enter new parameters in the dialog box that is displayed.
Reorder Features: Select the feature to be reordered, the Edit -> xxx.object ->
Reorder...command and the feature after which you wish to position your object.
Update Parts: Click this icon. To resolve possible difficulties, click the Edit,
Deactivate or Delete button in the dialog box that appears.
Delete Features: Select the feature to be deleted and the Edit -> Delete...
command. Optionally, delete its exclusive parents or its children by checking the
corresponding options.
For reference information, please refer to Specification Tree.

Editing Parts, Bodies and Features

Editing a part may mean for example modifying the density of the part (See Displaying and Editing
Properties ), but most often editing consists in modifying the features composing the part. This
operation can be done at any time.
There are several ways of editing a feature. If you modify the sketch used in the definition of a
feature, the application will take this modification into account to compute the feature again: in
other words, associativity is maintained.
Now, you can also edit your features through definition dialog boxes in order to redefine the
parameters of your choice.
Redefining Feature Parameters

This task shows how to edit a draft and a pad. The process described here is valid for any
other feature to be edited.
Open the Edit1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Double-click the draft to be edited (in the specification tree or in the geometry area).
The Draft Definition dialog box appears and the application shows the current draft angle
value. Generally speaking, the application always shows dimensional constraints related
to the feature you are editing. Concerning sketch-based features, it also shows the
sketches used for extrusion as well as the constraints defined for these sketches.
Instead of double-clicking the element you wish to edit, you can also click this element
and select the XXX.object -> Definition... command which will display the edit dialog
box.

2. Enter a new draft angle value.
3. Click OK.
This is your new feature:
4. Now, double-click the pad.
The Pad Definition dialog box appears and the

application shows the pad only, not the next
operation.
You will notice that the pad was created in

symmetric extent mode and that the application
displays information about the initial profile.
5. Enter a new length value.
6. Uncheck the Mirrored extent option.
7. Enter a length value for the second limit in the Length field.
Optionally, click Preview to see the new pad to be created.

8. Click OK.
The modifications are taken into account. Your

part now looks like this:
1. You can also access the parameters you wish to edit in the following way:
Select the feature in the specification tree and use the feature.n object -> Edit
Parameters contextual command.
You can now view the feature parameters in the geometry area.

2. Double-click the parameter of interest.
A small dialog box appears displaying the

parameter value:
3. Enter a new value and click OK.

Note
If you wish to quit the Edit Parameters contextual command, just click the Select
icon.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Reordering Features
Reordering Features
The Reorder capability allows you to rectify design mistakes. This task shows how to
reorder, that is move a pad.
Open the Reorder1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Your initial data consists of a pad that was mirrored and a second pad created
afterwards. As the order of creation is wrong, you are going to reorder the second
pad so as to mirror the whole part. Position your cursor on Pad.2. and select Edit -
> Pad.2 object -> Reorder...
2. The Feature Reorder dialog box appears.
Select Pad.1 to specify the new location of the

feature.
This name appears in the After field.
3. Click OK.
The part rebuilds itself. The mirror feature appears after the creation of the second
pad, which explains why this second pad is now mirrored.

Reordering Features

Updating Parts
Updating Parts
The point of updating a part is to make the application take your very last operation into
account. Indeed some changes to a sketch, feature or constraint require the rebuild of the
part. To warn you that an update is needed, the application displays the update symbol next
to the part's name and displays the geometry in bright red.
To update a part, the application provides two update modes:
● automatic update, available in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design . If checked,
this option lets the application update the part when needed.
● manual update, available in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design: lets you control
the updates of your part. What you have to do is just click the Update icon whenever
you wish to integrate modifications. The Update capability is also available via Edit ->
Update and the Update contextual menu item. A progression bar indicates the evolution
of the operation.
Note that you can cancel or interrupt updates.
What Happens When the Update Fails?

Sometimes, the update operation is not straightforward because for instance, you
entered inappropriate edit values or because you deleted a useful geometrical
element. In both cases, the application requires you to reconsider your design. The
following scenario exemplifies what you can do in such circumstances.
Open the Update3_R05.CATPart document.
The part is shelled in this way:

Updating Parts
1. Enter the Sketcher to replace the circular edge of the initial sketch with a line, then
return to Part Design.
The application detects that this operation affects the shell. A yellow symbol
displays on the feature causing trouble i.e. the shell in the specification tree.
Moreover, a dialog box appears providing the diagnosis of your difficulties and the
preview no longer shows the shell:
To resolve the problem, the dialog box provides the following options. If you wish to
rework Shell.1, you can:
● edit it
● deactivate it (for more about deactivated features, refer to Feature Properties)
● isolate it
● delete it
2. For the purposes of our scenario that is rather simple, click Shell.1 if not
already done, then Edit.
The Feature Definition Error window displays, prompting you to change

specifications. Moreover, the old face you have just deleted is now displayed
in yellow.
The text "Removed Face" is displayed close to the face, thus giving you a
better indication of the face that has been removed. Such a graphic text is
now available for Thickness and Union Trim features too.

Updating Parts
3. Click OK to close the window. The Shell Definition dialog box appears.
Click the Faces to remove field if not

4. already done and select the replacing
face.
Click OK to close the Shell Definition dialog box and obtain a correct part. The shell
feature is rebuilt.
Cancelling Updates
You can cancel your updates by clicking the Cancel button available in the
Updating...dialog box.
Interrupting Updates

Updating Parts
This scenario shows you how to update a part and interrupt the update operation on
a given feature by means of a useful message you previously defined.
Open the Update.CATPart document. Make sure that the Manual update option is
active to be able to perform the scenario.
1.
Right-click Hole.1 as the feature from which the update will be interrupted and
select the Properties contextual menu item.
The Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. Check the Associate stop update option. This option stops the update process and
displays the memo you entered in the blank field. This capability is available in
manual or automatic update mode.
3.
Enter any useful information you want in the blank field. For instance, enter "Fillet
needs editing".
4. Click OK to confirm and close the dialog box.
The entity Stop Update.1 is displayed in the specification tree, below Hole.1,
indicating that the hole is the last feature that will be updated before the message
window displays.

Updating Parts
5. Edit Sketch.1, which will invoke an update operation.
When quitting the Sketcher, the part appears in bright red.

6. Run the Update operation by clicking the icon.
The Updating... as well as the Stop Update message windows are displayed. The
Stop Update windows displays your memo and lets you decide whether you wish to
stop the update operation or continue it.
7. Click Yes to finish.
The part is updated. You can now edit the fillet if you consider it necessary.

Updating Parts
8. If you decide not to use this capability any longer, you can either:
● right-click Hole.1, select the Properties contextual menu item and check the
Deactivate stop update option: the update you will perform will be a basic one.
To show that the capability is deactivated for this feature, red parentheses
precede Hole.1 in the specification tree.
● right-click Stop Update.1 and select the Delete contextual menu item to delete
the capability.

Deleting Features
Deleting Features
Whenever you will have to delete geometry, you will not necessarily have to delete the elements used to
create it. The application lets you define what you really want to delete.
This task shows how to delete a sketch on which geometry has been defined and what this operation
involves.
Open the Delete1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Select the rectangle you wish to delete.
2. Select the Edit -> Delete... commands.

The Delete dialog box is displayed, showing the element to be deleted and two options.
● Delete exclusive parents: deletes the geometry on which the element was created. This
geometry can be deleted only if it is exclusively used for the selected element.
This option is already checked if you previously checked the Delete exclusive parents option in
the Options dialog box. For more information, refer to Customizing General Settings.
● Delete all children: deletes the geometry based upon the element to be deleted, in other
words, dependent elements.
Here, the first option cannot be used because the rectangle has no parents.
3. Click More.
Additional options and the elements affected by the deletion are displayed. If you can delete the
sketch, you can also replace it with another element.
4. Click ...PartBody\Sketch.2 to display Sketch.2 from the Replace section.
Sketch.2 appears in the Replace field.

Deleting Features
5. Select Sketch4, that is the hexagon to replace Sketch 2 .
This operation is now displayed in the dialog box.
6. Click OK.
The sketch is deleted as well as its children: two pads one of which is filleted.
A Few Notes About Deletion

Deleting Features
● Deleting Features Built upon Dress-up Features
If you delete a feature (dress-up or not) previously used to create a dress-up feature, the dress-
up feature is recomputed.
In this example, thickness was added to the pad, then material was removed from the whole part
using the shell capability. In other words, the existence of the shell depends upon the existence of
the thickness.
You will notice that only the thickness has been deleted.
The application keeps the shell feature.
● Keep in mind you can apply the Undo command if you inadvertently deleted a feature.
● You are not allowed to delete a profile used to define a feature, unless you delete the profile to construct
another one.
● Patterns
Concerning patterns, applying the Delete command on one instance deletes the whole pattern.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Constraints
Setting Constraints
Set Constraints: Click this icon, select the elements to be constrained then
click where you wish to position the constraint value.
Set Constraints Defined in Dialog Box: Multi-select the elements to be

constrained, click this icon and check the constraint type in the dialog box
that appears.
Modify Constraints: Double-click the constraint to be modified and modify

related data in the Constraint Definition dialog box that displays.
Rename Constraints: Select the constraint to be renamed, the xxx.n.

object -> Rename contextual menu item.
Deactivate/Activate Constraints: Select the constraint to be (de)activated

() and the xxx.n.object -> Rename parameter contextual menu item and
enter the desired name in the dialog box that appears.
Change Constraint Appearance: Select your constraint and choose one of

the contextual menu items changing the display mode.
Mean Dimensions: Click this icon, then update the part.
Setting Constraints
3D constraints are defined by means of one of the two constraint commands
available in this workbench. Depending on the creation mode chosen for creating
wireframe geometry and surfaces (see CATIA Wireframe and Surface User's Guide),
constraints set on these elements may react in two ways. You create references if
support elements were created with the Datum mode deactivated. Conversely, you
create constraints if you constrain datums. For more about datums, please refer to
Creating Datums.
The constraints you can set in Part Design workbench are:
● Distance
● Length
● Angle
● Fix/Unfix
● Tangency
● Coincidence
● Parallelism
● Perpendicularity

This task shows you how to set a distance constraint between a face and a plane,
then a reference between the face and another plane.
Open the Constraint1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Select the face you wish to constrain and Plane.1. This plane is a datum (there are
no links to the other entities that were used to create that plane).
2. Click the Constraint icon .
The application detects the distance value between the face and the plane. Moving
the cursor moves the graphic symbol representing the distance.
3. Click where you wish to position the constraint value.
The constraint is created.

The name of a constraint displays when passing the mouse over that constraint.

4. Now, set another constraint between the same face and Plane.2. Plane.2 is not a
datum. Repeat the instructions described above using the face and Plane.2.
The application creates a reference. Creating a reference means that each time the
application integrates modifications to the geometry, this reference reflects the
changes too.
The reference is displayed in parentheses as shown below:
You cannot set a distance constraint between two faces belonging to Part Design
features linked by their specifications. In the example below, the application
creates a reference between the faces, not a driving constraint.
To know how to modify a constraint, refer to Modifying Constraints.
Note
You cannot view constraints if the plane in which they are located is normal to the
screen. In that case, you just need to use the mouse, for example, to rotate the
view and therefore make the constraints visible.

[ Up ] [ Next ]

Setting constraints
Setting Constraints Defined in Dialog Box

This task shows you how to use this constraint command which detects possible
constraints between selected elements and lets you choose the constraint you wish to
create. You are going to constrain a hole.
Open the Hole1_R04.CATPart document and create a hole anywhere on the pad top
face.
1. Select the circular face and use the Other Selection... contextual menu item to
select the hole axis.
2. Use the Ctrl button to select the face as shown:
3. Click the Constraint Defined in Dialog Box icon .
The Constraint Definition dialog box is displayed.

Setting constraints
The constraints you can set in Part Design workbench are:
● Distance
● Length
● Angle
● Fix/Unfix
● Tangency

Setting constraints
● Coincidence
● Parallelism
The application detects six possible constraints between the axis and the face:
● Distance
● Angle
● Fix/Unfix
● Coincidence
● Parallelism
The other constraints are grayed out indicating that they cannot be set for the
elements you have selected.
3. Check the Distance option. You can check only one constraint.
4. Click OK to confirm. The distance constraint is created.

Setting constraints

Editing Constraints
You can edit constraints by:
● double-clicking on desired constraints and modify related data in the Constraint Definition dialog box that
displays.
● selecting desired constraints and use the XXX.N.object -> Definition... contextual command.
...to display the Constraint Definition dialog box and modify related data.
Editing Constraints Set on Complex Elements
The term "complex element" refers to geometric elements made of several sub-elements. For example, joins
are complex elements. For more about joins, please see the Generative Shape Design and Optimizer User's
Guide.

The application can now resolve constraints

defined on complex elements. For example,
open the Constraint.CATPart document. The join
that displays has been created using three
splines as illustrated through three different
colors.
If you edit the offset constraint set between

Point.6 and Point.12 by entering 75mm, you will
see that Point.11 is moved along Spline.3, and
Point.13 along Spline.2. In a nutshell, the
application now resolves constraints in relation
to complex elements, here the join, and not to
their sub-elements any longer.
About Diameter and Radius Constraints

● You can obtain a radius constraint by editing a diameter constraint. You just need to double-click the
diameter constraint and choose the radius option in the dialog box that displays.
● If you need to create a formula remember that :
● the parameter corresponding to the radius or diameter constraint is referred to as "RadiusX.

object"
● this parameter always contains the radius value.
For more about formulas, refer to CATIA-Knowledge Advisor User's Guide Version 5

Renaming Constraints
You can rename a constraint by selecting it and by using the XXX.N.object -> Rename parameter
contextual command.... In the dialog box that appears, you just need to enter the name of your choice.
Deactivating or Activating Constraints
You can deactivate a constraint by selecting it and by using the XXX.N.object -> Deactivate contextual
menu item. Deactivated constraints appear preceded by red parentheses ( ).
Conversely, to activate a constraint, use the Activate contextual command.
Changing Constraint Appearance

Display mode
When setting constraints, four display mode are available as explained in Customizing Constraint
Appearance. Later, you can change display modes by selecting the constraint of interest and choose one of
the following contextual commands.
- 'Value Display': only the constraint (or parameter) value is displayed.
- 'Name Display': only the constraint (or parameter) name is displayed.
- 'Name/Value Display': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are both displayed.
- 'Name /Value/Formula': the constraint (or parameter) name and value are displayed as well as the
possible formula defined for this constraint.
Permanent Display
It is possible to permanently display the parameters of Part Design features as well as the valued
constraints of Sketcher elements by using the XXX.object ->Edit Parameters contextual
command.
Provided that the option "Parameters of features and constraints" has been previously
checked in the Options dialog box, (for more see "Customizing the Tree and Geometry Views"),
the following dialog box appears:

If you validate the option, parameters or constraints attached to the selected feature are
permanently displayed in the 3D area.
Colors
To change the color of a given constraint, either you use the Properties contextual menu item or the Edit ->
Properties -> Color (tab) command. You then just need to choose a color from the list (or you can define your
own colors by selecting the More colors command at the bottom of the color list. To know more about
defining personal colors, please refer CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide).
If you wish to change the color for a given status, use the Tools -> Options command. For more, see
Customizing Constraint Appearance.

Mean Dimensions
Mean Dimensions
This task shows you how to compute the mean dimensions of a part.
You must define the tolerances that you want before computing mean dimensions. For
more about tolerances, refer to CATIA- Infrastructure User's guide Version 5.
Open the Mean_Dimensions.CATPart document.
1. Before computing mean dimensions, apply the Edit Parameters contextual menu
item to Pad.1 to display parameters, then take a look at the part you have just
opened. The part includes three toleranced parameters as shown below.
Remember that to access tolerance values, you need to double-click the parameter
of interest, then use the Tolerance -> Edit... contextual menu item.
2.
Click the Mean Dimensions icon .
A dialog box appears informing you that the operation is performed. You then just
need to update the part to observe the result.

Mean Dimensions
3.
Click the Update icon to integrate the modifications to the part. Note that the
update options set for your session (for more see General Settings) do not affect
the Mean Dimensions command behavior: you always have to explicitly update
your part.
Mean dimensions are displayed around the part.
Please bear in mind that if parameters are driven by formulas, the application
deactivates these formulas to compute mean dimensions.
4. If you wish to go back to the previous state, click the Mean Dimensions icon
again.
A dialog box appears informing you that the part will be resized to nominal
dimensions.
An additional message appears to inform you that the operation is performed and
prompts you to update the part.
6. Click OK to close the message window.
7. Click the Update icon to resize the part to nominal dimensions.

Mean Dimensions
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Replacing Elements
Replacing or Moving Elements
Replace a Surface: Select the surface to be replaced and the Replace... contextual
command. Select the replacing surface and optionally, check the Delete option to delete the
replaced element as well as its exclusive parents.
Replace a Body: Select the attached body and the Replace... contextual command. Select
the replacing body.
Change the Sketch Support: Select the Sketchx.object -> Change Sketch Support
command then the replacing plane or face.
Move Sketches from a Body: Select the element to be moved then choose the xxx.object -
> Change Body contextual command.

Displaying and Editing Parts Properties: Select the part then the Edit -> Properties
contextual menu item. Click the Mass tab, edit the density, click the Product tab and
enter information describing the part.
Displaying and Editing Bodies Properties : Select the body then the Edit ->
Properties contextual menu item. Click the Feature Properties tab, edit the name
and click the Graphic tab to change the color of the body.
Displaying and Editing Features Properties : Select the feature then the Edit ->
Properties contextual menu item. Check Deactivate to deactivate the feature and
define the impacted elements to keep activated. Click the Feature Properties tab
and edit the feature's name. Click the Graphic tab to change the color of the
feature.
Annotations
Annotations
Creating Texts with Leaders: click this icon, select a face and enter your text in the
dialog box.
Creating Flag Notes with Leaders: click this icon, select the object you want to
represent the hyperlink, enter a name for the hyperlink and the path to the
destination file.
Creating a Text with Leader

This task shows you how to create an annotation text with leader
A text is assigned an unlimited width text frame.

You can set graphic properties (anchor point, text size and justification) either
before or after you create the free text.
You can change any text to another kind at any time.
Open the Common_Tolerancing_Annotations_01 CATPart document.
To improve the highlight of the geometry selection, select the Tools->Options...

command.
In the General category, select the Display sub-category then the Navigation tab
and check the option Highlight faces and edges.
1. Double-click the Projected View.1 annotation plane to activate it.
2. Click the Text with Leader icon:
3. Select the face as shown to define a location for the arrow end of the leader.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugfdt_C2/cfyugfdtbt0201.htm (1 of 4)10/18/2004 8:03:10 PM

If the active view is not valid, a message appears informing you that you
cannot use the active view.
Therefore, the application is going to display the annotation in an annotation
plane normal to the selected face.
For more information, see View/Annotation Planes.
The Text Editor dialog box appears.
4. Enter your text, for example "New Annotation" in the dialog box.

5. Click OK to end the text creation. You can click anywhere in the geometry
area too.
The text appears in the geometry.

The text (identified as Text.xxx) is added to the specification tree.
The leader is associated with the element you selected. If you move either the
text or the element, the leader stretches to maintain its association with the
element.
Moreover, if you change the element associated with the leader, application
keeps the associativity between the element and the leader.
Note that using the Text Properties toolbar, you can define the anchor
point, text size and justification.

You can move a text using either the drag capability.

Note also that you can resize the manipulators
For more information, refer to Customizing for 3D Functional Tolerancing &
Annotations.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Flag Notes
Creating Flag Notes
You can add hyperlinks to your document and then use them to jump to a variety
of locations, for example to a marketing presentation, a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet or a HTML page on the intranet.
You can add hyperlinks to models, products and parts as well as to any
constituent elements.
This task shows you how to add hyperlinks.
Open the WeldPlanner.CATProduct document (or GreenPartCATPart document)

and prepare a document that you want to see displayed via a hyperlink.
1. Click the Flag Note with Leader icon .
2. Select the object you want to represent the hyperlink. For the purposes of
our example, select the face as shown:
The Manage Hyperlink dialog box appears.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugflagnote.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 8:03:18 PM

Flag Notes
3. Enter a name for your hyperlink. For example, "marketing presentation".

4. Enter the path to the destination file in the URL field then press Enter.
Or,
Click Browse... and select the destination file in the Link to File dialog box.
Note: You can add more than one link. Simply enter another path or click
Browse... and select another file. All links created are listed in the Link to file
or URL box.
● Select a link then click Go to to follow the link to the destination file.
● Select a link then click Remove to remove existing links.
5. Click OK in the Manage Hyperlink dialog box when satisfied.
The hyperlink is created and is identified as Flag Note.xxx (name of the

document) in the specification tree.

Flag Notes
6. If you wish to edit the display of the note, use the Properties contextual
command.


In this task, you are going to copy a part body from one CATPart document to another, then edit the
initial part body. This scenario shows you how the application harmonizes this type of ulterior
modifications. Thanks to the underlying methodology, you can work in concurrent engineering.
Open the MultiDocument1_R04.CATPart document.

This scenario assumes there are two CATPart documents. Part3.CATPart is the target document,
MultiDocument1_R04.CATPart contains the part body that will be copied, then edited in Part3.
The part body to be copied looks like this:
1. Select Part Body.

2. Select the Edit -> Copy command to copy the part body.
Open a new CATPart document 'Part3.CATPart' and position the cursor anywhere in the specification
3.
tree.
4. Select the Edit -> Paste Special... command.
The Paste Special dialog box appears. Three paste options are available:
● As specified in Part document: the object is copied as well as its design specifications
● As Result With Link: the object is copied without its design specifications and the link is
maintained between the reference and the copy.
● As Result: the object is copied without its design specifications and there is no link between the
reference and the copy.
5. For our scenario, select the As Result With Link option if not already selected, and Click OK .
Part Body is copied into the Part3.CATPart document. You will notice that the specification tree
displays it under the name of `Solid.1'.
A cube represents this solid.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugat0100.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 8:03:24 PM

6. Now, if you wish, you can fillet four edges. You can actually perform any modification you need.
7. Return into the first document.
8. Use the Remove command to remove material from the part body.
9. In the Part3.CATPart document, the cube graphic symbol used for Solid.1 in the tree now contains a
red point. This means that the initial Part Body underwent transformations.
You can also notice that the update symbol is displayed

next to Part3.
10. What you need to do is update the copied object. Just click Solid.1 in the specification tree.

11. Select the Update command to update the whole part.
The solid is updated to reflect the change: material is removed.
The specification tree indicates that the part body has integrated the modifications made to the
original part body.
Opening Pointed Documents

The Open Pointed Document contextual command is available for external references. If you apply
it onto "Solid.1" for example, MultiDocument1_R04.CATPart opens (if closed of course) in your
session.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Advanced Tasks
Advanced Tasks
This section will explain and illustrate how to perform operations on bodies and will provide
recommendations about how to optimize the use of the application. The table below lists the
information you will find.
Associating Bodies
Tools
PowerCopy
Reusing your Design
Managing Part and Assembly Templates
Managing User Defined Features
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugat0000.htm10/18/2004 8:05:38 PM
Associating Bodies
Associating Bodies
You must use bodies as entities you will eventually associate to the Part Body using the
capabilities described below to finish the design of your part.
Insert a New Body: Click the icon or select the Insert -> Body command.
Insert Features into a New Body: Click the icon or select the Insert -> Body
command.
Assemble Bodies: Select the required body, the Insert -> Boolean Operations ->
Assemble command and the target body.
Intersect Bodies: Select the first body, the Insert -> Boolean Operations ->
Intersect command and the second body.
Add Bodies: Select the body to be added, the Insert -> Boolean Operations ->
Add command and the target body.
Remove Bodies: Select the body to be removed, the Insert -> Boolean
Operations -> Remove command and the target body.
Trim Bodies: Select the body to be trimmed and the Insert -> Body.1.object ->
Union Trim... command. Click the Faces to remove field and select the desired
faces. Click the Faces to keep field and select the desired faces.
Remove Lumps: Select Part Body and Part Body object -> Remove Lump...
contextual menu item. Click the Faces to remove field and select the desired faces.
Change a Boolean Operation into Another One use the contextual menu item.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Inserting a Body
Inserting a New Body
This task shows you how to insert a new body into the part. When your part
includes several bodies, you can then associate these bodies in different ways (see
the Assemble, Add, Trim, Intersect, Remove and Remove Lump commands) to
obtain the final shape of the part.
For example, open the Add_R09.CATPart document.
This is the initial part, composed of Part Body and two bodies:
1. If the icon is not visible in the application, you can display it by using the View -
> Toolbars -> Insert command.
The result is immediate. the application displays this new body referred to as
"Body.3" in the specification tree. It is underlined, indicating that it is the active
body.
Now, the image associated with bodies in the tree differs from the image
representing the part body. A blue gear as well as a yellow plus or minus sign
have been added to the green gear. These signs indicate the polarity of the body.

Inserting a Body
This new image lets you quickly tell a body from a part body especially if that
one has been renamed.

Inserting a Body
You can construct this new body using the diverse commands available in this
workbench or in other workbenches.
You will notice that Part Body and Body.3 are autonomous. The operations you
would accomplish on any of them would not affect the integrity of the other one.
Now, if you wish to combine them, refer to the tasks showing the different ways
of attaching bodies: Adding Bodies, Assembling Bodies, Intersecting Bodies,
Removing Bodies, Trimming Bodies.
Showing or Hiding Bodies
To hide all the features, even the sketches, of a current or non-current body,
simply use the Hide components contextual menu item.
Conversely, use the Show components contextual menu item to restore the
view.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Inserting in a Body
Inserting Features into a New Body
These tasks show you how to restructure your specifications tree by gathering two or
more features into a new body. Depending on your geometry, this operation may affect
the part's final shape or not.
For example, open the Publish.CATPart document.
1. Multiselect Pad.1, Pad.2 and Draft.1 as the features you want

to group in a new body.
These features must belong to the same body or part body and
they must be consecutive in the tree. The selection order does
not matter.
2. Select the Insert->Insert in new body command.
Lilkewise, you can use the Insert in new... contextual command or simply click the
icon available in the Insert toolbar.
The new body is created at the location of the feature that was first on the list. You
can edit the properties of this new body that behaves like any other body.

Inserting in a Body
A Few Recommendations
Contextual Features
● Among the features you select, you cannot select a contextual feature as the first
feature in the tree.
● If your selection includes a contextual feature but not its parent (or 'support'),
you cannot use the Assemble in New Body capability.
'Up to ...' Features
● Among the features you select, you cannot select an 'up to ...' feature as the first
feature in the tree.
● If your selection includes an 'up to ...' feature but not its parent, the application
warns you that you can either quit the command or validate the selection bearing
in mind that the capability can modify the geometry. To perform the scenario
illustrating that, open the Insert_R11.CATPart document.
The part is composed of three pads, one of which 'Pad.3' was created using the Up to
next option.
1. Multiselect Pad.2 and Pad.3.

Inserting in a Body
2. Select the Insert->Assemble in New Body command.
A warning message is issued indicating that the operation may result in an update
error or modifications to the geometry.
3. If you wish to give up, click 'No'. For the purposes of our scenario, click 'Yes'.
You obtain a modified part.

Assembling Bodies
Assembling Bodies
Assembling is an operation integrating your part specifications. It allows you to create
complex geometry. This task shows you two assemble operations. You will see then
how the resulting parts look different depending on your specifications.
When working in a CATProduct document, it is not necessary to copy and paste the
bodies belonging to distinct parts before associating them. You can directly associate
these bodies using the same steps as described in this task.
Open the Assemble1_R04.CATPart document and make sure Part Body is the current
body.
First, you are going to assemble a pocket on Part Body. You will note that as this
pocket is the first feature of the body, material has been added (see Pocket).
1. To assemble them, select Body 2 and click the Assemble...icon .
Assembling a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This
capability will increase your productivity.

Assembling Bodies
The Assemble dialog box displays to let you determine

the operation you wish to perform. By default, the
application proposes to assemble the selected body to
Part Body.
During the operation, the application removes the material defined by the pocket
from Part Body.
This is your new Part Body:
3. Now delete the assemble operation to go back to the previous state. You are going
to perform the second assemble operation.
4. Select Body.2 and the Edit -> Body2.object -> Assemble command.
The Assemble dialog box displays again.

Assembling Bodies
5. Select Body.1 in the specification tree to edit the After: field. Body.1 appears in
the field, indicating that you are going to assemble Body.2 on Body.1.
6. Click OK.
The material defined by the pocket from Body1 has been removed during the
operation.
● You cannot re-apply the Assemble, Add, Trim, Intersect, Remove and Remove
Lump commands to bodies already associated to other bodies. However, if you
copy and paste the result of such operations elsewhere in the tree you can then
use these commands.
● Avoid using input elements that are tangent to each other since this may result
in geometric instabilities in the tangency zone.
Structuring Your Design

Generally speaking, using Boolean Operations is a good way of structuring your
part. Prior to designing, you can actually define the part's structure by associating
a body containing geometry with empty bodies. Once these specifications are
done, you can then concentrate on the geometry.

Intersecting Bodies
Intersecting Bodies
The material resulting from an intersection operation between two bodies is the
material shared by these bodies. This tasks illustrates how to compute two
intersections.
When working in a CATProduct document, it is no longer necessary to copy and paste
the bodies belonging to distinct parts before associating them. You can directly
associate these bodies using the same steps as described in this task.
Open the Intersect1_R04.CATPart document.
1. The initial part is composed of three bodies. Each body contains one pad. To
compute the intersection between the Part Body and Body 2, select Body.2.
Intersecting a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This

Intersecting Bodies
2. Click the Intersect... icon.
The Intersect dialog box displays to let you determine the second body you wish
to use. By default, the application proposes to intersect the selected body to Part
Body.
The application computes the intersection between the

two bodies.
Part Body now looks like this:
4. Now delete the intersection to go back to the previous state. You are going to
create a new intersection.

Intersecting Bodies
5. Select Body 2 and right-click to select the Edit -> Body2.object ->
Intersect contextual menu item. This displays the Intersect dialog box.
6. Select Body1 in the specification tree to edit the After field.
7. Click OK. Body1 now looks like this:
● You cannot re-apply the Assemble, Add, Trim, Intersect, Remove and
Remove Lump commands to bodies already associated to other bodies.
However, if you copy and paste the result of such operations elsewhere in
the tree you can then use these commands.
● Avoid using input elements that are tangent to each other since this may
result in geometric instabilities in the tangency zone.

Intersecting Bodies


Adding Bodies
Adding Bodies
This task illustrates how to add a body to another body. Adding a body to another one
means uniting them.

Open the Add_R09.CATPart document and make sure Part Body is the current body.
This is your initial data: the Add part is composed of three bodies. Each body
includes a pad. These pads are therefore independent.
1. To add Body.1 to Part Body, select Body.1.
Adding a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This
2. Click the Add icon .

Adding Bodies
The Add dialog box that appears

displays the name of the selected body
and the Part Body. By default, the
application proposes to add the selected
body to Part Body.
For the purpose of our scenario, we

keep this location. Note however that
you could add Body.1 to Body.2 one
just by selecting Body.2.
3. Click OK.
The specification tree and Part Body now looks like this:
You will note that:

● the material common to Part Body and Body.1 has been removed
● both pads keep their original colors.

Adding Bodies
copy and paste the result of such operations elsewhere in the tree you can
then use these commands.
● Avoid using input elements that are tangent to each other since this may
result in geometric instabilities in the tangency zone.

part. Prior to designing, you can actually define the part's structure by
associating a body containing geometry with empty bodies. Once these
specifications are done, you can then concentrate on the geometry.

Removing Bodies
Removing Bodies
This tasks illustrates how to remove a body from another body.

Open the Remove1_R04.CATPart document.
1. The part is composed of two bodies. To remove Body.1 from Part Body, select
Body.1.
Removing a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This
2. Click the Remove... icon .
Removing a set of bodies (multi-selected via the Ctrl key) is possible. This

Removing Bodies
use these commands.
● Avoid using input elements that are tangent to each other since this may result
in geometric instabilities in the tangency zone.


Trimming Bodies
Trimming Bodies
Applying the Union Trim command on a body entails defining the elements to be kept or
removed while performing the union operation.
The following rules are to be kept in mind:
Rule 1
REMOVE: Selected bodies ONLY are removed
Rule 2
KEEP: selected body is kept. All other bodies are removed

Trimming Bodies
Rule 3
REMOVE is not necessary if KEEP specification exists
Concretely speaking, you need to select the required bodies and specify the faces you wish to
keep or remove.
This task illustrates how to use the Union Trim capability.

Open the UnionTrim1_R07.CATPart document.
1. Select the body you wish to trim, i.e. Body.2.
2. Click the Union Trim icon .
The Trim Definition dialog box is displayed. The faces you cannot select are
displayed in red.

Trimming Bodies
3. Click the Faces to remove field and

select Body.2 's inner face.
The selected face appears in pink, meaning that the application is going to remove it.
4. Click the Faces to keep field and select Part Body. 's inner face.
This face becomes blue, meaning that the application is going to keep it.
Clicking the Preview button lets you check if your specifications meet your needs or
not.
The application computes the material to be removed. The operation (identified as

Trim.xxx) is added to the specification tree.

Trimming Bodies
use these commands.
● Avoid using input elements that are tangent to each other since this may result in
geometric instabilities in the tangency zone.
● As much as possible, avoid selecting faces trimmed by the operation. In some
cases, defined trimmed faces have the same logical name: the application then
issues a warning message requiring a better selection.

Remove Lump
Keeping and Removing Faces
The Remove Lump command lets you reshape a body by removing material. To
remove material, either you specify the faces you wish to remove or conversely, the
faces you wish to keep. In some cases, you need to specify both the faces to remove
and the faces to keep.
Using this command is a good way to get rid of cavities you inadvertently created.
This task illustrates how to reshape a body by removing the faces you do not need.
Depending on the faces you select for removal, you will obtain two distinct bodies.
Open the RemoveLump1_R04.CATPart document.
1. Select the body you wish to reshape, that is Part Body.
2. Click the Remove Lump icon .
The Remove Lump dialog box appears. The application prompts you to specify the
faces you wish to remove as well as the faces you need to keep.

Remove Lump
3. Click the Faces to remove field and select

the colored face.
The selected face appears in pink, meaning

that it will be removed during the operation.
4. Click OK.
The new body looks like this :
5. Now, delete Trim.1 in the specification tree

and repeat steps 1 and 2.
In the dialog box that appears, click the

Faces to remove field and select the bottom
6. face.
This face appears in pink.
The faces selected as the faces to be kept are displayed in blue.
7. Click OK.
The new body looks like this :

Remove Lump
You cannot re-apply Assemble, Add, Trim, Intersect, Remove and Remove Lump
commands to bodies already associated to other bodies. However, if you copy
and paste the result of such operations elsewhere in the tree you can then use
these commands.
Cavities
The Remove Lump command allows you to delete cavities, which is a good way
to control the quality of the part. As shown in the example below, the initial part
includes a cavity resulting from a shell operation.
Applying the Remove Lump command and selecting the face to be kept...
reshapes the part. The application has removed the faces that are not adjacent to
the selected face.

Remove Lump

Changing a Boolean Operation into Another One
This task shows you how to change a Boolean operation (Add, Assemble, Remove and
even Union Trim) into another one and this, very quickly. This new capability largely
increases your productivity, since it is no longer necessary to restructure your design
from scratch.
Open the Intersect1_R04.CATPart document.
1. The initial part is composed of three bodies. Assemble Body.1 to Part Body.
2. Remove Body.2 from Assemble.1.You obtain Remove.1:

3. Fillet Pad.3 's top edge.
4. Select Remove.1 and the Remove.1 object -> Change to Assemble...

contextual command.
The Change to Add...contextual command is available too.
You obtain Assemble.2. Note that the fillet is still defined on Pad.3's top edge.

5. Select Assemble.2 and the Assemble.2 object -> Change to Union Trim...
contextual menu item.
The Change to Add... and Change to Remove...contextual menu items

are available too.
You obtain Trim.1:

6. Double-click Trim.1 and select the cylinder's top face as the face to keep. You
obtain this part :

[ Back ] [ Up ]

Tools
Tools
Scan the Part and Define Local Objects: Select the the
Edit -> Scan or Define in Work Object... command,
click the buttons to move from one local feature to the
other, then the Exit button.
Perform a Draft Analysis: Define a direction using the

compass, click this icon, select the part, and enter the
minimum draft angle value in the field below the green
frame.
Perform a Surfacic Curvature Analysis: Select a body, click
this icon and enter new values in the color range.
Analyze Thread/Tap: Click this icon and check or uncheck

display options.
Create Datums: Click this icon to deactivate the History

mode.
Apply a Material: Select the element on which the material

should be applied, click this icon, select any material and
click Apply Material.
Extract Geometry: the capability is proposed when an

update operation detects difficulties in building the part.
Display Parents and Children: Select the feature under

study, the Tools -> Parent/Children... command and
use the diverse contextual commands to display parents
and children.
Define an Axis System: Click this icon, enter coordinates or

select geometry to define the three axes.
Publish Elements: Select the Tools -> Publication

command, select the element to be published then rename
it.

Tools


The Parent and Children command enables you to view the genealogical relationships
between the different components of a part.
It also shows links to external references and explicitly provides the name of the
documents containing these references.
If the specification tree already lets you see the operations you performed and re-
specify your design, the graph displayed by the Parent and Children capability proves to
be a more accurate analysis tool. We recommend the use of this command before
deleting any feature.
Open the Parent_R9.CATPart document.
1. Select the feature of interest, that is Pad1.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugprt_C2/cfyugparent.htm (1 of 4)10/18/2004 8:10:23 PM

2. Select the Tools -> Parent/Children... command (or the Parent/Children...

contextual command).
A window appears containing a graph. This graph shows the relationships between
the different elements constituting the pad previously selected.
If you cannot see the element of interest in the specification tree because you have
created a large number of elements, right-click this element in the graph then select
the Center Graph contextual command: the element will be more visible in the
specification tree.
3. Position the cursor on Pad 1 and select the Show All Children contextual
command.
You can now see that Sketch 2 and Sketch 3 have been used to create two
additional pads.
Here is the exhaustive list of the diverse contextual commands allowing you to hide
parents and children. These commands may prove quite useful whenever the view is
overcrowded.
● Show Parents and Children
● Show Children
● Show All Children
● Hide Children
● Show Parents
● Show All Parents
● Hide Parents
4. Position the cursor on Sketch.1 and select the Show Parents and Children
contextual command.
We can see that Sketch.1 has been created on xy plane.

Moreover, you can see that it is a published element.
5. Now, select EdgeFillet1 in the graph.
The application highlights the fillet in the specification tree, in the graph and in the
geometry area.
6. Position the cursor on EdgeFillet1 and select the Show Parents and Children
contextual command.
The parent Pad.1 is displayed.
● Double-clicking on the components alternately shows or hides parents and children.
● The Edit contextual command can be accessed from any element. For example, right-
click EdgeFillet.1 and select Edit. The Edge Fillet dialog box appears. You can then
modify the fillet. When done, the Edge Fillet dialog box closes as well as the Parents
and Children window close and the fillet is updated.
7.
Close the window and select MeasureEdge3 from the specification tree.

8. Select the Tools -> Parent/Children... command.
The graph that displays shows Pad.2 as MeasureEdge3's parent.
9. Select the Show All Parents contextual command.
Sketch.2 as Pad.2's parent is now displayed. In turn, Sketch.2's own parent Pad.1
is displayed and so on.

Axis System
Axis System
This task explains how to define a new three-axis system locally. There are two ways
of defining it: either by selecting geometry or by entering coordinates.
Open the AxisSystem.CATPart document.
1. Select the Insert -> Axis System... command or click the Axis System icon
.
The Axis System Definition dialog box is displayed.
2. An axis system is composed of an origin point and three orthogonal axes. For
instance, you can start by selecting the vertex as shown to position the origin of
the axis system you wish to create. The application then computes the remaining
coordinates. Both computed axes are then parallel to those of the current
system. The axis system looks like this:
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugprt_C2/cfyugaxis_system.htm (1 of 8)10/18/2004 8:10:38 PM

Axis System
Origin
Instead of selecting the geometry to define the origin point, you can use one of
the following contextual commands available from the Origin field:
● Create Point: for more information, refer to Points
● Coordinates: for more information, refer to Points
● Create Midpoint: the origin

point is the midpoint
detected by the application
after selection of a
geometrical element.
● Create Endpoint: the origin

point is the endpoint
detected by the application
after selection of a
geometrical element
Axis System Type
You can choose from different types of axis system:

● Standard: defined by a
point of origin and three
orthogonal directions (by
default the current directions
of the compass).
Here only the point

was selected and
nothing specified
for the axes.

Axis System
● Axis rotation: defined as a

standard axis system and a
angle computed from a
selected reference.
Here the Y axis

was set to the
standard axis
system Y axis, and
a 15 degrees angle
was set in relation
to an edge parallel
to the X axis.
● Euler angles: defined by

three angle values as follows.
Angle 1= (X, N)
a rotation about Z
transforming
vector X into
vector N.
Angle 2= (Z, W)
a rotation about
vector N
transforming
vector Z into
vector W.
Angle 3= (N, U)
a rotation about
vector W.
3. If you are not satisfied with x axis, for instance click the X axis field and select
the edge as shown to define a new direction for x axis.
The x axis becomes colinear with this edge.

Axis System
4. Check the Reverse option to reverse the x axis direction. Clicking the axis
reverses its direction too.
Note that there are two types of axis systems, right-handed and left-handed. The
dialog box indicates the type close to the Current option.
5. The application also lets you

define axes through
coordinates. Right-click the Y
Axis field and select the
Coordinates... contextual
command. The Y Axis dialog
box appears.
6. Keep X=0, Y=0 and enter Z= -1 as the coordinates of the Y axis.
The axis system is modified accordingly. The application has computed the
coordinates of the X axis.

Axis System
You can control coordinates by defining formulas. For more information, refer to
CATIA Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.
If needed, you can also define new points, lines or planes through contextual
commands available in each field of the Axis System Definition dialog box.
●
Create Point: for more information, refer to Points

●
Create Midpoint:midpoint detected by the application after selection of a

● Create Endpoint: endpoint detected by the application after selection of a
geometrical element
● Create Line: for more information, refer to Lines
● Create Plane: for more information, refer to Planes
● Rotation...the rotation is
performed around the axis.
The angle value you enter is
not saved for ulterior
rotations, meaning that if
you reuse the command
later, the rotation will be
performed from the current
location.
7. Click OK to confirm the operation and close the dialog box.

Axis System
8. Click More to expand the Axis System Definition dialog box.
The first rows contains the coordinates of the origin point. The coordinates of X
axis are displayed in the second row. The coordinates of Y axis are displayed in
the third row. The coordinates of z axis are displayed in the fourth row.
As you are defining your axis system, the application detects if its axes are
orthogonal or not. Inconsistencies are revealed via the Update diagnosis dialog
box.
9. Uncheck the Current option if you do not want to set your axis as the reference.
The absolute axis at the bottom right of the document then becomes the current
three axis system.
10. Click OK.
The axis system is created. It is displayed in the specification tree. When it is set
as current, it is highlighted as shown below.
Local axes are fixed. If you wish to constrain them, you need to isolate them
(using Isolate contextual command) before setting constraints otherwise you
would obtain over-constrained systems.

Axis System
The display mode of the axes is different depending on whether the three-axis
system is right-handed or left-handed and current or not.
THREE-AXIS SYSTEM CURRENT AXIS DISPLAY MODE

right-handed yes solid
right-handed no dashed
left-handed yes dotted
left-handed no dot-dashed
11. Right-click Axis System.1 and select the Set as current contextual command.
Axis System.1 is now current. You can then select plane xy for instance, to
define a sketch plane.
Editing an Axis System
You can edit your axis system by double-clicking it and entering new values in
the dialog box that appears. You can also use the compass to edit your axis
system. For more about the compass, refer to CATIA- Infrastructure User's guide
Version 5.
Note also that editing the geometrical elements selected for defining the axes or
the origin point affects the definition of the axis system accordingly.
Right-clicking Axis System.Xobject in the specification tree lets you access the
following contextual commands:
● Definition...:redefines the axis system
● Isolate: sets the axis system apart from the geometry
● Set as Current/Set as not Current: defines whether the axis system is the
reference or not.
Creating an Axis System when Creating a New Part
An option lets you create an axis system when you are creating a new part. To
know how to access this option, refer to Customizing a CATPart document.

Axis System
Publication
Axis systems can be published. For more about publication, please refer to
Publishing Elements.

Publishing Elements
Publishing Elements
Publishing geometrical elements is the process of making geometrical features available to

different users. This operation is useful when working in assembly design context
This task shows you the method for making elements publicly available: you will publish a
plane, a sketch then a parameter not visible in the specification tree.
In this page, you will also find information about the following subjects:
● Publishing Part Design Features
● Assembly Constraints and Published Generative Shape Design Geometry
● Publishing in Assembly Design
● Replacing a Published Element
● Publishing Parameters
● Importing and Exporting Published Names
● What Happens When Deleting a Published Element?
Open the Publish.CATPart document or if you are working in Assembly Design, for example
open the AssemblyTools01.CATProduct document, and ensure that the component
containing the element you wish to publish is active.
1.
Select Tools -> Publication.
The Publication command lets you:

● publish a geometric element
● edit the default name given to the published element
● replace the geometric element associated with a name
● create a list of published elements
● import a list of published elements
● Delete a published element.
The Publication dialog box appears.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugprt_C2/cfyugpublish.htm (1 of 9)10/18/2004 8:10:53 PM

Publishing Elements
2.
Select the element to be published. For example, select Plane.1.
You can publish the following elements:

● points, lines, curves, planes
● sketches
● bodies (selecting a feature selects the body it belongs to)
● Generative Shape Design features (Extrudes Surfaces, Offsets, Joins etc.)
● Free Style Features (Planar patches, curves etc.)
● parameters
● sub-elements of geometrical elements: when switched on, the option "Publish a face,
edge, vertex or extremity" lets you directly select faces, edges, vertices. axes.
extremities.
● Part Design features.
To select axes, select cylindrical faces and use the Other Selection contextual
command. For more about this command, please refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's
Guide.
The dialog box displays the name and status of the selected element as well as
"Plane.1", that is the default name given to the published element

Publishing Elements
3.
Click "Plane.1" in the
dialog box. The plane is
highlighted in the
geometry.
4. Rename it as "New plane".
The plane is published as "New plane". However, you can notice that the geometric
element Open_body.1/Plane1 has not been renamed.
5. Before publishing another element, click Options to access rename options.
When using the Publication command, you can actually decide to rename or not the
elements you are publishing. Prior to renaming, you can set one of the three following
work modes:
● Never: the application will not allow you to rename the published element. This is the
default option.
● Always: the application will always allow you to rename the published element
● Ask: the application will ask you what you decide to do, namely rename or not the
published element
You can rename any elements except for axes, edges and faces.

Publishing Elements
6.Check "Ask" and click OK to exit.
7.Prior to selecting the element to be published, deselect "New plane" if not already done.
8.Select "Sketch.1" as the new element to be published.
9.Rename it as "New sketch". A message is issued asking you whether you wish to rename
the published element "Sketch.1" as "New sketch".
10.Click Yes to confirm. The published element's name is "New sketch" and the geometric
element is renamed too.
Pointing at or selecting published elements simultaneously highlights the geometry, the

element node and the publication node.
Publishing Part Design Features

Publishing Elements
Publishing Part Design Features requires that the Enable to publish the features of a
body capability available in the Options dialog box is on. If your administrator did not
lock the option, you can activate the option yourself.
Assembly Constraints and Published Generative Shape

Design (GSD) Geometry
Depending on your geometry, there are cases where constraints pointing to a certain
type of published GSD features do not reconnect if, for example, you replace constrained
parts. What happens is that links between constraints and the geometry do not take
advantage of the publication. You can notice this behavior even if you selected the
geometry through the Publication node.
GSD features concerned are those which geometrical results depend on the number and
type of the parents used for the result. This is the case of features such as "Intersect" or
"Project".
The solution to this, is to publish the geometrical result, not the feature itself. In
concrete terms, rather that publishing the Intersect feature, you recommend you publish
the vertex, not the point.
Publishing in Assembly Design

When publishing geometry in the Assembly Design workbench, the Browse button is
available in the Publication dialog box. Clicking the button launches the Component
Publication dialog box that displays only the published elements belonging to the levels
inferior to the active level.
In the following example, the user is publishing an element of CRIC_BRANCH_1. When

clicking the Browse button, the Component Publication dialog box displays published
faces belonging to CRIC_BRANCH_3.

Publishing Elements
This capability works as a filter: it does not display the whole publications of the
assembly. Thus, you will use it as an help for selecting already published elements
whenever you wish to replace published elements.
Replacing a Published Element
11.Click "Open_body.1/Plane.1" to replace it with another geometric element.

Publishing Elements
12.Select "Plane.2" as the

replacing element.
The orientation of both

elements is displayed. The
green arrow indicates the
orientation for the new
element, the red arrow
indicates the orientation
of the published element.
A message is issued
asking you to confirm the
change.
13.Click Yes to confirm.
Plane.2 has been

published.Plane.1 is not
published any more.
The dialog now displays

the following information:
Publishing Parameters
14.You can publish the parameters of a part that are not displayed in the specification tree.
To do so, click the Parameter... button available in the Publication dialog box. This
displays a new window listing all parameters defined for the feature previously selected
in the specification tree.

Publishing Elements
15.If the list of parameters is too long, you can filter out the parameters by entering a
character string in the Filter Name field. For example, enter "offset".
The list now displays only the parameters including the string "offset".
16.Select the parameter of interest.
You can also use one of the following filter types:

● All
● Renamed parameters
● Hidden
● Visible
● User
● Boolean
● Length
● Angle
● String
17.Click OK when done. This closes the dialog box. The selected parameter is displayed in
the Publication dialog box.
Importing and Exporting Published Names

Published names can be gathered in ASCII .txt files.

Publishing Elements
To export published names to an ASCII .txt file,

● click the Export button.
● enter a name for the file you are creating in the Export dialog box that displays.
● click Save : the file is created: it contains the list of all published elements as specified
in the Publication dialog box.
To import published names to an ASCII .txt file,

● click the import button.
● navigate to the file of interest in the Import dialog box that displays.
● select the file containing the list of published elements.
● click Open: the names are added to the list of the Publication dialog box
18.Click OK when satisfied.
The entity "Publication"

has been added to the
specification tree. The
three published elements
are displayed below the
node "Publication':
What Happens When Deleting a Published Element?

When deleting a published element, CATIA informs you that this element is published.
What you need to do is confirm the deletion (Yes) or cancel it (No).

PowerCopy
Powercopy
Create Powercopies: Select the Insert ->Advanced Replication Tools ->

Powercopy Creation command, select the elements making up the Powercopy
from the specification tree, define a name for the Powercopy and its reference
elements then choose an icon for identifying it.
Instantiate Powercopies: Select the Insert -> Instantiate From Document...

command, select the document or catalog containing the powercopy, complete the
Inputs within the dialog box selecting adequate elements in the geometric area.
Save Powercopies into a Catalog: Select the Powercopy from the specification tree,
select the Insert -> Advanced Replication Tools -> Save In Catalog...
command, enter the catalog name and click Open.
This task shows how to create PowerCopy elements, to be reused later.
A PowerCopy is a set of features (geometric elements, formulas, constraints and so
forth) that are grouped in order to be used in a different context, and presenting the
ability to be completely redefined when pasted.
This PowerCopy captures the design intent and know-how of the designer thus
enabling greater reusability and efficiency.
Open the PowerCopyStart.CATPart document.
1. Select the Insert ->Advanced Replication Tools -> PowerCopy Creation...

menu item.
The Powercopy Definition dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the elements making up the PowerCopy from the specification tree. For the
purposes of our scenario, select "Part Body".

The dialog box is automatically filled with information about the selected elements.
3. Define the PowerCopy as you wish to create it:
The Definition tab lets you assign a name to the powercopy and presents its
components in the 3D viewer. For example, enter "Test" in the Name: field.

4. The Inputs tab lets you define the reference elements making up the PowerCopy.
You can rename these elements for a clearer definition by selecting them in the
viewer and entering a new name in the Name field. In parentheses you still can
read the elements' default name based on its type. For example, select xy plane
and rename it as "Plane1".
The Parameters tab lets you define which of the parameter values used in the
PowerCopy you will be able to modify at instantiation time. This can be a value, or
a formula for example.
5. Simply select the parameters and check the Published Name button. In case of a
formula, you can set it to false or true. For example, select PartBody\Hole.1
\Diameter
Use the Name field to give a more explicit name to this element. For example,
enter "Hole.1".

The Documents tab shows the complete path and role of Design tables that are
referenced by an element included in the Power Copy.
6. The Icon tab lets you modify the icon identifying the PowerCopy in the
specifications tree. A subset of icons is available from the Icon choice button. If
you click ... the Icon Browser opens, showing all icons loaded on your application
ession. Click the envelope icon .

7.
The Grab screen button lets you capture an image of the PowerCopy to be stored
with its definition. Click the Grab screen button. You can zoom in or out the image
to adjust it.
8.
Click the Remove preview button if you do not need this image.
9. Click OK to create the PowerCopy.
The PowerCopy is displayed close to the top of the specification tree.

● Double-click "Test" in the specification tree to display the PowerCopy

Definition dialog box and edit its contents.
● A formula is automatically included in a Power Copy definition when all its

parameters are included.
Otherwise, i.e. if at least one parameter is not selected as part of the Power
Copy, you have to manually select the formula to make it part of the definition.
If you do so, all the formula's parameters that have not been explicitly selected,
are considered as inputs of the Power Copy.
A Few Recommendations

● As far as possible, minimize the number of elements making up the Powercopy.

● When defining Powercopies including sketches, use profiles constrained with respect to
edges or faces rather than to planes. Additionally, set the option Create geometrical
constraints off before sketching. Generally speaking, it is always preferable to use profiles
both rigid and mobile.
● Avoid constraining your 2D elements with respect to HV absolute axis. The result you
obtain after instanciating the powercopy could be unstable. Actually, you cannot control
the position of the origin of the absolute axis nor its orientation.
● It is preferable to constrain elements with respect to external references such as faces,

edges, reference or explicit planes:

● It is preferable not to use projections nor intersections in your sketch if you want to use
your sketch in a Powercopy.
● Avoid constraints defined with respect to reference planes.
● Before creating your powercopies, make sure that your sketch is not over-constrained.
● Generally speaking, it is always preferable to use profiles both rigid and mobile. Make
sure that your sketch is iso-constrained (green color). You can use non-iso-constrained
sketches, but it will be more difficult to understand and control the result after
instantiation.
● Avoid access to sub-elements
● Formulas are automatically included if you select all the parameters.
● For complex design, integrate knowledge rules.
Managing inputs
● Always rename your inputs to help the end user to understand what he needs to select.
● A formula is automatically included in a Power Copy definition when all its parameters are
included. Otherwise, i.e. if at least one parameter is not selected as part of the Power
Copy, you have to manually select the formula to make part of the definition. If you do
so, all the formula parameters that have not been explicitly selected are considered as
inputs of the Power Copy.
● Note that when including parameters sets containing hidden parameters in a PowerCopy,
the hidden parameters are automatically instantiated when instantiating the PowerCopy.

Preview
● In a CATPart document, create only one PowerCopy reference. It is not a technical

restriction, but there are at least two reasons for this: the cost of an instantiation will be
smaller in the document is smaller. The end user can more easily understand the feature
to be instantiated.
● Put in 'show mode' only the input and the result (to help the end user to understand what
he needs to select).
● Use colors to differentiate inputs (put transparency on results for example).
● Choose a pertinent viewpoint before saving the CATPart document reference, default
viewpoint in preview during instantiation will be the same.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

This task shows how to instantiate Power Copies once they have been created as
described in Creating PowerCopies.
There are two ways of doing this:
● using the PowerCopy Instantiate From Document command
● using a catalog
Open the PowerCopyDestination.CATPart document.
Using the PowerCopy Instantiate From Document command

1. Select the Insert -> Instantiate From Document... command.
The Select PowerCopy dialog box is displayed allowing you to navigate to the
document or catalog where the powercopy is stored. Navigate to C:\Program
Files\Dassault Systemes\B12doc\online\prtug\samples directory.
2. Select the document containing the Powercopy, i.e. PowerCopyResults.CATPart.
The Insert Object dialog box is displayed.
Use the Reference list to choose the correct PowerCopy when several have been
defined in the document.

3. Complete the Inputs within the dialog box by selecting the adequate element in
the geometric area: select Pad1's upper face as the planar element replacing
Plane1.

4. Click on the Use identical name button to automatically select all the elements
with the same name. This command searches for features, publications, sub-
elements or parameters having the name of the input. If a feature, publication, sub-
element or parameter with the input name is found, this element is automatically
used as input.
Here, zx plane and yz plane are selected.
This is especially useful when the input is the same one repeated several time.
5. Click on the Parameters button to display the Parameters dialog box.

6. Enter 18mm as the new diameter value.
You can use the Create formulas button to automatically create a formula on
every parameters with the same name provided there are any.
7. Click OK to confirm the operation and close the dialog box.
The Documents button lets you access the list of documents (such as design
tables) pointed by one of the elements making up the Power copy.
If there are documents, the Documents dialog box opens and you can click the
Replace button to display the File Selection dialog box and navigate to a new
design table to replace the initial one.
When no document is referenced, the Documents button is grayed within the
Insert Object dialog box.
8. Click OK to create the PowerCopy instance.
The PowerCopy is instantiated in context, meaning its limits are automatically re-
defined taking into account the elements on which it is instantiated.
● Check the Repeat option to be able to repeat the instantiation. In this case,
once you have clicked OK in the Insert Object dialog box, the latter remains
open, the PowerCopy's Inputs are listed and ready to be replaced by new
inputs, as described above. To exit the command, uncheck the Repeat button or
click Cancel.
Once instantiated, powercopies are no more linked to the original PowerCopies

used to define them.
Using a catalog

You need to have a catalog available, created either:

● using the Catalog capability, see CATIA- Infrastructure User's guide Version 5
● using the Insert -> Advanced Replication Tools -> Save In Catalog menu
item.
1.
Click the icon .
If accessing a catalog for the first time, you need to navigate to the catalog
location. This location is stored in the settings for faster access later on.
2. Select the catalog containing the PowerCopy you wish to instantiate.
3. Select the PowerCopy to be instantiated, then you can:

● drag and drop it onto the reference element
● double-click the PowerCopy
● or right-click on the PowerCopy in the dialog box and use the Instantiate
contextual menu.
From then on, you instantiate the PowerCopy as described above starting on step
3.
To know more about the Insert Object dialog box...

● The Comments & URLs icon is available with user features and document
templates only. It is always grayed out when instantiating Power Copies. If a
URL was added to a user feature or a Document template, click this icon enables
the user to access the URL. To know more about this function, see the
Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.
● The Name field enables the user to change the name of the user feature
instance.

Saving PowerCopies into a Catalog
Saving Power Copies into a Catalog

This task shows you how to store Power Copy elements into a catalog, for later use as
described in Instantiating a PowerCopy.
Open the PowerCopyResults.CATPart document.
1. Select the PowerCopy from the specification tree for example.
2. Choose the Insert -> Advanced Replication Tools -> Save In Catalog...
menu item.
The Catalog Save dialog box is displayed:
When creating a catalog for the first time, click the ... button to display the Open
dialog box, and navigate to the location where you wish to create a catalog.
Then simply key in the catalog name and click Open.
If you wish to add a PowerCopy to an existing catalog, simply activate the Update
an existing catalog option in the Catalog Save dialog box.
By default, the Catalog Save dialog box recalls the catalog accessed last.
3. Click OK.
The PowerCopy has been stored in the catalog.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Reusing your Design
Reusing Your Design
Capabilities Purposes
Provides a quick way of reusing simple features or

Copy and Paste bodies. This command is to be used when you need
to rework one specification or no specifications at all.
Provides a quick way of reusing simple features or

Cut and Paste bodies. This command is to be used when you need
to rework one specification or no specifications at all.
Drag and Drop Provides a quick way of copying simple features or

bodies at different locations.
Paste Special Reuses bodies with or without their specifications.
● Paste as Result with Link If this option is used, only the geometry is copied,
not the specifications. Pasted bodies reflect the
changes to the initial bodies. This command is mostly
used in a multi-model environment.
● As specified in Part If this option is used, bodies are pasted as well as

Document their design specifications. The capability is the same
as the commonly used Copy and Paste command
Rectangular Pattern Creates several identical features from one feature or

more or even from bodies, and simultaneously
Circular Pattern positions them on an part.
You position instances with respect to a rectangular

or circular grid, or using sketched points.
User Pattern
PowerCopy Creates a set of features (geometric elements,

formulas, constraints and so on) that are grouped in
order to be used in a different context. You can
completely redefine these entities when you paste
them. As it captures the design intent and know-how
of the designer, it enables greater reusability and
efficiency.We recommend you to use this command
for bodies, features, sketches and design tables that
require new specifications.
To benefit from the best level of performance in the

long term, use this capability to enrich your feature
catalogs.

Reusing your Design
User Defined Feature Creates hybrid features, intended to be stored in

catalogs and instantiated later on. For more
information, please refer to CATIA-Product
Knowledge Template User's Guide Version 5.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

The Part Design window looks like this:
Click the sensitive areas to see the related documentation.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwd0000.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:12:29 PM

Symbols Used in the Specification Tree

Referenced Geometry Symbols


This section presents the main menu bar tools and commands dedicated to Part Design.
Start File Edit View Insert Tools Windows Help
Edit
For... See...
Update Updating Parts
Cut
Cutting, Copying, Pasting
Copy
Paste
Handling Parts in a Multi-Document

Environment
Paste Special...
Specification Tree
Delete Deleting Features
Properties Displaying and Editing Properties
Scan or Define in Work Scanning a Part and Defining in Work

Object... Objects
XXX object... Redefining Feature Parameters
Reordering Features
Insert
For... See...
Body Inserting a New Body

Insert in new body Inserting Features into a New

Body
Annotations Creating Annotations
Constraints Setting Constraints
Sketcher... Sketcher User's Guide
Axis System... Axis System
Sketch-Based Features Sketch-Based Features
Dress-Up Features Dress-Up Features
Surface-Based Features Surface-Based Features
Transformation Features Transformation Features
Boolean Operations Associating Bodies
Advanced Replication Tools PowerCopy
Managing User Features

User Feature
(UDFs)
Document Template Managing Part and Assembly

Creation... Templates
Instantiate From Document... Instantiating PowerCopies
Tools
For... See...
Parent/Children Parents and Children

Options... Customizing
Publication... Publishing Elements
[ Up ] [ Next ]

The Sketch-Based features toolbar is available in extended or compact display mode. To choose your display
mode, use the View -> Toolbars -> Sketch-Based Feature (Extended/Compact) command.
See Pad See Hole
See Drafted Filleted Pad See Rib
See Pocket See Slot
See Drafted Filleted Pocket See Solid Combine
See Shaft See Stiffener
See Multi-Pad See Multi-sections Solid
See Multi-Pocket See Removed Multi-sections Solid
See Groove
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwd0201.htm10/18/2004 8:13:05 PM
See Edge Fillet See Variable Angle Draft
See Variable Radius Fillet See Advanced Draft
See Face-Face Fillet See Shell
See Tritangent Fillet See Thickness
See Chamfer See Thread
See Basic Draft See Replace Face
See Draft from Reflect Lines See Remove Face
This toolbar is available in extended or compact display mode. To choose your display
mode, use the View -> Toolbars -> Surface-Based Feature (Extended/Compact) command.
See Split See Close Surface
See Thick Surface See Sew Surface
See Translation See Rectangular Pattern
See Rotation See Circular Pattern
See Symmetry See User Pattern
See Mirror See Scaling
You can display the Reference Elements toolbar using the View -> Tool bars ->
Reference Elements (extended/compact) command.
See Points
See Lines
See Planes
These toolbars are optional. You can display it using the View -> Toolbars commands.
See Assembling Bodies See Trimming Bodies
See Adding Bodies See Keeping and Removing Faces
See Removing Bodies See Inserting a New Body
See Intersecting Bodies
Sketcher Toolbar
Sketcher Toolbar
See CATIA-Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide Version 5.
See Change the Sketch Support
Constraints Toolbar
Constraints Toolbar
See Setting Constraints
See Setting Constraints Defined in Dialog Box
Analysis Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar
See Performing a Draft Analysis
See Performing a Surfacic Curvature Analysis
See Tap-Thread Analysis
Annotations Toolbar
Annotations Toolbar
See Creating Textual Annotations
See Creating Flag Notes
Tools Toolbar
Tools Toolbar
See Updating Parts
See Axis System
See Mean Dimensions
See Creating Datums
See Infrastructure User's guide Version 5 (Browsing a Catalog)
Insert Toolbar
Insert Toolbar
See Inserting a New Body
See Inserting Features into a New Body
Miscellaneous
A part body. You have access to the part's

PartBody features, the way it is organized (Pad, Pocket,
Intersection, etc.).
xy plane, yz plane or zx plane. You can click

xy plane the desired reference plane either in the
geometry area or in the specification tree.
Formula defined for Point.1. For more about

formulas, please refer to CATIA Infrastructure
User's Guide Version 5.
BODY1 A model with geometrical representation.
Sketch. For more information about Sketcher

Sketch.1 Workbench, refer to : Entering the Sketcher
Workbench in Sketcher User's Guide.
AbsoluteAxis Absolute Axis: contains information about

Origin, HDirection and VDirection.
Origin Origin.
HDirection HDirection or VDirection.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugsymbol2.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 8:15:10 PM

Geometry Geometry (Point, Line,...): Wireframe and

Surfaces features.
Constraints Constraints: Parallelism, Perpendicularity, etc.
Publication : a CATPart or CATProduct

element is published that is to say its
face geometrical data is exposed. For more
information refer to Managing a Product
Publication in Assembly User's Guide.
Assembly hole. For more about Assembly

features, please refer to CATIA Assembly
Design User's Guide Version 5.
External references branch of the part :

external geometry (a face, a point or a line) is
copied/imported from driving parts to
contextual parts that are being driven (Design
Open_body.1 in context). You can customize External
References in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Part Design, select
the General tab and check the box Keep
links with selected object.
A product in NO SHOW. By clicking in the

CATProduct's contextual menu or by using the
Hide/Show icon , you can put the product
Product4 in the SHOW or NO SHOW area, the product's
geometry is hidden. As a consequence, the
documents under it, for instance the CATPart
is in the NO SHOW space as well.
For more information about the SHOW/NO
SHOW modes, see Displaying Hidden Objects
in CATIA - Infrastructure's User Guide.

Part5 A part in NO SHOW.
The Sketcher symbol is by default in NO

SHOW. By this means the geometry lighter.
But you can reactivate the Sketcher
representation by clicking in the contextual
menu or by using the Hide/Show icon . By
double-clicking on this symbol you can return
into the Sketcher workbench.

Symbols reflecting an incident in the geometry building
Miscellaneous Incidents
Incidents on Constraints
Miscellaneous Incidents
Part to be updated
No visualization of the product or the part. The product's

Product5 reference cannot be found. The geometry of the component
disappears.
PartBody A broken link. The access to this product is impossible because

the link with the root document has been lost.
A broken shaft.
The pocket's representation is deactivated.
Isolated plane (can no longer be edited)
Incidents on Constraints

Offset.1 A broken constraint. The access to this product and the

information about its constraints cannot be retrieved.
Parallelism.1 A deactivated constraint (a parallelism constraint).
Perpendicularity.1 A constraint to be updated (a perpendicularity constraint).

Referenced Geometry
Referenced Geometry
Referenced Geometry
Geometry copied from a document different from

the CATPart document in which it is pasted.
Initial geometry has undertaken modifications in

the original CATPart document: solid to be
synchronized.
Initial geometry has been deleted in the original

CATPart document or the original CATPart
document has not been found
Pointed document found but not loaded (use the

Load contextual command or the Edit -> Links
command)
External link deactivated so that geometry cannot

be synchronized during the update of the part
(even if the option "Synchronize all external
references for update" is on).
Geometry pasted (using the As Result with Link

option) within the same CATPart document from
which it is has been copied
Point referenced in the CATPart document is a

published element.

Referenced Geometry
Sketch referenced in the CATPart document is a

published element. The published point has
undertaken modifications so that a synchronization
is required.

Customizing
Customizing

General Settings
CATPart Document
Tolerancing
Display
Manipulators
Tolerancing
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugcu0000.htm10/18/2004 8:15:31 PM
Customizing the Tree and Geometry Views

This task shows you how to control the display of the elements you create in the
specification tree. It also shows you how to control the display of features in the
geometry area.
1. Select the Tools -> Options command.
The Options dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Infrastructure category, then the Part Infrastructure

subcategory, then the Display tab.
The tab appears, containing three categories of options:

● Display in Specification Tree
● Display in Geometry Area
● Checking Operation When Renaming
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascuprt_C2/bascuprt0100.htm (1 of 4)10/18/2004 8:15:46 PM

Display in Specification Tree
There are six options available for customizing the Specification tree display.
● External References
● Constraints
● Parameters (created using the Knowledge Advisor capability. If you wish to
know what parameters and relations are, refer to the CATIA Knowledge
Advisor Users Guide Version 5
● Relations
● Bodies under operations (operations attaching bodies in different ways
(Add, Assemble, Remove, Intersect, Union Trim). This option is available only
with Part Design application. For more, refer to "Associating Bodies" in the
CATIA Part Design Users Guide Version 5.
● Sketches (If the Sketches option is checked, the sketches are displayed in
the specification tree during creation. If unchecked, sketches are present in
the tree but you need to use the expand capability)
Display in Geometry Area
There are four options available for customizing the geometry display.
● The Only the current operated solid option is used when editing features
belonging to attached bodies only. It lets you display only the features of the
current body. This option is available only with Part Design application.
Note: Instead of accessing this option via the Tools -> Options command,
you can click this icon available in the Tools toolbar.
● The Only Current Body option displays the geometry of the current part
body or open body only. By default, this option is no checked.
● The Axis system display size option lets you define the size of axis systems
in mm.
● The Parameters of features and constraints option permanently displays

parameters attached to Part Design features and Sketcher constraints.
Checking Operation When Renaming

Three new options let you define rules for renaming geometric elements (using
the Properties command).
● Use the No name check option (default option) if you wish to allow all types
of rename operations whatever the locations of the elements in the
specification tree.
● Check the Under the same tree node option to prevent two elements
belonging to a common node from having the same name. If you are giving
an identical name, a warning message is issued informing you that the
element you are renaming will be suffixed as 'Renamed'.
The check operation in case-insensitive.
● Check the In the main object option to prevent two elements belonging to
the same main node from having the same name.
The check operation in case-insensitive.

[ Up ] [ Next ]

General Settings
Customizing General Settings

This task shows you how to set general settings.
1. Select the Tools -> Options... command.
2. Click the Infrastructure category, then the Part Infrastructure subcategory.

The General tab appears, containing three categories of options:
● External References
● Update
● Delete Operation
External References

General Settings
● Checking the Keep link with selected object option lets you maintain the links
between external references, copied elements for example, and their origins when
you are editing these elements. This option is used as you are editing parts
included in assemblies. For more about designing parts in assembly context, refer
to the CATIA Assembly Design Users Guide Version 5. If later you need to cut the
link between external references and their origin, you just need to use the Isolate
command.
● Check Create external references in Show mode to define the visualization
mode for external references or imported elements only.
● Check Confirm when creating a link with selected object
● Check Use root context in assembly to ensure that the root of the assembly is
the context used. Uncheck this option if you prefer to use the minimal context. For
more about changing contexts, please refer to the task describing the Define
Contextual Links command in the Product Structure User's Guide.
● Check Only use published elements for external selection if you want to make
only published elements valid for selection.
● Check Publish a face, edge, vertex or extremity if you wish to be able to
directly select faces, edges, vertices, axes extremities when using the Publication
command.
Update
● Check Manual: you wish to control your update operations. Conversely, check
Automatic if you want parts to be updated automatically
● Check Stop Update on first error: to stop the update process as soon as the
application finds an error when building the geometry.
● Check Synchronize all external references for update to make sure that the
application updates elements copied from other parts. Synchronizing assumes that
all modifications to the other parts affect external references included in your part.
If this option is deactivated, the application will update your part only.
● Check Activate local visualization : to visualize features as they are being rebuilt
during the update process.
Delete Operation
● Check Display the Delete dialog box if you wish to access filters for deletion (see
"Deleting Features" in the Part Design Users Guide Version 5).

General Settings
● Check Delete exclusive parents if you wish to delete the parents of the features
you are deleting. The parents will be deleted only if they are exclusive, which
means that if they are shared by other features, they will not be deleted. When this
setting is active, the option is checked in the Delete dialog box, but by default, the
option is not checked.
Even if the option is checked in the Delete dialog box, you can uncheck it if you wish to. If the Display
the Delete dialog box (see above) setting is not checked, this setting has no effect.
For more information, refer to Deleting Features in the Part Design Users Guide
Version 5.

Customizing Constraint Appearance

This task shows you how to customize the display and style of the constraints defined
in your document.
1. Select the Tools->Options command.
The Options dialog box is displayed.

2. Click General category, then the Parameters category, then click the Symbols
tab.
This tab lets you customize:

● Constraint Style
● Dimension Style
● Display at Creation
Note that a Preview glyph displays your preferences as you are specifying them.

Constraint Style
3. To set the colors where

appropriate, click the arrow of
the constraint type combo
box.
A list appears containing the

current color and the colors
available by default.
4. Choose any of these colors.
You can define a personal

color too by choosing "More
Colors...". See CATIA
Infrastructure User's Guide for
more information.
Checking the "Status Color Visualization" option displays only the colors defined
for the different constraint status. This means that if a personal color has been
defined for a given constraint, that color is not visualized any longer. For more about
personal colors, see CATIA Part Design User's Guide.
Filter
5. To choose between the constraints you wish to see or not in the geometry area,
click the Filter button.
The Constraint Filter dialog box contains filter options available for all the constraints
that can be defined for the geometry.

The Filter frame contains three options:

● Show all: shows all the constraints
● Hide all: hides all the constraints
● Conditional Filter: once activated, it makes the options of the Status Filter frame
available. You can then decide whether you wish to display the constraint status or
not, or display unverified or verified constraints. It also makes the Filter by Type
options available. You can then decide the constraint types you wish to display by
checking the appropriate options.
The Filter by Type option lets you filter out driving or driven constraints.
The Product frame contains the Show on active product option. If activated, this
option displays the constraints defined on the active product. This option is specific to
Assembly Design workbench.
6. Uncheck the constraints you do not wish to display and click OK to confirm.

Dimension Style
7. Set the Scale option to Large. This defines the size of the symbols for tangency
and parallelism constraints. You can set:
● Small
● Medium
● Large
8. Check Displays iconified constraint elements. This option increases the number
of graphic symbols you can see in the geometry area. For example, you can see
symmetry axes.
9. Check Highlight pointed elements to make sure the application highlights the
constrained elements when their constraints are pointed to.
10. Enter a value to define the gap between construction lines and geometric
elements. For example, enter 4mm.
The default gap is 2mm. The glyph previews the new gap.
11. Enter a value to define the overrun between construction lines and geometric
elements. For example, enter 9mm.

The glyph previews the new

overrun.
Display at Creation
12. The Display mode option lets you choose between four options:
● 'Value': only the constraint

(or parameter) value is
displayed.
' ● 'Name': only the constraint

(or parameter) name is
displayed.

● 'Name + Value': the

constraint (or parameter)
name and value are both
displayed.
● 'Name + Value
(formula)': the constraint
(or parameter) name and
value are displayed as well
as the possible formula
defined for this constraint.
Whatever mode you choose, it applies to all constraints you are creating. However,
you can edit each constraint individually by using the contextual commands available
(xxxobject -> Value Display or Name Display or Name/Value Display).
12. Click OK to confirm the operation and quit the Options dialog box.

CATPart Document
Customizing a CATPart document
This task shows you how to set general settings.
1. Select the Tools -> Options... command.
2. Click the Infrastructure category, the Part Infrastructure subcategory, then

the Part Document tab.
The tab appears, containing one options: New part.
New Part
Check Create an Axis System when creating a new part if you wish to create a
three-axis system which origin point is defined by the intersection of the three default
planes that is plane xy, plane yz, and plane zx. When the CATPart is open, the axis
system is displayed both in the geometry and in the specification tree. For more
information about the Axis System capability, refer to CATIA - Part Design User's
Guide.
Note: data contained in the CGR format are saved within the CATPart format when
you are saving your part in order to improve performance when working in Assembly
Design workbench.

CATPart Document

Tolerancing
Tolerancing
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure tolerancing
settings.
1. Select Tools -> Options...
The Options dialog box appears.
2. Click the Infrastructure category.
3. Click the 3D Annotations Infrastructure subcategory.
4. Click the Tolerancing tab.
The Tolerancing tab appears, displaying two categories of options:
Tolerancing Standard
Default standard at creation
Defines the default standard at creation.
Provides four conventional standards:

● ASME: American Society for Mechanical Engineers
● ANSI: American National Standards Institute
● ISO: International Organization for Standardization
● JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard
Also provides three CATIA-CADAM standards:

● CCDANSI: CATIA-CADAM American National Standards Institute
● CCDISO: CATIA-CADAM International Organization for
Standardization
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0100.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:16:40 PM

Tolerancing
● CCDJIS: CATIA-CADAM Japanese Industrial Standard
Leader associativity to the geometry
Free
Specifies that leader annotations are freely positioned relative to their

geometrical elements.
Perpendicular
Specifies that leader annotations are positioned perpendicular to their

[ Up ] [ Next ]

Display
Display
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure display
settings.
4. Click the Display tab.
The Display tab appears, displaying two categories of options:
Grid
Display
Defines whether the grid is displayed.
Snap to point
Defines whether annotations are snapped to the grid's point.
Allow Distortions
Defines whether grid spacing and graduations are the same horizontally
and vertically.
H Primary spacing

Display
Defines the grid's horizontal spacing.
H Graduations
Defines the grid's horizontal graduations.
V Primary spacing
Defines the grid's vertical spacing (available only if Allow Distortions is

checked).
V Graduations
Defines the grid's vertical graduations (available only if Allow

Distortions is checked).
Annotations in Specification Tree
Under Geometric Feature nodes
Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the geometric

feature nodes in the specification tree. This lets you view 3D
annotations under the Part Design or GSD feature nodes to which they
are applied.
Under View/Annotation Plane nodes
Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the view/

annotation plane nodes in the specification tree. This lets you view 3D
annotations under the view node to which they are linked.
Under Annotations Set node
Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the annotation

set node in the specification tree.

Manipulators
Manipulators
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure
manipulators settings.
4. Click the Manipulators tab.
The Manipulators tab appears, displaying one option:
Manipulators
Reference size
Defines the annotation manipulator's size.
Zoomable
Defines whether the annotation manipulator is zoomable or not.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0300.htm10/18/2004 8:16:51 PM
This task will show you how to customize 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation
view/annotation plane settings.
2. Click the Mechanical Design category.
3. Click the 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation subcategory.
4. Click the View/Annotation Plane tab.
The View/Annotation Plane tab appears, displaying the following

categories of options:
View/Annotation Plane Associativity
Create views associative to geometry
Creates views associative to the geometry, so that views and their

annotations are automatically updated when the geometry is modified.
View/Annotation Plane Display
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdt0800.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:16:55 PM

Current view axis display
Defines whether the active annotation plane axis system is displayed.
Zoomable
Defines whether the annotation plane axis is zoomable.
Visualization of the profile in the current view
Defines whether the view/annotation plane profile on the part/product

is displayed or not.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdt0800.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 8:16:55 PM

Glossary
Glossary
A
Coordinates that specify a location in relation to the current
absolute coordinates
coordinate system origin (0,0,0).
An entity that provides information for the drawing. Texts are
annotation
annotation entities.
associativity The interdependent relationships between entities.
B
body See part body.
C
chamfer A cut through the thickness of the feature at an angle, giving a
sloping edge.
child A status defining the genealogical relationship between a feature or
element and another feature or element. For instance, a pad is the
child of a sketch. See also parent.
constraint A geometric or dimension relation between two elements. These
relations are restrictions for these elements.
D
deactivate To suppresses the behavior of a feature, visually and geometrically.
draft angle A feature provided with a face with an angle and a pulling direction.
F
feature A component of a part. For instance, shafts, fillets and drafts are
features.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggl.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 8:17:07 PM

Glossary
fillet A curved surface of a constant or variable radius that is tangent to,

and that joins
two surfaces. Together, these three surfaces form either an inside
corner or an
outside corner.
G
groove A feature corresponding to a cut in the shape of a revolved feature.
H
hole A feature corresponding to an opening through a feature. Holes can
be simple, tapered, counterbored, countersunk, or counterdrilled.
M
mirror A feature created by duplicating an initial feature. The duplication is
defined by symmetry.
O
origin The 3D point having the location 0,0,0 in any coordinate system.
P
pad A feature created by extruding a profile.
parent A status defining the genealogical relationship between a feature or
element and another feature or element. For instance, a pad is the
parent of a draft.
part A 3D entity obtained by combining different features.
part body A component of a part made of a combination of several features.

pattern A set of similar features repeated in the same feature or part.
pocket A feature corresponding to an opening through a feature. The shape
of the opening corresponds to the extrusion of a profile.
profile An open or closed shape including arcs and lines created by the
profile command in the Sketcher workbench.

Glossary
reorder An operation consisting in reorganizing the order of creation of the

features.
rib A feature obtained by sweeping a profile along a center curve.
S
scaling An operation that resizes features to a percentage of their initial
sizes.
shaft A revolved feature
shell A hollowed out feature
sketch A set of geometric elements created in the Sketcher workbench. For
instance, a sketch may include a profile, construction lines and
points.
slot A feature consisting of a passage through a part obtained by
sweeping a profile along a center curve.
split A feature created by cutting a part or feature into another part or
feature using a plane or face.
stiffener A feature used for reinforcing a feature or part.

Index
Index
A
absolute axis definition
Activate
contextual menu item
Add
command
Advanced Draft
command
Analysis
toolbars
analyzing
curvature
draft
Annotations
toolbars
annotations
Apply Material
command
Apply Material command
applying
material
Assemble
command
associating
body
axis
Axis System
command
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugix.htm (1 of 21)10/18/2004 8:17:23 PM

Index
B
bisecting
lines
blue
body
associating
editing
name
Boolean operation
Boolean Operations
toolbars
boundaries
creating
Boundary
command
C
canceling
Update
catalog
CATPart documents
cavity
Chamfer
command
Change Body
Change to XXX
changing a sketch support
Circular Pattern
command
Clear selection

Index
Close Surface
command
command
Add
Advanced Draft
Apply Material
Assemble
Axis System
Boundary
Chamfer
Change a Sketch Support
Circular Pattern
Close Surface
Constraint
Constraint Defined in Dialog Box
Copy
Create Datum
Cut
Deactivate
Draft Analysis
Draft Angle
Edge Fillet
Extract
Extrapolate
Face-Face Fillet
Flag Note
Groove
Hole
Insert Body

Index
Intersect
Intersection
Join
line
Local Axis
Mean Dimensions
Mirror
Multi-Pad
Multi-Pocket
Pad
Parent Children
Paste
plane
Pocket
point
PowerCopy Creation
PowerCopy Instantiate From Document
PowerCopy Save in Catalog
Projection
Publication
Rectangular Pattern
Remove
Remove Face
Remove Lump
Removed Multi-sections
Replace Face
Rib
Rotate
Scaling
Scan or Define in Work Object
Sew Surface

Index
Shaft
Shell
Slot
Solid Combine
Split
Stiffener
Surfacic Curvature Analysis
Symmetry
Tap/Thread Analysis
Text with Leader
Thick Surface
Thickness
Thread/Tap
Translation
Tritangent Fillet
Union Trim
Update
User Pattern
commands
Apply Material
Edit-Links
complex profile
Constraint
command
constraint
deactivating/activating
editing
hole
name
reference
renaming

Index
setting
type
Constraint Defined in Dialog Box
command
Constraints
toolbars
contextual command
Show Parents and Children
Activate
Change Body
Change to XXX
Clear selection
Deactivate
Definition
Delete...
Edit Parameters
Explode Pattern
Go to Profile
hide components
open pointed document
Paste Special
Properties
Reorder
Replace
Show All Children
show components
Tangency propagation
controlled by reference
Copy
command
corner
reshaping

Index
corner
counterbored
Hole
counterdrilled
Hole
countersunk
Hole
Create Datum
command
creating
boundaries
curves
datum
elements by intersection
elements by projections
feature
cube
curvature
analyzing
curves
creating
joining
Cut
command
D
datum
datum
creating
Deactivate
command
deactivating/activating

Index
constraint
Definition
Delete...
deleting
feature
pattern
density
part
difficulties
Draft Angle
draft
analyzing
Draft Analysis
command
Draft Angle
command
difficulties
neutral element
parting element
command
parting element
command
drafting
filleting
neutral element
command
drafting
filleting
drafting

Index

Dress-Up Features
toolbars
dress-up features
E
Edge Fillet
command
inside corner
Edit Parameters
editing
body
constraint
feature
part
pattern
Edit-Links command
elements by intersection
creating
elements by projections
creating
entering
Part Design workbench
Explode Pattern
exploding
User Pattern
external reference
Extract
command
extracting

Index
faces
propagation
wireframe elements
Extrapolate
command
extrapolating
surfaces
extrusion
F
Face-Face Fillet
command
face-face fillet
spine
faces
extracting
feature
creating
deleting
editing
parameter
positioning
feature list
file
filleting
filleting
Flag Note
command
flat end
Hole

Index
G
Go to Profile
Groove
command
H
helix
hide components
Hole
command
counterbored
counterdrilled
countersunk
flat end
locating
pointed end
simple
tapered
threading
up to plane
up to surface
V-bottom
hole
constraint
I
Insert Body

Index
command
inside corner
Edge Fillet
instance
interrupting
Update
Intersect
command
intersecting
Intersection
command
J
Join
command
joining
curves
surfaces
L
limiting element
line
command
creating
lines
bisecting
link
material
Link to file option
list of elements
Local Axis
command

Index
locating
Hole
M
mapping
material
material
applying
link
mapping
positioning
properties
Mean Dimensions
command
Mirror
command
multi-document environment
Multi-Pad
command
Multi-Pocket
command
command
N
name
body
constraint
part
neutral element
Draft Angle

Index

nominal dimension
not normal
Pad
O
offset
open pointed document
P
Pad
command
not normal
up to last
up to next
up to plane
up to surface
parameter
feature
Parent Children
command
parentheses
part
density
editing
name
Part Design workbench
entering
parting element
Draft Angle

Index

Paste
command
Paste Special
pattern
deleting
editing
permanent display
pink
plane
command
creating
Pocket
command
up to last
up to plane
up to surface
Pocket command
point
command
creating
pointed end
Hole
positioning
feature
material
PowerCopy Creation
command
PowerCopy Instantiate From Document
command
PowerCopy Save in Catalog
command
profile

Index
projecting
Projection
command
propagation
extracting
Properties
properties
material
properties
Publication
command
pulling direction
purple
R
Rectangular Pattern
command
red
reference
constraint
reference element
Reference Elements
toolbars
Remove
command
Remove Face
command
Remove Lump
command
Removed Multi-sections
command
renaming

Index
constraint
Reorder
Replace
Replace Face
command
reshaping
corner
Rib
command
Rotate
command
S
Scaling
command
Scan or Define in Work Object
command
setting
constraint
Sew Surface
command
Shaft
command
sharp edges
Shell
command
Show All Children
show components
Show Parents and Children
contextual command

Index
simple
Hole
sketch
sketch
changing the support
sketch-based features
Sketched-Based Features
toolbars
Sketcher
Sketcher
toolbars
Sketcher command
Slot
command
solid
Solid Combine
command
specification tree
spine
face-face fillet
Split
command
standards
Stiffener
command
surface
toolbars
surface-based features
surfaces
extrapolating
joining
Surfacic Curvature Analysis

Index
command
symbols
Symmetry
command
T
Tangency propagation
Tap/Thread Analysis
command
tapered
Hole
Thick Surface
command
Thickness
command
thin solids
Thread/Tap
command
threading
Hole
tolerance
toolbars
Analysis
Annotations
Boolean Operations
Constraints
Dress-Up Features
Reference Elements
Sketched-Based Features
Sketcher
Tools

Index
Tools
toolbars
Tools Options
Display tab
Grid
Manipulators
Manipulators tab
Tolerancing tab
View/Annotation Plane tab
toolbars
transformation features
Translation
command
Tritangent Fillet
command
type
constraint
U
Union Trim
command
up to last
Pad
Pocket
up to next

Index
Pad
up to plane
Hole
Pad
Pocket
up to surface
Hole
Pad
Pocket
Update
canceling
command
interrupting
User Pattern
command
exploding
V
command
spine
V-bottom
Hole
W
wireframe elements
extracting
wireframe geometry

CATIA Version 5 Release 12 User's Documentation Home Page
Version 5 Release 12 CATIA

© Dassault Systèmes. 1994-2003 All rights reserved. Documentation
Infrastructure
Mechanical Design
Shape Design
& Styling
Analysis
Equipment &
Systems Engineering
NC Manufacturing
Product Synthesis
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIA_default.htm10/18/2004 8:19:47 PM
Circuit Board Design
The CATIA Version 5 Circuit Board Design is a new generation product which
addresses circuit board design in a mechanical design context and interfaces with
industry standard ECAD systems.
● The CATIA - Circuit Board Design offers the following main functions:
● Data can be exchanged with ECAD Systems through IDF Files (import/export)
● Circuit board geometry is designed within the global assembly product definition
taking into account the mechanical context
● Electronic properties such as top and bottom faces can be defined and edited
on any parts and assemblies
● Spatial and technological constraint areas can be created and managed
● Circuit board definitions can be analyzed in the context of the full Digital Mock-Up
● Creation and management of electronic part catalogs are available
● Multi-representation of electronic components is managed
● Hole and cutout patterns are supported as well as pattern of pattern
● Report capabilities.
As a scalable product, CATIA Version 5 Circuit Board Design can be used in

cooperation with other current or future companion products of the next CATIA
generation such as CATIA Version 5 Assembly Design and ENOVIA-DMU Navigator
Version 5.
Using This Guide

More Information
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/cbdugCATIAfrs.htm (3 of 3)10/18/2004 8:22:43 PM

Sketcher
© Dassault Systèmes. 1994-2003 All rights reserved. Sketcher
Preface
Using This Guide
Conventions
What's New
Getting Started
Entering the Sketcher Workbench
Creating a Line
Creating an Arc of a Circle
Creating a Cylindrical Elongated Hole
Creating a Complex Profile
Trimming Profiles
Generating a Pad
User Tasks
Before You Begin
Using Tools
Using Colors
Cutting the Part by the Sketch Plane
Converting Standard/Construction Elements
Entering Sketcher Workbench
Creating a Positioned Sketch
Setting Constraints
Before you Begin
Quickly Creating Dimensional/Geometrical Constraints
Defining Constraint Measure Direction
Creating Constraints via a Dialog Box
Modifying Constraints On/Between Elements
Modifying Constraint Definition
Auto-Constraining a Group of Elements
Animating Constraints
Analyzing and Resolving Over-Constrained or Inconsistent Sketches
Performing Operations on Profiles
Creating Corners
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/dysugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 4)10/18/2004 8:27:47 PM

Sketcher
Creating Chamfers
Creating Chamfers with One Element Trimmed
Creating Chamfers with No Element Trimmed
Trimming Elements
Breaking & Trimming
Closing Elements
Complementing an Arc
Breaking Elements
Breaking/Trimming Use-Edges
Trimming Multiple Elements
Creating Mirrored Elements
Moving Element by Symmetry
Translating Elements
Rotating Elements
Scaling Elements
Offsetting Elements
Creating Spline Offsets
Projecting 3D Elements
Projecting 3D Silhouette Edges
Intersecting 3D Elements
Copying/Pasting Elements
Isolating Elements
Performing a Quick Geometry Diagnosis
Analyzing the Sketch
Creating Output Features
Editing Profiles
Modifying Element Coordinates
Performing Auto-Search on Profiles
Transforming Profiles
Editing Conic Curves
Editing Connecting Curves
Editing a Spline
Editing Spline Offsets
Editing Parents/Children and Constraints
Editing Projection/Intersection marks
Replacing Geometry
Deleting Sketcher Elements
Sketching Pre-Defined Profiles
Creating Oriented Rectangles
Creating Parallelograms
Creating Elongated Holes
Creating Cylindrical Elongated Holes
Creating Keyhole profiles
Creating Hexagons

Sketcher
Creating Centered Rectangles

Creating Centered Parallelograms
Sketching Simple Profiles
Creating Profiles
Creating Rectangles
Creating Circles
Creating Three Points Circles
Creating Circles Using Coordinates
Creating Tri-Tangent Circles
Creating Arcs
Creating Three Points Arcs
Creating Three Points Arcs (Limits)
Creating Splines
Connecting Curves with a Spline
Connecting Curves with an Arc
Creating Ellipses
Creating Parabola by Focus
Creating Hyperbola by Focus
Creating Conic Curves
Creating Standard or Construction Elements
Creating Lines
Creating an Infinite Line
Creating a Bi-Tangent Line
Creating a Bisecting Line
Creating a Line Normal to a Curve
Creating Symmetrical Extensions
Creating an Axis
Creating Points
Creating Points Using Coordinates
Creating Equidistant Points
Creating Points Using Intersection
Creating Points Using Projection
SmartPick
Before You Begin
SmartPicking ...
Creating Geometry Using SmartPick
Deactivating a Sketch
Command Board
Sketcher Menu Bar
Sketcher Toolbars
Sketch tools
Sketcher

Sketcher
Constraints
Profiles
Operations
Tools Toolbar
Sketcher Specification Tree Icons
Customizing for Sketcher
Glossary
Index
Preface
Sketcher application makes it possible for designers to sketch precise and rapid 2D
profiles.
Using This Guide

Conventions

Preface
Preface
Sketcher application makes it possible for designers to sketch precise and rapid 2D profiles.
Using This Guide

Conventions
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugpr01.htm10/18/2004 8:27:56 PM
Using This Guide
Using This Guide

This book is intended for the user who needs to become quickly familiar with Sketcher
Version 5 product. The user should be familiar with basic Version 5 concepts such as
document windows, standard and view toolbars.
step tutorial Getting Started. This tutorial will show you how to create a basic profile using
SmartPick.
The next sections deal with various types of profiles and associated operations as well as
more details on constraints that can be applied to these profiles. You may also want to take
a look at the Workbench Description sections describing the Sketcher menus and toolbars at
the end of the guide.
To perform the scenarios, you will use sample documents contained in the C:\Program
Files\Dassault Systemes\Bxxdoc\English\online\fdtug\samples folder (where xx in
Bxxdoc stands for the current release number). For more information on accessing sample
documents, refer to Accessing Sample Documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Prior to reading this book, we recommend that you read
● the Infrastructure User's guide Version 5
● the Conventions chapter
What's New
What's New?
New Functionalities
Output
This new function enables the user to publish 2D geometry, construction geometry
and axis within the 3D area. This feature can also be updated independently from the
whole sketch.
Symmetry
This new function provides the capability to move geometry elements by symmetry,
according to a given line.
Conic Curves/Editing Curves
It is now possible to manage curves that will be variational and associative with the
input geometry elements. The conic can also be defined through a parameter.
Trim/Break of Use Edge
You can now trim or break an imported element (projection, intersection, offset)
without modifying the original one.
Spline Offset
You can now create and edit an offset based on an existing spline by using the actual
Offset command. This spline offset will be associative with the original spline.
Projection Point
Creates a scheme of constraints and construction geometry which allow the user to
keep the association between a point and its projected point.
Chamfer/Corner Options
Two new trim options have been added to the Chamfer/Corner commands, it is now
possible to apply a Standard Trim option or a Construction Lines Trim.
Centered Profiles
It is now possible to create centered profiles such as rectangles and parallelograms.
Customizing Settings
Smart Pick Option (see also Customizing)
The SmartPick constraints can now be specified separately from the parallelism,
perpendicularity and tangency ones.
Hiding Cursor Coordinates (see also Customizing)
The cursor coordinates can now be hidden.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugwn.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:28:32 PM

What's New
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugwn.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 8:28:32 PM

Getting Started
Getting Started
The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for creating and modifying sketched elements. Note that you
can apply constraints to the sketched elements.
Specification to be used
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysuggs01.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 8:28:39 PM

Getting Started
Final Pad
This is the part the pad comes from:
This tutorial should take about 40 minutes to complete.

Creating a Line
Trimming Profiles
Generating a Pad


This task lists the different ways of entering the Sketcher workbench.
1. Select Start -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher from the menu bar.
2. Click the chosen reference plane, either in

the geometry area or in the specification tree.
The Sketcher workbench appears as follows:

Modify the Grid Spacing
1. Go to Tools->Options.
2. From the left-hand pane of the Options dialog box, click Mechanical Design->Sketcher.
3. Select the Sketcher tab.
4. Enter 10mm as Primary spacing.
5. If needed, disable the Snap to point mode.
Click here for more information on Grid options.
6. Click OK in the Options dialog box.
You can now start working in the Sketcher workbench.
HV plane calculation in relation to selected plane:

● The normal of the working support is the same as the principal normal of the plane checked. You choose zx plane,
the PRINCIPAL NORMAL is Y
● The first vector H is defined as follow : H= Z x N ( x means vectorial product). N is the normal vector y in our
case. H = -X.
● The second vector V is defined as V = N x H. Don't forget that H;V;N must make a direct trihedron. Since V5 R7
you can reorient the axis system in the work support but the axis system must be direct. So changing one vector
H, change the other.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Creating a Line
Creating a Line
This task will show you how to create a line in order to define point C (line left
extremity).
The Sketch tools toolbar is displayed.
As you will see all along this tutorial, the Sketch tools toolbar displays not
only command options but also given fields and values that appear in
accordance with the command you select. This toolbar is situated at the
bottom right of the software screen.
If you cannot see it properly, just undock it.
Snap to Point
Standard or Construction Elements
Geometrical Constraints (this icon is active, by default).
Dimensional Constraints (this icon is active, by default).
1. Activate the Construction Element icon from the Sketch tools toolbar.
Construction lines are lines that are internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch.
These lines are used as positioning reference. They are not used to create solid
primitives.
2. Click the Line icon from the Profiles toolbar (Line
sub-toolbar).
When the cursor goes over the axis origin, a blue

symbol appears (coincidence between the axis
origin point and the line start point).

Creating a Line
3. Keep the coincidence symbol active and click the

axis origin point.
You created the first extremity point of the line.
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays the following fields and values:
● The values that appear in the toolbar (H, V, L, A and so forth) are automatically
updated as you move the cursor.
● The Sketch tools toolbar constantly provides the characteristics of the current
element (First Point, as an example) as well as the position of this element.
● In addition to the toolbar and whenever possible, the element is dynamically
displayed as it is created. As a result, you can choose more efficiently the optimum
configuration for this element.
4. Press the TAB key as many times as necessary to position the cursor in the desired
field of the Sketch tools toolbar.
You can use the cursor to select the desired field.
In this particular case, position the cursor in L field (length) and key in L: 20.
The value you just keyed in automatically appears in the Sketch tools toolbar, as well
as the corresponding unit.
5. Position the cursor in A field (angle) and key in 188.

Creating a Line
The values of the line second extremity point directly appear in the Sketch tools
toolbar (L and A).
6. Press Enter.
The angle value you keyed in is oriented. As a

consequence, keying in -172 amounts to keying
+188 degrees. The constraint is represented by a
172 angle value because constraint representation
system does not manage angle symbols.
In fact, symbol representation is issued out by means of angle sector management

that you can modify by double clicking angle constraint representation.
Note that if the constraint representation overlays some of the geometry, you can
move this constraint representation by dragging it with the cursor.
The line is created. Constraints (Length: 20mm and Angle: 188 degrees) appear on
the line.


This task will show you how to create an arc of a circle (from point A to B).
Make sure the Construction Element icon (Sketch tools toolbar) is active.
1. Click the Arc icon from the Profiles
toolbar (Circle subtoolbar).
2. Click the arc center point. In this case, select the axis
origin.
A blue symbol appears to illustrate coincidence between

the axis origin and the arc center point to be created.
The Sketch tools toolbar values and fields appear.
3. Position the cursor in H field (horizontal) and key in -27.
4. Position the cursor in V field (vertical) field and key in -10.

The arc of circle will now appear

according to the position you assigned to
the cursor. In this particular case, the
cursor position is at the top extremity of
the arc.
5. Position the cursor in S field (angular

sector) of the Sketch tools toolbar and
key in -57.335.
6. Press Enter.


This task will show you how to create a curved oblong profile as part of the sketch to
be created. This curved oblong profile will be created in accordance with previously
positioned construction lines. In other words, the curved oblong profile is centered on
point B, starts from point C and is assigned a 27 degree angular sector.
1. Click the Cylindrical Elongated Hole

icon from the Profiles toolbar
(Predefined Profile subtoolbar).
2. De-activate the Construction Element

icon from the Sketch tools toolbar.
3. Make sure the Dimensional Constraint
icon is still active.
4. Click point B (arc top extremity point)

to define the curved oblong profile
center.
Before you click, a blue symbol
appears to illustrate coincidence between
the selected points and the profile
angular sector to be created.
Note that if you position the cursor outside the zone that is allowed for creating a
given element, the symbol appears. In this particular case, trying to create a
degenerated arc (0 deg sector) displays the symbol.

5. Click point C (extremity point of the

construction line previously created).
New values and fields appear in the

Sketch tools toolbar.
6. Position the cursor in Radius field, key

in 1 and press Enter.
7. Position the cursor in S field (angular

sector) and key in 27.
8. Press Enter.
This is the final cylindrical elongated

hole:

As you could see above, geometrical

elements are assigned given colors. This
is to make the sketch geometrical
configuration more easily
understandable. Purple means that
geometry is over-constrained. Green
means that the geometry is iso-
constrained (cannot be moved).
At this step, we strongly advise that you save the cylindrical elongated hole.


This task shows how to create a more complex profile which is another part of the final
sketch. You are going to create lines and arcs of circles one after the other.
In case you did not save the previously created sketch, you can open the
GettingStarted_profile01.CATPart document.
If you are not satisfied with what you create, you can, at any time, use Undo or
Redo icons.
Specification:

1. Click on the Profile icon from the Profiles toolbar.
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays the following option commands and values:
Line Tangent Arc Three Point Arc
Three Point Arc
2. Select the Three Point Arc option command from the Sketch tools toolbar.
3. Select a point on the curved oblong profile (arc D).
Coincidence ( ) is applied between arc D on the cylindrical elongated hole and the
arc start point.

4. Click a point which the profile is going to go through (arc second point).

The Sketch tools toolbar displays values for defining the arc.
5. Position the cursor in R (arc radius) field of the Sketch tools toolbar and key in 2.
6. Press Enter.
You define the three point arc radius to which you impose the above values. In other
words, at this very moment, whatever the new location you may give to the cursor,
the three point arc will definitely go through the two points previously clicked and will
definitely be assigned a 2 mm radius.
7. Drag the cursor and click a point in the free space to define the arc end point.
Tangent Line
Make sure the Line option command (Sketch tools toolbar) is now active.
8. Start dragging the line in order to make it tangent to the arc you just created.

To make this line tangent to the arc you just created, SmartPick automatically helps
fixing the cursor position so that tangency may be kept. Autodetection displays the
tangency symbol .
9. Press the Ctrl key to keep detected the tangency constraint, whatever the position
of the cursor. In other words, you lock tangency whatever the position of the cursor.
10. Drag the line end point up to the desired position.
Before pressing the Ctrl button, make sure you are detecting one and only one
constraint on the current element. Otherwise, this constraint will not be locked, and
not even created.

Tangent Arc
11. Press, hold down and drag the left mouse button to the arc end point.
In other words, you are dragging the cursor so that you automatically activate the
Tangent Arc mode. No sooner do you stop pressing the left mouse button that
the arc appears on your sketch.
If you cannot manage creating the tangent arc using the left mouse button, what you
can do is select the Tangent Arc option command in the Sketch tools toolbar.

12. Position the cursor in R field (radius) of the Sketch tools toolbar and key in 3.5.
13. Click the arc end point.
Tangent Line
14. Start dragging the line and press the Ctrl key to lock tangency detection.
15. Click a point on the sketch above OC construction line to create the line end point.

Ending Tangent Arc

16. Press the left mouse button and drag the cursor down on the sketch to create
another tangent arc.
17. Key in 5 as tangent arc radius in the Sketch tools toolbar.
As you can see above, in accordance with the specifications, to end the complex profile
creation, you need to create a 5mm arc which cuts the cylindrical elongated hole at arc
E. If the arc segment extremity results too far from arc E, it means that both these

conditions are not fulfilled. As a result the arc will not cut the cylindrical elongated
hole. In this case, press the Undo command.
18. Double-click the point at which you want the complex profile to coincide with the
curved oblong profile (see symbol).
Constraints (Tangency)
19. Multi-select the elements requested for creating tangency constraints .
Multi-selected elements

(Case 1) (Case 2)
20. Click the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box icon .
21. Check the desired options in

the Constraint Definition dialog box.
Resulting tangency constraints
(Case 1) (Case 2)

Constraints (Coincidence)
Multi-selected elements
22. Multi-select the arc center point

and the axis origin point for
creating a coincidence constraint
.
23. Click the Constraints Defined in

Dialog Box icon and check the Resulting constraint
desired options in the Constraint
Definition dialog box.

Final Complex Profile:
Final Specification Tree:
The specification tree is grouped in accordance with the elements. It can be ungrouped

as shown here:

Trimming Profiles
Trimming Profiles
This task shows how to relimit the profile you just created by trimming some elements
in this profile.
1. Double-click the Quick Trim icon
from the Operation subtoolbar

(Relimitations subtoolbar).
The possible trim option commands are

displayed in the Sketch tools toolbar.
2. Click the Rubber In option command in

the Sketch tools toolbar.
3. Select the elements to be trimmed, one after the other.

Trimming Profiles
These elements are

automatically trimmed.

Generating a Pad
Generating a Pad
This task shows you how to create a pad from the profile previously created. For this,
you will leave the Sketcher workbench and automatically enter Part Design workbench.
1. Click the Exit icon .

You are now in Part Design workbench. If this is not the case, select Start ->
Mechanical Design -> Part Design from the menu bar.
The sketched profile appears as follows:
The Pad Definition dialog box

appears.
3. Enter 5mm as the pad Length.
4. Click OK.

Generating a Pad
The pad appears as shown here:
[ Back ] [ Up ]

User Tasks
User Tasks
The Sketcher workbench provides a simple method for creating and editing 2D geometry as well as creating relations
between geometrical elements. Once created, you can set constraints between geometrical elements, if you need more
complex sketches.
Before You Begin

Setting Constraints
Editing Profiles
SmartPick
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugbt0000.htm10/18/2004 8:30:36 PM
Before You Begin
Before You Begin

Before you begin, you should be familiar with the following tools and concepts that will help
you in:
● creating simple or predefined profile with or without using SmartPicking
● editing or performing operations on these profiles
● adding constraints on profiles
Using Tools
Use the Sketch tools toolbar displayed in the bottom right part of the
software screen which provides helpful options
Using Colors
Use colors to define either graphical properties or constraint diagnostics.

Hide the portion of part you do not want to see in the Sketcher.
Converting Standard into Construction Elements

Assign a new type of a line to an element for differentiating construction
from non construction elements.
[ Up ] [ Next ]
Using Tools
Using Tools For Sketching

This task shows how the software can assist you when sketching elements.
The Sketch tools toolbar is displayed in the bottom right part of the software
screen and provides the following options commands:
Snap to Point
Construction/Standard Element
Geometrical Constraints
Dimensional Constraints
Value fields (Sketch tools

toolbar)
You do not necessarily visualize the whole Sketch tools toolbar. Just
undock it to display all the available options and fields.
Working with the Snap to Point option

If activated, this option makes your sketch begin or end on the points of the grid. As you
are sketching the points are snapped to the intersection points of the grid. Note that this
option is also available in the Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option
at the left of the dialog box (Sketcher tab). For more information, see Infrastructure
user's guide (Customization Settings).
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugbt0303.htm (1 of 5)10/18/2004 8:31:08 PM

Using Tools
In the following example, the

white spline was created with
Snap to Point on. The points
are on the grid.
Conversely, the here

highlighted spline was created
with the Snap to Point option
deactivated.
Note that when you zoom in, snapping option remains active both on primary and
secondary grids, even though the secondary grids are not visualized any more.
When SmartPick is active, points may not snap at the intersection points of the grid. Care
that they will necessarily snap on an horizontal or a vertical grid subdivision.
The SmartPick capability works even if this option is on.
Creating Construction/Standard Elements

You can create two types of elements: standard elements and construction elements.
Note that creating standard or construction elements is based upon the same
methodology.
If standard elements represent the most commonly created elements, on some occasions,
you will have to create a geometry just to facilitate your design. Construction elements
aim at helping you in sketching the required profile.
1. Click the Construction/Standard Element option command from the Sketch tools
toolbar so that the elements you are now going to create be either standard or
construction element.

Using Tools
As construction elements are

not taken into account when
creating features, note that
they do not appear outside the
Sketcher.
● When they are not used anymore, construction elements are automatically removed.
● Note that in the case of hexagons, construction element type is automatically used for
secondary circles. This type of sketch is interesting in that it simplifies the creation and
the ways in which it is constrained. Setting a radius constraint on the second circle is
enough to constrain the whole hexagon. Just imagine what you would have to do to
constrain hexagons sketched with no construction circles!
Creating Geometrical Constraints

When selected, the Geometrical Constraint option command allows forcing a
limitation between one or more geometry elements.
Creating Dimensional Constraints

When selected, the Dimensional Constraint option command allows forcing a
dimensional limitation on one or more profile type elements provided you use the value
fields in the Sketch tools toolbar for creating this profile.

Using Tools
To know more about sketcher

constraints, please refer to
Setting Constraints, and
Infrastructure user's guide
(Customization Settings).
Value Fields (Sketch tools toolbar)
The values of the elements you sketch appear in the Sketch tools toolbar as you move
the cursor. In other words, as you are moving the cursor, the Horizontal (H), Vertical (V),
Length (L) and Angle (A) fields display the coordinates corresponding to the cursor
position.
You can also use these fields for entering the values of your choice. In the following
scenario, you are going to sketch a line by entering values in the appropriate fields.
1. Click the Line icon.
The Sketch tools toolbar displays information in the four value fields.
2. Enter the coordinates of the First Point.
3. Enter the coordinates of the Second Point.
OR
2. Enter the length (L) of the line.
3. Enter the value of the angle (A) between the line to be created and the horizontal axis.

Using Tools
4. Click the first point on the line.
The line is created.

Depending on the number of fields available and the way you customize your toolbars,
some fields may be truncated. What you need to do is just undock the Sketch tools
toolbar.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Using Colors
Using Colors
Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors
correspond to colors illustrating:
● Graphical properties
Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the
contextual menu (Properties option and Graphic tab).
OR
● Constraint diagnostics
Colors that represent constraint diagnostics are colors that are imposed to elements
whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in
accordance with given diagnostics. As a result, as soon as the diagnostic is solved,
the element is assigned the color as defined in the Properties dialog box (Graphic
tab).
COLORS and GRAPHICAL PROPERTIES
Grey: Construction Element

Elements that are internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch. These elements are used
as positioning references. These elements cannot be visualized in the 3D and therefore
cannot be used to generate solid primitives.
Yellow: Non Modifiable Element

Using Colors
For example, use edges. These elements cannot be modified, graphically speaking.
Red Orange: Selected Element

A subgroup of elements actually selected (the Select icon is similarly active).
COLORS and DIAGNOSTICS SOLUTION:
White: Under-Constrained Element

The geometry has been constrained: all the relevant Add constraints.
dimensions are satisfied but there are still some degrees of
freedom remaining.

Using Colors
Brown: Element Not Changed

Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-
Remove one or more
consistent. As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the
dimensional constraints.
problematic area will not be recalculated.
Green: Fixed Element

The geometry has been fixed using the Constraint Definition
dialog box or the contextual menu (right mouse button).

Using Colors
Green: Iso-Constrained Element

All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed
and cannot be moved from its geometrical support.
Geometry before and after being moved:
Purple: Over-Constrained Element

The dimensioning scheme is overconstrained: too many Remove one or more
dimensions were applied to the geometry. dimensional constraints.

Using Colors
Red: Inconsistent Element

At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also Add dimensions. Set
the case when elements are underconstrained and the system dimension value(s) properly.
proposes values by defaults that do not lead to a solution.
Inconsistent and Over-Constrained Elements:
When leaving the sketcher, the software will only generate a warning for inconsistent
and over-constrained elements if they belong to a sketch issued from the release 5 or
releases before. Since release 6, the software generates an error.


This task shows how to make some edges visible. In other words, you are going to
simplify the sketch plane view by hiding the portion of material you do not need for
sketching.
1. Select the plane on which you need to sketch a

new profile and enter the Sketcher workbench.
Once in the Sketcher, you obtain this view, which

does not show the edges generated by the shell
feature.
2. Click the Cut Part by Sketch Plane icon on the

Tools toolbar to hide the portion of part you do not
want to see in the Sketcher.
You obtain this view without the material existing

above the sketch plane.
The edges corresponding to the shell are now visible.

The edges resulting from the intersection are not
visualized and therefore cannot be selected.
3. You can now sketch the required profile taking these edges into account.


Converting Standard into Construction

Elements
This task shows how to convert standard elements into construction elements and
vice versa.
Open the Construction_Standard.CATPart document from the \online\samples

\Sketcher directory.
1. Select the line (standard type) you wish to

convert into a construction line.
2. Click the Construction/Standard Element option

command from the Sketch tools toolbar.
The line you previously selected appears dashed to

show it is a new type of line.
3. Click the Construction/Standard Element option

command again.
The construction line is converted into a standard

line.

Double-clicking on the line displays the Line Definition dialog box in which you can
un-check the Construction element option if you want to convert the construction
line into a standard line. For more information, refer to Modifying Element
Coordinates.
● In certain cases, construction elements are automatically created (e.g. when

offsetting canonical elements, or when creating lines normal to a curve). If you
subsequently delete the constraint or one of the elements, the construction
element will be automatically removed.
● Construction lines are not taken into account when entering another workbench.
● Applying the Construction/Standard Element option on axes has no effect.
[ Back ] [ Up ]


This task lists the different ways of entering the Sketcher workbench.
Creating a sketch
To create a sketch, you have several possibilities:
● Select Start -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher from the menu bar.
● Select the Sketch with Absolute Axis Definition icon and specify the reference plane,
and the origin and orientation of the axis system. This enables you to create a positioned
sketch.
This is the recommended method for creating a sketch, as it enables you to
define explicitly the position of the axis system and ensures associativity with
the 3D geometry.
● Select the Sketcher icon and click the desired reference plane either in the geometry
area or in the specification tree, or select a planar surface. This creates a "non-
positioned" sketch (i.e. a sketch for which you do not specify the origin and orientation of
the absolute axis, which are not associative with the 3D geometry). The sketch absolute
axis may "slide" on the reference plane when the part is updated.

● Select one plane of the local axis. h and v are aligned to the main axes of this selected
plane. Associativity is kept between both the plane and the sketch.
The Sketcher workbench appears as follows:
Editing an existing sketch

To edit an existing sketch, you have several possibilities:
● Double-click the sketch or an element of the sketch geometry, either in the geometry
area or in the specification tree.
● To do this from the 3D, right-click the sketch in the specification tree, point to [sketch
name] object in the contextual menu, and then select Edit.

Adding a Grid
1. Go to Tools->Options.
2. Click Mechanical Design-> in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box.
3. Select the Sketcher tab.
4. Enter 10mm as Primary spacing.
5. If needed, deactivate the Snap to point mode.
Click here for more information on Grid options.
6. Click OK in the dialog box.

You can now start working in the Sketcher workbench.
HV plane calculation in relation to selected plane:
● The normal of the working support is the same as the principal normal of the plane
checked. You choose zx plane, the PRINCIPAL NORMAL is Y
● The first vector H is define as follow : H= Z x N ( x means vectorial product). N is the
normal vector y in our case. H = -X.
● The second vector V is define as V = N x H Don't forget that H;V;N must make a direct
trihedron. Since V5 R7 you can reorient the axis system in the work support but the axis
system must be direct. So when changing one vector H, change the others too.


In this task, you will learn how to create a positioned sketch, in which you specify the
reference plane, and the origin and orientation of the absolute axis.
Creating a positioned sketch enables you to define (and later change) explicitly the
position of the sketch absolute axis. This offers the following advantages:
● You can use the absolute axis directions like external references for the sketched
profile geometry.
● When the geometry of the part evolves and the associated position of the sketch
changes, the shape of the sketched profile (2D geometry of the sketch) remains
unchanged (even if the sketched profile is under-constrained).
Creating a positioned sketch also ensures associativity with the 3D geometry.
Open the Positioned_sketch.CATPart document.
You will now create a positioned

sketch that will enable you to
design the retaining bracket for
this part.
You will position the sketch

absolute axis as follows:
● its origin will be on the axis of
revolution,
● its horizontal (H) direction will
be parallel to the root face,
● its vertical (V) direction will be
normal to the root face.

1. From the Insert menu, select

Sketcher and then select the
Sketcher... option.
OR
1. Click the down arrow next to
the Sketcher icon , and select

the Sketch with Absolute Axis
Definition icon .
The Sketch Positioning dialog box

appears.
In the Type field in the Sketch

Support area, two options are
available:
● Positioned (pre-selected):
creates a positioned sketch for
which you specify the origin and
orientation of the absolute axis.
● Sliding: creates a "non-
positioned" sketch, i.e. a sketch
for which you do not specify the
origin and orientation of the
absolute axis. This option is
mainly used for compatibility
with non-positioned sketches,
and to enable you to turn them
into positioned sketches. With
the Sliding option, the sketch
absolute axis may "slide" on the
reference plane when the part is
updated.

Keep the Positioned option

selected.
2. You will now specify the

reference plane for the sketch. To
do this, make sure the Reference
field is active, and select the blue
surface (Shaft.1).
The Sketch Positioning dialog box

is updated: the Reference field
now indicates the reference plane.
Also, the Type fields of the Origin
and Orientation areas are
activated and the Implicit mode
is pre-selected.
With the Implicit mode, the

reference plane origin and
orientation is positioned according
to the geometry used for the
sketch plane:
● When the sketch support is a
plane, the origin is a projection
of the reference plane origin in
the sketch plane, and the
orientation is parallel to the
reference plane directions.
This is the case in our example;
the reference plane does not
appear on the surface because
the part is out of line with the
reference plane.
● When the sketch support is
defined by two secant lines, the
origin is at the intersection of
these. The H direction is co-
linear to the first line, and its

orientation directly depends on

the orientation of this line. The
V direction is deduced from the
second line, which is not
necessarily orthogonal to the
first line. This second line
simply defines, depending on its
orientation, the side where the
V direction will be positioned in
relation to the H direction.

absolute axis origin so to make it
coincident with the axis of
revolution of the part.
To do this, select Curve
intersection in the Type field of
the Origin area. The Reference
field is activated.
4. Select the cylindrical surface to

make its axis intersect with the
absolute axis origin.

The absolute axis of the sketch is now positioned on this axis. Its orientation has not
changed.


absolute axis orientation according
to that of the root face. To do this,
select Parallel to line in the Type
field of the Orientation area. The
Reference field is activated.
6. Select an edge of the root face.
The absolute axis of the sketch is now oriented like the selected edge.

7. You will now invert the H

direction and make the V direction
normal to the root face. To do this,
start by selecting V Direction in
the Orientation area to specify
that you want the orientation to be
defined according to the V
direction.
8. Then, check the Reverse V box

to revert the V direction.
9. Finally, check the Swap box to

swap H and V directions.
The sketch is now positioned as

wanted.
10. Click OK to validate and exit the Sketch Positioning dialog box. You are now ready
to sketch a profile for the retaining bracket.

● The absolute axis (its origin point, both its directions and the grid) can be used to
specify the position and dimensions of the 2D geometry because it is associative
with the part.
● With positioned sketches, the origin and directions of the absolute axis are similar to
external references (Use-Edges) obtained using additional projections or
intersections when creating non-positioned sketches.
● In this exercise, you did not create any constraints on 2D geometry: the geometry
is under-constrained. Yet, if you move or resize the part (no matter how
significantly), the profile you sketched will remain absolutely unchanged. Its shape
will not be altered: thanks to the fact that the position of its absolute axis is
explicitly defined, it is automatically pre-positioned in 3D before its 2D resolution.
● At any time after creating a positioned sketch, you can change the reference plane,
the origin and the orientation of the absolute axis by specifying the new geometry in
the associated Reference field. To do this from the 3D, right-click the positioned
sketch in the specification tree, point to [sketch name] object in the contextual
menu, and then select Change sketch support.


This task shows you how to change the position of a sketch by changing its support. Changing a sketch
support amounts to editing the absolute axis definition of the sketch.
Open the Change_Sketch_Support.CATPart document.
In this scenario, you will edit the absolute axis definition of Pocket.2\Sketch.3 by making it associative to
Pocket.1. This will ensure that, when moving Pocket.1, Pocket.2 follows Pocket.1 without requiring you to
edit the geometry of Sketch.3.
1. From the specification tree, right-click Sketch.3.
2. In the contextual menu which is displayed, select Sketch.3 object -> Change Sketch Support....
If a message appears, informing you that if you change its position, the sketch may become inconsistent
or over-constrained, simply click OK.
The Sketch Positioning dialog box appears.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugchangesketchsupport.htm (1 of 6)10/18/2004 8:32:17 PM

3. If the Move Geometry option at the bottom of this dialog box is checked, uncheck it. This will
prevent the geometry from moving when performing the next operation(s) in the dialog box.
In the Type field in the Sketch Support area, three options are available:
● Positioned: positions the sketch using the origin and orientation of the absolute axis.
● Sliding: default type used for non-positioned sketches (i.e. when you edit a non-positioned
sketch, this option will be selected by default, as is the case in our example). This option is
mainly used for compatibility purposes, and to enable you to turn non-positioned sketches into
positioned ones.
With the Sliding option, the sketch is not positioned, i.e. the origin and orientation of the
absolute axis is not specified. As a result, its absolute axis may "slide" on the reference plane
when the part is updated.
● Isolated: isolates the sketch in order to break all absolute axis links (support, origin and
orientation links) with the 3D or to solve update errors. Only the 3D position will be kept, to
ensure that the sketch does not move. With the Isolated option, you cannot define the sketch
support, origin and orientation.
4. Select the Positioned option, and make sure Pad.1\Face is selected as the reference element for
the sketch support (Reference field).

5. At this point, check the Move Geometry option to specify that, from now on, the geometry should
be moved when the sketch position is modified.
6. Check the Swap box to swap H and V directions. The new sketch position is previewed in the
geometry area.
You are now going to make the absolute axis associative with Pocket.1.
7. Uncheck the Move Geometry option once again to ensure that the geometry does not move
according to the newly defined axis.
8. In the Type field in the Origin area, select Intersection 2 lines.

9. You will now specify the reference element for the origin. To do this, make sure the Reference field
is active, and select a horizontal edge of Pocket.1 as shown below.

10. Now, select a vertical edge of Pocket.1 as shown below.
11. In the Orientation areas, leave the Type field set to Implicit and the Reference field set to No
Selection.
For more information on the other options available in the Origin and in the Orientation areas, refer to
Creating a Positioned Sketch in the Sketcher User's Guide.
12. Click OK. The absolute axis definition of Sketch.3 is modified and the position of the pocket is
changed.

13. From the specification tree, double-click Sketch.2 to edit it.
14. On the sketch, double-click the value of Offset.57.

15. In the Constraint Definition dialog box which is displayed, enter a new value, 90 for example, and
click OK. The constraint is updated, and Sketch.2 is moved accordingly.
16. Exit the Sketcher workbench. As you can see, Pocket.1 has been moved, and Pocket.2 is still
positioned according to the absolute axis you defined for Sketch.3.

Setting Constraints
Setting Constraints
You can set geometrical and dimensional constraints on various types of elements.
Before you Begin

You should be familiar with important concepts.
Creating Quick Dimensional/Geometrical Constraints

Set constraints on elements or between two or three elements. The
constraints are in priority dimensional. Use the contextual menu to get
other types of constraints and to position this constraint as desired.

Define the measure direction as you create a dimensional constraint.
Creating Contact Constraints

Apply a constraint with a relative positioning that can be compared to
contact. You can either select the geometry or the command first. Use the
contextual menu if you want to insert constraints that are not those created
in priority.

Double-click a constraint and modify the definition using the Constraint
Creating Constraints Using a Dialog Box

Set various geometrical constraints between one or more elements using a
dialog box and if needed, multi-selection.
Modifying Constraints on/between Elements

Edit geometrical constraints defined on elements or between elements
either in the Sketcher or in the 3D area.

Detects possible constraints between selected elements and imposes these
constraints once detected.

Setting Constraints
Assign a set of values to the same angular constraint and examine how the
whole system is affected.

Before you Begin
Before You Begin
What is SmartPick?
SmartPick is an intuitive, easy-to-use tool designed to make all your Sketcher creation and edition tasks as
simple as possible.
SmartPick dynamically detects the following geometrical constraints:

● support lines and circles
● alignment
● parallelism
● perpendicularity
● tangency
● concentricity
● horizontality and verticality
● midpoint
What are Constraints?

There are times when simple sketches are adequate for your design process, but you will often need to work
on more complex sketches requiring a rich set of geometrical or dimensional constraints. The Sketcher
workbench provides constraint commands which will allow you to fully sketch your profiles.
When you apply constraint on curves, lines, circles and ellipses, the complete geometrical support is taken
into account.
As an example for this arc, the entire circle is taken into account when you apply constraints.

Before you Begin
The location you click when selecting the element(s) to constrain is taken into account to create the
constraints (it is used to position the constraints accurately). Therefore, when selecting the element(s) to
constrain, it is important that you click where you want the constraint to be positioned. The software will
then position the constraint according to the area where you clicked.
This is especially true when creating constraints on certain types of curves (complex curves like splines, for
example). In some cases, if you don't click in the right place when selecting the curve to constrain, the
constraint and the geometry will be inconsistent.
A geometrical constraint is a relationship that forces a limitation between one or more geometric
elements. For example, a geometrical constraint might require that two lines be parallel. If you select three
lines, or two lines and a point, these elements will automatically result parallel to each others, as illustrated
in the table further down.
You can set a constraint on one element or between two or more elements.
Corresponding Geometrical
Number of Elements
Constraints
Fix
Horizontal
One Element Vertical
Coincidence
Concentricity
Tangency
Parallelism
Two Elements Midpoint
Perpendicularity
Symmetry
Three Elements
Equidistant Point
When creating your constraint, remember that a green constraint is a valid constraint by default. Conversely, a
yellow constraint indicates that the definition is not valid. The software lets you customize the colors and more
generally the style of the constraints you use. To have details about these capabilities, see Infrastructure User's
guide.
When you position the cursor on constraint symbols, the software calls your attention on the elements involved
in the constraint system. Here are two examples of what you may get.

Before you Begin
A dimensional constraint is a constraint whose value determines geometric object measurement. For example, it
might control the length of a line, or the distance between two points.
You will use the Constraint command to finalize your profile. The Constraint command allows you to set
dimensional or geometrical constraints but you will mainly use it to set dimensional constraints.
You can combine dimensional constraints to constrain a feature or sketch.
You can set a dimensional constraint on one element or between two elements.
Number of Corresponding Dimensional

Elements Constraints
Length
Radius/Diameter
Semimajor axis
One Element Semiminor axis
Distance
Angle
Two Elements
You can apply a diameter constraint between

two lines provided one of these lines is an
axis line.
What About Constraining While Sketching?

Provided you previously activated the Constraint command , sketching certain elements automatically
generates constraints although you did not specify that you wanted these elements to be actually constrained.

Before you Begin
What About Constraint Visualization?
Symbol Constraint Type
Perpendicular
Coincidence
Vertical
Horizontal
Fix/Unfix
Parallel
/ Radius/Diameter
What About Constraint Colors?

As soon as you detect a constraint problem, try to solve this problem. Otherwise, if you let the model be
overloaded with diagnostics, it will soon become very hard for you to find the origin for each of these
diagnostics.
For more information about overdefined or inconsistent sketches, see Analyzing and Resolving overdefined or
inconsistent Sketches
COLOR and DIAGNOSTIC SOLUTION:
White: Under-Constrained Element

The geometry has been constrained: all the relevant dimensions are satisfied but Add constraints.
there are still some degrees of freedom remaining.

Before you Begin
Brown: Element Not Changed

● Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent,
● or the geometry is fixed, Remove one or more
● or there is either two free or one free and one fixed geometry in the same set. dimensional constraints, or,
in the case of fixed
geometry, unfix it.
As a result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be
recalculated.
Green: Fixed Element

The geometry has been fixed using the Constraint Definition dialog box or the
contextual menu (right mouse button).
Green: Iso-Constrained Element

All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be
moved from its geometrical support.
Geometry before and after being moved:

Before you Begin
Purple: Over-Constrained Element

The dimensioning scheme is overconstrained: too many dimensions were applied to Remove one or more
the geometry. dimensional constraints.
Red: Inconsistent Element

At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when Add dimensions. Set
elements are underconstrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to dimension value(s) properly.
a solution.
Inconsistent and Over-Constrained Elements
If a sketch contains inconsistent and over-constrained elements when leaving the Sketcher workbench:
● For sketches created with versions starting from V5 R6: an error message will be displayed.
● For sketches created with versions up to V5 R5 (included): only a warning will be generated .

Before you Begin
Creating a Constraint Between a 2D and a 3D Element

When you need to create a constraint between a 3D element and a line, for example, this creation may result
impossible. This is the case when the projection or intersection resulting use-edge does not give a unique
solution. In other words, the use-edge (projection of one side of a pad) corresponds to several limit edges of
the side.
As a result, you will not be able to select this 3D element when creating the constraint. You will therefore
have to use manually the projection operators.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

SmartPick
Using SmartPick
SmartPick allows you working with a higher productivity by using the available Smart
Pick cursor.
Before you Begin

SmartPicking a Point
Specify a location either for you to create geometry or for SmartPick to
return information via symbols.

Position geometry to be created according to existing geometry, if needed,
and to internal parameters.
Quickly Creating Dimensional/Geometrical

Constraints
This task shows you how to set dimensional or geometrical constraints between one,
two or three elements. The constraints are in priority dimensional. Use the contextual
menu to get other types of constraints and to position this constraint as desired.
In this particular case, we will set constraints between two elements by selecting the
command and then a line and a circle.
But what you can also do is set dimensional constraints by multi-selecting the circle
and line, and then clicking the Constraint icon . At any time, you may move the
cursor: the distance value will vary accordingly. Click for positioning the newly created
dimensional constraint.
1. Select the Constraint icon from the Constraint
toolbar.
2. Select a first element. For example, a circle.
The circle diameter is computed.
3. Select a second element. For example, a line.
The relation between the two elements is reconsidered. In

other words, the diameter of the circle is no longer
displayed.

The non-minimal distance between the two selected

elements will be computed according to the point selected
on the circle.
4. Use the contextual menu (Tangency) to set a tangency

constraint between the line and the circle.
The circle and the line are now tangent.

5. Select the Constraint icon .
6. Select the line and click the Fix contextual command to

prevent the line from moving.
The line is fixed and the anchor, that is the fix symbol,
appears.
To unfix the line, you can use the Unfix contextual menu
item.
● A Projection/Intersection edge created by a constraint is hidden till the software

detects a problem with this constraint. In this case, it appears to indicate the error
to the user.
● When creating a coincidence constraint between a point in the current sketch and a
3D element outside the sketch, by default the constraint is created on the projection
of this 3D element whenever possible. (The constraint is created on the intersection
of this 3D element with the sketch plane only when there is no projection for the 3D
element.) So if you want to create a constraint on the intersection of the 3D
element with the sketch plane, you need create an intersection between this 3D
element and the sketch plane, and then create the coincidence constraint with the
intersected point.

● The Shift key lets you deactivate a constraint (auto-detected via SmartPick).
The Ctrl key lets you lock the constraint currently created and lets you create
others.
● Selecting one element lets you create a dimensional constraint.
Selecting two elements lets you create a distance or an angle constraint.
● If you want to create a symmetry or equidistance constraints on three elements,
you must select Allow symmetry line in the contextual menu after having selected
the two first elements.
You can also define constraints using the Constraint Definition dialog box, the
command, or by means of the contextual command (right-click).


This task shows you how to define the measure direction as you create a dimensional
constraint. For example, you will assign the horizontal measure direction to a
constraint to be created between two circles.
Create two circles and create a

constraint between them via the
Constraint icon (Constraint
toolbar).
1. Right-click the displayed

constraint and display the
contextual menu.
2. Select the Horizontal Measure

Direction.
The constraint is now positioned

according to the horizontal direction.

Via the contextual menu, you can

also create a radius/diameter
constraint on half a profile that will
then be used as a revolution profile.
The constraint diameter will
correspond to the shaft diameter.
The constraint measure direction may also be defined, and in other words modified,
after the constraint was created. You will then simply select the constraint before
displaying the contextual menu.


This task shows you how to set various geometrical constraints using a dialog box. For
example, you can use the Constraint command to finalize your profile and set
constraints consecutively.
You may define several constraints simultaneously using the Constraint Definition
dialog box, or by means of the contextual command (right-click).
If you want the constraints to be created permanently, make sure you activate the
Dimensional constraints icon and/or the Geometrical constraints icon
(depending on the type of constraint you want to create) from the Sketch Tools
toolbar. If you do not activate these icons, the constraints will only be created
temporarily.
Open the Constraint_DialBox.CATPart document.
1. Multi-select the elements to be constrained.

For example, two lines.
2. Click the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box

icon from the Constraint toolbar.

The Constraint Definition dialog box appears,

indicating the types of constraints you can set
between the selected lines (selectable options).
● These constraints may be constraints to be

applied either one per element (Length,
Fix, Horizontal, Vertical) or constraints
between two selected elements
(Distance, Angle, Coincidence,
Parallelism or Perpendicular).
● Multi-selection is available.
● If constraints already exist, they are checked
in the dialog box, by default.
Note that, by default, a diameter constraint is created on closed circles when

checking the Radius/Diameter option. If you need a radius constraint, you just
have to convert this constraint into a radius constraint by double-clicking it
and choosing the Radius option.
3. Check the Perpendicular option to specify

that you want the lines to always remain
perpendicular to each others, whatever ulterior
modifications.
4. Click OK.
The perpendicularity symbol appears.

5. Now, select the bottom line and click the
Constraints Defined in Dialog Box icon.
The Constraint Definition dialog box indicates

you can set the line as a reference.
6. Check the Fix option in the dialog box and

click OK.
The anchor symbol appears indicating that the

line is defined as a reference.
7. Select the corner on the left of the profile and

click the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box icon
The Constraint Definition dialog box indicates

you can choose the Radius/Diameter or Fix
option.
8. Check the Radius/Diameter option in the

Constraint Definition dialog box and click OK.
The radius value appears.

9. Multi-select both vertical lines and click the
Constraints Defined in Dialog Box icon.
10. Check the Distance option in the

Constraint Definition dialog box and click OK.
The distance between both lines appears.
At any time after the constraint was created, you can modify the constraint measure
direction and/or reference. See Defining Constraint Measure Direction for more details.


This task shows you how to edit geometrical constraints defined in the Sketcher or
in the 3D area.
Open the Constraint_Definition.CATPart document and double-click Sketch1 in
the specification tree.
1. Select the right

vertical line and
click the Constraint
command from
the Constraint
toolbar.
The Constraint
Definition dialog
box appears.
2. Check Length
and Verticality.
3. Click OK to apply
the modification.
The line is vertical.

4. Select the left

vertical line and
click the Constraint
command .
The Constraint
Definition dialog
box appears,
indicating that a
verticality constraint
is already defined
for the line.
5. Uncheck
Verticality to
remove the
verticality constraint.
6. Click OK to apply
the modification.
The symbol for

verticality is
removed.
The profile now

looks like this:



This task shows you how to edit constraints defined in the Sketcher or in the 3D area.
Open the Constraint_Definition.CATPart document and double-click Sketch1 in the specification tree.
1. If needed, double-click the sketch to be edited.
You are now in the Sketcher.
2. Double-click the constraint you wish to edit. In this example,

double-click the radius value, that is 35.
You could also use the ConstraintDYS.object -> Definition...

contextual menu item.
The Constraint Edition dialog box is displayed.
3. Check the Reference option to make the constraint a reference.

The Radius field is deactivated, indicating that the value is now
driven by modifications to the sketch.
The radius value is displayed in brackets in the geometry area.
If you drag the corner, you can check that the radius value is updated.

4. Double-click the angle value, that is 110. In the dialog box that
appears, enter 125 and click OK.
The new value is displayed in the geometry area. It affects the

angle. The sketch shape is also modified due to the radius
previously converted into a measure.
5. Now, double-click the offset value between the bottom construction line and the profile bottom line.
6. The Constraint Edition dialog box is displayed. Click the More button to access additional information.
Reference: when un-checked, means that the constraint is driving.
7. Click Line5. Line 5 is highlighted in the geometry area.
8. Click Reconnect to redefine the offset constraint. You are going to choose a new reference.
You can reconnect constraints by means of elements such as planes, edges and so forth.
9. Select Line6, that is the other construction line in the geometry

and enter 50 in the Value field.
10. Click OK to apply the modification.
The position of the profile is modified.

11. Quit the Sketcher.
The application has integrated the modifications to the sketch. The

value of the 3D measured constraint is updated.
12. Double-click the value of the offset constraint, that is 50.
The Constraint Edition dialog box is displayed.
13. Enter 30 mm in the Value field.
14. Click OK to edit the offset.
In the 3D area, if you select the blue pad, the Edit Parameters
contextual command allows you to display all parameters and
constraints defined for that pad.
When you are in the Repeat mode (you double-clicked on the command for creating a constraint), if you try to edit an
existing constraint while creating another constraint, the edition modification will only be taken into account when you have
finished creating this other constraint.
About Diameter and Radius Constraints

You can obtain a radius constraint by editing a diameter constraint. You just need to double-click the diameter constraint and
choose the radius option in the dialog box that appears.
If you need to create a formula remember that:
- the parameter corresponding to the radius or diameter constraint is referred to as "RadiusX.object"
- this parameter always contains the radius value.
For more information about formulas, refer to Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.

You can deactivate a constraint by right-clicking it and selecting the XXX.N.object -> Deactivate option from the contextual
menu. In other words, this constraint will still appear on the sketch but will not behave as such.
Deactivated constraints appear preceded by red brackets ( ).
Conversely, to activate a constraint, use the Activate option from the contextual menu.



The Auto Constraint command detects possible constraints between the selected
elements and imposes these constraints once detected. This task shows you how to
apply this command on a profile crossed by a vertical line.
Open the Constraint_Contact.CATPart document.
1. Select the profile to be constrained.
2. Click the Auto Constraint icon from

the Constraint toolbar.
The Auto Constraint dialog box is displayed. The Elements to be constrained field
indicates all the elements detected by the application.
3.Click the Symmetry lines field and select

the vertical line in the geometry area.
All the elements in the profile that are

symmetrical to the Line will be detected.

The Reference Elements option allows you to select references to be used to detect
possible constraints between these references and the elements selected. Once the
profile is fully constrained, the application displays it in green.
You can switch between stacked and chained constraint presentation.
4. Click OK to constrain the sketch including the profile and the vertical line and, if
needed, modify the location of the constraints.
The constraints created are:

● Angle (111.918 and 137.023).
● Radius (10.721).
● Length (53.35).
● Horizontality.
● Tangency.
● Concentricity.
● Symmetry
The sketch is not displayed in green

because it is not constrained in relation to
external elements (edges, planes and so
on).

This task shows you how constrained sketched elements react when you decide to
make one constraint vary. In other words, you will assign a set of values to the same
angular constraint and examine how the whole system is affected. You will actually
see the piston working.
Open the Animating_Constraints.CATPart document.
1. Select the angular value, that is 75.
2. Click the Animate Constraints icon

from the Constraint toolbar.

The Animate Constraint dialog box is

displayed.
The First value and Last value fields let you

define the maximum and minimum values
for the constraint.
The Number of step field defines the

number of values you wish to assign to the
constraint between the first and last
values.
3. For instance, enter 15 as Number of step

value.
4. Enter 115 degrees for the First value.
The line and the rectangle have been

moved.

5. Enter 246 degrees for the Last value.
The line and the rectangle have been

moved.
5. Check the Hide constraints box for

hiding constraints. This can be useful when
there are a lot of elements in the sketch.
6. Click the Loop button .
7. Click the Run animation button to

see how the sketch is affected by the
different values assigned to the constraint.
The command induces a clockwise rotation
while moving the rectangle up and down.

8. Uncheck the Hide constraints option to

display the constraints again. Once the
maximum value is reached, that is 360
degrees, the sketch looks like this:
Now, let's have a closer look at the dialog box.
ACTIONS:
● run back: shows the different constraint values starting from the last value.
In our scenario, we saw a counterclockwise rotation.
● pause: stops the animation on the current value
● stops: stops the animation and assigns the first value to the constraint
● run: starts the command using the option defined (see below)

OPTIONS:
● one shot: shows the animation only once
● reverse: shows the animation from the first to the last value, then from the
last to the first value
● loop: shows the animation from the first to the last value, then from the last
to the first and so on
● repeat: repeats the animation many times from the beginning to the end

Analyzing and Resolving Over-Constrained or

Inconsistent Sketches
In evaluating geometry, the system considers the degree of freedom that it has. In two dimensions,
points and lines have two degrees of freedom, circles have three and ellipses have five degrees of
freedom. Fixed geometry will never be moved by the system, and has no degree of freedom.
If all of the degrees of freedom of a geometry have been taken up by a consistent combination of
dimensions and fixed geometry, that geometry is said to be iso-constrained (also known as well-
defined). Geometry that still has some degrees of freedom is said to be under-constrained (also known
as under-defined).
Besides
Status codes are given through a graphical way (colors) during the Sketch edition. The update error
panel when returning in 3D explicitly gives them (check visualization of diagnostic in Tools -> Options -
> Sketcher -> Colors).
Note that:
● The system will mark all entities that are relevant to a problem rather than just the first item
encountered. So, for instance, in the case of an inconsistent triangle with sides 10, 10 and 50, all three
dimensions would be marked as INCONSISTENT.
● The order in which the codes are listed below is significant. The system will test to see whether a
geometry should have the status OVER-CONSTRAINED before considering whether it should be
INCONSISTENT.
This chapter describes the over-constrained and inconsistent status codes calculated by the system
and explain methods for solving any underlying problems with a Sketch.
OVER-CONSTRAINED
In many sketches, the user will specify more than the minimum required number of dimensions or
constraints. In certain cases the system will ignore redundant constraints and solve the Sketch. In other
cases it will mark parts of the Sketch as over-constrained.
The descriptions below refer to consistent constraints and dimensions. Dimensions are said to be
consistent if their values are satisfied by the position of the geometries.
Geometry will be marked as over-constrained when it cannot be solved because there are too many
dimensions acting on it for the degrees of freedom available.
A dimension will be marked as over-dimensioned if it conflicts with one or more other dimensions and it
is not possible to vary the value of the dimension and still find a consistent solution. For example, the

geometry and dimensions in the figure below will be over-constrained because the dimension values
cannot be varied independently, even though they can all be satisfied by appropriate geometry positions.
However, the system is able to cope with certain over-constrained situations involving logical constraints.
This is important because logical constraints such as parallelism are likely to be over-specified when a
design is being built up interactively. For example, if two lines are defined to be parallel and then a
distance is subsequently given between them the parallelism is then specified twice.
The following is a list of some of the over-constrained configurations that can be solved:
Multiple constraints between the same geometries. For instance, two circles can have several
tangent constraints between them.
Multiple coincident constraints between geometries of the same type. For instance, three points
can each be made coincident to the other two.
Multiple coincident constraints between lines and points. For instance, two lines can be made
coincident, and their endpoints can be made coincident with the other line.
Parallel and perpendicular constraints. Any combination of parallel and perpendicular constraints will
be reduced to the minimum set required, and any excess ones will be ignored. Note that a distance
dimension between two lines is treated as a parallel constraint, except that it will never be one of the
constraints that is ignored.
Symmetric constraints . There are many configurations where symmetric constraints will make other
constraints redundant. These are recognized by the system. For example, if two lines are made
symmetric two of the coincidence constraints between the points and the lines are redundant.
Resolving over-constrained cases

Over-constrained entities occur in "loops" where all of the entities in a loop conflict with each other.

Over-constrained entities can also occur when there are too many fixed geometries.
To resolve over-constrained problems, the user will need to:

● Set as references dimensions,
● Deactivate or remove constraints,
● Unfix geometry.
Note that the system will evaluate as much of the geometry as possible. It determines exactly which
dimensions are contributing to the situation.
INCONSISTENT
This section describes when the inconsistent status codes can occur and how a user can modify the
Sketch to avoid them.
In general, the inconsistent status shows that the user is attempting to make a change to the Sketch that
is too large. In this context, "large" is relative to the size of the Sketch.
Parts of a Sketch may become inconsistent as a result of a number of different operations. The most
common of these are as follows:
● The user changes the value of a dimension. This will normally occur for cases where there would be
large changes to one or more geometries.
● The user adds a dimension or constraint to a Sketch, in order to move geometry.
● When dragging geometries, the user attempts to input a large transformation.
● When the geometric type of a use-edge is changed (geometry coming from the projection or
intersection of a 3D geometry)
● When there are use-edge large positions or orientations changes.
The geometry has not been solved because:

● No solution exists for the current values of dimensions.
● The system cannot find a solution, even though a solution may exist with the current values of
dimensions. This occurs when trying to make large changes to under-constrained sketches or to
parametric curves (See section Over-constrained and Inconsistent on Parametric Curves below for
further details).
● The system has not find a solution that respects the previous chirality.
Chirality determines the way that geometry is positioned relative to the geometries to which it is
dimensioned. A dimensioning scheme can often be satisfied by a number of different configurations.
The system will always evaluate a new configuration that has the same chirality as the original
geometry. It is important to realize that geometry in the system always has an original
configuration, which is used for deciding the chirality.
Resolving inconsistent cases

If the inconsistent status code was a result of changing a dimension value, the problem will be resolved
by changing the dimension back to its old value. However, in some cases the user may want to modify
other parts of the Sketch to allow the change to be made. The following sections describe different ways
that can be tried.
When attempting to solve a problem, the user should focus on the geometries and dimensions in the
Sketch with the inconsistent status code.
In order to decide how to avoid the status code it is useful to check first if the problem comes from
inconsistent dimensions. An example of this is a triangle with sides of length 50, 50 and 120.
(a) Inconsistent, will not be changed (b) Can be evaluated, will be changed
In this case, the problem may be solved through:

● Changing a dimension value,
● Setting a dimension as a reference,
● Deactivating a dimension.
Other cases occur on sketches that are not fully dimensioned. The following techniques can be used to
solve the problem by helping the system to converge and find a solution:
● Moving geometry.
● Changing dimension values.
● Adding additional constraints to reduce the degrees of freedom.
NOT CHANGED
The not changed status is used in the following cases:
● When geometry becomes over-constrained or inconsistent, the system will not be able to position any
other geometries that depend on it. These dependent geometries and their associated dimensions (and
any others that depend on them) will be marked not changed.
● Dimensions between two fixed geometry will be given the status code not changed.
● Dimension between two free or one free and one fixed geometry in the same set will be given the
status code not changed.

Parametric Curves
This section is an overview of specific over-constrained and inconsistent problems on parametric curves.
The Sketcher can manipulate points, lines, circles and ellipses but can also manage splines and nurbs.
These parametric curves can be created:
● Through an Intersection or Projection of a 3D geometry in the Sketch. After isolating it, constraint can
be used to change the position of the curve. The system is unable to directly modify the shape because
the curve, which have no internal freedoms that the system can control, have only three degrees of
freedom,
● By the Spline command. The curve is defined from other geometries. The parametric curve is said
dependent. It is constructed so it passes through a series of control points.
Constraints and dimensions can be added between a dependent parametric curve and other geometries
in the sketch. Solving problems will occur:
● If the position of the defining geometry depends upon the position of the parametric curve, either
directly or indirectly,
● When the other geometry of the constraint or dimension is an other parametric curve or dependent
parametric curve.
Always use the Constraint command without panel to specify where the constraint must be
created on the curve. Through the Constraint with panel command, the selection points are not taken
into account.
On fully under-constrained sketches, the system can have difficulty choosing between changing the shape
and/or moving its defining geometry especially when it supposes to make large changes. Moving the
geometry will help the system find a consistent solution in that case.
[ Back ] [ Up ]


Before you begin, make sure you are familiar with Tools For Sketching.
The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for performing operations

on profiles. Note that you can either click on a profile or use the Sketch tools toolbar.
Creating Corners
Creates a rounded corner (arc tangent to two curves) between two lines using
trimming operation.
Creating Chamfers
Creates a chamfer between two lines using trimming operation.
Trimming Elements
Trims two lines (either one element or all the elements)

Trims a few elements using a curve type element.
Breaking and Trimming

Quickly deletes elements intersected by other Sketcher elements using
breaking and trimming operation.
Closing Elements
Closes circles, ellipses or splines using relimiting operation.
Complementing an Arc (circle or ellipse)

Creates a complementary arc.
Breaking Elements
Breaks a line using a point on the line and then a point that does not belong to
the line.

Duplicates existing Sketcher elements using a line, a construction line or an
axis.

Moving elements by symmetry

Moves existing Sketcher elements using a line, a construction line or an axis.
Performs a translation on 2D elements by defining the duplicate mode and then
selecting the element to be duplicated. Multi-selection is not available.
Rotating Elements
Rotates elements by defining the duplicate mode and then selecting the
element to be duplicated.
Scaling Elements
Scales an entire profile. In other words, you are going to resize a profile to the
dimension you specify.
Offseting Elements
Duplicates a line, arc or circle type element.
Projecting 3D Elements onto the Sketch Plane

Projects edges (elements you select in the Part Design workbench) onto the
sketch plane.
Creating Silhouette Edges

Creates silhouette edges to be used in sketches as geometry or
reference elements.
Intersecting 3D Elements with the Sketch Plane

Intersects a face and the sketch plane.
Copying/pasting Elements
Sees how sketched elements behave when copying/pasting elements that were
created via projection or intersection.
Isolating Projected/Intersected Elements
Isolates the elements resulting from the use of the Project 3D Elements or
Intersect 3D Elements icons.

Displays a quick diagnosis of a sketch geometry.

Displays a global or individual status on the sketch and correct any problem.

Creates an output of a selected sketch which can be published and updated
independently in the 3D area.
You can sketch pre-defined profiles either via corresponding icons or via the menu bar
(Insert/Operation/Predefined Profiles).

Creating Corners
Creating Corners
This task shows how to create a rounded corner (arc tangent to two curves) between two lines using trimming
operation. You can create rounded corners between curves.
Open the Move_Corner.CATPart document.
1. Click the Corner icon from the Operations toolbar.
The possible corner options are displayed in the Sketch tools toolbar:
the Trim All Elements option command is activated by default.
2. Keep the All Elements option command active and select the
first line.
The selected line is highlighted.
3. Select the second line.
The second line is also highlighted, and the two lines are joined by the
rounded corner which moves as you move the cursor. This lets you
vary the dimensions of the corner.
4. Enter the corner radius value in the Sketch tools toolbar.
You can also click when you are satisfied with the corner dimensions.
Both lines are trimmed at the points of tangency with the corner.

Creating Corners
OR
5. Select the Trim First Element option command before

selecting both lines one after the other.
The first line is trimmed.
OR
5. Select the No trim option command before selecting both

lines one after the other.
The corner is created. No line is trimmed.
OR
5. Select the Standard Lines Trim option command before

selecting one after the other both lines.
The corner is created. The trimmed lines are set as standard lines.
OR
5. Select the Construction Lines Trim option command

before selecting one after the other both lines.
The corner is created. The trimmed lines are set as construction lines.
By default, centers are created but if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog box. for this, go
to Tools -> Options-> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab).).
Multi-Selection

Creating Corners
You can create several corners just by multi-selecting for example, the rectangle
endpoints and enter a radius value in the Radius field (Sketch tools toolbar). Four
corners are created at the same time with the same radius value.
Clicking on the Formula icon displays the parameter driving the radius value of the corners you have just created.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Creating Chamfers
Creating Chamfers
This task shows how to create a chamfer between two lines trimming either all, the first or none of the elements, and more precisely
using one of the following chamfer definitions:
● Angle/Hypotenuse
● Length1/Length2
● Length1/Angle
You can create chamfers between any type of curves (lines, splines, arcs and so forth). Even if the curves are not consecutive, the
chamfer will be created.
Open the Chamfer.CATPart document.
1. Click the Chamfer icon from the Operation toolbar.

Creating Chamfers
The possible chamfer options are displayed in the Sketch tools toolbar.
Trim All / First / No element
Angle-Hypotenuse / Length1-Length2 / Angle-Length1 definition
2. Select the first line.
The second line is also highlighted, and the two elements are connected by a line representing the chamfer which moves as you move
the cursor. This lets you vary the dimensions of the chamfer whose values appear in the Sketch tools toolbar.

Creating Chamfers
4. Click when you are satisfied with the dimensions of the chamfer.
The chamfer with both elements trimmed is created.
Provided the Dimensional Constraint option command is active, the constraints will be created between what we call in the
scenarios below the old intersection point and new end points of the lines.
OR
5. Click the Trim The First Element option command from the Sketch tools
toolbar.
6. Select first the line you wish to be trimmed and then the second line.
The chamfer with one element trimmed is created.
OR
5. Click the No Trim option command from the Sketch tools toolbar.
6. Select both lines.
The chamfer with no element trimmed is created and the original lines are kept.

Creating Chamfers
OR
1. Click the Standard Lines Trim option command from the Sketch tools toolbar.
● The chamfer is created and the two lines are trimmed up to the two lines intersection.
● The two new lines are created between the intersection and the trimmed extremity of the
lines.
● These lines are set as standard lines.
OR
1. Click the Construction Lines Trim option command from the Sketch tools
toolbar.
● The chamfer is created and the two lines are trimmed.

● The two new lines are created between the intersection and the trimmed extremity of the
lines.
● These lines are set as construction lines.
Dimensioning the Edge Intersection point

You can create several chamfers just by multi-selecting for example, the rectangle endpoints and entering the definition parameters
in order to define these chamfers (Sketch tools toolbar). Four chamfers are created at the same time with the same parameter
values.

Creating Chamfers
Using the Length1/Length2 Definition
... Between Perpendicular Lines

Creating Chamfers
... Between Non-Perpendicular Lines
... Between Crossing Lines
... Between Non-Intersecting Lines

Creating Chamfers
Note: if the lines are parallels, the extremity points are used to compute the lengths because the virtual intersecting point does
not exist.
... Between Intersecting Curves

Creating Chamfers
... Between Non-Intersecting Curves
Using the Length1/Angle Definition
... Between Non-Perpendicular Lines

Creating Chamfers
... Between Non-Intersecting Curves


This task shows how to create a chamfer and trim one element only.
1. Click the Chamfer icon from the Operations toolbar.
2. Click the Trim First Element icon .
3. First select the line you wish to be trimmed.
The second line is also highlighted, and the two elements are connected
by a line representing the chamfer which moves as you move the cursor.
This lets you vary the dimensions of the chamfer.
The chamfer is created.
Creating Chamfers with No Elements Trimmed

This task shows how to create a chamfer and trim no element.
1. Click the Chamfer icon from the Operations toolbar.
2. Click the No trim icon .
3. First select the line.
The second line is also highlighted, and the two elements are connected
by a line representing the chamfer which moves as you move the mouse.
This lets you vary the dimensions of the chamfer.
The chamfer is created and the original lines are still displayed.
Trimming Elements
Trimming Elements
Trimming two elements

This task shows how to trim two lines (either one element or all the elements). You
can create rounded corners between consecutive lines, arcs, circles and all types of
curves.
Create two intersecting lines.
1. Click the Trim icon from the Operations
toolbar.
The Trim toolbar options display in the Sketch tools

toolbar.
The Trim All option is the command activated by

default.
2. Select the first line.
The selected element is highlighted.

Trimming Elements
3. Position the cursor on the element to be

trimmed.
The second element is highlighted too, and both

lines are trimmed.
If you position the cursor on the same first

element, it will be trimmed at the location of the
second position.
The location of the relimitation depends on the

location of the cursor.
4. Click when you are satisfied with the relimitation

of the two lines.
First example
Second example
Third example

Trimming Elements
● In multi-selection mode, no extrapolation is done by trimming command.

● If you trim an element created from a projection or an intersection, then this
element's extremities are not constrained anymore to follow the extremities from
the element they are issued from.
● If the extremity point of the trimmed line is constrained, or if the extremity point of
the trimmed line is a geometrical element (not a construction element), then a
coincidence constraint will be created between this point and the trimmed line.
Trimming one element

This task shows how to trim just one element.
Create two intersecting lines. You can also create two intersecting circles.
1. Click the Trim icon from the Operations

toolbar.
The Trim toolbar options display in the Sketch tools

toolbar.
2. Click the Trim One Element option .

3. Select the first line or circle.
The selected line or circle is highlighted.

Trimming Elements
4. Move the cursor to the second line or circle.
The first line or circle selected is trimmed.
If you select the same first element, it will be trimmed at the location of the second
selection.
The location of the trim depends on the location of the cursor:
5. Click when you are satisfied with the relimitation of the two lines.
First example
Second example

Breaking & Trimming
Breaking and Trimming

This task shows how to quickly delete elements intersected by other Sketcher
elements using breaking and trimming operations.
Open the Quick_Trim.CATPart document.
1. Click the Quick Trim icon from the

Operation toolbar (Relimitations subtoolbar).
The possible trim option commands are displayed in the Sketch tools toolbar.
2. Click the Rubber In option command
in the Sketch tools toolbar.
3. Select the arc you wish to be deleted from

the curve type element. In this case, select a
circle.

Breaking & Trimming
The arc of circle is relimited as shown here.
4. Click the Rubber out option command

in the Sketch tools toolbar.
5. Select the arc you wish not to be deleted.

In this case, select a circle.

Breaking & Trimming
The arc of circle is deleted as shown here.
6. Click the Break option command in
the Tools toolbar.
7. Select the part of the element you wish to

be broken (at the nearest intersecting point).

Breaking & Trimming
Now you can select and modify each broken

part of the selected element as desired.
If you need to delete several elements, you can double-click the icon and delete the
elements one after the other.
You cannot use the Quick Trim and/or the Break commands for composite curves
(which are projected/intersected elements composed of several curves). However,
you can work around this functional limitation by using the Trim command (this
enables you to get the same results for composite curves than by performing the
Quick Trim and the Break operations).

Closing Elements
Closing Elements
This task shows how to close circles, ellipses or splines using relimiting operation.
Create a three point arc.
1. Click the Close icon from

the Operation toolbar
2. Select one or more elements to

be relimited. For example, a three
point arc.
The arc is now closed.

Closing Elements
In the case of a spline that was relimited by using the Trim icon , the spline is set
to its original limitation.
Spline after it was relimited
Spline after you clicked the Close

icon

Complementing an Arc (Circle or Ellipse)

This task shows how to complement an arc (circle or an ellipse).
Create a three points arc.
1. Click on the arc to be

complemented to select it. For
example, the three points arc.
2. To complement the arc you can

either
● Click the Complement icon

from the Operation toolbar
● or right-click on the selected item and select Complement in the contextual menu -
> Circle.1 object.
● or go to Insert -> Operation -> Relimitations and select Complement.

3. The complementary arc appears.

Breaking Elements
Breaking Elements
This task shows how to break a line using a point on the line and then a point that does
not belong to the line. The Break command lets you break any type of curve, except
composite curves (see note below). You can use any Sketcher element to break curves.
1. Click the Break icon from the Operations

toolbar.
2. Select the line to be broken.
3. Select the breaking element, that is a point.
The selected element is broken at the selection point.

The line is now composed of two movable segments.
1. Click the Break icon from the

Operations toolbar.

Breaking Elements
2. Select the line to be broken.

3. Select the breaking point.
The application projects the point onto

the line and creates another point.
The line is broken at the projected

point. The line is now composed of two
segments that can be moved.
Using the Break icon, you can also isolate points:

● if you select a point that limits and is common to two elements, the point will be
duplicated.
● if you select a coincident point, this point becomes independent (is no more assigned
a coincidence constraint).
You cannot break composite curves (which are projected/intersected elements

composed of several curves). However, you can work around this functional limitation
by projecting or intersecting the composite curve elements and break these items using
one another.

This task shows you how to break or trim imported elements (projection, intersection,
offset). The created use edge is only changed into construction mode but it is unchanged.
For the purpose of this scenario an example of trimming element is used.
1. Create a conic.
2. Exit Sketcher.
3. In Part design
workbench,
create a new
sketch based
on the conic.
4. Project the
conic.
5. Create two
lines as shown
here.
6. Click the Trim
icon from
the
Operations
toolbar.
7. Select the Use

Edge between
the two lines.
8. Select a first
line.
An arc is created
based on the use-
edge and the original
use-edge is put in
construction mode as
shown here.

9. Click the Trim
icon.
10. Select the arc
between the
two lines.
11. Select the
second line.
When trimming a
curve the selected
location on the curve
is important as it
determines the curve
part that will be kept.
The mark, which is

put in construction
mode, and the arc
are displayed in the
specification tree.

● When deleting the

use edge
(projection,
intersection,
etc...), all the arcs
related to it are
deleted too.
● The edition of an
arc is only possible
in the Sketcher
workbench.
● After a trim
operation, for
instance, the
diagnosis is not
modified and if the
sketch is iso-
constraint, it will
stay iso-constraint.


The purpose of this task is to trim a few elements using a curve type element.
Multi-select the elements to be trimmed.
Click the Trim icon from the Operations

toolbar.
Select the trimming curve to be used.

Click to locate which parts of the elements

will be kept and which parts of the elements
will be trimmed.
If one element does not intersect the trimming curve, this element will be either totally
deleted or kept (in accordance with the location of this element). For instance, on the
example above, the line above the trimming curve is kept, the line below the trimming
curve is deleted.


This task shows you how to repeat existing Sketcher elements using a line, a
construction line or an axis. In this particular case, we will duplicate a circle.
1. Select the circle to be duplicated by symmetry.
2. Click the Mirror icon from the Operations

toolbar.
3. Select the axis you previously created.
The selected circle is duplicated and a symmetry

constraint is created on the condition you previously
activated the Dimensional Constraint option from
You can also use multi-selection. Drag the cursor and

create a trap. Then select the symmetry axis.


Moving Elements by Symmetry

This task shows you how to move existing Sketcher elements using a line, a construction
line or an axis. In this particular case we will move a rectangle by symmetry.
The former functionality associated to this command is now available through the Mirror
command, which duplicates elements by symmetry.
1. Create a rectangle
and an axis.
2. Click the Symmetry
icon from the

Transformation
sub-toolbar in the
Operation toolbar.
3. Select the rectangle
and the axis you
have created.

The rectangle has been

moved by symmetry
according to the axis.
Two sides selection
1. Create an axis.
2. Create a rectangle
on one side of the
Axis and a circle on
the other side.
icon from the

Transformation
sub-toolbar in the
Operation toolbar.


and the circle.
5. Select the axis.
In order to be able to multi-

select elements, the axis
length must be quite
important.
The symmetry is created

and the two elements have
been taken into account.
Applying constraints to symmetrical elements

1. Create a rectangle and an axis.
2. Select the
Constraint icon
from the Constraint
toolbar.
3. Select one of the

rectangle element
and the axis.
4. Click to create the
constraint.
The constraint and its

value are displayed in the
geometry area.
icon from the

Transformation
sub-toolbar in the
Operation toolbar.
and the axis.

The rectangle has been

moved by symmetry
according to the axis.
Note that:
● As the constraint is
applied on an axis, the
constraint is kept after
the symmetry.
● The constraint is also kept when it is applied to a fixed element.

● In the case of Use-Edges, the element becomes isolated.
Only internal constraints are kept after a symmetry operation.

This task will show you how to perform a translation on 2D elements by defining the
duplicate mode and then selecting the element to be duplicated. Multi-selection is not
available.
The application provides a powerful command for translating elements. You may either
perform a simple translation (by moving elements) or create several copies of 2D
elements.
Translating elements also means re-computing distance, angle and/or length constraint
values, if needed. Be careful: only non-fixed elements are updated.
Open the Transform_replace01.CATPart document.
1. Click the Translation icon from the Operation
toolbar (Transformation subtoolbar).
The Translation Definition dialog box appears and will

remain displayed all along your translation creation.
The Duplicate mode option is activated by default,
which means that the 2D element(s) you select will be
copied. If you uncheck the Duplicate mode box, the
element will be moved.

2. For the purpose of this scenario, leave the Duplicate mode option activated, and
leave the Instance(s) field set to 1 to indicate the number of copies you need.
3. Select the Keep internal constraints box to specify that you want to preserve in the
translation the internal constraints applied to the selected elements.
4. Leave the Keep external constraints box unselected. Any external constraint existing
between the selected elements and external elements will be disregarded in the
translation.
5. Select the element(s) to translate.
You may either select one 2D element, or multi-select

the entire 2D geometry by trapping it with the mouse
as shown below.
6. Click the translation vector start point or select an

existing one.
7. You can define the translation length in the

geometry area, using the mouse. For more precise
results, enter a specific value for the translation length
in the Translation Definition dialog box. For
example, enter 30 mm.
You can use SmartPick to keep lines horizontal.

Optionally, you can check Snap Mode in the dialog

box and set the value to 30 mm: when you then drag
the cursor to choose the position of the translated
element, it will translated by 30 mm steps.
8. Click OK in the Translation Definition dialog box. The translation length is now set.
9. In the geometry area, drag the cursor to choose the

translation position and then click.
The element is translated.

You can notice that the internal constraints were
preserved in the translated element (four tangency
constraints, and a parallelism constraint), whereas the
external constraint (an offset constraint) was not.

● The Undo command is available from the toolbar, while you are translating
elements.
● When translating external constraints:
❍ geometrical constraints are killed.
❍ dimensional constraints are preserved but revalued.

Rotating Elements
Rotating Elements
This task will show you how to rotate elements by defining the duplicate mode and
then selecting the element to be duplicated.
In this scenario, the geometry is simply moved. But note that, you can also duplicate
elements with the Rotation command.
Rotating elements also means re-computing distance values into angle values, if
needed. Be careful: only non-fixed elements are updated.
1. Click the Rotation icon from the
Operations toolbar (Transformation subtoolbar).
The Rotation Definition dialog box appears and

will remain displayed all along the rotation.
2. De-activate the Duplicate mode, if needed.
If you keep it active, you will be allowed to

define the number of the instances you wish to
create in the meantime.

Rotating Elements
3. Select the geometry to be rotated. Here,

multi-select the entire profile.
4. Select or click the rotation center point.

You can also enter a value in the fields displayed (Sketch tools toolbar).
5. Select or click a point to define the reference line that will be used for computing
the angle.

Rotating Elements
6. Select or click a point to define an angle.
● If you have check snap mode in the dialog box and set the value to 5 degrees, then
when you drag the cursor to rotate the element it rotates by 5 degrees steps.
● You can also enter a value for the rotation angle in the Rotation Definition dialog
box
7. Click OK in the Rotation Definition dialog box

to end the rotation.
Rotating elements also means re-computing

distance values into angle values, if needed. Be
careful: only non-fixed elements are updated.
● Internal constraints are preserved

● External constraints:
❍ geometrical constraints are killed
❍ dimensional constraints are modified and revalued.

Rotating Elements

Scaling Elements
Scaling Elements
This task will show you how to scale an entire profile. In other words, you are going
to resize a profile to the dimension you specify.
Scaling elements also means re-computing distance values, if needed. Note that angle
values will not be modified. Be careful: only non-fixed elements are updated.
1. Click the Scale icon

from the Operation toolbar
(Transformation subtoolbar).
Note that you can first select either the geometry or the scaling icon. If you select
the Scale icon first, you cannot multi-select elements.
The Scale Definition dialog box appears and will remain displayed all along your
operation.
2. Select the element(s) to be scaled.

Scaling Elements
The value fields appear in the Sketch tools toolbar.
3. Enter the center point value in the Sketch tools toolbar or click the center point
on the geometry.

Scaling Elements
4. Enter 2 as Scale Value in the displayed Scale Definition dialog box.
5. Click OK to validate.

Scaling Elements
● Internal constraints are preserved but revalued.

● External constraints:
❍ geometrical constraints are killed
❍ dimensional constraints are modified and revalued.

Offsetting Elements
Offsetting Elements
This task shows how to duplicate an element of the following type: line, arc or circle.
You can also duplicate by offset one of the following: an edge, a face (all the
boundaries of this face are offset) or a geometrical feature (for example, by selecting a
join or another sketch in the specification tree).
Select a topic:
● Offset 2D geometry,
● Use offset tools,
● Offset 3D geometry,
● Modify a 3D geometry offset.
Offsetting 2D Geometry
Create a line.
1. Click the Offset icon from the
Operations toolbar (Transformation

subtoolbar).
OR
1. Select the Insert->Operation-

>Transformation->Offset command from
the menu bar.
2. There are two possibilities, depending on

whether the line you want to duplicate by
offset is already selected or not:
● If the line is already selected, the line to
be created appears immediately.
● If the line is not already selected, select
it. The line to be created appears.

Offsetting Elements
3. Select a point or click where you want the

new element to be located.
The selected line is duplicated. Both lines

are parallel.
● If you were offsetting circles or arcs, these two circles would be concentric.
● If the Geometrical Constraints icon is active in the Sketch tools toolbar

when offsetting an element, constraints are automatically created, based on the
type of element you are offsetting. Thus, if you move an element, or change its
geometry, the other element will be moved or modified accordingly.
Using offset tools

You can also apply one or more offset instances to profiles made of several elements:
● by using tangency propagation or point propagation,
● by creating an offset element that is tangent to the first one,
● by creating several offset instances.
This is not true for generated elements (Generative Drafting workbench).
If the multi-selected elements do not make up a closed profile, the offset will be
applied to the selected elements only. As a result, you will have as many offset
elements as the first multi-selected elements.
Previews are not available when creating several offset instances (i.e. when the value
in the Instance(s) field of the Sketch tools toolbar is higher than one).
Open the Offset.CATPart document.

Offsetting Elements
1. Click the Offset icon from the

Operations toolbar (Transformation
subtoolbar).
2. Select the desired option from the displayed Sketch tools toolbar and if needed,
enter the desired number of instances. (These options are described further down in
this section).
3. Select the element you want to offset. The element to be created is previewed.
4. Select a point or click where you want the new element to be located.
To offset a single element:
Activate the No Propagation icon.
To offset an element and elements

which are tangent to it:
Activate the Tangent Propagation icon.

Offsetting Elements
To offset an element using Point

Propagation:
Activate the Point Propagation icon.
To offset an element symmetrically to

another:
Activate the Both Side Offset icon.
To offset and duplicate multiple

elements:
Type the number of elements you want to

create in the Instance(s) field.

Offsetting Elements
given element, the symbol appears.
You can create offset geometry using 2D component elements and dress-up elements
(axis lines, center lines and threads). Note that by doing this, you will not create offset
2D components or dress-up elements, but you will create offset geometry.
● You can offset them only element by element.

● You cannot offset complex curves.
● This will only work if you first select the command and then the element to offset.
Offsetting 3D Geometry
You can create an associative offset with a 3D element.
Open the Offsetpad.CATPart document.

Offsetting Elements
1. Click the Offset icon from the Operations toolbar (Transformation subtoolbar).
2. Select the 3D surface to offset. The profile to be created is previewed.
3. You can do one of the following:

● specify the offset position and value in the Sketch tools toolbar and type Enter to
validate.
● drag the cursor till the correct offset appears in the sketch, then click to validate the
position.

Offsetting Elements
The offset is created. It appears as Mark.1

in the specification tree:
The offset value is displayed.
If you want to edit the offset value, you can double-click it and enter a new value in
the dialog box which is displayed.
● When offsetting a face, if there is an intersection between the face and the sketch
plane, by default, it is this intersection which is offset (rather than the projection of
the face edges). In this case, if you want to offset the projection of the face edges,
you can modify the offset as explained in the section below.
● You can offset the intersection between a face and a sketch plane without explicitly
creating this intersection.
● lf you offset a multi-domain face, the face that is closer from the cursor is offset.

Offsetting Elements
● If you isolate a composite mark, as many simple geometry elements as the mark
was containing are created, and associativity will not be available anymore.
Modifying a 3D Geometry Offset

1. Double-click the offset in the specification tree or on the sketch. The Offset
Definition dialog box is displayed.
In this dialog box, you can modify the offset definition.

● Parallel corner type: specifies whether corners should be round or sharp (when
applicable).
Parameters
These options let you specify the offset parameters.

● Object to offset: indicates which 3D element is offset. To offset another element,
select this field and then select the new element in the sketch.
● Offset value: indicates the offset value. You can modify it by typing a new value in
this field.
● Offset mode: when offsetting a face, specify whether you want to intersect and
offset or to project and offset the face by selecting the appropriate option from the
list.

Offsetting Elements
Propagation
These options let you offset a 3D element using the propagation of an edge.
● Type: specifies what type of offset propagation should be applied to the selected
reference element: No propagation, Tangent propagation, or Point
propagation. Click the appropriate icon.
● Reference element: indicates which edge should be used as a reference for the
propagation. Select this field and then select the reference edge in the sketch.
2. In the Offset value field, type 20mm.
3. Choose Project and offset from the Offset mode field.
4. Click OK to validate. The offset is modified.
● Only 3D elements can be offset with associativity.

● There is no propagation on 3D edges.
● Typing a negative offset value reverses the offset direction.
● Multi-domain elements cannot be offset in one shot.


This task shows you how to create an associative offset based on an existing spline.
1. Create a spline.
2. Select the Offset
command from the

Transformation sub-
toolbar in the
Operation toolbar
3. Click the spline.

4. Click in the geometry
area to create the
offset.
The offset is created as long

as a new feature
OffsetCurve which is visible
in the specification tree.
Note that:
● The visualization of the
offset implies an automatic
creation of elements, which
are automatically put in no
show and construction

mode.
● These elements are put in
no show mode only if the
Geometrical Constraint
option in the Sketch tools
toolbar is activated.
● These elements are also
deleted if the offset or the
original spline are deleted.
● The created offset will be
associative with the original
spline only if the
Dimensional Constraint
option in the Sketch tools
toolbar is activated, see
Editing Spline Offset.
● When creating an offset of a spline, a constraint is automatically created and the

offset cannot be deleted.
● Both the spline and the constraint can be edited.

Projecting 3D Elements onto the Sketch Plane

This task shows how to project edges (elements you select in the Part Design
workbench) onto the sketch plane.
1. Click the Project 3D Elements icon from
the Operations toolbar (3D Geometry sub-

toolbar).
2. Multi-select the edges you wish to project onto

the sketch plane.
The edges are projected onto the sketch plane.
These projections are yellow (in others words,

you cannot move them).

You can apply the Relimitation , Corner
and Chamfer commands on projections.
If you select a face, the edges are projected.
● Projected elements are associative except in the case of a multiple distinct marks.
● A mark composed of several associated elements is managed as a single curve (you
can constraint it).
was containing are created, associativity will not be available anymore.
● A multi-domain face projection does not create a single composite mark (in this
case each edge is projected).


This task shows how to create silhouette edges to be used in sketches as geometry or
reference elements.
You can only create a silhouette edge from a canonical surface whose axis is parallel
to the Sketch plane.
Open the Silhouette_Edge.CATPart

document.
1. Select Plane1 and go into Sketcher workbench.
2. Click the 3D Silhouette Edges icon

from the Operation toolbar (3D
Geometry subtoolbar).

3. Select the canonical surface.
The silhouette edges are created onto the

sketch plane.
These silhouette edges are yellow if they

are associative with the 3D.
You cannot move or modify them but you

can delete one of them which means
deleting one trace independently from the
other.
You can select one of the two

intersections
and set it into the Construction mode:
You can create geometry and

constraints using this intersection:

You can re-limit this created silhouette

edge
using the geometry:

The silhouette command generated one or two marks (edges) if one mark is made of
more that one curves. If those curves do not have the same geometrical support, the
resulting silhouette edges will not be associative (as for Projection/Intersection
commands).
● Silhouette edges are associative except in the case of a multiple distinct marks.
can constrain it).

Intersecting 3D Elements with the Sketch

Plane
This task shows how to intersect a face and the sketch plane.
Open the Intersection_Canonic.CATPart document.
1. Select the face of interest.
2. Click the Intersect 3D Elements icon from
the Operations toolbar (3D Geometry subtoolbar).
The software computes and displays the

intersection between the face and the sketch
plane. The intersection is yellow (in others words,
you cannot move it).

You can apply the Trim , Corner and
Chamfer commands on intersections.
● Intersected element are associative apart in the case of a multiple distinct marks.
can constraint it).
was containing are created, associativity will not be available anymore.
● If the intersected geometry is a plane face and there is no intersection between this
face and the sketcher plane, the resulting intersection is an infinite line.

This task shows how sketched elements behave when you copy and paste them. More
specifically, you will learn about:
● copying/pasting elements with H and V constraints on their absolute axis
● copying/pasting projected or intersected elements
For general information on copy/paste, see the Infrastructure User's Guide.
Copying/pasting elements with H and V constraints on

their absolute axis
This task shows how to copy/paste elements along with the horizontal and vertical
constraints on their absolute axis.
Open the Copy_paste_H_and_V.CATPart document.
1. You have several options:

● To duplicate the rectangle and
its H and V directions: multi-
select the rectangle and its
origin, and copy the selected
elements.

● To duplicate the rectangle, its H

and V directions, and the
distance constraints which exist
between the rectangle and its
origin: multi-select the rectangle
and the distance constraints (do
not select the origin), and copy
the selected elements.
In other words, if you want to copy an element along with its H and V direction while
keeping the constraints which exist between the copied element and its origin, you do
not need to, and you should not, select the origin. Selecting the constraints is enough.
If you select the origin, the constraints will not be kept.
2. Paste these elements. The elements are pasted over the elements you copied. You
can move the pasted elements (if you want to view them, for example).
Copying/pasting projected or intersected elements

This task shows how sketched elements that were created via projection or
intersection behave when copying/pasting them.
1. Copy the projected or the intersected element, using the method described above.
2. Paste this element.

External references are deleted:
● Constraints on external geometry are deleted.
● Projections/Intersections are isolated: each trace is replaced with an equivalent
● You cannot project or intersect the pasted element.
● The pasted element is not associative.


Isolating Elements
Isolating Projections and Intersections

This task shows how to isolate the elements resulting from the use of the Project 3D
Elements or Intersect 3D Elements icons.
1. Select the 3D curve you wish to isolate.
2. Select Insert -> Operation -> 3D Geometry ->

Isolate command from the menu bar.
The curve is no longer linked to the initial geometry,

which means that you can edit it the way you wish.
3. For example, drag and drop the curve to the desired

location.
Once isolated, the curve becomes white. You can edit the
curve graphical properties using the Edit -> Properties
command.

This task explains how to display a quick diagnosis of a sketch geometry. You will be
provided an overall status of the sketch geometry as a whole, so that can correct any
constraint-related problem accordingly.
Open the Sketch_Analysis.CATPart document.
1. Click the Sketch Solving Status icon in the Tools toolbar (2D Analysis Tools sub-
toolbar).
The Sketch Solving Status dialog box is displayed. It indicates the overall status of the
sketch geometry. In this case, the sketch is under-constrained.
● On the sketch as well as in the specification tree, under-constrained and over-

constrained geometrical elements (lines, points, etc.) are highlighted, and iso-
constrained elements are displayed in a different color. This enables you to see
easily which items are under/ over-constrained, and which are iso-constrained.
● In our example, all geometrical items are under-constrained; they are therefore
displayed in red. There is a tangency constraint which is iso-constrained; it is
displayed in green.
● If you wish, you can click the Sketch Analysis icon in the dialog box to view a
more in-depth diagnosis specifying which individual geometrical elements in the
sketch are under-constrained (under-defined), over-constrained (over-defined) or
iso-contrained (well defined).

2. Click the Close button to close the Sketch Solving Status dialog box.
3. From the specification tree, expand the Sketch.1 and then the Geometry nodes.
4. Multi-select all items under the Geometry node, and right-click them.
5. Select Selected objects > Fix from the contextual menu. All elements are now
fixed.
6. Click the Sketch Solving Status icon again. The Sketch Solving Status dialog
box now indicates that the sketch is iso-constrained.


This task explains how to analyze sketched geometry as well as projections/
intersections, and how to diagnose geometry. You will be provided either a global or
individual status and will be allowed to correct any problem stated in the status.
Analyzing sketched geometry

Open the Sketch_Analysis.CATPart document.
1. Select Tools -> Sketch Analysis from the menu bar.
OR
1. Click the Sketch Analysis icon in the Tools toolbar (2D Analysis Tools sub-
toolbar).
The Sketch Analysis dialog box appears. It contains three tabs: Geometry,
Projections / Intersections and Diagnostic.
Note that on the sketch itself, some geometrical items and constraints are highlighted
so that you can see them easily.

2. Click the Geometry tab.
The information on this tab helps you to know whether the sketch geometry is valid.
General Status: analyzes several elements globally.
Detailed Information: provides a detailed status/comment on each geometrical

element of the sketch.
Corrective Actions: according to the analyzed element you select and which is not
correct, you will be able to:
● turn this element into a construction element,
● close a profile that is not,
● erase a disturbing element,
● hide all constraints on the sketch,

● hide all construction geometries on the sketch and in the detailed information area
of the Geometry tab.
3. In the Detailed Information table, select the Point.11 item and then click the
Construction mode icon to turn the standard mode point into a construction mode
point and solve the problem.

Diagnosing geometry
4. Click the Diagnostic tab.

The information on this tab displays a full diagnosis of a sketch geometry. It provides a
global analysis of the sketch as a whole, and specifies whether individual geometrical
elements in the sketch are under-constrained (under-defined), over-constrained (over-
defined) or iso-contrained (well defined):
Solving Status: provides a quick overall analysis of the sketch geometry.
Detailed Information: provides a detailed status on each constraint and geometrical

element of the sketch, and lets you know what type of element it is (geometry,
constraint).
Actions: according to the analyzed element you select, you will be able to:
● hide all constraints on the sketch and in the detailed information area,
of the Diagnostic tab.
If you select items from the Detailed Information table, they will be highlighted on the
sketch, which enables you to identify them easily. To solve constraint-based problems
in the sketch, you need to edit the sketch directly.
5. Close the Sketch Analysis dialog box.
6. Right-click the Point.3 item in the sketch or from the specification tree, and select
Point.3 object > Fix from the contextual menu.
7. Repeat this operation for the Line.1, Circle.1, Line.2 and Point.8 items.
8. Re-open the Sketch Analysis dialog box and click the Diagnostic tab. You can
notice that the items you fixed are now iso-constrained.

Analyzing projections/intersections
Open the Analyse.CATPart document.
9. Open the Sketch Analysis dialog box again.
10. Click the Projections / Intersections tab.

The information on this tab lets you know the status of all use-edges: projections
(implicit or non-implicit), intersections, etc...
Detailed Information: provides a detailed status/comment on each projection or

intersection, on constraints and so forth.
Corrective Actions: according to the analyzed element you select and which is not
correct, you will be able to:
● isolate geometry
● activate/deactivate a constraint
● erase geometry
● replace 3D geometry
● hide all constraints on the sketch,
of the Projections/Intersections tab.
You can see that all construction and intersection elements for this part have a valid
status so you don't have to do anything.

This task shows you how to create an Output Feature of a geometry sketch, which can
be published and updated independently from the sketch within the 3D.
Open the Output.CATPart document.
The part is displayed as shown

here.
1. Double-click the
Sketch.1 to edit it.
2. Click the Output
Feature icon from

the Tools toolbar.
3. Select the Spline.1.
● The created feature will be

integrated as an
independent element both
into the Parent/Children
view and the specification
tree.

● Once the output is created

the spline is automatically
put in construction mode
with a specific visualization.
It is recommended to keep
the output in construction
mode to avoid confusion, in
the 3D area, between the
sketch and the output.
Applying graphic
properties
1. Right-click the Spline
from which you created
the output.
2. Select Properties.
The Properties dialog box is

displayed.
3. Select the Graphic tab.

4. Change the color and
the line thickness to
distinguish the Spline
from other elements.
5. Exit the Sketcher
workbench.
Unlike in the Sketcher, the

Output can now be visualized
with the Spline properties it
has been applied to.
Multi-selecting
elements

1. Go to the Generative
Shape Design
workbench.
2. Click the Multisections
Surface icon from

the Surfaces toolbar.
The Multi-section Surface

Definition dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select Sketch 4 and

Sketch 5.
4. Select the Spline tab.
5. Select the Output
feature from the
specification tree.
6. Click OK in the Multi-
section Surface

The surface is created.
Re-editing the
sketch
● Modify any of the Spline.2
control points.
The modifications applied to

the spline have no
repercussions on the surface
which is based on the output.
● You cannot apply an output feature from a degenerated element.

● You can only publish elements that belong to the same sketch.
● It is not possible to copy, cut or paste an output.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Editing Profiles
Editing Profiles
The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for editing 2D
geometry.
For information about applying constraints, refer to Setting Constraints.

Double-click to modify the sketch coordinates and thereby modify
the feature defined on this sketch.
Editing a Spline:
Double-click on the spline to edit it.
Editing a Connecting Curve:
Double-click on the connecting curve to edit it.
Editing an element Parents/Children and Constraints
Right-click on the element end select Parents/Children... option in

the contextual menu.
Editing Projection/Intersection Marks
Edit Projection/Intersection Marks definition and modify their import

properties.
Use selection to edit the profile shape and size, modify the profile
location (via external constraints).
Performing Auto-Search on a Profile

Use the menu bar to auto-search for the different elements of a
profile.

Editing Profiles
Replacing Geometry
Replace geometry in the 2D and visualize it in the 3D.

Use selection to delete elements.


This task shows you how to modify a line. Modifying your sketch coordinates will
affect the feature defined on this sketch. In other words, associativity remains valid.
Create a line.
Profiles are not considered as entities when it comes to editing them. To edit a profile,
you will need to edit the sub-elements composing it.
Multi-selection is not allowed for editing Sketcher elements.
1. Double-click the line you wish to edit.
The Line Definition dialog box appears indicating the line end point coordinates.
2. Enter new coordinates

for changing the end points
and/or the length and
angle.
3. Check the Construction

Elements option, if you
wish to change the line
type.
4. Press OK.
Remember that the Edit -> Properties command, or Properties option in the
contextual menu lets you access and edit sketch properties (properties dialog box)
[ Up ] [ Next ]

This task shows how to auto-search for the different
elements of a profile.
Open the Auto_Search.CATPart document.
1. Select one element

of the whole profile.
2. Select Edit -> Auto

Search from the
menu
bar.
Resulting auto-searched
Element selected: profile:
The unambiguous
part of the profile is
highlighted.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugbt0106.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 5:23:40 AM


This task shows you how to
● transform profile shape and size using the Selection command.
● transform a profile position according to a pre-defined solving mode.
● transform a profile position using existing external constraints.
Transforming By Moving
Minimum Move
You will move as few elements as possible. Go to Tools -> Options -

> Sketcher (Solving mode switch button) and make sure you
activated the Minimum move option from the Dragging of the
element dialog box.
1. Click the Select icon .

2. Drag the right line of the profile anywhere to the right.
The profile is stretched to the right if you stretch it to the right.
3. Click one corner of the profile and stretch this profile diagonally.
Standard Mode
You will move as many elements as possible. Go to Tools -> Options

-> Sketcher (Solving mode switch button) and make sure you
activated the Standard mode option from the Dragging of the
element dialog box.
2. Drag the right line of the profile anywhere to the right.
The profile is stretched both to the right and to the top even if you
stretch it to the right.

Relaxation
Go to Tools -> Options -> Sketcher (Solving mode switch button)

and make sure you activated the Relaxation option from the
Dragging of the element dialog box.
● You can also edit the profile shape and size using commands such as edit, trim and break .
● If you want the profile to revert to its original shape, click the Undo command .
● If the Grid option is on (Tools -> Options -> Sketcher), you can also modify the profile using the grid. In this case, and for
example if the Zoom is on, the point you select will be automatically repositioned at the closest grid intersection point. The profile
new position may result awkward.

Transforming Using Constraints

2. Double -click the dimensional constraint.
3. Enter 20mm as new value in the Constraint Definition dialog box that
appears.
The external constraint is re-computed and the geometry is re-positioned.


This task shows how to edit Conic Curves.
1. Double-click the
conic you want to
edit.
Changing the conic parameters
The Conic Curve

displayed.
2. Enter the new

parameters you
wish to apply to
the conic curve.
You can edit the

following options as
displayed in the dialog
box.

Constraint Limits:
● Start and End
Points: the curve is
defined from the start
point to the end point.
● Start and End
Tangents: if needed
the tangent at Start
or End points can be
defined by selecting a
curve.
● Tangent
intersection point:
indicates the point
used to define both
Start and End
tangents. These
tangents are on
construction lines
passing through Start
or End points and the
selected point.
● Point: defines a point
when checking the
Tangent intersection
point option.
Note that you will have

to choose either a start
and end tangents or a
tangent intersection
point.
Intermediate
Constraints:
● Parameter: defines
the value of the
parameter. Ratio
ranging from 0 to 1
(excluded), which
value is used to
define a passing point
( M in this figure) and
corresponds to the
OM distance/OT
distance.
If the parameter =
0.5, then the

resulting curve is a
parabola.
If 0 < parameter <
0.5, then the
resulting curve is a an
arc of ellipse.
I 1 > parameter >
0.5, then the
resulting curve is a
hyperbola.
● Points 1, Point 2,
Point 3: defines the
possible passing
points of the conic.
These point have to
be selected in logical
order after having
define the Start an
End points.
● Tangent 1, Tangent
2: defines the
tangency when it is
applied to one of the
passing points.
Applying constraints between the conic and another

geometrical element
1. For instance, create a conic and a circle.
2. Click the
Constraint icon
from the
Constraint toolbar.

3. Select the two

elements.
4. Right click the
second element.
5. Select Tangency.
The tangency has been

applied to the two
selected elements.
Inconsistent conics
If an element that belongs to the conic is deleted, the conic becomes inconsistent (the
conic color turns red).
As a result, when you exit the Sketcher workbench the Update Diagnosis dialog box
will be displayed and an error message will appear within the dialog box.

6.
Double-click the conic to re-edit it.


This task shows you how to edit a curve which connects two elements of the curve
type.
Open the Edit_Connecting_Curves.CATPart document.
1. Double-click the connecting curve you want to

edit.

The Connect Curve Definition dialog box is

displayed. For each support curve, you can edit
the following options as appropriate:
● Point: defines the extremity point (on the
support curve) of the connecting curve.
● Curve: defines the support curve for the
connecting curve.
● Continuity: indicates whether the connecting
curve is continuous in point, in curvature or in
tangency with the support curves.
● Tension: when the connecting curve is
continuous in curvature or in tangency,
specifies the tension which is applied to it.
● Reverse Direction: when the connecting
curve is continuous in curvature or in tangency,
reverses its direction.
2. For the first support curve, select Tangency

from the Continuity field, set the tension to 3 and
click Reverse Direction.
3. For the second support curve, select another

extremity point (CtrlPoint.4 for example).

4. When you are satisfied with your modifications, click OK to validate and exit the
dialog box.

Editing a Spline
Editing a Spline
This task shows you how to edit spline properties and then modify, add or remove spline control
points.
Create a spline such as the one shown below.
Adding a point
To add a point, you have several possibilities, depending on whether you want to add an
existing point, or create the point on the sketch while editing the spline.
1. Double-click on the spline, or go to Edit -> Spline.1 object -> Definition....
The Spline Definition dialog box appears.

Editing a Spline
● To add an existing point (i.e. a point created prior to editing the spline):
1. In the dialog box, select the spline point after or before which you want to add a point.
Select CtrlPoint.2 for example.
2. Then, choose Add Point After or Add Point Before (depending on whether you want to
add a point after or before the selected point). Select Add Point After for example.
3. Finally, click on the existing point you want to add in the spline.
If you proceed as shown below, for example:

Editing a Spline
You will get this result:
● To create the point on the sketch while editing the spline:
1. In the dialog box, select the spline point after or before which you want to
add a point. Select CtrlPoint.2 for example.
2. Then, choose Add Point After or Add Point Before (depending on whether
you want to add a point after or before the selected point). Select Add Point
After for example.
3. Finally, click on the sketch, at the location where you want to add the new
point.

Editing a Spline
Replacing a point
2. To replace a point, select the spline point that you want to replace in the dialog box, then
select the Replace Point option, and finally click on the sketch, at the location where you want
to add the new point.

Editing a Spline
Closing a spline
2. To close a spline, simply select the Close Spline option in the dialog box.
The spline is closed in such a way that it is continuous in curvature at the closure point.
You can edit existing splines which are closed using a continuity in point at the closure point:
selecting the Close spline option will make such splines continuous in curvature at the closure
point.
Removing a point
1. Select the point that you want to remove in the dialog box.
2. Click the Remove Point button.
3. Click OK.

Editing a Spline
Defining a tangent
1. Select the point you want to add a tangent in the dialog box.
2. Check the Tangency option.

A tangent appears, you can reverse it clicking on the Reverse Tangent button.
3. If needed, check the Curvature Radius option and key in the value.


This task shows you how to edit an Offset based on an existing spline, or even the
offset constraint.
1. Create a Spline Offset.
Editing the
offset constraint
2. Double-click the
constraint to
change its value.
The Parameter
displayed.
3. Enter the value you

want to apply for
instance, enter
20.004.
4. Click OK in the
Parameter
Definition dialog
box.

The constraint value has

been modified.
The constraint cannot be

deleted.
Editing the
spline offset
1. Create a Spline
Offset.
2. Double-click the
spline offset.
The Offset Definition

dialog box is displayed.
3. Change to the
parameter you want
to apply.
The spline offset is associative to the original spline in such a way that for instance:
● when deleting the spline, the offset spline is displayed in red to show that there is
an update error.
● when adding control point to the original spline, the offset spline is automatically
updated.


This task shows you how to edit an element Parents/Children and Constraints.
Open the Analyse.CATPart document.
1. Right-
click on the
element
you want to
edit
Parents,
Children
and
Constraints.
As an
example,
select the
distance
constraint.
2. Select
Parents/
Children...
in the
contextual
menu.
The
following
dialog box

appears:
You can double-click to expand Parents or right-click and select the Parents/Children... option in the
contextual menu on this dialog box elements to edit their Parents/Children and constraints .

Editing Projection/Intersection Marks

This task shows you how to edit an element Parents/Children and Constraints.
Open the Analyse2.CATPart document.
1. In the Sketcher (choose the

sketch.2), double-click on the
mark (yellow line) you want to
edit, or expand the tree, go to
PartBody -> Sketch.2 -> Use-
edges -> Projection.4 and
double-click on Mark.1.
2. The Import Definition dialog box

that appears lets you change the
element which is used as a
reference for this mark. To do this,
make sure the Reference
Element field is active, and select
your new reference element.

For example, choose an arc.
3. Click OK in the Import Definition

dialog box. The mark reference
and position are changed.


Replacing Geometry
Replacing Geometry
This task shows how to replace 2D geometry.
Note that:
● You replace a geometrical element with another on the 2D (Sketcher
workbench) but no modification occurs in the 2D.
● Only the 3D geometrical elements which used the replaced 2D geometrical
elements will be modified. You can visualize the modifications when entering
Part Design workbench.
Open the Replace.

CATPart document.
1. Enter Sketcher
workbench.
2. Right-click the
element to be
replaced.

Replacing Geometry
3. Select the name.

object -> Replace...
option from the
displayed contextual
menu.
The Replace dialog

box appears.
3. Select the element

Line2 will be replaced
with.

Replacing Geometry
The Replace dialog

box now appears as
shown here: Line2
will be replaced with
Line1.
The geometry is
unchanged and
appears as shown
here:
4. Click OK in the
Replace dialog box.
5. Click the Exit icon
. The pad (created

via the 2D geometry)
is modified.

Replacing Geometry
If you edit the sketch (which includes a fillet), you can also replace for instance a
fillet on a line with a fillet on a circle arc.
Open the Replace.

CATPart document.
6. Create a three Selected line and circle arc

points Arc on the
sketch geometry.
7. Right-click the
filleted edge (line) to
be replaced and
replace the circle arc
with a fillet circle arc
by defining it in the
Replace dialog box.

Replacing Geometry
8. Check the Delete

replaced elements
and exclusive
parents box in the
Replace dialog box.
Resulting geometry

Replacing Geometry
3D resulting pad (Part Design workbench):


This task shows how to delete sketched elements.
Create sketched elements.
Deleting sketched elements affects associated features. This what we call

propagation:
1. If you delete a curve (assigned endpoints, by default), the endpoints will also
be deleted on the condition they are not part of a constraint or common to
another curve. Curves are assigned endpoints and circle or arcs are assigned
center points, by default.
2. If you delete a curve and the endpoints/center point, these points will be
actually deleted is they are not either part of a constraint or common to
another element.
3. If you delete a point, the element (curve or circle) will be automatically deleted.
4. Propagation is not valid for constraints: if you delete a constraint, you will not
delete the corresponding geometry.
1. Select the
element you
wish to delete.

2. Click the
Edit -> Delete
command.
The element is
deleted.
3. If you wish
to delete a set
of elements,
just multi-select
them and apply
the Delete
command.
● You can also select the Delete command from the contextual menu. For this right-
click the element to be deleted.
● In case you created an element using the Sketch tools toolbar, a constraint is
applied to this element. To delete this element, you need to delete the constraint
first. To delete constraints, you will follow the same instruction.
You cannot delete elements that are not currently edited sketch elements. This is
particularly true for the reference planes. You can multi-select these elements but
they will not be deleted.
[ Back ] [ Up ]


The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for creating 2D geometry
and more precisely pre-defined profiles.
Creating Oriented Rectangles:

Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define a first side for the rectangle
and then a point corresponding to the rectangle length.
Creating Parallelograms:
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define a first side for the
parallelogram and then a point corresponding to the parallelogram length.
Creating Elongated Hole:

Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the center to center axis and
then a point corresponding to the elongated hole length and angle.
Creating Cylindrical Elongated Hole:

Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the center to center circular
axis and then a point corresponding to the cylindrical elongated hole length
and angle.
Creating Keyhole Profiles:

Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the center to center axis and
then both points corresponding to both radii.
Creating Hexagons:
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the hexagon center and
dimensions.
Creating Centered Rectangles:

Use the Sketch tools toolbar to define the rectangle center and dimensions.
Creating centered Parallelograms:

Use the Sketch tools toolbar to define a first side for the parallelogram and
then a point corresponding to its length.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugbt0200.htm10/19/2004 8:07:10 AM

This task shows how to create a rectangle in the direction of your choice by defining
three extremity points of the rectangle. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools
toolbar but, of course you can create this oriented rectangle manually. For this, move
the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Oriented Rectangle icon

from the Profiles toolbar (Predefined
Profile sub-toolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the first side of the
oriented rectangle (both points) and then either one point on the second side or
directly the oriented rectangle height.
2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired
values.
First Corner
For example, key in the coordinates of the

first point on the first rectangle side (H:
20mm and V: 20mm) or first corner.

Second Corner
For example, to define the second point,

key the width of the rectangle first side (W:
20mm) and the radius of the first side
relatively to the horizontal origin axis (A:
25deg) or second corner.
Third Corner

For example, key in the height of the

rectangle (Height: -22mm) or third corner.
3. Click to create the oriented rectangle.
The oriented rectangle and corresponding

constraints appear as shown here.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

This task shows how to create a parallelogram by clicking. In this task, we will use the
Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this parallelogram manually. For
this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you
wish.
1. Click the Parallelogram icon from the
Profiles toolbar (Predefined Profile

subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the parallelogram.
values.
First Point

first point on the parallelogram first side (H:
20mm and V: 20mm).

Second Point

second point on the parallelogram first side
(H: 37mm and V: 10mm).
Third Point

third point on the parallelogram, in other
words, on the second side of this
parallelogram (H: 57mm and V: 10mm).
3. Click to create the parallelogram.
The parallelogram and corresponding

constraints appear as shown here.


This task shows how to create an elongated hole by clicking. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools
toolbar but, of course you can create this elongated hole manually. For this, move the cursor to
activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Elongated Hole icon from the Profiles

toolbar (Predefined Profile sub-toolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the elongated hole center to center axis
(first and second center point) and then either the elongated hole radius or a point on this elongated
hole.
2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the desired values.
First Center
Second Center
For example, key in the coordinates of both center

points of the elongated hole: a first point (H: 20mm
and V: 18mm) and a second point (H: 50mm and V:
18mm).
You just defined the profile major axis using points.

What you can also do is enter both the length and
angle of this axis.

Point on Oblong Profile
For example, key in the coordinates of a point on the

elongated hole (H: 53mm and V: 10mm).
In other words, you just defined the profile minor axis

or the elongated hole width applying a given radius to
the profile extremity.
At this step, what you can also do is enter the

elongated hole radius.
The elongated hole appears as shown here.

This task shows how to create a cylindrical elongated hole. A construction arc assists you in creating this
element. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this cylindrical
elongated hole manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what
you wish.
1. Click the Cylindrical Elongated Hole icon from
the Profiles toolbar (Predefined Profile subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the cylindrical elongated hole. You are going to
define the (i) circle center, (ii) arc extremities and the (iii) radius of the cylindrical elongated hole.
Circle Center
For example, key in the coordinates (H: 20mm and V: 20mm) of the center point that will be used to
create both the big radius (radius and angle of the cylindrical elongated hole) and the small radius (circular
extremities used to define the cylindrical elongated hole).
Arc Start Point

For example, key in the coordinates of the arc start

point (H: 30mm and V: 10mm).
At this step, you may also define the arc big radius
and angle.
The arc appears as a construction arc.
Arc End Point
For example, key in the coordinates of the arc end

point (H: 10mm and V: 30mm).
At this step, you may also define the arc big radius
(R) and angle (A).
Point on Cylindrical Elongated Hole

For example, key in the coordinates of a point on the

cylindrical elongated hole (H: 20mm and V: 20mm).
In other words, you are defining what we call the

small radius (Radius: 14.142mm). This small
radius corresponds to the width of the cylindrical
elongated hole, relatively to the circle center.

Creating Keyhole Profiles
This task shows how to create a keyhole profile. In this task, we will use the Sketch
tools toolbar but, of course you can create this keyhole manually. For this, move the
cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Keyhole Profile icon from the
Profiles icon (Predefined Profile sub-toolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the keyhole profile.
values.
First Center
Second Center
For example, key in the coordinates that will

allow to define the center to center axis (First
center point: H: 20mm and V: 20mm,
Second center point: H. 20mm and V: 40mm).

First radius
2. Click to define the first radius and then the

second radius.
Second radius

The resulting keyhole is as shown here.

Creating Hexagons
Creating Hexagons
This task shows you how to create an hexagon. A construction circle assists you in creating
this profile. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this
hexagon manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you
get what you wish.
1. Click the Hexagon icon from the Profiles icon
(Predefined Profile subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the hexagon center and then either
a point on this hexagon or the hexagon dimension and angle.
Hexagon Center
For example, key in the coordinates of the center of

the hexagon (H: 25mm and V: 25mm).
Point on Hexagon

Creating Hexagons
For example, key in the dimension (35mm) and

Angle (10deg) of the hexagon.
The hexagon is created.
Be careful: if you fix one extremity of the hexagon and try to move the hexagon using another
extremity point, this hexagon can result twisted. To avoid this, you must drag the hexagon
step by step releasing the mouse button regularly.


This task shows you how to create a centered rectangle.
1. Click the Centered
Rectangle icon
from the Predefined
Profile toolbar in the
Profile toolbar.
2. Click a point in the

geometry area or select
an existing one.
3. Drag the cursor to

create the centered
rectangle.

Applying
Constraints
4. Activate the
Dimensional
Constraints and
the Geometrical
Constraints from
the Sketch Tools
toolbar.
5. Click a point in the
geometry.
specify the rectangle
dimensions.
● Equidistant constraints are

applied automatically on the
opposed lines accordingly to
the center point.
● Dimensional and
Geometrical constraints are
activated by default.


This task shows you how to create a centered parallelogram.
1. Create two lines.
2. Select the
Centered
Parallelogram
command
from the
Predefined
Profiles sub-
toolbar in the
Profile toolbar.
Using two lines
3. Select a first line

(or an axis).
4. Select a second
line (or an axis).
specify the
rectangle
dimensions.

The parallelogram is
created:
● it is centered on the
intersection point of
the two lines.
● its edges are parallel
to the selected lines.
Applying
Constraints
1. Activate the
Dimensional
Constraints
and the
Geometrical
Constraints
from the Sketch

Tools toolbar.
2. Select the two
lines one after the
other.
specify the
rectangle
dimensions.
● Two parallelism
constraints are created
as long as two
symmetrical
constraints which are
based on the two lines
selected before the
parallelogram creation.
● Dimensional and
Geometrical
constraints are
[ Back ] [ Up ]


The Sketcher workbench provides a set of functionalities for creating 2D geometry
and more precisely pre-defined profiles.
As soon as a profile is created, it appears in the specification tree.
given element, the symbol appears.
Creating a profile
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define lines and arcs which the
profile may be made of.
Creating a rectangle
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the rectangle extremity points one
after the other.
Creating a circle
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the circle center and then one
point on the circle.
Creating a three point circle

Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the circle start point, second
point and end point one after the other.
Creating a circle using coordinates

Use the Circle Definition dialog box to define the circle center point and
radius.
Creating a tri-tangent circle

Click three elements one after the other to create a circle made of three
tangent constraints.

Creating an arc
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the arc center and then the
arc start point and end point.
Creating a three point arc

Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the arc start point, second
point and end point one after the other.
Creating a three point arc (using limits)

Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the arc start point, end point
and second point one after the other.
Creating a spline
Click the points through which the spline will go.
Connecting curves with a spline

Click the first, and then the second element to connect.
Connecting curves with an arc

Click the first, and then the second element to connect.
Creating an ellipse
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click to define the ellipse center, major semi-
axis and minor semi-axis endpoints one after the other.
Creating a parabola
Click the focus, apex and then the parabola two extremity points.
Creating a hyperbola
Click the focus, center and apex, and then the hyperbola two extremity
points.
Creating a conic
Click the desired points and excentricity for creating an ellipse, a circle, a
parabola or a hyperbola, using tangents, if needed.
Creating a line
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the line first and second points.

Creating an infinite line

Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the infinite line first and second points.
Creating a bi-tangent line
Click two elements one after the other to create a line that is tangent to
these two elements.
Creating a bisecting line

Click two lines.
Creating a line normal to a curve

Click a point and then the curve.
Creating a symmetrical extension

Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the center point and then the
extremity point of a line that is a symmetrical extension to an existing one.
Creating an axis
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the axis first and second points.
Creating a point
Use the Sketch tools toolbar or click the point horizontal and vertical
coordinates.
Creating a point using coordinates

Enter in the Point Definition dialog box cartesian or polar coordinates.
Creating an equidistant point

Enter in the Equidistant Point Definition dialog box the number and spacing
of the points to be equidistantly created on a line or a curve-type element.
Creating a point using intersection
Create one or more points by intersecting curve type elements via selection.
Creating a point using projection
Create one or more points by projecting points onto curve type elements.


Creating Profiles
Creating Profiles
This task shows how to create a closed profile. A profile may also be open (if you click
the profile end point in the free space). Profiles may be composed of lines and arcs
which you create either by clicking or using the Sketch tools toolbar.
1. Click the Profile icon from the
Profiles toolbar.
The Sketch tools toolbar appears with option commands and values:
Line (active by default ) Tangent Arc Three Point Arc
2. Enter the First Point values. For example, H: 30mm and V: 40mm.
3. Enter the Second Point values. For example, H: 70mm and V: 40mm.
Note that at this step, you may also enter Length and Angle values.
The line appears as shown here, with

the constraints corresponding to the
line created via the Sketch tools
toolbar.

Creating Profiles
4. Press and hold the left mouse

button down.
Dragging the cursor allows you to
activate the Tangent Arc mode
automatically.
A rubberbanding arc follows the

cursor, showing the tangent arc to be
created.
If you cannot manage creating the

tangent arc using the left mouse
button, what you can do is select the
Tangent Arc option command in
5. Click the arc end point.

Creating Profiles
The Line switch is set by default.
6. Start dragging another line and

press the Ctrl key to lock tangency
detection.
7. Click a point to end the line

creation.
8. Select the Three Points Arc option
command from the Sketch tools

toolbar.
At this step, in order to have a clearer sketch, we decided not to visualize the
constraints symbols temporarily (Tools->Options-> General->Parameters options
at the left on the dialog box, Symbols tab, Filter switch button).
Tangent arcs are always positioned

in the direction of the element
previously created.

Creating Profiles
9. Click a point which the profile is

going to go through (arc second
point).
10. Click a point coincident to the

start point of the line first created.
You thus define the three point arc
end point.
11. Activate the constraints symbols

visualization again (Tools->Options-
> General->Parameters options at
the left on the dialog box, Symbols
tab, Filter switch button).
The profile results as shown here:

Creating Profiles
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Creating Rectangles
Creating Rectangles
This task shows how to create a rectangle. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools
toolbar but, of course you can create this rectangle manually. For this, move the cursor
to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Rectangle icon from the
Profiles toolbar.
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the rectangle.
values.
First Point
For example, key in the coordinates of one

corner of the rectangle (H: 20mm and V:
20mm).

Creating Rectangles
Second Point
For example, define the rectangle other end

corner (second point) either according to the
axis origin point (H and V) or to the first
point previously selected (Width: 40mm and
Height: 25mm).
When you create a rectangle using the Sketch tools toolbar, constraints are similarly
assigned to this rectangle. As a result, to modify the position of this rectangle, you will
perform as follows:
3. Double-click the constraint corresponding

to the value to be modified.
The Constraint Definition dialog box appears.

Creating Rectangles
4. Enter the new value. For example, key in

50mm.
5. Click OK.

Creating Circles
Creating Circles
This task shows how to create a circle. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools
toolbar but, of course you can create this circle manually. For this, move the
cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
By default, circle centers appear on the sketch. In case you create circles by
clicking, if you do not need them, you can specify this in the Options dialog box.
For this, go to Tools->Options,

Mechanical Design -> Sketcher
option (Sketcher tab). Uncheck the
Create circle and ellipse centers
option.
1. Click the Circle icon from the
Profiles toolbar (Circle sub-toolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the circle.
2. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the
desired values.
Circle Center

Creating Circles
For example, key in values of the

point corresponding to the circle
center (H: 30mm and V: 30mm).
Point on Circle
For example, define a point on the

circle using keying in either
coordinates or the circle radius (R:
20mm).

Creating Circles
When you create a circle using the Sketch tools toolbar, constraints are similarly
assigned to this circle. As a result, to modify the position of this circle, you will
either delete the constraints or perform as follows:
3. Double-click the constraint

corresponding to the value to be
modified. For example, double-click
20 radius value.
The Constraint Definition dialog box

appears.
4. Select the Diameter dimension

type.
5. Click OK.
Copying the Circle Radius Parameters
Once you have created one circle, you can create any other and in the meantime
use the radius parameter from the circle first created. To do this:

Creating Circles
6. Start creating a second circle.
7. Go over the circle first created with

the cursor and right-click on the now
highlighted circle.
8. Select the Parameter -> Copy

Radius option displayed from the
contextual menu.
The new circle is automatically

created with the radius of the circle
first created.
Changing the Circle Radius
Once you have created a circle, you can change its radius. To do this, you can
either:
● double-click the circle and modify the radius value in the Circle Definition dialog
box that appears,
● or drag the circle until you are satisfied with its new radius.
If the circle center is fixed (or iso-constrained), you can change the circle radius
by using one of the methods explained above.


This task shows how to create a circle that goes through three points. In this
task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this circle
manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as
you get what you wish.
By default, circle centers appear on the sketch. In case you create circles by
clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog box.
For this, go to
Tools->Options,
Mechanical
Design ->
Sketcher option
(Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Three

Point Circle icon
from the
Profiles toolbar
(Circle
subtoolbar).

The Sketch
tools toolbar will
display one after
the other the
values for
defining the three
points of the
circle: values for First Point (H: 10mm and V: 10mm)
defining the
horizontal (H)
and vertical (V)
values of a point
on the circle or Second Point (H: 50mm and V: 20mm)
else the radius of
this circle.
2. Position the
cursor in the
desired fields and Last Point (H:30mm and V: 50mm)
key in the desired
values.
The three point

circle appears as
shown here:



This task shows how to create a circle using center point coordinates. In this
particular case, we will use cartesian coordinates. Still, you can also use polar
coordinates.
By default, circle centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you
create circles by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the
Options dialog box.
For this, go to
Tools->Options,
Mechanical
Design ->
Sketcher option
(Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Circle

Using
Coordinates icon
from the
Profiles toolbar
(Circle subtoolbar).
The Circle Definition dialog box is displayed. The default point coordinates that
appear in the Circle Definition dialog box are the origin axis coordinates.
If, before clicking the Circle Using Coordinates icon, you select a point, this point
will be used as a reference point and the coordinates of this point will appear in
the Circle Definition dialog box.

2. Enter the
coordinates of
the center point.
3. Enter the
desired circle
radius value.
4. Press OK.
The circle and its center point are created.

Creating a Tri-Tangent Circle

This task shows how to create a tri-tangent circle by creating three tangents. In this
task, we will create this circle manually but, of course you can use the Sketch tools
toolbar.
Create two circles and a line.

By default, circle centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you create
circles by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog
box. For this, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option at the
left of the dialog box (Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Tri-Tangent Circle icon from
the Profiles toolbar (Circle subtoolbar).
2. Click a first element. For example, a circle.
3. Click a second element. For example,

another circle.

4. Click a third element. For example, a line.
The tri-tangent circle appears as well as the

corresponding constraints provided you
activated the Internal Constraints icon .
Tangents are created as close as possible to where you clicked on the circle.
Instead of clicking a line, you can create and

click a point.

At any time, you can select a point type

element. The circle will go through this point
and a coincidence constraint is created on
this point.

Creating Arcs
Creating Arcs
This task shows how to create an arc. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar
but, of course, you can create this arc manually. For this, move the cursor to activate
SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
By default, arc centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you create
arcs by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Options dialog box.
For this, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option at the left
of the dialog box (Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Arc icon from the Profiles
toolbar (Circle subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining one after the other the arc
center point, start point and end point.
values.
Arc Center
Start Point

Creating Arcs
For example, enter H: 18mm and V: 30mm

(Circle Center) and then H: 40mm and V:
40mm (Start Point).
The arc center and start point appear.
The arc will now appear according to the position you assign to the cursor. In this
particular case, the cursor position is at the bottom extremity of the arc.
End Point
For example, enter S: -70deg (Angular

Sector).
The arc appears as shown here.


This task shows how to create an arc using three reference points in order to
define the required size and radius. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools
toolbar but, of course you can create this arc manually. For this, move the cursor
to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
By default, arc centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you
create arcs by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the Tools-
>Options dialog box. For this, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design ->
Sketcher option at the left of the dialog box (Sketcher tab)
1. Click the Three Point Arc icon
from the Profiles toolbar (Circle

subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar will display one after the other values for defining the
three points of the circle: defining the horizontal (H) and vertical (V) values of
three points on the arc.
2. Position the cursor in the desired fields and key in the desired values.
Start Point (H: 12mm and V: 32mm)
Second Point (H: 27mm and V: 17mm)

End Point (H: 12mm and V: 7mm)
The arc results as shown here.

Creating Splines
Creating Splines
This task shows you how to create a spline and then modify the spline control points
(coordinates or clicking).
Creating a spline
1. Click the Spline icon from the

Profiles toolbar.
2. Click in the geometry to indicate the

points through which the spline goes.
3. Double-click the last point you have

created to finish the spline creaton.
(Clicking again on the Spline icon or
another command also ends the spline
creation.)
At any time when creating a spline, you

can close it by right-clicking the last
point and selecting Close spline from
the contextual menu.

Creating Splines
The spline is closed in such a way that it

is continuous in curvature.
● Keep in mind that using the displayed

Sketch tools toolbar also allows
creating a spline. In addition, two
constraints will be created (H and V).
Modifying the spline

control points
1. Double-click the control point you

wish to edit.

Creating Splines
The Control Point Definition dialog

box appears.
2. Enter new coordinates. For example,

v: 9mm (vertical).
3. Check the Tangency option to

impose a tangency on this control point.
You can invert the tangent direction
clicking the Reverse tangent button.
4. Click OK.
The point is moved and an arrow

appears on this point to indicate a
tangency.
You can also check the Curvature option to activate the Curvature editor and
impose a curvature on the previously selected control point.
Keep in mind that selecting a point then dragging it will modify the spline shape.
Tangents can be constrained.

Creating Splines


This task shows you how to connect two elements of the curve type, using a connecting
curve (a spline) that goes through their end points.
A connecting curve is associative, and it can be continuous in point, in curvature or in

tangency with its support curves. You can define the tension value and the direction of
the continuity at each connecting point, as well as add constraints to the connecting
curve. Moving a connecting curve will change the shape of the support curves
accordingly.
Open the Connect_Curves.CATPart document.
1. Click the Connect icon from the

Profiles toolbar (Spline subtoolbar).
The connect options appear in the Sketch tools toolbar. By default, the Connect with
a Spline and the Continuity in curvature options are active: the connecting
element will be a spline, and it will be continuous in tangency with the support curves.
By default, the tension that will be applied to the connecting curve is 1.
You can choose another type of continuity: Continuity in point or Continuity in

tangency .
For the continuity in tangency and continuity in curvature options, you can also modify
the tension of the tangency or the tension of the curvature (a value of 0 corresponds to
a continuity in point).
For the purpose of this scenario, leave the default options as set.

2. Select the first and then the second

element to connect.
The point on which you click to select the first and the second element is important:
the closest point to where you click will be automatically used as the starting point and
the end point of the connecting curve. Always click close to the point you want to
connect, or click the point itself.

A connecting spline appears: it is

continuous in curvature to both selected
elements.
3. Click the Connect icon once again.
4. In the Sketch tools toolbar, choose the Continuity in point option.
5. Select the first and then the second

element to connect (this time, select the
other extremity of the elements).


A connecting spline appears: it is

continuous in point to both selected
elements.
● You can edit the connecting curve, as

well as add constraints to it.
● You can also move the connecting
curve: in this case, the shape of the
support elements will change
accordingly, as shown here for
example.
● If you want to trim/break connecting
curves you need to:
❍ create exactly the same conic as
the one you want to be trimmed.
❍ Its extremity points must be
coincident with the conic to be
trimmed and its tangents must be
tangent to the conic to be trimmed.
❍ If a parameter is applied to the first
conic, then link it to the second

conic one using the Formula

command and if a parameter is
applied, then the second one must
be coincident to the first one.


This task shows you how to connect two elements of the curve type using an arc.
Open the Connect_Spline.CATPart document.
1. Click the Connect icon from the

Profiles toolbar (Spline subtoolbar).
The connect options appear in the Sketch tools toolbar. By default, the Connect with
a Spline option is active, and its related options are displayed.
2. Click the Connect with an Arc option

.
3. Select a first element to connect (starting

point), and then a second element (ending
point).

The point on which you click to select the first

and the second element is important: the
closest point to where you click will be used
as the starting point and the end point of the
connecting curve. Always click close to the
point you want to connect, or click the point
itself.
A connecting arc appears, tangent to both

selected elements.

Creating Ellipses
Creating Ellipses
This task shows how to create an ellipse (made of two infinite axes). In this task,
we will use both the Sketch tools toolbar and clicking. In other words, you will
move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get what you wish.
1. Click the Ellipse icon from the
Profiles toolbar.
The Sketch tools toolbar displays values for defining the ellipse center point,
major and then minor semi-axis endpoint.
2. Position the cursor in the desired fields and key in the desired values.
Center
For example, enter H: 9mm and V:

8mm.
Note that you can also click to create

a first point that corresponds to the
ellipse center.
Major Semi-Axis Endpoint

Creating Ellipses
For example, enter H: 65mm and V:

8mm.
You just created a point on the

ellipse. This point allows defining the
major semi-axis.
By default, centers are created and

associative but if you do not need
them you can specify this in the Tools
-> Options dialog box. For more
information, see Base Infrastructure
user's guide.
3. Move the cursor and click a point

on the ellipse.
You just created a point which allows
defining both minor semi-axes.

Creating a Parabola by Focus

This task shows you how to create a Parabola by Focus by clicking the focus, apex
and then the parabola two extremity points.
1. Click the Parabola by Focus icon
from the Profiles toolbar
(Conic subtoolbar).
Focus:
2. Click to define the parabola

focus and apex.
Apex:

First Point:
3. Click two points that correspond

to the parabola end points.
Second Point:

The parabola results as shown

here:

Creating a Hyperbola by Focus

This task shows you how to create a hyperbola by clicking the focus, center and
apex, and then the hyperbola two extremity points.
1. Click the Hyperbola by
Focus icon from the
Profiles toolbar (Conic

subtoolbar).
Focus:
Once you click, the focus is symbolized
by a cross ( ).
Center (asympote intersection):

The center is not associative to the hyperbola.
2. Click to define the

hyperbola focus, center and

apex.
Apex:

First Point:
3. Click two points that

correspond to the hyperbola
end points.
Second Point:
The hyperbola results as

shown here:

Note that, you can use the

Sketch tools toolbar for
defining the excentricity of
the hyperbola.


This task shows the different methods you can apply to create conic curves which are either arcs of parabolas,
hyperbolas or ellipses. According to the way you want to create the curve you will have to select one the
following creation process, using:
● Two points, start and end tangent, with either a parameter or a passing point.
● Two points, a tangent intersection point, with either a parameter or a passing point.
● Four points and one tangent direction for one of these points.
● Five points.
Using two points and start and end tangent...
1. Click the Conic icon from the

Profile toolbar (Conic subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays.
Note that the Two Points as long as the Start and End Tangent options are activated by default.
● While creating the conic, the Sketch tools toolbar will display one after the other the values to define the
coordinates of the Start Point (H, V) followed by its Tangent Direction (H, V, A) and the coordinates of the
End Point (H, V) followed by its Tangent Direction (H, V, A).
● These fields are automatically updated according to the current position of the cursor;
❍ The H and V fields indicate points coordinates.
❍ The A field indicates the tangent direction through an angle value.

2. Click to define the Start Point of the

conic.
3. Click again to select a point which will
indicates the tangent direction of the
Start Point.
4. Click to define the End Point of the

conic.
End Point.
Once both Start Point and End Point are defined, the Sketch tools toolbar displays the Parameter field to
define the parameter value.
...with a parameter...or
6. Enter the value you want to apply in
the Parameter field in the sketch tools
toolbar.
The conic is created according to the

parameter value you have set.
... with a passing point

7. Click a point on the conic to define the

passing point.
The conic is created with the passing point

displayed on it. The H and V fields display the
passing point coordinates.
Using two points and tangent intersection point...

Note that the Two Points as long as the Start and End Tangent options are activated by default.
● While creating the conic, the Sketch tools toolbar will display one after the other the values to define the
coordinates of the Start Point (H, V) followed by its Tangent Direction (H, V, A) and the coordinates of the
End Point (H, V) followed by its Tangent Direction (H, V, A).
● These fields are automatically updated according to the current position of the cursor;
❍ The H and V fields indicate points coordinates.
❍ The A field indicates the tangent direction through an angle value.
2. Click the Tangent Intersection Point
option in the Sketch tools toolbar.

3. Click two points to define the start point

and the end point of the conic.
The tangent intersection point of the conic

now must be defined.
4. Click a third point to define the Tangent

Intersection Point.
The Sketch Tools toolbar expands to display the Parameter field.
... with a parameter...or

5. Enter the value you want to apply in
the Parameter field in the sketch tools
toolbar.
The conic is created and it is tangent to the

two construction lines which go through the
intersection point and the start or end points.
... with a passing point

6. Click a point on the conic to define the
passing point.
The conic is created and the passing point is

noticeable on the conic.

Using four points with a tangency at a passing points

Note that the Tangency at a Passing Point options is activated by default. You can deactivate it and only
activated before the creation of the point on which you want to apply the command.
If you keep this option activated, the direction will be asked for the start point otherwise, when it is deactivated
the direction is automatically asked for the last point.
2. Select the Four Points option in

3. Click to define the start point and the

end point.
For instance, you can apply the tangency to

the third point.
4. Activate the Tangency at a Passing

Point option.
5. Click to define the third point.
third point.
7. Click to define the forth point.
The conic is created and it is tangent to the

construction line of the third point.

During the spline creation using two and four points, when selecting a point on a curve and then the tangency
option, the curve tangency is used to define the one of the spline. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to select
a direction for the tangency, as shown here.
Using five points

2. Select the Five Points option in the

3. Click to define the start point and the
end point.
4. Then select three other points to finish
the creation of the conic.
Using the Nearest End Point mode

The Nearest End Point mode is activated by default in the Sketch tools toolbar.

1. For instance create a line.
2. Click a point on the line.
If the mode is deactivated, the Start Point of

the conic will be exactly the one you clicked
on the line.
You will get a result as shown here.
If the mode is activated, when selecting a

point on the line, this last is highlighted.
The start point of the conic will be the

nearest end one of the line, according to
where you clicked on the line.

When defining the Start Point and the End Point, if the selected point belongs to a curve as above the tangent
direction is directly read on the curve at the selected point or at the nearest end point if the Nearest end
point option is activated.
Therefore, the Start tangent direction and the End tangent direction won't be asked.
● A new conic feature will appear in the specification tree.

● The conic is variational and associative with the geometrical inputs, which means that it will be updated after
every modification of a geometry input.
● You can also edit the curve or add constraints to it.
● If you want to trim/break conic curves you need to:
❍ create exactly the same conic as the one you want to be trimmed.
❍ Its extremity points must be coincident with the conic to be trimmed and its tangents must be tangent to
the conic to be trimmed.
❍ If a parameter is applied to the first conic, then link it to the second conic one using the Formula
command and if a parameter is applied, then the second one must be coincident to the first one.


This task shows how to create standard elements or construction elements. Note
that creating standard or construction elements is based upon the same
methodology.
If standard elements represent the most commonly created elements, on some

occasions, you will have to create geometry just to facilitate your design. Indeed,
construction elements aim at helping you in sketching the required profile.
1. Click the command from the Sketch tools toolbar so that the
elements you are now going to create be either standard or construction
element.
In this task, you will transform the newly created elements into construction
elements.
As construction elements are not taken into account when creating features, note
that they do not appear outside the Sketcher.
Here is an example of
the use of both types of
elements.
The hexagon was
sketched using three
construction circles:

This type of sketch is interesting in that it simplifies the creation and the ways in
which it is constrained. Setting a radius constraint on the second circle is enough
to constrain the whole hexagon. Just imagine what you would have to do to
constrain hexagons sketched with no construction circles!

Creating Lines
Creating Lines
This task shows how to create a line. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools
toolbar but, of course you can create this line manually. For this, move the cursor to
1. Click the Line icon from the
Profiles toolbar.
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the rectangle.
Thanks to the Symmetrical Extension icon , you can create a line that is
symmetrical to its origin.
First Point
2. Click the line first point (first point).
3. Position the cursor in the desired field (Sketch tools toolbar) and key in the
desired values.
Second Point

Creating Lines
You can define the second point either

according to the axis origin point (H and
V) or to a given length (L) and angle (A).
For example, key in L: 30mm and A:

45deg.
4. Press Enter.
When you create a line using the Sketch tools toolbar, constraints are similarly
assigned to this line (by default, the Internal Constraints icon is active). As a
result, to modify the position of this line, you will perform as follows:
5. Double-click the constraint

corresponding to the value to be
modified.
The Constraint Definition dialog box

appears.
6. Enter the new value. For example, use

the spinner and assign a 30deg value to
the line.
7. Click OK.

Creating Lines
Care when you assign graphical attributes to a line (for example, make it thick and
red).
When you turn this red thick line into a construction line (from the contextual
menu: Object.Line -> Definition..., Construction line option in the Line Definition
dialog box), the line will become a dotted gray line. Even though you then decide to
make it a standard line back again (un-checking the Construction line option), the
"red" and "thickness" attributes will not be assigned to the line. The line will be
assigned its original attributes (white).
Defining Line Length/Angle Parameters
Once you have created one line, you can create any other and in the meantime use
the length from the line first created or set this first line as an angle reference. For
this:
8. Start creating a new line.
9. Go over the line first created with the

cursor and right-click on the now
highlighted line.

Creating Lines
10. Select the Parameters-> Copy

Length option displayed in the contextual
menu.
The new line is automatically created

with the length of the line first created.
11. Start creating a new line.
12. Go over the line first created with the

cursor and right-click on the now
highlighted line.
13. Select the Set As Angle Reference

option displayed in the contextual menu.
14. Enter the desired angle value in the Sketch tools toolbar. For example, 75
degrees.
The new line is automatically created with an angle defined relatively to the line
selected (in this particular case, the second line).

Before You Begin
Before You Begin
What is SmartPick ?
SmartPick is a smart and easy-to-use positioning tool which will assist you when using most of
the commands for creating Sketcher geometrical elements. SmartPick will give you higher
productivity by decreasing the number of the interactions necessary for positioning these
According to the various active options (Tools->Options->Sketcher from the menu bar), you
can create the geometrical constraints that are equivalent to the snapping you performed.
SmartPick will return information via symbols.
To do this, SmartPick uses the four following sources of information:
3D
graphic
window
and
SmartPick
cursor:
Sketch tools toolbar

(Coordinates and
parameters):
Contextual menu:
Ctrl or Shift keys.

Before You Begin
Specifying a Location
Using SmartPick, you will easily specify a location:
● somewhere on the grid
● using coordinates
● on a point
● at the extremity point of a curve
● at the midpoint of a line
● at the center of a circle or an ellipse
● all over a curve
● at the intersection point of two curves
● aligned at a vertical/horizontal position
● on the fictitious perpendicular line through a line end point
● any of the above cases possibly combined together, whenever possible.
You will progessively specify this location by providing information using as above mentioned
the blue cursor, coordinates, the contextual menu and Shift/Ctrl keys. Of course, as you will
specify your needs, you will shorten the scope of the available possibilities for eventually locating
the elements as desired.
Note that if you position the cursor outside the zone that is allowed for creating a given element,
the symbol appears.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

SmartPicking ...
SmartPicking...
This task shows you how to specify the location of given geometry thanks to information that
SmartPick returns via symbols.
In other words, SmartPick returns feedback information (highlighted geometry or symbols) which you
will or will not validate.
You will also learn how to progressively specify your needs using the blue cursor, the Sketch tools
toolbar, the contextual menu, Shift key or Ctrl key.
When you move the cursor, H and V corresponding coordinates appear on

the screen and also in the Sketch tools toolbar. Note that the coordinate at
the top is H and the coordinate at the bottom is V.
... Somewhere On the Grid

Whatever the active command, SmartPick allows snapping SmartPick blue cursor, and thereby, the point
to be created on the grid.
You can activated or de-activate the Snap to Point option from the Sketch tools toolbar.
You can also go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab) and
check or un-check the Snap to point option .
Snap to point "on":

SmartPick blue cursor is at the grid intersection point and far from the cursor .

SmartPicking ...
Snap to point "off":

SmartPick blue cursor and the
... Using Coordinates
As you move the and try to assign the desired position to the SmartPick cursor, the Sketch tools
toolbar similarly displays the corresponding horizontal and vertical coordinates of SmartPick blue cursor
.
You can use the Sketch tools toolbar fields for defining the point coordinates either independently from
each others or not.
For example, enter H: 2mm.
SmartPick is locked on this value. As you move the

cursor the V coordinate appears in the Sketch tools
toolbar.

SmartPicking ...
If you want to reset H or V coordinates you just entered

in the Sketch tools toolbar, display the contextual
menu (right-click on the background) and select the
Reset option.
...Hiding Coordinates
1. Select Options
from the Tools
menu bar.
The Options dialog box

is displayed.
2. Select
Mechanical
Design ->
Sketcher.
3. Uncheck the
Visualization of
the cursor
coordinates
option.

SmartPicking ...
The cursor coordinates

are automatically
hidden as you move the
cursor within the
geometry area.
This option is activated by default.
... On H and V Axes
As you move the and try to assign the desired position to the
SmartPick cursor, a horizontal fictitious blue dotted line appears
when h is equal to zero, a vertical fictitious blue dotted line
appears when v is equal to zero.
... On a Point

SmartPicking ...
When a point is included in the tolerance zone of

SmartPick cursor, SmartPick first snaps to the point
and the point-to-point coincidence symbol appears .
This symbol means that snapping suppresses both
degrees of freedom available for a point.
... At a Curve Extremity Point

When a fictitious curve extremity point is included in the tolerance zone of
smartPick cursor, SmartPick snaps to the extremity of this curve.
The point-to-point coincidence symbol appears once the point is

picked.

SmartPicking ...
Be careful: by default, all the curves are assigned fictitious extremity

points. This is why, and as you will probably expect, SmartPick detects
first point-to-point coincidence with the curve existing end point. Care
that in this case only the extremity point is highlihted whereas in the
previous case the whole line is highligthed.
You can also use the contextual menu (Nearest End Point option) while
going over any curve type element with the cursor, and detect first point-
to-point coincidence with the curve existing end point.
... At the Midpoint of a Line
When the midpoint of a line is included in the tolerance zone of

SmartPick cursor, SmartPick snaps to the midpoint of this line.
The point-to-point coincidence symbol appears once the
midpoint is picked and the line highlights.

SmartPicking ...
For this, you can also use the contextual menu (Midpoint
option).
... At the Center of a Circle

When the fictitious center of a circle is included in the
tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor, SmartPick snaps at the
center of this circle. The point-to-point coincidence symbol
appears once the circle center is picked and the circle
highlights. For this, you can also use the contextual menu
(Concentric option).
Be careful: by default, circles are created with a center point, as defined in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab). As a result, SmartPick detects first point-
to-point coincidence.
... All Over a Curve

When a curve is included in the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor, SmartPick automatically snaps to
the curve which highlights. The curve coincidence symbol appears as you go all over the curve
with the cursor . This symbol means the point is snapped and that there is still one degree of
freedom left, except when two curves are detected at the same time.
This is also true In the case of curves that can be extrapolated, (segments, arcs of circles, re-limited
splines or conic curves). SmartPick will snap to these curves on the condition they are included in the
tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor.

SmartPicking ...
Make sure you checked the Support lines and circles option in the
Options dialog box. For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Sketcher option (Sketcher tab).
Any problem for detecting coincidence? Use the Ctrl key as is:
1. Go over the element to be made coincident. For example, a line.

2. Press and hold down the Ctrl key.
SmartPick cursor remains positioned on the picked element.
3. Move the wherever you want.

SmartPick cursor and coincidence symbol remain positioned on the
line.
For more details on the Ctrl key, click here.
... At the Intersection Point of Two Curves

When the intersection
point of two curves is
included in the tolerance
zone of SmartPick cursor,
both curve-type elements
highlight. The coincidence
symbol appears and
SmartPick cursor snaps to
the intersection.

SmartPicking ...
This type of detection illustrates SmartPick main functionality: combined detection. In fact, when two
snapping can possibly be performed, SmartPick aims at satisfying both of them by trying to snap
them at the same time. This smart behavior is a global behavior and is valid for any kind of detection
recognized by SmartPick.
Any problem for detecting intersection? Use the Ctrl key as is:
1. Go over one element to

be intersected using the
. For example, a line.
The picked element
highlights. The coincidence
symbol appears to
indicate that SmartPick
snaps over the line.

SmartPicking ...
2. Press the Ctrl key.

SmartPick automatically
remains snapped whatever
the position you assign to
the cursor.
3. As you press the Ctrl

key, go over the second
element to be intersected
with the element already
picked using .
When SmartPick detects
that the second line can
possibly be snapped to,
SmartPick tries to combine
both snappings detected
thanks to the Ctrl key. In
this particular case,
SmartPick snaps at the
intersection of both lines.
... on Fictitious Perpendicular Line Through Line End Point

If the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor goes over a fictitious perpendicular
line that goes through the extremity point of a line, SmartPick snaps in order
to remain on this fictitious perpendicular line.
Make sure you checked the Alignment option in the Options dialog box. For
this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option
(Sketcher tab) . You will thus automatically detect the different
elements along which the sketch is aligned.
... At a Vertical/Horizontal Position

SmartPicking ...
If the tolerance zone of SmartPick cursor crosses a fictitious horizontal line

that would go through a point, SmartPick snaps in order to remain
horizontal to this point.
In this case, no constraint is created.
Make sure you checked the Alignment option in the Options dialog box.
For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Sketcher
option (Sketcher tab) . You will thus automatically detect the
different elements along which the sketch is aligned.


Using SmartPick, you will adapt the way you use the Sketcher so as to position geometry to be created
according to existing geometry, if needed, and to internal parameters. As a result, you will use commands in
accordance with the type of the element to be created: one command per element.
Unlike CATIA Version 4 (general 2D and 3D creation commands), to create one element, you no longer need to
activate a group of specific commands (or creation scheme).
... From Scratch

You can create geometrical elements by progressively specifying a given number of characteristic points.
These characteristic points can be specified whatever the active Sketcher command. Characteristic points are
pre-determined fictitious points managed by SmartPick which allow creating and manipulating geometrical
elements whatever the complexity of the latter.
You will create some of these characteristic points with total freedom (both horizontal and vertical degrees of
freedom are available ), and others with partial freedom (only one degree of freedom is available ).
You will find here below a non-exhaustive list with Sketcher elementary geometrical elements and
corresponding characteristic points. SmartPick lets you position these points using one of the following: the
cursor, the Sketch tools toolbar, the contextual menu, Shift or Ctrl key.
A line An arc (center radius) An arc of a circle using three points

An oriented rectangle A circle A parabola
The order in which the above mentioned characteristic points (1, 2, 3, 4) will be specified cannot be modified.
Still, you can choose the means to be used for positioning these points, as long as you exclusively take into
account:
● positioning specifications (SmartPick cursor)
● external geometry (for example, two lines parallel to each others, or two coincident points)
● internal geometry characteristics (horizontal/vertical lines, quarter of arc of circles)
● the externalized parameters of a geometrical element (length, angle, excentricity and so forth)
... According to Existing Geometry

Reference Geometry
SmartPick finds out geometrical specifications according to geometrical elements that already exist in a sketch.
You will only detect geometrical specifications according to the current sketch elements that are visible in the
3D window in which the cursor is positioned. You will not need to perform any interaction and you will be
returned a visual feedback as shown below in a non exhaustive way:
tangent perpendicular
parallel (two lines)
(a line and a circle) (two lines)
tangent concentric coincident

(two circles) (a circle and an arc) (curve through point on line)

Consequently, when detecting a constraint, detection can result ambiguous. To remove this ambiguity, you can
try to move the viewpoint so that the elements that imply ambiguity would disappear.
As you will see when using SmartPick, snapping ambiguities currently occur. Besides, the dimensional
specifications of a part often depend on technological specifications. These dimensional specifications are
defined as the part is being designed, they depend on the current application area and are, as a result, very
hard to guess for SmartPick tool. In order to solve these ambiguities, SmartPick classifies possible snapping
according to the geometrical constraints that are associated to these snapping. As such, a given cursor
positioning will be only assigned one snapping. Unfortunately, this classification cannot be modified. It is
provided in the table below.
Table1. Constraints Decreasing Priority Order

1. Point-to-point coincidence
2. Point-to-extremity point coincidence
3. Point-to-noticeable point coincidence (for example, the midpoint of a line)
4. Curve-to-curve tangency
5. Horizontal or vertical line, or else a quarter of an arc of a circle
6. Parallelism
7. Perpendicular curves
8. Point-to-curve coincidence
9. Curve-to-curve coincidence or point to curve support coincidence
10. Point on a perpendicular line through a line end point
11. Point at a vertical position
12. Point at a horizontal position
Also to remove ambiguity during elements creation,

the three options which are parallelism, perpendicular
and tangency can be activated independently from
each other.
This option is available through the SmartPick button

in the Options dialog box which is displayed when
selecting Tools -> Options.
In addition to this classification, when several snapping are possible for a given type of geometrical constraint,
SmartPick takes into account the distance between the snapped cursor and the geometrical element according
to which the snapping is possible. In this case, SmartPick snaps to the nearest element.
Still, there are some cases when SmartPick does not allow dimensioning as desired without additional
interactions. This is why SmartPick therefore manages two means for applying a particular snapping relatively
to the geometrical elements.
Forcing the Snapping
SmartPick allows forcing the snapping on a given geometrical element using either the contextual menu or the
Ctrl key.

Contextual Menu
SmartPick allows forcing the snapping on a given geometrical element using the contextual menu. You will avoid
ambiguities linked to the automatic detection of elements in the current 3D viewpoint by forcing:
● snapping detected at a distance: parallel, perpendicular, concentric, tangency and curve (line/circle) that
goes through a point.
At a distance means that these constraints are detected even though the cursor is not positioned on the
reference element.
● snapping at a given position that is relative to a geometrical element: line midpoint, circle center.
At a given position means that both degrees of freedom are locked.
The contextual menu is therefore available when right-clicking most Sketcher geometrical elements. Of course,
the contents of the contextual menu depends of the element that is being currently created. This contextual
menu can be made of the below four sub-parts:
Option that belongs to the Base Infrastructure product.
Snapping the characteristic point that is being

manipulated (see From scratch paragraph and table2
below).
Snapping the geometrical element that is being

created (see table3 below).
Managing the parameters that are associated to the

geometrical element that is being sketched.
Any snapping that is imposed via the contextual menu

can be de-activated. For this, right-click in the 3D
window background and select the Reset option from
the displayed contextual menu.
The table below lists the constraints that can be detected when snapping characteristic points which are being
manipulated, relatively to existing geometrical elements, and thanks to the contextual menu.
Popped-up Geometry Available Snapping
Line Line midpoint
Circle Circle center
Ellipse Ellipse center
Curve Nearest end point

The table below indicates the possible snapping for geometrical element which are being created, relatively to
existing geometry and thanks to the contextual menu.
External
Point Line Circle Ellipse Conic Spline
Geometry
Element
currently
created
Midpoint Center Center

Point No No
Nearest end point Nearest end point Nearest end point
Line
Circle No No No
Example of snapping possibilities
In the example below, you can see the various snapping possibilities for a line that is being created (dotted line
(s) in the example) relatively to the existing spline: 3 tangency possibilities and 2 perpendicularity possibilities.
The point you right-click to display the contextual menu is used to determine which option will be offered in the
contextual menu. So depending on where you click, you will not be offered the same options.
Note that the software takes into account what has already been specified (in this example, the first point of the
line) to offer the various snapping options. For this reason, depending on the first point of the geometrical
element that is being created, there may be cases in which no solution can be found or in which the solution
offered does not correspond to what you want. In such a case, try to right-click before and/or after the point
you want the software to choose. If you try both ways, one solution at least should be found.

Ctrl Key
SmartPick also allows forcing the current snapping on

an element using the Ctrl key.
● You can force SmartPick to remain snapped on an
element whatever the position of the cursor. For
this, you will press the Ctrl key while the
geometrical snapping you want to force is active
(the element may be highlighted and symbols may
appear) and keep the Ctrl key pressed.
● This functionality is efficient if once the Ctrl key is
pressed you can still move the cursor. In other
words, Ctrl has no effect if the current snapping
inhibits both degrees of freedom. This is often the
case when given snapping combinations are
possible (for example at the intersection of two
lines) or when the cursor is close to a given point
(explicit or implicit as for example the midpoint of a
segment).
● The Ctrl key is very useful when the sketch includes
many geometrical elements because SmartPick
takes into account the distance between the cursor
and the geometrical element.

This is the zone in which the line-circle tangency

snapping (due to the circle proximity) has the first
priority.
Apart from this zone, either the tangency snapping is

meaningless or it interferes with closest geometries or
still with possible constraints that are assigned higher
priorities (see table 1).
Shift Key
If Smartpick cannot solve an ambiguity and returns a snapping that you are not satisfied with, you can de-
activate SmartPick assistant by pressing the Shift key.
Be careful: it can happen that either the Shift or Ctrl key do not behave as specified in the paragraphs above.
In fact, sometimes the viewer looses the focus (selection priority). You can then perform a local transformation
to recover the focus: use the middle mouse button and manipulate the viewpoint. You will thus recover the
focus.
Detecting Internal Geometry Characteristics
Certain geometrical elements are assigned internal peculiar geometrical characteristics. For example and as
shown below, this is the case for horizontal/vertical lines and for quarters of arcs of circles. When such an
internal specification is found out by SmartPick, the color of the currently created geometrical element becomes
blue.
Managing Geometry Parameters

SmartPick also manages internal geometrical specifications such as a line length or a circle radius. Indeed,
these specifications (further called parameters) decrease available degrees of freedom of a geometry
characteristic point (refer to previous From Scratch paragraph). All these parameters are accessed through the
Sketch tools toolbar which gathers all the available parameters that can be valuated for a given geometry
creation command. Finally, while the SmartPick cursor moves, the Sketch tools toolbar displays the
parameters value.
Listed below is a non exhaustive list of the possible looks of Sketch tools toolbar parameter section :
Length and Angle to H axis are available for Line

creation command.
Radius, Start Angle to H Axis or Angular sector are

available for Arc Circle creation command.
Excentricity is available for Hyperbola creation

command.
Note that it is always possible to reset a parameter that have been valuated in the Sketch tools toolbar. For
this, use contextual sub-menu Reset option that is available on 3D viewer background.
SmartPick also manages internal geometrical specifications such as a line length or a circle radius. Indeed,
these specifications (further called parameters) decrease available degrees of freedom of a geometry
characteristic point (refer to previous From Scratch paragraph). All these parameters are accessed through the
Sketch tools toolbar which gathers all the available parameters that can be valuated for a given geometry
creation command. Finally, while the SmartPick cursor moves, the Sketch tools toolbar displays the
parameters value.
Listed below is a non exhaustive list of the possible looks of Sketch tools toolbar parameter section :
Length and Angle to H axis are available for Line creation

command.
Radius, Start Angle to H Axis or Angular sector are

available for Arc Circle creation command.
Excentricity is available for Hyperbola creation command.
Note that it is always possible to reset a parameter that have been valuated in the Sketch tools toolbar. For
this, use contextual sub-menu Reset option that is available on 3D viewer background.

Relation Between Parameters and Characteristic Points
There exist a strong relation between the characteristic point of a geometrical element and some of the
parameters it supports. In fact, if a parameter value is modified by moving the cursor, it means that the
parameter is linked to the current characteristic point and consequently validating the point will modify the
parameter status.
Indeed, as when valuated a characteristic point can no longer be modified, associated parameters get frozen
which is echoed by a grayed entry in the Sketch tools toolbar.
As an example, in Arc Circle creation

command, when the arc start point is defined
(at the sketch origin on this picture) both
Radius and Start Angle to H Axis get frozen.
Indeed, as the arc center is necessarily
previously defined, to impose arc start point
leaves no ambiguity on the radius and the
start angle of the sector.
Specific Parameters
Some parameters have a specific behavior. This behavior is common to all geometry creation commands that
use these parameters. This is the case for Angle and Sector parameters.
Sector Parameter
This parameter is oriented so that no ambiguity is possible when defining an angular sector. In the standard
units system, an angle range is from -360 to 360deg. Any other value is recomputed to this range. Positive
values are for direct sectors (you go from the start direction to the end one the same way you go from H axis to
V axis). Negative values are on the other end for reverse arcs (you go from the start direction to the end one
the same way you go from V axis to H axis).

A direct angular sector A reverse angular sector

Note that an angular sector cannot be identically equal to zero.
Angle Parameter
This parameter is also oriented, its range is from 0 to 360 deg. As a consequence, a -10 deg value is
identically equivalent to a 350 deg value and a 0 deg value is definitely not equal to a 180 deg value.
Note that when this angle is fixed, the cursor position is restricted
A fixed 30 deg angle value imposed to a line to the half of the sketch plane. Indeed, otherwise a 30 deg angle
would be equal to a 210 deg one which is excluded.
By default, angle value are computed
relatively to H-Axis. This can be modified any
time you want to define an angle value using
the contextual menu Parameter section
When an angle value is available in the

Sketch tools toolbar, any line that is
contained in the current sketch can be
defined as the angle computation basis. To
issue out orientation, a red arrow is displayed
to show the reference line orientation. In this
example, a 25 deg angle is set relatively to
an existing line

Copying Parameter Values
It is possible to copy some of parameters value from any existing geometrical element that can be defined with
the same parameters. This functionality is available through the contextual menu "Parameter" section for length
and radius parameters.
Length can be copied from a line while radius

from a circle or an arc.
[ Back ] [ Up ]


This task shows how to create an infinite line either horizontal or vertical, or still
according to two points you will specify using SmartPick.
1. Double-click the
Infinite Line icon
from the Profile
toolbar (Line
subtoolbar).
The following options

appear in the Sketch
tools toolbar. The
Horizontal Line option
is the default option.
If you keep the

Horizontal Line option
active, as you go over
the viewer with the
cursor, an horizontal
line automatically
appears.
2. Click to position the

line.

3. Activate the
Vertical Line option
from the Sketch
tools toolbar.
As you go over the

viewer with the
mouse, a vertical line
now automatically
appears.
4. Click to position the

line.
5. Activate the Line

Through Two Points
option from the
Note that the angle

(A) now appears in
the Sketch tools
toolbar and can be
valued at any time for
defining the line.

6. Click to position a
start point on the
infinite line to be
created.
7. Click to position an
end point on the
infinite line to be
created.



This task shows how to create a bi-tangent line by creating two tangents (on two
different elements).
Create two circles.
1. Click the Bi-Tangent Line icon from
the Profiles toolbar (Line subtoolbar).
2. Click a first element (first tangent). For

example, click a circle.

3. Click a second element (second tangent).

For example, click another circle.
The bi-tangent line appears between both

selected elements.
The bi-tangent line appears as well as the

corresponding constraints provided you
activated the Geometrical Constraints icon
Tangents are created as close as possible to where you clicked on the circle.
At this step, create a point.
At any time, you can select a point type

element. The line will go through this point
and a coincidence constraint is created on
this point.


This task shows how to create an infinite bisecting line by clicking two points on two
existing lines.
Open the Line_Bisecting.CATPart document.
1. Double-click the
Bisecting Line icon
from the Profiles toolbar
(Line subtoolbar).
2. Click two points on the

two existing lines, one
after the other.

The infinite bisecting line

automatically appears, in
accordance with both
points previously clicked.

Note that this bisecting line corresponds to a line symmetrically constrained to two
lines (of course on the condition the Geometrical Constraint option command is
active in the Sketch tools toolbar). If both selected lines are parallel to each others,
a new line will be created between these lines.


This task shows how to create a line normal to a curve. As a perpendicularity
constraint is created, the line remains perpendicular to the curve even when it is
moved.
Create a spline.
1. Click the Line

Normal to Curve
icon from the
Profile toolbar (Line

subtoolbar).
2. Click the line first

point.

3. Click a point on the

curve.
The line is created, as

well as a
perpendicularity
constraint (between
the line and the curve).
Lines normal to a curve are created as close as possible to where you clicked on the
curve. You will get better results if, before clicking the curve, you try to position the
line as perpendicular to the curve as possible.


This task shows how to create a symmetrical extension to a line. In other words, you are
going to create a median to an existing line by clicking. Still, you can use the Sketch tools
toolbar.
Create a line.
1. Click the Line icon from the Profiles
toolbar.
2. Click the Symmetrical Extension command option that appears in the Sketch tools
toolbar.
3. Click the center point of the line which is to

be assigned a symmetrical extension.
4. Drag the cursor to the desired location.
The median appears. It is perpendicular to the

line, at the line midpoint.
5. Click to locate the symmetrical extension.

The median is created.
6. If needed, move the symmetrical extension

to a new position.

Creating an Axis
Creating an Axis
This task shows how to create an axis. You will need axis whenever creating shafts
and grooves. Axis cannot be converted into construction elements.
In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can create this line
manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click as soon as you get
what you wish.
1. Click the Axis icon from the Profiles
toolbar.
The Sketch tools toolbar now displays values for defining the axis first and second
point.
values.
First Point
Second Point

Creating an Axis

first point (H: 20mm and V: 20mm) and
then the coordinates of the second point
(H: 10mm and V: 35mm).
3. Press Enter.
The axis results as shown here.
If, before you select the Axis icon, you have

already selected a line, this line will
automatically be transformed into an axis.
Note that you can create only one axis per

sketch.
If you try to create a second axis, the axis

first created is automatically transformed
into a line (construction type element).

Creating Points
Creating Points
This task shows you how to create a point. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools
toolbar but, of course you can create this point manually. For this, move the cursor to
1. Click the Point icon
from the Profiles toolbar.
The Sketch tools toolbar displays values for defining the point coordinates: H
(horizontal) and V (vertical).
2. Position the cursor in the desired field and key in the desired values.
Point Coordinates
For example, key in H:

19.7mm and V: 19.5mm.
The point appears.

Creating Points
When you create a point

using the Sketch tools
toolbar, constraints are
similarly assigned to this
point. As a result, to
modify the position of this
point, you will either delete
the constraints or perform
as follows:
3. Double-click the
constraint corresponding to
the value to be modified.
For example,19.7.
The Constraint Definition

dialog box appears.
4. Modify the value in the

Constraint Definition dialog
box. In this case, enter
Value: 20mm.
5. Right-click the point and

select the Properties option
from the contextual menu
(Graphic tab).
6. If needed, click a new

symbol.

Creating Points
For creating an isobarycenter, click (or multi-select) at least two points before clicking
the Point command. Note that an isobarycenter can only be created between points.
In other words, if you multi-select a rectangle, the four points of this rectangle, and
only these four points, will be used for defining the isobarycenter. Associativity is no
more valid.


This task shows you how to create a point by indicating coordinates. In this task, we
will use an existing point as reference for creating another point.
Create a point.
1. Click the Point by Using Coordinates icon

from the Profiles toolbar (Point
subtoolbar).
2. Select the reference point.

This point will be used as a reference point.
You can select this reference point either
before or after you click the Point by Using
Coordinates icon.

The Point Definition dialog box appears,

which allows you to use either cartesian (h
and v) or polar coordinates. The coordinates
of the reference point will appear in the
Point Definition dialog box.
3. Enter the desired new point definition in

the dialog box.
For example, select the Polar tab and enter
Radius: 30mm.
4. Click OK.
The point is created with a 30mm radius

relatively to the reference point.

The symbol used for points in the geometry area can be customized. For this, right
click and select the Properties option from the contextual menu (Graphic tab).


This task shows how to create a set of equidistant points on a line. You can create
equidistant points on curves.
Open the Equidistant_Point.CATPart document.
1. Click the Equidistant Points icon from
the Profiles toolbar (Point subtoolbar).
2. Select the curve type element on which you wish to create equidistant points. For
example, select a line.
The Equidistant Points Definition dialog box is displayed. By default in this

particular case, 5 equidistant New Points are previewed and the default spacing is set
at 8.333 mm.

If needed, click the Reverse Direction button to create these points in a reverse
direction. In this particular case, we do not.
3. Select one origin point of the line to define the starting point.
The Parameters field automatically becomes modifiable. By default, the Points &
Spacing parameter appears.
4. Key in the desired number of spacing. For example, enter Spacing: 5mm.
5. Press Enter.
The five points are created and distributed along the line.
At this step, you can click or select an ending point, if needed. In this particular case,
we do not.
6. Select Points & Length as new Parameters field.
7. Enter 40mm as new Length value (length between the point first selected and the
fifth point automatically created).
8. Press Enter.
The five points are created and distributed along a 40mm distance on the line.

9. Select Spacing & Length as new Parameters field.
10. Enter 25mm as new Length value (length between the point first selected and
the last point automatically created).
11. Press Enter.
The number of the points is automatically updated (in this case, two points) in the
dialog box and created on the line.

12. Select Spacing & Length as new Parameters field.
13. Enter 5mm as new Spacing value (spacing between each point of a distance
defines as 25mm).
14. Press Enter.
The number of the points is automatically updated (in this case, four points) in the
dialog box and created on the line.
15. Click Ok to create the points (and the constraint, if needed).
● Coincidence constraints will be created between each point and the line on the
condition the Dimensional Constraints command is active. Offset constraints are
created between the points. The offset between the origin point and the first point
is a driving constraint.
● Note also that formulas are created. For more information about formulas, see
Knowledge Advisor User's guide.
● You can edit points one after the other. For this, double click one point and redefine
either the Cartesian or the polar coordinates from the Point Definition dialog box
that appears.
● Modifications applied to the supporting element are not applied to points. The
symbol used for points in the geometry area can be customized using the Edit ->
Properties command (Graphic tab).



This task shows you how to create one or more points by intersecting curve type
elements.
Open the Intersection_Point.CATPart document.
1. Multi-select the
elements to be used for
intersecting.
2. Click the Intersection

Point icon from the
Profiles toolbar (Point sub-
toolbar).
3. Select one curve type

element with which the
elements first selected will
intersect and on which
intersection points will be
created.

The intersecting points

automatically appear on
the curve type element
last selected.
The constraints appear, of course on the condition the Geometrical Constraint option
command is active in the Sketch tools toolbar).

Creating a Point Using Projection

This task shows you how to create one or more points by projecting points onto curve
type elements.
Open the Projection_Point.CATPart document.
1. Multi-select the elements to

be used for projection.
2. Click the Projection Point

icon from the Profiles
toolbar (Point subtoolbar).
3. Select one curve type

element on which the element
first selected will be projected
and on which projection points
will be created.

The projection points

automatically appear on the
curve type element last
selected, as well as
construction lines..
● The constraints appear, of course on the condition the Geometrical Constraint option
command is active in the Sketch tools toolbar).
● The points that are projected are perpendicular to the element last selected
provided this element is a line. Note that both the selected points and the projected
points are associative with the construction lines that are also created.
Creating Associative Projected Points using...

1. Create a spline and
points.

2. Select the Projection

Point icon from the
Profiles toolbar (Point
subtoolbar).
To multi-select several
elements you have two
possibilities either:
● use the control key before
selecting the command.
● drag the cursor if the

command is already
activated.
The Sketch tools toolbar

displays two new options:
Orthogonal projection
3. Keep the Orthogonal
Projection option
activated as it is so by
default in the Sketch
tools toolbar.
4. Select one or several

points.
5. Select the spline.

All the selected points have

been projected onto the curve
according to a normal direction
at this curve.
A construction line is created

between the original points and
the projected ones.
Projection Along a Direction

1. Select the Projection
Along a Direction
option from the Sketch
tools toolbar.
To multi-select several
elements you have two
possibilities either:
● use the control key before
selecting the command.
● drag the cursor if the

command is already
activated.

2. Select one or several

points.
3. Select the spline.
The selected point is projected

along the given direction.
A construction line is created between the original point and the projected one.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

This task shows you how to deactivate (and then reactivate) a sketch as well as its related features (in order
to avoid update errors). You will also learn how formulas let you view all activities and their status, as well
as activate/deactivate activities.
You can use the same method to deactivate absolute axes, projections, intersections.
Open the Pinmounting.CATPart document.
1. From the specification tree, right-click Sketch.5.
2. In the contextual menu which is displayed, select Sketch.5 object -> Deactivate.

The selected sketch, and the elements which are impacted by its deactivation, are highlighted in the
specification tree and in the geometry area. The Deactivate dialog box is displayed, listing the elements
which are impacted by the sketch deactivation.
3. Make sure that the Deactivate impacted elements option is checked in the dialog box: this ensures
that there will be no update error when the sketch is deactivated.
4. Click OK to validate and close the dialog box.
The selected sketch and the impacted elements are deactivated. Specific icons are displayed in the
specification tree for deactivated element to indicate that they have been deactivated.

5. If you now click the Formula icon in the Knowledge toolbar to display the Formulas dialog box, you will
be able to see that the Activity parameter corresponding to the selected item (Sketch.5, in this case) is set to "false" to
indicate that this item is deactivated.

6. To reactivate the sketch, you have two possibilities:

● In the Formulas dialog box, select the Activity parameter corresponding to the deactivated sketch
(PartBody\Sketch.5\Activity), and select "true" from the Edit name or value of the current
parameter drop-down list.
● From the specification tree, right-click Sketch.5, and select Sketch.5 object -> Activate from the
contextual menu. The Activate dialog box is then displayed. Make sure the Activate impacted elements
is checked if you want to reactivate the related features, and then click OK.
You can use either method to reactivate the sketch and the elements that were impacted by its deactivation.
In some cases, not all impacted elements will be reactivated when you use the second method. In this case,
you will be able to reactivate impacted elements individually.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

This section contains the description of the workbench icons and menus. Many of these commands are
discussed in greater details in other parts of the guide.
Command Board
Sketcher Menu Bar
Sketcher Toolbars
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugwd0000.htm10/19/2004 8:22:06 AM
Command Board
Command (and Option) Board

General and Sketch Tools
Create a Positioned Sketch Snap to Point
Start a Sketch Standard or Construction Elements
Leave Sketcher Workbench Geometrical Constraints
Ctrl Lock currently detected constraints Dimensional Constraints

Shift Deactivate a constraint
Connecting Curves with an Arc Connecting Curves with a Spline
Sketched Geometry
Line
Tangent Arc
Profile
Three Point Arc
Axis
Predefined Profiles
Oriented Rectangle Cylindrical Elongated Hole
Elongated Hole Keyhole
Hexagon
Centered rectangle
Centered Parallelogram
Circle
Basic Circle Basic Arc
Three Point Circle Arc Three Points
Circle Using Coordinates Arc Three Point via Limits
Tri-Tangent Circle

Command Board
Line
Bi-Tangent Line Infinite Line
Bisecting Line Line normal to curve
Spline
Spline Connect
Conic Point
Ellipse Point (Ctrl P)
Parabola by Focus Point Using Coordinates
Hyperbola by Focus Equidistant Point
Conic Intersection Point
Projection Point
Operations on Sketched Geometry

Corners Trim Both Elem.
Trim One
No Trim
Standard Lines Trim
Construction Lines Trim

Command Board
Chamfers (Ctrl h) Trim Both Elem.
Trim One
No Trim
Standard Lines Trim
Construction Lines Trim
Trim Elem. Trim Both Elem.
Trim One
Close Elem.
Complement
Quick Trim
Break Elements (Ctrl B)
Transformation
Mirrored Elements (Ctrl S) Symmetrical Elements
Translate Elements Scale Elements
Rotate Elements Offset Elements
3D Geometry

Command Board
Project 3D Elements Isolating Projections and Intersections
Intersect 3D Elements with Sketch

Project 3D Silhouette Edges
Plane
Constraints
Constraints (Dialog Box) (Ctrl o) Autoconstraining
Contact Constraints Animate Constraint
Dimensional/Geometrical (Ctrl C)
Tools
Cut Part by Sketch Plane Sketch Solving Status
Create Datum Sketch Analysis
Ouptut Features
Element Colors
Element Color Element Color
Current white Fixed green
Selected red orange Iso-constrained green
Protected yellow Over-constrained violet
No changed brown Inconsistent red
Constraint Visualization
Symbol Type Symbol Type
Perpendicular Parallel
Radius
Coincident Distance
Length

Command Board
Vertical Diameter
Horizontal Concentric
Fix customize all types

[ Up ] [ Next ]

Sketcher Menu Bar
Sketcher Menu Bar

This section presents the main menu bar and commands dedicated to the Sketcher.
Edit
For... See...
Cut...
Copy
Paste
Delete... Deleting Sketcher Elements
xxx.object Editing the Profile Shape and Size
Editing Sketcher Elements
Insert
For... See...
Constraint... Setting Constraints
Profile... Sketching Profiles
Operation... Performing Operations on Profiles
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugwd0301.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 8:23:28 AM

Sketcher Menu Bar
Tools
For... See...
Sketch Analysis Analyzing the sketch

Sketcher Toolbars
Sketcher Toolbars
The information you will find in this section are listed below:
Sketch tools
Sketcher
Constraints
Profiles
Operations
Tools Toolbar
Sketch tools
Sketch tools
See Creating Standard or Construction

See Snap to Point
Elements
See Setting Constraints See Setting Constraints
See Trimming Elements With Both Elements

See Creating Corners
Trimmed
See Trimming Elements With One Element

See Creating Corners (One Element Trimmed)
Trimmed
See Creating Corners (No Element Trimmed) See Trimming Multiple Elements
See Creating Corners (Standard Lines Trim) See Closing Elements
See Creating Corners (Construction Lines Trim) See Breaking and Trimming Elements
See Creating Chamfers with Both Elements Trimmed See Creating Symmetrical Elements
See Creating chamfers with One Element Trimmed

Sketch tools
See Creating Chamfers with No Element Trimmed
See Creating Chamfer with Standard Lines Trimmed
See Creating Chamfer with Construction Lines Trimmed
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Sketcher
Sketcher Toolbar
See Starting a Sketch See Creating a Pad from Part Design User's Guide
See Starting a Sketch
Constraints
Constraints Toolbar
See Creating Constraints via a Dialog Box See Using the Auto-constraining a group
of Elements
See Quickly Creating Dimensional/

See Animating Constraint
See Creating a Contact Constraint
Profiles
Profiles Toolbar
See Profiles See Parabola
See Rectangles See Hyperbola
See Conic
See Oriented Rectangles See Basic Arcs
See Parallelograms See Arc Arcs Three Point
See Oblong Profiles See Arcs Three Point via Limits
See Oblong Arcs See Splines

See Connecting Curves with a Spline
See Keyhole
and Connecting Curves with an Arc
See Hexagons
See Lines See Bi-Tangent Line
See Infinite Line See Bisecting Line
See Line Normal to a Curve See Centered Rectangle
See Axes See Centered Parallelogram
See Basic Circles See Points
See Three Point Circles See Points Using Coordinates
See Circles Using Coordinates See Equidistant Points
See Tri-Tangent Circle See Intersection
See Ellipses See Projection Point
Operations
Operations Toolbar
See Creating Corners (Both See Moving Element by Symmetry

Elements Trimmed)
See Creating Corners (One Element See Creating Mirrored Elements
Trimmed)
See Creating Corners (No Elements See Translating Elements
Trimmed)
See Creating Chamfers with Both
See Rotating Elements
Elements Trimmed
See Creating Chamfers with One
See Scaling Elements
Element Trimmed
See Creating Chamfers with No See Offsetting Elements
Elements Trimmed
See Trimming Elements See Projecting 3D Elements onto the Sketch
Plane
See Intersecting 3D Elements with the
See Breaking Elements
Sketch Plane
See Breaking and Trimming See Projecting 3D Silhouette Edges
Tools Toolbar
Tools Toolbar
See Cutting the Part by the Sketch See Performing a Light Sketch
Plane Analysis
See Creating Datums See Analyzing the Sketch
See Creating Output Features
[ Back ] [ Up ]
AbsoluteAxis Directions
HDirection
VDirection
Origin
Geometry
Circle
Parabola
Ellipse
Curve
Line
Point
Conic
Connect
Hyperbola
Constraints
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/basst_C2/basstsketcher.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:27:00 AM

Length, Radius, Semimajor and Semiminor constraints

Fix
Angle
Symmetry
Equidistance
Perpendicularity
Coincidence
Parallelism
Distance
Midpoint, Concentricity
Tangency
Use-Edges (imported elements)
3D Silhouette
3D Projection
3D Intersection
Marks
When importing geometry, if the Datum mode is activated then new marks are created.
● Marks referencing splines:

Envelope Mark
Created when imported geometry is composed if several sub-elements which are linked
together.

● Marks referencing other elements:
Point Mark
Circle Mark
Line


The Sketcher settings will help you sketch your profile with given options. For example, the grid
will make it easier to sketch a profile requiring parallel lines.
1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box. The Options
dialog box appears.
2. Expand the Mechanical Design option, then click Sketcher. The Sketcher tab appears,
containing the following set of options:
● Grid
● Sketch Plane
● Geometry
● Constraint
● Colors
Grid
Display
Check this option to display the grid in your session.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudys_C2/bascudys0000.htm (1 of 9)10/19/2004 8:27:14 AM

Snap to point
Check the Snap to point option if your sketch needs to begin or end on the points
of the grid.
Allow Distortions
Check this option to apply different graduations and spacing between H and V.
H; V; Primary spacing; Graduations
To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the H and V fields. The
Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the
grid. The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the
major lines of the grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid.
Note that in the Sketcher workbench you need to set 2D curves in NO Show mode
to be able to visualize the part edges in the 3D area.
Sketch Plane
Shade sketch plane
Check this option to view the sketch plane in the Sketcher workbench. Note that
you also need to display the grid in order to be able to see the shaded plane.
The sketch plane will be shaded in the Sketcher workbench:

Position sketch plane parallel to screen
Check this option to ensure that the sketch plane will be positioned properly each
time you enter the Sketcher workbench.
Visualization of the cursor coordinates

Check this option to have the cursor coordinates displayed, near the cursor, within
the geometry.
Geometry
You can decide whether or not you want to create centers when sketching circles or
ellipses. By default, this option is activated. Just uncheck it if you do not need to
create centers when sketching.
Allow direct manipulation
Select this option to be able to move geometry using the mouse. When moving
geometry, you can move either the minimum number of elements, the maximum
number of elements, or still the minimum number by modifying the shape of
elements, if needed. Click the Solving mode... button to configure manipulation.

The dialog box that appears offers the following options as regards the solving
mode:
Solving mode for moving elements
Standard mode
You move as many elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.
Minimum move
You move as few elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.

Relaxation
You move elements by re-distributing them over the sketch, globally speaking. This
method solves element moving by minimizing energy cost.
Drag elements end points included
Furthermore, you can choose to drag elements along with their end points by
checking this box.
Constraint
Creates the geometrical constraints
Lets you specify whether or not you want to created the geometrical constraints
detected by the SmartPick tool.
Creates the dimensional constraints
Lets you specify whether or not you want to created the dimensional constraints
detected by the SmartPick tool.
If both these detection options are unchecked, the Create detected constraints option will be
inactive by default in the Tools toolbar. You will be able to activate it at any time.
SmartPick... (switch button)
As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple directions and
positions, and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead
to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities

as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession. Consequently,

you can decide to filter out undesired detections by clicking the SmartPick...
button.
In the SmartPick dialog box that appears, the following options are available and
selected by default:
● Support lines and circles
● Alignment
● Parallelism
● Tangency
● Horizontal and vertical
Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect while sketching.
Disabling SmartPick completely (i.e. unchecking all options in the SmartPick dialog
box) is particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, it may
be a good idea to disable SmartPick to concentrate only on the geometry.
Colors

Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond
to colors illustrating:
Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools-
>Options dialog box.
OR
● Constraint diagnosis
Colors that represent constraint diagnoses are colors that are imposed to elements whatever
the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given
diagnoses. As a result, as soon as the diagnosis is solved, the element is assigned the color
as defined in the Tools->Options dialog box.
Default color of the elements
From the list, choose the color that you want to use as the default for sketched
elements.
Visualization of diagnosis
Select this option if you want over-constrained, inconsistent, not-changed or iso-

constrained elements to be identified using specific colors. Then, click the Colors...
button to configure these colors.

In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of
elements:
Over-constrained elements
The dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied
to the geometry.
Inconsistent elements
At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when
elements are under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead
to a solution.
Not-changed elements
Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a result,
geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated.
Iso-constrained elements
All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be
moved from its geometrical support.
Other color of the elements
Click the Colors... button to configure the colors of other elements.
In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of
elements:
Protected elements
Non-modifiable elements.
Construction elements
A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only visualized by, the
sketch. This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating
solid primitives.
SmartPick
Colors used for SmartPick assistant elements and symbols.

3. Once you have chosen all of your options, click OK to confirm your choices and to exit the
Options dialog box.

Glossary
Glossary
A
autoconstraint A constraint applied to an iso-element (a group of elements).
autodetection An assistant for visualizing and, if needed, creating constraints
between elements using the Sketcher.
C
The coordinates of an element defined according to the horizontal
Cartesian coordinate
and vertical position of this element.
chamfer A cut through the thickness of the feature of an angle.
This mark is the result of either the intersection of a 3D geometry
composite mark component containing several sub-elements or of a face projection/
offset.
consecutive element An element that does not intersect with another element.
constraint A geometric or dimension relation either on one element or between
two or three elements.
A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only
construction element visualized by, the sketch. This element is used as positioning
reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives.
control point A control point is a point which a spline (tangent) passes through.
D
A constraint that drives the behaviour of the corresponding
driving constraint
geometry.
E
Constraints between a selected element and other elements in the
external constraints
sketch.
I
Constraints on a selected element or between a group of selected
internal constraints
elements.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysuggl.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:28:11 AM

Glossary
isobarycenter A center of gravity created between previously selected elements.
O
A distance at which a duplicated line type element or curve type
offset
element can be positioned.
P
The coordinates of an element defined according to the radius and
polar coordinate
the angle of this element.
An open or closed shape including arcs and lines created by the
profile
profile command in the Sketcher workbench.
R
rotation An operation for moving elements via duplication.
S
An operation that resizes features to a percentage of their initial
scaling
sizes.
A set of geometric elements created in the Sketcher workbench. For
sketch instance, a sketch may include a profile, construction lines and
points.
An assistant for visualizing and, if needed, creating constraints
SmartPick
between elements using the Sketcher.
standard element Any type of element.
symmetry An operation for repeating elements.
T
An operation for moving elements or creating several copies of two-
translation
dimensional elements.
trace A result from the intersection between an element and sketch face.
U
use edge A 2D trace resulting from a 3D projection or intersection.

Glossary

Index
Index
Numerics
3D elements
intersecting
projecting
3D silhouette edges
creating
projecting
A
absolute axis definition
analyzing
geometry
sketch
animating constraints
arc of circle, creating
arc, creating
auto-constraint
auto-search on a profile
axis, creating
B
bisecting line, creating
brackets
breaking
breaking elements
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/dysug_C2/dysugix.htm (1 of 12)10/19/2004 8:28:26 AM

Index
C
centered parallelogram
applying constraints
creating
centered rectangle
creating
chamfer
with both elements trimmed
with no element trimmed
with one element trimmed
changing a sketch support
circle using coordinates, creating
circle, creating
closing elements
colors
brown
green
purple
red
white
colors (settings)
command
3D Silhouette Edges
Animate Constraints
Arc
Auto Constraint
Auto Search
Axis
Bisecting Line
Break

Index
Centered Parallelogram
Centered Rectangle
Change a Sketch Support
Circle
Circle Using Coordinates
Close
Concentricity
Conic
Connect (with a spline)
Connect (with an arc)
Constraints
Constraints (fixed / unfixed)
Constraints (via a dialog box)
Construction/Standard Elements
Cut Part by Sketch Plane
Cylindrical Elongated Hole
Ellipse
Elongated Hole
Equidistant Points
Hexagon
Hyperbola by Focus
Infinite Line
Intersect 3D Elements
Intersection Point
Isolate
Keyhole Profile
Line
Line Normal to Curve
Mirror

Index
Oriented Rectangle
Output Feature
Parabola by Focus
Parallelogram
Point
Point Using Coordinates
Profile
Project 3D Elements
Projection Point
Quick Trim
Rectangle
Snap to Point
Spline
Symmetrical Extension
Symmetry
Three Point Arc
Three Point Circle
Three Points Arc Using Limits
Translation
Trim
Trim All Elements
Trim First Element
Trim No Element
Tri-Tangent Circle
conic curves
creating
editing
connecting curves
editing
with a spline
with an arc
constraint (settings)

Index
constraint definition, modifying

constraint measure direction, defining
constraints
coincident
colors
concentric
diameter
dimensional
fix
geometrical
horizontal
parallel
perpendicular
radius
vertical
visualization
while sketching
constraints (via dialog box), creating
constraints, editing
construction element, creating
construction elements, creating
coordinates, modifying
copying/pasting elements
corner
with construction lines trimmed
with standard lines trimmed
creating
a point using projection
a point using projection along a direction

Index
an arc
axis
bisecting line
centered parallelogram
centered rectangle
chamfer with both elements trimmed
chamfer with no element trimmed
chamfer with one element trimmed
circle
circle using coordinates
conic curves
construction elements
corner with both elements trimmed
corner with no element trimmed
corner with one element trimmed
cylindrical elongated hole
dimensional constraints
ellipses
equidistant points
geometrical constraints
hexagon
hyperbola by focus
infinite line
mirrored elements
oblong profile
output features
positioned sketch
sketch
spline offset
standard elemetns
three point circle
curves

Index
connecting with a spline

connecting with an arc
customizing Sketcher
cutting the part (by sketch plane)
cylindrical elongated hole, creating
D
deactivating sketches
dimensional constraint, creating
dimensional constraints, creating
E
editing
conic curves
connecting curves
intersection marks
projection marks
spline
spline offset
editing, profile
elements
trimming
elements, closing
ellipse, creating
elongated hole, creating
equidistant points, creating
G
geometrical constraint, creating

Index
geometrical constraints, creating

geometry
analyzing
diagnosis
geometry (settings)
grid (settings)
H
hexagon
hexagon, creating
hyperbola by focus, creating
I
inconsistent, sketch
infinite line, creating
intersecting 3D elements
intersection marks, editing
intersections, isolating
isolating
intersections
projections
K
keyhole profile, creating
L
lines normal to curves, creating

Index
lines, creating
M
menu bar
mirrored element, creating
modifying, constraint definition
O
offsetting
operations on profiles, performing
oriented rectangle, creating
output features, creating
over-constrained sketches, analyzing
P
pad, generating
parabola by focus, creating
parallelogram, creating
parents/children, editing
point using intersection, creating
points using coordinates, creating
points, creating
positioned sketch, starting
pre-defined profiles, sketching
profile
auto-search
creating
deleting

Index
editing
transforming
trimming
projection marks, editing
projections, isolating
Q
quickly analyzing, geometry
R
rectangle, creating
replacing
geometry
S
settings, customizing for Sketcher
simple profiles, sketching
sketch
analyzing
changing the support
creating
creating a positioned sketch
deactivating
inconsistent
starting
sketch plane (settings)
sketch plane, cutting
sketching, simple profiles
smartpick, using

Index
smartpicking
snap to point option, using
spline
creating
editing
spline offset
creating
editing
standard element
standard elements, creating
symmetrical elements
moving
symmetrical extension, creating
T
three point circle, creating
three points arc using limits, creating
three points arc, creating
toolbar
transforming, profile
translating elements
trimming
trimming
elements
profile
tri-tangent circle, creating
U
using

Index
snap to point option

using smartpick
using tools, sketching
W
workbench
Y
yellow, colors

Assembly Design
Assembly
© Dassault Systèmes. 1994-2003 All rights reserved. Design
Preface
Using This Guide
Conventions
What's New?
Getting Started
Entering Assembly Design Workbench and Opening a CATProduct Document
Fixing a Component
Inserting an Existing Component
Setting Constraints Between Components
Moving Constrained Components Using the Compass
Adding and Renaming a New Component
Designing a Part in an Assembly Context
Editing a Parameter
Replacing a Component
Analyzing Assembly Constraints
Reconnecting a Broken Constraint
Detecting Clashes
Editing a Component
Displaying the Bill of Material
Exploding the Assembly
Basic Tasks
Creating an Assembly Document
Analyzing an Assembly
Computing a Clash
Computing a Clearance
Analyzing Constraints
Analyzing Dependencies
Analyzing Updates
Analyzing Degrees of Freedom
Opening a CATIA Version 4 Assembly Document
Defining a Multi-Instantiation
Fast Multi-Instantiation
Inserting an Existing Component with Positioning
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/asmugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 8:41:03 AM

Assembly Design
Assembly Constraints
Creating a Coincidence Constraint
Creating a Contact Constraint
Creating an Offset Constraint
Creating an Angle Constraint
Fixing a Component
Fixing Components Together
Using the Quick Constraint Command
Changing Constraints
Selecting the Constraints of Given Components
Editing Constraints
Updating an Assembly
Updating One Constraint Only
Modifying the Properties of a Constraint
Using a Part Design Pattern
Setting a Constraint Creation Mode
Inconsistent or Overconstrained Assembly
Searching for URLs Associated with Constraints
Reordering Constraints in the Specification Tree
Moving Components
Translating Components
Rotating Components
Manipulating Components
Snapping Components
Smart Move
Exploding a Constrained Assembly
Stop Manipulation on Clash
Using Assembly Tools
Managing Products in an Assembly
Publishing Elements
Using a Standard Part Contained in a Parametric Catalog
Modifying a Parametric Standard Part Contained in a Catalog
Creating Annotations
Creating Weld Features
Creating Textual Annotations
Flag Notes
Detecting Clashes
Detecting Interferences
Reading Clash Command Results
Viewing Results in a Dedicated Window
Export Clash Results
Sectioning
About Sectioning

Assembly Design
Creating Section Planes

Creating 3D Section Cuts
Manipulating Planes Directly
Positioning Planes On a Geometric Target
Positioning Planes Using the Edit Position and Dimensions Command
More About the Section Viewer
Measuring Minimum Distances
Improving Performances
Advanced Tasks
Modifying an Assembly
Replacing Components
Reconnecting a Replaced Representation
Reconnecting Constraints
Designing in Assembly Design Context
About Design in Assembly Context
Editing a CATPart in an Assembly Design Context
Assembly Features
Assembly Split
Assembly Hole
Using Hole Series
Assembly Pocket
Assembly Remove
Assembly Add
Assembly Symmetry
Performing a Symmetry
Modifying a Symmetry
Rotating a Component by Using the Symmetry Command
Flexible Sub-Assemblies
Introducing the Document Template Definition Window
Creating a Part Template
Instantiating a Part Template
Adding an External Document to a Document Template
Document Templates: Methodology
To know more about Part and Assembly Templates...
Scenes
Creating Scenes
Points
Saving Viewpoints in a Scene
Start Publish
Editing a Scene Macro
About Persistency in Scenes
Applying a Scene to an Assembly

Assembly Design
Assembly Design Menu Bar
Product Structure Toolbar
Move Toolbar
Constraints Toolbar
Update Toolbar
Constraint Creation Toolbar
Assembly Features Toolbar
Annotations Toolbar
Space Analysis Toolbar
Scene Toolbar
Specification Tree
Referenced Geometry
Customizing
Customizing for Assembly Design
Assembly Settings
Customizing for 3D Annotations Infrastructure
Tolerancing
Display
Manipulators
Annotation
Reference Information
Constraints
About Assembly Constraints
Coincidence Constraints
Contact Constraints
Offset Constraints
Angle Constraints
Batches and Macros
Data Upgrade for Large Assemblies Performances
Glossary
Index
Preface
Assembly Design
Assembly Design workbench allows the design of assemblies with an intuitive and
flexible user interface.
As a scalable workbench, Assembly Design Version 5 can be cooperatively used with

other current companion products such as Part Design and Generative Drafting. The
widest application portfolio in the industry is also accessible through interoperability
with Solutions Version 4 to enable support of the full product development process
from initial concept to product in operation. Digital Mock-Up (DMU) Navigator
inspection capabilities can also be used to review and check your assemblies.
Interactive, variable-speed techniques such as walk-through and fly as well as other
viewing tools let you visually navigate through large assemblies.
The Assembly Design User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create an
assembly starting from scratch. This book aims at illustrating the several stages of
creation you may encounter.
Using This Guide

Conventions

Preface
Preface
Assembly Design workbench allows the design of assemblies with an intuitive and flexible
user interface.
As a scalable workbench, Assembly Design Version 5 can be cooperatively used with other
current companion products such as Part Design and Generative Drafting. The widest
application portfolio in the industry is also accessible through interoperability with Solutions
Version 4 to enable support of the full product development process from initial concept to
product in operation. Digital Mock-Up (DMU) Navigator inspection capabilities can also be
used to review and check your assemblies. Interactive, variable-speed techniques such as
walk-through and fly as well as other viewing tools let you visually navigate through large
assemblies.
The Assembly Design User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create an
assembly starting from scratch. This book aims at illustrating the several stages of creation
you may encounter.
Using This Guide

Conventions
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugpr01.htm10/19/2004 8:41:27 AM
Using This Guide
Using This Guide

This book is intended for the user who needs to become quickly familiar with the Assembly
Design workbench. The user should be familiar with basic concepts such as document
windows, standard and view toolbars.
step tutorial Getting Started. This tutorial will show you how to create an assembly.
For users who already know how to use the basic capabilities provided by the workbench, we
recommend you read the Advanced User Tasks.
For more information on accessing sample documents, refer to Accessing Sample

Documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
[ Next ]

Prior to reading this book, we recommend that you read Infrastructure User's Guide.
Part Design User's Guide , Generative Drafting User's Guide, Product Structure Version 5 and
V4 Integration User's Guide Version 5 may prove useful too.
See also the Conventions used in this guide.

[ Back ] [ Next ]
What's New?
What's New?
New Functionalities
Insert a component and position it using the Smart Move.
Tool to upgrade Assembly data to benefit from Releases 10-11-12 performances
improvements.
Snapping Components
The Snap will now work in full visualization mode.
Create a coincidence constraint between axis systems available.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugwn.htm10/19/2004 8:43:18 AM
Getting Started
Getting Started
If in Sketcher and Part Design you generated parts, now will learn how to finish your
design by assembling parts in Assembly Design workbench.
Before we discuss the detailed instructions for using the Assembly workbench, the
following scenario aims at giving you a feel for what you can do with an Assembly
document. You just need to follow the instructions as you progress.
The Getting Started section is composed of the following tasks:

Fixing a Component
Editing a Parameter
Detecting Clashes
Editing a Component
This scenario should take about 15 minutes to complete.
Eventually, the assembly will look like this:
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmuggs01.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 8:43:24 AM

Getting Started

Entering Assembly Design Workbench

and Opening a CATProduct Document
This first task shows you how to enter Assembly Design workbench and how to open an existing
product.
1. Select the Start -> Mechanical Design -> Assembly Design command to launch the required
workbench.
The workbench is opened. The commands for assembling parts are available in the toolbar to the
right of the application window. For information on these commands, please refer to CATIA-
Product Structure Version 5.
You will notice that "Product1" is displayed in the specification tree, indicating the building block
of the assembly to be created.
To know how to use the commands available in the Standard and View toolbars located in the
application window border, please refer to CATIA- Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5.

2. Before following the scenario, set the following options:

make sure the option Work with the cache system is deactivated : use the Tools ->
Options command, click Infrastructure -> Product Structure to the left of the dialog box
that appears and uncheck the option "Work with the cache system". Do not forget to
restart CATIA after turning off the cache. For more information, refer to Working with a
Cache System.
use the Tools -> Options command, click Infrastructure -> Product Structure to the left of
the dialog box that appears, then click the Product Structure tab and uncheck the option
"Manual Input". For more information, refer to Customizing Product Structure Settings.
use the Tools -> Options command, click Infrastructure ->Part Infrastructure to the left of
the dialog box that appears, then check the option "Keep link with selected Object". For
more information, refer to Customizing General Settings.
Note also that the default mode for the Update capability is "manual". For the purposes of this
scenario, set the automatic mode.
3. Open GettingStarted.CATProduct.
You will start the scenario with an existing assembly. Product1 is composed of three parts
created in the Part Design Workbench:
1. CRIC_FRAME (in turquoise)

2. CRIC_BRANCH_3 (in blue)
3. CRIC_BRANCH_1 (in red)
From now on, these parts will be referred to as 'components'.

Surface and Coincidence constraints have been defined for these parts in the Assembly
workbench.
4. Select Edit -> Representations -> Design Mode. This mode lets you access technical data.
5. Click the + sign to the left of the Constraints text in the tree and apply the show mode on
these constraints if you wish to view them in the geometry area.
[ Next ]

Fixing a Component
Fixing a Component
This task shows you how to set the first constraint. This operation consists in fixing
the position of a component in space so as to use this component as the base of the
assembly.
1. Select CRIC_FRAME in the specification tree or in the geometry area.
2. Click the Fix Component icon in the Constraints toolbar.
The component CRIC_FRAME is immediately fixed. The application indicates this

by displaying a green anchor symbol on the component.
Note also that the Constraints branch now displays the new constraint. The anchor
symbol is preceded by a lock symbol, to make a distinction between "fix in space"
and "fix operations". For more information, pleaser refer to Fixing a Component.

Fixing a Component
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task shows you how to insert an existing component into the assembly.
1. Select Product1 in the specification tree.
2. Click the Existing Component icon in the Product Structure Tools toolbar.
The File Selection dialog box is displayed.

3. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B11doc\online\asmug\samples
directory and select Sub_Product1.CATProduct
4. Click Open.
A new component is added to the specification tree. The assembly now includes
four components: three parts and a sub-assembly.
This is the component you have just imported:

To know the different document types you can insert in a CATProduct document,
refer to Product Structure Version 5. However, to know how to insert .asm
documents properly, refer to Opening a .asm Document.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task consists in setting a coincidence constraint, then a contact constraint
between the component you have just inserted (Sub_Product1) and CRIC_BRANCH_1.
1. Click the Coincidence icon .
A message window appears, providing information on the coincidence constraint

command. If you do not want to see this dialog box appear any more, check Do
not prompt in the future.
2. Select Axis in the geometry area.
The application detects it once selected. The axis is now highlighted in the
geometry.
3. Select one of the two inner faces of CRIC_BRANCH_1 to select the associated axis.

As the coincidence constraint is created, CRIC_SCREW and CRIC_BRANCH_1 are

aligned:
4. Now, you are going to set a contact constraint between CRIC_SCREW and a
circular face of CRIC_BRANCH_1.
To do so, click the Contact Constraint icon .

5. Select the face as shown in the geometry area.
6. Select the red circular face in the direction

opposite to the published face.
As the contact constraint is created, the turquoise cylinder is located exactly on the
red face.
The created constraints are automatically updated because the automatic update
mode is activated. As the color defining valid constraints is green, our constraints
are green. The application allows you to customize constraint colors as explained in
Customizing Constraint Appearance.

The assembly now looks like this:
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Moving Constrained Components Using the

Compass
This task consists in manipulating the assembly to check if the components react the
way we want, i.e. according to the constraints we set in the previous task.
1. Select the red patch at the center of the compass and drag it onto CRIC_SCREW.
For details about how to use the compass, please refer to CATIA- Infrastructure
As the compass is snapped to the component, you can manipulate the component.
2. Now, if you press and hold down the Shift key, select v/z axis on the compass,
then drag and drop the component up and down, you can see that three
components are moving.
This is an example of what we can get:

3. Repeat the operation as many times as you wish.
The assembly reacts correctly. CRIC_FRAME does not move because it is fixed.
The other three components can move.
4. Release the left mouse button before releasing the Shift key.
5. Drag the compass away from the selected object and drop it.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task consists in adding a new component to the assembly. You will then rename
this component. This component is a part created in the Part Design workbench.
1. Click Product1 and select the Part icon in the Product Structure Tools toolbar.
The New Part: Origin Point dialog box appears, presenting two possible options:
Either you define the point of your choice to locate the new part, or you use the
origin point of the assembly as the origin point to be used for the part.
2. Click No to use the origin point of the assembly.
The new component "Part5 (Part5.1)" is now displayed in the specification tree:

If the Manual Input option is activated (see Defining the Default Part Number), the
Part Number dialog box appears before the New Part: Origin Point dialog box and
lets you enter the name of your choice.
3. Right-click Part5 (Part5.1) and select the Properties... contextual command.
4. In the Properties dialog box that appears.
The options available in the Product tab let you enter the information you required.

5. Enter CRIC_JOIN.1 in the Instance name field and CRIC_JOIN in the Part Number
field.
6. Click OK to validate the operation.
The new names are now displayed

in the specification tree:
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task consists in designing the part you have just added to the assembly. It shows
you how easy it is to access the tools required for designing components in an
assembly context.
1. Double-click CRIC_JOIN in the specification tree to access the Part Design
workbench.
2. Select the blue face as shown and

click the Sketcher icon to access
the Sketcher workbench.
3. Now that you are in the Sketcher,

click the Normal View icon in
the View toolbar and sketch a circle

on the face using the Circle
command .
Do not bother about positioning the

circle.

4. Now to obtain the same radius value as the one used for CRIC_JOIN circular edge
and to make sure that this circular edge and the circle share the same axis, use
the Constraints Defined in Dialog Box command to create a coincidence
constraint (select the circle -if not already done- and the circular edge, then click
the Constraint Defined in Dialog Box command and check "Coincidence").
After validating the operation, the

circle is coincident with the circular
edge. You must obtain this:

5. Exit the Sketcher and use the Pad command with the "Up to Plane" option to
extrude the sketched circle. Select the blue face as shown to specify the limit of
the pad.
After validating the operation, you should obtain this cylinder:
The part is designed.
For information about Part Design and designing in context, refer to CATIA- Part
Design User's Guide Version 5 and Designing in Assembly Context respectively.

[ Back ] [ Next ]

Editing a Parameter
Editing a Parameter
In this task, you are going to edit the diameter of the pocket belonging to
CRIC_BRANCH_3. You will see how this edition affects the part you created in the
previous task.
1. Double-click CRIC_BRANCH_3 to access the Part Design workbench.
2. Select Pocket.2 and use the Pocket.2 object -> Edit Parameters contextual
command to display the associated parameters.
3. Double-click D11 in the geometry area to display the Constraint Edition dialog box.
4. Enter 20 as the new diameter value and click OK to generate the new pocket.

Editing a Parameter
5. Update Product1 by double-clicking on Product1 in the specification tree.
The pocket is modified accordingly. The coincidence previously set between the two
parts is maintained.
This result is made possible thanks to the option Keep link with selected Object you
set at the very beginning of the scenario.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task shows you how to replace Sub_Product1.CATProduct by another component.
1. Select Sub_Product1.CATProduct in the specification tree.
2. Click the Replace Component icon in the Product Structure Tools toolbar.
3. In the dialog box that appears, select Sub_Product2.CATProduct as the

replacement component and click Open.
The Impacts on Replace dialog box is displayed:
4. Check Yes to replace all instances of the selected element and click OK to confirm.
Sub_Product1.CATProduct is no longer visible. This is Sub_Product2.CATProduct:

If necessary update the document.
Note that the coincidence constraint is maintained. This is due to the publication of
the axis used in the constraint definition. As the axis is a published element, the
application can reconnect the constraint.
Conversely, the contact constraint is broken. You will know how to reconnect it
later.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task shows you how to analyze the status of all assembly constraints defined for
Product1.
1. Select the Analyze -> Constraints... command.
The Constraints Analysis dialog box that appears displays all the information you
need. The Constraints tab contains a detailed status of the assembly: the number
of non-constrained components and the status of the defined constraints.
2. Click the Broken tab to see the list of broken constraints. We have only one
broken constraint, a contact constraint.
3. Click on the name of the constraint.
The constraint is highlighted in the specification tree.

4. Click on OK to close the dialog box.
Reconnecting this contact constraint is our next task.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


In this task, you will learn how to reconnect the broken constraint detected by the application.
1. Double-click the broken constraint in the specification tree. Note that this broken constraint is
indicated by a yellow warning symbol.
2. In the Constraint Definition dialog box that appears, click More to access additional information.
3. Click Disconnected in the Status frame, then Reconnect...
4. You are then prompted to select a component to rebuild the constraint. Select the same faces as
the ones used for setting the first contact constraint. If you need some help, refer to Setting
Constraints Between Components.
5. Click OK to validate the operation and update the document.
The constraint is reconnected:

[ Back ] [ Next ]

Detecting Clashes
Detecting Clashes
In this task, you will learn how to detect possible clashes between two components.
1. Select CRIC_BRANCH_1.1 in the specification tree.
Select the Analyze -> Compute Clash... command.
2.
The Clash Detection dialog box appears. It displays the first component selected
for computing possible clashes.
3. As you need another component, select SUB_PRODUCT2 using the Ctrl key.
This component also appears in the dialog box.
4. Click Apply to compute clashes.
The application detects a clash between the brown cylinder and the red face. This
is indicated by two red circles in the geometry, as the arrow shows in the figure
below:

Detecting Clashes
The result of the computation also appears in the dialog box.
5. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
Well, now that you know that your assembly needs to be modified to work
properly, let's edit the cylinder.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Editing a Component
Editing a Component
This task shows you how to edit the component causing the problem.
1. Double-click the brown cylinder to access the Part Design workbench.
2. Double-click the cylinder again to edit it. The Pad definition dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter 20mm to reduce the pad length and click OK.
4. The cylinder is updated and now looks like this:

Editing a Component
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task shows you how to access all the information available about the structure of the
assembly.
1. Return to Assembly Design workbench and select the Analyze -> Bill of Material...
command.
The Bill of Material is displayed.

It is composed of these sections:
Bill of Material: lists all parts and sub-products one after the other
Recapitulation: displays the total number of parts used in the product
Define formats: customizes the display of the bill of material
The Listing Report tab displays the tree of the product using indents
2. If you wish, you can save this document using the html format or the txt format. Just click
the Save As... button, then give a name and the appropriate extension to your file.
For more information about the bill of material, refer to Displaying the Bill of Material.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This last task illustrates the use of the Explode capability. Exploding the view of an
assembly means separating the components of this assembly to see their
relationships.
1. Make sure Product 1 is selected.
2. Click the Explode icon in the Move toolbar.
The Explode dialog box is displayed.
Product 1 is the assembly to be exploded. The Depth parameter lets you choose
between a total (All levels) or partial (First level) exploded view.
3. Set All levels if not already set.
4. Set 3D to define the explode type.
5. Click Apply to perform the operation.
The Scroll Explode field gradually displays the progress of the operation. The
application assigns directions and distance.
Once complete, the assembly looks like this:

The usefulness of this operation lies in the ability of viewing all components
separately.
Note that you can move products within the exploded view using the 3D compass.
Click OK to validate the operation and then click Yes at the prompt or click Cancel
6.
to restore the original view.
Well, you have done all the tasks of the Getting Started section. Why not consult
the rest of the documentation?
[ Back ]

Basic Tasks
Basic Tasks
Here is the list of the tasks you will perform in this section:

Moving Components
Detecting Clashes
Sectioning
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugbt0000.htm10/19/2004 8:45:24 AM

This task will show you how to enter the Assembly Design workbench to create a new assembly
from scratch.
1. Select the Start -> Mechanical Design -> Assembly Design command to launch the required
workbench.
The Assembly Design workbench is opened. You can see that "Product1" is displayed in the
specification tree, indicating the building block of the assembly to be created. To create an
assembly, you need products. The application uses the term "product" or "component" to
indicate assemblies or parts. You can use parts to create products. Those products can in
turn be used to create other products.
The commands for assembling different products (or "components") are available in the
toolbar "Product Structure Tools" to the right of the application window. For information on
these commands, please refer to CATIA- Product Structure Version 5.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugbt0100.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 8:45:31 AM

The document contains:

a specification tree to the left of the application window
specific toolbars to the right of the application window
a number of contextual commands available in the specification tree and in the
geometry. Note that these commands can also be accessed from the menu bar.
[ Next ]

Compute a Clash: Select Analyze -> Compute Clash, multiselect the

components and click Apply.
Compute a Clearance: Select Analyze -> Compute Clash, multiselect the

components, enter the clearance value and click OK.
Analyze Constraints: Select Analyze -> Constraints, and select the constraints
in the dialog box.
Analyze Dependences: Select the component and the Analyze ->

Dependency...command, check the display options of the dialog box or select
elements and use the different contextual commands.
Analyze Updates: Select the product or component of interest and select the
Analyze -> Update command.
Analyze Degrees of Freedom: Select the Analyze -> Degrees of Freedom

command.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Computing a Clash
Computing a Clash Between Components

As assemblies may be very complex and are made up of a large number of components, you
may find it difficult to see possible clashes. This task shows you how to analyze clashes or
compute clearance between components.
Open the AnalyzingAssembly01.CATProduct document.
1. Select Analyze -> Compute Clash...
The Clash Detection dialog box is displayed. It lets you compute possible clashes or
clearance. The default option is Clash.
2. Multiselect the components CRIC_FRAME1 and CRIC_BRANCH_3.
The components are displayed in the Compute Clash dialog box.
3. Click Apply to compute a possible clash.
The icon in the Result frame now flashes red indicating that an interference has been
detected.

Computing a Clash
The application detects a clash between the components. This result is shown by two red
areas as the arrow shows in the figure opposite:
4. Click Cancel.
5. Repeat the operation to compute a possible clash between CRIC_BRANCH1 and
CRIC_BRANCH_3.
The application detects a contact between the components. The icon in the Result frame
now shows yellow indicating this.

Computing a Clash
6. Click Cancel to exit.
7. Repeat the operation to compute a possible clash between CRIC_JOIN1 and

CRIC_BRANCH_1.1.
The icon in the Result frame now shows green indicating that no interference has been
detected.

Computing a Clash
[ Next ]

Computing a Clearance Between Components

Once components have been added or constrained, you may need to analyze the
clash or compute the clearance between components. This task shows you how to
compute the clearance between two components of an assembly.
1. Select Analyze -> Compute Clash....
The Clash Detection dialog box is displayed.
2. Select Clearance in the combo box.
The Clash Detection dialog box displays a field where you specify the clearance
value.
3. Enter the clearance value: 50 mm.
4. Click the first component: CRIC_JOIN.1.
5. Control-click the second component: CRIC_BRANCH_3.1.
The components are displayed in the Clash Detection dialog box.
6. Click Apply to compute possible clearance.
The application detects a clearance violation. The distance between the

components is less than 50 mm. The status icon is yellow in the dialog box.

7. Click Cancel to perform another operation.
8. Now multiselect CRIC_BRANCH_3 and CRIC_BRANCH_1.
9. Repeat steps from 1 to 3.
10. Click Apply.
The application detects a contact between the components. The status icon in the
dialog box has turned yellow.

11. Click Cancel to exit.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task shows you how to analyze the constraints of an active component.
All the items displayed in the Constraint Analysis dialog box are editable according to their
respective behavior (Copy, Cut, Paste, Delete, etc).
1. Select Analyze -> Constraints.
The Constraint Analysis dialog box is displayed. The Constraints tab displays the status of the
constraints of the selected component:
Active Component displays the name of the active component.

Component displays the number of child components contained in the active
component.
Not constrained displays the number of child components not constrained in the active
component.
Status displays the status of the constraints:
Verified displays the number of verified constraints
Impossible displays the number of impossible constraints. "Impossible" means
that the geometry is not compatible with the constraint. For example, a contact
constraint between two cylinders whose diameter is different is impossible. The
yellow unresolved symbol is displayed in the specification tree on the constraint
type icon: .
Not updated displays the number of constraints to be updated. The application
has integrated new specifications, which affect constraints. The update symbol is
displayed in the specification tree on the constraint type icon: .
Broken displays the number of broken constraints. A reference element is
missing in the definition of these constraints. It may have been deleted for
example. You can then reconnect this constraint (see Reconnecting Constraints).
The yellow unresolved symbol is displayed in the specification tree on the
constraint type icon: .
Deactivated displays the number of deactivated constraints (see Deactivating or
Activating Constraints). The deactivated symbol is displayed in the specification
tree. It precedes the constraint type icon: .
Measure Mode displays the number of constraints in measure mode.
Fixed Together displays the number of fix together operations
Total displays the total number of constraints of the active component.
In our scenario, the command displays the status of all constraints defined in
AnalyzingAssembly product.
Since CATIA V5R6, the command Analyze -> Constraints. displays the status of constraints
defined for sub-assemblies too. What you have to do is set the combo box on top of the dialog
box to the sub-assembly name of your choice.

In addition to the Constraints tab, the Broken tab and the Deactivated tab provide the name of
the broken and deactivated constraints already indicated in the Broken and Deactivated fields.
The constraints are clearly identified in these tabs and you can select them. Once selected,
they are highlighted both in the tree and in the geometry area.

Additional tabs may be displayed if one of these constraint status exists:

Impossible
Not updated
Measure Mode
The tab Degrees of freedom also displays if all constraints of a given component are valid.
To redefine the colors of the different type of constraints, see Customizing Constraint
Appearance.
This capability does not show overconstrained systems. The application detects them when
performing update operations. For more information, see Inconsistent or Over-constrained
Assemblies. You can also use the command Analyze -> Dependence.
2. Quit OK to exit and delete the following constraints to perform the rest of the scenario:
Coincidence.12, Parallelism.15 and Line Contact.16.
The document now contains only seven constraints. They all are verified.
3. Select Analyze -> Constraints again. The Constraints Analysis dialog box no longer contains
the tabs Broken and Deactivated.
4. Click Degrees of freedom tab.
The application displays this tab only if all constraints are verified. The tab displays the
components affected by constraints and the number of degrees of freedom remaining for each
of them.

5. Double-click CRIC_TOP.1.
The Degrees of Freedom Analysis dialog box displays.
One rotation as well as one translation remain possible for CRIC_TOP.1. For more information,
please refer to Analyzing Degrees of Freedom.

6. Click Close then OK to exit.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Analyzing Dependences
This task shows you how to see the relationships between components using a tree.
1. Select the component CRIC_BRANCH_3.1.
You can analyze the dependencies of your assembly by selecting the root of the tree too.
2. Select Analyze -> Dependencies....
The following dialog box is displayed:

3. Right-click CRIC_BRANCH3.1 and select the Expand node contextual command.
The constraints defined for this component then appear:
4. Right-click CRIC_BRANCH3.1 again and select the Expand all contextual command.
Now, the constraints and components related to the component you have selected are displayed:

You can notice that there are:
- a coincidence constraint between CRIC_BRANCH_3.1 and CRIC_BRANCH_.1.1 .
- a surface contact constraint between CRIC_BRANCH_3.1 and CRIC_FRAME_1.1.
- a surface contact constraint
- a coincidence constraint
- a surface contact
5. Checking the different options available in the Elements frame, you can display the following:
Constraints: by default, this option is activated.
Associativity: shows components edited in Assembly Design context. Contextual components are
linked to support components by green lines in the graph, as illustrated in the example below:
CRIC_AXIS.1 has been designed in Assembly Design context. Its
geometry lies on CRIC_BRANCH_1.1 and CRIC_BRANCH_3.1

Relations: shows formulas. For more information, please refer to CATIA- Knowledge Advisor
6. You can also display the relationships by filtering the components you wish to see. Either check the
Child option to take the children of the component into account or check Leaf to hide them.
7. Contextual commands are available:

Expand all: lets you see the whole relationship. Note that double-clicking produces the same
result.
Show children: displays all children of the component
Set as new root: sets the selected component as the component whose relationships are to be
examined.
Zooming in and zooming out in the tree is allowed.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Analyzing Updates
Analyzing Updates
Operations such as moving components or editing constraints sometimes affect the

integrity of the whole assembly. You then need to know what to do to restore a
correct product. The application provides a tool for detecting if your assembly
requires updates. This tool is particularly useful when working with large assemblies.
You can update a part or a product without updating the whole assembly, using the
Analyze Update command.
Open the AnalyzingAssembly04.CATProduct document. This scenario assumes that

the Manual update option is on. For more about this option, refer to Update.
1. Select Analysis in the specification tree.
2. Select the Analyze -> Update command.
The Update Analysis dialog box is displayed.

Analyzing Updates
In our example, it provides the name of the entities to be updated, i.e:

name of the product or component under study
name of the constraints defined on this product or component
name of the children of this product or component
name of the constraints defined on the children
In some cases, it also displays the name of the representations associated to

parts.
3. Select Concidence.4 from the Constraints field.
The application highlights this constraint both in the specification tree and in the
geometry area.
4. Set the Components to be analyzed to Analysis/Product2.
Two constraints need updating.

Analyzing Updates
5. Set the Components to be analyzed to Analysis.
6. Click the Update tab and multi-select Analysis/Product2.
7. Click the Update icon to the right of the dialog box.
The part is updated:

Analyzing Updates
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task explains how to see if you need to set additional constraints to the components making up your
assembly.
The analysis is performed from the active component and its child components set, but you must know
that:
Selecting of any sub-component of a child component returns the analysis of this child component
relative to its active parent component only. If you want to analyze the sub-component relative to
a child component, activate the child component before.
Flexible child components (and their flexible sub-components) of the active component are not
taken into account for the analysis. In this case, the analysis is performed from the first rigid sub-
component found in the selection, under the active component.
Translations can be performed in a plane is represented by two vectors. These vectors define the
translation plane but depending on the geometry, they can constitute an orthonormal system or not. In
other words, a planar translation which normal to the plane has the coordinates (x=0, y=1, z=0) can
sometimes be represented by:
These two vectors:
vector 1: x=0, 707107, y=0, z=0,707107
vector 2: x=-0, 707107, y=0, z=-0, 707107
or by these ones:
vector 1: x=1, y=0, z=0
vector 2: x=-0, y=0, z=1
Open the AnalyzingAssembly04 CATProduct document.
1. Click the Update icon to update the assembly:
2. Right-click CRIC_SCREW (CRIC_SCREW.1) and select the Analyze -> Degrees of Freedom
command command from the contextual menu.

The Degrees of Freedom Analysis dialog box is displayed.
The dialog box displays all rotations and translations that remain possible for the selected
component. In our scenario, you can rotate CRIC_SCREW (CRIC_SCREW.1) in two ways or
translate it in one way.
If you look at the geometry, you can notice that these rotations and translations are represented
in yellow.
3. Click the Rotation_2 button.
The graphic element representing this possible rotation is now highlighted in the geometry for easy
identification.

As detailed in the dialog box, you can perform a rotation around the vector which coordinates are
x=1, y=0 and z=0 and using the point with coordinates x=0, y=-23.4839 and z=-151.254 as the
rotation center.
4. Click the Translation_2 button.
The graphic element representing this possible rotation is now highlighted too.
As detailed in the dialog box, you can perform a translation along the vector which coordinates are
x=0, y=0.984808 and z=-0.173648.
5. Click Close to exit the command.

[ Back ]


This task will show you how to open a .asm document, that is a CATIA V4 assembly
into Assembly Design Product.
1. 1. Click the Open icon or select the File->Open... command.
The File Selection dialog box appears.
2. In the File Selection box, select the file location.
3. Select the .asm document of interest.
4. Click Open.
The application converts the .asm document into a .CATProduct document.
The new document has the same properties as the V4 document.

However, if the name of the V4 document includes special characters, CATIA
converts these characters into new ones according to the characters equivalence
table. For more about this table, please refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide.
In our example, the CRIC product normally includes three sub-products

(BRANCH, CRIC_SCREW and CRIC_FRAME), but the application informs us that
these components could not be retrieved. As a consequence, geometry is not
available and constraints appear as broken in the specification tree:

3. What you need to do is resolve the links to these documents. To do so, use the
"Linked Document Localization" capability. To access it, select the Tools-
>Options... command then in the General category, click the Document tab.
Proceed as explained in CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide.
Once the operation is done, you can reopen your .asm document and note that
the links are resolved.
You can then perform any operation you want. When saving this CATProduct
document, you will not alter the original .asm document.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task shows you how to repeat components as many times as you wish in the
direction of your choice.
The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" is now available for this command.
For more about this option, refer to Access to geometry.
Open the Multi_Instantiation.CATProduct document.
1. Select the component you wish to instantiate, that is CRIC_BRANCH_3.
2. Click the Define Multi-Instantiation icon .
The Multi-Instantiation dialog box is displayed, indicating the name of the

component to be instantiated.
The shortcut Ctrl + E calls the command too.

3. The Parameters option lets you choose between the following categories of
parameters to define:
Instances & Spacing

Instances & Length
Spacing & Length
Keep the Instances & Spacing parameters option and enter 3 as the number of
instances and 90mm as the value for the spacing between each component.
4. To define the direction of creation, check x axis.
There is another way of defining a direction. You can select a line, axis or edge
in the geometry. In this case, the coordinates of these elements appear in the
Result field.
Clicking the Reverse button reverses the direction.
The application previews the location of the new components:

5. Make sure the option Define as Default is on. If it is so, the parameters you
have just defined are saved and will be reused by the Fast Multi-Instantiation
command.
6. Click OK to create the components.
Three additional components are created in the x direction. The tree displays
them as well.
The Apply button executes the command but the dialog box remains open so as
to let you repeat the operation as may times as you wish.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task shows you how to repeat components using the parameters previously set
in the Define Multi_Instantiation command.
You will use the Fast Multi-Instantiation command to quickly repeat the component
of your choice. The operation is very simple.
Make sure the option Work with the cache system is deactivated (for more refer to
Working with a Cache System) and open the Fast_Multi_Instantiation.CATProduct
document.
1. Select the component you wish to instantiate, that is CRIC_BRANCH_3.
2. Click the Fast Multi-Instantiation icon .
The shortcut Ctrl + D calls the command too.
The result is immediate. Three components are created according to the

parameters defined in the Multi-Instantiation dialog box.

[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task will show you how to insert and position a component as the same
operation.
This functionality is an enhancement of the Insert Existing Component command for

Assembly Design workbench. The Smart Move interface will enable the easy
positioning of inserted components in the assembly, at the very moment of their
insertion. It will also enable the positioning by creation of constraints. If there is no
geometry to position when the component is inserted, this functionality has the
same behavior as the Insert Existing Component command plus a visualization. See
Smart Move.
Open the MovingComponents01 CATProduct document.
1. Click the Existing Component with Positioning icon:
2. Select the CRIC_JOIN CATPart document.
The Smart Move dialog box appears.
3. In this dialog box, select the axis of the part.

4. In this geometry window, select the axis of the CRIC_BRANCH_3 part.

CRIC_JOIN is snapped with CRIC_BRANCH_3 part.
5. Click OK in the Smart Move dialog box.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Using Assembly Constraints

This section describes the notions and operating modes you will need to set and use
constraints in your assembly structure.
Constraints allow you to position mechanical components correctly in relation to the other
components of the assembly. You just need to specify the type of constraints you wish to
set up between two components, and the system will place the components exactly the
way you want.
You can also use constraints to indicate the mechanical relationships between components.
In this case, constraints are included in the specifications of your assembly.
Create a Coincidence Constraint: Click this icon, select the faces to be
constrained and enter the properties of the constraint in the dialog box.
Create a Contact Constraint: Click this icon and select the faces to be constrained.
Create an Offset Constraint: Click this icon, select the faces to be constrained and
enter the properties of the constraint in the dialog box.
Create an Angle Constraint: Click this icon, select the faces to be constrained and
enter the properties of the constraint in the dialog box.
Fix a Component: Click this icon and select component to be fixed.
Fix Components Together: Click this icon, select the components to be fixed and
enter a name for this group in the dialog box.
Quick Constraint: Check the list of constraint creation, click the icon and select
the elements to be constrained.
Change Constraint: Select the constraint to be changed, click this icon and select
the new type of constraint in the dialog box.
Deactivate or Activate Constraints: Select the constraint to be (de)activated and

use the Deactivate or Activate contextual command.

Select the Constraints of Given Components: Select the components, right-click

and select xxx object -> Component Constraints contextual command.
Editing Constraints: you can cut and paste , copy and paste and even delete
constraints.
Update an Assembly: constraints displayed in black indicate they need an update.

Just click this icon.
Update One Constraint Only: Right-click the constraint to be updated and select
the Update contextual command.
Modify the Properties of a Constraint: Double-click the constraint and enter new
properties in the dialog box.
Use a Part Design Pattern: Select the pattern, select the component to be
repeated, click this icon and enter the specifications in the dialog box.
Set a Constraint Creation Mode: Click any of these three constraint creation
mode icons
Inconsistent or Over-constrained Assembly
Search for URLs Associated with Constraints: Click this icon and select the
constraint of interest.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task consists in applying a constraint between two faces. See Coincidence
Constraints reference.
Before constraining the desired components, make sure it belongs to a component

defined as active (the active component is blue-framed and underlined).
Open the Constraint1.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Coincidence Constraint icon:
2. Select the face to be constrained, that is the red face as shown.
3. Select the second face to be constrained, that is the blue circular face in the
direction opposite to the red face.
Green arrows appear on the selected faces, indicating orientations.

4. The Constraint Properties dialog box that appears displays the properties of
the constraint. The components involved and their status are indicated. You
can define the orientation of the faces to be constrained by choosing one of
these options:
Undefined (the application finds the best solution)
Same
Opposite
Note that when changing a 'Same' orientation into an 'Opposite' orientation or

vice-versa, the application may sometimes positions the parts in an
unexpected way especially if your system is under-constrained.
For the purposes of our scenario, set the Opposite option.
5. Click OK to create the coincidence constraint.
The application chooses which component is to be moved to adopt its new

position. As the assembly is not iso-constrained, any component can be
moved. In other words, you cannot control which component(s) will be
moved.
Green graphic symbols are displayed in the geometry area to indicate that
this constraint has been defined.
This constraint is added to the specification tree too.

Graphic symbols used for constraints can be customized. For more

information, refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance.
[ Next ]


This task consists in applying a constraint between two faces. See Contact

defined as active (the active component is blue framed and underlined).
Open the Constraint7.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Contact Constraint icon:
2. Select the face to be constrained, that is the red face as shown.
3. Select the second face to be constrained, that is the blue inner face in the
direction opposite to the red face.
As the contact constraint is created, the red component is moved so as to

adopt its new position. Green graphic symbols are displayed in the geometry
area to indicate that this constraint has been defined.
This constraint is added to the specification tree too.

Graphic symbols used for constraints can be customized. For more

information, refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance .
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task consists in applying an offset constraint between two faces. See Offset

defined as active (the active component is blue-framed and underlined).
Open the AssemblyConstraint02.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Offset Constraint icon:
2. Select the face to be constrained, that is the yellow face as shown.
3. Select the second face to be constrained, that is the blue face in the direction
opposite to the yellow face.
Green arrows appear on the selected faces, indicating the orientations.

The Constraint Properties dialog box that appears displays the properties of the
constraint. The components involved and their status are indicated. You can
define the orientation of the faces to be constrained by choosing one of these
options:
Undefined (the application finds the best solution)
Same
Opposite
Note that when changing a Same orientation into an Opposite orientation or vice-
versa, the application may sometimes positions the parts in an unexpected way
especially if your system is under-constrained.
For the purposes of our scenario, keep the Opposite option.
4. Enter 38 mm in the Offset field.
5. Click OK to create the offset constraint.
A green arrow is displayed in the geometry area to indicate that this constraint
has been defined. The offset value is displayed too. This constraint is added to the
specification tree too.

Graphic symbols used for constraints can be customized. For more information,
refer to Constraint Creation .
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task consists in setting an angle constraint between two planes. See Angle Constraints reference.
Before constraining the desired components, make sure it belongs to a component defined as active (the active
component is blue-framed and underlined).
1. Click the Angle Constraint icon:
2. Select the face to be constrained, that is the blue face as shown.
3. Select the second face to be constrained, that is the red face in the same direction of the blue face.
The Constraint Properties dialog box is displayed with the properties of the selected constraint and the list of
available constraints:
Perpendicularity

Parallelism (you then need to define the orientation of the faces. You can choose between Undefined,
Same, Opposite options)
Angle
Planar angle (an axis is to be selected. This axis must belong to both planes)
Note that when changing a Same orientation into an Opposite orientation or vice-versa, the application may
sometimes positions the parts in an unexpected way especially if your system is under-constrained.
4. Keep the Angle option.
5. Enter 40 deg in the Angle field and keep Sector 1.
Note that four sectors are available:
6. Click OK to create the angle constraint.
As the angle constraint is created, the red component is moved so as to adopt its new position. A green
arrow is displayed in the geometry area to indicate that this constraint has been defined. The angle value is
displayed too. This constraint is added to the specification tree too.
Graphic symbols used for constraints can be customized. For more information, refer to Customizing
Constraint Appearance.

[ Back ] [ Next ]

Fixing a Component
Fixing a Component
Fixing a component means preventing this component from moving from its parents
during the update operation. There are two ways of fixing a component:
by fixing its position according to the geometrical origin of the assembly,
which means setting an absolute position. This operation is referred to as
"Fix in space".
by fixing its position according to other components, which means setting a
relative position. This operation is referred to as "Fix".
This scenario first shows you how to fix a component in space, then how to fix it.
Before fixing the desired component, make sure it belongs to a component defined
as active.
Open the Fix.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Fix icon .
Fix in Space
This command is also available from the Insert menu.
By default, the Fix command fixes components in space.

2. Select the component to be fixed, that is the light blue component.
The constraint is created. A green anchor is displayed in the geometry area to

indicate that this constraint has been defined.
A lock symbol preceding the

anchor is displayed in the
specification tree too:

Fixing a Component
refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance.
3. Move the fixed component using the compass.
4. Update the assembly to see which component is moved: the fixed component
returns to its previous location:

Fixing a Component
Fix
5. Double-click the fix constraint you have just created to edit it.
6. In the dialog box that appears, click More to expand the dialog box.
7. Uncheck the Fix in space option to the left of the dialog box. The lock symbol is
no longer displayed in the specification tree, meaning that the component is
positioned according to the other components only.
8. Move the fixed component using the compass.

10. Update the assembly: now
the component remains at its
location. Conversely, the
dark blue component is
moved to the fixed
component.

Fixing a Component
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task consists in fixing two components together.
The Fix Together command attaches selected elements together. You can select as
many components as you wish, but they must belong to the active component.
Open the Fix.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Fix Together icon .
This command is also available from the Insert menu and works both in design
and visualization mode.
2. Select CRIC_FRAME.
3. Select CRIC_BRANCH_3.
You can select the components in the specification tree or in the geometry area.
4. The Fix Together dialog box appears, displaying the list of selected components.
To remove a component from the list, just click it.

5. In the Name field, enter a new name for the group of components you want to
create. For instance, enter FT1.
6. Click OK.
The components are attached to each other.
Note
Moving one of them (using the compass combined with the Shift key or using
the option "With respect to constraints" in the Manipulate dialog box) moves the
other one too.
The specification tree displays this operation.

Because you can inadvertently move these components, the application displays
a warning message to remind you that you are moving components fixed
together. If you prefer not to see such a message, just deactivate the display
option. To know more about this option, refer to Move Components.
A Few Notes about Fix Together

You can select a set of attached components to apply the Fix Together command
between this set and other components.
You can set constraints between components belonging to a set of components fixed
together.
If you set a constraint between a component and a set of attached components, the
whole set is affected by the constraint.
You can deactivate or activate a set of attached components by using the Deactivate/
Activate contextual command available in the specification tree. Red parentheses
preceding the graphic symbol indicate deactivated sets.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


The Quick Constraint command creates the first possible constraint as specified in
the priority list.
This task consists in using this command to create two constraints.
Open the QuickConstraint.CATProduct document.
1. Make sure the list specifying the order of constraint creation is composed as
follows:
1. Surface contact
2. Coincidence
3. Offset
4. Angle
5. Parallelism
For more about this list, please refer to Quick Constraint.
2. Double-click the Quick Constraint icon .
Select the axis as shown.
3. Select the axis of AXIS_BRANCH_3.
As the application cannot set a surface contact due to the type of selected
elements, it creates the second optional constraint mentioned in the list, that is
a coincidence constraint.

4. Now select the faces as shown:
The first constraint in the list can now be set. A surface contact constraint is
created.

refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Changing a constraint means replacing the type of this constraint by another type.
This operation is possible depending on the supporting elements. You can select any
constraints, not necessarily in the active component.
This task consists in changing the parallelism constraint into an offset constraint.
1. Select the constraint to be changed.
2. Click the Change Constraint icon .
The Change Type dialog box that appears, displays all possible constraints.

3. Select the new type of constraint. For the purposes of our scenario, select
Offset.
4. Click Apply to preview the constraint in the specification tree and the geometry.
5. Click OK to validate the operation.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


Deactivating or activating constraints means specifying if these constraints must be
taken into account during updates or not. This task consists in deactivating then
activating a constraint.
Open the AnalyzingAssembly04.CATProduct document and make sure the Design

Mode is on.
1. Select any activated constraint. For example, select Coincidence.3.
2. Right-click and select the Deactivate contextual command.
The constraint is deactivated. The graphic symbol representing the deactivated

constraint is now displayed in white. Red parentheses precede the constraint in
the specification tree.

3. Repeat step 1 and right-click to select the Activate contextual command to

activate the selected constraint.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task consists in selecting all the constraints defined for a component.
You can only select child components of the active component.
The Component Constraints command allows you to select the constraints linked to
one or more selected components. These components are child components of the
active component.
Open the GettingStarted.CATProduct document, use the Show capability if the

constraints are not visible, and ensure the design mode is on.
1. Select the component whose constraints are to be selected.
Multiselection is also possible.
2. Right-click and select CRIC_FRAME.1 object -> Component Constraints

contextual command.
The application highlights two constraints, both in the specification tree and the
geometry area.

[ Back ] [ Next ]

Editing Constraints
Editing Constraints
In the following paragraphs, you will learn how to edit but also cut and paste, copy and paste and even delete
constraints.
Concerning angle and offset constraints, you can copy or cut then paste their values.
To edit a constraint:
1. Click the constraint of interest.
You can select the constraint in the specification tree or in the geometry.
2. Double-click the constraint to be edited to display the related dialog box: in which you can modify its
properties:
Tips
Note that selecting a component's name displays the component's path as a tooltip in a small box.
Two contextual commands improving display are available in the Supporting Elements field:
- "Reframe on" views the constraint of the selected component at the center of the CATIA
window
- "Center Graph" zooms in the selected component in the specification tree.
Cutting and Pasting a Constraint

Editing Constraints
To cut a constraint:
1. Click the constraint of interest.
2. Then click the Cut icon .
This command is also available from the Edit menu or contextual menu.
The constraint is cut. You can now paste it.

3. Click the Paste icon
The constraint is pasted.
Copying and Pasting a Constraint

To copy and paste a constraint::
1. Click a constraint.
2. Then click the Copy icon .
This command is also available from the Edit menu or contextual menu.
3. Click the Paste icon
The constraint is copied.
Deleting Constraints
To delete a constraint:
1. Right-click the constraint to be deleted.
2. Then select Delete from the contextual menu.

This command is also available from the Edit menu. Pressing the Delete key deletes the constraint too.
The constraint is deleted.

Editing Constraints
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This section describes how to update the whole assembly.
Updating an assembly means updating its components as well as its constraints. The
application lets you choose between updating the whole assembly or the components
of your choice.
The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" is available for this command. For
more about this option, refer to Access to geometry.
The constraints are in black, indicating they need an update. The default color is
black, but the application allows you to redefine the colors you want. To do so, refer
to Customizing Constraint Appearance.

1. Select the Tools -> Options command, then expand the Mechanical Design section
to the left to access Assembly Design options.
You can choose between two update modes within the Assembly Design workbench:
Automatic
Manual
Note that this is a way of enhancing productivity: for instance, you can now use
the automatic update mode when designing your parts in Assembly context, while
having the Manual update mode activated for your assembly.
You can also define whether you need to update the active level or all the levels.
2. Check the Manual option in the Update frame.
3. Click OK to confirm and close the dialog box.
4. Click the Update icon to update the whole assembly.
The assembly is updated. Graphic symbols are green, indicating that the
constraints are valid.

To update only some components, select the components of interest and use the
Update contextual command. Note however that applying the contextual
command to a component may sometimes induce a general update if the assembly
is a complex one made up of several components.
To see what happens when an update operation fails, refer to Over-constrained

Assemblies. See also Analyzing Updates.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


When you need to update your constraints, either you update all the constraints of
the active component or update one or more constraints of the active component.
By default, constraints needing an update are displayed in black. To redefine the

colors of the constraints, please refer to Customizing Constraint Appearance.
This task consists in updating the constraints you explicitly specify.
1. Right-click the constraint to be updated.
Constraints needing an update are displayed with specific graphic properties. The
Properties dialog box indicates too if constraints need updates or not. For more
information, please refer to Modifying the Properties of a Constraint.
2. Select Update from the contextual menu.
The selected constraint is updated.

3. Click the second constraint to be updated.
4. Control-right-click the third constraint to be updated.
5. Select the Update contextual command.
The two selected constraints are updated too. Remember, valid constraints are
green by default.

[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task consists in modifying the mechanical properties and attributes of a constraint.
Open the AssemblyConstraint02.CATProduct document and create an offset constraint.
1. Right-click the offset constraint to be modified.
2. Select Properties from the contextual menu.
The Properties dialog box that appears displays four tabs.

Constraint tab
The Constraint tab displays the name of the constraint as well as the name and type of the
supporting components. You can rename the constraint if desired.
The constraint status is also indicated. In our scenario, the constraint is connected. To find out
how to reconnect broken or misconnected constraints, please refer to Reconnecting Constraints.
3. Enter a new value in the Offset field. For example, enter 75 mm.
4. Set the Orientation option to Same so as to reverse the blue component.
Instead of using the Properties contextual command to edit the properties as described above,
you can double-click the constraint to be edited to display the related dialog box: in which you
can modify the same properties:
Mechanical tab
5. Click the Mechanical tab.
6.
Three attributes characterize constraints:
Deactivated: deactivated constraints are not taken into account when updating the
assembly
To update: the constraint does not reflect the latest changes to the assembly
Unresolved: the application detects problems
7. Check Deactivated.
The constraint is modified accordingly.
Note that parentheses precede the constraint value, indicating that the constraint is deactivated.
These parentheses precede the name of the constraint in the specification tree too. The color of
the graphic symbol is modified.

Feature Properties tab

8.
Click the Feature Properties tab.
This tab displays the constraint's name as well as its creation and last modification date. You can
edit the constraint's name.
Graphic tab
9. Click the Graphic tab.
The Graphic tab lets you define the graphic properties of your constraint.
Color
Line type (Dotted, Small dotted etc.)
Thickness (Different values)
Select the color of your choice from the list. You can also define your own colors by selecting the
More Colors... command at the bottom of the list. To know more about defining personal colors,
please refer to CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide.
You cannot define a new color for deactivated constraints. For the purposes of our scenario, you
need to reactivate the constraint.

If you wish to change the color for a given status (resolved, unresolved, over-contrained, invalid
geometry) use the Tools -> Options command. For more, see Customizing Constraint
Appearance.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task shows you how to repeat a component using a pattern created in Part Design.
Three types of patterns are available:

Rectangular pattern
Circular pattern
User pattern
You can now use Generative Shape Design patterns.
The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" is available for the Reuse Pattern command.
For more about this option, refer to Access to geometry.
Open the Pattern.CATProduct document.
1. Select the rectangular pattern in the tree or in the geometry.
2. Control-click to select the component to be repeated, that is Part2.
Selecting a constraint linking a pattern to a component selects both the pattern and the
component.
3. Click the Reuse Pattern icon .
The Instantiation on a pattern dialog box is displayed, indicating the name of the pattern,
the number of instances to be created (for information only) and the name of the
component to be repeated.

There are two work modes:

Using associativity with the geometry: the option "Keep link with the pattern" is on
Using no associativity: the option is off.
Working with associativity, you can decide whether you need to make instances
associative with the pattern or generated constraints.
4. For the purposes of our scenario, ensure that the option "Keep link with the pattern" is
on and check "pattern's definition" to make instances associative with the pattern's
geometry.
To know more about associativity with constraints, refer to "Re-using constraints".

5. To define the first instance of the component to be duplicated, three options are
available.
reuse the original component: the original component is located on the pattern,
but remains at the same location in the tree.
create a new instance: the original component does not move and a new one is
created on the pattern.
cut & paste the original component: the original component is located on the
pattern and moved in the tree.
For our scenario, make sure the option "re-use the original component" is on.
6. To control the location of the components in the tree, two options are available: You can
check the option "Put new instances in a flexible component" to gather all
instances in the same component,
or conversely uncheck the option to create as many components as there are
generated instances.
Check the option "Put new instances in a flexible component".
7. Click OK to repeat the screw.
31 instances are created on the

pattern.
The new component "Gathered Part2 on RectPattern.1" is displayed in the tree. An entity
"Assembly features" has been created in the tree. "Reused Rectangular Pattern.1" is
displayed below this entity.

The Apply button executes the command but the dialog box remains open so as to let
you repeat the operation as may times as you wish.
8. Double-click RectPattern.1 to edit it. For example, enter 5 instances for both directions.
9. Return to Assembly Design and make sure that the assembly is updated.
You can notice that associativity between the pattern and the instances of Part2 has been
maintained since the option "Keep link with pattern" and "Pattern's definition" were
switched on. Only 17 instances have been generated.
Re-using Constraints

If you use the option "generated constraints", the Reuse Constraints section displays the
constraints detected for the component and makes all original constraints available for
selection: You can define whether you wish to reproduce one or more original constraints
when instantiating the component.
To remove a constraint from the list, click on that constraint. To remove all constraints
from the list, click "Clear". Conversely, Click "All" to include all constraints in the
selection.
Contextual Commands
The following contextual commands are available for Reused Rectangular Pattern.1:
Definition: displays information on the pattern. If constraints are not verified,
you can select them and apply a local update.

Deactivate/Activate: deactivates or activates the constraints defined on the

instances
More about Patterns

This task you have just performed shows you that you can reuse constraints set between
the part to be duplicated and the pattern: the generated instances are constrained too.
You can reuse constraints set between the part to be patterned and other parts.
In the following example, two constraints are set between screw.1 to be patterned and
Tray.1 (green part) and two other constraints are set between the screw.1 and Bracket.1
(blue part).

After applying the Reuse Pattern command to the screw, generated instances are
constrained too:
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task shows you how to set one of the three modes available to create
constraints. These modes are:
Default mode
Chain mode
Stack mode
Open the Constraint_Creation.CATProduct document.
Default mode
1. Click the Default mode icon if not already activated.
This mode lets you create as many constraints as you wish by explicitly
selecting two geometrical elements. In our example, you can set an offset
constraint between the highlighted face and the face of another geometrical
element. For the purposes of this scenario, double-click the offset constraint
icon to make it permanently active.
The offset constraint icon still active, you can then set another offset
constraint between two other faces.

2. For the purposes of our scenario, delete these constraints.
Chain mode
1. Click the Chain icon.
This mode lets you create as many constraints as you wish by always reusing
the last face you selected.
2. The offset constraint icon still active, you can then set another offset
constraint between the second face you selected and any other face.

constraint between the third face you selected and any other face.
And so on...
4. For the purposes of our scenario, delete these constraints.
Stack mode
1. Click the Stack icon.
This mode lets you create as many constraints as you wish by reusing the very
first face you selected to create the first constraint.

constraint between the first face you selected and any other face.
constraint between the first face you selected and any other face.
4. And so on...

[ Back ] [ Next ]

Inconsistent or Over-constrained Assemblies
This task shows you what happens when the application detects an over-constrained
assembly.
1. Set an offset constraint to obtain this:
2. Set a second offset constraint as shown below.
3. Update the assembly.
The update operation detects difficulties to obtain a valid constrained system: a dialog
box appears providing the diagnosis of the problem.

The constraints involved in the inconsistent or over-constrained system are displayed.

The application indicates
the constraint causing trouble (Offset.8)
constraint Offset.6, which is valid but involved in the inconsistent or over-
constrained system
4. To resolve the problem, you can
edit
deactivate
isolate
delete
Offset.8 or even Offset.6: you just need to decide the constraint you wish to modify.
5. Select Offset.6 and click the Deactivate button.
6. Close the dialog box and update the assembly.
The system is now consistent.

[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task shows you how to check that a constraint has been assigned URLs (Universal
Resource Locators), then how to search for a given URL.
Open the MovingComponents02. CATProduct document that contains URLs created in

the Knowledge Advisor workbench.
1.
Click the Comment and URLs icon .
The URLs and Comment dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the constraint "Surface contact.18".
The URL field indicates that this constraint has been assigned two URLs: "Dassault
Systèmes" and "Delmia".
3.
Click "Delmia".
The associated URL is displayed in the URL field.
You just need to click the Go button to access the corresponding web site.

Searching for a URL

4. Click the Explore tab.
The list of all the URLs assigned to all the constraints defined in this CATProduct
document is displayed.
5.
Enter the name of the URL to be searched for in the Search field. For example,
enter "Delmia".
6. Click Search.
If the specified URL is found, "yes" is displayed in the Found column. In the Edit
tab, the URL is highlighted.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task shows you how to modify the location of assembly constraints in the
specification tree to classify them the way you want. The application lets you reorder
constraints but also gather them in sets. You can perform these operations within the
Constraints node.
You can move all types of constraints. What is more, the application does not take
their status into account: if they are deactivated or even broken, you can relocate
them.
Whatever operation you perform for modifying their locations in the tree, it never
affects the geometry of your assembly.
Reordering Constraints
Gathering Constraints in a Set
Creating a Set Before Gathering Constraints
Handling Sets
Open the AnalyzingAssembly02. CATProduct document.
Reordering Constraints
1.
Select 'Coincidence.4' as the constraint to be moved and right-click the
Coincidence.4 object-> Reorder constraints contextual command.

2.
Select 'Coincidence.10' as the constraint below which 'Coincidence.4' is to be
located.
'Coincidence.4" has been moved:

Gathering Constraints in a Set
3. To group 'Surface contact.5' and 'Surface contact.6' constraints, multi-select them

and use the Selected objects -> Group in new set contextual command.
The application has created 'Set.1' containing both surface constraints.

4. Select 'Set.1' and right-click to use the Properties contextual command.
5.
Rename 'Set.1' as 'Surface Contact Constraints' in the Feature Name field of the
Properties dialog box that appears.
6. Expand this node. You must obtain this:
Creating a Set Before Gathering Constraints

7. Select the node 'Constraints' and right-click to use the Constraints object->Add
Set contextual command.
A new set, 'Set.2', appears in the tree, at the same level as 'Surface Contact
Constraints' set. It has been created at the first level of the Constraints node.

8. Multiselect 'Coincidence.7', 'Coincidence.10' and 'Coincidence.4' and right-click to

use the Selected objects -> Reorder constraints contextual commands.
9. Select Set.2 as the new location for these constraints.
10.
Expand the new node to check that Set.2 contains the three constraints:

Handling Sets
11.Right-click 'Set.2' and select 'Set.2 object' to display the contextual menu available
for this node.
The following contextual commands are available:

Add set: creates a set at the level below (in our example, 'Set.3' would be
created below 'Set.2')
Remove set: deletes the set, not the constraints it contained
Group in new set: locates the selected set within a new set
Move Set after: moves the set after the set you select
Move Set inside: moves the set within the set you select
If you multi-select a 'fix together' entity and any constraint, you cannot apply
these contextual commands.
[ Back ]

Moving Components
Moving Components
Translate Components: Click this icon, select the component to be translated and
enter the offset values.
Rotate Components: Click this icon, click the Rotation tab, select the component to
be rotated, choose an axis and enter the angle values.
Manipulate Components: Click this icon, click the parameters you wish, select the
component to be moved and drag this component .
Snap Components: Click this icon and select both elements.
Smart Move: Click this icon, check the Automatic constraint creation option and
select the components to be moved and constrained.
Explode a Constrained Assembly: Click this icon, select the parameters you need and
select the assembly to be exploded.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
This task will show you two ways to translate a component:
by entering translation values
by selecting geometrical elements to define a translation direction.
If you are working in Assembly Design workbench, this task is P1-only.
Using P2 configuration, you can rotate constrained components by means of the

Shift key and the compass.
The element to be translated must belong to the active component.
more about this option, refer to Access to geometry in the Infrastructure User's
Guide.
Open the MovingComponents01.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Translate or Rotation icon:
The Move dialog box is displayed. Either you specify an offset value between
the element and x, y or z axis, or you select a geometric element to define
the direction you need.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugtranslate.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 8:50:46 AM

2. Select the component to be translated, that is CRIC_BRANCH_3.
By Entering Values
3. Enter 50 mm as the offset value, in the Offset X field. The component will be
translated along x axis.
4. Click Apply.
The selected component is translated accordingly.

5. Click the Invert button to reverse the previous operation and translate the
component in the opposite direction.
The component is translated in the opposite direction. You can click Apply as
many times as you wish to translate the component to the desired position.
7. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
By Selecting Geometric Elements

8. Click the Selection button to define a new translation with respect to a
geometric element.

The Translation tab contents is grayed out. If you select a line or a plane you
need to enter a distance value. The translation is then done along the
selected line or normal to the selected plane. Selecting two faces or planes
assumes these elements are parallel.
9. Select the red and blue faces as shown. These faces are parallel.
The application computes the distance between these faces.

The Offset field then displays this distance value:
Offset X: 20mm
Offset Y: 0mm
Offset Z: 0mm
10. Click Apply to translate the blue component.

You can apply this translation to any other components. You just need to
select it and click the Apply button.
11. Click OK to exit.

Rotating Components
Rotating Components
This task will show you the two ways of rotating a component:
by entering the rotation angle and specifying the rotation axis
by selecting a geometric element as the rotation axis and entering the angle
value
If you are working in Assembly Design workbench, this task is P1-only.
Using P2 configuration, you can rotate constrained components by means of the

Shift key and the compass.
The element to be rotated must belong to the active component.
more about this option, refer to Access to geometry in the Infrastructure User's
Guide.
1. Click the Translate or Rotation icon:
The Move dialog box is displayed. Translation options are available. To find
out how to translate components, refer to Translating a Component.
2. Click the Rotation tab.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugrotate.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 8:50:54 AM

Rotating Components
3. Select the component you wish to rotate, that is CRIC_BRANCH_1.
Entering a Rotation Angle

4. For example, check the Axis Y option to specify the axis of rotation.
5. Enter 90 as the angle value in the Angle field.
The selected component is rotated accordingly.

Rotating Components
8. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3.
Selecting Geometry to Define the Axis of Rotation

9. Click the Selection button to define a new rotation with respect to a
10. Select the edge as shown to specify the new rotation axis.
11. Enter 90 in the Angle field.
12. Click Apply to rotate the red component.

Rotating Components
You can apply this rotation to any other components. You just need to select
it and click the Apply button.

This task will show you how to manipulate a component. The Manipulate command lets
you move a component freehand with the mouse. It is less constraining than the
Translate and Rotate commands.
The element to be manipulated must belong to the active component.
Open the MovingComponents02.CATProductdocument.
1. Click the Manipulate icon:
The Manipulation Parameters dialog box appears. You can translate or rotate
components using one of the following options:
The first and second horizontal rows are reserved for translations. You can
move your component along the x, y or z-axis as well as in the xy, yz and xz
planes.
The third row is reserved for rotations. You can rotate your component
around the x, y or z-axis.
The fourth column lets you specify the direction of your choice by selecting a
geometric element. This element defines the direction of the move or the
axis of rotation.
2. Click the Drag along Y axis icon:
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugmanipulate.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:51:01 AM

3. Select Set1 as the component to be translated.
4. Drag Set1.
The component is translated in the Y axis direction.
5. Now select CRIC_FRAME and click Drag around Y axis icon:

6. Drag the component. You are rotating it around the Y axis.
7. Check the option With respect to constraints. If you repeat the previous operation,
you will notice that you are not allowed to do it. The existing parallelism constraint
prevents you from moving the component.
Use the Shift key and the compass to manipulate constrained components.
Flexible components cannot be moved via the Manipulate command.

Snapping Components
Snapping Components
The Snap command projects the geometric element of a component onto another
geometric element belonging to the same or to a different component. Using this
command is a convenient way to translate or rotate components.
The Snap will now work in full visualization mode, which means the positioned
component and the positioning parts will no longer need to be switched into design
mode. However, in order to select points, you must be working in Design mode.
For DMU Navigator, this task is P1-only.
The element to be snapped must belong to the active component.
Depending on the selected elements, you will obtain different results. This table
indicates what you can do:
First
Last Element
Element Result
Selected
Selected
point point Identical points.
The point is projected onto

point line
the line.
The point is projected onto

point plane
the plane.
The line passes through the

line point
point.
line line Both lines become collinear.
The line is projected onto the

line plane
plane.
The plane passes through the

plane point
point.
The plane passes through the

plane line
line.
plane plane Both planes become parallel.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugsnap.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 8:51:07 AM

Snapping Components
Make sure you work in Design mode (use Edit->Representations->Design

Mode)
1. Click the Snap icon:
2. Select the red face as shown.
The element selected first is always the element that will move.
3. Select the blue face as shown.

Snapping Components
The red face is projected onto the plane defined by the blue face.
A green arrow is displayed on the first face you selected.
3. Click this arrow to reverse the orientation of the face.

Snapping Components

Smart Move
Smart Move
The Smart Move command combines the Manipulate and Snap capabilities.
Optionally, it creates constraints. This task illustrates how to move a component and
create a coincidence constraint between two axes.
1. Click the Smart Move icon and expand the Smart Move dialog box that
appears.
The Quick Constraint frame contains the list of the constraints that can be set.
This list displays these constraints in a hierarchical order and can be edited by
using both arrows to right of the dialog box.
2. Check the Automatic constraint creation option.
The application creates the first possible constraint as specified in the list of
constraints having priority. For more about this list, please refer to Quick
Constraint..
3. Select the axis of CRIC_BRANCH_1 as shown:

Smart Move
4. Select the axis of CRIC_BRANCH_3.
Instead of explicitly selecting both axes, you can select the axis of
CRIC_BRANCH_1 and then drop it onto the blue inner cylinder face when your
cursor points to this face.
The application detects a possible constraint between the axes. As the option
Create constraint is on, the application can set a coincidence constraint between
both axes.
5. Click the green arrow to reverse the direction of the component.

Smart Move
6. Click OK to confirm and quit the command.
The coincidence constraint is created.
[ Back ] [ Next ]


This task shows how to explode an assembly taking into account the assembly
constraints. This Explode type is applicable only to specific cases:
when the assembly is assigned coincidence constraints:
1. axis/axis
2. plane/plane
Open the EXPLODE_CONSTRAINED_ASSEMBLY.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Explode icon .

The Explode dialog box is displayed.
2. Wheel Assembly is selected by default, keep the selection as it is.
You can also use the drag and drop capability (drag the explode icon and
drop it onto the required product in the specification tree.
The Depth parameter lets you choose between a total (All levels) or
partial (First level) exploded view.
3. Keep All levels set by default.
4. Set the explode type. 3D is the default type. Keep it.
Note: you can move products within the exploded view using the 3D
compass.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugexplode01.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 8:51:32 AM

In DMU Fitting Simulator only:
The manipulation toolbar is also available once you move an object with
the 3D Compass.
The Scroll Explode field gradually displays the progression of the
operation. The application assigns directions and distance. Once complete,
the resulting exploded view looks like this:
You are not satisfied with this result as the nuts are not correctly
positioned. The constraints are not respected. Replay the scenario selecting
the constrained type.
6. Still in the Explode dialog box, set the constrained type.
7. Define a fixed product: in our example select the Rim1 either in the specification
tree or in the geometry area

Once complete, the resulting exploded view looks like this
The nuts are correctly positioned, the exploded view corresponds more to the
reality and to a technical documentation.
9. Click OK to validate the operation or click Cancel to restore the original view.
Note: If you click Ok, the following warning message is displayed as the
exploded view is kept when exiting the command. In this case, if you need
to restore the initial view click the Reset icon .

The explode functionality aims at understanding better how the assembly is

structured. You can use it for further purposes: creating scenes, print, keep the
exploded view as archive document or generate a drawing (please refer to Create
Scenes in the DMU Navigator User's Guide)


When moving assemblies (using the compass along with the Shift key or the
Manipulation command), components may sometimes clash.
This task shows you how to view the minimum distance between these components
to avoid a clash.
A clash is detected only when the With respect to constraints option is checked in
the Manipulation parameters dialog box:
Open the GettingStarted.CATProduct document and perform all the tasks of the
Getting Started section until "Moving Components".
1. Drag the compass onto CRIC_SCREW.
2. Press and hold down the Shift key, select v/z axis on the compass, then drag
and drop the component so as to obtain this clash:
The components involved in the clash are now highlighted to facilitate your
work.

3. Click the Manipulation on Clash icon:
4. Move the component slowly from right to left, then from left to right to repeat
the clash.
The application stops the move operation just before the clash occurs.
5. Repeat the operation more quickly: the operation is stopped earlier, which
makes the gap larger between both components.

What you need to know is that the more slowly you handle the mouse, the
smaller the distance between the components will be.
6. To quit the command, simply click the Manipulation on Clash icon again:
You can compute clashes again.
[ Back ]

Manage Products in an Assembly: Select Tools -> Product Management...,modify the part
number in the New part number field and replace the associated representation in the New
representation field.
Publish a Geometric Element: Select Tools -> Publication...,select the element to be

published then rename this element.
Use a Part Contained in a Parametric Standard Part Catalog: Open the catalog of your
choice, navigate through the catalog, select the desired part, use the Copy then Paste
commands.
Modify a Parametric Standard Part Catalog
[ Back ] [ Next ]
This task consists in managing products in an assembly.
Open the AssemblyTools01.CATProduct document.
1. Select Tools -> Product Management...
The Product Management dialog box is displayed.
The following is displayed for each components contained in the assembly:

part Number
document source file
status of the component
associated representation.
You can modify the part number in the New part number field and replace the associated
representation in the New representation field of the selected product.
2. Click the ... button to open the Replace Representation dialog box.

[ Next ]

Using a Standard Part Contained in a Parametric

Standard Part Catalog
This task explains how to use mechanical parts contained in catalogs delivered with
the product. These parts are standard parts.
Dassault Systèmes does not warrant that provided data are compliant with the ISO
or EN standards. For further information, please contact the AFNOR organization for
ISO or EN standards (www.afnor.fr) or the ISO organization for ISO standards
(www.iso.org).
Catalogs containing a limited number of parts compliant with JIS and ANSI
standards are available too.
1. Select the Tools -> Mechanical Standard Parts -> XX catalogs command to
access the catalog of interest. You can choose between the following caralogs:
EN catalogs
ISO catalogs
JIS catalogs
US catalogs
The Catalog Browser dialog box displays:

For your information, catalogs are located in these directories:
ISO:../$OS/Startup/Components/MechanicalStandardParts/ISO_Standards
EN: ../$OS/Startup/Components/MechanicalStandardParts/EN_Standards
2. Navigate through the chosen catalog.

3. Select the desired family and within this family the part you need. For example,
you can instantiate in an assembly:
screws
bolts
nuts
washers
pins
keys
This list is not exhaustive.
4. Right-click to select the Copy contextual command.

5. Select the base of your assembly.
6. Right-click to select the Paste contextual command.
The part is copied into your assembly. Note that this part is no longer linked to
the catalog.
7. Using the Save As capability, you can save this part in the directory of your
choice.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Modifying a Parametric Standard Part Catalog

This task explains how to modify a catalog containing parametric parts delivered
with the product.
Since Release 5 Service Pack 3, we no more use CSV files to create the EndChapters of the
MechanicalStandardParts Catalogs.
To complete or modify an existing parts family:
1. Complete or modify an existing DesignTable (located in the sub-directory

Design_Tables).
2. Launch an application session.
3. Select the Tools-> Macro command to run the macro EN_EndChapters.

CATScript (for EN) located in the sub-directory VBScript.
The dialog box that appears displays the following:
Path of the models directory: path of the sub-directory Models.
Path of the catalog output directory: path of the directory where the
catalog documents will be created.
You can modify the default paths in the CATScript document according to you
install.
To add a new family:
1. Create the parametric CATPart.
2. Create the design table as follows: PartNumber in the first column,

PartName in the second column

3. Complete the script EN_EndChapters.CATScript (for EN) with your family,

remove the others and run the macro.
4. Complete the main chapters description of you catalog.
Edit an existing CSV file (located in the sub-directory CSV) or create a new
one.
Edit the script EN.CATScript, complete it with your new Chapter and run it.
For more about catalogs, refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide.
[ Back ]

Annotations
See Creating Weld Features
Creating Textual Annotations: click this icon, select a face and enter your text in the
dialog box.
Creating Flag Notes: click this icon, select the object you want to represent the
hyperlink, enter a name for the hyperlink and the path to the destination file.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task shows you how to set welding specifications on components. These
specifications will be used later on to weld these components.
Open the WeldPlanner.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Weld Feature icon.
2. Select the edge between Green Part and Blue Part.
The Welding creation dialog box appears.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugat0400.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 8:53:14 AM

3. Enter your specifications in the Welding Creation dialog box. In the first entry field
to the left, enter 70 as the weld length.
4. For example, set the angle symbol. The

symbols available are:
Choose among the three weld types

5.
available to set your weld type:
6. Enter 2.5 as the weld length.
7. Enter Weld 2 in the Reference entry field. This field is reserved for your own
specifications or codes.

You can also import a file by clicking the Import file button. The contents of this
file is then displayed in the geometry.
Note also that you can click:

the field-weld symbol (flag symbol): reserved for welds not made at the
location of the initial part construction.
the weld-all-around symbol (circle circle): reserved for welds made all
around the contour of the part
the "up" option: a display option. You can display the symbols and values
above or below the welding symbol. It is a quick way of transferring the
data from the first row to the row below and vice versa.
the indent line side
the weld tail symbol
The annotation is created in the geometry.

9. Drag and drop the annotation to move it.
You can obtain this result:

Contextual Commands
A certain number of contextual commands are available on specifications:

'Associated Geometry': manages annotation connections
'Select Views/Annotation Plane': selects the annotations of an
annotation plane and the annotation plane of an annotation
'Transfer to View/Annotation Plane': transfers specifications from one
view to another
'Add Leader' adds a leader to the selected specification (Right-click the
specification to which you want to add a leader, select the Add Leader
contextual command and click where you want to begin the leader).
'Annotation Links': creates or deletes positional or orientation links
Contextual commands are also available on the yellow manipulator at the

extremity of the arrow end:
'Add a Breakpoint': adds a breakpoint on the leader line
'Add an Interruption': adds an interruption on the leader line
'Remove a Breakpoint': removes a breakpoint on the leader line
'Remove Leader/Extremity': removes a leader line or an extremity
'All Around': adds the All Around symbol
'Switch to perpendicular leader': sets the leader perpendicular to the
annotation
For more information about those commands, please refer to the 3D Functional
Tolerancing and Annotations User's Guide.
'Symbol shape': edits the shape

of the manipulator pointed at by
the arrow

At any time, you can modify the welding symbol. For this, double-click the welding
symbol to be modified and enter the modifications in the displayed dialog box.
[ Next ]

This task shows you how to create a text with a leader line. This text is assigned an
unlimited width text frame. You can set graphic properties (anchor point, text size
and justification) either before or after you create the text.
Open the WeldPlanner.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Text icon .
2. Select the face (or a set of faces) with which you want to associate a text.
Clicking the face defines a location for the arrow end of the leader.
If the active view is not valid, a message appears informing you that you cannot
use the active view. Therefore, the application is going to display the annotation
in an annotation plane normal to the selected face.
3. Click OK to close the message window.
The Text Editor dialog box is now displayed.

4. Enter your text, for example "Surface 1" in the dialog box.
5. Click OK to end the text creation. You can click anywhere in the geometry area
too.
The leader is associated with the element you selected. If you move either the
text or the element, the leader stretches to maintain its association with the
element.
Moreover, if you change the element associated with the leader, CATIA keeps
the associativity between the element and the leader.
Note that using the Text Properties toolbar, you can define the anchor point,
text size and justification.

You can move a text using either the drag capability. See Moving Annotations.
Note also that you can resize the manipulators. For more information, refer to
Customizing Functional Tolerancing and Annotations Workbench.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Detecting Clashes
Detecting Clashes
Detect interferences: Click the Clash icon, define the type in the Check Clash dialog
box, then select the product and click Apply.
Read Clash command results: Run a check for interferences and read the global
results in the Check Clash dialog box and Preview window.
View results in a dedicated window: Run a check for interferences then click the
Results window icon.
Export clash results: To save results in text and XML format, click the Export As icon.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
This task explains how to use the Clash command to check for interferences in your
document.
Checking for interferences is done in two steps:

Initial computation: detects and identifies the different types of interference.
Detailed computation: computes the graphics representation of interferences as
well as the minimum distance.
1. Click the Clash icon.
The Check Clash dialog box and the dedicated Clash Tools toolbar appear.
The default interference analysis is detecting clashes and contacts between all
components in the document.
Two interference types are available:
Contact + Clash: checks whether two products occupy the same space zone
as well as whether two products are in contact (the minimum distance is less
than the total sag).
Clearance + Contact + Clash: In addition to the above, checks whether
two products are separated by less than the pre-defined clearance distance.
Results differ depending on the interference type selected for the analysis. See
figure.
2. Set the interference type to Clearance + Contact + Clash.

3. Enter the desired clearance value in the field that becomes active next to the
interference type. For example, enter 25mm.
4. Activate the second Type drop-down list box and select the computation type.
Four computation types are available:
Between all components (default option): tests each product in the
document against all other products.
Inside one selection: within any one selection, tests each product of the
selection against all other products in the same selection.
Selection against all: tests each product in the defined selection against all
other products in the document.
Between two selections: tests each product in the first selection against all
products in the second selection.
5. Select the computation type to Between all components.
If you set the computation type to Between two selections, define the first selection
then click to activate the second selection field (Selection 2) and select desired
products.
Notes:
Any sub-assembly in the specification tree is considered a valid selection.
Continue clicking to select as many products as you want. Products are
placed in the active selection. To de-select products, reselect them in the
specification tree or in the geometry area.
Click in selection fields (fields turn black) to view your selections and be
certain that you have selected the products you intended: selected products
are highlighted.
6. Click Apply to check for interferences.
A progress bar is displayed letting you monitor and, if necessary, interrupt (Cancel
option) the calculation. The Check Clash dialog box expands to show the results.

Notes:
To run another interference analysis, simply change the calculation parameters

(interference type and selection) and click Apply.
To know more about Clash command results, refer to Reading Interference Results.
[ Next ]

Interference results differ depending on the interference type selected for the analysis. The
following illustrates expected results for the different analysis combinations.
Clash
Given for information only. This option is not available.
Contact + Clash
If red zones overlap, a clash is detected. If yellow zones only overlap, a contact is detected.

Note: sag (yellow zone) is offset from the skin inwards.
If the minimum distance between the yellow zones is less than the total sag (sag1 + sag2),
a contact is detected.
Clearance + Contact + Clash
Sag
The sag corresponds to the fixed sag value for calculating tessellation on objects (3D fixed
accuracy) set in the Performances tab of Tools -> Options -> General -> Display. By default,
this value is set to 0.2 mm. The sag value set in this tab is offset from the skin inwards on both
selection 1 and selection 2, .
This value is valid for both the Part to Part Clash and the Clash commands.

This task explains how to read the global results in the Check Clash dialog box and browse
through them in the Preview window.
1. Click the Clash icon and run a check of type Clearance (25mm) + Contact + Clash
between all components. For more information, refer to Detecting Interferences.
The Check Clash dialog box expands to show the results.
The dialog box identifies the number of interferences detected along with the type: 4
interferences have been detected.
Status lights are color-coded as follows:

red: at least one conflict is relevant
orange: no relevant conflicts, at least one conflict is Not inspected
green: all conflicts are Irrelevant.
Interference results are presented in two different ways in the dialog box:
List by Conflict tab: lists results by conflict with one conflict per line.
List by Product tab: lists results by product. There may be more than one conflict
per product.

2. Select the first conflict in the list, that is a clash, to run a detailed computation.
A Preview window appears showing the products in conflict only.
The minimum distance is specified in the dialog box and both the minimum distance
and red intersection curves identify clashing products separated by less than the
specified clearance distance of 25mm are displayed in the geometry area.
Color Coding for Conflicts

Clash: red intersection curves identify clashing products.
Contact: yellow triangles identify products in contact.
Clearance: green triangles identify products separated by less than the specified
clearance distance.
If necessary, pan, zoom and/or rotate in the Preview window to visualize the
interference better.
3. Select contact and clearances in turn in the List by Conflict tab to run a detailed
computation.
As you select them, the Value and Status columns in the Check Clash dialog box, and
the Preview window are updated.
4. You can also view the selected interference in a dedicated viewer. To do so, click the
Results window icon in the Clash Tools toolbar.
Filtering the Display in the Dialog Box

You can filter the display of results in tabs by:
All types
Type of interference: clash, contact or clearance
Value: no filter, increasing value or decreasing value.
Status: all, not inspected, relevant, irrelevant. Until selected, all interferences
are reported not inspected. Inspected interferences can be relevant or irrelevant
5. Set Clearance as the filter type.
6. Click Apply filters to update the display.
7. To change the status of an inspected conflict, click the status field of the appropriate
conflict.
The conflict status changes from relevant to irrelevant and vice-versa depending on the
initial value.
8. You can also add comments to selected conflicts: Click the Comment field.
The Comment dialog box appears.
9. Enter your comment, for example "Test" and click OK.

10. Click the List by Product tab to display conflicts associated with products.

Results are organized by product in the List by Product tab. There may be more than
one conflict per product.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

This task explains how to view selected interferences in a separate viewer.
1. Click the Clash icon and run a check of type Clearance (25mm) + Contact
+ Clash between all components. For more information, refer to Detecting

Interferences.
The Check Clash dialog box expands to show the results of the initial
computation. The first interference is selected by default and a detailed
computation has been run.
2. Close the Preview window.

3. Click the Results window icon in the Clash Tools toolbar to view the
selected interference in a dedicated viewer.
The Interference Results.1 window opens.

Color Coding for Conflicts

Clash: red intersection curves identify clashing products.
Contact: yellow triangles identify products in contact.
Clearance: green triangles identify products separated by less than the
specified clearance distance.
Object viewing commands and commands in the Window menu are available in
this window. You can, for example, tile the Interference results window and the
original document window vertically or horizontally.
4. For example, select Window -> Tile Vertically from the menu bar to organize
the open windows vertically.
5. Click OK in the Check Clash dialog box to exit when done.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Exporting Clash Results
This task explains how to export clash results to a text file and publish clash results to an
XML file.
1. Click the Clash icon and run a check of type Clearance (25mm) + Contact + Clash
between all components. For more information, refer to Detecting Interferences.
The Check Clash dialog box expands to show the results of the initial computation.
2. Browse through results using the Results viewer.

3. To publish results to an XML file, click the Export As icon in the Clash Tools toolbar:
The Export As dialog box is displayed:

Set Type to XML (Extensible Markup Language): a standard format that can be
used as a simple way to exchange data.
Identify the folder in which you want to save the file.
Enter a file name.
Click Save to publish the results.
Note: Each time you export results, a folder containing all necessary files and images is
created.
4. Open your browser and read the results.
5. Click the interference (computation result table) in the browser to jump to the part of
the page displaying the selected interference and appropriate results.
Notes:
The viewpoints set when visualizing the interferences in the Results window are
saved and exported along with the clash results.
Any filters applied to the results in the dialog box are taken into account so you
can use the filters to export only pertinent results.
6. To write results to a text file, click the Export As icon in the Clash Tools toolbar:
The Export As dialog box is displayed.

Set Type to *.txt
Identify the folder in which you want to save the file.
Enter a file name.
Click Save to save the results in a text file.
7. Click OK to exit when done.

[ Back ]

Sectioning
Sectioning
About Sectioning
Creating Section Planes: Click the icon.
Creating 3D Section Cuts: Create a section plane then click the icon.
Manipulating Section Planes Directly: Create a section plane, drag plane edges to re-
dimension, drag plane to move it along the normal vector, press and hold left and
middle mouse buttons down to move plane in U, V plane or local axis system or
drag plane axis to rotate plane.
Positioning Planes on a Geometric Target: Create a section plane, click the icon then
point to the target of interest.
Positioning Planes Using the Edit Position and Dimensions Command: Create a
section plane, click the icon and enter parameters defining the plane position in the
dialog box.
More About the Section Viewer: Create a section plane then click the icon.
[ Back ] [ Next ]
About Sectioning
About Sectioning
Using cutting planes, you can create sections, section slices, section boxes as well as
3D section cuts of your products automatically.
Creating section slices and section boxes are DMU-P2 functionalities.
The Section Plane
The section plane is

created parallel to
absolute coordinates Y, Z.
The center of the plane is
located at the center of
the bounding sphere
around the products in
the selection you defined.
Line segments visualized

represent the intersection
of the plane with all
products in the selection.
By default, line segments
are the same color as the
products sectioned.
If no selection is made
before entering the
command, the plane
sections all products.
In DMU-P1, you cannot
select products to be
sectioned: the plane
sections all products.
A plane has limits and its own local axis system. The letters
U, V and W represent the axes. The W-axis is the normal
vector of the plane.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugspa_C2/cfyugspabt0209.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:54:23 AM

About Sectioning
You can customize settings to locate the center and orient the normal vector of the
plane. This is done using the Tools ->Options..., Digital Mockup ->DMU Space
Analysis command (DMU Sectioning tab).
Manipulating the Plane
Sectioning is dynamic (moving the plane gives immediate results). You can manipulate
the cutting plane in a variety of ways:
● Directly
● Position it with respect to a geometrical target, by selecting points and/or lines
● Change its current position, move and rotate it using the Edit Position and
Dimensions command.
Section Results
Results differ depending on the sag value used.

Using default value Using a higher value:
(0.2mm):
Sag corresponds to the fixed sag value for calculating tessellation on objects (3D fixed
accuracy) set in the Performance tab of Tools -> Options -> General -> Display.
By default, this value is set to 0.2 mm.
In Visualization mode, you can dynamically change the sag value for selected objects
using the Tools -> Modify SAG command.

About Sectioning
The 3D Section Cut
3D section cuts cut away the material from the cutting plane to expose the cavity
within the product, beyond the slice or outside the box.
Combining Sectioning with other DMU Space Analysis toolbar

commands
In DMU-P2, you can, for example, use sections to check minimum distances or to
identify conflicts between products.
To do so, section distance or clash results directly in the Distance or Interference
Results window. The plane is created parallel to the direction of the minimum distance
or penetration depth, and the center of the plane is placed on the center of the
measured distance or, in the case of a contact result on the center of the bounding
sphere around products selected. All section plane manipulations, geometrical target
and volume cut commands are available.
You can measure the minimum distance in the section viewer between element
sections or between edge primitives using the Measure Between command.
Measure Between and Measure Item commands can also be used to annotate a
generated section.
Creating Groups of Products
In DMU-P2, prior to creating your section plane, you can create a group containing the
product(s) of interest using the Group icon in the DMU Space Analysis toolbar or
Insert -> Group... in the menu bar.
Groups created are identified in the specification tree and can be selected from there
for sectioning. Only one group per selection can be defined.
[ Up ] [ Next ]


This task shows how to create section planes and orient the normal vector of the
plane. It also shows how to access and change section properties.
Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr,
NOZZLE1.cgr, NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER.
cgr and VALVE.cgr.
They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities
sample folder cfysa/samples.
1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the
menu bar, or click the Sectioning
icon in the DMU Space Analysis toolbar
to generate a section plane.
The section plane is automatically

created. If no selection is made before
entering the command, the plane
sections all products. If products are
selected, the plane sections selected
products.
P1 Functionality
In DMU-P1, you cannot select products

to be sectioned: the plane sections all
products.
The Section Plane
The plane is created parallel to absolute coordinates Y,Z. The center of the plane is
located at the center of the bounding sphere around the products in the selection
you defined. Line segments visualized represent the intersection of the plane with all
products in the selection. By default, line segments are the same color as the
products sectioned.
A section plane has limits and its own local axis system. U, V and W represent the
axes. The W-axis is the normal vector of the plane. The contour of the plane is red.
You can dynamically re-dimension and reposition the section plane. For more

information, see Manipulating Section Planes Directly.
Using the Tools ->Options... command (DMU Sectioning tab under Digital
Mockup ->DMU Space Analysis, you can change the following default settings:
● Location of the center of the plane
● Orientation of the normal vector of the plane.
P2 Functionalities
In DMU-P2, you can create as many independent section planes as you like.
Results Window
A Section viewer is automatically tiled vertically alongside the document window. It

displays a front view of the generated section and is by default, locked in a 2D view.
Notice that the section view is a filled view. This is the default option. The fill
capability generates surfaces for display and measurement purposes (area, center of
gravity, etc.).

Sectioning Definition Dialog

Box
The Sectioning Definition dialog box

appears.
This dialog box contains a wide variety

of tools letting you position, move and
rotate the section plane as well as
create slices, boxes and section cuts.
For more information, see Positioning
Planes with respect to a Geometrical
Target, Positioning Planes Using the
Edit Position Command, Creating
Section Slices, Creating Section Boxes
and Creating 3D Section Cuts.
P2 Functionalities
Creating section slices and section boxes are DMU-P2 functionalities.

2. Click the Selection box to activate it.
3. Click products of interest to make your selection, for example the TRIGGER and
BODY1.
Products selected are highlighted in the specification tree and geometry area.
Note: Simply continue clicking to select as many products as you want. Products will
be placed in the active selection. To de-select products, reselect them in the
specification tree or in the geometry area.
The plane now sections only selected products.

You can change the current position of the section plane with respect to the absolute
axis system of the document:
4. Click the Positioning tab in the Sectioning Definition dialog box.
5. Select X, Y or Z radio buttons to position the normal vector (W-axis) of the plane
along the selected absolute system axis.
Select Z for example. The plane is positioned perpendicular to the Z-axis.

6. Double-click the normal vector of the plane (W-axis) or click the Invert Normal
icon to invert it.

7. Click OK when done.
The section plane definition and results

are kept as a specification tree feature.
By default, the plane is hidden when exiting the command. Use the Tools-
>Options, Digital Mockup-> DMU Space Analysis command (DMU Sectioning
tab) to change this setting.
To show and edit the plane again, double-click the specification tree feature or
select Hide/Show the plane representation in the contextual menu.
Changing the Color, Linetype and Thickness of Section Line Segments
To make it easier to read your result, you can specify different properties (color,
linetype and thickness) for section line segments. By default line segments are the
same color as the products sectioned.
● Right-click the section in the geometry area and select Properties
● In the dialog box, click the Graphic tab
● (Under Lines and Curves), change line segment color, linetype and thickness.
The Properties command also lets you change the plane color (Fill Color in Graphics
tab) as well as plane dimensions (Plane Dimensions tab) of the current feature.
● Right-click the specification tree feature and select Properties
● In the dialog box, click the Graphic tab or the More option then the Plane
Dimensions tab.

You can also change the linetype and thickness of line segments as well as the color
of section planes via the Graphic Properties toolbar.
To return to the initial colors, select No color.


3D section cuts cut away the material from the plane, beyond the slice or outside the box
to expose the cavity within the product.
This task explains how to create 3D section cuts.
Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr, NOZZLE1.
cgr, NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER.cgr and
VALVE.cgr.
They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities
sample folder cfysa/samples.
1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning icon in the
DMU Space Analysis toolbar and create a section plane.
The Sectioning Definition dialog box appears.
2. In the Definition tab, click the Volume Cut

icon to obtain a section cut:
The material in the negative direction along

the normal vector of the plane (W-axis) is cut
away exposing the cavity within the product.
Note: In some cases, the normal vector of

the plane is inverted to give you the best view
of the cut.

Double-click the normal vector of the plane to invert it, or click the Invert Normal
icon in the Positioning tab of the Sectioning Definition dialog box.
3. Re-click the icon to restore the material cut away.

4. Click OK when done.
When the Sectioning Tool is a When the Sectioning Tool is a Box:

Slice:

P2 Functionality
In DMU-P2, you can turn up to six

independent section planes into clipping
planes using the Volume Cut command to
focus on the part of the product that
interests you most.


You can re-dimension, move and rotate section planes, or the master plane in the case of section
slices and boxes, directly. As you move the cursor over the plane, the plane edge or the local axis
system, its appearance changes and arrows appear to help you.
Moving along the Moving in the x,y
Re-dimensioning: normal vector Rotating: plane of the
of the plane: local axis system:
Sectioning results are updated in the Section viewer as you manipulate the plane.
To change this setting and have results updated when you release the mouse button only, de-
activate the appropriate setting in the DMU Sectioning tab (Tools ->Options..., Digital Mockup -
>DMU Space Analysis).
This task illustrates how to manipulate section planes directly.
Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr, NOZZLE1.cgr,
NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER.cgr and VALVE.cgr.
They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities sample
folder cfysa/samples.
1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning icon in the DMU
Space Analysis toolbar and create a section plane.
A Section viewer showing the generated section is automatically tiled vertically alongside the
document window.
The generated section is automatically updated to reflect any changes made to the section
plane.
You can re-dimension the section plane:

2. Click and drag plane edges to re-dimension plane:
Note: A dynamic plane dimension is indicated as you drag the plane edge.

You can view and edit plane dimensions in the Edit Position and Dimensions command. The
plane height corresponds to its dimension along the local U-axis and the width to its
dimension along the local V-axis.
You can move the section plane along the normal vector of the plane:
3. Move the cursor over the plane, click and drag to move the plane to the desired location.
You can move the section plane in the U,V plane of the local axis system:
4. Press and hold down the left mouse button, then the middle mouse button and drag (still
holding both buttons down) to move the plane to the desired location.
You can rotate the section plane around its axes:

5. Move the cursor over the desired plane axis system axis, click and drag to rotate the plane
around the selected axis.

6. (Optional) Click the Reset Position icon in the Positioning tab of the Sectioning Definition
dialog box to restore the center of the plane to its original position.
7. Click OK in the Sectioning Definition dialog box when done.


You can position section planes, section slices and section boxes with respect to a geometrical target
(a face, edge, reference plane or cylinder axis). In the case of section slices and boxes, it is the
master plane that controls how the slice or box will be positioned.
This task illustrates how to position a section plane with respect to a geometrical target.
Insert the following cgr files: ATOMIZER.cgr, BODY1.cgr, BODY2.cgr, LOCK.cgr, NOZZLE1.cgr,
NOZZLE2.cgr, REGULATION_COMMAND.cgr, REGULATOR.cgr, TRIGGER.cgr and VALVE.cgr.
They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common functionalities sample folder
cfysa/samples.
1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning icon in the DMU Space
Analysis toolbar and create a section plane.
The Sectioning Definition dialog box appears.
A Section viewer showing the generated section is automatically tiled vertically alongside the
document window.
The generated section is automatically updated to reflect any changes made to the section plane.
2. Click the Positioning tab in the Sectioning Definition
dialog box.
3. Click the Geometrical Target icon to position the

plane with respect to a geometrical target.
4. Point to the target of interest:

A rectangle and vector representing the plane and
the normal vector of the plane appear in the
geometry area to assist you position the section
plane. It moves as you move the cursor.

5. When satisfied, click to position the section plane on

the target.
Notes:
● To position planes orthogonal to edges, simply click the desired edge.
● A smart mode recognizes cylinders and snaps the plane directly to the cylinder axis. This lets
you, for example, make a section cut normal to a hole centerline. To de-activate this mode, use
the Ctrl key.
P2 Functionality
In DMU-P2, you can move the plane along a curve, edge or surface:
● Point to the target of interest
● Press and hold down the Ctrl key
● Still holding down the Ctrl key, move the cursor along the target. The plane is positioned tangent
to the small target plane. As you move the cursor, the plane moves along the curve or edge.
6. (Optional) Click the Reset Position icon to restore the center of the plane to its original position.

Positioning Planes Using the Edit Position and

Dimensions Command
In addition to manipulating the plane directly in the geometry area, you can position
the section plane more precisely using the Edit Position and Dimensions command.
You can move the plane to a new location as well as rotate the plane. You can also re-
dimension the section plane.
In the case of section slices and boxes, it is the master plane that controls how the
slice or box will be positioned.
This task illustrates how to position and re-dimension the section plane using the Edit
Position and Dimensions command.
cgr and VALVE.cgr.
They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common

functionalities sample folder cfysa/samples.
1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning icon in
the DMU Space Analysis toolbar and create a section plane.
A Section viewer showing the generated section is automatically tiled vertically

alongside the document window. The generated section is automatically updated to
reflect any changes made to the section plane.
The Sectioning Definition dialog box is also displayed.

2. Click the Positioning tab in the
Sectioning Definition dialog box.

3. Click the Edit Position and Dimensions

icon to enter parameters defining
the position of the plane:
The Edit Position and Dimensions

dialog box appears.
4. Enter values in Origin X, Y or Z boxes to position the center of the plane with
respect to the absolute system coordinates entered.
By default, the center of the plane coincides with the center of the bounding sphere
around the products in the current selection.
Using the Tools -> Options... command (DMU Sectioning tab under Digital
Mockup ->DMU Space Analysis), you can customize settings for both the normal
vector and the origin of the plane.
You can move the section plane to a new location. Translations are made with
respect to the local plane axis system.
5. Enter the translation step directly in the Translation spin box or use spin box arrows
to scroll to a new value, then click -Tu, +Tu, -Tv, +Tv, -Tw, +Tw, to move the plane
along the selected axis by the defined step.
Note: Units are current units set using Tools-> Options (Units tab under General-
> Parameters and Measure).
Change the translation step to 25mm and click +Tw for example. The plane is
translated 25 mm in the positive direction along the local W-axis.

You can rotate the section plane. Rotations are made with respect to the local plane
axis system.
6. Enter the rotation step directly in the Rotation spin box or use spin box arrows to
scroll to a new value, then click -Ru, +Ru, -Rv, +Rv, -Rw, +Rw, to rotate the plane
around the selected axis by the defined step.
Note: Units are current units set using Tools -> Options.
With a rotation step of 45 degrees, click +Rv for example to rotate the plane by the
specified amount in the positive direction around the local V-axis.

You can edit plane dimensions. The plane height corresponds to its dimension along
the local U-axis and the width to its dimension along the local V-axis. You can also
edit slice or box thickness.
7. Enter new width, height and/or thickness values in the Dimensions box to re-
dimension the plane.
The plane is re-sized accordingly.

● Use Undo and Redo icons in the Edit Position and Dimensions dialog box to cancel
the last action or recover the last action undone respectively.
● Use the Reset Position icon in the Positioning tab of the Sectioning Definition
dialog box to restore the section plane to its original position.
● You can also view and edit plane dimensions in the Properties dialog box (Edit ->
Properties or via the contextual menu).
This command is not available when using the sectioning command.

8. Click Close in the Edit Position and Dimensions dialog box when satisfied.


This task illustrates how to make the most of section viewer capabilities.
Most of the commands described in this task are to be found in the Result tab of the
cgr and VALVE.cgr.
They are to be found in the online documentation filetree in the common

functionalities sample folder cfysa/samples.
1. Select Insert -> Sectioning from the menu bar, or click the Sectioning
icon in the DMU Space Analysis toolbar and create the desired section plane,
slice or box and corresponding section.
The Section viewer is automatically tiled vertically alongside the document
window. It displays a front view of the section and is by default, locked in a 2D
view. To obtain a 3D view and access 3D viewing tools, right-click in the window
and select the 2D Lock command from the contextual menu.
Notice that the section view is a filled view. This is the default option. The fill
capability generates surfaces for display and measurement purposes (area,
center of gravity, etc.). To obtain an unfilled view, de-activate the Section Fill
icon in the Result tab of the Sectioning Definition dialog box.

● In the Section viewer, the appearance of the cursor changes to attract your
attention to the existence of the contextual menu.
● You can change the default settings for this window using Tools -
>Options... command (DMU Sectioning tab under Digital Mockup ->DMU
Space Analysis).
2. Orient the generated section.
Flip and Rotate commands are to

be found in the contextual menu.
Right-click in the Section viewer
and:
● Select the Flip Vertical or
the Flip Horizontal icon to

flip the section vertically or
horizontally 180 degrees.
● Select the Rotate Right or
the Rotate Left icon to

rotate the section right or left

90 degrees.
Working with the 2D Grid

3. Click the Result tab in the
Sectioning Definition dialog box,
then select the Grid icon
under Options to display a 2D grid.
Grid dimensions are those of the

generated section. Moving the
section plane re-sizes the grid to
results.
You can edit the grid step, style and mode using the Edit Grid command.
4. Select the Edit Grid icon to

adjust grid parameters:
The Edit Grid dialog box appears:
In the above example, the grid

mode is absolute and the style is
set to lines.

In the absolute mode, grid coordinates are set with respect to the absolute axis
system of the document.
The grid step is set to the default value of 100. The arrows let you scroll through
a discrete set of logarithmically calculated values. You can also enter a grid step
manually.
Units are current units set using Tools-> Options (Units tab under General->
Parameters and Measure).
5. Scroll through grid width and
height and set the grid step to 10
x 10.
6. Click the Relative mode radio

button:
In the relative mode, the center of

the grid is placed on the center of
section plane.
7. Click the Crosses style radio

button.

Grid parameters are persistent:

any changes to default parameters
are kept and applied next time you
open the viewer or re-edit the
section.
8. Click the Automatic filtering checkbox to adjust the level of detail of grid display
when you zoom in and out.
9. Right-click the grid then select Coordinates to display the coordinates at
selected intersections of grid lines. The Clean All command removes displayed
grid coordinates.

Note: You can customize both grid and Section viewer settings using the Tools -
> Options... command (DMU Sectioning tab under Digital Mockup ->DMU
Space Analysis).
10. Select Analyze ->Graphic Messages ->Coordinate to display the coordinates
of points, and/or Name to identify products as your cursor moves over them.
Clicking turns the temporary markers into 3D annotations.

11. Click OK in the Edit Grid dialog box when done.
P2 Functionality - Detecting
Collisions
In DMU-P2, You can detect

collisions between 2D sections. To
do so, click the Clash Detection
icon in the Result tab of the
Clashes detected are highlighted

in the Section viewer.
Collision detection is dynamic:

move the section plane and watch
the Section viewer display being
updated.

Annotating
● You can measure minimum distances and angles as well as other properties
on generated sections and keep these measures as annotations. To do so,
enter a measure command and select items in the section viewer. For more
information, see tasks on Measuring Distances and Angles on Geometrical
Entities and Measuring Properties.
Note: The Measure Between result is different depending on whether or not
the section view is a filled view. If the section view is filled, the result
obtained is the minimum distance between sections of selected elements
(solid of a model, body of a CATPart). If the section view is unfilled, the result
obtained is the minimum distance between edge primitives.
● In DMU Space Analysis, click the 3D Annotation icon to add 3D text to

section views.
● In DMU Space Analysis, click the Creating Annotated Views icon to create
and annotate a 2D view of your section using arrows, lines, text, etc.
provided in the DMU 2D Marker toolbar. 2D views are identified in the
specification tree and can be recovered using the Managing Annotated Views
icon.
For more information on 2D and 3D annotation, see the DMU Navigator User's
Guide.

Saving Sectioning Results
You can also save sectioning results in a variety of different formats using the
Export As command in the Result tab of the Sectioning Definition dialog box or
the Capture command (Tools ->Image ->Capture).
If you exit the Sectioning command with the Section viewer still active, this
window is not closed and filled sections remain visible.

This task explains how to measure minimum distance between products.
1. Click the Distance and Band Analysis icon to calculate distances.
The Edit Distance and Band Analysis dialog box appears.
Three computation types are available:

inside one selection: (default type): within any one selection, tests
each product of the selection against all other products in the same
selection.
Between two selections: tests each product in the first selection
against all products in the second selection.
Selection against all: tests each product in the defined selection
against all other products in the document.
2. Select Between two selections.
3. Select CRIC_TOP (CRIC_TOP.1) to define Selection 1.

4. Click Selection 2 field and multi-select CRIC_BRANCH_3 (CRIC_BRANCH_3.1)

and CRIC_JOIN (CRIC_JOIN.1)
You can select as many products as you want. Products will be placed in the
active selection. To de-select products, reselect them in the specification tree or
the geometry area.

5. Click Apply to calculate the distance.
A Preview window appears visualizing selected products and the minimum

distance (represented by a line, two arrows and a value). The Edit Distance
dialog box expands to show the results.
If necessary, pan, zoom and/or rotate in the Preview window to visualize the
results better.

Minimum distance and other information identifying all distance components is

given in the expanded dialog box. X, Y, Z coordinates of start and end points on
products selected for the distance calculation as well as products themselves
are identified.
6. Click OK to close the dialog boxes.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

As you know, you can set two different work modes prior to performing tasks in this
workbench:
The Design Mode changes the cgr format of the component into the original
component document. In other words, geometric data is available. All
workbench commands are available if this mode is activated.
The Visualization Mode uses documents in cgr format. Only the external
appearance of the component is visualized. The geometry is not available,
which may be useful when you deal with sophisticated assemblies with large
amounts of date but only need a few components to work on.
This task illustrates the use of the Visualization mode and more precisely one way
of improving the performances of the product.
1. Make sure that the "Work with the cache system" is on (by default, the cache is
not activated). Otherwise, select the Tools -> Options command, click
Infrastructure -> Product Structure to the left of the dialog box that
appears and check the option. Do not forget to restart your session after
turning on the cache.
Activating this option sets the visualization mode as the work mode.
2. Open the AssemblyConstraint07.CATProduct document.
Notes
Using a cache system considerably reduces the time required to load
your data.
When opening assembly documents in visualization mode, the update
icon is always active, because the application cannot identify
whether the assembly is up-to-date or not.
Looking closer at the specification tree, you can notice that the nodes are not
expandable. This indicates that you are working in visualization mode.

3. Click the Offset Constraint icon to define an offset constraint between
Part.5 and Blue_Part.
As you are moving your cursor onto any of the parts, you can notice that an eye
symbol is located next to your arrow. This indicates that you are allowed to set
constraints even if you are working in visualization mode.
Once the constraint is set, take a look at the tree. Now, the nodes are
expandable.
4.
The fact that the application resolves constraints while working in visualization
mode is possible only if your document contains data created using Release 10,
and not using previous releases.
The application resolves constraints set from published elements.
Contextual parts in visualization mode remain in this mode if they are up-to-
date.
Setting the Design or Visualization Mode
To define a mode specific to a component, you simply need to select your

component and then use the Representations -> Visualization (or Design)
Mode contextual command.

[ Back ]

Advanced Tasks
Advanced Tasks
Here is the list of the tasks you will perform in this section:
Assembly Features
Scenes
To know how to handle different aspects of Assembly/ENOVIA interoperability, please refer

to the following tasks described in the CATIA/ENOVIA Interoperability User's Guide:
CATIA V5 / ENOVIAVPM via PORTAL 3d com on Windows
Load an Assembly into VPM
CATIA V5/VPM on UNIX
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugat0000.htm10/19/2004 8:55:55 AM
Replace Components: click this icon and select a component.
Reconnect a Replaced Representation: Right-click a component and select

Representations -> Manage Representations from the contextual menu.
Reconnect Constraints: Double-click a constraint to edit it,
[ Next ]
This task shows you how to replace components into an assembly.
In an assembly you may replace:
A component by a component completely different (a jack by a wheel for

example).
A component by a component from the same family (a gearbox by another
for example).
Both cases the constraints reconnection is only warranted either:
Component's product structure is the same.

Instance's names of products in the replacing component are the same.
Constraints reference the same published elements.
See Reconnecting Constraints.
1. Select a component in the specifications tree.
2. Click the Replace Component icon in the Product Structure Tools

toolbar.
[ Next ]

This task first consists in replacing a representation then in reconnecting geometrical elements.
Open the Reconnect01.CATProduct document.
1. Right-click on SCREW in the specifications tree.
2. Select Representations -> Manage Representations from the contextual menu.
The Manage Representation dialog box is displayed.

3. Click on CRIC_SCREW.model in the Source field.

4. Click Replace...
The Associate Representation dialog box is displayed.

5. Navigate to open the CRIC_SCREW_NEW.model.
6. The Reconnect Representation dialog box is displayed.

A window containing the assembly with the old representation is displayed in the window
to the left of the dialog box.
A window containing only the new representation is displayed to the right of the dialog
box. You are going to reconnect the geometrical elements in this window.
5. To reconnect the highlighted geometric element of the old representation, that is a line,
select the axis of the new representation.
6. Select Plane and select the circular face as shown to reconnect the plane.
Two "Yes" are now displayed in the Reconnect field.
7. Click Close to close the Manage Representation dialog box.
The representation is replaced and constraints are valid.

[ Back ] [ Next ]

Reconnecting constraints means defining new supporting elements for these constraints. You perform
this operation to correct mistakes you made while assembling components or the mistakes detected
by updates.
This task shows you how to reconnect two constraints.
1. The assembly contains a contact and a coincidence constraint that need to be reconnected.
Double-click the contact constraint to be reconnected.
2. In the Constraint Edition dialog box that appears, click More to access additional information.
The names of supporting elements are now displayed.
3. Click CRIC_BRANCH_3 then Reconnect.

4. Select the blue face as shown to specify the new supporting face.
5. Click OK.
The contact constraint is reconnected:
6. Now select the coincidence constraint in the geometry or in the specification tree.
7. Select the Properties contextual command.

8. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click CRIC_BRANCH_3.
9. Click Reconnect...
The window that appears displays the components.

10. Select the axis passing through the circular faces.
11. Click OK to close the window.
12. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.
Because they are only two constraints defined on this product, the application can compute
several results. This is an example of what you can obtain:
[ Back ]

Editing a Part in an Assembly Design Context
Publishing Elements
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Assembly Design can be cooperatively used with Part Design in many ways. If in a
CATProduct document you can design parts from scratch or reshape them, you can also
create associative links between several parts.
These links can be geometrical and are then referred to as "External references" or
parametrical then referred to as "External parameters" in the specification tree.
Assembly Design provides a large range of commands or options to manage those links.
These capabilities are:
"Keep link with selected object".
lets you maintain the links between external references, copied elements for
example, and their origins when you are editing these elements. For more
information, see Customizing General Settings, External References.
"Isolate" contextual command: cuts the link between external references and their
origins,
Management of both assembly constraints and design in context: it is possible to set

constraints between published geometrical elements. See Customizing Assembly
Constraints, Constraint Creation
"Edit Links", see Displaying Document Links and Editing Documents Links in CATIA
Infrastructure User's Guide.
Copy of external elements to update parts outside assembly context
Automatic synchronization during update operations, or manual synchronization
"Activate/Deactivate link"
"Publication:" to reuse existing designs and manage links. For more information, see
Customizing General Settings, External References.

"Copy Break/Link/New From to quickly reuse a part
[ Next ]

Editing a Part in an Assembly Design Context

This task shows you how to edit a CATPart in CATIA - Assembly Design context.
Open the ManagingComponents01.CATProduct document.
1. Click on the + sign to the left of the CRIC_SCREW component in the tree.
The Product document is identified by the Product document icon.
2.
Double-click on the part CRIC_SCREW to open CATIA - Part Design workbench.
Do not mistake the CATProduct document for the Part Design document:
The Part Design document is identified by

the Part Design document icon.
3. CATIA - Part Design workbench is displayed.
Click on the + sign to the left of Part Body.
4. Double-click the feature you need to edit. For example, double-click on Pad2 to
display the Pad Definition dialog box. You can then enter the parameters of your
choice.
For information about Part Design and the Sketcher , please refer to CATIA- Part
Design User's Guide Version 5 and CATIA- Dynamic Sketcher User's Guide Version
5 respectively.

5. Once you have edited the part, double-click on ManagingComponents01 to return

into CATIA - Assembly Design workbench. The specification tree remains
unchanged.
6. Double-click on the part CRIC_SCREW to open CATIA - Part Design workbench

again.
7. Select any circular face of CRIC_BRANCH1 and enter the Sketcher workbench.
8. Create a circle and set a coincidence constraint for example:
9. Exit from the Sketcher and double-click on ManagingComponents01 to return into

CATIA - Assembly Design workbench.
CATIA - Assembly Design workbench is then displayed and a green wheel is added
to CRIC_SCREW in the tree to represent the contextual nature of the component:
. Note however that this symbol is displayed only if the option Keep link with
selected object is selected. For more information, please refer to CATIA- Part
Design User's Guide Version 5.

Contextual components are considered as the children of the components used for
their creation. This means that if you delete these support components, you will
need to consider if you wish to delete contextual components or not. Remember,
you can choose to delete affected elements by checking the Delete all children
option in the Delete dialog box.
"Copy/Paste As Special" command
If you wish to apply the Copy -> Paste As Special command to parts included into
your assembly, remember the following: if you have already used the As Result
With Link option when pasting Part.1 onto Part.2, you then cannot paste Part.2
onto Part.1 using the As Result With Link option. An error message is issued
informing you that a cycle has been detected. For more about Copy -> Paste As
Special command, please refer to Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5.
[ Back ]

Assembly Features
Assembly Features
Prior to creating assembly features, keep in mind the following:
You can create assembly features only between the child components of the
active product. The active product at least must include two components
which in turn must contain one part at least.
You cannot create assembly features between two geometric elements

belonging to the same component.
The different assembly features you can create are:
Split: click this icon, select the splitting face or surface, define the parts you need
to split and define the portion of material to keep.
Hole: click this icon, select a face to define the hole location, define the parts on
which you need to make the hole and define your hole.
Hole Series: in the Assembly Features Definition dialog bow, click the Series tab
and select the parts of interest prior to defining holes.
Pocket: click this icon, select the profile to be extruded, define the parts from
which you need to remove material and define the pocket.
Remove: click this icon, select the body to removed and define the parts from
which you need to remove material.
Add: click this icon, select the body to be added and define the parts to which you
need to add material.
Perform a Symmetry: click this icon, select the reference plane and the
component, then check required options.
Modify a Symmetry

Assembly Features
Move a Component by Using the Symmetry Command
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Assembly Split
Assembly Split
The Assembly Split command splits parts rapidly and very productively. You could
actually split each part in the Part Design workbench, but the Assembly Split
command is more productive since it requires only one interaction.
This task shows you how to split a product including four parts. You will actually split
three of these parts by using a surface.
Open the AssemblySplit.CATProduct document. Ensure the design mode is on.
1. Click the Split icon .
2. Select the splitting surface, that is Loft.1.
The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts
that may be affected by the split action.
The assembly feature's name now appears in the top left corner of the dialog box.
If desired, you can edit this name.

Assembly Split
3. The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use.
For the purposes of our scenario, you are going to split Bulkhead A.1, Bulkhead
A.2 and Bulkhead B. Note that Bulkhead A.2 and Bulkhead A.1 are two instances
of Bulkhead A.
Move the parts to the list 'Affected parts". To do so, select Bulkhead A.1 and click
the button.

Assembly Split
4. Repeat the operation for the other two parts. Alternatively, double-click each part.
The other three buttons let you move the names of the parts from one list to
another too:
moves all selected parts to the list 'Affected parts'
moves all selected parts to the list 'Parts possibly affected'
moves the selected part to the list 'Parts possibly affected'
The Split Definition dialog box that has appeared, indicates the splitting element.
5. Arrows in the geometry indicate the portion of parts that will be kept. If the
arrows point in the wrong direction, click them to reverse the direction.
6. Check the option Highlight affected parts to clearly identify the parts to split.

Assembly Split
The parts are split. Material has been removed from Bulkhead A.1, Bulkhead A.2
and Bulkhead B. Conversely, Bulkhead C is intact.
A new entity 'Assembly Features' appears in the specification tree. It contains the
assembly split referred to as 'Assembly Split.1" and the name of affected parts.
Moreover, this feature has generated a split feature in Bulkhead B and two split
features in Bulkhead A.1 and Bulkhead A.2, these parts being instances of a same
original part. An arrow symbol identifies these splits in the tree, meaning that
a link exists between Assembly Split.1and them.

Assembly Split
Editing an Assembly Split

Assembly Split
To edit an assembly split, double-click 'Assembly Split.X' entity then you can
either:
modify the list of the parts you wish to split
change the splitting surface
redefine the portions of material to keep
If you need to cut the link between a generated split and Assembly Split.X,
just use the Isolate contextual command. You will then obtain a 'traditional' split
feature as if you had designed it in Part Design and you will be able to edit it in
Part Design.
Reusing Part Design Splits
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly splits from existing Part
Design splits, or more precisely by reusing the specifications you entered for
designing Part Design splits. To do so, just proceed as follows:
Click the Split icon .

1.
2. Select the Part Design split of interest.
3. Both the Split Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes
display. You then just need to specify the parts to split.
The assembly split inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part Design Split
Definition dialog box. You can edit these specifications at any time. Editing an
Assembly feature created in this way does not affect the specifications used for
the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Splits
The application also lets you reuse Assembly Splits specifications to accelerate the
design process. In this case, you just need to select the existing assembly split,
click the Assembly Split icon and then select a face. Only the Assembly Features
Definition dialog box appears to let you determine the parts of interest.

Assembly Split
[ Next ]

Assembly Hole
Assembly Hole
The Assembly Hole command lets you create holes going thru different parts. You could actually create
holes for each part in the Part Design workbench, but the Assembly Hole command available in
Assembly Design workbench creates holes more rapidly and more productively: the command creates
a hole going thru several parts in only one interaction.
You can create distinct shapes of holes going thru the individual parts of an assembly and this, in one
shot. To know how to do this, please refer to Using Hole Series.
This task shows you how to create a hole on a product including three parts, but you will create the
hole on two parts only.
Open the AssemblyHole.CATProduct document.
2. Select the purple face as shown to define the location of the hole:
The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts that may be
affected by the hole creation.
The assembly feature's name now appears in the top left corner of the dialog box. If desired, you
can edit this name.
The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use. Purple Part is
displayed in this frame.

Assembly Hole
Note that now the Hole Definition dialog box is displayed.
3. As you wish to create a hole between Part5 and Purple Part, move Part5 to the list 'Affected parts".
The other three buttons lets you move the names of the parts from one list to another too:
4. Check the option Highlight affected parts to clearly identify the parts.
At this point, you can now define the hole you wish.

Assembly Hole
Whatever hole you choose, you need to specify the limit you want. If you do not specify a depth
value, four types of limits are available:
Blind Up to Last Up to Plane Up to Surface
Set the Up to Last option. The application will extend the hole from the sketch plane to the last face
5.
encountered.
6. Enter 25mm as the diameter value.
By default, the application creates the hole normal to the sketch face. But you can also define a
creation direction not normal to the face by unchecking the Normal to surface option and selecting
an edge or a line.
If you are designing a blind hole, you can set the Bottom option to V-Bottom to create a pointed
hole and then enter the angle value of your choice.
Clicking the Type tab lets you create the following holes:

Assembly Hole
Simple Tapered Counterbored Countersunk Counterdrilled
Make sure the option Simple is set.
Clicking the Thread Definition tab lets you access to the options defining threads. For more
information about threads and holes, please refer to Part Design User's Guide.
The hole is created on Part 5 and Purple Part. Conversely, CRIC_FRAME is intact.
A new entity 'Assembly features' appears in the specification tree. It contains the assembly hole
referred to as 'Assembly Hole.1" and the affected parts.
Moreover, this feature has generated a hole in each part. An arrow symbol identifies these holes
in the tree, meaning that a link exists between Assembly Hole.1and them.
Editing an Assembly Hole

Assembly Hole
To edit an assembly hole, double-click 'Assembly Hole.X' entity then you can either:
modify the list of affected parts
edit the hole
If you need to cut the link between a generated hole and Assembly Hole.1, just use the Isolate
contextual command. You will then obtain a 'traditional' hole as if you had designed it in Part
Design and you will be able to edit it in Part Design.
Reusing Part Design Holes
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly holes from existing Part Design holes, or
more precisely by reusing the specifications you entered for designing Part Design holes. To do so,
just proceed as follows:
Click the Hole icon .

1.
2. Select the Part Design hole of interest.
3. Both the Hole Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes display. You then just
need to specify the parts to pierce.
The assembly hole inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part Design Hole Definition dialog
box. You can edit these specifications at any time. Editing an Assembly feature created in this way
does not affect the specifications used for the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Holes
The application also lets you reuse Assembly Holes' specifications to accelerate the design process.
In this case, you just need to select the existing assembly hole, click the Assembly hole icon and
then select a face. Only the Assembly Features Definition dialog box appears to let you determine
the parts to pierce.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Using Hole Series
Using Hole Series

The new concept of "hole series" lets you create different holes cutting the individual
parts of an assembly. The "series" option, available in the Hole command lets you
determine the parts that are to be cut or not, and the hole types to define for these parts.
In this task, you will create one assembly hole feature composed of three different holes
cutting four parts.
Open the AssemblyHole2.CATProduct document.
2. Select the upper purple face to define the location of the hole:
The Hole Definition and Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes appear.
The Assembly Features Definition dialog box displays the names as well as the paths of
the parts that may be affected by the hole creation. For more details, refer to the task
"Assembly Hole".
3. Click the button to move all parts to the list 'Affected parts'.
4. To define the hole cutting the assembly, set these parameters: " Up to Last", 10 mm as
the diameter value, "Counterbored", 18 mm as the diameter option.
The application previews the counterbored hole.
Creating Series
A hole series gathers one or more assembly parts that must be cut by a hole different
from the hole previously defined.
5. Click the button "Add Series".
A new tab "Series 1" displays, containing all parts selected in the "affected parts" field
of the Default tab.

Using Hole Series
6. To identify the parts you wish to include in Series 1, multi-select Part5 and Part6 then
click the Select button.
The mention "Yes" now displayed in the Selected field, confirms that Series 1 includes
these parts that will be cut by a hole which parameters are still to be defined.
Series 1 then includes two parts through which the hole will pass. On the contrary,
Part7 and Purple part are excluded from the series as indicated by the mention "No".

Using Hole Series
7.
To define the hole you need for Series 1, enter these parameters: "Up to Last", 12 mm
as diameter value and "Simple" in the Hole Definition dialog box.
The application previews this hole type on

the purple face.
8. Click the button "Add Series" again to create another series.
A new tab "Series 2" displays, containing all parts selected in the "affected parts" field
of the Default tab..
9. Select Part 7 then click the Select button to set this part as the only part composing
the series.
The mention "Yes" confirms that this part will be cut by a new hole which parameters
are still to be defined.
Another way of selecting the part is to double-click its name.
10. To define the hole you need for Series 2, enter these parameters: "Blind", 10 mm as
diameter value, 160mm as depth value, "V-Bottom", "Simple", "Threaded" and the
thread values of your choice in the Hole Definition dialog box.
The application previews this hole type on

the purple face.

Using Hole Series
Note that the Default button removes one part from a series.
The hole defined through three series cuts

the assembly.
In the specification tree, the Assembly Hole

node displays the different parts cut by the
Hole feature. Note that the icon identifying
the threaded hole differs from the other
icons.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Assembly Pocket
Assembly Pocket
Creating a pocket consists in extruding a profile and removing the material resulting from the
extrusion. You could actually create pockets for each part in the Part Design workbench, but the
Assembly Pocket command available in Assembly Design workbench creates pockets more rapidly and
more productively: the command creates a pocket on several parts in only one interaction.
This task shows you how to create a pocket by removing material from two parts.
Open the AssemblyHole.CATProduct document and sketch a rectangle on the purple face.
2.
Select the profile you created.
You can use profiles sketched in the Sketcher workbench, sub-elements of sketches or planar
geometrical elements created in the Generative Shape Design workbench.
The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts that may be
affected by the extrusion.
The assembly feature's name now appears in the top left corner of the dialog box. If desired, you
can edit this name.

Assembly Pocket
3. The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use. As you wish to
create a pocket between Part5 and Purple Part, move them to the list 'Affected parts". To do so,
click the button. Alternatively, double-click each part.
The other three buttons lets you move the names of the parts from one list to another too:
moves the selected part to the list 'Affected parts'
4. Check the option Highlight Impacted Parts to clearly identify the affected parts.
The Pocket Definition dialog box has appeared, indicating the sketch used for extrusion.

Assembly Pocket
5. You can define a specific depth for your pocket (using the Dimension and Depth entry fields) or set
one of these options to define the pocket type:
up to last
up to plane
up to surface
If you wish to use the Up to plane or Up to surface option, you can then define an offset between
the limit plane (or surface) and the bottom of the pocket.
The other options available are:

Mirrored extent: mirrors the extrusion using the specifications defined for Limit 1.
Reverse Direction: inverts the extrusion direction.
Additional options appear if you click the More button.

You can define 'Limit2' as the second limit by using the same options as for Limit 1
(Dimension, Up to last, up to plane, up to surface).
You can choose between a direction normal to the sketch or define a new direction by
selecting geometry.
6.
For the purposes of our scenario, enter 110mm as the depth value and click OK to confirm. For
more information about pockets, please refer to Part Design User's Guide.
The pocket is created on both parts.

Assembly Pocket
A new entity 'Assembly features' appears in the specification tree. It contains the assembly pocket
referred to as 'Assembly Pocket.1" and the affected parts.
Moreover, this feature has generated a pocket in each part. An arrow symbol identifies these
pockets
in the tree, meaning that a link exists between Assembly Pocket.1and them.

Assembly Pocket
Editing an Assembly Pocket
To edit an assembly pocket, double-click 'Assembly Pocket.X' entity then you can either:
modify the list of affected parts
edit the pocket
If you need to cut the link between a generated pocket and Assembly Pocket.1, just use the Isolate
contextual command. You will then obtain a 'traditional' pocket as if you had designed it in Part
Design and you will be able to edit it in Part Design.
Reusing Part Design Pockets

Assembly Pocket
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly pockets from existing Part Design pockets,
or more precisely by reusing the specifications you entered for designing Part Design pockets. To do
so, just proceed as follows:
Click the Pocket icon .

1.
2. Select the Part Design pocket of interest.
3. Both the Pocket Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes display. You then just
need to specify the parts to extrude.
The assembly pocket inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part Design Pocket Definition
dialog box. You can edit these specifications at any time. Editing an Assembly feature created in
this way does not affect the specifications used for the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Pockets
The application also lets you reuse Assembly Pockets' specifications to accelerate the design process.
In this case, you just need to select the existing assembly pocket, click the Assembly pocket icon and
then select a face. Only the Assembly Features Definition dialog box appears to let you determine the
parts to pierce.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Assembly Remove
Assembly Remove
This task shows you how to remove a body from two parts.
Open the AssemblyRemove_Add.CATProduct document.
1. Click the Remove icon .
2. Select Body.1 from MoldedPart as the body to be removed.
3. The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts
that may be affected by the removal.

Assembly Remove
The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use.
For the purposes of our scenario, you are going to remove material from Part2
and Part3.
Move these parts to the list 'Affected parts". To do so, select Part2 and click the
button. Repeat the operation for Part3. Alternatively, double-click each part.
The other three buttons lets you move the names of the parts from one list to
another too:

Assembly Remove
The Remove dialog box that has

appeared, indicates the part to be
removed.
4. Check the option Highlight affected parts to clearly identify the parts affected by
the operation.
Material is removed from Part 2 and Part3.
To better visualize the result, put Part 5 and Body.5 in no show mode. You can see
6.
the portion of material that has been removed.

Assembly Remove
assembly removal referred to as 'Assembly Remove.1" and the name of affected
parts.
Moreover, this feature has generated a remove feature in Part2 and a remove
feature in Part 3. An arrow symbol identifies these removals in the tree,

meaning that a link exists between Assembly Remove.1and them.

Assembly Remove
Editing an Assembly Remove
To edit an assembly remove operation, double-click 'Assembly Remove.X' entity.

You can then modify the list of the parts possibly affected by the removal.
Reusing Part Design Remove Features
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly Remove Features from
existing Part Design Remove features, or more precisely by reusing the
specifications you entered for designing Part Design remove features. To do so,
just proceed as follows:
Click the Remove icon .
1.
2. Select the Part Design Remove feature of interest.
3. Both the Remove Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes
display. You then just need to specify the parts of interest.
The assembly remove feature inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part
Design Remove Definition dialog box. You can edit these specifications at any
time. Editing an Assembly feature created in this way does not affect the
specifications used for the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Remove Features

Assembly Remove
The application also lets you reuse Assembly Remove Features' specifications to
accelerate the design process. In this case, you just need to select the existing
assembly remove feature, click the Assembly remove icon and then select a face.
Only the Assembly Features Definition dialog box appears to let you determine the
parts of interest.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Assembly Add
Assembly Add
This task shows you how to add several parts belonging to a same product.
Open the AssemblyRemove_Add.CATProduct document, perform the Asssembly

Remove as explained in the documentation and put Part5 and Body.5 in show mode.
1. Click the Add icon .
2. Select Body.5 as the body to be added.
The dialog box that appears displays the names as well as the paths of the parts
that may be affected by the add operation.

Assembly Add
3. The frame 'Affected parts' is exclusively reserved for the parts you wish to use. For
the purposes of our scenario, you are going to add Body.5 to Part5.
Move Part5 to the list 'Affected parts". To do so, select Part5 and click the
button.
The other three buttons lets you move the names of the parts from one list to
another too:
The Add dialog box that has appeared,

indicates the part to be added.

Assembly Add
4. Check the option Highlight Impacted Parts to clearly identify the parts affected by
the operation.
To better visualize the result, put Part2 and Part3 in no show mode. You can see
6.
the portion of material that has been removed.
assembly removal referred to as 'Assembly Add.1" and the name of affected parts.
Moreover, this feature has generated a remove feature in Part5. An arrow symbol
identifies this addition in the tree, meaning that a link exists between
Assembly Add.1and this remove feature.

Assembly Add
Editing an Assembly Add

To edit an assembly add operation, double-click 'Assembly Add.X' entity. You can
then modify the list of the parts possibly affected by the addition.
Reusing Part Design Add Features

Assembly Add
To increase your productivity, you can create Assembly Add Features from existing
Part Design Add features, or more precisely by reusing the specifications you
entered for designing Part Design Add features. To do so, just proceed as follows:
Click the Add icon .

1.
2. Select the Part Design add feature of interest.
3. Both the Add Definition and the Assembly Features Definition dialog boxes display.
You then just need to specify the parts of interest.
The assembly add feature inherits the specifications as displayed in the Part
Design add Definition dialog box. You can edit these specifications at any time.
Editing an Assembly feature created in this way does not affect the specifications
used for the Part Design feature.
Reusing Assembly Design Add Features

The application also lets you reuse Assembly Add Features' specifications to
accelerate the design process. In this case, you just need to select the existing
assembly add feature, click the Assembly add icon and then select a face. Only the
Assembly Features Definition dialog box appears to let you determine the parts of
interest.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Assembly Symmetry
Assembly Symmetry
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugasm_C2/cfyugasmut0100.htm10/19/2004 8:58:03 AM
Performing a Symmetry on a Component

This task teaches you how to obtain new parts, products or instances by means of symmetry
operations.
The Symmetry command also lets you obtain new instances by translation as explained at the
end of the task.
If you do not have a Part Design license (PD1 or GSD), the options Keep link in position and
Keep link with geometry will be grayed out in the Assembly Wizard dialog box.
If you do not have an Assembly Design license (ASD), Assembly features will not appear in the
Specification Tree.
Open the Symmetry1.CATProduct document.
1.
Click the Symmetry icon .
The Assembly Symmetry Wizard
dialog box displays, prompting
you to select the reference plane.
2. Select the element used as the reference of the symmetry. This element can be a plane or
any planar face that the system recognizes as a plane. select Plane.1.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugasm_C2/cfyugasmut0101.htm (1 of 12)10/19/2004 8:58:17 AM

Components chosen for duplication
The component you select for duplication must be the child of the active product.
Example 1: the element to duplicate is not a symmetrical element
In this case, the symmetrical element will be a new component
3. Select NewDoor (NewDoor.1) as the product to be duplicated.
NewDoor (NewDoor.1) is highlighted and the symmetry is previewed.
The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box appears. It displays the list of all elements
that will be duplicated, that is all components composing NewDoor product: Door.1 and
Pane.1.
The three icons to the left of the window represent symmetries as well as the creation of
new components.

The option "Rotation, same instance" moves the selected geometry symmetrically in
relation to a plane. It does not create any new geometry. In short, the Bill of Material is
not affected by the resulting geometry. For an example, please refer to Rotating a
Component by Using the Symmetry Command.
Notes
If you wish to preview the symmetry of the door only, select Symmetry of Door
(Door.1). Likewise, if you prefer to preview the symmetry of the pane, simply select
Symmetry of Pane (Pane.1).
Instead of new components, you can also create new instances for Symmetry of
Door (Door.1) or Symmetry of Pane (Pane.1). To do so, select them and check the
option "Rotation (new instance)". For more about this option, refer to Example 2.
If the product to duplicate includes a part composed of several bodies, only the part
body of this part is taken into account by the Symmetry command.
4. Click Finish to confirm the operation.
A window appears, displaying results:

5. Click Close. You obtain a second door:
The new component "Symmetry of NewDoor (Symmetry of Door.1)" is displayed as well

as the parts it contains (Symmetry of Door and Symmetry of Pane).
A new entity 'Assembly features' also appears in the specification tree. It contains the
symmetry referred to as 'Assembly Symmetry.1" which in turn contains the symmetry
plane and the affected component.
Example 2: the element to duplicate is a symmetrical element itself
In this case, the symmetrical element will be a new instance.

6. Click the Symmetry icon .
The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box displays.
7. Select the element used as the reference of the symmetry: select Plane.1.
8. Select Wheel (Wheel.2).
The wheel is highlighted and the symmetry is previewed.
The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box appears. It displays the list of all elements
that will be duplicated: all components composing Wheel Assembly product.
9. Select Symmetry of jantes from the list. Only the symmetry of that component is now
previewed in the geometry area.

10. Check the option "Rotation, new

instance".
A new icon reflects this change in

the list.
11. The object is positioned with respect to Plane.1. Now, as it is intrinsically symmetrical, you
need to define which of its three reference planes must be symmetrical with respect to
Plane.1. For example, check XZ plane option.
It is moved accordingly.

12. Check XY plane option.
It is re-positioned.
13. Eventually, the first option is the right one. Check YZ plane. The symmetry is performed.

A window appears, displaying results. Two new components and one instance have been
created.
15. Click Close.
The new component Symmetry of Wheel (Symmetry of Wheel.2.1) is displayed in the

specification tree. It contains one new instance (jantes (symmetry of jantes.1.1) and one
new component (Symmetry of pneu (Symmetry of pneu.1.1).
The entity 'Assembly features' contains the new symmetry referred to as 'Assembly
Symmetry.2" which in turn contains the symmetry plane and the affected component.

Translation
16.
Click the Symmetry icon .
17. Select Plane.1 as the reference to compute the translation.
18. Select the Wheel (Wheel.1) as the component to be translated.
19. Check the option "Translation, new instance".
A new icon reflects this change.
To calculate the translation, the application projects the center of the axis system onto the
plane you selected. The distance between the center and the plane is repeated twice.

A window appears, displaying results:
21. Click Close. The wheel is translated:
Keep Link Options

The option "Keep link in position" guarantees associativity with the initial part or product:
if you edit their positions, symmetrical elements inherit these modifications and are
therefore repositioned accordingly.
The option "Keep link with geometry" guarantees associativity with the geometry of the
initial part: if you edit its shape, symmetrical elements inherit these modifications.
However this type of associativity is restricted to elements made visible via the External
View... command or to Part Bodies. For more information, refer to Generative Shape
Design User's Guide and Part Design User's Guide respectively.
Parts Including Surfacic Elements

If you need to perform a symmetry on a part including surfacic elements, the application
creates the corresponding symmetry provided that an external view of these elements has
been previously specified.
Conversely, if these elements have not been specified as such, the symmetry cannot be
performed.
For more about the External View command, please refer to the Generative Shape Design
User's Guide.
In the Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box, the External View or Part Body options
inform you about the result you will obtain. For example, if the option Part Body is
checked, the Symmetry command will affect the Part Body, not the surfacic elements.
New Components or New Instances?

If you compare the symmetry obtained by using the "Mirror, new component" option...
... to the symmetry obtained first using the "Mirror, new component" option, then the
"Rotation, new instance" option, then reusing "Mirror, new component", both results are
different as indicated by the icons:

The behavior is the following: after changing the symmetry type, that is "Rotation, new
instance", to reuse the "Mirror, new component" option, the children of the product to be
mirrored remain as new instances whereas the product is assigned the "new component"
definition.
What you need to do
To make sure that you obtain the same results for both operations, you need to use the
Mirror, new component, all children contextual command available in the dialog box
instead of checking "Mirror, new component".
Result:
For more information about the Symmetry command, refer to Modifying a Symmetry.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

This task shows you how to edit a symmetry and what happens when you replace or
delete the original component.
Open the Symmetry1.CATProduct document and perform the steps from 1 to 5 of the
scenario described in Performing a Symmetry.
This scenario assumes that the automatic update mode is on.

1. Double-click Assembly Symmetry.1 in the specification tree.
The Assembly Symmetry Wizard displays. Two new fields are available at the top
right corner of the dialog box.
2.
Enter a new name in the Name field. For example, "New Symmetry".
3. Click the arrow to change the symmetry plane.
The <None> term appears in the field.

4. Select, for example a door's
face as the new symmetry
plane.
The field now contains

"Door.1/Face".

5. Click Finish to confirm and

close the dialog box.
Once updated, the

symmetry looks like this:
Replacing the initial component

6. Select Door (Door.1) and use the Components -> Replace Component...
contextual command.
7. From the cfyug/samples
directory select Door.2.
CATPart as the replacing
component.
The symmetry is no longer

valid. You need to be
redefine it as indicated in the
specification tree.

8. Double-click New Symmetry.

9. Select Door.2 (Door.1) and
check the option "Mirror,
new component".
10. Click Finish to confirm.
The new door is obtained by

symmetry.
Deleting the original component

11. Delete Pane (Pane.1).
Its symmetrical element is deleted too.
The assembly and the specification tree now look like this:


Rotating a Component by Using the Symmetry

Command
This task shows you how to rotate a component by using the new option "Rotation,
same instance".
Notes
this command is the only one you will use to save transformations within the Enovia
database.
The positioning matrix will be saved in the Enovia database.
Open the Symmetry2.CATProduct document.
This scenario assumes that the automatic update mode is on.

1.
Click the Symmetry icon to move LeftDoor.
The Assembly Symmetry Wizard dialog box displays, prompting you to select the
mirror plane.
2. Select the element used as the
reference of the symmetry: select
Plane.1. This plane is used to position
the assembly.
Note that the local axes of the two

products are superimposed, in our
example, to make sure that the final
products will be in front of each other.
3. Select LeftDoor (LeftDoor.1) as the component to be moved.
LeftDoor (LeftDoor.1) is highlighted and the symmetry is previewed.

4. Check the option "Rotation, same

instance" and "XZ plane". This plane is
specific to LeftDoor and is used to
define the axis for the rotation.
The axis is the intersection between this

plane and the first plane you selected
(see step1).
When using the "Rotation, same instance" option, the associativity options "Keep
link in position " and "Keep link with geometry" are not available. For more
information, see Performing a Symmetry.
The Assembly Symmetry Result window appears, indicating that no component,

nor any instance have been created.
6. Click Close. LeftDoor (LeftDoor.1) has been moved in relation to the selected
plane. No geometry has been created so that the bill of material remains
unchanged.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

In the product structure from earlier versions you could only move rigid components in the parent
assembly. Now, in addition to this behavior, you can dissociate the mechanical structure of an
assembly from the product structure, and this within the same CATProduct document. As a
consequence, you can move the components of a sub-assembly in the parent assembly.
In a first time, this task recalls the behavior of rigid assemblies, then illustrates how to make sub-
assemblies flexible and how constraints defined in the reference document affect them. Eventually
you learn how to analyze the mechanical definition of an assembly whenever this assembly includes
flexible sub-assemblies (and components attached together).
Open the Articulation.CATProduct and chain.CATProduct documents.
1. The product "Articulation" includes one CATProduct and two CATPart documents as follows:
2. Drag and drop the compass onto link (link.1), then select link (link.1) and drag it. The whole
chain -and not link.1 only- is moved.

3. Undo this action to return to the initial state.

4. To make chain (chain.1) flexible, right-click it and select the chain.1 object -> Flexible/Rigid Sub-
Assembly contextual command. Alternatively, click the Flexible Sub-Assembly icon .
You can notice that the little wheel to the left corner of the chain icon has turned purple. This
identifies a flexible sub-assembly.
5. You can now move link (link.1) independently from link (link.2). For example drag and drop the
compass onto link (link.1) and move it in the direction of your choice.

When a sub-assembly is flexible, you can apply updates to it, move it when constrained and set
constraints to it.
6.
Copy and paste chain (chain.1) within Articulation.CATProduct. You can notice that the property
"flexible" is copied too.
7. To make chain (chain.2) rigid, right-click it and select the chain.2 object -> Flexible/Rigid Sub-
Assembly contextual command. A message window appears.
8. Drag and drop chain (chain.2) to clearly see both instances of chain.CATProduct.

9. In chain.CATProduct, move link (link.1) using the compass.
You can notice that because chain (chain.2) is rigid, it inherits the new position of the original
chain.CATProduct. Conversely, chain (chain.1) remains unchanged.
What you need to keep in mind is that rigid sub-assemblies are always synchronous with the
original product, whatever mechanical modification you perform.
Flexible sub-assemblies can be moved individually, without considering the position in the
original product.

Since CATIA Version Release 7, you can edit the constraints defined for flexible sub-assemblies.
The changes made to these constraints do not affect the constraints defined for the original
product contained in the reference document.
You can edit the following attributes:

values
orientation
driving/driven properties
10.Set an angular constraint between Link 1 and Link 2 in chain.CATProduct. For example, set 80 as
the angle value.
You can notice that both instances, chain (chain.2) and chain (chain.1) inherit this constraint.
11.Edit the value of the angle constraint for chain (chain.1). Enter 100 for example. This new value
is specific to chain (chain.1). Because chain (chain.1) is a flexible sub-assembly, this value can
no longer be affected by changes to the value set in the reference document.

12.Edit the value of the angle constraint set in chain.CATProduct. For example, enter 50 as the new
value: because chain (chain.2) is a rigid sub-assembly, and as the constraint value for chain
(chain.1) has been already redefined, chain (chain.2) is the only sub-assembly to inherit this new
value.
Mechanical Structure
13.Select the Analyze -> Mechanical Structure... command to display the mechanical structure of
Articulation.CATProduct. This mechanical structure looks different from the product structure.
In Mechanical Structure Tree dialog box, chain.2 is displayed because it is a rigid sub-assembly.
Conversely, chain.1 is not displayed since it is a flexible sub-assembly.

This display is merely informative. Note that you can use the Reframe graph contextual
command and the zoom capability to improve the visualization, but also the Print whole
contextual command to obtain a paper document. For information on printing, please refer to
Printing Documents.
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Refer to the Quick Reference topic for a comprehensive list of interactions to be

carried out on part and assembly templates. Refer to To know more about Part
and Assembly Templates to know more about these features.
Creates a Document Template: Select the Insert -> Document Template

Creation ... command, select the elements making up the document
template from the specification tree, define a name for the document
template and its reference elements then choose an icon for identifying it.

Document Templates: Useful Tips
To Know More About Part And Assembly Templates
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugpkt_C2/cfyugdoctemplate0000.htm10/19/2004 8:59:09 AM
Introducing the Document Template

Definition Window
The Document Template Definition window can be accessed by selecting the Insert-
>Document Template Creation... command from the following workbenches:
● Product Structure
● Part Design
● Assembly Design
● Generative Shape Design
● Wireframe and Surface Design
The user can access the Product Knowledge Template workbench from the Part Design
and the Product Structure workbenches.
The Documents tab

The Documents tab shows the complete path and Action of the files
referenced in the Template. The Action status can be either:
● Same Document or
● New Document.
If the document is seen as New Document, it is then duplicated and

does not have any link with the original component (equivalent of the
New from... command.)
If the document is seen as Same Document, a link is maintained with

the original file.
The button enables you to

modify the Action of the components.
The buttons of the External documents sections enable

you to select external documents and insert them into the template.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugpkt_C2/cfyugattemplate0046.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 8:59:19 AM

The Inputs tab

The Inputs tab enables you to define the reference elements making
up the Template by selecting them in the geometry or in the
specification tree.
The Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled

option enables users to determine if the template can be
instantiated even if not all inputs are valuated. If all inputs are
not valuated, old inputs will be kept and isolated at instantiation.
This option can be useful if there is more than one way to position
the template in context, if you want all these combinations to be
available but you want to use only one of them at the same time.
To see an example, see Creating a Part Template and
lnstantiating a Part Template.
For a clearer definition, you can select these items in the viewer and
enter a new name in the Role field.
The Role field enables you to select one of the items displayed in the
window and to rename it. It is used at instantiation through the Use
identical name button in the Insert object panel.
The Type column indicates if the input is manual or automatic. The

inputs are considered as
● Manual if they are added manually
● Automatic if they are external references that point an object
defined outside the template.
The Published Parameters tab

The Published Parameters tab enables you to define which parameter

value used in the Template you will be able to modify when instantiating
it.
The Edit List... button enables you to access the list of parameters, and
to select those you want to publish. These parameters are displayed in
the Part Numbers viewer.
The Auto modify part numbers with suffix check box, if checked,
automatically modifies the part numbers at instantiation if the part
numbers already exist.
● Note that if the user wants to manage the way part numbers
are modified at instantiation, he just needs to uncheck this
option and click, at instantiation, the Parameters button in the
Insert Object dialog box. This way he can access the part
numbers that he wants to modify.
● The unicity of part numbers is now ensured when

instantiating document templates into different documents or
when the document template is used by different users. When
the part numbers renaming mode is set to automatic, a suffix
parameter is automatically published by the document
template. At instantiation, after valuating the inputs of the
document template, suffixes can be changed by clicking the
Parameters button in the Insert Object window. Note that it is
not possible to "unpublish" the suffix or to change its role.
The Icon tab

The Icon tab enables you to modify the icon identifying the Template in
the specifications tree. A subset of icons is available when clicking the
Icon choice button.
Clicking ... displays the Icon Browser, showing all icons loaded in your
CATIA session.
The Grab screen button enables you to capture an image of the

template to be stored along with its definition.
The Remove preview button enables you to remove the image if you
do not need it.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

This scenario explains how to create a part template containing a keypad that will be
instantiated into a CATProduct document. In this scenario, the user:
● Creates 2 document templates. When creating the first document template, he does not
check the Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled option (Steps 1 to 4).
When creating the second document template, he checks the Accept instantiation even
if not all inputs are filled option (Steps 5 to 8). To know more about this option, see
Introducing the Document Template Definition Window.
● Saves both document templates in a catalog.
1. Open the PktMobilePhoneKeypad.

CATPart file. The following image
displays.
2. From the Insert menu, select the Document Template Creation ... command (in the
Part Design workbench) or, if in the Product Knowledge Template workbench, click the
Create a Document Template icon ( ). The Document Template Definition

window displays.
3. In the Document Template Definition window, click the Inputs tab to select the
inputs. To do so, proceed as follows:

❍ In the geometry, select the following features:
- Curve.8 - Arrow_up_Sketch.8
- Sharp_Sketch.3 - Cancel_Sketch.9
- Arrow_down_Sketch.6 - Surface.3
- Ok_Sketch.7
❍ In the Inputs tab, select the Curve.8 feature and assign it a role in the Role field.
Repeat the same operation for the features you selected. The final Inputs tab
should look like the picture below.
4. Click the Published Parameters tab to publish parameters. To do so, proceed as

follows:
❍ Click the
button. The Select
parameters to insert
window displays.
❍ Use the arrow to select

the Button_Offset
and the
Button_top_angle
parameters in the
Parameters to
publish column.

❍ Click OK twice. The

Document template is
added to the
KnowledgeTemplates
node.
❍ Right-click DocumentTemplate.1 and select the Properties command to rename

the document template.
❍ In the Feature Name field, enter Keypad1. Click OK to validate.
5. From the Insert menu, select the Document Template Creation ... command (in the
Part Design workbench) or, if in the Product Knowledge Template workbench, click the
Create a Document Template icon ( ). The Document Template Definition

window displays.
6. In the Document Template Definition window, click the Inputs tab and select the
following inputs in the specification tree:
❍ Curve.8 ❍ Arrow_up_Sketch.8
❍ ❍ Cancel_Sketch.9
❍ Sharp_Sketch.3 ❍ Surface.3
❍ Arrow_down_Sketch.6
❍ Ok_Sketch.7
7. Check the Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled check box.
8. Click the Published Parameters tab to publish parameters. To do so, proceed as
follows:
❍ Click the
button. The Select
parameters to insert
window displays. In the
Parameters to
publish column, click
the Button_Offset
and the
Button_top_angle
parameters and use
the arrow to select
them.

❍ Click OK twice. The Document template is added to the KnowledgeTemplates

node.
❍ Right-click DocumentTemplate.2 and select the Properties command to

rename the document template.
❍ In the Feature Name field, enter Keypad2. Click OK to validate.
❍ Save your file.
9. Store the document template in a catalog. To do so, proceed as follows:
❍ If not already in the Product Knowledge Template workbench, from the

Start->Knowledgeware menu, access the Product Knowledge Template
workbench.
❍ Click the Save in catalog icon ( ). The Catalog save dialog box displays.
❍ Click OK to create a new catalog or the ... button to change the name of the
catalog. The catalog is created.
❍ Click here to display the result catalog file. Click here to display the result .
CATPart file.
10. Close your file and proceed to the next task: lnstantiating a Part Template.
Refer to the Quick Reference topic for a comprehensive list of the interactions that can be
carried on Document Templates.

lnstantiating a Part Template
This scenario explains how to instantiate a template into a CATProduct file. It is

divided into 2 different parts:
● The user instantiates Keypad1, a document template saved in the
PktKeypadscatalog.catalog.
● The user instantiates Keypad2, a document template saved in the
PktKeypadscatalog.catalog.
To carry out this scenario, you need the following files:

● PktMobilePhoneSupport.CATProduct
● PktKeypadscatalog.catalog: This catalog contains 2 document templates:
Keypad1 and Keypad2. When creating Keypad1, the Accept instantiation even
if not all inputs are filled option was unchecked. When creating Keypad2, the
Accept instantiation even if not all inputs are filled option was checked.
Instantiating Keypad1
1. Open the PktMobilePhoneSupport.CATProduct file.
2. Click the Open Catalog icon ( )and

select the PktKeypadscatalog.catalog
that you created in the Creating a Part
Template topic. The Catalog Browser
opens.
3. Double-click DocumentTemplate, 7
inputs and Keypad1. The Insert Object
window opens. (Click the graphic
opposite to enlarge it).
To know more about the Insert Object

dialog box, click here.

4. Value the Inputs by selecting the publications located below the Industrial
Design node in the specification tree or click the Use Identical Name
button in the Insert Object window.
5. Make the appropriate selections in the Replace Viewer window (see

picture below) and click OK when done.

6. Click OK in the Check warning box, then Close. The keypad is instantiated
(see picture below.) Click here to see the resulting CATProduct file.
7. Close your file.

Instantiating Keypad2
1. Open the PktMobilePhoneSupport.CATProduct file.

2. Click the Open Catalog icon and select the PktKeypadscatalog.catalog that
you created in the Creating a Part Template topic. The Catalog Browser
opens.
3. Double-click Document Template, 7 inputs and Keypad2. The Insert Object
window opens.
4. Click OK in the Insert Object window. The keypad is instantiated. Note that
you do not have to value the inputs since the Accept instantiation even if
not all inputs are filled option was checked when creating the Keypad2
part template.

Refer to the Quick Reference topic for a comprehensive list of the interactions that
can be carried on Part Templates.

Adding an External Document to a Document

Template
This task shows how to insert a drawing into a part template and how it is updated at
instantiation. The scenario is divided into the following steps:
● Creating a drawing from an existing part
● Creating the part template
● Instantiating the part template and updates the generated drawing.
Note that the document(s) that can be added to part and assembly templates must
belong to one of the following types:
● .CATDrawing
● .CATProcess
● .CATAnalysis
Prior to carrying out this scenario, make sure that the Keep link with selected
object is checked (Tools->Options...->Infrastructure->Part Infrastructure-
>General).
1. Open the PktPadtoInstantiate.CATPart file. The following image displays.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugpkt_C2/cfyugdoctemplate0004.htm (1 of 6)10/19/2004 9:00:23 AM

2. From the Start->Mechanical Design menu, access the Drafting workbench.

The New Drawing Creation Window displays. Click OK to select the default
layout.
3. The drawing corresponding to the pad is generated.
4. Save your drawing and close the file. Click here to see the generated drawing.
5. Go back to the PktPadtoInstantiate.CATPart file to create a part template. To
do so, proceed as follows:
❍ Select the Insert->Document Template Creation ... command. The

Document Template Definition window displays.
❍ Click the Add... button in the External documents field and select the .
CATDrawing file you have just created in the File Selection window (or
use the PktPadDrawing.CATDrawing). Click Open.
❍ Click the Inputs tab and select Sketch.1 and Sketch.2 in the geometry
or in the specification tree.

❍ Click the Published Parameters tab and click the Edit List... button.
The Select parameters to insert window displays. Select the following
parameters using the arrow button:
❍ PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length
❍ PartBody\Pad.2\FirstLimit\Length
❍ In the Published Parameters tab, select PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit

\Length and rename it to Pad_Width in the Name: field, then select
PartBody\Pad.2\FirstLimit\Length and rename it to Pad_Length.
❍ Click OK to validate. Save your file and close it.
6. Open the PktProduct.CATProduct file.

7. From the Start->Knowledgeware menu, access the Product Knowledge
Template workbench (if need be).
8. Click the Instantiate an element stored in a document icon ( ) and

select the PktPadtoInstantiate_result.CATPart containing the document
template. Click Open. The Insert Object dialog box displays.
9. Click the Use identical name button in the Insert Object dialog box and
make the appropriate selection in the Replace Viewer window (see graphic
below). Click Close when done.
10. Select Sketch.2 in the geometry or in the specification tree.

11. Click the Parameters button and enter 10mm in the Pad_Width field and 90
in the Pad_Length field.

12. Click Close and OK to validate. A message is fired indicating that the external
document was regenerated. Click OK. The document template was
instantiated. (see picture below).

13. From the Window menu, access the generated .CATDrawing file. Right-click
CATDrawing2 in the left part of the window and select the Update Selection
command. The drawing is updated and matches the new product.

Refer to the Quick Reference topic for a comprehensive list of the interactions that
can be carried out on document templates.

It is possible for the user to define document templates based on contextual products and
parts or on isolated parts and products. It is highly recommended to work with isolated
documents: not so many documents will be instantiated (when working with contextual
products, the context products are needed for instantiation).
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugpkt_C2/cfyugdoctemplate0005.htm10/19/2004 9:00:30 AM
Part and Assembly Templates are templates that work at the part or at the assembly level.
The Document Template Definition window can be accessed by selecting the Insert-
>Document Template Creation... command from the following workbenches:
● Part Design
● Generative Shape Design
● Wireframe and Surface Design
● Assembly Design
● Product Structure
Working with Part Templates
A part created in Catia may contain user parameters and geometry data. It is not a
contextual part. The user can create a part template that references that part. This template
is a feature that is created in the CATPart document itself (very similar to the PowerCopy
definition) and stored in a catalog. Several part templates may be defined in the same
CATPart document.
To create a part template, the user:

● selects parameters and geometry data that will be considered as the template inputs (he
can assign a role and a comment to each input).
● publishes some internal parameters (name and comment). The part number is
automatically published.
● gives a name, comment, URL, icon to this template.
In product structure context, the part is inserted as a component of the current product.
Working with Assembly Templates
A user creates an assembly interactively. Then, he wants to create an assembly template

that references the root product of this assembly.
To create an assembly template, the user:

● selects parameters and geometry data that will be considered as the template inputs (he
can assign a name to each input).
● publishes some internal parameters (name and comment).
● chooses if:
- the part numbers of replicated components are automatically published.

- for each part or each sub-assembly, this sub-component will be replicated at
instantiation or if only a reference to this sub-component will be created (a
standard component).
- he wants to select external documents (Drawings / Analysis) that references
elements of the product structure. Those elements will be replicated at
instantiation.
● assigns a name, comment, URL, icon to this template.
The template definition is a feature located in the CATProduct document itself.

Several assembly templates may be defined in the same CATProduct document.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Scenes
Scenes
Create scenes: Click the Create Scene icon then OK in the Edit Scene dialog box.
Set scene properties then click the Exit from Scene icon to return to the initial
document window.
Reset and Check Component Positioning: Double-click the scene representation

then select Tools ->Checking Positioning... to highlight items moved. Click the
Reset Selected Products icon and exit the scene.
Using the Explode command in a scene: Once in the scene of interest, select your
product, click the Explode icon and use the options of the Explode dialog box as
described in Exploding a Constrained Assembly.
Save viewpoints : Click the Create Scene icon then OK. Modify viewpoints then
click the Save viewpoints icon. Click the Exit from Scene icon to return to the
initial document window.
Start Publish: Click this icon, save the report then click the Save button.
Editing a Scene Macro : You create a scene through a macro and edit specific
parameters.
About Persistency in Scenes: Deactivate a node in an existing scene. Exit scene

the node in the product is still activated and deactivated in the scene.
Apply a Scene to an Assembly:Select Scene.1object ->Apply scene on

Assembly, in the Assembly dialog box click All if you want all your modifications
to be taken into account and applied on the assembly .
[ Back ]
Points
Using Reset Selected Products

This task shows you how to use the Reset Selected Products command.
Please refer to Creating Scenes.
Insert the following sample model files in the samples folder:
ATOMIZER
BODY1
BODY2
LOCK
REGULATOR
TRIGGER
VALVE
REGULATION_COMMAND
You created Scene.1.

1. Double-click the scene representation to enter
the scene.
In this scene you moved various components using the 3D compass capability. Please refer to
Moving Objects Using the 3D compass in the Infrastructure User's Guide
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugscene03.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 9:01:08 AM

Points
2. Select Tools->Check Positioning... from the menu bar to find out the items you moved.
The moved items are highlighted in the specification tree.
3. Click the Reset Selected Products icon and exit the scene.
The items are repositioned in the scene as they were in the initial product.

Points


This task shows you how to save viewpoints in a scene. It can be very useful to save
specific viewpoints in a scene different from the initial product viewpoint.
ATOMIZER
BODY1
BODY2
LOCK
NOZZLE1
NOZZLE2
REGULATOR
TRIGGER
VALVE
REGULATION_COMMAND
1. Click the Create Scene icon .
The Edit Scene dialog box and a

scene representation in the document
window are displayed:
2. Click Ok to end the scene creation.
You are now in a scene window:
1. The background color turns to green.

2. Scene 1 is identified in the specification tree.
3. The default viewpoint is the initial product viewpoint.

3. Modify the viewpoint.
4. Click the Save Viewpoints icon from the DMU Select toolbar.

5. Click the Exit From Scene icon to return to the initial document window.
The initial product viewpoint is displayed.
6. Double-click Scene1 either in the specification tree or in the geometry area to swap to
the scene window.

The viewpoint saved is taken into account in the scene.

If you did not use the save viewpoint command, the default viewpoint is used.

Start Publish
Publishing
A number of tools let you prepare html reports that you can publish on the enterprise
intranet or the Internet for collaborative communication. You can for example take a
snapshot of an assembly, add appropriate comments or annotations and even select parts
to insert as a VRML link.
This task explains how to publish reports. You can access this command only if DMU
products are installed.
Enter the scene of your choice.
1. Click the Start Publish icon in the Scenes toolbar.
The Select Publish File dialog box appears.

2. Identify the path where you want to save the report as well as the report name then
click the Save button
Reports are published in html format. The date created and the person who created the
report are indicated.
The Publishing Tools toolbar appears.
3. Click the Feature Publish icon , then select the feature you want to publish in the
specification tree.
The features you can publish are the following: simulations, interferences, URL.
When done, click the Stop Publish icon in the Publishing Tools toolbar. You can use
other Publishing Tools commands to add a comment or take snapshots for example
4. Click the Snapshot icon to insert a screen capture into your report.
5. Click the Text icon to add a comment:
The Publish Text dialog box appears.

Start Publish
6. Enter your comments, for example "You can also add comments to your report or a
VRML link" then click OK.
7. Select one or more products then click the VRML icon to insert selected
components as a VRML link.
8. When done, click the Stop Publish icon and read the published report.

Start Publish
Clicking the images in the html page enlarges them.


If you perform a task repeatedly, you can take advantage of a macro to automate it.
A macro is a series of functions, written in a scripting language, that you group in a
single command to perform the requested task automatically.
This task will show you how to edit a scene macro created in the DMU Navigator
workbench.
You stored your recorded macros in a text format file. For more detailed information
about macros, read Recording, Running and editing Macros in the Infrastructure
User's Guide
1. You can easily modify the macro instructions specific to DMU Navigator (strings
of characters put in bold).
Here is a scene macro example: (you create a scene through the macro
process)
SCENE MACRO
Language="VBSCRIPT"
'*********************************************************
' Purpose: This macro can be used interactively to create a scene

and move products within.
'
' Returns: None
'*********************************************************
Sub CATMain()
'Deactivate file alert (to avoid interactive message during write

of files if any)
Dim FileAlertSave As Boolean
FileAlertSave = CATIA.DisplayFileAlerts
CATIA.DisplayFileAlerts = False

'Find the root of the CATProduct
Dim RootProduct As AnyObject
Set RootProduct = CATIA.ActiveDocument.Product
'Create the scene
Dim TheSceneWorkbench As Workbench
Set TheSceneWorkbench = CATIA.ActiveDocument.GetWorkbench

( "SceneWorkbench" )
Dim Ascene As Scene
Set Scene = TheSceneWorkbench.WorkScenes.AddNewScene ("Scene1",

RootProduct)
End Sub
EXPLANATIONS
Create the scene launches the scene creation
"Scene1 corresponds to the to be created scene
RootProduct: corresponds to Product1
Please refer to Creating Scenes.


The activation or deactivation of a product is persistent in scene context.
This task will show you how the activation or deactivation is persistent in Scene context.
For this: you are going to deactivate a node in the scene specification tree
ATOMIZER
BODY1
BODY2
LOCK
NOZZLE1
NOZZLE2
REGULATOR
TRIGGER
VALVE
REGULATION_COMMAND
1. Click the Create Scene icon .
The Edit Scene dialog box and a scene representation in the document window are displayed.

3. Right-click REGULATION_COMMAND.1 in the specification tree.
4. Select Representations->Deactivate Node from the contextual menu displayed
5. Click the Exit From Scene icon to swap to the initial window.
The REGULATION_COMMAND.1 representation is activated in the Product1
The scene is updated:
The node REGULATION_COMMAND.1 is deactivated in the scene.

The deactivation is persistent within the scene context.



This task consists in snapping components in scene context.
ATOMIZER
BODY1
BODY2
LOCK
NOZZLE1
NOZZLE2
REGULATOR
TRIGGER
VALVE
REGULATION_COMMAND
1. Make sure you work in Design mode (Select Poduct.1 and use Edit-
>Representations->Design Mode menu)
Click the Create Scene icon .
The Edit Scene dialog box and a scene representation in the document window are
displayed.

3. Right-click VALVE (VALVE.1)in the specification tree.
4. Select Representations->Deactivate Node from the contextual menu displayed.
5. Right-click NOZZLE1 (NOZZLE1.1) in the geometry area and change the color
using the Properties item from the contextual menu displayed.
6. Hide REGULATION_COMMAND (REGULATION_COMMAND.1) using the Hide/show
icon from the View toolbar.

7. Move TRIGGER (TRIGGER.1) using the 3D compass.
8. Click the Exit From Scene icon to swap to the initial window.
9. Right-click Scene.1in the geometry area and select Scene.1object ->Apply

scene on Assembly.
The Apply Scene.1 to Assembly dialog box is displayed.

10. Click All if you want all your modifications to be taken into account and applied on
the assembly.
Note: you can select the required modification by clicking the red symbol (swaps
to green)
11. Click Ok if you are satisfied with your selection

Your assembly reflects the scene created. All your modifications performed
( Graphic Properties, Position, show/Hide..) are taken into account.


The Assembly Design application window looks like this:
Click the sensitive areas to see the related documentation.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugwd0000.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:02:11 AM


Move Toolbar
Constraints Toolbar
Update Toolbar
Annotations Toolbar
Scene Toolbar
Specification Tree
Specification Tree
Symbols Used in the Specification Tree
Product Structure
Symbols Reflecting an Incident in the Geometry
Referenced Geometry Symbols


This section presents the main menu bar available when you run the application and before
creating or opening a document:
File Edit View Insert Tools Analyze Window Help
File
For See
New Creating a New

Assembly
Document
Edit
For See

Component Using Assembly

Constraints Constraints
Properties Modifying the

Properties of a
Constraint
Update Updating
Assembly
Constraints
Move Moving
Components
Component Selecting
Constraints Constraints of
Given
Components
Insert
For See

Creating a
Coincidence... Coincidence
Constraint
Creating a
Contact... Contact
Constraint
Creating an
Offset... Offset
Constraint
Creating an
Angle... Angle
Constraint
Fixing
Fix Together... Components
Together
Fixing a
Fix
Component
Quick Quick
Constraint Constraint
Using a Part
Reuse Pattern...
Design Pattern
Document Working with

Template Interactive
Creation... Templates
Create Scene Scenes
Fast Multi- Fast Multi-

Instantiation Instantiation

Defining a
Define Multi-
Multi-
Instantiation
Instantiation
Views Creating a
Projection
View, Creating
a Section View,
Creating a
Section Cut
Annotations Annotations
Assembly Assembly
Features Features
Tools
For See
Product Managing
Management... Products in an
Assembly
Publication... Managing a
Product
Publication
Using a
Standard Part
Mechanical Contained in a
Standard Parts Parametric
Standard Part
Catalog
Analyze
For See

Analyzing
Update...
Updates
Analyzing
Constraints...
Constraints
Degrees of Analyzing
freedom Degrees of
Freedom
Dependences... Analyzing
Dependences
Mechanical Flexible Sub-

Structure... Assemblies
Computing
Compute
Clash between
Clash...
Components
Measure
Minimum
Measure Item...
Distances and
Angles
Measure Measure
Between... Elements
Measure
Measure Inertia
Inertia...
Detecting
Clash...
Interferences
Sectioning... Sectioning
Distance and
Distance
Band Analysis...
[ Next ]

The following commands are documented in Product Structure User's Guide.
See Inserting a New Component
See Inserting a New Product
See Inserting a New Part
See Inserting Existing Components
See Replacing Components
See Reordering the Tree
See Generating Numbers
See Product Initialization
See Managing Representations
The commands below are documented in this user's guide.
See Fast Multi-Instantiation
See Defining a Multi-Instantiation
See Inserting an Existing Component with Positioning
[ Back ] [ Next ]
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugwd1100.htm10/19/2004 9:02:32 AM
Move Toolbar
Move Toolbar
See Translating or Rotating Components (P1 configuration)
See Manipulating Components
See Snapping Components
See Smart Move
See Exploding a Constrained Assembly
See Stop manipulation on Clash
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Constraints Toolbar
Constraints Toolbar
See Creating a Coincidence Constraint
See Creating a Contact Constraint
See Creating an Offset Constraint
See Creating an Angle Constraint
See Fixing a Component
See Fixing Components Together
See Using the Quick Constraint Command
See Flexible Sub-Assemblies
See Changing Constraints
See Using a Part Design Pattern
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Update Toolbar
Update Toolbar
See Updating an Assembly
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Constraint Creation Mode Toolbar
See Setting a Constraint Creation Mode
[ Back ] [ Next ]
See Assembly Split
See Assembly Hole and Using Hole Series
See Assembly Pocket
See Assembly Add
See Assembly Remove
See Performing a Symmetry on a Component
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Annotations Toolbar
Annotations Toolbar
See Creating Weld Features
See Creating Annotations
See Creating Flag Notes
[ Back ] [ Next ]
See Detecting Interferences
See Sectioning
See Measuring Minimum Distances
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Scene Toolbar
Scenes Toolbars
See Creating Scenes
See CATIA- Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5
See Using the Explode command in a scene
See Publishing (the command is available if DMU products are installed)
See CATIA- Infrastructure User's Guide Version 5
See Creating Scenes
See Reset & Check Component Positioning
See Saving Viewpoints in a scene
Specification Tree
Product Structure Symbols
Product Structure
Product1 A product. For more information, refer to Insert a New Product in

CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.
Product2 A component or sub-product. For more information, refer to Insert a

New Component in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.
The purple little wheel to the left corner of the CATProduct icon and
the light bar identify a flexible sub-assembly. For more
Flexible_product
information, refer to Soft Sub-Assemblies in CATIA - Product
Structure User's Guide.
Instance of a part. This symbol means that there is a

Part.1
geometrical representation of the part and that it is activated.
The representation of this part is deactivated. This symbol means

the geometric representation is deactivated. Before opening a
document, you choose the activate or deactivate Shape
representation in Tools->Options->Infrastructure, select the
Part_with_DeactivatedRepresentation Product Structure tab and check the box entitled Do not activate
default shapes on open.
For a particular instance in the document, you can deactivate or
activate it by selecting the Representations -> Deactivate
Node / Activate Node contextual commands.
Component_with_DeactivatedRepresentation The representation of this component is deactivated.
Contextual parts:
For contextual parts, the reference keeps a link with the definition instance. For each parts, every instance keeps a link with its
reference. But their first reference has only one link, with a single instance which is contextual. This unique link allows you to
know the name of the document (CATProduct) on which the part 's external geometry rests. Three types of contextual parts
exists:
This is a contextual part and more precisely a Definition Instance.

_ Definition Instance The green gear and the blue chain signify the "original" instance of a
part that is contextual (driven by another part, built with another
part's data) in a CATProduct.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugsymbol3.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:04:42 AM

Specification Tree
This contextual part is the Instance of the Definition Instance

_ Instance of the Definition Instance represented by the white gear and the green arrow. The geometry
of this instance is connected with the Definition Instance (contextual
link). You can edit this contextual part.
The brown gear and the red flash signify the second or subsequent
instance of a part that is contextual. There is a distinction between
the "original" and subsequent instances of contextual parts because
the geometrical definition of contextual parts (Skillets) is dependant
_ Other Instance of the Contextual Part
upon neighboring components (support) in the Assembly. The
geometry of this contextual part depends upon another instance.
This symbol can appear when you import this part into another
CATProduct.
Part1 Reference of a part. For more information, refer to Insert a New Part
in CATIA - Product Structure User's Guide.
A deactivated component. The shape representation is deactivated;

its geometry is not visible. This functionality can occur
simultaneously on several CATIA documents containing this
component, especially when this component is the instance of a
Deactivated_Component
reference. This operation is equivalent to the Delete operation
because the reference of the component no longer exists within the
Bill Of Material.
Deactivated_Product A deactivated product.
The geometry of the component disappears. The product is

Unloaded_Product downloaded, its references are missing but the user is able to find
them back.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyug_C2/cfyugsymbol3.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 9:04:42 AM

Customizing
Customizing
Find here all options that will affected the Assembly Design workbench.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugcu0000.htm10/19/2004 9:07:32 AM

This section describes the different types of setting customization you can perform
in Assembly Design using the Tools -> Options command.
All tasks described here deal with permanent setting customization.

Assembly Settings
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascuasm_C2/bascuasm0000.htm10/19/2004 9:07:42 AM
Assembly Settings
Customizing Assembly Design Settings

This task will show you how to customize Assembly Design settings.
1. Select Tools -> Options....
2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Assembly Design subcategory.
The General tab appears, displaying the following options:
Update
You can set an automatic or a manual update. The "Manual" option lets you decide
when you need to update your design. It is the default mode.
You can also update only the active level of the active component or all the levels of
the active component. "All levels' allows you to update all the constraints defined on
all the levels of the active component.
Access to geometry
The option "Automatic switch to Design mode" ensures that the application will
automatically launch the Design mode when using the following commands:
- Constraint (clicking on any constraint icon, the application launches

the Design mode, the cursor changes to an eye symbol, meaning that
the Design mode is then active, you can then you set your constraint)
- Snap
- Publication Management
- Reuse Pattern
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascuasm_C2/bascuasm0100.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:07:49 AM

Assembly Settings
- Define Multi-Instantiation
- Manipulate
- Translate
- Rotate
- Update
Move components
The option available controls the display of a warning message that appears when
moving components.
If you want to see a message indicating that you are moving components attached
together, check the option "Display warning when moving a component involved in
a Fix Together".
The message will appear whenever you will apply the following commands to
components fixed together : compass, snap , translation or rotation and
manipulate .
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Customizing Assembly Constraints

This task will show you how to customize Assembly Design constraints.
1. Select Tools -> Options....
2. Click the Mechanical Design category, then the Assembly Design subcategory.
3. Click the Constraints tab.
The following options are available:
Paste Components
You can paste one or several components without the assembly constraints applying
to them.
You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to
them, only after the Copy command.
You can paste one or several components with the assembly constraints applying to
them, only after the Cut command.
You can paste one or several components always with the assembly constraints
applying to them.
Constraint Creation

These three options let you define the way of setting constraints:
- Use any geometry: you can select any geometrical element
- Use published geometry of child components only: you can select any
published element belonging to child components
- Use published geometry of any level: you can select any published element
For more information about publication, refer to "Managing a Product Publication" in

the CATIA Assembly Design Users Guide Version 5.
Quick Constraint
The Quick Constraint command is based on a ordered list of constraints to be

created by the application. The setting available here lets you reorder the list of
constraints having priority when applying the Quick Constraint command to the
selected geometrical elements. What you need to do is select the constraint type
you wish to reorder and click the arrows to the right of the selection to reorder the
selected constraint.
Additionally, you can create verified constraints if the option Creation verified
constraints first is on.
[ Back ] [ Up ]


This section describes the different types of setting customization you can perform in 3D
Annotations Infrastructure using the Tools -> Options command.
All tasks described here deal with permanent setting customization.
Tolerancing
Display
Manipulators
Annotation
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0000.htm10/19/2004 9:08:01 AM
Annotation
Annotation
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure annotation
settings.
4. Click the Annotation tab.
The Annotation tab appears, displaying one category of options:
Annotation Creation
Annotation following the mouse (Ctrl toggles)
Defines whether the annotation is positioned according to the cursor,

following it dynamically during the creation process or not.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0400.htm10/19/2004 9:08:22 AM
This task will show you how to customize 3D Annotations Infrastructure view/
annotation plane settings.
4. Click the View/Annotation Plane tab.
The View/Annotation Plane tab appears, displaying two categories of

options:
Create views associative to geometry
Creates views associative to the geometry, so that views and their

annotations are automatically updated when the geometry is modified.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0500.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:08:28 AM

Current view axis display
Defines whether the active annotation plane axis system is displayed.
Zoomable
Defines whether the annotation plane axis is zoomable.
Visualization of the profile in the current view
Defines whether the view/annotation plane profile on the part/product

is displayed or not.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascufdt_C2/bascufdtinf0500.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 9:08:28 AM

This section contains reference information about the Assembly design workbench.
Constraints
Batches and Macros
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugrf0000.htm10/19/2004 9:08:33 AM
Constraints
Constraints
This reference will describe assembly's constraints.
Contact Constraints
Offset Constraints
Angle Constraints
[ Next ]

Setting constraints is rather an easy task. However, you should keep in mind the
following:
You can apply constraints only between the child components of the active
component.
Do not mistake the active component for the selected component:
The active component is blue framed (default color) and underlined. It is

activated by double-clicking.
The selected component is orange framed (default color). It is selected by

clicking.
You cannot define constraints between two geometric elements

belonging to the same component.
You cannot apply a constraint between two components belonging to

the same subassembly if this subassembly is not the active
component.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugrf0201.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 9:08:59 AM

The following example illustrates what you are allowed to do:
(1) The constraint cannot be applied because Product K does not belong to the
active component Product B. To define this constraint, Product A must be made
active.
(2) The constraint cannot be applied because Product E and Product F both
belong to a component other than the active component Product B. To define this
constraint, Product D must be made active.
(3) The constraint can be applied since Product C belongs to the active component
Product B and also Product E is contained within Product D which is contained
within the active component Product B.
When you set a constraint, there are no rules to define the fixed and the movable
component during the selection. If you want to fix a component, use the Fix
command. See Fixing a Component .
Symbols
The following table lists the symbols used to represent the constraints you can set
between your components:

Symbol displayed
Symbol used
Constraints in the
in the geometry area
specification tree
Coincidence
Contact
Contact
(point)
Contact
(line)
Offset
Angle
Planar Angle
Parallelism

Perpendicularity
Fix
Note also that deactivated constraints are preceded by the symbol ( ) in the
specification tree.
Tip
The name of a constraint displays when passing the mouse over that constraint.
Geometry
To set constraints it is possible to select the geometry (plane, line or point) resulting
from intersections, projections or offsets from the specification tree. For more about
these operations, please refer to Generative Shape Design User's Guide.
Customizing Constraints

The application lets you customize the creation and the display of constraints. For
more information, please refer to Customizing Assembly Constraint and Customizing
Constraint Appearance.
[ Next ]

Coincidence-type constraints are used to align elements.
Depending on the selected elements, you may obtain concentricity, coaxiality or

coplanarity. The tolerance i.e. the smallest distance that can be used to differentiate
two elements is set at 10 -3 millimeters.
The following table shows the elements you can select for a coincidence constraint.
Planar Sphere Cylinder Axis

Point Line Plane Curve
Face (point) (axis) System
Point
Line
Plane
Planar Face
Sphere
(point)
Cylinder
(axis)
Curve
Axis System
To create a coincidence constraint between axis systems, they must have the same
direction and the same orientation in the product.
You can also create coincidence between an axis system and components of another
axis system:
Origin point.
Reference plane, in this case the reference plane must be parallel to the axis
system.

[ Back ] [ Next ]

Contact Constraints
Contact Constraints
Contact-type constraints can be created between two planar faces (directed planes).
The common area between the two planar faces can be a plane (plane contact), a
line (line contact) or a point (point contact).
The following table shows the elements you can select for a contact constraint.
Planar
Sphere Cylinder Cone Circle
Face
Planar Face
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Circle
[ Back ] [ Next ]
Offset Constraints
Offset Constraints
When defining an offset-type constraint between planar elements, you need to specify how faces should be
oriented.
The offset value is always displayed next to the offset constraint.
The unit used is the unit displayed in the Units tab of the Tools -> Options dialog box. If you wish, you can
customize it.
The following table shows the elements you can select for an offset constraint.
Planar
Point Line Plane
Face
Point
Line
Plane
Planar Face
Positive and Negative Offsets

When setting an offset constraint, you can define positive or negative offset values. For this, remember that:
At least one of the components to be constrained must be a planar element, otherwise you cannot set
positive nor negative offset values.
The vector normal to the planar element indicates the positive offset value.
If the planar element is an oriented plane, the normal vector pointing to the side opposite to material
indicates the positive value.
If the planar element is a wireframe plane, the application automatically deduces the positive or negative
value. Green arrows show the positive value.
If both components are planar elements, the selection order of the elements affects the result when using
the orientation option (Same, Opposite, Undefined). The normal to the first selected element gives the
positive value.

Offset Constraints
[ Back ] [ Next ]

Angle Constraints
Angle Constraints
Angle-type constraints fall into three categories.
When defining an offset constraint between planar elements, you need to specify
how faces should be oriented.
The offset value is always displayed next to the offset constraint.
Angle
Parallelism (when angle value equals zero),when setting a parallelism

constraint, green arrows appear on the selected faces to indicate the
orientations.
Perpendicularity (angle value equals 90 degrees)
When setting an angle constraint, you will have to define an angle value. Note that
this angle value must not exceed 90 degrees.
The tolerance i.e. the smallest angle that can be used to differentiate two elements
is set at 10 -6 radians.
The following table shows the elements you can select for an offset constraint.
Planar Cylinder Cone

Line Plane
Face (axis) (axis)
Line
Plane
Planar Face
Cylinder
(axis)
Cone
(axis)
[ Back ]
Batches and Macros
Batches and Macros

This reference will describe batches and macros dedicated for Assembly Design
workbench.
Data Upgrade for Large Assemblies Performances: Tool to upgrade Assembly data
to benefit from V5R10-11 performances improvements.
[ Back ]
Data Upgrade for Large Assemblies

Performances
In Releases 10, 11 and 12, several projects have been conducted to reduce the
amount of memory required for an assembly in specific scenarios.
All those scenarios start with loading the assembly in visualization mode, and allow
the user:
To stay in visualization mode (actually product mode, typically from 10% to

15% more than visualization mode) and to get the up-to-date status of the
assembly, with constraints, design in context or knowledgeware relations.
To switch to Brep mode for assembly constraint creation, for drawing update
The major benefit of those enhancements is to lower the required amount of

memory used in those typical scenarios. The drafting creation can start at a much
lower memory point, leaving enough memory for the necessary processing to
generate the drawing.
Yet, the benefit of those enhancements is only available with newly created data.
This means that all our current customers, using Releases 8 or 9, will not benefit
from them, unless they recreate their data... or migrate it, thanks to this new
development.
Needed Options
Cache Management on
Select Tools -> Options... item: in Infrastructure category -> Product

Structure subcategory, Cache Management tab -> Cache Activation frame ->
check the Work with the cache system option.
Load Reference documents
Select Tools -> Options... item: in General category -> General tab ->
Referenced Documents frame -> check the Load the referenced documents
option.
Macro Usage
The macro is delivered in the application runtime view (./operating_system/
VBScript)
Launch the application

Open the assembly to be upgraded (CATProduct document)
SendTo if you want to keep the original data
Close the original assembly
Open the copy
Launch Macro (Alt-F8 + UpgradeActiveDocumentMacro.CATScript)
Save Management.
Close the application
Batch Usage
The batch is delivered in the CATIA runtime view (./operating_system/code/bin)
The syntax of the command is as follows:
CATAsmUpgrade [-c|--check] [-f|--force] [-h|--help] [-n|--no-copy] [-o|--

output-dir TargetDirectory] [-p|--path ConcatenationPath] [-s|--stats] [-v|--
verbose] DocumentList
-c or --check: print for each document its upgrade status.
-f or --force: force CATPart documents upgrade to take benefit of

Semantic Unstreaming.
-h or --help: help.
-n or --no-copy: do not copy data, overwrite input data.
-o or --output-dir TargetDirectory: target directory for upgraded

documents.
-p or --path ConcatenationPath: source concatenation path for

documents and dependencies.
-s or --stats: print some statistics at the end of upgrade.
-v or --verbose: verbose output.
DocumentList: the CATProduct documents to be upgraded.
The result file location is available on:
Windows in: C:\temp\upgrade.log

Unix in: /tmp/upgrade.log
Example
Run the batch or the macro with the following Articulation CATProduct document.
The result file displays the following result:
[I] CATAsmProxyUpgrader
Reporting:
Number of Constraint: 8
Number of tried upgraded
Constraint: 7
Number of successfully upgraded
Constraint: 7
Number of unsuccessfully
upgraded Constraint: 0
Number of Publication: 0
Publication: 0
Publication: 0
upgraded Publication: 0
Number of Context: 0
Context: 0
Context: 0
upgraded Context: 0
[I] CATKweProxyUpgrader
Reporting:
Number of Relation: 0
Relation: 0
Relation: 0
upgraded Relation: 0

Glossary
Glossary
A
active component A selected component currently being edited. This component is
underlined in the specification tree.
active object An object currently being edited.
angle constraint A constraint used to define an angle or parallelism between two
geometric elements.
assembly An entity composed of various components which have been
positioned relative to each other.
B
bill of material A list of data about the properties of the components contained in
the active component.
C
child component One or more components originating from a single component.
Compare parent component.
coincidence A constraint used to align two geometric elements, or get them to

constraint coincide.
component A reference integrated in an assembly. A component possesses
characteristics related to how it is integrated in an assembly (for
example, its relative location in an assembly).
constraint A geometrical or dimensional relation between several geometric
elements of different components. It may be used to define the
positioning of components.
context-specific A hierarchical design of an assembly in a specific context (for
representation example: engineering or manufacturing).
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmuggl.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 9:09:57 AM

Glossary
contact constraint A constraint used to define a contact area between two elements
(tangent or coincident).
F
fixed component A component for which all degrees of freedom are locked, in relation
to the parent component.
G
geometric element The geometric elements which can be constrained in the Assembly
workbench are:
point
line
plane (or plane surface from a model)
sphere
cone
cylinder
L
leaf component The last component at the end of each branch of the specification
tree.
M
manipulation A freehand translation or rotation of a component with the mouse.
model A CATIA Version 4 model.
O
offset constraint A constraint used to define a distance or an offset between two
geometric elements.

Glossary
parent component A component that is hierarchically just above one or more

components. Compare child component
part Within the Assembly workbench, it is either a part of the Part Design
workbench, or a 3D entity whose geometry is contained in a model.
primary child One or more components originating from the first level under the
component active component.
product A 3D entity which contains several components.
reference A product or part with its own characteristics. Compare component.
representation See context specific representation.
S
search order A hierarchical set of paths used when searching for the files included
in the assembly. The search begins with the first path, and stops
when the file is found.
snap Projects a geometric element onto another one.
subassembly An assembly contained within another assembly.
U
update In the Assembly workbench, updates the position of the constrained
components so as to satisfy the constraint requirements.

Index
Index
Symbols
.asm
A
Activate contextual command
activating
constraints
active
component
Add
command
Analyze
command
analyzing
constraints
dependences
update
annotating
annotation
creating
textual
Annotations
toolbar
ANSI standard
Apply Scene to an Assembly
contextual command
assembly
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/asmug_C2/asmugix.htm (1 of 17)10/19/2004 9:10:08 AM

Index
modify
Assembly Design workbench
creating
entering
Assembly Features
toolbar
assembly features
Assembly Hole
command
Assembly Pocket
command
Assembly Remove
command
Assembly Split
command
associating URLs
constarints
associativity
Auto modify part numbers with suffix option
automatic update
B
bill of material
black
broken
constraints
broken constraint
C
catalog
CATProduct

Index
document
Chain Mode
command
Change Constraint
command
changing position
section plane(s)
children
clash
color coding
clash
clearance
clearance
color coding
color coding
clash
clearance
contact
interference(s)
command
Add
Analyze
Angle Constraint
Assembly Hole
Assembly Pocket
Assembly Remove
Assembly Split
Chain Mode
Change Constraint
Clash Detection
Coincidence Constraint
Compute Clash
Contact Constraint

Index
Create Scene
Default Mode
Define Multi-instantiation
Degrees of Freedom
Drag along Y axis
Drag around Y axis
Edit Grid
Edit Position and Dimensions
Existing Component with Positioning
Fast Multi-instantiation
Feature Publish
Fix
Fix Together
Flexible/Rigid Sub-Assembly
Flip Horizontal
Flip Vertical
Geometrical Target
Grid
Invert Normal
Manipulate
Manipulation on Clash
Offset Constraint
Product Management
Publication
Quick Constraint
Reset Position
Reset Selected Products
Results Window
Reuse Pattern
Rotate Left
Rotate Right
Save Viewpoints

Index
Section Fill
Sectioning
Smart Move
Snap
Snapshot
Stack Mode
Start Publish
Stop Publish
Text
Translate or Rotation
Volume Cut
VRML
Weld Feature
compass
component
active
deleting
editing
fixing
moving
new
part
repeating
replacing
Component Constraints
contextual command
components
replacing
Compute Clash
command
constarints
associating URLs

Index
Constrained Assembly
Exploding
Constraint Creation Mode
toolbar
Constraints
toolbar
constraints
about
activating
analyzing
angle
broken
coincidence
contact
creation mode
customizing
deactivating
deleting
editing
name
negative offset
offset
parallelism
pasting
pattern
perpendicularity
positive offset
properties
sector for angle
status
tolerance for angle
contact
color coding

Index
contextual command
Apply Scene to an Assembly
Component Constraints
Copy
Deactivate constraint
Expand all
Expand node
Paste
Set as new root
Show children
contextual part
Copy
contextual command
Create Scene
command
creating
annotation
section cut(s)
section plane(s)
creating a part template
creation mode
constraints
customizing
constraints
D
Deactivate constraint
contextual command
deactivating
constraints
Default Mode
command

Index
Define Multi-instantiation
command
degrees of freedom
deleting
component
constraints
dependences
analyzing
design in Assembly context
detecting
collisions between 2D sections
document
CATProduct
non-retrieved
document template
external document
methodology
part template
window
document template window
auto modify part numbers with suffix option
automatic input
edit list button
manual input
new document button
same document button
E
Edit Grid command
Edit List... button
Edit Position and Dimensions command
editing

Index
component
constraints
EN standard
entering
Expand all
contextual command
Expand node
contextual command
Exploding
Constrained Assembly
external document
external reference
F
family
Fast Multi-instantiation
command
Feature Publish
command
Fix
command
Fix in Space command
Fix Together
command
fixing
component
flexible
flexible sub-assemblies
Flexible/Rigid Sub-Assembly
command
Flip Horizontal command
Flip Vertical command

Index
freedom (degrees of)
G
Geometrical Target command
graphic properties
green
Grid command
H
html format
I
initial computation mode
interference(s)
instance
interference(s)
color coding
initial computation mode
interoperability
Invert Normal command
ISO standard
J
JIS standard

Index
leader line
link
listing report
lock symbol
M
macro
macro
scene
manipulating
section plane(s)
manual update
measure mode
modes
update
modify
assembly
Move
toolbar
moving
component
section plane(s)
N
name
constraints
new
component
New Document
non-retrieved
document

Index
O
Offset Constraint
command
overconstrained assembly
P
parentheses
part
component
part
Part Design
part template
creating
instantiating
Paste
contextual command
pasting
constraints
pattern
pattern
constraints
persistency
pocket
positioning
section planes along a curve or edge
section planes on geometrical target
section planes using the Edit Position and Dimensions command
product
Product Management
command
Product Structure

Index
properties
constraints
section
published element
Q
Quick Constraint
command
R
re-dimensioning
section plane(s)
relationship
repeating
component
replacing
component
components
Reset Position command
Reset Selected Products
command
results window
sectioning
Results Window command
Reuse Pattern
command
rigid
Rotate Left command
Rotate Right command
rotating
section plane(s)

Index
S
Same Document
Save Viewpoints
command
Scene
toolbar
scene
macro
section
properties
section cut(s)
creating
section plane(s)
along a curve or edge
changing position
creating
manipulating
moving
on geometrical target
re-dimensioning
rotating
using the Edit Position and Dimensions command
sectioning
about
collision detection
creating section planes
results window
Sectioning command
Set as new root
contextual command
shortcut
Show children

Index
contextual command
Smart Move
command
Snapshot
command
specification tree
Stack Mode
command
standard part
Start Publish
command
status
constraints
command
Stop Publish
command
sub-assembly
symbol
T
Text
command
textual
annotation
textual annotation
toolbar
Annotations
Assembly Features
Constraint Creation Mode
Constraints
Move
Scene

Index
Update
Tools Options
3D Annotations Infrastructure
Annotation Creation
Annotation tab
Display tab
Grid
Manipulators
Manipulators tab
Tolerancing tab
View/Annotation Plane tab
tree
txt format
U
Update
toolbar
update
update
analyzing
modes
Update contextual command
URLs

Index
viewer
sectioning
viewpoint
Volume Cut command
VRML
command
W
Weld Feature
command

Interactive Drafting
Interactive
© Dassault Systèmes. 1994-2003 All rights reserved. Drafting
Preface
Using This Guide
Conventions
What's New
Getting Started
Entering the Interactive Drafting Workbench
Creating a New View
Creating a Rectangle
Creating Corners
Creating Lines
Translating Lines
Creating Circles
Creating Dimensions
Basic Tasks
Using Tools
Copying and Pasting Elements
Styles and Default Values
Using Standard-Defined Styles
Setting Properties As Default in Pre-R11 Drawings
Using Properties Set as Default in Pre-R11 Drawings
Migrating Pre-R11 Drawings to Drawings Using Standard-Defined Styles
Sheets
Defining a Sheet
Modifying a Sheet
Deleting a Sheet
Updating the Standard of a Drawing
Switching a Drawing to Another Standard
Creating a Frame and a Title Block
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/driugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 9)10/19/2004 9:13:21 AM

Views
Creating Views
Defining the View Plane
Creating Views Using Folding Lines
Creating a Multiple View Projection
Reframing a View
2D Components
Before You Begin
Creating a 2D Component
Re-Using a 2D Component
Creating a Component Catalog
Re-Using a 2D Component from a Catalog
Exploding a 2D Component
Exposing a 2D Component from a Catalog
Dimensions
Before You Begin
Creating Dimensions
Creating Half-Dimensions
Creating Cumulated Dimensions
Creating Stacked Dimensions
Creating Explicit Dimensions
Creating/Modifying Angle Dimensions
Creating Chamfer Dimensions
Creating Associative Thread Dimensions
Creating/Modifying Coordinate Dimensions
Creating a Holes Dimensions Table
Creating a Points Coordinates Table
Creating/Modifying Radius Curvature Dimensions
Creating Overall Curve Dimensions
Creating Curvilinear Length Dimensions
Creating Dimensions along a Reference Direction
Creating Dimensions between Intersection Points
Creating Dimensions for Technological Features
Creating Dimensions between an Element and a View Axis
Re-routing Dimensions
Modifying the Dimension Type
Interrupting Extension Lines
Modifying the Dimension Value Text Position

Modifying the Dimension Line Location

Specifying the Dimension Value Position
Adding Text Before/After the Dimension Value
Modifying the Dimensions Overrun/Blanking
Lining up Dimensions (Free Space)
Lining up Dimensions (Reference)
Creating a Datum Feature
Modifying a Datum Feature
Creating a Geometrical Tolerance
Modifying Geometrical Tolerances
Copying Geometrical Tolerances
Creating Driving Dimensions
Constraints
Before you Begin
Creating Quick Constraints
Creating Constraints Between 2D and Generated Elements
Annotations
Before You Begin
Creating a Free Text
Creating an Associated Text
Making an Existing Annotation Associative
Creating a Text With a Leader
Adding a Leader to an Existing Annotation
Handling Annotation Leaders
Adding Frames or Sub-Frames
Replicating Text and Attribute
Copying Graphic Properties
Creating a Datum Target
Modifying a Datum Target
Creating a Balloon
Creating Associative Balloons on Generated Product Views
Modifying a Balloon
Creating a Roughness Symbol
Creating a Welding Symbol
Creating a Geometry Weld
Modifying Annotation Positioning
Creating/Modifying a Table

Finding and Replacing Text

Performing an Advanced Search
Querying Object Links
Dress-Up Elements
Creating Center Lines (No Reference)
Creating Center Lines (Reference)
Modifying Center Lines
Creating Threads (No Reference)
Creating Threads (Reference)
Creating Axis Lines
Creating Axis Lines and Center Lines
Creating an Area Fill
Creating Arrows
2D Geometry
Creating Profiles
Creating Rectangles
Creating Circles
Creating Arcs
Creating Splines
Creating Ellipses
Creating Lines
Creating an Axis

Creating Points
2D Geometry Operations
Creating Corners
Creating Chamfers
Trimming Elements
Breaking & Trimming
Closing Elements
Breaking Elements
Rotating Elements
Scaling Elements
Offsetting Elements
Isolating Elements
Properties
Editing View Properties
Editing 2D Geometry Feature Properties
Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties
Editing Pattern Properties
Editing Annotation Font Properties

Editing Text Properties

Editing Dimension Text Properties
Editing Dimension Value Properties
Editing Dimension Tolerance Properties
Editing Dimension Extension Line Properties
Editing Dimension Line Properties
Editing 2D Component Instance Properties
SmartPick
Creating Constraints via SmartPick
SmartPick
Before You Begin
SmartPicking ...
Images
Inserting Images (Raster or Vector)
Editing Raster Images
Data Exchange
DXF/DWG: Import
DXF/DWG: Export
DXF/DWG: Report File
DXF/DWG: Trouble Shooting
DXF/DWG: Best Practices
DXF/DWG: FAQ
DXF/DWG: VBScript Macros
CGM: Insertion
CGM: Export
Print
Printing a Document Quickly
Printing a Document After Modifying Current Display Settings
Printing using a Clipping Operator
Advanced Tasks
Deactivating Annotations
Deactivating Table Rows
Adding Attribute Links to Text
Setting Relations Between Dimensional Constraints
Text Templates
Creating Text Templates
Storing Text Templates in a Catalog

Annotating Drawings Using Text Templates
Administration Tasks
Before You Begin
Administering Standards and Generative View Styles
Upgrading Standard Files from Previous Releases
Setting Standard Parameters and Styles
Before You Begin
Setting Standard Parameters
About Standard Parameters
General Parameters
Dress-Up parameters
Dimension Parameters
Dimension Tolerance Formats
Dimension Value Formats
Pre-defined Formats for Tolerance and Dimension Values
Pre-defined Styles Definition
Annotation Parameters
Frame Definition
View Generation Definition
Line Thickness Definition
Linetype Definition
Pattern Definition
Setting Standard Styles
About Styles
Sheet Styles
Geometry Styles
Annotation Styles
Dimension Styles
Dress-up and Dress-up Symbols Styles
View Callout Styles
Command Board
Interactive Drafting Menu Bar
Interactive Drafting Toolbars
Geometry Creation
Geometry Modification
Annotations
Dress-Up

Dimensioning
Text Properties
Graphic Properties
Dimension Properties
Tools
Style
Drawing
Tools Palette
Customizing for Drafting

General Settings
View and Sheet Layout Settings
View Generation Settings
Generation
Geometry Creation Settings
Dimension Creation
Manipulators Settings
Annotation and Dress-up Settings
Administration
Toolbars
Glossary
Index
Preface
Version 5 Interactive Drafting is a new generation product that addresses 2D design
and drawing production requirements.
Interactive Drafting is a highly productive, intuitive drafting system that can be used
in a standalone 2D CAD environment within a backbone system. It also expands the
Generative Drafting product with both integrated 2D interactive functionality and an
advanced production environment for the dress-up and annotation of drawings. This
provides an easy and smooth evolution from 2D to 3D-based design methodologies.
Complementing an existing Version 4 installation, Interactive Drafting benefits from

upward compatibility with Version 4, making it possible to browse or complete in
Version 5 drawings started with Version 4.

The Interactive Drafting User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create
drawings from various complexities. There are several ways of creating a drawing and
this documentation aims at illustrating the several stages of creation you may
encounter.
Using This Guide

Conventions

Preface
Preface
Version 5 Interactive Drafting is a new generation product that addresses 2D design and
drawing production requirements.
Interactive Drafting is a highly productive, intuitive drafting system that can be used in a
standalone 2D CAD environment within a backbone system. It also expands the Generative
Drafting product with both integrated 2D interactive functionality and an advanced
production environment for the dress-up and annotation of drawings. This provides an easy
and smooth evolution from 2D to 3D-based design methodologies.
Complementing an existing Version 4 installation, Interactive Drafting benefits from upward

compatibility with Version 4, making it possible to browse or complete in Version 5 drawings
started with Version 4.
The Interactive Drafting User's Guide has been designed to show you how to create
drawings from various complexities. There are several ways of creating a drawing and this
documentation aims at illustrating the several stages of creation you may encounter.
Using This Guide

Conventions
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugpr01.htm10/19/2004 9:13:33 AM
Using This Guide
Using This Guide

This User's Guide is intended for users who needs to become quickly familiar with the
Interactive Drafting Version 5 product.
Before reading it, the user should be familiar with basic Version 5 concepts such as
document windows, standard and view toolbars.
To get the most out of this guide, we suggest that you start reading and performing the
step-by-step tutorial Getting Started. This tutorial will show you how to create a basic
drawing from scratch.
Once you have finished, you should move on to the next sections, which deal with the
handling of drawings and sheets, then the creation and modification of various types of
features you will need to create a complex drawing. You can also take a look at the
Workbench Description section describing the Interactive Drafting workbench.
To perform the scenarios, you will use sample documents contained in the C:\Program Files
\Dassault Systemes\Bxxdoc\English\online\cfysa\samples\Drafting folder (where xx in
Bxxdoc stands for the current release number). For more information on accessing sample
documents, refer to Accessing Sample Documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Prior to reading this book, we recommend that you read
● Infrastructure User's guide that describes generic capabilities common to all Version 5
products. It also describes the general layout of V5 and the interoperability between
workbenches.
● V4 Integration User's Guide that presents interfaces with standard exchange formats and
most of all with V4 data.
● the Conventions chapter.
What's New
What's New?
New Functionalities
Dimensions
Dimensions along a reference direction

You can now create dimensions along a direction of measure. In other words, you can
measure the projection of a segment/distance onto a direction. This direction is
determined using either a linear element, a fixed angle in the view or a combination of
both. If an element was selected to define the direction, then the dimension remains
associative to this element.
Curvilinear length dimensions
You can now create dimensions for the curvilinear length of any curve. A curvilinear
length dimension measures the overall length of a curve.
Intersection point dimensions
You can now dimension a distance between an intersection point and an element or
between two intersection points.
Technological feature dimensions (Electrical Harness, Piping, Tubing)
You can now gain in efficiency when dimensioning technological features such as
electrical harness. Technological feature dimensioning relies on the fact that
technological features can specify the way they should be dimensioned, which allows
you to create only realistic and customized dimensions, based on the know-how of a
given field.
Annotations
Text templates
You can now gain in productivity by defining and storing text templates to be used
when creating texts associated to features.
Miscellaneous
Batch migration of existing CATDrawing documents containing properties set as default to

the V5 R12 XML standard format
A new batch utility lets you migrate CATDrawing documents created with versions up
to V5 R10 (which use properties "set as default"), to V5 R12 CATDrawing documents
(which use standard-defined styles). For each object which uses properties "set as
default", a new style will be created in the standard file, with the same specifications
as the default object.
DXF import and export
New and enhanced functionalities are available regarding DXF import and export.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugwn.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:14:41 AM

What's New
These functionalities are documented in the Data Exchange Interface User's Guide.
Annotations
New text frame

A new text frame is now available: parallelogram.
Roughness symbol enhancements
You can now position the extension line for roughness symbols out of the geometry.
Furthermore, roughness symbol capabilities have been extended in order to support
the latest evolutions in the JIS and ISO standards.
Standards
Upgrading XML standard files from previous releases to the current level
If you have customized or defined an XML standard file in a previous release (i.e. a
release from V5R9 to V5R11), and wish to re-use this customization in the current
level, you need to upgrade your XML file using the upgrade batch utility.
Multi-tolerance with associative numerical value
A new standard parameter now specifies whether the numerical definition of a multi-
tolerance, H7 (+0.2 -0.1) for example, is associative to the dimension value, in which
case it will be automatically updated when the dimension value is changed.
Curvilinear length symbol
You can customize the symbol that should be used for curvilinear length dimensions.
Intersection point
You can customize the display of intersection points.
Roughness symbol styles
Roughness symbol style parameters have been modified in order to support the latest
evolutions in the JIS and ISO standards.
Roughness symbol annotation parameters
Roughness symbol annotation parameters have been added in order to support the
latest evolutions in the JIS, ISO, ANSI and ASME standards.
Blanking for text, table, balloon and tolerance styles
Blanking can now be used for text, table, balloon and tolerance styles.
Parallelogram frame definition
You can define the fixed-size frame parallelogram in the standards.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugwn.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 9:14:41 AM

Getting Started
Getting Started
Before getting into the detailed instructions for using Interactive Drafting workbench, the
following tutorial aims at giving you a feel of what you can do with the product. It provides a
step-by-step scenario showing you how to use key functionalities. You just need to follow the
instructions as you progress along.
The main tasks described in this section are the following:

Creating a New View
Creating Corners
Creating Lines
Translating Lines
Creating Circles
Creating Dimensions
Before discovering this scenario, you should be familiar with the basic commands common to all
workbenches. These are described in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
All together, the tasks should take about 30 minutes to complete.
The final drawing will look like this:
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driuggs01.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:14:53 AM

Getting Started
Setting the options in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting is recommended
to improve the software performances. For more information, refer to the Customizing section.


This first task shows you how to enter the Drafting workbench and start a new drawing.
1. Select the File -> New command (or click the New icon).
The New dialog box is displayed, allowing you to choose the type of the document you
need.
2. Select Drawing in the List of Types field and click OK.
OR
1. Select the Start -> Mechanical Design commands from the menu bar.
2. Select the Drafting workbench.
OR
1. Select the Tools -> Customize commands (Start Menu tab) and define the
Favorites (Drafting) and Accelerator (F12) options as shown below and click the
Close switch button.

2. Press F12 key or select the Start -> Drafting F12 commands from the menu bar.
Whatever the dialog you used for entering the Drafting workbench you used, the New
Drawing dialog box is displayed, allowing you choosing the type of Standard, Format,
Orientation and scale you need.

3. Select the ISO standard and click the Landscape option.
If you activate the Hide when starting workbench option, the next time you enter the
Drafting workbench via Start -> Drafting F12 or by pressing F12 key, the New
Drawing dialog box will not appear any more. Still, you will always be able to access this
dialog box by selecting File -> New Drawing command from the menu bar.
4. Click OK.
● You can add an unlimited number of customized standards using Standard files that
you will create and/or, if needed, modify. Once created, this standard will appear in
the New Drawing dialog box. For more details on standards, see the Standards
Administration section. Care that any user-defined standard is based on one of the
four international standards (ANSI, ISO,ASME or JIS) as far as basic parameters are
concerned.
● You can create your own Format:
❍ key in the format name in the Format field,
❍ use the tab key to access to the Width and Height fields and sets their values.

The Drafting workbench is loaded and an empty Drawing sheet opens:
Make sure you customized the units accordingly. For this:
1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box.
2. Click General in the list of objects to the left of the Options dialog box.
3. Select the Units tab and set Length to Inch and then click OK.
To visualize better your drawing, tile the windows horizontally from the menu bar.

The commands for creating and editing features are available in the workbench toolbar.
Now to fully discover the Interactive Drafting workbench, let's perform the following
tasks.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Creating a New View
Creating a New View

In this task you will learn how to create a new view in the empty drawing you just
opened using the Drafting Interactive workbench.
1. Click the New View icon and click the Drawing sheet.
2. Click to position the new view. By default, this new view will be a front view.
In the following tasks, you will learn how to draw geometry in the empty view displayed
which is by default a front view. In other words, you will draw geometry in this empty
view and create both annotations and dimensions on this geometry.

Creating a New View

This task shows you how to define geometry in the newly created empty view which is by
default, the front view. In this particular case, let's create a rectangle.
1. Click the Rectangle icon from the
Geometry creation toolbar (Profiles sub-toolbar).
The Tools Palette automatically appears, displaying two value fields: horizontal value (H)
and vertical value (V).
The Tools Palette appears whenever you select a command for which specific options or
value fields are available. This enables you to know immediately when tools are available
for a command.
2. Enter the First Point coordinates. For example, H: 0in and V: 0in.
3. Press Enter.
At this step, you can either enter the rectangle second point or width and height values.
4. Enter the Second Point coordinates. For example, H: 3.5in and V: 2.5in.
5. Press Enter to end the rectangle creation.

The rectangle appears in the empty view.
You can also move the cursor for directly positioning the second point. The corresponding
values similarly appear on the Tools Palette.
Note that the grid is not necessarily displayed throughout this documentation. Still, in the
Generative Drafting workbench, the grid is set by default. If you need to hide or display
the grid, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> General tab
and check the Display option.

Creating Corners
Creating Corners
This task shows you how to create corners on an existing rectangle by multi-selecting
points.
1. Multi-select the rectangle endpoints.
2. Click the Corner icon from the

Geometry Modification toolbar
(Relimitations sub-toolbar).
The Tools Palette is displayed with a Radius field:
3. Enter a radius value in the Tools Palette. For example, Radius: 0.25in.
4. The four corners are automatically
created with the same radius value.
If you want to create the corners one

after the other, you can also select the
Corner icon first and then click the
geometry.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driuggs05.htm10/19/2004 9:16:05 AM
Creating Lines
Creating Lines
In this task you will learn how to create a line.
1. Click the Line icon from the
Geometry creation toolbar.
The Tools toolbar displays with the Start Point value fields:
2. Enter the line Start Point coordinates. For example, H: 1.625in and V: 0in.
3. Press Enter.
4. Drag the cursor to the desired location for creating the second line point. For
example, drag the line end point to the top rectangle horizontal line.
In this particular case, smartpicking is

used for creating the line. In other words,
you want the line to be parallel with one of
the rectangle lines.
The parallelism symbol appears as

shown here.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driuggs06.htm10/19/2004 9:16:14 AM
SmartPick
SmartPick
Information regarding SmartPick is documented in Sketcher User's Guide. As such, the
information detailed in this section is presented in a Sketcher context.
You should note that the Sketcher User's Guide contains images that correspond to the
Sketcher workbench and therefore illustrate geometry in an environment that is
different from the Drafting environment (symbols, background color, for example).
SmartPick is an easy-to-use tool designed to make all your geometry creation as simple
as possible.
SmartPick dynamically detects the following geometrical constraints:

● alignment
● parallelism
● tangency
● concentricity
● horizontality
● verticality
● middle point
Note that when you use SmartPick, you do NOT necessarily create constraints.

Using SmartPick
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt1300.htm10/19/2004 9:16:32 AM

This task shows you how to detect, create and visualize constraints. For example, let's create
two constrained parrallel lines.
1. Click the Create Detected Constraints icon from the Tools toolbar.
2. Create a first line.
3. Create a second line.

SmartPick can be used to create certain elements on the drawing. More precisely, only the
elements which the cursor last went over will be used to apply SmartPick constraints. In other
words, you simply need to move the cursor over the element you want to use as reference for a
constraint.
No element is picked:
To detect parallelism constraints, As a result, a parallelism constraint is detected

go over the line to be used as reference. and created.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt1103.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 9:16:52 AM

To visualize detected and created constraints, make sure the Show Constraints command is
on, or that the Create detected and feature-based constraints setting is active in Tools ->
Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Geometry tab.
When a constraint is detected by smartpicking, you can temporarily deactivate this constraint by
maintaining the Shift key pressed.
When a constraint is detected by smartpicking, you can temporarily lock this constraint by
maintaining the Ctrl key pressed.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Translating Lines
Translating Lines
This task shows you how to translate a line. In this particular case, we will also duplicate the line
to be translated.
1. Select an element. For example, a line.
2. Click the Translate icon from the Geometry

Modification toolbar (Transformations sub-toolbar).
The Translation Definition dialog box appears

and the Start Point value fields (H and V) appear
in the Tools Palette.
3. The Duplicate mode option (Translation

Definition dialog box) is activated, by default. If
not, activate this mode.
4. Enter the duplicated line Start Point coordinates in the Tools Palette. For example, H: 1.7in
and V:0in.
5. Press Enter.
6. Enter the duplicated line End Point coordinates in the Tools Palette. For example, H: 2in and
V:0in.

Translating Lines
OR
5. Enter a length for the line in the Value field.

For example, 0.3in.
The Snap Mode is automatically deactivated.
7. Once you are satisfied with your operation, click

on the view.
The second line is created.
This is the resulting translated line.
A new line is created and translated according to the existing one.
Proceed in the same manner to create the third, fourth, fifth and sixth lines. The process
described above is valid for any other line to be created with the Translation command in our
context.
Select two lines at a time to perform your translation, it is time-saving.

Translating Lines
Your final drawing will look like this:
You can also select the Translate icon first and then the geometry to be translated.

Creating Circles
Creating Circles
This task shows you how to create circles and circle centers using coordinates.
1. Select the Circle

icon from the
Geometry creation
toolbar.
The Tools Palette

appears, displaying
circle value fields.
2. Enter the Circle Center coordinates. For example, H: 0.75in and V: 2in.
3. Press Enter.
4. Enter the circle radius. For example, R: 0.375in.

5. Press Enter.

Creating Circles
6. Repeat the scenario to create the second circle using the same circle radius
values.
Now, let's create inner circles. For this:
7. Click again the Circle icon .
8. Select the existing circle center.

Creating Circles
9. Enter the center circle radius.
10. Press Enter.
11. Repeat the scenario to create the second inner circle.
This is what you obtain:
You can also select the geometry to be translated first and then the Translate
command .

Creating Circles
You can then translate the circles newly created and get the following result:

Creating Dimensions
Creating Dimensions
This task shows you how to add dimensions to the geometry you previously created.
1. Click the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Click a first element in the view. For example, the rectangle top line.
At this step, a dimension appears (length dimension). This dimension is defined

according to the element first selected. You can either accept the dimension (click in
the free space) or select another element (for creating a distance dimension).
3. Click a second element in the view. For example, the rectangle bottom line.

Creating Dimensions
4. If needed, drag the dimension to the desired location.
At this step, you can apply various modifications to the dimension you are creating.
You can:
● modify the dimension overrun/blanking using manipulators or the Ctrl key to
modify only one extension line.
● add text before or after by double-clicking the dimension
● redefine the dimension properties using the required toolbar:

This task shows you how to add annotations on your drawing. In this particular case,
we will add text to existing 2D elements.
1. Click on an icon from the Annotations
toolbar.
For example, click the Text icon .
2. Click an element.
The text will be positioned according to

this element.
3. Enter the required text in the Text

Editor dialog box.
As you type in, the text appears in the graphic Text Editor window.
4. If needed, drag the text to the

desired location.

The annotation will now remain associated to the selected 2D element. In other words,
each time you move the 2D element, the associated annotation moves accordingly.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Basic Tasks
Basic Tasks
The basic tasks you will perform in the Interactive Drafting workbench mainly deal with
creating and modifying 2D elements and their related attributes on a predefined sheet. The
tasks documented in this section explain and illustrate how to create various kinds of
features to obtain a complete CATDrawing document.
The information you will find in this section is listed below:
Using Tools
Default Values
Sheets
Views
2D Components
Dimensions
Constraints
Annotations
Dress-Up Elements
2D Geometry
Properties
SmartPick
Images
Data Exchange
Print
Using Tools
Using Tools
You will find here below information on helpful tools for creating any interactive
elements. Multi-selection can also be very useful.
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar displays a number of options. This toolbar is situated at the bottom
right of screen. If you cannot see it properly, just undock it.
The Tools toolbar provides the following options:
● Grid
● Snap to Point
● Analysis Display Mode
● Create Constraints (See chapter on Constraints)
● Create Detected Constraints (See chapter on Constraints)
● Filter Generated Elements
Grid
The grid will help you draw geometry in given circumstances. For example, the grid
will make it easier to draw profiles requiring parallel lines.

Using Tools
Snap to Point
If activated, this option makes your geometry begin or end on the points of the grid.
As you are creating 2D geometry, points are forced to the intersection points of the
grid. Note that this option is also available using Tools ->Options ->Drafting (General
tab).
1. Create a spline.
In this example, the black

spline was created with the
Snap to Point option
activated. The points are on
the grid.
Conversely, the highlighted

spline was created with the
option deactivated.
You can use autodetection even if this option is activated.
In the case of dimensions and annotations, even though the Snap to Point option
remains on (red-colored), you can temporarily de-activate the functionality. For this,
press the Shift button while you move the dimension or annotation.
Analysis Display Mode

This option allows visualizing the colors assigned to the different types of dimensions.
These displayed colors correspond to the colors customized in the Options dialog box.
To modify these colors, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design ->
Drafting (Dimension tab). Then check Activate analysis display mode and, if
needed, click the Types and colors switch button to assign the desired color(s) to
the desired dimension types.

Using Tools
Differentiating Between 2D Elements and

Elements Generated from the 3D
You can differentiate 2D elements (Interactive Drafting workbench) from generated
elements (Generative Drafting workbench) within the same view. This can prove very
helpful when you need to add purely interactive elements onto generated views.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document. Create a text with a leader on an
active view.
1. Click the Filter Generated
Elements icon from the
Tools toolbar.
The generated elements
appear in grey.
2. Create a 2D element. For

example, create a text with
leader.
The 2D elements appear in
black.
This command is active provided you installed a Generative Drafting license.
Tools Palette
The Tools palette appears whenever you select a command for which specific options
or value fields are available. This enables you to know immediately when tools are
available for a command.

Using Tools
The options or fields available in the Tools Palette depend on the command you
selected. Only a few examples are provided here.
Example when creating dimensions
For example, if you select the Dimensions command, the Tools Palette may provide
the following options:
Projected/Forced/True Length
Dimension
Projected Dimension Force Dimension on Element
(according to the cursor

position)

Using Tools
Force Horizontal
Force Vertical Dimension in View
Dimension in View
True Length Dimensions
Remember that as you create the dimension in one mode, you can use the contextual
menu and select another mode.

Using Tools
Example when creating geometry
Another example would be when creating a line. The values of the elements you are
sketching appear in the Tools Palette as you move the cursor. In other words, as you
are moving the cursor, the Length (L) and Angle (A) fields display the coordinates
corresponding to the cursor position.
The Horizontal (H) and Vertical (V) fields are optionally displayed, depending on
whether the Show H and V fields in the Tools Palette option is selected in Tools >
Options > Mechanical Design > Drafting > Geometry tab.
You can also use these fields for entering the values of your choice. In the following
scenario, you are going to sketch a line by entering values in the appropriate fields.
1. Click the Line icon from the Geometry creation toolbar.
The Tools Palette displays information on value fields.
2. Enter the length (L) of the line and press enter.

3. Enter the value of the angle (A) between the line to be created and the horizontal
axis and press enter. The line is created.
Make the Most of Multi-selection

When you need to create and/or modify an element, you can either select the
element or the command first. Multi-selection can only be used for given commands.
You are therefore allowed to select element(s) before these given commands.
Open the Brackets_views06.CATDrawing document.

Using Tools
1. Multi-select 2D elements.
For example, four circles.
2. Click the desired

command. For example, the
Threads icon .
Four threads are

automatically applied to the
selected circles.
[ Up ] [ Next ]


This task will show you how to copy and paste drafting elements.
1. Select the element you want to cut or copy.
2. To copy, you can either:
● click the Copy icon

● select the Edit->Copy command
● select the Copy command in the contextual menu
This places what you copy in the clipboard.

3. To paste, you can either:
● click the Paste icon

● select the Edit->Paste command
● select the Paste command in the contextual menu
● If you delete an element after copying it, you will not be able to paste it
anymore.
● When copying and pasting views, positioning links between the views (i.e. links
which exist between a parent view and its child view, for example) will not be
kept. The only way you can keep positioning links between views is by copying
and pasting the sheet.
Styles and Default Values
Styles & Default Values

The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you use and modify the default values of element
properties.
Note that there are two different behaviors, depending on the versions with which the
drawing was created:
● Drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, or pre-R11 drawings whose standard
has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. These drawings use the styles which
are defined in the standard used by the drawing.
● Pre-R11 drawings, i.e. drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 included whose
standard has not been updated in version V5 R11 and later.
Use standard-defined styles

Use and modify styles in drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, or pre-R11
drawings whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. Styles
are defined in the standard used by the drawing. Standards are managed by the
administrator.
Set properties as default in pre-R11 drawings

Set graphical properties to elements to be created in drawings created with versions
up to V5 R10 whose standard has not been updated in version V5 R11 and later.
Use properties set as default in pre-R11 drawings

Use properties set as default in drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose
standard has NOT been updated in version V5 R11 and later.
Migrate pre-r11 drawings to drawings using standard-defined styles

Using a batch utility, migrate CATDrawing documents created with versions up to V5
R10 (which use properties "set as default"), to V5 R12 CATDrawing documents using
standard-defined styles.

This task will show you how to use styles in drawings created with version V5 R11
and later, or pre-R11 drawings whose standard has been updated or changed in
V5 R11 and later. Styles are defined in the standard used by the drawing. Standards
are managed by the administrator.
Create a new drawing. Don't forget to specify the standard that you want to use.
1. Start creating a circle, for example. In the Style toolbar, the styles available
for the type of element you are creating are displayed. In our example, two
Default styles are available: one, the current style, is to be used for curves
and the other one is to be used for construction curves.
The styles available in the toolbar depend on what your administrator specified in the
standards.
2. If you want to apply the current style to the circle, you don't need to do
anything. If you want to apply the other style, you can select it from the
Styles toolbar.
3. Click to validate and end the circle creation. The circle is created with the
selected style, as defined in the standard used by the drawing.
(Consequently, you may obtain a different result than the one shown here).

4. Now, start creating a radius dimension for this circle. Once again, the Style
toolbar displays the styles available for radius dimensions. In our example,
only one style is available, therefore it will be used by default (you don't need
to select it).
5. In the Graphic Properties toolbar, select another color, red, for example.
In the Style toolbar, an asterisk appears in front of the selected style:

this asterisk indicates that the style of the element you are creating has
changed compared to the style which is defined in the standards.

Depending on the type of style selected (curve, dimension, etc.), only the relevant
fields are available in the various properties toolbars. For example, if you select a
curve style, text and dimension properties will be disabled from the associated
toolbars.
6. At this point, you have two options:
● You can either revert to the standard-defined values (i.e. reset the toolbar
properties to their original values) by re-selecting this style from the Styles
toolbar, and then clicking to validate and end the dimension creation. The asterisk
will disappear.
● Or you can apply the modified style by clicking to validate and end the dimension
creation. For the purpose of this scenario, do this.
The dimension is created with the selected style, as defined in the standard and
overloaded by the properties you changed. (Once again, as the result depends on
the parameters defined in your standard, you may obtain a different result than
the one shown here.)
Styles are used as default values when creating elements. However, after an
element has been created, no link remains between this element and the style used
to create it.
When you select an element, no style is displayed in the Style toolbar. However, if
you expand the list, you will see the list of styles that you can apply to this element
(according to the styles that your administrator defined in the standard for this type
of element). You can change the properties of the element by selecting another style
from the list.

[ Up ] [ Next ]

Setting Properties As Default in Pre-R11

Drawings
This functionality is only available with drawings created with versions up to V5 R10.
This functionality is not available with drawings created with version V5 R11 and
later, nor with drawings created with older versions and whose standard has been
updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. These drawings use the styles which are
defined in the standard used by the drawing. Standards are managed by the
administrator.
This task shows you how to set graphical properties to elements to be created.
1. Right-click the element to be set as default when

creating other elements of the same kind. For
example, Text01.
2. Select the Set as default option from the

contextual menu.
The options displayed in the Properties toolbars (top

of the screen) are automatically updated and display
the properties corresponding to the selected element.

3. Select the Only User Default Properties option

from the style toolbar to specify that from now on,
you do not want to use the options in the Properties
toolbar as defaults.
The fields in the Properties toolbars are deactivated

and therefore cannot be modified.
4. Create a new text. For example, Text02.
The new text is automatically assigned the same

graphical properties as the text set as default.
At any time, you can edit (double-clicking) and modify one element that was applied
graphical properties. There are no links between the default element and the
elements that are applied graphical defaults.
● You can reset all the values assigned to all the elements via the Reset All Defaults
command. For this, select Tools -> Reset All Defaults from the menu bar.
● Only one text color can be taken into account when setting a text as default. For
this reason, if you set as default a text which includes strings in different colors,
only the global color will be taken into account. The global color is the color
defined when selecting the text (without editing it) and applied via the toolbar or
via Edit -> Properties.
Be careful: you can apply graphical properties only to dimensions/annotations which

are of the same type. For example, properties set as default for angle dimensions will
only apply to angle dimensions.
● Dimensions: chamfer, thread, angle, cumulate angle, diameter (all types),
distance (length included), cumulate distance (cumulate length included), radius.
● Annotations: text, text with leader, balloon, datum target, datum feature,
geometrical tolerances.



This task explains how to create a text, with possible line wrapping. This text is
assigned a frame of unlimited width, even though it may reach the frame boundary.
You can set the properties of a text (anchor point, font size, justification, etc.) either
before or after creating it.
You will learn how to perform the following operations:

● Creating a Free Text
● Specifying Text Orientation

1. Click the Text icon from the Annotations toolbar.
2. Click where you want to insert the free text on the drawing. A green frame appears,
as well as the Text Editor dialog box.
3. If you want to specify the horizontal boundary of

the text, drag the frame to where you want to place
the boundary. If you want the horizontal boundary to
adjust to your text, proceed with the following step.

4. Type your text in the Text Editor dialog box.
The drawing is automatically updated with the text you are typing in the Text Editor
dialog box.
● You can copy and paste text from another application. Its layout and properties will
not be preserved.
● You cannot copy complex objects (such as tables) from another application.
5. When you are done typing your text, click OK in
the Text Editor dialog box, click anywhere on the
drawing, or click any command. You can also click
the Select icon : in this case, the text will remain
selected so you can change its properties for
example.
You can now start setting the properties of the text

you just created using the Text Properties toolbar.
Although you can create a text in a view that is not up-to-date, you cannot associate it
to geometry. If you try to do so, the following message will appear:
Specifying Text Orientation

You can associate the text to an element and make it parallel to it. To do this, you can
do the following:
● Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Annotations tab and check Text in
Annotation Creation -> Apply snapping to. From then on, any text you create
after having selected an element will be automatically associated to this element.
OR
● When the above option is not activated, you can specify when you want to associate
a text to an element. To do so, click the Text icon and then press the shift
key while selecting the element you want the text to be associated to. You can then
type your text.
You can also make the text vertical. To do this, click the Text icon and then press the
ctrl key while clicking in the drawing where you want to create your free text.


This functionality is only available with drawings created with versions up to V5 R10.
This functionality is not available with drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, nor with drawings created with older versions and whose
standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later. These drawings use the styles which are defined in the standard used by the
drawing. Standards are managed by the administrator.
This task shows you how to use default values. To understand how to set as default an element properties, see Setting As Default Properties.
1. Create the following text, see Creating a Free Text
2. Select Properties in the contextual menu (right-click). In font tab, select the bold italic style and in text tab increase the line spacing to 5 mm.

Click ok.
The text looks like this

3. Select the Set as default option from the contextual menu.
The values you set are stored.
Click in the drawing to finish the creation.

4. Select the font SSS1 in the Text Properties Toolbar.
5. Select the Original Properties option from the style toolbar to specify that from now, you want to use the software default options apart
from the Text Properties toolbar settings.
6. Create a new text.
The line spacing is equal to 0 mm and the font is regular.
Original Properties (that is to say the settings defined in the Text Properties toolbar) are taken into account.
7. Select the User Default Properties option from the style toolbar to specify that you want to use the options set by default (see step 2) apart
from options set in the Text Properties toolbar.

In this example you have modified the font in the Text Properties toolbar, the new text will be created with default settings (see step 2.) apart
from the font.
User Default Properties (that is to say the settings set as default, apart from those defined in the Text Properties toolbar) are
taken into account.
9. Select the Only User Default Properties option from the style toolbar to specify that you want to use only the options set by default (see
step 2).
Only User Default Properties (that is to say only the settings set as default) are taken into account.
● If you selected the Lock "Only User Default" style in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, then
using Only User Default Properties is compulsory (the Styles drop-down list is set to Only User Defaults and is deactivated so that
Original Defaults or User Defaults cannot be selected). In this case, when creating new elements, all properties toolbars are deactivated to
indicate that toolbar values will not be taken into account. If you select an element after its creation, the toolbars are activated to let you
change its properties. If you don't want the properties toolbars to be deactivated when creating new elements, simply uncheck the Lock "Only
User Default" style option.

● When creating elements, the values of properties toolbars are taken into account only when the Original Properties or the User Default
Properties style is selected. In this case, you can reset the Font Name, Font Size, Tolerance Format and Numerical Display Format toolbar
properties to the values which are defined in the standard of the drawing. To do this:
1- Make sure that Original Properties or User Default Properties is activated in the Style toolbar.
2- Make sure that no element is currently selected.
3- Right-click the Style toolbar and scroll down the contextual menu if necessary.
4- Select Reset with standard properties.

The current values of the Font Name, Font Size, Tolerance Format and Numerical Display Format toolbar properties are immediately reset to
the values which are defined in the standard of the drawing.
Note that if Only User Default Properties is activated in the Style toolbar, or if an element is selected, you will not be able to use the Reset
with standard properties command.
The table below lists all the objects that can be taken into account when using the Painter or copying the object format from one object to another.
Are these taken into account?

Painter Original Properties User Default Properties Only User Default
Properties
Object Properties
Spline Name n Original properties - -
Color y Toolbar - -
Linetype y Toolbar - -
Thickness y Toolbar - -
Pickable n Original properties - -
Line Name n Original properties - -
Color y Toolbar - -

Cartesian
End Point 1 n - - -
coordinates
Polar
n - - -
coordinates
Cartesian
End Point 2 n - - -
coordinates
Polar
n - - -
coordinates
Length n - - -
Angle n - - -
Construction
n Toolbar - -
element
Point Cartesian
n - - -
coordinates
Polar
n - - -
coordinates
Construction
n Toolbar - -
element
Name n Original properties - -

Color y Toolbar - -
Symbol y Toolbar - -
Circle Cartesian
Center Point n - - -
coordinates
Polar
n - -
coordinates
Radius n - - -
Construction
n Toolbar - -
Element
Color y Toolbar - -


Ellipse Cartesian
coordinates
Polar
n - - -
coordinates
Major Radius n - - -
Minor Radius n - - -
Angle n - - -
Construction
n Toolbar - -
element
Color y Toolbar - -

Hyperbol Cartesian
Focus Point n - - -
coordinates
Polar
n - - -
coordinates
Cartesian
coordinates
Polar
n - - -
coordinates
Excentricity n - - -
Construction
n Toolbar - -
Element
Color y Toolbar - -

Parabola Cartesian
Focus Point n - - -
coordinates
Polar
n - - -
coordinates
Cartesian
Apex Point n - - -
coordinates
Polar
n - - -
coordinates
Construction
n Toolbar - -
Element

Color y Toolbar - -
Conic Cartesian
coordinates
Polar
n - - -
coordinates
Major Radius n - - -
Minor Radius n - - -
Angle n - - -
Construction
n - - -
element
Name n - - -
Color y - - -
Linetype y - - -
Thickness y - - -
Pickable n - - -
Text String n - - -
Name n Original properties
Font Font y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Style y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Size y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
UnderLine y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default

Color y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default

Ratio y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Strikethrough y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Superscript y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Subscript y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Overline y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Text Frame y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Thickness y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Line Type y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Anchor point y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
X y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Y y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Anchor Line y Original properties Original properties User-Default
Line Spacing y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Line Spacing
y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Mode
Justification y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Word wrap y Original properties Original properties User-Default
Reference y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Orientation y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Angle y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Mirroring y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Auto flip y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Graphic Thickness y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Linetype y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Pickable n Original properties -
Text with String n - - -
leader Name n Original properties
Font Font y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
UnderLine y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Ratio y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Strikethrough y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default

Superscript y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Subscript y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Overline y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Anchor point y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Anchor Line y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Line Spacing y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Line Spacing
Mode
Justification y Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Word wrap y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Mirroring y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Auto flip y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Graphic Color y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Pickable n Original properties - User-Default
View Scale n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Rotation n Original properties User-Default User-Default
View Name Prefix n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Ident n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Suffix n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Dressup Hidden Lines n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Axis n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Center Line n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Thread n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Boundary fillet n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Uncut spec Original properties Original properties Original properties

3D Wireframe Original properties Original properties Original properties

Visualization
Display View
and n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Frame
Behaviour
Lock View n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Sheet Name - Original properties Original properties Original properties
Global Scale - Original properties User-Default User-Default
Projection first angle
- Original properties User-Default User-Default
method standard
second angle
- Original properties User-Default User-Default
standard
Drawing Name - - - -
Axis Line Name n Original properties
Linetype y Original properties Original properties User-Default
Thickness y Original properties Original properties User-Default
Center Line Name n Original properties
Thread Name n Original properties
Dimension Drive
n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Geometry
Value n - - -
Value Driving n Original properties Original properties Original properties

Value
Orientation
Show dual
Dual Value y Original properties User-Default User-Default
value
Format Main Value n Original properties Original properties User-Default
Dual Value n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Fake
Numerical n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Dimension
Alphanumerical n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Tolerance Main value Upper Value y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Lower Value y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
First Value y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Second Value y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Dual value Upper Value n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Lower Value n Original properties User-Default User-Default
First Value n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Second Value n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Dimension
Representation y Original properties Original properties User-Default
Line
Orientation y Original properties Original properties User-Default
Reference y Original properties Original properties User-Default
Angle y Original properties Original properties User-Default
Thickness y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Color y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Symbol 1 Shape y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Symbol 2 Shape y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Reversal y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Foreshortened Text Position n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Orientation n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Angle n Original properties Original properties Original properties

Ratio n Original properties Original properties Original properties

Point scale n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Extension
Extremities Overrun n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Line
Blanking n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Display first
extension line
Display
second y Original properties User-Default User-Default
extension line
Funnel Height n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Angle n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Width n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Funnel mode n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Funnel side n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Dimension
Prefix - Sufix Symbol y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Text
Main Value y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Associated
Main Value y Original properties User-Default
texts
Dual Value n Original properties User-Default
Dimension
Main y Original properties User-Default
score options
Dual y Original properties User-Default
Dimension
Element y Original properties User-Default
frame options
Group y Original properties User-Default
Font Font n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
UnderLine n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Strikethrough n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Overline n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default

Graphic Color y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Linetype y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Pickable y Original properties - -
Area Fill Name n Original properties
Color - Original properties User-Default User-Default
Linetype - Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Thickness - Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Pickable n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Type Dotting Pitch y Toolbar Original properties User-Default
Zigzag y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Coloring Color y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Number of
Hatching y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
hatching
n-th hatching
y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
properties
2D Name n - - -
Component Color y Original properties - -
Linetype y Original properties - -
Thickness y Original properties - -
Pickable n Original properties -
Angle n Original properties - -
Scale n Original properties - -
X - - - -
Y - - - -
Roughness Font Font n Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Symbol Style y Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Size y Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Color y Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Text Color Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Thickness n Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Line Type n Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Anchor Point n Toolbar User-Default Original properties

Anchor Line - Original properties Original properties Original properties

Reference n Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Orientation n Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Angle n Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Line Type y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Rugosity
type
Contact
rugosity
Rugosity
mode
Name n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Welding Length of
n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Symbol weld side 1
size of weld
side 1
weld type
side 1
Length of
weld side 2
size of weld
side 2
weld type
side 2
field weld
symbol
weld-all-
around n Original properties User-Default User-Default
symbol
Font Font y Toolbar User-Default User-Default
Text Frame color Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Frame
Thickness

Frame Line
Type
Reference n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Orientation - Original properties User-Default User-Default
Angle n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Graphic Color y Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Balloon String n - - -
Style n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Size n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Color n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Text Frame color y Original properties Toolbar User-Default
Frame Line
Type
Anchor Point n Toolbar Toolbar Toolbar
Anchor Line n Original properties Original properties Toolbar
Reference n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Graphic Color y Original properties Toolbar User-Default
Datum String n - - -
Feature Name n Original properties User-Default User-Default
Style n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Size n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Color n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Text Frame color y Original properties User-Default User-Default

Frame Line
Type
Anchor Point n Toolbar Toolbar User-Default
Anchor Line n Original properties Original properties User-Default
Datum String n - - -
Target Diameter y - Original properties Original properties
Font Font y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Style y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Size y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Text Frame color y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Frame Line
Type
Anchor Point y Original properties User-Default Toolbar
Anchor Line n Original properties Original properties Original properties
Line Type y Original properties User-Default User-Default
Geometrical Name n Original properties - -
Tolerance Primary
Geometric n - - -
Characteristic
Diameter
n - - -
Zone
Tolerance
n - - -
Value
tolerance
Feature n - - -
Modifier
Primary
n - - -
Datum Text
Primary
Datum
n - - -
Feature
Modifier
Secondary
n - - -
Datum Text
Secondary
Datum
n - - -
Feature
Modifier
Tertiary
n - - -
Datum Text
Tertiary
Datum
n - - -
Feature
Modifier
Font Font n Toolbar - -
Style n Toolbar - -
Size n Toolbar - -
Color n Toolbar - -
Text Frame color y Original properties - -
Frame Line
y Original properties - -
Type
Anchor Point n Original properties - -
Anchor Line n Original properties - -
Reference n Original properties - -
Orientation n Original properties - -
Angle n Original properties - -
Graphic Color y Original properties - -
Line Type y Original properties - -


Migrating Pre-R11 Drawings to Drawings Using

Standard-Defined Styles
This task will show you how to migrate CATDrawing documents created with versions up to
V5 R10 (which use properties "set as default"), to V5 R12 CATDrawing documents using
standard-defined styles. The migration is performed using a batch utility.
For each object which uses properties "set as default" (i.e. each default object created using the
Set as Default contextual command), a new style will be created in the standard file, with the
same specifications as the default object. For more information on styles, refer to Setting
Standard Styles and Using Standard-Defined Styles.
The version of a drawing that is taken into account for the migration is the version of the
embedded standard. For example, if you created a drawing in V5 R7, and modified and saved it
in V5 R10, the version of the embedded standard is V5 R7. On the other hand, if you created a
drawing in V5 R7, and updated its standard in V5 R10 (using the Update button in the Page
Setup dialog box), then the version of the embedded standard is V5 R10.
The migration is handled differently, depending on the version of the standard embedded in the
CATDrawing document: up to V5 R8, or V5 R9 to V5 R10.
Migration process for drawings with an embedded standard up to V5 R8
If you want to keep your customized parameters, you must provide the CATDrwStandard file
associated to the drawing. Otherwise, you can provide a customized XML file (from V5 R9),
which will be updated and used in the updated drawing.

Migration process for drawings with a V5 R9 to V5 R10 embedded

standard
Standard output values are the values of the old drawing (except for new V5R12 standard
values). This is available only for V5 R9 or V5 R10 drawings, which contain standards
parameters.

1. Operate as described below, depending on whether you are on Windows or on UNIX:
● On Windows: open an MS-DOS Window. Change to the folder in which you

installed the product. The default folder is C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes
\B_XX\intel_a\code\bin where B_XX is B followed by the release number (e.g.
B12 in the case of V5R12).
● On UNIX: open a shell command window. Change to the directory in which you
installed the product. The default directory is /usr/DassaultSystemes/B_xx/OS_a/
code/command/ where B_XX is B followed by the release number (e.g. B12 in
the case of V5R12) and where OS_a is:
- aix_a
- hpux_a
- irix_a
- solaris_a
2. Run the following command:
CATAnnDefaultStyleMigration [-h] DrawingName.CATDrawing [-X] [-d

OutputDirectory]
[-n NewName] [-STDFile StandardFile]
● DrawingName.CATDrawing: Specifies the name of the drawing to migrate
● -h: Displays online help
● -d OutputDirectory: Indicates the directory where the new migrated drawing is
saved. If not specified, the new migrated drawing will be saved in the
DrawingName.CATDrawing directory.
● -n NewName: Specifies the name of the migrated drawing. If not specified, the
new migrated drawing will use the same name as the old drawing prefixed by
STD_. Example: DrawingName.CATDrawing will become STD_DrawingName.
CATDrawing.
● -X: Generates the XML file associated to the upgraded drawing. The XML file is
put in the same
directory as the output drawing. Its name is composed of the standard name
and the drawing name with the .XML extension, e.g. ISO_DrawingName.XML.
● -STDFile StandardFile: Specifies the external standard file to use. This file can
either be a CATDrwStandard or an XML file. This step is mandatory for drawings
created with versions up to V5 R8 (as they contain an embedded standard); this
step is optional in other cases. If a file is specified, the embedded standard will
be ignored whatever the drawing version is.
3. Wait until a message indicates that the migration process is finished and that the new
CATDrawing and XML file have been generated.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Sheets
Sheets
The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to manipulate a sheet.
A sheet contains:
● a main view: a view which supports the geometry directly created in the sheet
● a background view: a view dedicated to frames and title blocks
● interactive or generated views
Define the sheet

Define the sheet using commands and dialog boxes.
Modify the sheet

Modify the sheet orientation using the Page Setup dialog box.
Delete the sheet

Create a background sheet and insert a frame and a title block into it using the
Frame and Title Block dialog box.
Switch a drawing to another standard

Switch a drawing to another standard when several standards have been defined
by an administrator.
Update the standard of a drawing

Update the standard used by a drawing.
Create a frame title block

Insert a .gif image into a title block.
Defining a Sheet
Defining a Sheet
This task will show you how to define a sheet.
For more information about drafting workbench access, see Entering the Interactive
Drafting Workbench.
1. Click the New icon or select File -> New.
2. Select the Drawing workbench, and click OK.
3. From the New Drawing dialog box, select the

ISO standard, and the A0 ISO format.
4. Select the Landscape orientation.
5. Select the 1:1 scale, and then click OK.
● You can create your own format:

❍ key in the format name in the Format field,
❍ use the tab key to access to the Width and Height fields and sets their values.
● You can add an unlimited number of customized standards using the Standards
Editor. Once created, this standard will appear in the New Drawing dialog box. For
more details on standards, see the Standards Administration section. Care that
any user-defined standard is based on one of the four international standards
(ANSI, ISO,ASME or JIS) as far as basic parameters are concerned.

Defining a Sheet
● The sheet scale is a scaling factor which applies to all views in a given sheet. It
does not determine the position of the views (or any other object) contained in
the sheet.
When the grid is displayed, the position of the view in the sheet is not determined
by the grid, which only deals with what is drawn directly in the sheet. To see the
real position of a given view in a sheet, you need to use the ruler. It is the only
way to see the real coordinates in a sheet referential.
● At any time, you can change the standard (which you can update), sheet format,
orientation and/or scale. To do this, select File->Page Setup from the menu
bar.
If you select a new standard, the value in the Apply on field becomes All sheets
and the new standard is applied to all drawing sheets annotations.
● The sheet size depends on the standard type. For example, if you choose the ISO
standard, the sheet will automatically be assigned the A0 format type. You can
choose another format if you want.

Defining a Sheet
To add a new sheet, click the New Sheet icon . The new sheet automatically
appears as follows:
The Insert Elements into a Sheet dialog box appears. For more details, see Managing
a Background View in the Generative Drafting User's Guide.
Once you have created more than one sheet, to activate one of the sheets, select
this sheet from the dialog window.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Modifying a Sheet
Modifying a Sheet
This task will show you how to modify the standard, format, orientation and/or scale
of a sheet. Doing this amounts to modifying the options you selected in the New
Drawing dialog box when defining the sheet.
Create a sheet using the ISO standard, the A0 ISO format, and the Landscape
orientation in the New Drawing dialog box.
1. Select File -> Page Setup from the menu bar. The Page Setup dialog box
appears.
2. From the Page Setup dialog box, select the
ANSI standard, and the A ANSI format.
You can update the current standards by clicking

the Update button. This copies the most recent
version of the standard file in the drawing, thus
reflecting the latest changes an administrator or
user may have performed in the standard file.
3. Select the Portrait orientation, and then click

OK. The sheet is modified.

Modifying a Sheet

Deleting a Sheet
Deleting a Sheet
This task will show you how to delete a sheet. When a CATDrawing document is
opened, one sheet is necessarily displayed.
You created more than one sheet.
1. Select the sheet

from the specification
tree. For example,
Sheet 2.
2. Right-click the
selected sheet and
display the contextual
menu.
3. Select the Delete

option from the
contextual menu.
Sheet 2 is deleted.

When a standard file is modified, there is no automatic update of the drawings which
use this standard. Each drawing contains a copy of the standard it uses, and retains
this version until you explicitly update this copy.
In this task, you will learn how to update the standard used by a drawing.
Open any existing CATDrawing file.
1. Select File -> Page Setup from the menu bar. The Page Setup dialog box
opens, displaying the standard currently used by the drawing.
2. Click the Update button to update the current standard.

The most recent version of the updated standard is copied into the
drawing and the previous standard parameter values are replaced by the
latest ones, reflecting the latest changes an administrator or user may
have performed in the standard file. This may have an immediate impact
on the appearance of the elements inside the drawing.
Since there is no automatic update of drawings when a standard file is modified, you
need to update the standard of drawings created before V5 R9 if you want them to
benefit from the new parameters.


In this task, you will learn how to switch a drawing to another standard when several
standards have been defined by an administrator.
Open any existing CATDrawing file.
1. Select File -> Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box opens, displaying the
standard currently used by the drawing.
2. From the Standard drop-down list, choose another standard.
3. Click OK.

The parameters of the chosen standard are copied into the drawing and
replace the previous parameters. This may have an immediate impact on
the appearance of the elements inside the drawing.


This task shows you how to insert a frame and a title block on the background sheet.
This operation is performed using a macro. A few macros are provided by default.
You can customize frames and title blocks by either modifying the default macros (to
add actions) or creating your own macros (to add specific formats).
Open a CATDrawing document.
1. Select Edit -> Background from the menu bar.
2. Click the Frame Creation icon
from the Drawing toolbar.
The Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box is displayed.
3. Choose a macro from the Style of Titleblock drop-down list. For the purpose of this
exercise, choose Drawing_Titleblock_Sample1. A preview of the frame and title block
is displayed.

4. Indicate the action you want to perform in the Action list.

● Creation: creates the frame and the title block
● Deletion: deletes the frame and the title block
● Resizing: resizes the frame and the title block (if you change the page format in
File -> Page Setup)
● Update: updates the frame and title block if the part has been modified
● CheckedBy: completes the "Checked by" field and automatically update the
verification date
● AddRevisionBlock: adds a revision block
Information which is not available in the part will be substituted by "XXX" in the
drawing.
5. Click OK in the Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box.
About customizing frames and title blocks using

macros

To customize frames and title blocks using macros, you must be familiar with Visual
Basic. Refer to the Automation Documentation for more information.
Specifying the location of frame and title block macros
To know where frame and title block macros are located, go to Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab. The field available in the
Background View section indicates the path to the directory containing these
macros. You can add new macros in the specified directory, and/or you can change
this location by editing the field.
Creating preview images
You can create a preview image of the frame and title block that will be displayed in
the Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box. When saving this preview image this,
make sure you do the following:
● Save the preview image as a bitmap file (.bmp extension) bearing the same name
as the macro. For example, if your macro is called CustomMacro.CATScript, then
the preview image should be named CustomMacro.bmp (or CustomMacro.jpg, etc.)
● Save the image in the directory which contains the macros. For example, if your
macro CustomMacro.CATScript is located in the CustomMacros directory, then the
preview image CustomMacro.bmp must also be located in the CustomMacros
directory.
Adding new actions

Available actions for a given macro are listed in the Action list in the Insert Frame
and Title Block dialog box. You can add new actions by defining new Sub procedures.
There are a couple of things you need to remember when doing this:
● All Sub procedures must be prefixed using CATDrw_: for example, Sub
CATDrw_CustomProcedure().
● Do not pass any argument to this new procedure.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Views
Views
Interactive Drafting elements necessarily need to be positioned in a view. In other
words, you will first create a view on a sheet and then add 2D geometry, dimensions,
annotations and/or dress-up elements in this view.
Create views
Create a front view and then projection views.
Define the view plane

Define the plane of a view (a front view, an isometric view or an auxiliary view).
Create views using folding lines

Add geometry in views using folding lines as an assistant.
Create a multiple view projection

Generate geometry in a view by projecting geometry from previously defined
views.
Reframe a view
Reframe a view so as to display only part of it.
Creating Views
Creating Views
This task will show you how to create views. If the sheet is active, the first view you
create is by default a front view.
1. Click the New View icon .
2. Click the Drawing window.
A blue axis displays in a red frame. The front view created displays in the specification
tree.
You can now create 2D geometry in this view.
3. Click the New View icon again and select a projection direction to create more
views.
The views created are projection views as they are linked to the front view.
From an active front view, you can create:

● a top view
● a bottom view
● a left view
● a right view

Creating Views
If you need to switch to the Third angle projection method, specify it via the Sheet
Properties option.
4. Activate one of the projection views by double-clicking it. For example, double-click
the contour of a bottom view.
5. Click the New View icon for creating the rear
view.
The following table shows the possibilities of view creation according to the active view.
Resulting Projection Views

Active View
(linked to the active view)
Bottom view
Top view
Front view
Right view
Left view

Creating Views
Left view
Rear views or Auxiliary views
Right view
Rear view Auxiliary view
[ Up ] [ Next ]


This task will show you how to define the plane of a view (a front view, an isometric
view or an auxiliary view).
Any created view lies on a 3D plane. In other words, a view lies on some kind of a 3D
plane whose definition can be accessed using the Plane Definition dialog box. The view
plane can be defined and if needed, modified in this dialog box. The view plane will be
defined in accordance with two vectors and an origin point.
This view plane definition functionality will be used, via the Plane Definition dialog box
for acknowledging the 3D relationship between views. This will be the case when
creating a multiple view projection or when creating views using folding lines.
● Define the front view plane
● Define the auxiliary view plane
● Define the isometric view plane
Define the front view plane:

Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane_Front.CATDrawing document.
Activate the view in which you want to change the plane definition, by double-clicking
on this view.
1. Click the View Plane Definition icon from the Multi View toolbar (not
displayed by default).
OR

1. Select the Tools -> Multi View -> View Plane Definition command from the
menu bar.
The View Plane Definition dialog box appears with options on the view plane
definitions for front views, auxiliary views and isometric views.
2. Select the desired options from the View Plane Definition dialog box. In this case,
enter 1 as the Y value for Vector1 and 1 as the Z value for Vector2.
3. Press OK.
Define the auxiliary view plane:

Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane.CATDrawing document.
For creating an auxiliary view, you need to create any view first and then modify the
view plane you want. In this case, we created an auxiliary view.
Activate the view in which you want to change the plane definition, by double-clicking
on this view.
OR
menu bar.
The View Plane Definition dialog box appears.

2. Click in another orthogonal view one line that will be used to define the auxiliary
view plane.

The Plane Definition dialog box automatically displays the corresponding vectors and
origin point. The Rotate Auxiliary View Axis option is activate, by default.

3. Press OK.
The axis automatically rotates in accordance with the dialog box values applied to the
selected plane.

Define the isometric view plane:

Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane_Isom.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the New View icon in order to create an empty view. In this case, position
the cursor so as to create an isometric view.
Make sure the view in which you want to change the plane definition is active. For this,
double-click on this isometric view.

OR
menu bar.
The Plane Definition dialog box appears.
3. Enter the desired options from the dialog box (Isometric).
OR
3. Select the desired pre-defined isometric view vectors. In this case, select YZX.

4. Press OK.


This task will show you how to add geometry in views using folding lines as an
assistant. This is true for any kind of view, as long as the planes they correspond to
are not parallel. For example, you cannot have folding lines between a front view and
a rear view.
Open the IntDrafting_Views_FoldingLines.CATDrawing document.
Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting (General tab) and

deactivate the Grid display option from the dialog box.
Make sure the view in which you are going to create geometry using folding lines is
active.
1. Right-click the view to used as

reference.
In this particular case, right-click the
bottom view (which is not active and
therefore squared in blue).
2. Select the object ->Show folding

Lines option
from the displayed contextual menu.
In the case of more complex geometry,

you can select one or more element(s) in
the reference view and display the
corresponding folding lines. As a result,
the views are not overloaded with folding
lines.
This is also true in the case of 2D components.
The folding lines appear.

At any time, you can right-click the view

and suppress these folding line using the
option
(contextual menu).
3. Click the Profile icon and create geometry in the top view using autodetection
on folding lines.
What you are now going to do is create geometry in the left view, of course using
folding lines.

4. Right-click the left view in which you

are going to create geometry and select
the option
from the contextual menu.
The folding lines disappear.
5. Right-click both non active views one after the other and select the
option from the displayed contextual menu on each of these

views.
The folding lines now appear as shown

here:

6. Click the Profile icon and create

geometry in the left view using
autodetection on folding lines.
7. Click a view and move it.

Even when views are not aligned, folding lines remain associative.

All the above described functionalities are also true in the case of views with a
different scale.


This task will show you how to generate geometry in a view by projecting geometry
from previously defined views. Selected objects are projected onto a plane or ruled
surface defined by the user, and then transformed into the receiving view. Projected
geometry retains the same attributes it had in the original multi-view.
1. You will first add elements to an existing view, using the Action-Object mode.
2. You will then create an isometric view from scratch, using the Object-Action
mode.
Open the Combivu_views01_CATDrawing document.
Activate the view you want to create the new geometry in.
MAKE SURE THE PLANES WERE PROPERLY INITIALIZED.
Add elements to an existing view, using the Action-Object mode

1. Click the Multiple View Projection icon
from the Multi View toolbar (not
OR
Select the Tools -> Multi View -> Multiple View Projection command from the menu
bar.
2. Select the object defining the target plane or surface to be used. This element can
be any mono-parametered elements (line, circle, ellipse, parabola, hyperbola, curve).
In this case, select an arc of a circle in the front view.
3. Select, in another view, the object to be projected. In this case, select a circle in the
top view.
4. Select more elements to be projected, if needed, or click in the open space or still
another command if you want to terminate this command.

Create an isometric view from scratch, using the Object-Action

mode
1. Make the isometric view active (double-click).
2. Multi-select the elements to be projected into the isometric empty view. In this
case, select the whole front view.
3. Click the Multiple View Projection icon from the Multi View toolbar.
4. Select the object defining the view to be created.

All the elements are automatically projected onto the active view.
5. Repeat the steps above (Object-Action) with the various elements to be projected
that will allow generating the isometric view.

The projected element keep the same graphical attributes as the selected element to
be projected.

Reframing a View
Reframing a View
In this task, you will learn how to reframe a view so as to display only part of it.
Open the Visual_clipping.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the view and right-click the view frame.
2. In the contextual menu, choose Properties.
3. Click the View tab.
4. In the Visualization and Behaviour area, select the Visual Clipping check box.
5. Click OK. The new frame appears as a rectangle in the

view.
You can now define the position and size of your frame on the
view.
6. Click on the frame to select it.

Reframing a View
7. Drag the manipulators to resize the frame as you want. For

example, resize the frame so as to display about a quarter of
the view.
8. Now, drag one of the boundaries of the frame to specify its

position on the view. For example, move the frame so as to
display only the upper left area of the view.

Reframing a View
The frame is now displayed in the view as you defined it.
● The frame can only be rectangular.

● You can reframe any type of view: front views, isometric views, details views,
clipping views, etc.
● To remove the frame and display the view as it was originally before you reframed
it, simply unselect the Visual Clipping check box.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

2D Components
2D Components
At any time, you can create a component or a component catalog. You will then
instantiate this component, or detail, on a detail sheet (be this component from a
catalog or not).
Before you Begin

Create a 2D component
Create a detail sheet and then create and position a detail on this sheet (local).
Re-use a 2D component
Instantiate 2D components from a detail previously created on a detail sheet
(local).
Explode a 2D component
Individually explode an 2D component that you will then possibly modify.
Create a component catalog

Create a catalog referencing 2D components from a drawing (external).
Re-use a 2D component from a catalog

Instantiate a 2D component previously referenced in a catalog (external).
Expose a 2D component from a catalog

Expose a 2D component to cut any existing link between this 2D component and
its reference in a catalo.
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
What's a 2D Component?
A 2D component is a re-usable set of geometry and annotations. This component is located in a
sheet and can be edited like a view. This is why we call this component a detail view. The 2D
component can be instantiated several times, each instance providing a component with a specific
orientation, position and scale. The detail view can be either in the same drawing as the
CATDrawing of the corresponding instances or in a separate CATDrawing.
What's a Component Catalog?

The catalog is a separate file which references the detail views, enabling to group the components,
to classify them and to add information and attributes to these components. This allows overall
management of the components. Moreover, the catalog browser can be used to choose a
component and instantiate it in a drawing document.
You can synchronize external catalog components. In other words, you may update a component
(or ditto) that is external to the 2D. Note that associativity is kept. For this, go to Edit->Link
(menu bar) and select the Synchronize switch from the displayed dialog box.
You can prevent manipulating a 2D component (the whole 2D component). For this, go to Tools ->
Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Geometry tab and de-activate the Allow Direct
Manipulation option.
General Concepts For Using Catalogs

Creating a 2D component in a detail sheet
You will find below a reminder on how to instantiate a component from a reference element that is
internal to the document.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt1208.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 12:13:08 PM

Before You Begin
1: reference component 2: instantiated component
Saving a 2D Component in a Catalog
You will find below how to instantiate a component from a reference element that is external to the
document.

Before You Begin
1: local copy of reference component

2: instantiated components
3: catalog entry
4: external reference component
● When you create a 2D component in a detail sheet, store this component into a catalog and you
can perform modifications to this component on the detail sheet. There are two ways for updating
the catalog file:
- you can make a Save As Catalog on the same catalog. Be careful: in this case, the catalog is
re-generated not updated. In other words, any modification applied to the catalog will be lost.
- you can manually modify the catalog using the catalog editor. For more information, refer to
the Component Catalog Editor User's Guide.
● When you instantiate a component from a catalog, this component appears on the sheet. In
addition, this component definition is locally copied but you cannot visualize this copy. In that

Before You Begin
way, the instantiated component becomes a component which references this locally copied
component. As a result, if the origin component disappears, the link between the locally copied
component and the origin component is broken BUT the component can still be used. If the
image of the component in the catalog is modified and therefore different from the instantiated
component, you can go to Edit->Links option from the menu bar and click the Synchronize
switch (Links of Document dialog box).
● The Links of Document dialog box shows all the local copies and the states of the copies links.
So, synchronizing amounts to updating the local copy based on the origin component
modifications. Once the local copy is synchronized, all the instantiated components referencing
this local copy are simultaneously updated.
● When you save a component in a catalog, you actually make a photo of the image of this
component and also create a link which allows to find the origin component. As a result, if you
modified the origin component and now try to instantiate this component from the catalog, the
instantiated component will result different from what you expected.
You will find here two possible scenarios which will help you get what you expected:
Scenario 1: if a component in a detail sheet and in a catalog are different from each others and if
you update the catalog (Save As from the detail sheet), be careful: you will loose the catalog
modifications.
Scenario 2: suppose both the detail sheet and the catalog are similar (Save As from the detail
sheet). When you instantiate the component from the catalog into the drawing, if the instantiated
component is different from the component that was saved in the catalog, please go to Edit-
>Links command from the menu bar and click the Synchronize switch button. In fact, the origin
reference component was locally copied and can only be updated using the Links of Document
dialog box.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

This task will show you how to create a detail sheet and then position a 2D component
on this sheet. This 2D component will then be instantiated on a design drawing sheet.
Differentiating the design sheet from the detail sheet allows assigning a structure to
the document. This means separating the drawing elements from the re-usable
components.
1. Click the New Detail Sheet icon

from the Drawing toolbar
(Sheets sub-toolbar).
The newly created detail sheet

automatically appears.
A view is automatically created at the

bottom left corner of the sheet.
If you need to create another new

view, click the New View icon
from the Drawing toolbar.
A new view appears on the sheet.

3. Create a 2D component inside this

new view. For example, create two
circles on the detail sheet.
Note that you can customize both the design and the detail sheet background colors.
For more information, see Infrastructure User's Guide.

Re-using a 2D Component
This task shows you how to re-use a 2D component. In this particular case, we will instantiate a 2D
component previously created on a detail sheet. Select a task:
● Creating a 2D Component instance
● Positioning a 2D Component instance during creation
● Adding a leader to a 2D Component
● Automating 2D Component instance creation with VB script
● Modifying text in 2D Component instances
● Replacing the reference of a 2D Component instance
● Specifying annotation orientation in 2D Component instances
Open the Position_Component.CATDrawing document.
Creating a 2D Component instance
1. Double-click the view in which you want to

instantiate the 2D component.
This view is now active.
2. Click the Instantiate 2D Component icon .

Note that to position several 2D components on the
sheet and keep the scale and angle properties for all
these components, you need to double- click the
Instantiate 2D Component icon .
3. Go to the detail sheet Sheet2(Detail) and click the

component.
You can select the 2D component from the design tree. You can also select a component that already
exists on the drawing sheet.

The drawing sheet automatically displays the sheet

containing the starting view.
4. Position the component using the picking assistant.
You can use the Tools toolbar for positioning the

component either before or after you instantiate the 2D
component.
5. If needed, select the component and use the

displayed manipulators to modify the component.
You can also modify a group of objects including a 2D

component. For this, multi-select the group of object
and perform the desired modification(s).
To find easily and edit the reference 2D Component, double-click or right-click on the 2D component you
have instantiated, and choose Edit 2D reference option in the contextual menu.
Positioning a 2D Component instance during creation

Open the Position_Component02.CATDrawing document.
1. At any time as you instantiate a component, you can re-position it using the Position dialog box that
appears.

2. Click the Change the component origin option from the Position dialog box.
3. On the component, click the point which you want to use as the component origin: this makes it easier
to position this component.
4. Click the Change the component angle option

from the Position dialog box.
5. Click in the view once the component angle axis

corresponds to the position you want to assign to the
component.
You can also flip the component according to either the x axis or the y axis. If you click the Flip
component horizontally option , the component flips on the horizontal axis of the detail. If you
click the Flip component vertically option , the component flips on the vertical axis of its
reference .
Adding a leader to a 2D component

Create a 2D component following the scenario Creating 2D component instance.
1. Right-click the 2D component and select Add Leader.
2. Select the element you want to associate to the 2D component, or click in empty space.
Automating 2D component instance creation with VB script

1. Go to Tools -> Macro and select Start recording.

2. Key in the macro name and click on start button.
3. Create a 2D component instance using the Instantiate Detail icon .
4. Stop the recording clicking the following icon or go to Tools -> Macro and select Stop
Recording.
Now you can create this 2D component instance automatically.
5. Delete the previous 2D Component instance. Go to Tools -> Macro -> Macros, select the macro and
click the run button
This macro will be available only in this drawing.

6. A 2D component instance will be created at the same place as the previous one.
Modifying text in 2D Component Instances

This functionality allows you to modify 2D component texts.
1. Click the detail sheet tab, activate the 2D component view (double-click this view), insert a text in the
2D component and create a 2D component instance.

2. Right-click on the 2D component reference text:
3. Check Modifiable in instance.

The text will be modifiable in existing instances as well as in newly-created instances.
4. Once again, create a 2D component instance.
5. In Sheet.1, double-click on the first 2D component instance text you have created, modify it and click
to validate. Then, double-click on the second text, modify it and click to validate.
Both texts are modifiable.

● Attribute links may be added in the text content.

● Once a text becomes modifiable, it is not possible to make it non-modifiable.
● When a 2D component text becomes modifiable, texts can be modified in new instances as well as in
existing instances.
● For 2D component instances created with a catalog, if a text becomes modifiable in the catalog, you
have to synchronize the external reference to make the 2D component instance text modifiable too
(see Creating a catalog in the Infrastructure User's Guide).
● If you create a 2D component reference (called MYREF for example) containing a 2D component
instance with a modifiable text, the text will not be modifiable in instances of MYREF.
● If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the Apply Scale property for
the text (in Edit -> Properties) and the Create with a constant size setting (in Tools -> Options -
> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab): the size of both the 2D
component and its text will then be independent from the view scale.
Replacing the Reference of a 2D Component Instance

Create a 2D component instance.
1. Right-click on an instance, and from the contextual menu, select Replace Reference for this instance.
2. Select another instance (this instance reference will be taken into account) or a 2D component in a
local sheet of detail.
The 2D component instance reference is replaced.
You cannot use a catalog to replace a 2D component instance reference. To bypass this, use an instance
created with this catalog.
When replacing the reference of a 2D component instance, any existing text in the original 2D component
instance is also replaced, even if this existing text had been previously modified (see Modifying text in 2D
Component instances for more information on this point).
Specifying annotation orientation in 2D Component Instances

This functionality allows you to fix the text orientation in the 2D Component. In the 2D Component
Instances, the text will keep the same orientation even if the 2D component instance is rotated or flipped.


1. Right-click on the text.
Select Properties and Text tab.
Choose to orientate the text horizontally relating to the sheet.
2. Create two 2D Component Instances, one without modifying the orientation and one orienting a 2D
Component instance during creation. For the second instance, set the angle with the sheet to: 130°.
The 2D Component Text orientation in relation to the sheet is kept.

Not available for tables.
Text oriented view, summary table:
Original Flip
Horizontal Vertical Flip Vertical Rotate
orientation Horizontal
Text rotate with 2D

component instance
Text orientation is
fixed and
independent from 2D
component instance
orientation


This task will show you how to create 2D components in a drawing repository.
In this particular case, we will create a component from re-usable geometry that exist
in a design sample CATDrawing document into a drawing repository. Note that what
you can do is create the desired geometry from scratch as you create the catalog
component. For this, you may, for example, copy the geometry, use Sketcher
commands or insert a DXF/DWG file.
You will thus be able to start creating a catalog (pointing the newly created
component). In this catalog, component descriptions will be sorted identically to the
drawing and sheet structure.
We strongly advise that in a catalog you instantiate one part per sheet (multi-
representation part) or one part family per sheet (mono-representation part).
● Add a Detail View in a Detail Sheet

● Add Existing Geometry to the Detail View
● Create the Component Catalog
Open the DesignSample.CATDrawing document.
Add a Detail View in a Detail Sheet

1. Open the BoldSample.CATDrawing document.
2. Click Bolds sheet (detail sheet in which the component is to be created).
3. Click the New View icon from the Drawing toolbar and position it on the sheet.

Add Existing Geometry to the Detail View

Design Sample:
4. Select the geometry to be

copied from the Design
Sample CATDrawing.
5. Select Edit->Copy from

the menu bar.
6. Go back to the Bold

Sample CATDrawing and
select Edit->Paste from the
menu bar.
2D Component Repository:
The geometry is copied with
the same coordinates as in
the design sample.
If needed, re-position the

component geometry using
the Translate command
and make sure you de-
activate the Duplicate option
in the Translation Definition
dialog box.
7. Select File->Save from the menu bar and save the BoldSample.CATDrawing
document (repository document).

The catalog does not include the geometrical definition of the 2D component. This
definition is included in the CATDrawing document. This is why you absolutely need to
save this CATDrawing document.
Create the Component Catalog
8. Select File->Save As from

the menu bar and generate
the component catalog
pointing the newly
positioned component.
The Save as type "catalog" functionality is a simple way for creating a catalog.
If you want to edit the component, select File -> Open from the menu bar and open
the component.
See Infrastructure User's guide for more details on this functionality.

Re-using a 2D Component from a Catalog

This task shows you how to re-use a 2D component you previously referenced in a
catalog.
Create a component catalog and enter a new CATDrawing in which you want to insert
one or more 2D components.
1. Click the Catalog Browser icon from the Catalog toolbar.
The Catalog Browser dialog box appears with the following information:
● the name of the
currently opened
catalog.
● the catalog chapter
tree.
● a preview of the
selected component.
● the possibility to
perform a query on
available components
(see Knowledge
Advisor User's Guide
for more details on
formulas).
2. Click the Browse

another catalog option
from the Catalog

Browser dialog box and
open the BoldSample.
catalog document from
the \online\driug
\samples directory.
3. Double-click the Bolds chapter from the chapter tree.
The list with the components included in the Bolds chapter appears in the dialog box.

4. Click Detail.7 from the

list available.
You now have a preview
of the component you
just selected.
5. Drag the detail from

the list and position this
detail onto the desired
CATDrawing.
(at this step, the dialog
is the same as when you
re-use a 2D component).
6 Click to end detail

location.
What you can also do is
display the contextual
menu on the selected
component and select
the Instantiate
option. You will then
position the component
on the CATDrawing.
If you double-click the
component from the
Catalog Browser, the
following dialog box
appears which allows
modifying the 2D
component origin or
angle.
● The CATDrawing in which you locally instantiated a catalog component is
autonomous. In other words, you do not necessarily need the catalog to be able to
read the CATDrawing.
● There is a link that exists between the CATDrawing and the catalog.

This task shows you how to individually explode an 2D component that was instantiated
from a detail sheet. You will then modify as desired this component.
Open the Explode_Component.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click the component that was previously instantiated from the detail sheet and
select the Explode 2D Component option from the contextual menu.
The component is now exploded. You can therefore modify the geometry and/or
graphical properties on one or more elements of this component.
2. Click the text and re-position it.
3. Select one line on the top of the hexagon and use the Graphical Properties toolbar to
change the color into red.
The component now appears as desired:



In this task, you will learn how to expose a 2D component. Exposing a 2D component lets
you cut any existing link between a 2D component instance and its reference in a catalog.
This will also allow you to modify the 2D component locally (without modifying the 2D
component catalog reference).
Exposing a 2D component amounts to creating a 2D component reference (a detail). In a

given document, all 2D component instances that pointed the former 2D component
catalog reference will then point the exposed 2D component reference.
Open the Expose_2D_Component.CATDrawing document. The frame and title block

contained in this drawing is a 2D component that was instantiated from a catalog.
1. Right-click the 2D component (i.e. the frame and title block) to display the
contextual menu.
2. Select 2D Component (Instance).2 object -> Expose 2D Component. A
message appears, informing you that, as no detail sheet exists in this drawing, a
detail sheet was created for the 2D component.
In the case of a drawing with an existing detail sheet, the 2D component will be created on
this detail sheet.
3. Click OK. All links are now cut between the 2D component instance and its catalog
reference.
4. In the detail sheet, you can now modify the 2D component reference. For example,
enter your company name.

In this scenario, we are modifying text as an example of 2D component reference

modification. However, the Modifiable in instance contextual command is specifically
intended for modifying texts in 2D component instances. See Re-Using a 2D Component for
more information on modifying text in 2D component instances.
5. In the sheet, notice that the 2D component has been modified. On the other hand,
the 2D component reference in the catalog is left unchanged.

[ Back ] [ Up ]

Dimensions
Dimensions
The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create and modify
given types of dimensions using the Dimensions toolbar:
Before You Begin:

You should be familiar with basic concepts.
Create dimensions:
Create dimensions by clicking elements.
Create half-dimensions:
Create half dimensions on distance, angle, diameter, cylinders, diameter edges
and diameter tangents but not on cumulate dimensions.
Create cumulated dimensions:

Create cumulated dimensions on a view using selection.
Create stacked dimensions:

Create stacked dimensions using selection.
Create explicit dimensions:

Create dimensions using explicit selection both of the desired icon and of the
required geometrical elements.
Create/modify angle dimensions:

Create an angle dimension and perform the following kinds of modifications: new
angle sector or turn an angle sector into a supplementary sector.
Create chamfer dimensions:

Create a chamfer dimension using selection.

Dimensions
Create associative thread dimensions:
Create associative thread dimensions.
Create/modify coordinate dimensions:

Automatically create coordinate dimensions on elements.
Create a holes dimensions table:
Create a table containing holes dimensions (diameter and center coordinates).
Create points coordinates table:
Create a table containing 2D and 3D points coordinates.
Create/modify radius curvature dimensions:

Create and modify a radius curvature dimension. This lets you know the
curvature radius at a given point on a curve (spline, ellipse, etc.).
Create overall curve dimensions:

You can create dimensions on the overall size of any kind of curve, whether it is
canonical or not (e.g.: line, circle, ellipse, spline, etc.). You can also create
dimensions on the overall size between 2 curves, or between a curve and a line,
for example.
Create curvilinear length dimensions:

You can create dimensions for the curvilinear length of a curve, i.e. measure the
overall length of a curve.
Create dimensions along a reference direction:

You can create dimensions along a direction of measure. In other words, you can
measure the projection of a segment/distance onto a direction.
Create dimensions between intersection points

You can create dimensions between an intersection point and an element or
between two intersection points.
Create dimensions for technological features

You can create dimensions for technological features such as electrical harness.
As technological features can specify the way they should be dimensioned,
technological feature dimensioning allows you to create only realistic and
customized dimensions, based on the know-how of a given field.

Dimensions
Create dimensions between an element and a view axis:

Create dimensions between an element and a view axis (one of the two axes or
the origin).
Modify the dimension type:

Modify the dimension type as you create a dimension. On other words, you
modify the dimension attributes.
Re-route dimensions:
Re-route dimensions, i.e. recalculate dimensions taking into account new
geometry elements.
Interrupt one or more extension lines:

Interrupt manually one or more extension lines of one or more dimensions,
either using the contextual menu or the Insert menu bar option.
Modify the dimension line location:

Use the mouse to modify dimension line location either before or after creating
dimensions.
Modify the dimension value text position:

Use the cursor to modify dimension value text position.
Specify the dimension value position:

Automatically or explicitly position the dimension value inside or outside the area
between extremity symbols.
Add text before/after the dimension value:

Insert text before or after the dimension value.
Modify the dimension overrun/blanking:

Use the Blanking Edition dialog box to modify dimension overrun or blanking.
Line up dimensions (free space):

Line up dimensions relatively to a point in the free space.
Line up dimensions (reference):

Line up dimensions according to a given reference.
Create a datum feature:

Use the Datum Feature Creation dialog box to create a datum feature.

Dimensions
Modify a datum feature:
Modify a datum feature by editing it.
Create a geometrical tolerance:

Use the Geometric Dimensioning And Tolerancing Parameters dialog box to
create geometrical tolerances.
Modify a geometrical tolerance:

Use the Geometric Dimensioning And Tolerancing Parameters dialog box to
modify geometrical tolerances.
Copy a geometrical tolerance:

Copy an existing geometrical tolerance and then edit the content for creating a
new one.
Create driving dimensions

Create dimensions that will drive associated constrained geometry.

Before You Begin
Before You Begin

You should be familiar with the following concepts:
Creating Dimensions
You can create (and therefore modify) the following types of dimensions:
Dimensions created on one element:

● Length dimensions
● Diameter dimensions
● Radius dimensions
● Radius curvature dimensions
Dimensions created on two elements:

● Distance dimensions
● Angle dimensions
● Diameter/Radius Cylinder dimensions
Note that you can create half-dimensions on distance, angle, diameter cylinder,
diameter edge and diameter tangent dimensions but not on cumulate dimensions.
Modifying the Dimension Attributes

You can modify the following attributes at any time before you click to validate the
dimension creation:
Modify while creating:

● Type
● Measure direction
● Angle sector
● One symbol
● Diameter/Radius center
Modify while or just after creating:

● Value position

Before You Begin
● Extension line overrun/blanking (either one or both)

● Text before/after
● Properties (see further down)
● Swap to diameter/radius
Manipulating Dimensions
By default, when manipulating dimensions, you will use the following functionalities:
● dimension following the cursor: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design ->
Drafting -> Dimension tab, to use automatic positioning
● global move: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting ->
Dimension tab, to move precisely dimension line, dimension value, secondary part
of a dimension line.
● blanking manipulators (available when modifying a dimension): go to Tools ->
Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, not to visualize
blanking manipulators or to visualize other manipulators either when creating or
when modifying a dimension (Overrun, Blanking, Insert text before, Insert text
after, Move value, Move dimension line, Move DimLine Secondary Part).
● value snapped between the dimension lines symbols: go to Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, if you do not want to have the
possibility to snap the dimension value between both symbols of the dimension line
and/or you want to snap the dimension position on the grid.
● during creation: to switch temporarily the Dimension following the cursor option,
hold on the ctrl key.
● during creation and edition: to switch temporarily the Activate Snapping option,
hold on the shift key. Clicking on the dimension symbols will invert them.
● during angle dimension creation: if the Dimension following the cursor option is
activated, you can swap the angle sector according to the mouse position holding on
the ctrl and shift keys. If the Dimension following the cursor option is not
activated, you can swap to the complementary angle sector holding on the ctrl key
and clicking on the dimension line.
You can apply given properties to all the dimensions you are going to create. For this,
use the Dimension Properties toolbar.

Before You Begin
● Line type (regular, two parts, one part leader, or two parts leader)
● Tolerance type
● Tolerance value
● Numerical Display Format
● Precision.
● For the ISOCOMB combined tolerance, use the following type of syntax in the
tolerance value field: H6 (+0.5 / -0.3)
● When creating a new drawing, the Unit field (here: NUM.DIMM) drives the unit of the
dimensions to be created.
The value which is used by default in this field is usually defined in the standards
(Tools -> Standards -> [StandardName] -> General ->
DefaultNumericalFormatLength or DefaultNumericalFormatAngle).
However, if no value is defined in the standards, the one which will be used by
default is that defined as your default unit choice in Tools -> Options ->
Parameters and Measure -> Units tab.
● When editing an existing drawing, if you change your default unit choice in Tools ->
Options -> Parameters and Measure -> Units tab, then the numerical display
format which best corresponds to the selected unit is automatically selected in the
toolbar instead of the current default value.

Before You Begin
Using Styles
You can use styles (i.e. a set of default values for each kind of element) when creating
dimensions in drawings created with version V5 R11 and later (or pre-R11 drawings
whose standard has been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later). Styles are defined
in the standard used by the drawing and managed by the administrator.
When creating a dimension, the Style toolbar displays the styles available for this type
of dimension. (By default, the Style toolbar is situated at the top left of screen.) If only
one style is available, it will be used by default.
If several styles are available for this type of dimension, you can choose the style that
you want to use to create this dimension by selecting it from the Style toolbar.
Refer to Using Styles for more information.
In drawings created with versions up to V5 R10, you can create dimensions using
default values. Refer to Setting Properties As Default in Pre-R11 Drawings and to Using
Properties Set as Default in Pre-R11 Drawings for more information.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Half-Dimensions are useful in the case of revolved features or elements using a
plane symmetry. Actually it allows to create the dimensions only on half the
geometry.
This task will show you how to create a half-dimension. You can create half-
dimensions on distance, angle, diameter, cylinders, diameter edges and diameter
tangents but not on cumulate dimensions.
1. Click the Dimensions icon from the

Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Click a first element in the view. For

example, an edge.
3. If needed, click a second element in the

view. For example, another edge.
4. Right-click the dimension and select the

Half Dimension option from the contextual
menu.

The half-dimension appears. Only one

extension line is displayed. The dimension line is
shortened with specific overrun, gap and length.
The value is not centered on the dimension line.
The attributes mentioned in Dimension
parameters drive the dimension graphic display.
● Once you select the half-dimension option from the contextual menu, all the
following dimensions you create will be assigned the half-dimension mode. If you
want to create dimensions in the standard mode, go back to the contextual menu
and de-activate the Half Dimension option.
● You can create a half-dimension directly by selecting first an axis line and then an
other element (which is not an axis). The half-dimension value will be the double
of the measured value between the elements. If you don't want a half-dimension
to be created when selecting such elements, uncheck Half Dimensions from the
contextual menu (right-click) when creating the dimension.
Associativity in the case of half-dimensions is different from associativity in the case of standard
dimensions. For example, the half diameter dimension below is associated to the axis and the
element, whereas a standard diameter is associated to both symmetrical elements.

Standard diameter edge: Half diameter edge:


This task will show you how to create cumulated dimensions on a view.
Go to Tools->Options->Drafting->Dimensions->Line-up and uncheck Align

cumulated dimension values.
1. Click the Cumulated Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar
(Dimensions sub-toolbar).
2. Click a first point on the view.
3. Click a second point on the view.
You just created a first dimension within the cumulated dimension system.

4. Click a third point on the view.
You now created a second cumulated dimension in the system.
You can create as many cumulated dimensions as desired.

Note that if you move one dimension line as you create a cumulated dimension, all the
lines will move accordingly.
5. Click in the free space to end the cumulated dimension system creation.
If the cumulated dimensions are set with value oriented along dimension line, set the
CUMLTxtReference dimension parameter in the standards.
6. Go to Tools->Options->Drafting->Dimensions->Line-up and check Align

cumulated dimension values.
7. Create the same dimensions as previously, this time positioning them below the

drawing.
This time, dimensions are centered.
This functionality does not work for radius/diameter dimensions.
By default, the Align cumulated dimension values option is active. This

aligns cumulated dimensions by centering them. If you switch to another
standard, all dimension values will be repositioned according to the new
standard (even if you specified their position manually before switching
standards).


This task will show you how to create stacked dimensions on a view.
Stacked dimensions are parallel lines with a common extension line.
Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting->Dimension->Line-Up
and uncheck Align stacked dimension values.
1. Click the Stacked Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions
sub-toolbar).
2. Click a first point on the view.
3. Click a second point on the view.
You just created a first dimension within the stacked dimension system.

4. Click a third point on the view.
You now created a second stacked dimension in the system.

5. Click a fourth point on the view.
You now created a third stacked dimension in the system. Note that this stacked
dimension inserted
properly into the system.
You can create as many stacked dimensions as desired.
6. Click in the free space to end the stacked dimension creation.
7. Go to Tools->Options->Drafting->Dimensions->Line-up and check Align

stacked dimension values.
8. Create the same dimensions as previously, this time positioning them below the
drawing.

This time, dimensions are aligned.
This functionality does not work for radius/diameter dimensions.
● When you add a dimension into the cumulated dimension system, in order to have
this system properly displayed (dimensions positioned relatively to one another), the
position of the smallest dimension (i.e. the one that is the closest from the
geometry), is not modified.
● The value of the spacing between the system dimensions is defined in Tools ->
Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Line-Up section.

● As you create the dimensions in the system, you can move the whole system. Still,
you actually move the smallest dimension: all the other dimensions in the system
are automatically aligned to this smallest dimension.


This task will show you how to create a dimension you explicitly decide to be:
● a length/distance dimension
● an angle dimension
● a radius dimension
● a diameter dimension
You will select the required elements. Note that when entering the command
dedicated to the creation of a given type of dimension, the default orientation will
be the orientation most adequate.
1. Click the desired icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
length/distance dimension
angle dimension
radius dimension
diameter dimension
2. Click as many elements as required in the view.
The Tools Palette automatically appears, displaying dimension modes, except in

the case of angle dimensions.
3. If needed, define the dimension mode in the Tools Palette (

) using one of the modes below: Projected, Forced or True Length modes.
These options are also available in the contextual menu.
Length/Distance Angle
Radius Diameter

For radius dimensions, you can activate the Foreshortened option in the
contextual menu Properties -> Dimension Line.
It allows you to transform a radius dimension line into a foreshortened radius

dimension line. Then you can choose the text position (on long segment or short
segment), the dimension text orientation according to the dimension line
( parallel or convergent), the angle value, the ratio value (short segment/long
segment), and the point scale value.
You can also specify whether you want to unfix the extremity point of the
foreshortened dimension line, which will let you move the extremity point using a
yellow manipulator.


This task will show you how to create an angle dimension and perform the following
kinds of modifications: new angle sector or turn an angle sector into a supplementary
sector.
Create two lines.
1. Select the
Dimension icon
from the
Dimensioning
toolbar.
2. Select both
lines to be
dimensioned, one
after the other.
The angle
dimension appears
in the sector
associated to both
selected lines.
3. Drag the angle

dimension line to
the desired
quadrant (or
sector).
You can move the dimension to a new sector by using the contextual menu:

Right-click the
angle dimension
and select from
the contextual
menu either a
given Angle sector
or the
Complementary
Angle sector.
You can also CTRL-

click the
dimension line.


This task will show you how to create a chamfer dimension. You can use two
different methods:
● create chamfer dimensions manually,
● create chamfer dimensions using chamfer detection.
Creating chamfer dimensions manually

Open the IntDrafting_Dim_Chamfer.CATDrawing document.
1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimensions tab
and make sure the Detect chamfer option is not selected.
2. Click the Chamfer Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar

3. In the Tools Palette which is displayed, you can choose:

● The format of the dimension:
❍ Length x Length (19,1 x 19,1 in our example)
❍ Length x Angle (19.1 x - 46°84'8" in our example)
❍ Angle x Length (- 46°84'8" x 19.1 in our example)
❍ Length 19,1.
● The representation mode:
❍ One symbol
❍ Two symbols

Choose the Length x Length format and the One symbol mode .
You can also access these options using the contextual menu: at any time during
the chamfer dimension creation, you can right-click to display the contextual menu.
4. Select the element to be dimensioned.
5. Select a reference line or surface.
6. You have two options:

● Click on the sheet to end the dimension creation. The chamfer dimension is
computed with an implicit second reference line that is perpendicular to the first
one.

OR
● Select a second reference line or surface. In this case, the chamfer dimension is
computed according to both reference lines you selected.
In a Generative Drafting context (i.e. in the case of a generative view),

you must do this, i.e. you must explicitly select the second reference
line.

In any case, the dimension is associated to all the elements you selected.
Creating chamfer dimensions using chamfer

detection
Open the IntDrafting_Dim_Chamfer.CATDrawing document.
1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimensions tab
and make sure the Detect chamfer option is selected.
2. Click the Chamfer Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar

3. In the Tools Palette which is displayed (as well as in the contextual menu), you can
choose the format of the dimension and the representation mode. For more
information, refer to Step 2 in Creating chamfer dimensions manually.
Choose the Length x Length format and the One symbol mode .
4. Fly the mouse over the element to be dimensioned. You can notice that, depending
on where you position the cursor, the auto-detection agent indicates a different
order for taking elements into account when creating the chamfer dimension:
● 1 indicates the element to be dimensioned,
● 2 indicates the line which will be used as the first reference,
● 3 indicates the line which will be used as the second reference.

5. Click when you are satisfied with the order offered by the auto-detection agent. For
example, click to accept the 3 - 1 - 2 order. The chamfer dimension is computed
according to the first and the second auto-detected reference lines.
At this stage, if you are not satisfied with the order you just accepted, you can still
click to select the first reference line, and, optionally, the second reference line. This
amounts to creating the chamfer dimension manually.
6. Click to end the chamfer dimension creation.
The dimension is associated to all auto-detected elements.
Remarks about chamfer dimensions

● In a Generative Drafting context, you can create chamfer dimensions for the
following types of cylindrical shapes: cylinder/cone/cylinder, plane/cone/cone,
plane/cone/cylinder, plane/plane/plane.
● When creating chamfer dimension on cylindrical shapes in a Generative Drafting

context, remember that:
❍ in the case of projection views, the projection plane needs to be parallel to the
cylinder axis.
❍ in the case of section views or section cuts, the section plane needs to to be
parallel to, and to go through, the cylinder axis.
❍ the sketched profile on which the cylinder (or the cone) is based must be a
circle.
● All settings defined in Tools->Option->Mechanical Design->Drafting

(Dimensions and Manipulators tabs) are taken into account when creating
chamfer dimensions.
● When editing chamfer dimension text properties (Edit > Properties command,
Dimension Texts tab), if you assign any kind or prefix or suffix to the main
value (e.g. associated text, fake dimension, tolerance, text before/after, etc.),
the text will actually be placed after the first value, as shown here.



This task will show you how to create associative thread dimensions.
Open the intthread.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Thread
Dimension icon
from the Dimensioning
toolbar (Dimensions
sub-toolbar).
2. Select the thread to be dimensioned in the front view. The diameter dimension
appears.
3. Click the Thread

Dimension icon .
4. Select the two lines
representing the thread
to be dimensioned in
the section view.

Two dimensions
appear:
● the thread diameter,
● the thread depth.
● The dimension prefix (M in this example) is issued from the thread standard
defined when creating the hole in the 3D Part.
● In the top views you can modify threads dimensions orientation.


This task will show you how to automatically create 2D or 3D coordinate dimensions on
elements. Coordinate dimensions allow you to define the coordinates of a point relative
to the X, Y, and possibly Z, axes.
Open the PointSketch.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Coordinate Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions
sub-toolbar).
The Tools palette appears with two options: 2D Coordinates lets you create 2D (x,
y) coordinate dimensions for interactive geometry, 3D Coordinates lets you create
3D (x, y, z) coordinate dimensions for generative geometry.

● These options are also available via the contextual menu.
● This choice of options is valid for generative geometry only. In the case of a
generative drawing, or in the case of a drawing containing a mix of generative and
interactive elements, both options will be available, but if you select sketched (i.e.
interactive) geometry, the 2D Coordinates option will be applied automatically (even
if you selected the 3D Coordinates option). In the case of a purely interactive
drawing, the options will not be displayed at all, and only the 2D Coordinates option
will be applied.
2. Select the 3D Coordinates option in the Tools Palette, as you will be
dimensioning elements generated from the 3D.

3. Select the element for which you want to create

the 3D coordinate dimension. The coordinate
dimension is created immediately.
● At this point, you can right-click to display the contextual menu, which allows you
add a breakpoint to the leader, or to choose the leader symbol.
● You can also select a set of elements by trapping them with the mouse, to create
several coordinate dimensions in one shot.
4. Click in the free space to end the dimension creation.
5. Select the coordinate dimension to modify its position. The dimension is highlighted
and its anchor point appears in yellow.
6. Drag the dimension to a new position.
● Coordinates are relative to the absolute axis system except for views created by
selecting a 3D local axis system.
● The yellow anchor point is associative and is linked to the element you dimensioned.


Creating a Hole Dimension Table

This task will show you how to create a Hole and Center Line Dimension Table
(containing diameter and center coordinates).
Open the alesage.CATDrawing document.

1. Select one or more holes and center lines (only center lines not associated with a
hole) in the drawing.
2. Click the Hole Dimension Table icon on the Dimensioning toolbar to launch
the table creation command.

3. The Axis System and Table Parameters

Axis system:
Indicate the holes coordinates 2D reference
axis system. In this example, click on the
view origin (you can also select two lines or
click anywhere in the drawing, or enter the
origin coordinate).
Two reference axis appear:
You can rotate or flip the axis using the Flip

horizontally and Flip vertically icons and
choose to represent the axis system by
checking the Create representation box.
Title: Type the table title.
Columns:
● Choose a label (A, B, C... or 1, 2, 3...). If you want column numbering to start with
values other than A or 1, click the icon and specify the start value.
● Select and name the column to display.
Table format:
● Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows.
● Check Sort table content to sort the table elements.
● Check Split table to split the table into several tables. For more information on
splitting tables, see Creating/Modifying a table.

4. Choose 2D reference axis system for the axis system from the associated drop-down
list.
5. Type the table name in the Title field.
6. Select Label: A, B, C from the Column drop-down list (you can also choose the
Index naming mode) to give a label to the selected points in the drawing.
7. Check X, Y and Diameter to have four

columns corresponding to the hole labels and
to the Cartesian coordinates. Then enter a
title for each column.
8. Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows in the table.
9. Check Sort table content and then click

the icon to define the sorting
parameters.
10. To sort the table by descending X

coordinates, choose X in the Sort by combo
box, and select Descending. Then, click
Close.
11. Click OK to validate your settings and then click in the drawing to define the
location of the table. The table is generated.



This task will show you how to create a table containing coordinates of points from 2D
and 3D.
1. Multi-select the points on one of the views or on all views.
2. Click the Coordinate Dimension Table icon on the Dimensioning toolbar to

launch the table creation command.

3. The Axis system and table parameters

Axis system:
You can choose to use the 2D axis system. It
can be either the one of the view or user-
defined. In this case, it can be defined
interactively by either:
● indicating a point by clicking in the view,
● selecting a point,
● selecting two lines.
Or it can be defined by typing the origin

coordinates in the X and Y fields.
You can rotate or flip the axis using the Flip

horizontally and Flip vertically icons and
choose to represent the axis system by
checking the Create representation box.
Or you can choose to use the 3D axis system.

In this case, it is the absolute axis of the 3D
model, or, if the model is a single part, a local
axis.
Title: Type the table title.
Columns:
● Choose a label (A, B, C... or 1, 2, 3...). If
you want column numbering to start with
values other than A or 1, click the icon
and specify the start value.
● Select and name the column to display,
Table format:
● Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows.
● Check Sort table content to sort the table elements.
● Check Split table to split the table into several tables. For more information on
splitting tables, see Creating/Modifying a table.

4. Choose Axis system.1 for the axis system from the associated drop-down list.
5. Type the table name in the Title field.
6. Select Label: A, B, C from the Column drop-down list (you can also choose the
Index naming mode) to give a label to the selected points in the drawing.
7. Check X, Y and Z to create four columns

corresponding to the points labels and to the
Cartesian coordinates. Then enter a title for
each column in the associated field.
8. Check Transpose table to invert columns and rows in the table.
9. Check Sort table content and click the

icon to define the sorting parameters.
10. To sort the table by descending X

coordinates, choose X in the Sort by combo
box, and select Descending. Then, click
Close.
11. Click OK to validate your settings and then click in the drawing to define the
location of the table. The table is generated.


Creating Radius Curvature Dimensions

This task will show you how to create and modify a radius curvature dimension. A
radius curvature dimension lets you know the curvature radius at a given point on a
curve (spline, ellipse, etc.).
Create a spline.
1. Select the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Move the cursor over the spline. You can notice that the cursor changes to indicate
that you are going to create a dimension on a spline.
3. On the spline, click the point where you want to create the radius curvature
dimension. A preview of the radius curvature dimension is displayed.
4. Click to validate the dimension creation.

5. Move the dimension over the spline to modify the dimension.


This task will show you how to create overall dimensions on curves. You can create
dimensions on the overall horizontal or vertical size of any kind of curve, whether it is
canonical or not (e.g.: ellipse, spline, etc.). You can also create dimensions on the
overall size between 2 curves, or between a curve and a line, for example.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting. On the Dimension
tab, uncheck Dimension following the cursor (CTRL toggles).
Open the Dimension_Spline.CATDrawing document.
2. In the Tools Palette, click the Force horizontal dimension in view icon to
specify that you want to create the dimension based on the horizontal direction.
The direction of overall curve dimensions can only be horizontal or vertical.
3. Select a spline. A preview of the dimension is displayed.

If the preview shows a curvilinear length dimension instead of an overall curve

dimension, right-click to display the contextual menu and select Overall instead of
Curvilinear Length.
4. Click elsewhere in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The dimension
you created indicates the overall horizontal size of the spline.
5. Again, click the Dimension icon .
6. In the Tools Palette, click the Force vertical dimension in view icon to
specify that you want to create the dimension based on the vertical direction.
7. Select the bottom line and the other spline. A preview is displayed. Yellow
manipulators and point indicators appear: these let you select precisely the
points that you want the dimension to take into account.

8. Move the spline dimension manipulator to point 7 on the spline, for example.
The preview is updated.

9. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The dimension you
created indicates the overall vertical distance between the bottom line and point
7 of the spline.


This task will show you how to create dimensions for the curvilinear length of a curve, i.e.
to measure the overall length of a curve.
Open the CurvilinearDimension.CATDrawing document.
2. Select a curve. A preview of the dimension is displayed. By default, this preview

shows an overall curve dimension.
3. Right-click the preview to display the contextual menu and select Curvilinear
Length instead of Overall.
4. Still in the contextual menu, select a representation mode for the dimension line:
● Offset displays the dimension line as an offset of the measured curve.
● Parallel displays the dimension line as a translation of the measured curve.
● Linear displays the dimension line as linear.
Select Parallel, for example.
5. Optionally drag the dimension line and/or the dimension value to position them as

wanted.
6. Click elsewhere in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The semi-arc
symbol displayed over the dimension value symbolizes a curvilinear length
dimension. You can now handle the dimension just like any other dimension.
7. Again, click the Dimension icon .

8. Select another curve. This time, the preview of the dimension shows a curvilinear
length dimension (your previous selection was memorized).
9. Once again, right-click to display the contextual menu and select Offset as the
representation mode for the dimension line.
10. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation.

11. Repeat steps 7 to 9, this time selecting Linear as the representation mode for the
dimension line.
12. Still in the contextual menu, select Dimension Representation -> Force
Horizontal Dimension in View to specify the dimension line orientation.
13. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation.
More About Curvilinear Length Dimensions

General remarks
● Curvilinear length dimensions can be created using the Dimensions, Length/Distance
Dimensions and Technological Feature Dimensions commands; they cannot be
created using the Stacked Dimensions and Cumulated Dimensions commands.
● You can create curvilinear length dimensions for all types of curves: splines, circles, arcs
of circle, conics, etc. Note that in the case of circles and arcs of circle, they will be called
circular length dimensions.
● The curvilinear length symbol is defined by the administrator in the standards.
● The linear representation mode for the dimension line is:
❍ forbidden in the case of closed curves.
❍ the only authorized representation mode for True Length dimensions.
Limitations
● You cannot change the dimension line representation mode or orientation after the

dimension has been created.

● In the case of the parallel and offset representation modes, the dimension value cannot
be moved out of the curve limits. As a result, you cannot specify the dimension value
position (Inside, Outside, Auto).
● In some cases, depending on the curve and on the offset value, the offset
representation mode cannot be computed:
❍ In certain cases, when switching from another representation mode to the offset
mode, the dimension will be previewed as being not-up-to-date (i.e. using the color
configured in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension
tab, Analysis Display Mode): try to move the cursor closer to the dimension.
❍ In other cases, you will not be able to position the dimension further than a certain
limit. The examples below show the limits for positioning a curvilinear length
dimension in offset mode for a spline.

● In the case of curvilinear length dimensions in offset mode, it is recommended to

activate the Constant offset between dimension line and geometry setting in
Tools > Options > Mechanical Design > Drafting > Dimension tab. This will
ensure that the dimension remains associative if the geometry is moved.
● When dimensioning a 3D curve that is not planar, the extension line of the curve will
extend to the projection of the endpoints of the curve in the view plane of the
dimension. As a result, the dimension may seem to point nowhere.
● Partial curvilinear length dimensions are not supported.
● Curvilinear dimensions cannot be measured along a direction.
● Curvilinear dimensions cannot be driving dimensions.

Creating Dimensions along a Reference

Direction
This task will show you how to create dimensions along a reference direction, i.e.
measure the projection of a segment/distance onto a direction. This direction is
determined using either a linear element, a fixed angle in the view or a combination of
both.
Dimensions along a reference direction can be created for length, distance, diameter
tangent, radius tangent, and overall curve dimensions, as well as on linear (i.e. not
angular) cumulated or stacked dimensions.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER2.CATDrawing document.
2. In the Tools Palette, click the Intersection Point Detection icon . Refer to
Creating dimensions between intersection points for more information about this
functionality.
3. Click the first element, in this case, an intersection point.

4. Click the second element.
The dimension to be created is previewed. In the Tools Palette, click the
Force dimension along a direction icon:

Several options are then displayed in the Tools Palette:
● Dimension along a direction creates the dimension using a

linear element (line, axis line, center line) as the reference direction, or
using an angle to define the reference direction relatively to a linear
element. In the latter case, key in a value in the Angle field.
● Dimension perpendicular to a direction creates the dimension

perpendicularly to a linear element.
● Dimension along a fixed angle in view creates the dimension

using a fixed angle in the view. In this case, key in a value in the
Angle field.
Note that such a dimension follows the view rotation. Thus, a
dimension line with a 30 deg angle in a view which is set at 45 deg
(relatively to the sheet) will be equivalent to a dimension line with a
75 deg angle relatively to the sheet.
These options are also available in the contextual menu that you can
display during the dimension creation.
5. Click the Dimension along a direction icon . For the purpose of this
scenario, leave the Angle field set to 0 deg.
6. Select a linear element to use as the reference direction. Once created, the
dimension will be associative to this element.

The dimension is updated so as to measure the distance between the

selected points once projected onto the reference direction.
7. Drag the mouse to position the dimension as wanted.


More About Dimensions Along a Reference Direction

● In the case of a dimension along or perpendicular to a direction, if you delete the
linear element used as the reference direction, the dimension will be automatically
converted into a dimension along a fixed angle in view (the angle being that of the
reference element in the view before its deletion).
● The behavior of a dimension along or perpendicular to a direction will actually

depend on whether the Only create non-associative dimensions option is
activated in Tools > Options > Mechanical Design > Drafting > Dimension
tab, Associativity on 3D button:
❍ If it is activated, then the dimension will actually be a dimension along a fixed
angle in the view (the angle being that of the reference element in the view).
❍ If it is not activated, then the dimension will always match the direction of the
element defining the reference direction.
● Once a dimension along a reference direction has been created, you cannot modify
the elements that define the direction of measure, i.e. either the linear element
used as the reference direction or the fixed angle in view.
● The reference direction will not be taken into account when re-routing dimensions
(Re-route Dimension command).
● Dimensions along a reference direction cannot be driving dimensions. So, if the
Create driving dimension option is activated in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, you will not be able to drive
dimensions when dimensioning along a direction.
● Dimensions created in a shot (i.e. cumulated/stacked dimensions, or dimensions
sharing the same type as the first one) all have the same reference direction.

Creating Dimensions between Intersection

Points
This task will show you how to create dimensions between an intersection point and an
element or between two intersection points.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER2.CATDrawing document.
2. In the Tools Palette, click the Intersection Point Detection icon .

3. Position the mouse over the first intersection point. An intersection point is the
meeting point of:
● 2 extensions lines (as shown in this example)

● 2 lines
● a line and an extension line
A preview of the intersection point is displayed.

In the case of drawings with many elements displayed on screen,

intersection points may sometimes be difficult to detect. If this happens (i.
e. if the intersection point is not previewed or if the previewed intersection
point is not the one you want), simply position the mouse over the first
and then the second reference element. The proper intersection point will
then be previewed.
4. Click to create the intersection point. The point is created, as well as

construction lines and coincidence constraints between the point and its
reference elements.
The display and behavior of intersection points is defined by the

administrator in the standards. Indeed, the administrator can specify the
style that should be applied to the intersection point and construction line,
whether the intersection point can be printed or not, and whether
construction lines should be displayed and/or printable.
5. Now, position the mouse over the second intersection point.

6. Click to create the intersection point. A preview of the dimension is displayed.

By default, this dimension is a distance dimension.

At this point, if you want to create a diameter dimension or a radius

dimension rather than a distance dimension, you can right-click to display
a contextual menu in which you will be able to change the dimension type
from the default Distance to Diameter Edge or Radius Edge.
For the purpose of this scenario, leave the default option, Distance,
selected.
7. Using the mouse, position the dimension as wanted.

8. Click to validate and end the dimension creation.


Creating Dimensions for Technological

Features
This task will show you how to create dimensions for technological features such as
electrical harness.
Technological feature dimensioning relies on the fact that technological features can
specify the way they should be dimensioned, which allows you to create only realistic
and customized dimensions, based on the know-how of a given field.
You need an Electrical Harness Assembly license for the purpose of this scenario as we
will be dimensioning Electrical Harness Assembly features. Technological feature
dimensioning is also available for other applications such as Piping and Tubing. For more
information on the availability of technological feature dimensioning for a given
workbench, refer to the related documentation.
Open the ElectricalAssembly.CATProduct document and make sure it is loaded in the
Electrical Harness Assembly workbench (if necessary, select Start -> Equipment &
Systems -> Electrical Harness Assembly to launch the workbench). Open the
ElectricalAssembly.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Technological Feature Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning

toolbar.
2. Select the feature that you want to dimension. Note that the name of a feature is
displayed as a help as you fly the cursor over it.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugdr_C2/cfyugfeatdim.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 12:22:20 PM

The dimension is created as specified by the feature. In this specific

example, the bundle segment specifies that the dimension should provide its
overall length. The feature also specifies whether the dimension should be
created along a direction of measure.
The Technological Feature Dimensions command remains active.
3. Repeat step 2 for each additional feature that you want to dimension.
4. End the dimension creation by clicking anywhere in the drawing (except on a
technological feature) or by lining-up the dimension. You can now handle the
dimension(s) just like any other dimension.

More About Technological Feature Dimensions

Action/object and Object/action Mode
Technological feature dimensioning is available in action/object mode (i.e. selecting the

command first and then the feature to dimension, as illustrated above) and in object/
action mode (i.e. selecting or multi-selecting the feature(s) to dimension and the
selecting the command).
Technological Feature Dimensions icons
Several Technological Feature Dimensions icons are available from the Dimensioning
toolbar.
● Technological Feature Dimensions creates either the dimension type specified

by the feature when only one is specified, or the preferential dimension type specified
by the feature when several are specified.
● Length Technological Feature Dimensions , Angle Technological Feature
Dimensions , Radius Technological Feature Dimensions and Diameter
Technological Feature Dimensions create a specific dimension type when the

feature specifies several dimension types. Using one of these options is particularly
useful when you want to create a dimension type other than the preferential type
specified by the feature.
Contextual menu

At any time during the dimension creation, you can right-click a technological feature to
display a contextual menu. This contextual menu is particularly useful when several
dimension types can be created for a given feature (which is not the case in our
example). This depends on what is specified by the feature.
● In this menu, the Show Panel option lets you display the Technological Feature
Dimensioning Selection dialog box.
❍ From the list area, you can select the types of dimension that you want to create for
a given feature or de-select those that you want to delete. In our example, only one
type (length) can be created for each selected part.
❍ You can also use the Create drop-down list. The default option, (Selected),
creates the dimension types selected from the list area above. The All option
creates all available dimensions for all selected features. The other options, such as
All Lengths or All Diameters for example, create a specific dimension type for all
selected features.
❍ The Hide button lets you hide the Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection
dialog box.
You can also show or hide the Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection dialog box
using the Show Panel icon available in the Tools Palette.

● In the contextual menu, the other options available let you create a given dimension
type for all selected dimensions.
Limitations
You cannot create coordinate dimensions for technological features.

Creating Dimensions between an Element and

a View Axis
In this task, you will learn how to create dimensions between an element and a view
axis (one of the two axes or the origin).
Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane_Front.CATDrawing document.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> General and check
Display in the current view to display the view axis.
1. Click the Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Click a first element in the view.
3. Select one of the two view axes or the origin.

4. Click anywhere in the drawing window to confirm the dimension creation.
The dimension is created.

This task will show you how to re-route dimensions, i.e. to recalculate dimensions taking into
account new geometry elements which are compatible with the re-routed dimension type.
Re-routing dimensions can be particularly useful in the case of isolated dimensions resulting
from V4 to V5 migration. Indeed, re-routing isolated dimensions to the geometry enables you
make them associative.
Open the Reroute_Dimensions.CATDrawing document. You can notice that the dimension
properties are customized.
1. Select the Re-route Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Extension Line
Interruptions sub-toolbar).
2. Select the angle dimension. You can notice that the cursor indicates the type of dimension
you are selecting.
3. Select the first element you want to take into account for the dimension re-routing, and
then the second element.

Select the first element. Then, select the second element.
During this operation, the cursor gives a graphic preview of what type of element you are
selecting (in this case, lines).
A preview of the re-routed angle dimension is displayed.

5. You can proceed in the same manner to re-route the other dimension types available on
the drawing.
● Always make sure that the element(s) to which you are re-routing dimensions are
compatible with the re-routed dimension type. For example, when re-routing a radius
dimension, you need to select a curved element.
● You cannot re-route chamfer dimensions.
● In a Generative Drafting context, you cannot re-route dimensions generated via the
Generate Dimensions command.
● Re-routing dimensions preserves dimension properties when you customized them.


This task will show you how to modify the dimension type as you create a
dimension. In other words, you modify the dimension attributes. In this particular
example, we will apply a Radius Center dimension type to a hole.
1. Start creating a diameter dimension, for example. If needed, modify the dimensions
location by dragging it with the cursor.
2. Right-click the dimension.
3. Select the required dimension type from the displayed contextual menu. For
example, Radius Center.
The diameter dimension is automatically turned into a radius dimension.
4. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. If needed, you can modify
the dimension location.

● When you display the contextual menu, you can decide that you want to restore the
dimension value to its original position. For this, select the Restore Value Position
option from the contextual menu.
● When you display the contextual menu, you can define the value orientation with the
screen, view or dimension line as reference, or still horizontal, vertical or
according to a fixed angle. These options are available in the Value Orientation
dialog box.


This task will show you how to interrupt manually one or more extension lines of one or
more dimensions.
Open the Interruption_ExtLine01.CATDrawing document.
1. You have several possibilities:

● Right-click a dimension and select the Dimension.1 Object -> Create
Interruption(s) option from the contextual menu.
● Select a dimension and click Insert -> Dimensioning -> Dimension Edition ->
Create Interruption(s) from the menu bar.
● Select a dimension and click on the Create Interruption(s) icon in the

Dimensioning toolbar (Dimension Edition sub-toolbar).
● You can also select the interruption command first, and then the dimension.
● You can multi-select several dimensions either using the Ctrl key or by trap.
2. In the Tools Palette, indicate if you want to create the interruption on one extension
line or on both extension lines.

3. Click to indicate the first point defining the interruption to be created.
4. Click to indicate the second point defining the interruption to be created.
If you have chosen to create the interruption on one extension line, the interruption is
automatically created on the extension line which is closest to where you click.
5. To remove the interruption you created, you have several possibilities:

● Right-click the dimension and select Dimension.1 Object -> Remove Interruption
(s) from the contextual menu.
● Select the dimension and click Insert -> Dimensioning -> Dimension Edition ->
Remove Interruption(s) from the menu bar.
● Select the dimension and click on the Remove Interruption(s) icon in the
Dimensioning toolbar (Dimension Edition sub-toolbar).
6. In the Tools Palette, indicate if you want to remove a single interruption on an

extension line, all interruptions on an extension line, or all interruptions on both
extension lines. In this case, leave the Remove One Interruption icon selected.

7. Click to indicate the extension line from which you want to remove the interruption.
The interruption is removed from the extension line which is closest to where you click.
● When creating or removing interruptions, you can select the dimension either before
or after selecting the appropriate command.
● If you move the dimension, the interruption will remain as you created it.
● If you modify either the overrun and / or the blanking, the interruption also remains
the same.
● You can apply a maximum of eight interruptions to an extension line.

● Extension lines with funnels cannot be interrupted. Likewise, you cannot add funnels
to extension lines with interruptions.


This task will show you how to modify the position of the dimension value text using
the mouse.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for
example.
1. Click the Select
icon , if needed.
2. Select the dimension
value text.
3. Drag the value text

to the new position.
4. Click to validate the
position.
Note that as a
useful help,
you can press
the Shift key
and switch to
the Snap to
Point on or off
mode. The
mode is
temporarily
changed (as
long as you
keep the
button
pressed).
When the

Snap to Point
mode is on, as
you select and
drag the
dimension
value, an
anchor
appears to
help you
locate the
middle of the
dimension.
At any time, you can restore the original value text position. To do this, right-click the
dimension you positioned and select Restore Value Position from the contextual
menu.


This task will show you how to modify dimension line location either as you create or
after creating dimensions.
example.
1. Click the Select icon , if

needed.
2. Select the dimension to be
modified. For example, a
distance dimension.
The distance dimension is
highlighted.
3. Select the dimension line.

4. Drag the dimension line to
the new position.
You can also modify the dimension line location using the extension line.
Note that as a useful help, you can press the Shift button and switch to the Snap to
Point on or off mode. The mode is temporarily changed (as long as you keep the button
pressed).
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugbt0603.htm10/19/2004 12:23:40 PM

In this task, you will learn how to place automatically the value outside the area
between extremity symbols when this area is too small, or how to explicitly position the
value inside or outside the area between extremity symbols.
example.
1. Click the Select

icon , if needed.
2. Right-click the
dimension to be
modified.
3. In the contextual menu, select Properties. The Properties dialog box is displayed.
4. Click on the Value tab.

5. In the Value Orientation area, there are three options in the Position field.
● Auto: positions the value inside the area between extremity symbols whenever this
is possible; otherwise, positions it outside.
● Inside: positions the value inside the area between extremity symbols.
● Outside: positions the value outside the area between extremity symbols.
6. Select Auto.
If you change the
dimension from
now on, and the
value does not fit
inside the area
between extremity
symbols, the value
will be
automatically
positioned outside.
Try it by reducing
the dimension as
shown in our
example.
● The Auto position of the dimension value will be disabled if you modify the position
of the dimension value text using the mouse (i.e. if you manually move it). You can
restore the original position of the dimension value by right-clicking the dimension
and selecting Restore Value Position from the contextual menu.
● If you switch between Auto, Inside, and Outside, make sure the dimension value
is properly positioned by restoring the original position of the dimension value (use
the Restore Value Position option from the contextual menu).


This task will show you how to insert text before or after the dimension value.

example.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab,
and check the Modification box for the Insert text before and the Insert text
after options.
1. Click the Select icon , if needed.

2. Click the dimension to be modified. The dimension is highlighted and two
manipulators appear, both before and after the dimension value.
3. Click the manipulator before the dimension value, for example.

The Insert Text Before dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the text that you want to add before the dimension value, L= for instance.
5. Click OK. The text is automatically inserted before the dimension value.
Note that any created Text Before is automatically added to the drop-
down list in the dialog box and can therefore be selected again from this
list.
6. Click in the free space.

Modifying the Dimension Overrun/Blanking

This task shows how to modify dimensions extension line overrun and/or blanking either together or
separately.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, and check the
Modification box for the Modify overrun and the Modify blanking options.
1. Click the Select icon , if needed.

2. Drag the overrun manipulator(s) to a new position, as shown below:
If you want to modify one extension line only, press the Ctrl key and drag the desired
manipulator.
3. Drag the blanking manipulator(s) to a new position, as shown below:

4. If you need to be more precise, double-click

the manipulator. The Blanking Edition
5. Enter the desired value to modify the
blanking.
You can also modify the overrun/

blanking of only one extension line of
the dimension.
6. Double-click the overrun manipulator(s).
The Overrun Edition dialog box

appears.
7. Enter the desired overrun value and un-check

the Apply to both sides option from the
Overrun Edition dialog box.
Note that you can also right-click the dimension and select the Edit -> Properties option from the
displayed contextual menu. The Properties dialog box appears. Select the Extension Line tab and
modify the desired value(s) of the Overrun / Blanking Extremities option(s).

Overrun is the overrun minimum value. As an example, for a cumulated dimension (for ISO Standard):
You can increase the overrun size. You cannot decrease it below the minimum value.
To set Cumulate dimension extension line length and text position, customize the following parameter in
the standards: CUMLExtMode in Dimension parameters.


This task will show you how to line up the following dimensions relative to a point in
the free space:
In other words, you are going to organize dimensions into a system with a linear
offset. The offset will align the dimensions to each others as well as the smallest
dimension to the reference element.
Open the LineUp_Dimensions01.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the dimensions to be lined up.
2. Right click and select Line-up option from the contextual menu
or click on the Line-Up icon .
You can also select Tools->Positioning->Line-up item from the menu bar.
3. Click anywhere on the drawing.

The Line Up dialog box appears:
4. Enter the desired Linear offset value. For example, 20 mm.
5. Click the Only organize into systems option.
The position of the smallest system dimension will not be modified. The stacked
system dimensions will be aligned to this smallest dimension.
The dimensions are now aligned:

When you click in the free space, the linear offset between the smallest dimension and
the reference is automatically set to 0 value. The space between two dimensions will
be the space defined in the Options dialog box (Tools->Options, Mechanical
Design ->Drafting at the left of the dialog box, Dimension tab, Line Up
paragraph). See Dimension Creation for more details.


This task will show you how to line up the following dimensions according to a given
reference:
Open the LineUp_Dimensions02.CATDrawing document.
1. Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting->Dimensions tab.
The offset you can set in this dialog box corresponds to:

2. Select the dimensions to be lined-up.
3. Right click and select Line-up item from the contextual menu.
You can also select the Tools -> Positioning -> Line-up item from the menu bar.
4. Select the element that will be used as reference for positioning dimensions. See
the example above.
The Line Up dialog box appears. You can see that the default values are the ones set
in Tools Options menu (see step 1).
5. Enter the required offset values in the Line Up dialog box and, if needed, deactivate
the Only organize into systems option.

The smallest dimension positions with respect to the element selected and offsets by
20 mm. And offset between dimension is equal to 30mm.


This task will show you how to create a datum feature.
1. Click the Datum

Feature icon from the
Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Select the point at

which you want the datum
feature to be attached
(attachment point).
3. Select the point at

which you want the datum
feature to be anchored
(anchor point).
The Datum Feature Creation dialog box is displayed with A as default value
(incremental value).
4. Enter the desired character string, if needed.
5. Click OK.
The datum feature is
created.
An extension line is automatically created on the datum feature.

● The character string that is edited in the Datum Feature Creation dialog box is
simultaneously previewed on the drawing.
● When you create more than one datum feature, the character string of this datum
feature is automatically incremented.
● To change Datum Feature ANSI representation into ASME representation, change
the TXTDatumMode parameter of your standard file (see Dimension parameters):
ASME
TXTDatumMode = 1
(Normal)
ANSI
TXTDatumMode = 2
(Flag)


This task shows you how to modify a datum feature by editing it.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a datum feature.
1. Double-click the
datum feature you
want to modify.
The Datum Feature

Modification dialog
box is displayed.
2. Modify the datum

feature value. For
example, enter B
instead of A.
3. Click OK.
4. Click in the free

space or select
another icon.
The datum feature is

modified.



This task shows you how to create a geometrical tolerance (annotation).
You can also copy an existing geometric tolerance. You can set text properties either before or after you
create the text.
● Creating a geometrical tolerance
● Leader orientation
● Geometrical tolerance orientation

1. Click the Geometric Tolerance icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Tolerancing sub-toolbar).
2. Select an element (geometry, dimension, text or point) or click in the free space to position the anchor
point of the geometrical tolerance.
● If you select an element, the anchor point will be an arrow. Note that
you can modify this symbol by editing the annotation leader.
● If you select a point in the free space, the anchor point will be a small
balloon.
● If you select a dimension or a text, no leader will be created. The

geometric tolerance will be displayed just below the element you
selected.
3. Move the cursor to position the geometrical tolerance and then click at the chosen location. The
Geometrical Tolerance dialog box appears.

● At this step, you can apply the parameter values of an existing geometric tolerance to the tolerance you
are creating: to do this, simply select the existing geometric tolerance.
● If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is pre-
filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and
the Tools Palette are disabled during the creation of the geometrical tolerance.
On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is pre-filled
with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active
during the creation of the of the geometrical tolerance.
● You can reset the current style values in the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box at any time using the Reset
button.
4. Select the Filter Symbol option to filter the available tolerance symbols according to the type of
geometrical element you selected (if any).
If you did not select any geometrical element, the tolerance symbols will not filtered.
5. Specify the tolerance type by clicking the Tolerance Symbol button and selecting the appropriate symbol.
6. Type the tolerance value in the Tolerance value field, adding symbols as needed. To do this, position the
cursor at the proper location in the field, and click the Insert Symbol button to choose the appropriate
symbol.

You can add symbols to the tolerance and reference value as well as to the upper and lower text.
7. Type the reference values in the Reference value fields, adding symbols as needed.
8. To add a new geometrical tolerance, click the Next line arrow button and repeat steps 4 to 5.
9. Type the upper and lower texts in the appropriate fields. You may also add symbols if you want to.
The geometric tolerance is updated as you define values for each field.
10. Click OK when you're done. The geometrical tolerance is created.
11. You can add an all-around symbol to the leader. To do this, select the geometrical tolerance, right-click
the yellow manipulator on the arrow and select All Around from the contextual menu.

Specifying Leader Orientation

You can orient the geometrical tolerance leader perpendicularly to the element to which it is associated (for
example, if the leader is associated to a dimension, you can position the leader parallel to the dimension line
and orthogonal to the extension line).
For this, you have two different possibilities:

● Either go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Activate
snapping (SHIFT toggles). Then, click the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both.
To orient directly the geometrical tolerance leader perpendicularly to the associated element, press the
Shift key before clicking in the drawing to position the tolerance (see previous scenario, step 3).
● Or go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Geometrical
tolerance in Annotation Creation -> Apply snapping to. The leader will be oriented perpendicularly to
the geometry by default. In this case, pressing the Shift key will let you orient it differently.
Specifying Geometrical Tolerance Orientation

To make the tolerance vertical, hold the ctrl key before clicking in the drawing to position the tolerance
(previous scenario, step 3).


This task shows you how to modify a geometrical tolerance.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a geometrical tolerance.
1. Double-click the
geometrical tolerance you
want to modify.
The Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is displayed.
You can reset the current style values in the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box at any
time using the Reset button.

2. Modify any desired value from the dialog box.
3. Click OK.
4. Click in the free space

to validate the geometrical
dimension modification.


This task will show you how to copy an existing geometrical tolerance and then edit
the content for creating a new one.
1. Click on the geometrical tolerance you want to copy.
2. Right-click and select the Copy option from the contextual menu.
3. Select the element to which you want the geometrical tolerance to be associated.
4. Right-click and select the Paste option on the contextual menu.
5. Move the copied geometrical tolerance to position it as desired.
6. Double-click the copied geometrical tolerance.
7. In the filter Symbols box, make sure that the desired option is activated.
Select to display only those tolerance symbols generally considered

appropriate for the type of geometrical element selected. Unselect it to display all
symbols, regardless of the selected type of element.
8. Modify any of the values.
After you enter a value, press Enter or Tab to move to the next field.
The geometrical tolerance is updated as you define values for each field.
9. Click OK to confirm your operation and close the dialog box.

This task shows you how to create dimensions that will drive associated constrained
geometry.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension and
select Activate analysis display mode. Then, click the Types and colors button to
define the characteristics that will be assigned to constrained geometry.
The Types and colors of dimensions dialog box lets you select the color you want to
assign to driving dimensions. Select the color shown below, for example.
Click the Dimensions icon from

the Dimensioning toolbar and create
a dimension on the geometry
previously selected. In this example,
create a length dimension on a line.
1. Double-click the dimension.
2. Modify the dimension via the displayed Dimension Value dialog box. For example,
enter 40 millimeter as the new length. This dimension will now drive the geometry.

If the Drive geometry option is

selected, the double-clicked
dimension becomes a constraint and
behaves as a dimension constraint.
The geometry is updated in order to reflect the new driving dimension. Let's call it driven
geometry.
In addition, this geometry is assigned the characteristics previously defined in the Types
and colors of dimensions dialog box via Tools -> Options. In this particular case, the
driving dimension is visualized as follows:
You cannot create driving dimensions in the following cases:

● Between a generated element and an interactive element, horizontal and vertical
dimensions are not available. If you double-click on the dimension, the Drive
geometry option is deactivated.
● Between an interactive element and a generated circle center, no type of dimensions
is available. If you double-click on the dimension, Drive geometry option is
deactivated:
To bypass this problem, create a point that is concentric with the center of the circle
and create the dimension between this new point and the other element.
● Between two elements (a generative one and an interactive one) that are not parallel,
no type of dimensions is available. If you double-click on the dimension, Drive
geometry option is deactivated:

To bypass this problem, create a point that will be coincident with line A and line B at
the same time and create the dimension between this new point and the other
element.
● Between two semicircles (apart from dimensions between the semicircles centers). If
you double-click on the dimension, the Drive geometry option is deactivated:

[ Back ] [ Up ]

Constraints
Constraints
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you create geometrical constraints, which
specify explicitly how the geometry should behave. A constraint applies to up to three
elements. In the Interactive Drafting workbench, constraints are created either through
the constraints creation command or via SmartPick.
Note that when you use SmartPick, you detect geometric constraints dynamically. But
SmartPick can simply be used to automatically detect constraints without necessarily
creating them. For information on creating constraints using SmartPick, see Creating
Constraints via SmartPick in the SmartPick chapter.
In the Interactive Drafting workbench, dimensional constraints do not exist as such. It

is by creating driving dimensions that you can drive constrained geometry.
If you want constraints to be created, make sure the Show Constraints command, and
optionally the Create Detected Constraints command, are active in the Tools toolbar,
before you start creating constraints.
Before you begin

Creating quick constraints

Quickly set geometrical constraints.
Create constraints via a dialog box

Set geometrical constraints via a dialog box.
Create constraints between 2D and generated elements

Create associative constraints between 2D elements and generated elements
(Generative Drafting workbench).

Constraints

Before you Begin
Before you Begin

What Is a Constraint?
A constraint is a kind of relationship that lets you specify explicitly how the geometry
should behave. In other words, if you modify the geometry afterwards via the
geometry itself, these relations will be taken into account.
In the Interactive Drafting workbench, you can create geometrical constraints.

Geometrical constraints set a relationship that forces a limitation between one or more
geometrical elements. The various geometrical constraints are the following:
● alignment
● parallelism
● tangency
● concentricity
● horizontality
● verticality
● fix
● middle point
● equidistant point
● symmetrical
In the Interactive Drafting workbench, dimensional constraints do not exist as such. It

is by creating driving dimensions that you can drive constrained geometry.

Before you Begin
What Does Creating Constraints Mean?

You can create constraints using the Tools toolbar:
● Explicitly, via the existing Show Constraints command (detected constraints).
● Via Autodetection, if you activate the Create Detected Constraints command to

automatically create detected constraints.
[ Up ] [ Next ]


This task shows you how to create geometrical constraints quickly.
Create two lines.
Make sure the Show Constraints option is active in the Tools toolbar.
For the purpose of this scenario, also make sure that the Create Detected Constraints
option is active in the Tools toolbar: this option creates lasting constraints (if you
do not activate this option, the constraints you create are temporary: the geometry is
only temporarily constrained, which means that it can subsequently be moved without
being constrained.).
1. Select the geometrical elements to be constrained to each other. For the purpose of
our scenario, select the two lines you created.
2. Click the Geometrical Constraint icon from the Geometry Modification toolbar.

Based on the elements you selected, the software automatically offers to create a
parallelism constraint, as shown at the tip of the cursor.
3. At this time, you can right-click on the drawing, to display a contextual menu
offering the other types of constraints available for the selected elements.
For the purpose of the scenario, simply click on the drawing to accept the parallelism
constraint. Both lines are now constrained as parallel to each other.
4. Modify the position of one of the lines, by moving one of its end points, for example.

As you can see, the lines are constrained so as to remain parallel to each other,
whatever the new position and/or length you assign to one of them.
Even though you set a constraint relation between two elements, constraints are not
necessarily visualized. If you cannot visualize constraints even though the Show
Constraints option is active in the Tools toolbar, go to Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Geometry tab and select Display Constraints.
(You can also modify the constraint color and/or width.)


This task shows you how to set geometrical constraints via a dialog box.
Create two lines.
Make sure the Show Constraints option is active in the Tools toolbar.
For the purpose of this scenario, also make sure that the Create Detected Constraints
option is active in the Tools toolbar: this option creates lasting constraints (if you
do not activate this option, the constraints you create are temporary: the geometry is
only temporarily constrained, which means that it can subsequently be moved without
being constrained.).
1. Select the geometrical elements to be constrained to each other. For the purpose of
our scenario, select the two lines you created.
2. Click the Constraint with Dialog Box icon from the Geometry Modification
toolbar.

The Constraint Definition dialog box appears. The options corresponding to the various
types of constraints you can create for the selected elements are active.
3. Select the Parallelism option to specify that the selected lines should be parallel.
You can preview the result.
4. At this time, you can still select another option from the dialog box if you decide to
apply another type of constraint. For the purpose of the scenario, simply click OK to
validate. Both lines are now constrained as parallel to each other.
5. Modify the position of one of the lines, by moving one of its end points, for example.

As you can see, the lines are constrained so as to remain parallel to each other,
whatever the new position and/or length you assign to one of them.
● It is impossible to create constraints between 2D and generated elements via the

Constraint Definition dialog box. In the Constraint Definition dialog box, you can
only create constraints between similar elements. In other words, you can create
constraints either between 2D elements, or between generated elements, but not
between a mix of these.
● Even though you set a constraint relation between two elements, constraints are not
necessarily visualized. If you cannot visualize constraints even though the Show
Constraints option is active in the Tools toolbar, go to Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Geometry tab and select Display
Constraints. (You can also modify the constraint color and/or width.)

Creating Constraints Between 2D and

Generated Elements
This task shows you how to create associative constraints between 2D elements and
generated elements (Generative Drafting workbench).
● Create an associative point between the 2D and the generated view
● Create a constraint between 2D and generated elements
Make sure the constraint creation option command is active in the Tools toolbar.
Create an Associative Point Between the 2D and the

Generated View
Open the Constraints_2D_GeneratedElem.CATDrawing document.
1. Activate the Grid option command.
2. Click the Point icon and create a point using SmartPick.

The point you just created is associative between the 2D and the generated view. In
others words, even if you assign a new value to the angle, this point will remain at the
intersection of both line.
Be careful: when you modify the position of these elements, only the 2D elements
move. The generated elements remain fixed.
Create a Constraint Between 2D and Generated

Elements
In the Tools toolbar, activate Create Detected Constraints .
Open the GenDrafting_part_Broken_View.CATDrawing document.
It is impossible to create constraints between 2D and generated elements via the

Constraint Definition dialog box. In the Constraint Definition dialog box, you can only
create constraints between similar elements (either between 2D elements, or between
generated elements, but not between a mix of these).
1. Create a line in the opened drawing.

2. Click the geometrical constraints command icon and select the line.
The most logical constraint is automatically offered (if you want to apply this constraint,
click in the drawing).
Select an edge from the drawing you have opened.
The software offers to create a parallelism constraint by default. If you choose this
constraint, click in the drawing, otherwise...
3. ...right-click and select Perpendicularity in the contextual menu.

A constraint is created between a generated element and a sketched element.
4. You can delete this constraint: right-click on the created constraint and select Delete
in the contextual menu.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Annotations
Annotations
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you manipulate annotations.
In order to be consistent with the way commands have been grouped in toolbars and
sub-toolbars, the following tasks are documented in the Manipulating Dimensions
chapter:
● Datum Feature Creation and Modification
● Geometrical Tolerance Creation, Modification and Copy
See Before You Begin to learn about important concepts, including setting text
properties.
Before You Begin

You should be familiar with basic concepts such as setting the properties of a text
(font style, size, justification, etc.), using default values, and specifying the
position and/ or orientation of a text.
Create a free text

Create a text that either wraps or not, that is assigned an unlimited width text
frame, even though this text may reach the frame boundary.
Create an associated text

Create a text which you want to be and remain associated to an existing element.
Make an existing annotation associative

At any time and once an annotation has been created, you can add a link
between an annotation and another element.
Create a text with a leader

Create a text with a leader either in the free space or associated with an element.
Add a leader to an existing annotation

Add a leader to an annotation that was previously created.
Handle annotation leaders
Add or remove breakpoints, extremity or interruptions. Move and position leader

breakpoints.

Annotations
Add frames and sub-frames to existing text
Add a frame or a sub-frame to a text that was previously created.
Replicate a text and attribute:

Replicate text as well as the corresponding text attribute.
Copy text graphical properties:

Copy the text graphical properties of an annotation or element to other elements.
Create a datum target:

Create a datum target on a view.
Modify a datum target:

Modify a datum target by editing it in a dialog box.
Create a balloon:
Create a balloon using a dialog box.
Creating an associative balloon on a generated product view

Create associative balloons on views generated from a product.
Modify a balloon
Modify a balloon using a dialog box.
Create a roughness symbol

Create a roughness using a dialog box.
Create a welding symbol

Create a welding symbol using a dialog box.
Create a geometry weld

Create a geometry weld symbol.
Modify annotation positioning

Assign new positioning to existing annotations.
Create/modify a table
Create, edit and modify a table.

Annotations
Find/replace text
Locate and then, if needed, replace strings of characters.
Perform an advanced search

Use the advanced search command.
Query object links
Query object links in a drawing.

Before You Begin
Before You Begin
Setting Text Properties

This task explains how to set the properties of a text, such as font style, size, justification, etc. Text
properties can be applied to text, dimension text, text with leader, balloon and datum target, as well
as to text included in datum features and geometrical tolerances. You can set the properties of a text
either before or after creating it.
Create a text.
1. Choose View -> Toolbars, and select Text Properties. The Text Properties
toolbar is displayed.
2. Select the text.
3. Choose the properties you want to apply to this text from the Text
Properties toolbar. For instance, select Italic and Bold. The properties you
chose are applied to the selected text.
The options available in the Text properties toolbar are listed in the table below:
Option Name Description
Font Name Changes the style of the text.
Changes the size of the text.

Font Size Note that this size cannot be
inferior to 0.2 mm.
Changes the weight of the
Bold text. Toggles between normal
and heavy (bold).
Changes the angle of the text.
Italic Toggles between normal and
slanted (italic)
Underline Adds a line under the text.
Adds a line through the center
Strike Thru
of the text.
Overline Adds a line above the text.
Raises the text above the
Superscript
normal text line.
Lowers the text below the
Subscript
normal text line.
Aligns multiple lines of text to
Left Justify
the left edge of the text frame.

Before You Begin
Centers multiple lines of text

Center Justify
within the text frame.
Aligns multiple lines of text to
Right Justify the right edge of the text
frame.
Anchor point Changes the position of the
point that connects the text to
the drawing or to an element.
Choices are as follows:
● Along the top of the text:
left, center or right
● Along the vertical center of
text: left, center or right
● Along the bottom of the
text: left, center or right
Frame Draws a single-line frame
around the text.
A variety of different shapes is
available.
You can choose to create each

frame with either a variable or
a fixed size. For a rectangular
frame, for example, the icon
represents the variable-
size frame, and the icon

(with the padlock) represents
the fixed-size frame.
Specifying the Position and Orientation of a Text

You can specify the position (x, y) and/ or orientation (angle) of a text.
Create a text.
1. Choose View -> Toolbars, and select the Position and Orientation command. The Position and
Orientation toolbar is displayed.

Before You Begin
2. Select the text for which you want to specify the position and/or orientation.
3. Enter the required values in the Position and Orientation toolbar.

● X: sets the horizontal position.
● Y: sets the vertical position.
● A: sets the orientation.
[ Up ] [ Next ]


This task shows you how to create a text which you want to be associated to an existing element.
This text will remain associated with this element. You can set text properties either before or
after you create the text.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create two diameter dimensions, for
example.
1. Click the Text icon from the

Annotations toolbar.
2. Select the element to which you want to

associate a text.
Here, we will use a dimension. You can

associate the text either to the dimension line
or to the extension line by clicking the
appropriate element. Click the dimension line
as in our example.
The green text frame is displayed as well as

the Text Editor dialog box.
3. Enter the text to be created in the Text

Editor dialog box or directly on the drawing.
For example, enter "diameter".
4. Click in the free space or click the Select
icon to end the text creation.
5. If needed, select the dimension and move

it to the desired location.
The text remains associated to the dimension.

● Note that the text is associative to the

whole selected element. In other words, in
the case of a dimension, if you move the
dimension text exclusively, the associated
text will not move accordingly.
● When creating associated texts, pressing the SHIFT key lets you change the orientation of the
text as regards the element to which it is associated.
● You can associate text to the following elements:
❍ Annotations: text, datum feature, datum target, balloon, GD&T, roughness symbol, weld
symbols.
❍ Dimensions
❍ 2D elements: point, circle, ellipse, parabola, hyperbola.
❍ Generative edges


This task explains how, at any time and once an annotation has been created, you can
add a link between an annotation and another element. You can set text properties
either before or after you create the text.
Positional link
Available for every annotation.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a text.
2. Select any part of the text (text itself, frame or leader).
3. Right click and select Positional Link->Create from the contextual menu.
4. Select the element to which you want the text to be linked.
5. Select the associated element and drag it in the drawing, the text follows the
element.
6. Delete existing associativity using the same dialog but selecting the Delete option
(Positional Link contextual menu).
Orientation link
This functionality is available for text, text with leader and roughness symbol.
7. Right click on the text and select Orientation Link->Create from the contextual
menu.

8. Select the element to which you want the text to be linked.

9. Select the linked element and modify its orientation, the text orientation is
simultaneously modified.
Elements that are Text Associative

● Annotations
❍ text
❍ datum feature
❍ datum target
❍ balloon
❍ GD&T
❍ roughness symbols
❍ weld symbols
● Dimensions
● 2D elements
❍ points
❍ circles
❍ ellipse
❍ parabola
❍ hyperbola
● Generative edges


This task shows you how to create a text with a leader either in the free space or
associated with an element. You can set text properties either before or after you
create the text.
● Creating a Text with a Leader

● Specifying Leader Orientation
● Specifying Text Orientation
● Elements that can be Assigned Text with a Leader

Create a rectangle.
Note that leader lines are displayed in either of the following ways based on the
standard currently set in defining the sheet.
1. Click the Text With Leader icon from the Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-
toolbar).

2. Click the point on the element you want the leader to begin (arrow end).
A red frame appears.
3. Click in the free space to define a location for the text.
Both the red frame and the arrow end of the leader are now assigned white and yellow
manipulators.
4. If needed, drag the frame and/or arrow to a new location. For example, drag the
arrow to the right.
At this step, you can also decide that you want the text to be wrapped (like when
creating a free text).

The Text Editor dialog box is displayed.
5. Enter the text in the Text Editor dialog box or directly on the drawing.
6. If needed, re-position or modify the text.
7. To end the text creation, click again in free space or select a command icon.
The leader is associated with the element you selected. If you move either the text or
the element, the leader stretches to maintain its association with the element.

If you change the element that is associated with the leader, between both the new
element and the text with leader remains associative to each others.
8. Create a circle.
9. Move the text with a leader.
You can create a text in a view which is not up-to-date, but you cannot associate it to
geometry or the following panel appears:
Specifying Leader Orientation

When creating a text with leader, you can orient the leader perpendicularly to the
element to which it is associated.
To do this, you have two different possibilities:

● Either go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and
check Activate snapping (SHIFT toggles). Then, click the Configure button and
select either On orientation or Both. To orient directly the leader perpendicularly
to the associated element, press the Shift key while clicking on the element to
which you want to associate the text with leader (previous scenario, step 3).
● Or go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation tab, and in Annotation
Creation -> Apply snapping to, check Text with leader. The leader will be
oriented perpendicularly to the geometry by default. In this case, pressing the Shift
key will let you orient it differently.
Specifying Text Orientation

When creating a text with leader, you can make the text vertical. To do this, hold the
Ctrl key while clicking in the drawing to position the text (previous scenario, step 3).
● You can also add a leader to existing text. To learn how to do this, refer to Adding a
Leader to Existing Text.
● You can perform a number of operations on a leader. To learn more, refer to Editing
Annotation Leaders.
Elements that can be Assigned Text with a Leader

● 2D elements:
❍ lines
❍ points
❍ circles
❍ curves
● Generative Edges


This task shows you how to add a leader to an annotation that was previously created.
Leaders can be positioned freely, or using snapping (the leader is oriented
perpendicular to the reference element).
For the purpose of this scenario, you will learn how to add a leader to an existing text,
but this functionality is available with other annotation types as well.
Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Mechanical Design -> Annotation tab .
Make sure the Activate snapping (Shift toggles) option is selected. Then, click on
the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both.
Create a hexagon. Create an annotation, a free text for example.
1. Right-click the annotation to which you want to add a leader.
2. Select the Add Leader command that appears in the

contextual menu.
3. You have two possibilities:
● If you want to position the leader freely:

Click where you want to position the leader head. The leader is created.
You can then move it to the desired location using the mouse. You can position the
leader breakpoint anywhere on the reference element, and snapping is not used.

● If you want the leader to be oriented perpendicular to the reference element:

Press the Shift key while clicking where you want to position the leader head. The
leader is created: it is snapped, and oriented perpendicular to the element to which
it is attached. Release the Shift key and the mouse.
To create as many leaders as required for an existing text, go to Tools -> Customize
and create the Add Leader command in a separate toolbar. You will then be able to
double-click the Add Leader command and click to locate the leader(s) to be created.

If several text elements are selected as you activate the Add Leader command, the
selection is cleared and a message prompts you to select an annotation.
If you modify the text associated with the leader, associativity between the text and
the leader is kept.


This task shows you how to handle annotation leaders, by performing such operations
as adding or removing a breakpoint, an extremity or an interruption. You will also
learn how to move and position leader breakpoints.
Depending on the type of annotation the leader is associated with, not all operations
described in this section will be available.
Handling Leaders
Create a text with a leader.
1. Right-click the yellow control point at the end of the leader. The leader's contextual
menu is displayed.
2. Choose from the available options.

Then, to remove this

● To add a breakpoint, select Add a Breakpoint. breakpoint, right-click on
the breakpoint and select
Remove a Breakpoint.
● To add an extremity to an existing breakpoint, right- Then, to remove this

click on the breakpoint, select Add an extremity, and extremity, right-click on the
then click where you want to position the extremity. additional extremity and
select Remove Leader/
Extremity.
You can add an extremity only in the case of a text Clicking on the main
or a welding symbol. leader extremity will remove

the leader.
● To add an interruption, select Add an Interruption and Then, to remove this

then, on the leader, click the two points between interruption, right-click on
which you want to add the interruption. the leader yellow control
point and select Remove
Interruptions.

Any existing interruption will be removed from the leader if you subsequently
add or remove a breakpoint.
● To remove the leader, select Remove Leader/Extremity.
● To add an all around symbol, select All Around.
● To modify the leader symbol shape, point to Symbol Shape. Then, select No
Symbol if you do not want a symbol for the leader, or select the symbol you want
from the available symbols.

You can remove the leader extremity symbol for all annotations.
3. You can also move the leader or any existing breakpoints by clicking a yellow
control point and moving it using the mouse.

● To move the annotation but not the leader, click the annotation and move it using
the mouse.
● To move the leader along with the annotation while making sure the leader keeps
its original shape, select Rigid and then move the annotation.
● This functionality is available for texts, welding symbols, 2D components, tables

and geometrical tolerances, but not for other annotation types.
● This functionality also applies when rotating the annotation text using the Free
Rotation icon .

Moving and Positioning Leader Breakpoints

You can move and position leaders breakpoints easily, for all types of annotations.
Leader breakpoints are moved and positioned using snapping (the leader is oriented
perpendicular to the reference element).
Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Mechanical Design -> Annotation tab .
Make sure the Activate snapping (Shift toggles) option is selected. Then, click on
the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both.
Open the Move_Leaders.CATDrawing document. This document contains a text with

leader and a balloon. Add a breakpoint to both annotations, as explained in the
previous section.
1. Move the text leader breakpoint with the mouse. You can position the leader
breakpoint anywhere, and snapping is not used.

2. Now, press the Shift key while moving the leader breakpoint with the mouse. The
leader is snapped, and is positioned vertically or horizontally, or with the same
orientation as the element to which it is attached.
3. Release the Shift key and the mouse when you are satisfied with the position of the
leader.
4. Move the balloon leader breakpoint with the mouse. You can position the leader
breakpoint anywhere, and snapping is not used.
5. Now, press the Shift key while moving the leader breakpoint with the mouse. The
leader is snapped, and is positioned vertically or horizontally, which happens to be the
same orientation as the element to which the leader is attached.
6. Release the Shift key and the mouse when you are satisfied with the position of the
leader.
Both leaders are now positioned properly.



This function allows you to add frames and sub-frames to texts and texts with leader.
Create a free text.
1. Select the text you have created and click the Frame icon in the Text Properties Toolbar. The Frames sub-
menu is displayed.
You can choose to create each frame with either a variable or a fixed size. For a rectangular frame, for example, the
icon represents the variable-size frame, and the icon (with the padlock) represents the fixed-size frame.
● Variable-size frames adapt to the text length, whereas fixed-size frames always remain as is, no matter what the
text length is. So if you choose a fixed-size frame and the length of you text exceeds the frame size, then the text
will extend beyond the frame.
● Fixed frame sizes are defined in the standards.
2. Choose a frame in the menu.

3. Click on the frame to select it
4. Right-click on the text and in the contextual menu choose the add leader command and click in the free space to
end the leader creation.
Zoom to move the leader round the text.
5. Right-click on the hanged point and select a mode in the contextual menu. The anchor points available will be
dependent on your choice. Set the Standard Behavior Off.
These anchor points allow you to move a leader around the text.
Standard Behavior is the default mode. Automatic Mode corresponds to the point 1 of Standard Behavior.
Frames Anchors Table:

Type of frame Standard Behavior OFF Standard Behavior ON

1 2 3
o-------o-------o
o-------o-------o
Rectangle / \
/ \
1 o o 2
4 o o 5
\ /
\ /
o-------o-------o
Square o-------o-------o
3
Circle
__o__ __o__
Scored Circle 2 o o 4 / \
| | | |
Set 1 o o 5 1 o o 2
| | | |
Fixed Support 8 o o 6 \ /
Sym Part --o-- --o--
7
Sym Set
3
o o
/ \ / \
Diamond 2 o o 4 o o
/ \ / \
1 o o 5 1 o o 2
\ / \ /
8 o o 6 o o
\ / \ /
Nota o o
7
3
o o
/ \ / \
2 o o 4 o o
Triangle / \ / \
1 o----o----o 5 1 o---------o 2
6
1 2 3
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
Right Flag | \ | \
4 o o 5 1 o o 2
| / | /
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
Right Oblong 6 7 8
1 2 3
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
Left Flag / | / |
4 o o 5 1 o o 2
\ | \ |
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
Left Oblong 6 7 8
1 2 3
Both Flag o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
/ \ / \
4 o o 5 1 o o 2
Oblong \ / \ /
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
6 7 8
Ellipse

1 o---------o 2
Sticking 1 o---------o 2
3 4 5
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
/ / / /
2 o o 6 o o
Parallelogram / / / /
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
1 8 7 1 2
6. Drag the leader hanged point to move it to the anchor number 8 (see the previous table, circle, Standard
Behavior Off).
7. Select a part of the text, as an example "Te", for this:

● Double-click on the text to edit it, the Text Editor appears.
● Select "Te" in the Text Editor or in the drawing.
8. Apply the Both Flag frame to the text.
You cannot use Sticking and Nota frames as sub-frames.


This task shows you how to replicate text as well as the corresponding text attribute.
Open the GenDrafting_part_02.CATPart document. Open the GenDrafting_part_03.

CATDrawing document.
1. Click the hole to be assigned text on the part. For example, on GenDrafting_part_02.
CATPart, select Hole.1.
2. Click the CATDrawing
(GenDrafting_part_03.
CATDrawing) and click the
Replicate icon from the
Annotations toolbar (Texts
sub-toolbar).
3. Select the text to be replicated.

The new replicated text automatically appears under the cursor.
4. Click where you want the new text to be positioned.
The hole diameter automatically corresponds to the diameter of Hole1 you selected on
the part.

5. If needed, add a text leader to the new text.


This task shows you how to copy the graphic properties of a text element to existing
texts. This is true for any type of Interactive Drafting element. In this task, we will take
free text as an example.
Create free texts.
1. Multi-select the free texts to be modified graphically speaking.
2. Click the Copy Object Format icon from the Graphic Properties toolbar.
3. Select the text to be used as a graphical reference for selected texts.

The graphical properties assigned to the text used as a reference are now copied onto
the multi-selected free texts to be modified.


This task will show you how to create a datum target on a right projection view. You
can set text properties either before or after you create the datum target.
1. Click the Datum Target icon
from the Annotations toolbar (Texts

sub-toolbar).
2. Select the attachment point of

the datum target leader.
3. Select a point to be used to

position the datum target (anchor
point).
The Datum Target Creation dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the required field. For example, 1 and A.
click this button to define that

the datum target informs on the

diameter of the selected element.
5. Click OK.
The datum target is created.
The character string that is edited in the Datum Target Creation dialog box is
simultaneously previewed on the drawing.


This task shows you how to modify a datum target by editing it.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a datum target.
1. Double-click the datum target you

want to modify.
The Datum Target Modification dialog

box is displayed.
2. Modify any of the datum target

values. For example, enter B instead
of A.
3. Click OK.
4. Click in the free space or select

another icon.
creatingdatumtarget02NLS.gif (3790 bytes)
The datum target is modified.


Creating a Balloon
Creating a Balloon
This task will show you how to create a balloon. You can set text properties either before or after
you create the text.
1. Click the Balloon icon from the

Annotations toolbar (Text sub-toolbar).
2. Select an element. For example,

select the bottom line of the rectangle.
3. Click to define the balloon anchor

point.
The Balloon Creation dialog box appears, with the value 1 is pre-entered in the field.
4. You can enter another string or

value as needed. For the purpose of
this exercise, leave the pre-entered
value as is.
5. Click OK.
● The value that is edited in the Balloon Creation dialog box is simultaneously previewed on the
drawing.
● When you create more than one balloon, the value of this balloon is automatically incremented.

Creating a Balloon

Creating Associative Balloons on Generated

Product Views
This task will show you how to create associative balloons on views generated from a
product.
Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document.
On this CATProduct document, Product Structure

subproducts have already been assigned numbers
(Generate Numbering icon).
For more details, see the Product Structure User's

Guide.
1. Go to the Generative Drafting workbench by opening Product_Balloon.CATDrawing

document.
2. Click the Balloon icon from the Annotations

toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).

3. Go over one of the part with your cursor.

All the edges on all the views extracted from the part
are highlighted.
4. Create a balloon by selecting an edge.

The number of the balloon corresponds to the number
of the sub-product created in the product which the
views were generated from. In this particular
example, even though the balloon you are creating is
the first one, it is assigned number four as it is applied
to sub-product number four.
Note that if you modify the numbering in the product and then regenerate the
product, the balloon modification will be applied to the generated views only after you
perform a view update.

Modifying a Balloon
Modifying a Balloon
This task shows you how to modify a balloon.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a balloon.
1. Right-click the
balloon you want to
modify.
2. From the contextual menu, select Properties.
3. In the Properties dialog box, click the Text tab.
4. You will now define the balloon frame properties from the Frame drop-down list. By
default, balloons are assigned a variable-size circle which adapts to the balloon
text length. You have other options:
● You can display the balloon without a frame by selecting the None icon .
● You can assign a fixed-size frame to the balloon by selecting the fixed-size Circle
icon .
For more information about fixed-sized frames, refer to Adding frames or sub-frames.
For the purpose of this exercise, select the fixed-size Circle icon .

Modifying a Balloon
5. Click OK to validate
and close the Properties
dialog box. The balloon
size is modified.
6. Now, double-click the balloon. The Balloon Modification dialog box is displayed.
The Autofit option is active when the size of the balloon frame is fixed.
7. Modify the balloon value.
8. Select the Autofit option to adapt the size of the text to that of the balloon frame.

Modifying a Balloon
9. Click OK. The text is

enlarged to fit within the
balloon frame.
In the case of large texts, the Autofit option reduces the text size.
10. You can also modify the anchor point and thereby the position of the balloon.


This task will show you how to create a roughness symbol.
Open the Roughness.CATDrawing document.

1. Click the Roughness Symbol icon from the Annotations toolbar.
2. Select the attachment point of the roughness symbol. The roughness symbol position and
orientation will be associative to this point.
The Roughness Symbol dialog box is displayed.

The fields available in the Roughness Symbol dialog box depend on the standard used by the
drawing, as defined by the administrator.


Symbols Definition
Surface texture
Surface texture and all surfaces around
Basic
All surfaces around
Lay approximately parallel to the line representing the surface
Lay approximately perpendicular to the line representing the surface
Lay angular in both directions
Lay multidirectional.
Lay approximately circular
Lay approximately radial
Lay particulate, non-directional, or protuberant
Basic surface texture
Material removal by machining is required
Material removal by machining is prohibited.
3. Enter the required values in the various field(s).
4. Click OK. The roughness symbol is created.

5. If needed, modify the roughness symbol position by dragging it to the required location.
● If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools ->
Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Roughness
Symbol dialog box is pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards
Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are disabled during the
creation of the roughness symbol.
On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Roughness Symbol dialog box is
pre-filled with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools
Palette are active during the creation of the of the roughness symbol.
● If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option, you can reset
the current style values in the Roughness Symbol Editor dialog box at any time using the
Reset button.
● At any time, you can modify the roughness symbol. For this, double-click the roughness
symbol to be modified and enter the desired modifications in the displayed Roughness
Symbol dialog box (for orientation modification, use the Invert switch button).
● When this is not already the case, you can link roughness symbol position and orientation to
another element, see Making an Existing Annotation Associative.


This task will show you how to create a welding symbol. You can set text properties
either before or after you create the text.
Welding symbols
Square butt weld
Singe V butt weld
Single bevel butt weld
Flare V butt weld
Flare bevel butt weld
Single U butt weld
Single J butt weld
Fillet weld
Spot weld
Back weld
Steep-flanked single-bevel butt weld
Steep-flanked single-V weld
Plug weld
Removable backing strip used
Permanent backing strip used
Surfacing weld
V flare weld
Spot weld

Complementary symbols
Weld with flat face
Weld with convex face
Weld with concave face
Flush finished weld
Fillet weld with smooth blended face

Finish symbols
C finish symbol
F finish symbol
G finish symbol
H finish symbol
M finish symbol
R finish symbol
Complementary indications
Field weld
Weld-all-around
Weld text side (up or down)
Indent line side (up or down)
Weld tail
Reference

1. Click the Welding Symbol icon from
the Annotations toolbar (Symbols sub-

toolbar).

2. Select an element or click in the free

space to position the anchor point of the
welding symbol, and then click to validate.
The welding leader will appear.
3. Move the cursor to position the welding

symbol and then click at the chosen location.
The Welding creation dialog box is displayed.
4. Type the desired values in the upper and/or lower field(s).
5. Click the symbol buttons to choose the welding symbol, complementary symbols
and/or finish symbols.
The welding symbols available depend on your standard.

6. If you want to add complementary indications like a field weld or a weld tail, for
example, click the appropriate button.

7. Click OK.
The welding symbol is created.
8. If needed, modify the welding symbol position by dragging it to the required

location.
9. Double-click on the welding symbol to edit it, and change the weld text side for
example by clicking the Up/Down switch button.

● If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools -
> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the
Welding creation dialog box is pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the
Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are
disabled during the creation of the welding symbol.
On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Welding creation dialog
box is pre-filled with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties
toolbars and the Tools Palette are active during the creation of the of the welding
symbol.
● You can reset the current style values in the Welding creation dialog box at any time
using the Reset button.
● You can close the tail (reference) using a rectangle variable-size frame .
● At any time, you can modify the welding symbol. To do this, double-click the
welding symbol to be modified and enter the modifications in the displayed dialog
box.
● You can import a plain text file (.txt) to use as a reference (specification, process or
other) by clicking the Import File button.


This task will show you how to create a geometry weld.
1. Click the Weld icon from the Annotations toolbar (Symbols sub-toolbar).
2. Select a first element. For example, a line.
3. Select a second element. For example, another line.
The geometry default weld symbol automatically appears on the drawing.
The Welding Editor dialog box is displayed.
4. If needed, modify the geometry welding symbol. For example, modify the thickness
from ten to five millimeters.

5. If needed, modify the type of the geometry welding symbol by selecting the Change
Type option from the Welding Editor dialog box.
6. Click OK.
The geometry welding symbol is created.
The area fill corresponding to the geometry weld cannot be modified.



This task will show you how to assign new positioning to existing annotations.
You can also modify the position of the views using the same dialog.
Open the IntDrafting_Annotations_Positioning.CATDrawing document.
1. Multi-select the annotations

to be newly positioned. In this
example, multi-select text.
2. Select the Tools ->

Positioning -> Element
Positioning command from the
menu bar.
The Positioning dialog box

appears:
3. Select the Align to top option .

Align to the left
The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the
left.
The text anchor point is moved to the left (for example, from the bottom center to the
bottom left).
The texts are aligned vertically relatively to the reference text origin point (same x abscissa
as for the reference text).
Align to the center
The reference text is positioned at the middle of both left and right extremity points.
The text anchor point is moved to the center (for example, from the top left to the top
center).
Align to the right
right.
The text anchor point is moved to the right (for example, from the middle center to the
middle right).
Align to the top
top.
The text anchor point is moved to the top (for example, from the bottom left to the top left).
The texts are aligned horizontally relatively to the reference text origin point (same y
coordinate as for the reference text).
Align to the middle
The reference text is positioned at the middle of both top and bottom extremity points.
The selected texts are assigned the middle attribute as text origin (for example, from the

top left to the middle left).

Align to the bottom
bottom.
The text anchor point is moved to the bottom (for example, from the top left to the bottom
left).
4. Select the Space from left to right option and set the Space value to 30mm.
Note that when you select a Space option, the modification does not appear similarly on the
drawing. This modification only appears when you enter the new Space value in the
Positioning dialog box or when you select a Space value.
5. Select the Distribute horizontally option .

6. Select the Move vertically to top option and set the Move value to -10mm.
Note that when you select a Move option, the modification does not appear similarly on the
drawing. This is only the case once you enter the new Move value in the Positioning dialog
box or when you select a spacing option.

This task shows you how to create and edit a table.
In this table, you can add text, insert columns, rows, merges cells, invert lines, invert
columns, switch lines and columns, and insert views. You can also split a table, import
a table, and insert a view in a table.
Choose a task:
● creating a table,
● editing and modifying a table,
● splitting a table,
● importing a table,
● inserting a view in table.
Creating a table
Create a new sheet and a new view.
1. Click the Table icon to launch the command.
2. Click a point in the drawing to choose the table position.

The table cannot be associative, do not select an element in the drawing to make the
table associative.
3. The following panel allows you to set the number of columns and rows you want for
the table.

● The line height corresponds to the height of a string.

● The line width corresponds to 5 times a string height.
4. Click ok to validate the creation.
Editing and modifying a table

5. Click on the table to select it and drag it to another position.
6. Double-click the table to edit it:
● To select a column, click just above the column when the symbol appears.
● To select a line, click on the left of the row .
● To leave edition, click outside the table.
When the table is in edition mode, you cannot move it anymore.
7. Right-click on the corner of the frame around the table to access the general
contextual menu.

This contextual menu allows you to:

● invert columns,
● invert rows,
● turn rows into columns and columns into rows,
● fit the text in the cells by automatically defining the optimal cell size,
● extend the table by adding columns and/or rows to it.
8. Choose Invert rows in the contextual menu.

Rows are inverted, i.e., the last row becomes the first one, the first row becomes the
last one, etc.

9. Choose Invert Columns in the contextual menu. Columns are inverted.
10. Select Invert Columns / Rows in the contextual menu. Rows and Columns are
inverted:
11. Select a column and right-click to get the contextual menu, it allows you to:
● Insert a column,
● Delete a column,
● Clear the content of a column,
● Modify the size of a column:
❍ either set a new column size,
❍ or autofit the size, i.e. fit the text in the cells by automatically defining the
optimal cell size.

Choose to autofit the column size, the following dialog box appears:
Set the column width to a new value value and click OK to validate.
The same functionalities are available for rows.
12. Select two cells and right-click them, then choose Merge in the contextual menu.
13. Then select the new cell formed by the two cells you have merged and choose
Unmerge to split them in two cells again.
14. Double-click on the text of a cell. The Text Editor appears: modify the text and
click OK to validate.
15. To choose vertical and horizontal text alignment, use the Anchor point tool .
Align the text of a cell on the right using .

Splitting a table
Open the Split_tables.CATDrawing document. It contains a table that you will split into
several tables.
1. Right-click the table and choose Split Table from the contextual menu. The Table
Split dialog box appears.

It contains the following options:

● Max. number of rows: if you want to split the table so that each new table
contains a maximum number of rows, select this option and enter the wanted
number of rows in the associated field.
● Max. height: if you want to split the table so that each new table has a maximum
height, select this option and enter the wanted height in the associated field.
● Vertical: check this option to create the new tables one below the other.
● Horizontal: check this option to position the new tables one next to the other.
● Distance: indicate the distance you want between each new table.
● Duplicate first row: check this option if you want to duplicate the first row in each
new table.
2. Select Max. number of rows, and enter 5 in the corresponding field.
3. Select Vertical.
4. In the Distance field, type 5 mm.
5. Select Duplicate first line.
6. Click OK. The table is split into several tables, according to the criteria you specified.
Importing a table
You can import a table (only .csv).
1. Click the Import Table icon and select the table you want to import.
Inserting a view a in table

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing file. Create a table in the front views.

1. Double-click on the table to edit it and right-click in the cell you want to fill. Select
Insert Object.
2. Choose the view you want to insert by clicking the view in the drawing or in the
tree. Choose the Top view:

The top view is inserted in the table, and it is resized so as to fit the cell. You can
resize the cell if you want to enlarge the view in the table.
● You cannot select the view containing the table,

● The view must be in the same drawing.
● If you modify the 3D part and update the drawing, the view in the table will be
updated as well.

Finding And Replacing Text

This task explains first how to locate a string of characters and then how to replace it.
Strings can be found and replaced in the following elements:

● balloons
● datum features
● datum targets
● dimensions
● texts
Open the IntDrafting_Text_Replace.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the Edit->Find item from the

menu bar.
The Find dialog box appears.
2. Select any of the optional settings. For

example, enter First as the Find what
text.
3. Select .
The following message appears in the dialog box: Searching All Current Sheet
Views. If you previously selected a given number of sheets or elements in the
document, the message will be Searching All Current Elements.
The first instance found is red colored.

4. If needed, select to search

for other instances.
5. Select .
The Replace dialog box now appears.
6. Enter the text you want to use as

replacement text and select
again. For example, enter Second as the
Replace with text.
To replace all instances of the text, select

.
You can also match case, find whole

words only or re-frame the window.
7. Select .
Note that you can directly access the Replace dialog box by selecting the Edit-
>Replace item from the menu bar.



This task will show you how to use the advanced search command in the Drafting
workbench.
First, refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide to learn more about advanced search.
1. Select the Edit->Search... command then click the Advanced tab:
2. Choose Drafting as the workbench.

Any element type has the following attributes:
● Name: indicate the name of the searched element
● Color: select a color from the color chooser or use the color of an existing element
● Set: a selection set indicating a numeric value with the corresponding unit of measure.
Some elements have additional types:

Additional
Type Value to select or to key in
attributes
Balloon Part name name of the searched element
Datum Feature Reference name name of the searched element
Datum Target Reference name name of the searched element
Size size indicated in the searched element
Dimension Type type of dimension (angle, diameter,
radius, length, etc.) searched
value dimension value searched
Not associative on 3D Yes/No
Not updateable Yes/No
Fake Yes/No
Driving dimension Yes/No
True Yes/No
Geometrical tolerance value tolerance value searched

tolerance type (circularity,
type concentricity, flatness, parallelism,
etc.) searched
Text having attribute links Yes/No
text string text string searched
3. Select an operating sign in the first combo box.
4. Select (if there is a combo box) or key in the value you are looking for.

Querying Annotation Links

This task explains how to query annotation links in a drawing (this lets you know what object an annotation is linked
to) and how to zoom on the linked object.
Open the query_link.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click on the text "Front view Scale: 1:1" and select Query Object Links in the contextual menu.
2. The Query Link Panel appears:

It displays the linked objects name and specifications. In our example, the view name and scale are linked to the
front view.
Zoom on the linked object

3. In the Panel, check Re-frame the window and select the linked object you want to zoom. As an example, select
ViewMakeUp.3
The object is zoomed.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Dress-Up Elements
Dress-Up Elements
The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create the following
view dress up elements on existing 2D elements.
Create center lines (no reference):

Apply a center line to one or more circles.
Create center lines (reference):

Apply a center line to one or more circles with respect to a reference (linear or
circular).
Modify center lines:

Modify one or more center lines at one or more ends of this/these center lines.
Create threads (no reference):

Create a thread without a reference.
Create threads (reference):

Create a thread with a reference, either circular (circle or point) or linear (line).
Create axis lines:

Create an axis line by selecting lines.
Create axis lines and center lines:

Create an axis line by selecting lines.
Create an area fill:

Create an area fill, i.e. a closed area on which you will then apply graphical dress-
up elements called patterns (these can be hatching, dotting or coloring). Patterns
can be applied to area fills created from both sketched and generated elements.
Create arrows:
Create an arrow.

This task will show you how to apply a pair of center lines to a circle or an ellipse.

1. Click the Center Line icon from the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-
toolbar).
2. Select a circle.
Center lines are automatically applied to the circle
.
3. Click in the drawing to confirm the creation and select the center lines.
4. Use manipulators to modify center lines size.
● You can apply this scenario to an ellipse.
● When creating a center line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the
center line cannot be associative to the 3D.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

This task will show you how to apply a pair of center lines to a circle or an ellipse with
respect to a reference (linear or circular).
1. Click the Center Line with Reference icon from
the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).
You can multi-select circles before you enter the

command to create center lines for all selected circles.
2. Select the circle to be applied a pair of center lines.
3. Select the reference line.
The center line created is associative with the

reference line.
You can create a pair of center lines according to a circular reference (a point or a
circle):
4. Click the Center Line with Reference icon from

the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).
You can multi-select circles before you enter the

command and thereby apply center lines to the
selected circles.
5. Select the circle to be applied a pair of center lines.
6. Select the reference circle.
The pair of center lines created is associative with the

reference circle type element.

You cannot apply this scenario to an ellipse.
When creating a center line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the
center line cannot be associative to the 3D. In this case, the center line is neither
linked to the 3D nor to 2D drawing elements. For example, a non-associative center
line with a reference line will not be updated when the reference line is moved.


This task will show you how to modify a pair of center lines at one or more end(s) of
this/these center lines. The same method applies to axis lines.
1. Click the center line.
Red end points appear.
2. Select any end point and drag to move all the center line extremities to a new
position.

3. Press the Ctrl key while selecting any end point and drag the selected extremity to a
new position.
Multi-selection can be performed to modify center lines.
You can also modify the center line using the contextual menu (Properties) and
displayed Properties dialog box (Graphic tab).


This task will show you how to create a thread without a reference. In this particular
case, you will apply a thread to a hole.
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Thread icon from the Dress-up toolbar
(Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).
You can also multi-select holes before clicking the Thread icon .
Activating this command displays two options in the Tools Palette which is
automatically displayed:
● The Tap type option , which is activated by default.
● The Thread type option .
2. Select the Thread type option .
3. Select the hole (or circle) to which you want to apply a thread. The thread is
created.

4. Select an axis line manipulator and drag it along a direction.
Thread axis lines are modified symmetrically.

If you want to move only one axis line, hold on the Ctrl key while you are dragging
the manipulator.
● The thread that appears on the hole is assigned a standard radius and
representation (compliant with the selected standard).
● When creating a thread on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the

thread cannot be associative to the 3D.


This task shows you how to create a thread with a reference, either circular (circle or
point) or linear (line). In this particular case, you will apply a thread to a hole with a
line as reference.
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Thread

with Reference icon from the Dress-up toolbar
(Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).
You can multi-select holes before you enter the

command and then apply center lines to the selected
holes.
Activating this command displays two options in the
Tools Palette:
● The Reference Tap type option , which is

● The Reference Thread type option .
2. Select the Reference Thread type option .
3. Select a reference line.

The thread is created according to this reference.
4. Select a manipulator and drag it along a direction.

the manipulator.
When creating a thread on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the

center line cannot be associative to the 3D. In this case, the thread is neither linked
to the 3D nor to 2D drawing elements. For example, a non-associative thread with a
reference line will not be updated when the reference line is moved.


Creating Axis Lines
Creating Axis Lines

This task will show you how to create an axis line.
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Axis Line icon from the Dressup
toolbar (Axis and Threads toolbar).
2. Select two lines.
The axis line is created
● If needed, you can select two non-parallel lines that are not colinear.
● Both in the case of center lines and axis lines, a default overrun is created.

Creating Axis Lines
● When creating an axis line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the
axis line cannot be associative to the 3D.
● You can create axis lines between symbolic fillet edges or fillet representation on
generative views. Note that these axis lines will not be associative (a message will
be displayed).
If you need to modify an axis line, please refer to Modifying a center line as the
method is similar. Note that multi-selection can be performed when modifying axis
lines.


This task will show you how to create simultaneously axis and center lines on several
circles.
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Axis Line and Center Line icon from
the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads toolbar).
2. Select two circles. The axes and center lines are created.
4. Select an axis line manipulator and drag it along a direction.

the manipulator.

When creating axes and center lines on a generative view, a message will be
displayed if axes and center line cannot be associative to the 3D.


An area fill is a closed area on which you then apply graphical dress-up element called patterns (these can
be hatching, dotting or coloring). You can create area fills on the following elements:
● sketched elements,
● generated elements
● part-sketched, part-generated elements
In this task, you will learn how to create an area fill on a drawing containing a mix of sketched and
generated elements.
Open the GenDrafting_Area_Fill.CATDrawing document. This drawing is a generated one.
Define your area fill profile by creating lines so that

your drawing looks like the figure shown here. In
this example, sketched elements (the ones you
create) are selected (they are shown in red), and
generated elements are shown in black.
The area fill profile will therefore consist of both

sketched and generated elements.
You do not need to activate the view in which you are going to create an area fill.
1. In the Graphic Properties toolbar, click the down arrow besides the Pattern icon.
2. In the Pattern dialog box, select a pattern for your area fill and click OK.
3. Click Insert -> Dress Up -> Area Fill.
OR
Click the Area Fill icon from the Dress Up toolbar.

The Area Detection dialog box appears.
4. Click the Automatic option (the other option is

described in the remarks section below) and then
click inside the area for which you just defined the
profile, under the line which represents the fillet
edge.
The software automatically detects the area to fill

based on where you clicked and fills this area with
the selected pattern. The Areas to Fill dialog box
disappears.
A few remarks
Area to Fill dialog box
The two options available in the Area to Fill dialog box are described below. You can specify the area you
want to fill before or after choosing the option in the Area to Fill dialog box.
For each option, examples illustrate what kind of area fill you will get depending on where you click. Note
where the cursor is located on the figures.
● Automatic automatically detects the area to fill based on where you click: just click inside the area you
want to fill.
If you click in this area: You get this area fill:

● With profile selection lets you specify the area to fill: select all the 2D elements that make up the
boundary of the area you want to fill, and then click inside this area.
As you select elements on a view,
intersection symbols (stars) appear
where elements intersect. This enables
you to know where the profile is open:
in this case, intersection symbols do not
appear. As you cannot apply an area fill
to an open profile, make sure all
elements intersect.
If you select these elements: You get this area fill:

Miscellaneous remarks about applying area fills

● Whichever option you choose in the Areas to Fill dialog box, make sure the profile you select is closed, i.
e. that all elements that make up its boundary intersect. An error message will appear if you select a
profile which is not closed.
● When you create an area fill on sketched elements, or on part-sketched, part-generated elements, extra
sketched elements are added over the generated elements which make up the boundaries of the area
fill. Also, coincidence constraints are created between the original generated elements and the added
sketched elements.
● On generated drawings, the area fill is not associative with the 3D part. If you modify the original 3D
part and then update the generated drawing, the area fill will not be changed.
● Select elements carefully: the area will be filled according to the elements you selected.
● If you apply modifications to the filled area, the pattern will be modified accordingly.
● If you create text in a filled area, the background of the text will be blanked as shown here.
● With hatching or dotting patterns, the spacing between each hatch or dot is sometimes larger than the
area to fill. This makes it impossible to display the pattern properly. In such a case, the area fill contour
is made bold and is turned into the same color as the pattern color. This enables you to identify items
with area fills even if the pattern is not visible. The figures below illustrate what the sketched element
will look like in such a case.
What you have before applying the

pattern:
What you get if the pattern cannot be

displayed:


Creating Arrows
Creating Arrows
This task will show you how to create an arrow. For the purpose of this exercise, you
will use an arrow to illustrate the kind of hole you want to apply to a circle.
1. Click the Drawing window, and select Insert->Dress Up->Arrow from the menu
bar.
2. Click a point or select an object to define the arrow starting point (the tail). For
example, select a circle.
3. Click another point or select another object to define the arrow extremity (the
head). The arrow is created.
The arrow and the selected object are associative.

Creating Arrows
● To modify the position of the arrow, click the arrow and use the yellow
manipulators to drag it to its new location.
● To modify the general appearance of the arrow, either click the arrow and then use
the Graphic Properties toolbar, or right-click the arrow and then use the Properties
dialog box (select Properties and click the Graphic tab).
4. You will now add a breakpoint to the arrow. Select it and right-click on a yellow
manipulator. A contextual menu appears.

Creating Arrows
5. Select Add a Breakpoint. A breakpoint is added to the arrow; you can drag it to
change the arrow path.

Creating Arrows
6. You will now choose a symbol for the arrow tail. To do this, right-click on the
yellow tail manipulator.
7. In the contextual menu, point to Symbol Shape and select a symbol, Filled
Circle for example.
The symbol you choose now appears on the arrow tail. You can also change the
symbol used for the arrow head by repeating steps 6 and 7.

Creating Arrows
8. You will now create an interruption on the arrow tail. Right-click on the yellow tail
manipulator again.
9. In the contextual menu, select Add an Interruption. An interruption is added to

the arrow.
● You cannot add another extremity to an arrow.

● Arrow angle and length are defined by standards. For more information, see
Dimension Parameters.

Creating Arrows
[ Back ] [ Up ]

2D Geometry
2D Geometry
2D geometry commands are documented in Sketcher User's Guide. As such, the
information detailed in this section is presented in a Sketcher context.
You should note that the Sketcher User's Guide contains images that correspond
to the Sketcher workbench and therefore illustrate geometry in an environment
that is different from the Drafting environment (symbols, background color, for
example).
These commands allow you to create 2D geometry. Note also that SmartPick is an
easy-to-use tool designed to make all your geometry creation as simple as
possible.
Before you begin creating 2D geometry, make sure you are familiar with concepts
such as:
● Tools Palette
● Multi-selection
In order to help ensure that 2D geometry is not altered once it has been created,
geometry edition is only allowed in the active view. Therefore, if you want to edit
or move 2D geometry, you need to activate the view which contains the
geometry.
You can prevent 2D geometry from being inopportunely moved (and distorted) in
active views by unselecting Allow direct manipulation from Tools -> Options -
> Mechanical Design -> Drafting - > Geometry tab.
You can create as many 2D geometry elements of a given type as needed by

double-clicking the appropriate icon (instead of single-clicking it).
Create a point:
Use the Tools Palette or click the point horizontal and vertical coordinates.
Create a points using coordinates:

Enter in the Point Definition dialog box cartesian or polar coordinates.

2D Geometry
Create an equidistant point:

Enter in the Equidistant Point Definition dialog box the number and spacing
of the points to be equidistantly created on a line or a curve-type element.
Create a point using intersection
Create one or more points by intersecting curve type elements via selection.
Create a point using projection
Create one or more points by projecting points onto curve type elements.
Create a line:
Use the Tools Palette or click the line first and second points.
Create an infinite line

Use the Profile toolbar or click the infinite line first and second points.
Create a bi-tangent line:

Click two elements one after the other to create a line that is tangent to
these two elements.
Create a bisecting line

Click two lines.
Create a circle:
Use the Tools Palette or click to define the circle center and then one point
on the circle.
Create a three point circle:

Use the Tools Palette or click to define the circle start point, second point
and end point one after the other.
Create a circle using coordinates:

Use the Circle Definition dialog box to define the circle center point and
radius.
Create a tri-tangent circle:

Click three elements one after the other to create a circle made of three
tangent constraints.

2D Geometry
Create an ellipse:
Use the Tools Palette or click to define the ellipse center, major semi-axis
and minor semi-axis endpoints one after the other.
Create an arc:
Use the Tools Palette or click to define the arc center and then the arc start
point and end point.
Create a three point arc:

Use the Tools Palette or click to define the arc start point, end point and
second point one after the other.
Create a three point arc (via limits):

Use the Tools Palette or click to define the arc start point, end point and
second point one after the other.
Create a profile:
Use the Tools Palette or click to define lines and arcs which the profile may
be made of.
Connect elements:
Create a parabola by focus:

Click the focus, apex and then the parabola two extremity points.
Create a hyperbola by focus:

Click the focus, center and apex, and then the hyperbola two extremity
points.
Create a conic:
Click the desired points and excentricity for creating an ellipse, a circle, a
parabola or a hyperbola, using tangents, if needed.
Create a spline:

2D Geometry
Create a rectangle:
Use the Tools Palette or click the rectangle extremity points one after the
other.
Create an oriented rectangle:

Use the Tools Palette or click to define a first side for the rectangle and then
a point corresponding to the rectangle length.
Create a parallelogram:
Use the Tools Palette or click to define a first side for the parallelogram and
then a point corresponding to the parallelogram length.
Create an hexagon:
Use the Tools Palette or click to define the hexagon center and dimension.
Create an elongated hole:

Use the Tools Palette or click to define the center to center axis and then a
point corresponding to the curved oblong profile length and angle.
Create a cylindrical elongated hole:

Use the Tools Palette or click to define the center to center circular axis and
then a point corresponding to the curved oblong profile length and angle.
Create a keyhole profile:

Use the Tools Palette or click to define the center to center axis and then
both points corresponding to both radii.

Creating Three Points Arcs Using Limits

This task shows how to create a three point arc by starting creating the arc limits
first. In this task, we will use the Sketch tools toolbar but, of course you can
create this arc manually. For this, move the cursor to activate SmartPick and click
as soon as you get what you wish.
By default, arc centers appear on the sketch and are associative. In case you
create arcs by clicking, if you do not need them you can specify this in the
Options dialog box.
To do so, go to Tools->Options, Mechanical Design -> Sketcher option at the

left of the dialog box (Sketcher tab).
1. Click the Three

Point Arc Starting
with Limits icon
from the
Profiles toolbar
(Circle
subtoolbar).
The Sketch tools toolbar will display one after the other values for defining the
three points of the circle: values for defining the horizontal (H) and vertical (V),
values for defining the arc start, end or second points or else the radius of this
arc.

2. Position the
cursor in the Start Point (H: 25mm and V: 37mm)
desired fields and
key in the desired
values.
End Point (H: 25mm and V: 7mm)
Second Point (R: 15.5mm)
3. Drag the
cursor and click
to create the arc
intermediate
point (the point
which the arc will
go through).

The three point

arc appears as
shown here:

2D geometry operations commands are documented in Sketcher User's Guide. As
such, the information detailed in this section is presented in a Sketcher context.
You should note that the Sketcher User's Guide contains images that correspond
to the Sketcher workbench and therefore illustrate geometry in an environment
that is different from the Drafting environment (symbols, background color, for
example).
These commands allow you to modify and perform various operations on 2D

geometry.
Modify Elements Coordinates

Use the Line Definition dialog box to modify element coordinates.
Create a corner:
Create a rounded corner (arc tangent to two curves) between two lines
using trimming operation.
Create a chamfer:
Create a chamfer between two lines using trimming operation.
Trim elements:
Trim a line or a circle (either one element or all the elements).
Break elements:
Break any type of curves.
Create symmetrical elements:

Repeat existing elements using a line, a construction line or an axis.
Translate elements:
Perform a translation on 2D elements by defining the duplicate mode and
then selecting the element to be duplicated.
Rotate elements:
Rotate elements by defining the duplicate mode and then selecting the
element to be duplicated.

Scale elements:
Resize a profile to the dimension you specify.
Offset elements:
Duplicate a line, arc or circle type element.

Properties
Properties
This section discusses how to quickly access and edit information on 2D geometry, dress-up
elements, annotations and dimensions in a single dialog box, provided you use the Edit-
>properties contextual command.
The data you can access (tabs) depends on the element you select. Note that clicking the
More switch gives you access to more tabs.
The tasks described in this section are listed below.
Edit view properties

Access and, if needed, edit view properties.
Edit 2D geometry feature properties:

Access and, if needed, edit information on 2D geometry features (name and stamp).
Edit 2D element graphic properties:

Access and, if needed, edit graphic properties.
Edit pattern properties:

Access and, if needed, edit pattern properties.
Edit annotation font properties:

Access and, if needed, edit annotation font properties.
Edit text properties:

Access and, if needed, modify text color, position and/or orientation.
Edit dimension text properties:

Access and, if needed, edit dimension text properties.
Edit dimension value properties:

Access and, if needed, edit dimension value properties.
Edit dimension tolerance properties:

Access and, if needed, edit dimension tolerance properties.

Properties
Edit dimension extension line properties:

Access and, if needed, edit dimension extension line properties.
Edit dimension line properties:

Access and, if needed, edit information on dimension line properties.
Edit 2D component instance properties:
Access and, if needed, edit 2D component instance properties.


This task explains how to edit view properties.
1. Right-click the front view and select properties. Choose the View tab. You can notice
that are number of options are disabled, as they apply to generative views only.
2. Choose your options.
Visualization and behavior

● Display view frame: shows/hides the view frame,
● Lock view: locks the view so that it cannot be modified anymore.
● Visual clipping: lets you reframe a view so as to display only part of it.
Scale and Orientation

● Angle: defines the angle between the view and the sheet,
● Scale: defines the scale of the view.

View Name
Allows you to modify the name of the view (or of the 2D component when pertinent),
and to enter a prefix, an ID or a suffix. Among other things, you can create a formula
for the view name.
Properties available on Generative Views
The properties described below apply to generative views only. They will be active in a
Generative Drafting context.
Dress-up
Specifies the dress-up elements that should be displayed in the view:

● Hidden lines
● Center line
● 3D spec
● 3D Colors
● Axis
● Thread
● Fillets: you can choose to view Boundaries, Symbolic, Original

Edges, Projected Original Edges.

Boundaries: thin lines, representing the

mathematical limits of the fillets.
Boundaries will not be projected if they correspond

to two faces which are continuous in curvature.
They will be projected only if they correspond to a
smooth edge which is situated between two faces
whose curvature radii vary.
This mode will be used automatically to represent a

connection between two faces which are not joined
by a fillet, no matter what option you select.
Symbolic
Original edges, projected in a direction that is
normal to each corresponding surface.
Approximated Original Edges

Original edges, at the intersection of the two
surfaces joined by the fillet.
Projected Original Edges

Original edges, projected on fillet surfaces in the
direction of the view projection.
This projection mode is equivalent to the CATIA V4

fillet projection mode.

● 3D Points: projects points from 3D (no construction elements). You can choose
from the following options:
3D symbol inheritance: keeps the symbol from the 3D.
Symbol: displays the symbol you choose from the drop-down list.
● 3D Wireframe: displays both the wireframe and the geometry on generated views.
You can choose whether projected 3D wireframe can be hidden or is always visible:
Can be hidden: in some cases, depending on the projection angle, part or
all of 3D wireframe will possibly be hidden.
Is always visible: 3D wireframe will be visible in all cases, independently
of the projection angle.
Note that if you delete generated center lines, threads or axis lines, you will NOT be
able to generate them again (by updating the drawing), even if you select the
appropriate dress-up options in the Properties dialog box. It is impossible to restore
generated center lines, threads or axis lines that have been deleted.
Generation Mode
● Only generate parts larger than: specifies that you only want to generate parts
which are larger than the size indicated (in millimeters) in the appropriate field.
● Enable occlusion culling: saves memory when generating exact views from an
assembly (or a part or product) which is loaded in Visualization mode (i.e. when the
Work with the cache system option is active). This will load only the parts which
will be seen in the resulting view (instead of loading all of them, which is the case by
default), which optimizes memory consumption and CPU usage.

● View generation mode: lets you change how the view is generated. For more
information on the various view generation modes, refer to View Generation Settings
in the Customizing chapter.
❍ Exact view: turns the view into a exact view (the geometry becomes available).
❍ CGR: turns the view into a CGR view (only the external appearance of the
component is used and displayed; the geometry is not available).
❍ Approximate: turns the view into an approximate view. Although approximate
views are not as high in precision and quality as exact views, this generation
mode dramatically reduces memory consumption. Performances may also be
improved, depending on how you fine-tune precision. Therefore, the approximate
mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or assemblies involving
large amounts of data.
❍ Raster: turns the view into an image view. You can configure a number of options
such as the level of detail or the type of image to generate (shading, shading with
edges, etc.).
If you select a mix of exact, CGR, approximate and/or raster views, the options will be
disabled. To activate these options, make sure you select views which are using the
same generation mode.
Generative view style
● The Generative view style area shows the generative view style which is applied to
the view.
● If you have modified the values of the properties defined in the selected generative
view style by editing some dress-up properties, for example, you can use the Reset
to style values button to reset these values to the original style values. (To let you
know when properties have been changed compared to the original generative style,
an asterisk is displayed in front of them.)
The Generative view style properties are only available on generative views, when
generative view style functionalities are activated (i.e. when the Prevent generative
view style creation option is de-selected in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab).
[ Up ] [ Next ]


This task shows you how to access and, if needed, edit information on 2D geometry
features (name and stamp).
1. Select a 2D element on the CATDrawing you opened.
2. Select the Edit->Properties command and click the Feature Properties tab.
You can also right click the 2D element and then select the Properties command
3. If needed, click the More switch.
4. Enter a new name for the element in the field.

The information displayed concerns the creation of the elements.
5. Click the Graphic Tab, Lines and Curves option, Pickable option and Layers
options are available. For settings, see Editing Element Graphic Properties.

5. Click OK.


This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit graphic properties.
1. Select a 2D element on the CATDrawing you opened.
2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Graphic tab.
You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command
4. If needed, modify the available options:
● Fill:
❍ you can color the selected element and set the filling transparency.
● Edges:
❍ it allows you to define edges colors, thickness and the type of line (dotted,

dashed, etc.), see Graphic Properties Toolbar.
● Lines and Curves:

❍ it allows you to define lines and curves colors, thickness and the type of line
(dotted, dashed, etc.), see Graphic Properties Toolbar.
● Show, Pick and Layers:

❍ you can choose if the element will be shown or not (check/uncheck Shown
option)
❍ you can activate or deactivate Pickable mode, if you uncheck it geometry will
not be selectable anymore, see Pick/No Pick mode.
❍ you can choose a layer for the selected geometry.
5. Click OK.
For more information on graphic properties, please refer to Infrastructure User's

guide.
Pick/No Pick mode

When you create elements using the No Pick mode (Pickable option unchecked),
● If you want to make one or several elements pickable back again, perform as
follows:
1. Select Edit -> Search from the menu bar and select the element(s) to
be modified from the Search dialog box.
2. Select Edit -> Properties option from the menu bar and check the
Pickable option from the Properties dialog box.
● If you want to make all the elements on a sheet or in a view pickable back again,
perform as follows:
1. Click the sheet or the view(s) to be applied the Pick mode from the
specification tree.
2. Select the Force Pick Mode option from the contextual menu.

Graphic Properties Toolbar

You can also modify the graphic properties using the Graphic Properties toolbar.
The Graphic Properties toolbar allows modifying the following graphical options:
● the line color
● the line type
● the line weight
● copying objects (Copy Object Format icon )
● the pattern (Pattern Chooser option )

This option displays the Pattern dialog box:

Care when you assign graphical attributes to a line (for example, make it thick and
red).
When you turn this red thick line into a construction line (from the contextual menu:
Object.Line -> Definition..., Construction line option in the Line Definition dialog box),
the line will become a dotted gray line. Even though you then decide to make it a
standard line back again (by un-checking the Construction line option), the line will
have lost its "red" and "thickness" attributes and will be assigned its original attributes.


This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit pattern properties. Patterns are
used for area fills or, in a Generative Drafting context, when cutting through material in
section views/cuts or breakout views, for example.
Open the GenDrafting_Edit_Pattern_Properties.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the pattern be modified. For the purpose of our scenario, select the hatching
pattern in the Section view.
2. Select Edit-> Properties.
You can also right-click the pattern and then select Properties from the displayed
contextual menu.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Pattern tab.

4. If you want to define your own pattern, choose a pattern type from the Type drop-
down list. The types available depend on the standard used by the drawing.
Or if you want to choose from the various patterns available, click the [...] button. This
will display the pattern chooser, from which you can make your selection.
5. Select your options as required.

The options available depend on the type of pattern you selected, as well as on the
standard used by the drawing.
Hatching
● Number of hatchings: Defines the number of different hatchings to use in this
pattern. A tab will be created for each hatching, to let you define each one
individually. This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard.
● Angle: For each hatching this pattern, specifies the angle value in degrees.
● Pitch: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the pitch in millimeters.
● Offset: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the offset in millimeters.
● Color: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the color. This option is
unavailable with the current drawing standard.
● Linetype: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the linetype. This option is
unavailable with the current drawing standard.
● Thickness: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the linetype thickness. This
option is unavailable with the current drawing standard.
● Preview: Lets you preview the resulting hatching pattern.
Dotting
● Pitch: Specifies the dotting pitch in millimeters.
● Color: Specifies the dotting color.
● Zigzag: Specifies whether dotting should zigzag.
● Preview: Lets you preview the resulting dotting pattern.
Coloring
● Color: Specifies the color.
● Preview: Lets you preview the resulting coloring pattern.
Image
● Browse button: Lets you select the image to use for this pattern. This option is
unavailable with the current drawing standard. You can only use the images defined
by the administrator. These images are available from the pattern chooser (click the
[...] button).
● Angle: Specifies the angle value in degrees.
● Scale: Specifies the scale.
● Preview: Lets you preview the original image (not the result after modifying the
angle and scale).

When editing the properties of a pattern associated with a part material, the software
offers its own selection of patterns, and not the patterns defined in the standard.
6. Click OK.
Graphic Properties Toolbar
You can also modify pattern properties using the Pattern icon on the Graphic
Properties toolbar.
This option displays the Pattern dialog box:



This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit annotation font properties.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a free text, for example.
1. Double-click the text to switch it to edit mode.
2. Select the whole text (you can also select only part of the text) and then select the
Edit-> Properties command.
You can also right-click on the selected text and then choose Properties from the
contextual menu.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Font tab. The associated panel
is displayed.
● Font, Style, Size, Underline and Color: choose the font, size, style and color of
the text, and underline it.
● Attributes: draw a line through (Strikethrough) or above (Overline) the
selected text, and make it superscript or subscript.

You can either underline or overline a text, but you cannot do both.
● Character:
❍ Ratio: modify character size.
❍ Slant: modify character slant (for italic text, slant=15 deg).
❍ Spacing: change the spacing between characters.
❍ Pitch: set a fixed or a variable pitch. As an example, create the free text "Tools"
and apply the font ROM1.
Fixed Pitch Variable Pitch
The Slant and Pitch options are available only for stroke fonts.
Clicking the More button will display extra options, if any are available.
4. Modify the available options as required.
5. Click OK.
For more information on font properties, please refer to the Infrastructure User's
guide.
Changing Character Ratio and Spacing

In this task, you will learn how to change the character ratio and spacing of a portion
of text, but it is also possible to change these for a whole text.
Create a free text.

2. Select a portion of text and

right-click it.
3. Click Properties in the menu that appears. The Properties dialog box appears.
4. Click the Font tab.
5. In the Character area, increase or decrease the value in the Ratio field to change
the character ratio.
5. Modify the value in the Spacing field to change the character spacing.
6. Click OK to validate your

changes. The text is updated.
Making Text Superscript or Subscript

In this task, you will learn how to make a text superscript, how to make a text
subscript, and how to specify their position.
Create a free text.

2. Type a text, "subscript" for example, after the text you created previously.
3. Select the piece of text you

just typed and right-click it.
5. Click the Font tab.
6. In the Attributes area, select the Subscript check box.
7. Click OK to validate your changes. The selected text is made subscript.
8. Now type another text, "superscript" for example, after the existing text. For the
moment, the new text takes on the properties of the subscript text in front of it.

9. Select the piece of text you

just typed and right-click it.
10. Repeat steps 4 and 5.
11. In the Attributes area, select

the Superscript check box
(instead of Subscript) and click
OK. The selected text is made
superscript.
12. For the purpose of this exercise, you will now align the subscript and superscript
texts and set their offset and size. To do this, select the whole text and right-click it.
The offset defines the vertical position of the superscript or subscript text from the
baseline of the text. The size defines the height of the superscript or subscript text.
Both values are expressed as a percentage of the font size.
13. Click Properties in the menu that appears.
14. In the Properties dialog box, click the Text tab.
15. In the Options area, select the Back Field check box to align the texts.
16. Increase or decrease the values for the superscript and subscript texts in the
Offset and Size fields to set the offset and size.
17. Click OK to validate. The subscript and superscript texts are now aligned and set
as defined.

This functionality does not always work when the text is wrapped.


This task explains how to access and, if needed, modify text color, position and/or
orientation. You will also learn how to specify the text display mode.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create an annotation such as a
free text, for example.
1. Select the annotation you just created. (For the purpose of this exercise, you select
a free text, but you could also select any other type of annotation.)
2. Select the Edit-> Properties command.
You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the
contextual menu.
3. Click the Text tab. The associated panel is displayed.

● Frame: you can choose a frame type for the selected text that is to say rectangle,
triangle, circle, etc. You can specify the color, line thickness and line type for the
frame in the associated fields.
● Position:
❍ Anchor Point: you can change the text position in relation to the anchor point.
❍ Justification: you can specify a justification for the text: left, center or right.
❍ X, Y: you can modify anchor point coordinates.
❍ Anchor Mode: it allows you to position the anchor line to the character Top and
Bottom or to the character Cap or Base.
● Line Spacing Mode: you can choose the spacing mode between to line of
characters. As an example, create the following free text:
Now, select base to cap option in the combo box. The spacing between the two lines
will be between the base of first line characters and cap of second line characters:

● Line spacing: you can increase or decrease the spacing between two lines of
characters.
● Word wrap: allows you to wrap the text in a width you specify.
When you create a free text, the anchor point is the point you click in free space to
define a location for the free text.
● Orientation: specify a text orientation.

❍ Reference: choose Sheet to use the sheet as the reference for the text
orientation, or View / 2D Component to use the view or 2D component as the
reference for the text orientation.
❍ Orientation: the text is oriented according to the chosen reference; choose
Horizontal to position it horizontally, Vertical to position it vertically or Fixed
Angle to position it using a fixed angle.
❍ Angle: if you choose Fixed Angle for Orientation, you can define the
orientation angle according to the chosen reference.
❍ Mirroring: specify whether you want to apply a mirroring to the selected text,
and what kind of mirroring, or if the text should flip automatically in such a way
that it will always be in a readable position.
● Options:
❍ Display Units: in a text containing parameters with units, displays these units.
❍ Apply scale: applies the scale of the view or of the 2D reference component to
the display of the text.
If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the
Apply Scale property and the Create with a constant size setting (in Tools ->
Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up
tab): the size of both the 2D component and its text will then be independent
from the view scale.
❍ Back Field: aligns superscript and subscript texts above one another.
❍ Blank Background: specifies that the text background should be blanked when
the text is displayed over a pattern or over a picture.
❍ Superscript: increase or decrease the values for the superscript texts in the
Offset and Size fields to set the offset and size.
❍ Subscript: increase or decrease the values for the subscript texts in the Offset
and Size fields to set the offset and size.
❍ Display: specifies a display mode for the text.

4. Click the More switch button to check if extra options are available.
6. Click OK.
Specifying the Text Display Mode

In this task, you will learn how to specify the display mode for the text. For the
purpose of this exercise, you will use a text with a leader and a frame, but this feature
is also available with text only, as well as with dimension texts.
Create a text with a leader and a frame.
1. Select the text and right-click it.
3. Click the Text tab.

4. In the Options area, choose the display mode you want for your text from the
Display list.
You have the following options:

● Show Value: displays the text, and (when applicable) its leader and its frame. This
option is selected by default.
● Show Box: replaces the text and (when applicable) its frame by a rectangular box
and displays its leader.
● Hide Value: hides the text and (when applicable) its frame but (when applicable)
displays its leader.
5. Click OK to validate. The text is now displayed using the mode you set.
If you select Hide Value as the display mode for a text with no leader, the text will not
be visible at all on your drawing. You can find all hidden texts in a drawing using
advanced Search options. To do this, choose Edit -> Search, click the Advanced tab.
Select Drafting from the Workbench list, Text from the Type list, Display from the
Attributes list. In the dialog box that appears, select = and Hide Value and then
click OK. Click the Search button. All hidden texts are listed.
In the case of dimensions, the display modes are as shown below:

● Show Value: displays the dimension and its leader. This option is selected by
default.
● Show Box: replaces the dimension by a rectangular box and displays its leader.

● Hide Value: hides the dimension but displays its leader.


This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension text properties.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for

example.
1. Select a dimension (whatever the type) on the CATDrawing you opened.
2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Dimension Texts tab.
You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command from
4. If needed, modify the available options.
● Prefix - Suffix: you can insert either a symbol or a text before the dimension text or a
text after the dimension text.

You can not insert a prefix and a suffix.
If you want to remove the symbol before the dimension text,

select this symbol:
● Associated Texts: you can insert texts before, after, below and above the main and
the dual value.
Dimension texts positioning:
● Dimension score options: you can choose to score only the value, all dimension texts
or not to score (for Main Value and/or Dual Value).
● Dimension frame options: you can choose to include in the frame Value+tolerance
+texts or Value+tolerance or Value for Main Value, Dual Value or both.
5. Click OK.


This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension value properties.

example.
1. Select a dimension (whatever the type) on the CATDrawing you opened.
2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Value tab.
You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command
4. If needed, modify the available options.

Dimension Type: check Driving if you want projected dimensions to drive geometry.
If you want to key in a value for the driving dimension, you must close Properties
dialog box, double-click the dimension in the drawing, check Drive geometry and key
in a value.
Value Orientation: you can choose
● the value orientation reference (Screen, View or Dimension Line),
● the value orientation (Parallel, Perpendicular or Fixed Angle),
● the orientation angle if Fixed Angle is selected in orientation,
● the value position (Auto, Inside or Outside),
● the value offset in relation to the dimension line.

Dual Value: you can show dual value checking Show dual value option and choose its
location.
Format: you can set Main value and Dual value format.
● Description: select a type of format.
● Display: choose to display one, two or three factors.
● Format: choose fractional or decimal format.
● Precision: select the value precision.
For chamfer, you can set Description, Display and Format in chamfer tab.
Fake Dimension: check this option to display fake dimensions, you can choose to
display numerical or alphanumerical fake dimensions.
Text limitation: eight characters.
If you need to insert a text containing more than eight characters:
● leave the dimension text blank (for this, you can create a blank fake dimension),
● create an associated text.
5. Click OK.


This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension tolerance properties.
There are different types of tolerances:
● Numerical tolerances
● Alphanumerical tolerances
● Combined tolerances (an

alphanumerical value and two
numerical values): ISOCOMB tolerance.

example.
1. Select the diameter dimension.
2. Select the Edit-> Properties command and click the Tolerance tab.
You can also right-click the dimension and then select the Properties command from
3. You can associate a tolerance to the selected dimension. In this example, choose
ISOALPH1 in the Main Value field.
The First value field is enabled and displays an alphanumerical value. The
corresponding numerical equivalents are displayed in the Upper value and Lower
value fields. (These equivalents are defined by standards.)

4. Assign the desired tolerance to this dimension by selecting another alphanumerical

value. In this example, select H9 in the First value field. The corresponding
numerical numerical equivalents are automatically displayed.
5. In some cases, you may wish to display another tolerance. In this case, select a
tolerance type in the Dual Value field.
If you choose the same tolerance type for main and for dual value, then the values for
this tolerance will also be the same.
6. Click OK.
For dimensions with alphanumerical tolerances, you can display the corresponding
numerical equivalents in the drawing, simply by placing the cursor over the dimension
value in the drawing. The numerical equivalents are displayed in a tooltip.



This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension extension line properties.

example.
1. Select the dimension you created (whatever the type).
You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual
menu.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Extension Line tab. The associated
panel is displayed.

● Color: choose a color for the extension line.

● Thickness: specify the thickness of the extension line.
● Display first extension line: check to display or uncheck to hide the first extension
line, when applicable.
● Display second extension line: check to display or uncheck to hide the second
extension line, when applicable.
● Slant: set the slant angle for the extension line. This angle is contained between 90
degrees and -90 degrees excluded, the default angle being 0 degree.
This functionality works only on linear dimension line and the line linking extension line
anchor points (blanking excluded) has to be parallel to the dimension line, as shown below.
● Extremities: it allows you to increase or decrease extension line Overrun and Blanking.
Overrun is the overrun minimum value. As an example, for a cumulated dimension (for ISO
Standard):
You cannot decrease it below the

You can increase the overrun size
minimum value
To set extension line length and text position for cumulated dimensions, use the
CUMLExtMode dimension parameter in the standards.

● Funnel: to insert a funnel, you must check this option. You can configure the funnel:
❍ the Height,
❍ the Angle,
❍ the Width,
❍ the funnel mode: external or internal
External Funnel Mode Internal Funnel Mode

● the Funnel side allows you to apply funnel only on one extension line or both of them.
You cannot create interruptions on funneled dimension lines.
5. Click OK.


This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension line properties.

example.
1. Select the dimension you just created (whatever the type).
You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the
contextual menu.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Dimension Line tab. The
associated panel is displayed. Not all fields are active: their activation depends on
your choice of options.

Representation
Specify how you want the dimension line represented: Regular, Two Parts, Leader
one Part, Leader two Parts.
Color
Choose a color for the dimension line.
Thickness
Specify the thickness of the dimension line.
Second part
If you chose Two parts or Leader two Parts for the representation, you need to
provide information about the second leader part:
● the Reference for positioning the second part of the dimension line,
● the Orientation for the secondary part of the dimension line in relation to its
reference,
● the Angle for the secondary part of the dimension line in relation to its reference
(if you selected Dimension Line in the Orientation field and Fixed Angle in the
Reference field).
Extension
Choose an extension type for your dimension line.
Leader Angle
Specify the angle you want for the extension line.
Symbols
Choose the properties you want to apply to Symbol 1, Symbol 2 (you may need to
check this box to specify you want to the dimension to display two symbols), and
Leader Symbol (if you chose to represent the dimension line with a leader).
● Shape: you can choose the dimension line shape (arrow, circle, plus, etc.).
● Color: you can choose the symbols color.
● Thickness: you can define the symbol thickness.
● Reversal: set the position of the symbols (inside or outside) in relation to the
extension line.

In the case of two-symbols dimensions, you can specify a different

position for each symbol (i.e. symbol 1 inside and symbol 2 outside, or
vice-versa).
You can also this interactively using the Ctrl key.
You can apply different kinds of modifications between arrow symbol 1 and symbol 2
on the condition the drawing was created from version 5 release 5 on.
Foreshortened
For radius dimensions, you can activate the Foreshortened option.
It allows you to transform a radius dimension line into a foreshortened radius

dimension line. You can then choose from the following options:
● Text position: specify whether the text should be positioned on the long segment
or on the short segment of the dimension.
● Orientation: define the orientation of the text associated to the dimension line
(parallel or convergent).
● Angle: specify the angle value.
● Ratio: specify the ratio for the short segment and the long segment of the
foreshortened dimension.
● Point scale: specify the point scale value.
● Unfix extremity position: check this box to unfix the extremity point of the
foreshortened dimension line. You will then be able to move the extremity point
using a yellow manipulator.
For foreshortened radius dimensions, you can define the appearance of the extremity
point by making sure the Symbol 2 box in the Symbols area is checked, and then
choosing the appropriate options.
Clicking the More button will display extra options, if any are available.


For example, from the Representation drop-down list, choose Leader two Parts.
5. In the Leader Angle field, specify the angle you want between the two parts of
the leader.
This angle is applied to the first segment:
You can also drive the second segment from the options in the Second Part area: it
can be horizontal, vertical, parallel, perpendicular, fixed angle with screen, view, or
dimension horizontal and vertical.
6. Change the Leader symbol in Symbols-> Shape.

Choose Double Filled Arrow, for example.

7. Transform this two parts leader into a one part leader: from the Representation
drop-down list, choose Leader one Part.
8. Click OK.


This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit information on instantiated 2D
component properties.
1. Right-click on the Instance to access the contextual menu.
2. Select Properties command and click the 2D Component tab. You can modify the
2D component instance position and orientation:

You can also select the instance and go to Edit -> Properties command and click the
2D Component tab.
● Location:
It allows you to access to the instance location and the origin of the 2D component
it was instantiated from.
● Position and orientation:
you can modify detail instantiated 2D component coordinates, angle with horizontal
reference axis and scale.
3. Click OK.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Images
Images
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you add images to Drafting sheets as well as edit
them.
Insert images
Insert raster or vector images in a drawing.
Edit images
Edit raster images using the raster editor, or view information about vector images.

This functionality allows you to insert images on every operating system. It is useful for
V4 Drawings translation.
In this task, we will see how to insert raster (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.tif, etc.) or vector images
(*.cgm. *.gl, *.gl2) as native V5 Drafting elements. The scenario below provides an
example using a raster image, but the procedure is the same for vector images.
● Define a new sheet and a view.

● Insert a frame title block, choose the Drawing_Titleblock_Samples1.
● Save the logo.tif document on your computer (to do this, right-click on "logo.tif" and
choose Save Target As in the contextual menu).
1. Select the Insert -> Picture command.
A dialog box appears, allowing you to browse your disk.
2. Select the file "logo.gif" you have previously imported. The image is imported in your
drawing.
3. Click on the image to select it. Scaling manipulators appear. Drag one of the

manipulators to decrease the picture size.
You get this:
The image is a native V5 Drafting element, it is positioned by default at the origin of the
view.
The anchor point of the picture corresponds to its lower left-hand corner.
● In the Properties dialog box available from the image's contextual menu, on the Picture
tab, check the Lock aspect ratio option to make sure images will keep their ratio
aspect.
● If the previous option is unchecked, use the Ctrl key to keep the picture ratio aspect.
● Use the Shift key to snap to the grid.
4. Drag the image to the required position.

[ Up ] [ Next ]


In this task, you will learn how to edit raster images (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.tif, etc.) inserted
in a drawing.
Save the logo.tif document on your computer (to do this, right-click on "logo.tif" and
choose Save Target As in the contextual menu) and insert it in your drawing.
1. Double-click on the raster image. The Image Editor dialog box is displayed.

2. Edit the image as wanted. For more information on how to edit images, refer to
Editing Images in the Album in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
3. When you are done, click OK. The image is updated in the drawing.
Viewing information about vector images
You cannot edit vector images (*.cgm. *.gl, *.gl2) inserted in a drawing, but you can,
however, view information about them. To do this, simply double-click on a vector
image in a drawing. This will display the Image information dialog box. To exit the
dialog box when you are done reviewing the image-related information, click OK.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Data Exchange
Data Exchange
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you export and import different types of files.
Note that these tasks, which deal with data exchange, are actually documented in the
Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide.
DXF/DWG: Import
Import or insert the 2D geometric data contained in a DXF or DWG file into a
DXF/DWG: Export
Export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a DXF file.
DXF/DWG: Report File

Learn more about the report file.
DXF/DWG: Trouble Shooting

Learn how to troubleshoot DXF/DWG import and export.

Learn best practices for DXF/DWG import and export.
DXF/DWG: FAQ
Get answers to Frequently Asked Questions about DXF/DWG import and export.
DXF/DWG: VBScript Macros

Learn about DXF/DWG import and export macros.
CGM: Insertion
Insert a CGM file into a CATDrawing document.
CGM: Export
Export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a CGM file.
DXF/DWG: Import
Importing a DXF/DWG file into a CATDrawing

This task lets you quickly see how to import or to insert the 2D geometric data contained in a DXF file into a CATDrawing document. Once
imported, the data can be handled and edited just as if they had been created in a Drafting session using 2D geometry creation commands.
The table entitled What about the elements you import ? provides information on the entities you can import.
You can find further information in the Advanced Tasks:

● Trouble Shooting,
● Best Practices,
● FAQ,
● VBScript Macros
and in the Customizing DXF/DWG Settings chapter.
Statistics about each import operation can be found in the report file created.
Open your session (Open your CATDrawing document if you want to insert a DXF file.).
1. To import an existing DXF/DWG file, select the File-> Open 1. To insert a DXF/DWG file in an existing CATDrawing document,
items. select the Tools -> Import External Format.
The File Selection dialog box is displayed: The File Selection dialog box is displayed:
2. Select the.dxf/.dwg extension from the field called Files of type.
All .dxf/.dwg files contained in the selected directory are

now displayed.
3. Click the .dxf/.dwg file of your choice. For example, click the
draw1.dxf file.
4. Click Open.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugbt0301.htm (1 of 6)10/19/2004 4:14:55 PM

DXF/DWG: Import
In import mode, a CATDrawing file is created which contains all the In insertion mode, the geometry of the DXF/DWG file is created in a
geometry included in the DXF/DWG file. This .CATDrawing file becomes new view of the current sheet.
the current document.
Import of multiple viewports and layouts

The default behavior has been improved for better results. If the model is referenced, at least partially, by one or several viewports, the model
is not created in a sheet of its own. Only layouts are created. They will contain eventual viewports.
CATIA does not create empty viewports or layouts.
Drafting Standard
● In insertion mode, the Standard of the current Drawing is inherited.
● In import mode, the Drawing is created automatically with the current Standard proposed at the creation of a New Drawing. If you wish to
import a DXF/DWG file directly into a given Drawing Standard, create a New Drawing with this Standard before opening the DXF/DWG file.
● In all cases, you can switch to another Standard after the conversion.
Customization
Import of a DXF/DWG file can be improved by customization:
DXF/DWG specific import settings are:

● Import With Unit
A DXF/DWG file does not contain its units. You must enter the unit used for the creation of the file to import it at the correct scale.
See also Trouble Shooting.
● Papers Spaces and Model Space

● Mappings (line type, text font, color/thickness)
The lists of attributes are not the same in V5 and AutoCAD. Mapping options are used to come as close as possible to the AutoCAD
attributes, or to switch them to V5 attributes.
● DXF Dimensions Import Configuration
The definitions of dimensions are not the same in V5 and AutoCAD. This option is used to give priority either to the graphic
closeness or to the re-usability in V5.

DXF/DWG: Import
Report File
After the recovery of DXF/DWG files, the system generates:
● a report file (name_of_file.rpt) where you can find references about the quality of the transfer
This file is created in a location referenced by

● the CATUserSettingPath USERPROFILE variable on NT. Its default value is Profiles\user\Local Settings\Application Data\Dassault Systemes
\CATReport on NT (user being you logon id)
● the HOME variable on UNIX. Its default value is $HOME/CATReport on UNIX.
Always check the report file after a conversion ! Some problems may have occurred without been visually highlighted.
What About The Elements You Import ?

Version 5 supports DXF/DWG formats version 12,13, 14 and Autocad2000.
To make sure the elements you need to handle in your session are those you expected, here is a list presenting the DXF/DWG data supported when imported into
a CATDrawing file.
DXF/DWG element DXF/DWG sub-type V5 element Notes
Geometry
point Point
line Line
ray None
xline None
circle Circle
arc Arc
ellipse Ellipse
polyline/2D polyline/ non adjustable width, Polyline Not editable in V5
lightweight polyline made of line segments

DXF/DWG: Import
non adjustable width, segments and arc with no Structure is lost

made of line and arc structure
segments
adjustable width Filled area (pattern) Structure is lost

fit curve Polyline
mline Lines Structure and closing attributes
are lost
spline NURBS Not editable in V5

3D face none
3D solid none
Annotations
text Text
mtext Text Changing fonts, changing
attributes and line break are
not taken into account
Arc aligned text none

rtext none
dimensions aligned, linear and According to option: See dimensions
rotated, radius and
diameter, angular, dimension or In a few "dimensions" cases,
ordinate (x or y) the text of the dimension can
details or be a text with an associative link
geometry+texts In all "dimensions" cases, the

geometry support is in No Show
leader Line + text DXF Leaders are imported as

simple lines. The arrow head
and the line under the text are
lost
tolerance none
hatch non-associative Filled area (pattern)

DXF/DWG: Import
associative Filled area (pattern) The contour of the hatch is

created in the No Show and the
associativity is created with this
hidden contour.
solid Filled area (colored)

block attribute Text
Structures
block Detail The details are created in a new
Detail Sheet named "Imported
Details".
insert (Block Ditto If the insert is defined with

Reference) different scales, on x-axis and
y-axis, no detail instance is
created but only the geometry
is transferred.
group none The structure of the group is

lost whereas its contents is
transferred
viewport View see above
Layout (paper space) Sheet see above
OLE frame none

proxy none
region none
Attributes
color Color see mapping
Line weight Line weight see mapping
line type Line type see mapping
point markers Point type Markers may be different since

V5 and AutoCAD do not have
the same markers.

DXF/DWG: Import
layer Layer Invisible layers are gathered in

a filter named Invisible
Imported Layers.
Visible layers are gathered in a

filter named Visible Imported
Layers.
font Font see mapping
Pattern Pattern Automatic mapping

BYBlock attribute Attribute The value of the attribute of the
block is set to a default value
BYLAYER attribute Attribute The value of the attribute of the

layer is applied to each element
imported
[ Up ] [ Next ]


Import
Quality of conversion
Always check the report file after a conversion ! Some problems may have occurred without been visually highlighted.
When importing a DXF/DWG file, the display of small entities may depend on zoom factor. To see the complete Drawing regardless of their size:
1. Go to the Tools->Options->General->Display->Performance tab.

2. Switch the value of Level of detail/static to zero. All geometries become visible.
For more information, see Performance.
Export
None
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugat0302.htm10/19/2004 4:15:59 PM
DXF/DWG: FAQ
DXF/DWG: FAQ
Import
● Question: How are Real dimensions dealt with?
● Answer: The semantic import option manages all kind of dimensions except:
❍ ordinate dimensions,
❍ rotated dimensions with a fixed angles other than horizontal or vertical.
● Question: There is some inconsistency between graphic and semantic import:

● Answer:There may be an inconsistency between the results of dimensions imported with the semantic preserving option and with the graphic
preserving option. This is generally due to an inconsistency in the DXF/DWG file itself (the aspect is different in AutoCAD14 and
AutoCAD2000). This happens with files that have not been generated with AutoCAD. Usually, the graphic mode should be used, but only the
author of the file can confirm it.
● Question: The R of a radius dimension is a conglomerate of a P with a small \:

● Answer:The DXF model is probably the result of a graphic export. In this case, texts are no real texts but geometry.
● Question: There is a problem of alignment of DIMtext to DIMline:

● Answer:This occurs while opening a DXF file created with ANSI standard using an ISO standard (or vice-versa).
● Since V5R8-SP2, the current Standard of creation of a New Drawing is taken into account when opening a DXF file with semantic
dimensions. So it is possible to by-pass this problem.
● Since V5R9, texts of dimensions without overloaded text and without tolerance are imported directly as DIMtext instead of texts
with positional link, avoiding thus the problem of positioning.
By-pass:
1. Create a New Drawing (menu File/New...). A dialod box appears to choose the standard. If the proposed standard is the one you required,
cancel the command: the current standard is already set to the proper value.
2. Otherwise, if you require another standard, select it and click OK. A new drawing is created with this standard. Close this Drawing: the new
current standard is memorized.
3. Then open a DXF/DWG file: the current standard will be taken into account.
● Question: Hatches: The result of import is a geometry instead of a filled area:

● Answer:The original DXF/DWG file does not contain real hatches but geometry (or old R12 hatches, i.e. blocks). Real hatches are mapped
automatically.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugat0303.htm (1 of 2)10/19/2004 4:16:07 PM

DXF/DWG: FAQ
● Question: Fonts: Problems with è, é, à ... characters:

● Answer:
❍ Use the settings to map AutoCAD and the fonts you use.
● True Type fonts on NT provide the same fonts in your system and AutoCAD.
● Question: Fonts:Texts are larger than their frame:

● Answer: a scale factor is available in the font mapping.
● Question: The entities visible are not those expected:

● Answer:
● All DXF/DWG invisible layers are gathered in a CATIA V5 filter named Invisible Imported Layers.
● All DXF/DWG visible layers are gathered in a CATIA V5 filter named Visible Imported Layers.
If the expected entities are not visible, activate the Visible Imported Layers filter, or if too many entities are visible, activate the
Invisible Imported Layers filter.
Export
None
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/itfug_C2/itfugat0303.htm (2 of 2)10/19/2004 4:16:07 PM

CGM: Insertion
Inserting a CGM file into a CATDrawing

This task will show you how to insert a cgm file into a CATDrawing document.
Open your session. Open your CATDrawing document
1. Select the Tools-> Import External Format item.
The Import dialog box is displayed:
2. Select the .cgm extension from the field called Files of type.
3. Click the CGM file of your choice.

4. Click Open.
If you use the command File -> Open (you must select the .cgm extension from the
field called Files of type), you only browse the CGM files.

CGM: Insertion
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Print
Print
The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to print one or more sheets
inserted in your document.
See Printing documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide for classic printing.
Print a document quickly

Quickly print a given sheet.
Print a document after modifying current display settings

Modify the settings of a document you will then print.
Print using a clipping operator

Print using a clipping operator with scaling support. Lets you print only a part of a
drawing.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

This task will show you how to quickly print a given sheet.
When printing a sheet, the current filter and layers (those used for screen display) are taken
into account. For more details on layers and filters, see Infrastructure User's Guide.
Open a CATDrawing document. Create a circle, a line and a profile on this document.
1. Select File -> Print Preview from the menu bar.
The Print Preview dialog box is displayed.

2. Press OK.
3. Select File -> Print from the menu bar.

The Print dialog box displays.
4. Click the required options from the box.
5. Press OK.

You may print either all or given sheets (the sheet selected or a given number of existing
sheets).
You may also print the views currently displayed on your screen (Current display option).
You may also choose the number of copies you need to print.
Fitting choice provides the following options:
● : Assigns the best orientation to the views to be printed.
● : Prints keeping the printer options.
● : Clips the drawing representation to the sheet format.
For details on Options, see Infrastructure User's guide Version 5.
By default the sheet to be printed will Fit to Printer Format. The printer default format will
be used whatever the sheet format. Let's say the printer format is Portrait. If you check the
options as described below, the sheet will be previewed and printed as follows.

Best Orientation/Fit to printer format/Clip to the sheet format
Fit to printer format/Clip to the sheet format

Clip to the sheet format
Best orientation/Clip to the sheet format

Let's start from a new drawing:
Best Orientation/Fit to printer format/Clip to the sheet format

Best Orientation/Fit to printer format
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Printing a Document After Modifying Current

Display Settings
This task shows how to modify the settings of a document you will then print.
Create views on different sheets with the Landscape orientation.
1. Select File -> Print from the menu bar.
The Print dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the required Printer options from the dialog box.
3. Activate the Current display option.
4. Click the Options option from the box.

5. If needed, select the Color tab.
6. If needed, select the Banner tab.
7. If needed, select the Various tab.
8. Click OK.

9. Click the Settings option from the Print dialog box.
The Layout dialog box is displayed.
10. De-activate the Fit in Page option.
11. For example, click the center switch for positioning the sheet at the center of the
previewed layout.
12. Press OK.
13. Select the Print Preview option from

the Print dialog box.
The Print Preview dialog box is displayed.
14. Press OK.
The Print dialog box is displayed.
15. Press OK to launch the printing

operation.



This task will show you how to print using a clipping operator with scaling support.
Open the Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document.
1. Select File -> Print
2. In the Print Dialog Box, choose Selection in Print Area.
It activate the select mode button and allows you to select the area to print.
3. Click on the select mode button and drag the cursor on the drawing to define the
Print Area.

4. Click ok to print the area.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

Advanced Tasks
Advanced Tasks
Advanced tasks deal with using Knowledgeware tools in the Interactive Drafting workbench.
The information you will find in this section is listed below:
Text Templates
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugat0000.htm10/19/2004 4:17:48 PM
This task explains how to deactivate/activate annotations using Knowledgeware tools. This feature
enables you to specify whether an annotation should be active or not, using what is known as an
Activity parameter. Deactivated annotations are not taken into account anymore.
Deactivating dimensions, for example, enables you to avoid problems when some dimensions cannot
be computed anymore (e.g. when geometry has been deleted).
In this scenario, you will see how to deactivate dimensions, but you can also deactivate texts,
balloons, welding symbols and geometrical tolerances.
For more information on using Knowledgeware capabilities, refer to the Knowledge Advisor User's
Guide.
Open the Deactivating_annotations.CATDrawing document. It contains three views, each of which
shows a number of dimensions.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugat0101.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 4:18:08 PM

1. Click the Design Table icon in the Knowledge toolbar. The Creation of a Design Table dialog
box is displayed.
2. If needed, replace the default name and comment for the design table.
3. Check the Create a design table with current parameter values option.
4. Check the Horizontal orientation option.
5. Click OK. The Select parameters to insert dialog box is displayed.
6. In the Parameters to insert list, you can notice that there are Activity parameters for a number of
annotations (dimensions and texts, in this specific case).
For the purpose of this scenario, select all of the Activity parameters for dimensions: the Sheet.1
\Front view\DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activity, Sheet.1\Top view\DrwDressUp.1
\Dimension.#\Activity and Sheet.1\Left view\DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activity items.
Then, click the right arrow to add these items to the Inserted parameters list.

7. Click OK. A Save As dialog box is displayed.
8. Specify a path and filename for the design table to be created. Click OK in the file selection dialog
box.
The design table feature is added to the specification tree and a dialog box displays the newly created
design table. This design table contains only one configuration, on line 1. By default, all dimensions
are active (their Activity parameters are set to "true").
9. Click the Edit table... button to start an Excel application (under Windows NT) or open the text
editor (under Unix).
10. In column C, set each item to "false".
11. In column D, set each Sheet.1\Front view\DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activity item to

Sheet.1\Top view\DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activityand Sheet.1\Left view
\DrwDressUp.1\Dimension.#\Activity item to "true". This will enable you to deactivate some of
the dimensions while keeping other dimensions active.

12. Save your Excel or .txt file and close your application. An information message is displayed to let
you know that the design table was updated; click Close. The design table now contains 3
configurations.
13. You can now select another configuration in the Design table dialog box. Select line 3, for
instance, and click Apply. You can notice that the dimensions in the front view are deactivated, while
the dimensions in the other views remain active.
14. Click OK to exit the dialog box and add the design table to the document.

● The only way you can display deactivated annotations is by reactivating them through
Knowledgeware (i.e. by setting their Activity parameter to "true").
● You can also deactivate/activate annotations using formulas. For more information about formulas,
refer to the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. You can also see Deactivating Table Rows in this
User's Guide for a scenario on using formulas to deactivate rows in a table.
[ Up ] [ Next ]


This task explains how to deactivate/activate (i.e. hide or display) table rows using Knowledgeware
tools. This feature enables you to specify whether a row should be active or not, using what is known
as an Activity parameter.
For more information on using Knowledgeware capabilities, refer to the Knowledge Advisor User's
Guide.
Open the Gear-Reducer-with-BOM.CATDrawing document. It contains three tables (actually, three

bills of material).
1. Select the table called "Bill of Material: GEAR REDUCER".
2. Click the Formula icon in the Knowledge toolbar. The Formulas:Table.1 dialog box is
displayed. It displays the formula parameters and the Activity parameters corresponding to the
selected table (Table.1).
3. In the parameters list, select the first Activity parameter, i.e. the Sheet.1\Isometric view
\DrwDressUp.1\Table.1\Text.1\Activity item.
4. In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, change the parameter value to
"false".

5. Repeat this operation for the second Activity parameter in the list, i.e. the Sheet.1\Isometric
view\DrwDressUp.1\Table.1\Text.6\Activity item.
6. Click Apply. The table is updated: its title row and header row are hidden.
7. Using the same method, reset the Activity parameters you just modified to their original value
"true", in order to display the table title row and header row again.

8. Now, set the Sheet.1\Isometric view\DrwDressUp.1\Table.1\Text.21\Activity item to

"false", and click Apply. The table is updated and the corresponding row is hidden.
9. Click OK to exit the dialog box and validate your changes.
● The only way you can display deactivated rows is by reactivating them through Knowledgeware (i.
e. by setting their Activity parameters to "true").
● You can also deactivate/activate rows using design tables. For more information about design
tables, refer to the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide. You can also see Deactivating Annotations in
this User's Guide for a scenario on using design tables to deactivate annotations.


This task shows you how to add one or more attribute links to text.
In a first example, we will create an attribute link between a hole on the 3D part and the
corresponding text in a CATDrawing view.
In a second example, we will assign an attribute an attribute link to a view.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document and the GenDrafting_part_02.

1. Double-click the text to which you want to add a link.
2. Right-click on the text in the drawing and select the Attribute Link option from the
contextual menu.
3. Select the object which you want the text to be linked to, from the specification tree
(either from the 3D or from the CATDrawing document).

For example, select Hole 2 from the CATPart specification tree.
The Attribute Link Panel dialog box appears:
4. Select the "Part1\PartBody\Hole.2\Diameter 8.5mm" attribute from the list

displayed.
The 8.5mm attribute automatically appears both in the Text Editor dialog box and on
the CATDrawing.

5. Modify the diameter of Hole 2 on the CATPart. For example, modify the hole diameter
into 13.5mm.
This modification is automatically updated on both the views generated on the

CATDrawing and the linked text attribute inserted inside the text, on the condition you
select automatic update mode in the Options dialog box (Tools->Options-
>Mechanical Design-> Part Design options, General tab).
At this step, you can perform a query on the link (s) you just created. For this, click the
view and select the Query Objects Links option from the contextual menu.
The Query Link Panel appears which displays a list with the existing links.
Of course, you can only modify the text that is not text attribute type. To modify the text
attribute, you need to isolate this text.
For this:
6. Right-click the text attribute.
7. Select the Isolate Text option from the contextual menu.

Open the GenDrafting_part_02.CATDrawing document.
Create the formula:
1. Click the Formula icon from the Standard toolbar.
The Formulas: Drawing dialog box appears:
2. Create a parameter called NameOfUser.

Define the Text Attribute:
3. Click the Text icon from the Annotations toolbar and click in the free space.
4. Right-click the empty text and select the Attribute Link option from the contextual
menu.
5. Select the object which you want the text to be linked to, from the specification tree.
For example, select the CATDrawing document (very top of the specification tree).
Modify the Text Attribute:
The attribute appears on the drawing:
6. Modify the parameter by clicking the Formula icon from the Standard toolbar,
double-clicking the parameter and editing it.
7. Enter the new value for the username attribute. For example, NewNameOfUser.

8. Click OK.
The linked attribute now appears. In other words, it is automatically updated.


This task shows you how to set constraints between dimension using formulas. As a result, if you modify one of
these dimensions (the driving dimension), all the other dimensions as well as the geometry will be modified
accordingly.
1. Click the Formula icon from the Standard toolbar.
The Formulas dialog box appears.
You will now select, one after the other, the dimensions to be constrained and then enter in the dialog box the
formulas to be used.

2. Select a first dimension (1).
3. Press the Add Formula switch in the Formulas dialog box.
The Formula Editor dialog box appears.
4. Select a second dimension (3) and add "/4". Then, click OK (Formula Editor dialog box).
7. Select a second dimension (3) and add "*3 /4". Then, click OK (Formula Editor dialog box).

10. Select a second dimension (1) and then, click OK (Formula Editor dialog box).
13. Select a second dimension (2) and then, click OK (Formula Editor dialog box).
14. Click OK ( Formulas dialog box).
Note that the specification tree is modified accordingly.

15. Double-click the dimension to be set as driving dimension (3).
The Dimension Value dialog box appear.
16. If needed, activate the Drive geometry option.
17. Enter 100mm as dimension new length and press OK.
All the dimensions which you previously constrained using formulas are automatically updated.

Text Templates
Text Templates
The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you define and store text templates to be used
when creating texts associated to features. Text templates rely on attributes defined in the
3D for these features.
Create text templates

Define text templates associated to feature attributes defined in the 3D.
Store text templates in a catalog

Store in a catalog previously-defined text templates.
Annotate drawings using text templates

Use text templates stored in a catalog to annotate drawings.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugdr_C2/cfyugtexttemplate00.htm10/19/2004 4:18:56 PM

This task will show you how to create text templates.
Before you begin, you need to make sure that the package corresponding to the
type of object for which you want to create a template is correctly loaded. For the
purpose of this scenario, you will load the Product package. Go to Tools -> Options
-> General -> Parameters and Measure and click on the Language tab. Check
Load extended language libraries and uncheck All packages. From the
Available Packages list, select ProductPackage and click on the right arrow to
add it to the Packages to load list. Click OK, and then exit and re-start the
software.
Create a new drawing.
1. Click the Text icon from the Annotations toolbar.
2. Click anywhere in the drawing. A green frame appears, as well as the Text
Editor dialog box.
3. In the Text Editor dialog box, type Part number:.
4. Without closing the Text Editor dialog box, right-click the frame and select
Insert link template from the contextual menu which is displayed.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/cfyugdr_C2/cfyugtexttemplate01.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 4:19:10 PM

5. In the Insert Link Template dialog box which is displayed, select the
ProductPackage dictionary, the Product type and the PartNumber
attribute, and click Insert.
6. Back in the Text Editor dialog box, press the Enter key and type Revision:.
7. Back in the Insert Link Template dialog box, select the Revision attribute
(leave the other fields as is), click Insert and then Close.
8. Click OK in the Text Editor dialog box. The text template is now created.
9. Make sure the text template is selected and click the Frame icon in the
Text Properties toolbar.
10. From the Frames sub-menu, choose the Scored Rectangle frame .
11. Right-click the text template, and select Add Leader from the contextual
menu.
12. Click in the drawing to end the leader creation. The text template is now set.

13. Right-click the text template, and select Properties from the contextual
menu.
14. Click the Feature Properties tab in the Properties dialog box which is
displayed.
15. In the Feature Name field, type Part number & Revision and click OK. You
will use this feature name to identify this text template in the future.
16. Create another text by repeating steps 1 to 3, this time typing Part name: in
the Text Editor dialog box.
17. Repeat steps 4 and 5, this time selecting the Name attribute in the Insert
Link Template dialog box.
18. Click Close in the Insert Link Template dialog box and then OK in the Text
Editor dialog box. The text template is now created.
19. Make sure the text template is selected and in the Graphic Properties toolbar,
choose green from the Color list. The text template is now set.
20. Repeat steps 13 to 15, this time typing Part name in the Feature Name field.
You will use this feature name to identify this text template in the future.
21. Select File -> Save As and save the drawing as a .CATDrawing document.
Now that your text templates are defined, you need to store them in a
catalog.
[ Up ] [ Next ]


This task will show you how to store text templates in a catalog.
For more information on catalogs, refer to the Using Catalogs chapter in the Infrastructure
User's Guide.
Open the TextTemplates.CATDrawing document.
1. Select File -> New.

2. In the New dialog box, select CatalogDocument from the list of types and click OK.
The Catalog Editor workbench is launched and a new catalog is created.
3. In the left-hand pane, double-click Chapter.1 to activate it.
4. Select Insert -> Add Family.... The Component Family Definition dialog box is
displayed.
5. Type Text templates in the Name field.
6. Make sure Standard is selected in the Type field, and click OK. The family is created.
7. For more convenience, select Window -> Tile Horizontally to display your Catalog
Editor and Drafting windows at once.
8. In the Drafting window, select one of the text templates, e.g. Part number & Revision.
9. In the left-hand pane of the Catalog Editor window, double-click Text templates to
activate it.
10. Select Insert -> Add Component.... The Description Definition dialog box is
displayed.
11. On the Reference tab, click the Select external feature button. The dialog box is
updated with information about the selected text template, i.e. Part number &
Revision.

12. Click OK. The selected text template is listed on the Reference tab, in the right-hand
pane of the Catalog Editor window.
13. Go back to the Drafting window and select the other text templates, e.g. Part name.
14. Return to the Catalog Editor window and repeat steps 10 and 11. The dialog box is
now updated with information about the Part name text template.
15. Click OK. Both selected text templates are now listed on the Reference tab, in the
right-hand pane of the Catalog Editor window.
16. Select File -> Save As and save the catalog as a .catalog document.



This task will show you how to annotate drawings using text templates stored in a catalog.
Before you begin, you need to make sure that the package corresponding to the type of object for
which you want to create a template is correctly loaded. For the purpose of this scenario, you will
load the Product package. Go to Tools -> Options -> General -> Parameters and Measure
and click on the Language tab. Check Load extended language libraries and uncheck All
packages. From the Available Packages list, select ProductPackage and click on the right
arrow to add it to the Packages to load list. Click OK, and then exit and re-start the software.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Text Template Placement icon from the Annotations toolbar.
2. In the Place Text Template dialog box, browse to select the TextTemplates.catalog
document. This document is located in your documentation installation folder (by default,
this folder is C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\XXXdoc\online\), in cfysa_C2
\samples\Drafting. Leave the Place Text Template dialog box open to perform the next
steps.
3. On any view, select the part that you want to annotate, making sure that you click where
you want the anchor point of the annotation to be located. Note that the name of a part is
displayed as a help as you fly the cursor over it.

The Place Text Template dialog box now lists all the templates available in the
selected catalog and which can be applied to the selected object.

4. In the Place Text Template dialog box, select the text template that you want to apply, Part
number & Revision for example. The annotation is created at the point you clicked when
selecting the part to annotate, and contains information retrieved from the 3D part. Note
that this annotation is associative to the 3D part.
5. If you want, select the other text template (Part name). Note that this annotation will also
be created at the point you clicked, so it will overlap the first annotation. For better results,
you will have to move it afterwards.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for other parts that you want to annotate.
Note that the last template you selected in the Place Text Template dialog box
remains active when annotating other parts. You can de-activate it by clicking the
Clear selection button.
7. When you're done, click Close to close the Place Text Template dialog box.
You can also multi-select the parts that you want to annotate (using the Ctrl key) prior to clicking
the Text Template Placement icon.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

In the Interactive Drafting workbench, administration tasks deals with the
administration of standards. These tasks must be performed by an administrator.
Administrators can manage and customize standards such as ISO, JIS, ANSI, ASME,
etc. or company standards. The Standards Editor let administrators set the standards
used for dress-up, dimensions, annotations, etc. as well as set the styles that will be
used as defaults for element properties in the Interactive Drafting workbench.
Before You Begin

Upgrading Standard Files from Releases up to V5 R9
The format of the standard file has been changed from V5 R9 onwards . If you were
using a customized CATDrwStandard file on a release up to V5 R8, you need to
upgrade the standard file to the new XML format.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugsa0000.htm10/19/2004 4:20:35 PM
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
About Drafting Standards

When users modify the properties of an element in the Interactive Drafting
workbench, the modifications are only applied to the selected element, in the
current drawing. Standard files let administrators set the properties of an element so
that they will be applied to all elements of the same type in a drawing, as well as in
all drawings which use a given standard.
A standard file is an XML file which makes it possible to customize globally, for a
CATDrawing, the appearance and behavior of drafting elements.
With standard files, administrators can:
● set standard styles that will be used as default values when creating new elements,
i.e.:
❍ define sheet styles
❍ define geometry styles
❍ define annotation styles
❍ define dimension styles
❍ define dress-up and dress-up symbols styles
❍ define callout styles
● set standard parameters, i.e.:

❍ control the user interface, with general parameters to restrict the values of some
element properties
❍ customize dimensions
❍ customize annotations
❍ customize dress-up elements
❍ define new dimension tolerance formats
❍ define new dimension value formats
❍ control pre-defined formats for tolerance and dimension values
❍ control view generation parameters
❍ customize fixed-size frames
❍ customize line thickness
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugsa0100.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 4:21:33 PM

Before You Begin
❍ customize patterns
Once defined, a format is applied to elements as a property.
The format of the standard file has been changed from V5 R9 onwards. If you were
using a customized CATDrwStandard file on a previous release (up to V5 R8), you
need to upgrade the standard file to the new XML format.
Management of Drafting Standards

Standalone drawings
When users create a CATDrawing document (File -> New), they specify the standard
that will be associated with this document. The values of the parameters in the
specified standard file are then copied into the CATDrawing document. Each drawing
contains a copy of the standard and is therefore standalone. This makes it possible
for users, projects, or companies to exchange CATDrawing documents without
needing to send the standard file along.
Administrator-controlled access and modification
The administrator defines and controls the location of the standard files as well as the
ability to define new standards, or to modify existing standards. For example, the
administrator can define a single standard, and prevent users from modifying it.
Four standard files available by default
By default, 4 standard files are delivered, one for each of the international standards
available when creating a new CATDrawing file. These files are located in
install_root/resources/standard/drafting.
● ISO.xml
● ANSI.xml
● JIS.xml
● ASME.xml
Administrators can add as many standard files as needed. Refer to Administering

Standards for more information.

Before You Begin
Editing the standard file
The standard files can be edited using an interactive editor. This editor provides an
easy-to-use graphic interface to let administrators customize the parameters included
in the standard files. For information on how to customize these parameters, refer to
Setting Standard Parameters.
The interactive editor is available in Tools -> Standards. (It is the same editor with
which you can customize generative view styles). For more information on how to use
this editor, refer to the Customizing Standards chapter in the Infrastructure User's
Guide.
Make sure you use the Standards editor available in Tools -> Standards when
modifying and customizing the XML standard files. Using other editors (such as text
editors) may alter the consistency of the standard file, and may make the standards
XML files unusable.
Switching to another standard
When several standards are defined, users can switch a drawing to another standard.
Refer to Switching to Another Standard.
Updating the standard of a drawing
When a standard file is modified, users need to explicitly update the drawings which
use this standard. Refer to Updating the Standard of a Drawing.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Administering Standards and Generative View

Styles
This task documents the administration of both standards (Interactive Drafting
workbench) and generative view styles (Generative Drafting workbench), as the
procedure is basically the same whether you are administering standards or
generative view styles. When applicable, differences will be notified. The examples
provided in this task specifically deal with the administration of standard files.
For more information on customizing and administering generative view styles, refer
to the Administration Tasks chapter in the Generative Drafting User's Guide.
Location of standard or generative view style files

The location of standard files or generative view style files is defined by two
environment variables which can be set during installation or modified afterwards:
Variable name Description
CATCollectionStandard Path and name of the directory (or directories) which

contains:
● the drafting sub-directories (which themselves
contain the customized drafting standards). It is
in these drafting sub-directories that you
should add the drafting standards
customized for a company, project or user.
● the generativeparameters sub-directories
(which themselves contain the customized
generative view styles). It is in these
generativeparameters sub-directories that
you should add the generative view styles
customized for a company, project or user.

CATDefaultCollectionStandard Path and name of the directory (or directories) which

contains:
● the drafting sub-directories (which themselves
contain the predefined drafting standards
delivered by Dassault Systemes).
● the generativeparameters sub-directories
(which themselves contain the predefined
generative view styles delivered by Dassault
Systemes).
The default location for this directory (set during the

installation process) is the installation directory
install_root\resources\standard.
Setting the location of standard files

Refer to the Administration Tasks chapter in the Generative Drafting User's Guide for
specific information on how to set the location of generative view style files.
There are two possibilities:

● If you want to place all customized drafting standards in a custom directory,
named mydirectory for example, you need to proceed as follows:
1. Create a directory named as you like (mydirectory, for example).

2. Create a sub-directory under this directory, which needs to be
named drafting.
3. Place the XML files containing your customized drafting standards
in mydirectory\drafting.
● If you have not yet customized your XML standard files, then proceed as follows:
1. Create a directory named as you like (mydirectory, for example).

2. Create a sub-directory under this directory, which needs to be
named drafting.
3. Set the CATCollectionStandard variable to mydirectory. After you
have customized the XML standard files, the standard editor will
then save them in mydirectory\drafting.

● If the CATDefaultCollectionStandard and the CATCollectionStandard variables both

contain an identically-named standard, it is always the standard found in
CATCollectionStandard which will be used.
● If two directories referenced by the CATCollectionStandard and/or
CATDefaultCollectionStandard variables contain identically-named standard files, it
is always the standard in the directory listed first which will be used.
Customizing and defining standards or generative

view styles
To edit and save standard files or generative view style files in Tools -> Standards,
you must be running the V5 session in administrator mode (-admin).
The recommended method for customizing standard files or generative view style files
is the following:
1. You need to work in administrator mode. To do this, proceed as follows:
a. Set up the CATReferenceSettingPath variable.
b. Start a V5 session using the -admin option.
For more information, refer to the Managing Environments chapter in the
Infrastructure Installation Guide.
2. Set up the CATCollectionStandard environment variable as explained above.
If none of the conditions are respected, a warning message will appear to let
you know that you will neither be able to modify nor save the XML files.
3. Modify the Drafting standards or the generative view styles as appropriate.
4. Use the Save As or the OK button to store your modifications.
5. To exit, use the Cancel button.
Once the standard files or the generative view style files have been customized and
saved, they can be used in a V5 session in normal mode.

Availability of standard switch and update

Note: The information provided below does not apply to generative view styles.
Using the settings available in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design ->
Drafting -> Administration, administrators can forbid or allow users to:
● switch a drawing to another standard (via File -> Page Setup),
● update the standard used by a drawing (via File -> Page Setup).
Moreover, administrators can lock these settings so that other users running a
session with the same environment inherit those settings and cannot change them.
This feature is described in the Locking Settings section, in the Infrastructure
Installation User's Guide.

Upgrading Standard Files from Previous

Releases
Depending on your needs, you can:
● Upgrade CATDrwStandard files (i.e. standard files customized in releases up to and
including V5R8) to the current level for XML standard files
● Upgrade XML standard files from previous releases (i.e. XML standard files
customized in releases starting from V5R9) to the current level for XML standard files
Upgrading CATDrwStandard Files to the Current XML

Standard Files
Up to and including V5R8, the standard file defining standard XXX was a file named
XXX.CATDrwStandard, located in install_root/reffiles/Drafting.
In V5R9, the format of the standard file was changed to XML. The standard file defining
standard XXX is now a file named XXX.xml, located in install_root/resources/
standard/drafting.
If you have customized or defined a CATDrwStandard file, and wish to re-use this
customization in the current release, you need to convert your CATDrwStandard file
into a XML file. There are 2 ways of doing this:
Manual upgrade
If the degree of customization of the standard file is small, you can start from one of
the 4 pre-defined standard files (ISO, ANSI, JIS or ASME), and modify it using the
standards editor (Tools -> Standards). You will need to modify the parameter values,
and add the styles that you had defined in the CATDrwStandard file.
Automatic upgrade
A batch utility is provided in order to automatically generate the XXX.xml file starting
from a XXX.CATDrwStandard file. All the customization done on the CATDrwStandard
file will be reproduced in the XML file, and all styles defined in CATDrwStandard file will
be added.
The utility will also add to the XML file the new standard parameters (with default
values), as well as the new pre-defined styles.
● If you want to convert a single CATDrwStandard to the current XML format, use:
CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE XXX [dir]
● If you want to convert all CATDrwStandard files to the current XML format, use:

CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE_ALL [dir]
For more information on using these commands on Windows and on Unix, see below.
The tasks below will show you how to use the standard automatic upgrade tool on
Windows and on Unix.
Using the standard automatic upgrade tool on Windows
1. Open an MS-DOS Window.

2. Change to the folder in which you installed the product.
The default folder is C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B09\intel_a\code\bin
● To generate XML files for all the CATDrwStandard files located in reffiles
\Drafting, enter this command:
CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE_ALL [dir]

where [dir] is an optional directory in which to write the
resulting XML files. Local directory is the default.
● To generate the XML file corresponding to one single standard, enter

this command:
CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE XXX [dir]
where XXX is the name of the standard you want to convert

(ISO, ANSI...) and [dir] is an optional directory in which to
write the resulting XML file. Local directory is the default.

Using the standard automatic upgrade tool on UNIX
1. Open a shell command window.

2. Change to the directory in which you installed the product.
The default directory is /usr/DassaultSystemes/B09/OS_a/code/command/
where OS_a is:
● aix_a
● hpux_a
● irix_a
● solaris_a
● To generate XML files for all the CATDrwStandard files located in reffiles
\Drafting, enter this command:
./catstart -run "CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE_ALL [dir]"

● To generate the XML file corresponding to one single standard, enter

this command:
./catstart -run "CATAnnStandardTools MIGRATE XXX [dir]"

write the resulting XML files. Local directory is the default.
Upgrading XML Standard Files from Previous Releases

to the Current Level

The XML standard file has evolved in each release since V5R9. New standard
parameters have been added, some have been modified, and new functionalities (such
as styles) have been introduced.
If you have customized or defined an XML standard file in a previous release (i.e. a
release starting from V5R9), and wish to re-use this customization in the current level,
you need to upgrade your XML file. There are 2 ways of doing this:
Manual upgrade
If the degree of customization of the standard file is small, you can start from one of
the 4 pre-defined standard files (ISO, ANSI, JIS or ASME), and modify it using the
standards editor (Tools -> Standards). You will need to modify the parameter values
and customize new parameters and/or styles.
Automatic upgrade
A batch utility is provided in order to automatically generate the current XML file
starting from an XML file from a previous release. All the customization done on the
starting file will be reproduced in the upgraded XML file.
The utility will also add the new parameters and styles introduced in the current release
(with default values) in the XML file.
● If you want to upgrade a single XML file to the current version, use:
CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE XXX [dir]
● If you want to upgrade all XML files to the current version, use:
CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE_ALL [dir]
For more information on using these commands on Windows and on Unix, see below.
The tasks below will show you how to use the standard automatic upgrade tool on
Windows and on Unix.

Using the standard automatic upgrade tool on Windows
1. Open an MS-DOS Window.

2. Change to the folder in which you installed the product.
The default folder is C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B09\intel_a\code\bin
● To upgrade standard files for all the XML files located in install_root
\resources\standard\drafting, enter this command:
CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE_ALL [dir]

● To upgrade the XML file corresponding to one single standard, enter this
command:
CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE XXX [dir]

(ISO, ANSI, MY_ISO...) and [dir] is an optional directory in
which to write the resulting XML file. Local directory is the
default.
The batch will first search the standard file in the directory defined by the
exported variable CATCollectionStandard (e.g. set
CATCollectionStandard=e:\tmp), and then, if not found, in the following
directory: install_root\resources\standard\drafting.

Using the standard automatic upgrade tool on UNIX
1. Open a shell command window.

2. Change to the directory in which you installed the product.
The default directory is /usr/DassaultSystemes/B09/OS_a/code/command/
where OS_a is:
● aix_a
● hpux_a
● irix_a
● solaris_a
● To upgrade standard files for all the XML files located in install_root
\resources\standard\drafting, enter this command:
./catstart -run "CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE_ALL [dir]"

● To upgrade the XML file corresponding to one single standard, enter this
command:
./catstart -run "CATAnnStandardTools UPGRADE XXX [dir]"

write the resulting XML files. Local directory is the default.
The batch will first search the standard file in the directory defined by the
exported variable CATCollectionStandard (e.g. export
CATCollectionStandard=d/tmp), and then, if not found, in the following
directory: install_root\resources\standard\drafting.



The Interactive Drafting workbench lets administrators set and create standard
parameters and standard styles.
Before you begin
You should be familiar with important concepts: structure of the standards, how to
customize standard parameters and styles, how to define new standard formats and
styles, general syntax for the standard editor values.

Set standard parameters and create standard formats.

Set standard styles that will be used as default values when creating new elements.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
Structure of the Standard

Standards are defined by the administrator.
A drafting standard file is structured as a tree, as it appears in the Standards Editor

(available via Tools -> Standards). It contains several main sections, each dealing with
a specific aspect of drafting customization:
● Styles
● General parameters
● Dress-up parameters
● Dimension parameters
❍ Company-defined dimension tolerance formats
❍ Company-defined dimension value display formats
❍ Pre-defined formats for tolerance and dimension values
● Annotation parameters
● Company-defined view generation
● Company-defined frame formats
● Company-defined line thickness
● Company-defined patterns
● Company-defined linetypes

Before You Begin
[ Up ] [ Next ]


The Interactive Drafting workbench lets administrators set standard parameters and
create standard formats.
About Standard parameters
Learn more about the management of standard parameters.
General parameters
Customize the parameters that let you control and restrict the values that are
available for some element properties.
Dress-up parameters
Customize the parameters that deal with the appearance of dress-up elements, such
as markup arrows.
Dimension parameters
Customize the parameters that deal with the appearance of annotation and dimension
elements.

Customize the dimension tolerance formats, which are user-defined formats to be
applied to dimension tolerances.

Customize the dimension value formats, which are user-defined formats to be applied
to dimension values.

Customize the pre-defined formats for tolerance and dimension values.
Pre-defined Styles Definitions

Customize the pre-defined non-modifiable styles and their definition, which you can
use as a reference when defining new formats.
Customize the parameters that deal with the position of text leaders.
Frame Definition Parameters

Define customizable fixed-size frames. A frame is a property which can be applied to
texts as well as certain types of annotations and dress up elements.


Define view generation, i.e. customize settings that should be applied when
generating views.

Define line thickness. Line thickness is a property which can be applied to, and drives
the representation of, almost all elements in a drawing, such as lines, curves,
dimension lines, etc.
Linetype Definition
Define linetypes. Linetypes can be applied to, and drive the representation of, almost
all elements in a drawing, such as lines, curves, dimension lines, etc.
Pattern Definition
Define patterns. Patterns are used for area fills or when generating section views/cuts
or breakout views.

Customizing Standard Parameters

In this scenario, administrators will learn how to customize standard parameters using an
example.
This scenario provides an example of dimension customization, but the procedure is the
same when customizing other standard parameters (dimensions, annotations, dress-up
elements, etc.) The procedure differs when customizing styles. For more information,
refer to About Styles.
With the pre-defined ISO standard, a radius dimension extension lines reaches the center
of the circle. You will modify the extension line so that it does not reach the center of the
circle.
Select Tools -> Standards to launch the standards editor. Choose the Drafting
category, and then open the ISO.xml file from the drop-down list.
1. Select the Dimension node in the editor.
2. Modify the Dimension.DIMLRadiusExtReachCenter parameter value from 2 to
1.
3. Set the Dimension.DIMLRadiusExtLength parameter value to 2.
4. Click OK to save your modifications and exit the standards editor.
5. Create an ISO drawing using the File - > New command.
6. Create a circle, and add a radius dimension to it. The dimension extension line does
not reach the center, as it would have with the pre-defined ISO standard.
Defining a New Format

In this scenario, administrators will learn how to create a new format using an example.

This scenario shows how to create a dimension tolerance format as an example, but the
procedure is the same for other formats (dimensions values, line thicknesses, etc.).
Specific differences are indicated in the course of this scenario.
You want to create this new dimension tolerance format, with superimposed tolerance
values and parenthesis as separators.
1. Select the Tolerance Formats node in the editor.

2. Click on the Add Instance button. A format called TOLXXX is created.

3. Rename this format TOL_USER.
4. Customize the values as follows:

● Make sure you set every parameter.

● You must use the symbol used by the computer system to set a parameter to a real
value ("," or ".").
Note: you can use a fraction to set a parameter.

5. Click OK to save the ISO.xml file and exit the standards editor.
6. Create a new ISO drawing. The new tolerance style will appear in the tolerance
combo box.
General Syntax for the Standard Editor Values

Fractions and operations
The standards editor can handle basic numerical operations to help you enter the values
for the parameters. You can enter your value as a set of operations, and let the program
compute the result when you validate the field.
For example, for each parameter of the "real" type, you can specify the value using a
fraction:
NDFact_1 = 1/60.
You can also use units or trigonometric functions in your operations:

NDSepPos_1 = 1 in + 1 mm + cos(0.12)
Special characters

For each parameter of the "string" type, you can enter special characters using the
following keywords:
● [DEGREE] will be displayed as °
● [MINUTE] will be displayed as '
● [SECOND] will be displayed as "
A special character can be used alone or combined with other characters (the special
character only counts as 1 character):
NDSepar_1 , [DEGREE]
or
NDSepar_1 , " in [DEGREE]"
[ Up ] [ Next ]

General Parameters
General Parameters
The general parameters are located in the General node of the standard file. They let you control
and restrict the values that are available for some element properties, by controlling the values in
the Properties toolbar or in the element properties.
Changing these values will not have an impact on already existing elements, since they control the
user interface and not directly the drafting elements.
Parameter Parameter Name Value Description
List of tolerance style names. Only the
listed styles will be displayed and
available to users through the
Dimension Properties toolbar or via
Edit -> Properties.
(list of
List of strings)
Tolerance
styles empty list =
allowed AllowedToleranceFormats
all defined
on tolerance
dimensions styles are
available

General Parameters
Tolerance style which will be pre-selected

in the Dimension Properties toolbar.
Default (string)
Tolerance
style for DefaultToleranceFormat
blank = no
dimensions tolerance
List of Value Display style names. Only

the listed styles will be available to users
through the Dimension Properties
toolbar or via Edit -> Properties.
(list of
List of strings)
Value
Display
styles empty list =
AllowedNumericalFormats
allowed all Value
on Display
dimensions styles are
available
Default Value Display style which will be pre-

Value selected in the Dimension Properties
Display toolbar.
style for
length, DefaultNumericalFormatLength (string)
distance ,
radius and
diameter
dimensions

General Parameters
Default
Value
Value Display style which will be pre-
Display
DefaultNumericalFormatAngle (string) selected in the Dimension Properties
style for
toolbar.
angle
dimensions
List of font names. Only the listed fonts
will be available to users in the text Text
Properties toolbar or via Edit ->
Properties.
(strings:
list of font
names,
spelled
exactly as
they
appear in
List of the Text
allowed AllowedTextFonts Properties
text fonts toolbar or
in Edit ->
Properties)
blank = all
installed
fonts will be
available
(string: font
name Text font name which will be pre-selected
spelled in the Text Properties toolbar.
exactly as
Default it appears
text font DefaultTextFont
in the Text
Properties
toolbar or
in Edit ->
Properties)

General Parameters
List of font sizes in mm. Only the listed

sizes will be available to users in the Text
Properties toolbar or via Edit ->
Properties.
List of
allowed (list of
text font AllowedTextFontSizes values in
sizes mm)
Text font size which will be pre-selected

in the Text Properties toolbar.
Default (value in
text font DefaultTextFontSize
mm)

Dress-Up parameters
Dress-Up parameters
The dress-up parameters are located in the DressUp node of the standard file. They
deal with the appearance of dress-up elements, such as markup arrows and threads.
Symbols
Length (mm)
Arrow size and angle
Angle (degrees)
Length (mm)
Closed arrow size

and angle
Angle (degrees)
Length (mm)
Filled arrow size and

angle
Angle (degrees)
Length (mm)
Symetric arrow size

and angle

Dress-Up parameters
Angle (degrees)
Slash size Length (mm)
Circle size Diameter (mm)
Filled circle size Diameter (mm)
Symetric (crossed)
circle size Diameter (mm)

Dress-Up parameters
Crossed circle size Diameter (mm)
Triangle size Length (mm)
Filled triangle size Length (mm)
Plus size Length (mm)
Cross size Length (mm)

Dress-Up parameters
Length (mm)
Double arrow size,

angle
Angle (degrees)
Wave arrow size Diameter (mm)
Thread
Circle
Thread representation ThreadRepresentation
ArcCircle

The dimension parameters are located in the Dimension node of the standard file. They deal with
the appearance of annotation and dimension elements.
These parameters are global, which means that changing their value will have an impact on all
elements in the drawing.
This section lists all the parameters which were contained in CATDrwStandard files up to V5 R9.
Dimension and Annotation Parameters

Each user-defined standard is
International [ISO/ANSI/ based on one of 3 international
standard ParentStandard standards: ISO, ANSI, JIS. This
JIS]
sets some basic parameters.
Extension of [Yes/No]
dimension line
on radius Yes = till
DIMLRadiusIntReachCenter
dimensions center
(value inside No = till
circle) value
[Yes/No]
Extension of
dimension line Yes = till
on radius DIMLRadiusExtReachCenter center
dimensions No =
(value outside constant
circle) overrun
DIMLRadiusExtLength (mm)
Extension of [Yes/No]
dimension line
on one-symbol Yes = till
DIMLDiameterIntReachCenter
diameter center
dimensions No = till
(value inside value
circle)
DIMLDiameterIntOverrun (mm)

[Yes/No]
Extension of
dimension line
Yes = till
on one-symbol
DIMLDiameterExtReachCenter center
diameter
No =
dimensions
constant
(value outside
overrun
circle)
DIMLDiameterExtLength (mm)
DIMLNoFlippedOverrun (mm)
Dimension line [Yes/No]

display and
extent (for non- Yes =
DIMLShowNoReverse
flipped symbols) displayed
No = not
displayed
DIMLFlippedOverrun (mm)
[Yes/No]
Dimension line
display and
extent (for Yes =
DIMLShowReverse
flipped symbols) displayed
No = not
displayed
DEPRECATED DIMTYPos - -
[2/3]
2 = center
Vertical value DIMTxtJustif 3=
bottom
[2/1]
The dimension line may either
2 = Length have a given length, or
relative to automatically adjust to reach the
DIMLUnderLine dimension value.
value
1=
Constant
length
Dimension line
length for one-
symbol
dimensions
(distance and
angle)

if DIMLUnderLine=2
(mm)
DIMLtail
if DIMLUnderLine=1
(mm)
DIMLConstantLength
Dimension line
gap around DIMLTextGap (mm)
unframed value
Dimension line (mm)

gap around DIMLFrameGap
framed value
Symbol reversal
SYMBReverselimit (mm)
limit
SCORLeftTail
Size of
dimension value SCORRightTail (mm)
underlining
SCORVertSpace

Multi- [No/Yes]
Specifies whether the numerical
tolerance definition of a multi-tolerance is
with No = not associative to the dimension value
DIMTolMultiAuto
associative associative (in which case it is automatically
numerical Yes = updated when the dimension value
value associative is changed).
Dimension and Leader Symbols

SYMBArrowSide (mm)
Arrow size and angle

(symbol type #1)
SYMBArrowAngle (degrees)
SYMBClosedArrowSide (mm)
Closed arrow size and
angle
(symbol type #2)
SYMBClosedArrowAngle (degrees)
SYMBFilledArrowSide (mm)
Filled arrow size and
angle
(symbol type #3)
SYMBFilledArrowAngle (degrees)
SYMBSymetricArrowSide (mm)
Symetric arrow size
and angle
(symbol type #4)
SYMBSymetricArrowAngle (degrees)

Slash size
(aymbol type #5) SYMBSlashLength (mm)
Circle size
(symbol type #6) SYMBCircleDiameter (mm)
Filled circle size

(symbol type #7) SYMBFilledCircleDiameter (mm)
Scored circle size

(symbol type #8) SYMBSymetricCircleDiameter (mm)
Crossed circle size

(symbol type #9) SYMBCrossCircleDiameter (mm)

Triangle size
(symbol type #10) SYMBTriangleSide (mm)
Filled triangle size

(symbol type #11) SYMBFilledTriangleSide (mm)
Plus size
(symbol type #12) SYMBPlusHeight (mm)
Cross size
(symbol type #13) SYMBCrossSide (mm)
Chamfer Dimension Parameters


[1/2/3/
4]
1=
distance NOT IMPLEMENTED
Chamfer dimension 2 = dist x
mode CHFMeasureMode
dist (It is managed for each dimension
3 = dist x via Edit - > Properties)
angle
4 = angle x
dist
if CHFMeasureMode=1
Chamfer dimension CHFRepModeDist [1/2/3]
representation 1=1
if CHFMeasureMode=2 symbol - 1
NOT IMPLEMENTED
CHFRepModeDistDist part
(separate
2=1
parameter (It is managed for each dimension
if CHFMeasureMode=3 symbol - 2
depending on the via Edit - > Properties)
CHFRepModeDistAngle parts
CHFMeasureMode
3=2
parameter value)
if CHFMeasureMode=4 symbols
CHFRepModeAngleDist
Chamfer separator
font height CHFSepHeight (mm)
[1/2]
Chamfer Value 1=
Framing CHFFrameGroup separately
2 = as a
whole
Half Dimensions

[1/2/3]
HLFIntOverrunMode
1 = till Axis
2 = under value
Half dimension 3 = over axis
dimension line
extent (if the value
is inside)
if HLFIntOverrunMode=3
(mm)
HLFIntOverrun
[1/2]
Half-dimension HLFExtOverrunMode 1 = till axis NOT IMPLEMENTED

dimension line 2 = constant
extent (if the value overrun
is outside) if
HLFextOverrunMode=2 (mm) NOT IMPLEMENTED
HLFExtOverrun
Dimension Associated Texts

reference for positioning
7 = top
ASTBeforePosReference 8 = center
9 = bottom

Point to be used on the 1 = top

associated text as a ASTAfterPosReference 2 = center
reference for positioning 3 = bottom
1 = top
ASTInsertPosReference 2 = center
3 = bottom
1 = left for Before/After/Insert texts

ASTUpperPosReference 4 = center
7 = rigth
3 = left
ASTLowerPosReference 6 = center
9 = right
ASTBeforeXDist
ASTBeforeYDist for Upper/Lower texts
ASTAfterXDist
Horizontal and vertical ASTAfterYDist
offsets for positioning ASTInsertXDist
(mm)
ASTInsertYDist
ASTUpperXDist
ASTUpperYDist
ASTLowerXDist
ASTLowerYDist
Annotations

[ No /
Yes ]
No = 0 to
Text angle TXTAngleAllowed 360
degrees
Yes = -90
to 90
degrees
TXTLeaderLeftTail (side of
leader)
TXTLeaderRightTail (side (mm)
opposite to leader)
TXTLeaderVertSpace
Text leaders size
(roughness symbols
only)
TXTLeaderGap (mm)
Text thickness
(for compatibility
with V4)
Warning: does not
TXTThickness (mm)
work on bold text (set
at 0,7 mm), on
complex text and
roughness annotations.
Datum feature leader

[1/2]
representation mode
TXTDatumMode
1 = Normal
(ANSI parent
2 = Flag
standard only)
Fake dimensions

[1/2/4]
NOT IMPLEMENTED
FAKIdentifyMode 1 = underline
(It is managed for each dimension via Edit
2 = parenthesis
- > Properties)
4 = none
Fake
dimension
value display If
FAKIdentifyMode=1
(mm)
FAKUnderlineTail
FAKVerticalOffset
Dual Dimensions
Dual dimension separator

height, for side-by-side dual DUASideSepHeight (mm)
display mode
DUAAboveOffset
(mm)
DUAAboveSpace
[1/2/
3]
DUAPosReference
1 = top
2 = center
Dual dimension display, for 3 = bottom
values above-one-another
display mode
[1/2/
3]
DUAJustification
1 = left
2 = center
3 = right

Cumulate Dimensions (Ordinate Dimensions): General Parameters

Table 1
Cumulate [1/3]
dimensions sign 1 = no sign
CUMLSignDisplay
display 3 = positive sign on all
values
[ 0 / ... / 13 ]
0 = none
CUMLOriginSymbol 1-13 = refer to
"dimension line
symbols" table
Origin symbol shape

and size sign
CUMLSymbolScale (real)
[ Yes / No ]
Display of origin
CUMLZeroDisplay Yes = display
zero
No = no display

[ Yes / No ]
Extension line
CUMLExtLDisplay Yes = display
display
No = no display
Value orientation [1/2]

reference CUMLTxtReference 1 = dimension line
2 = extension line
[1/2/3]
1 = Parallel to
Reference (specified by
Value orientation CUMLTxtReference)
CUMLTxtOrient
2 = Perpendicular to
Reference (specified by
CUMLTxtReference))
3 = Angle to reference

Value orientation
Angle
(if CUMLTxtAngle (degrees)
CUMLTxtOrient=3)
Cumulate Dimensions: Parameters applying only if value orientation

reference is "Dimension Line" (CUMLTxtReference = 1)
Table 2
[ 2/3/
4 ]
2=
Dimension
Line to
origin
3=
Dimension line length mode CUMLDimLinMode Length is
relative to
value text
4=
Length is
constant
[1/2]
1 = Edge
CUMLTxtVJusti
2=
Value vertical positioning
Center
CUMLTxtDecalY (mm)

[1/2]
1 = Edge
CUMLTxtVJusti1
2=
Center
If Dimension Line
goes to origin Value
horizontal
[1/2/
(CUMLDimLinMode positioning
3]
= 2)
1=
Extension
line
CUMLExtLTxtRef 2 = Dim
line
center
3 = Origin
CUMLDimLTxtVPos (mm)
Dimension
Line Over- CUMLDimLinTail (mm)
run
If Dimension Line
is relative to value [1/2]
1 = Edge
CUMLTxtVJusti1
2=
(CUMLDimLinMode
Center
= 3)
Value
horizontal
positioning

Dimension
Line CUMLExtLLength (mm)
Length
[1/2]
1 = Edge
CUMLTxtVJusti1
2=
Center
If Dimension Line
has a constant
length [1/2/
3]
(CUMLDimLDisplay 1=
= 4) Extension
Value line
horizontal CUMLExtLTxtRef 2 = Dim
positioning line
center
3 = Origin

Cumulate Dimensions: Parameters applying only if the value orientation

reference is "Extension Line"
(CUMLTxtReference = 2)
Table 3
[1/2/
4]
1 = no
Dimension line representation display
CUMLDimLDisplay
2 = full
display
4 = partial
length
Dimension Line Length if

Dimension Line has a partial
length CUMLDimLLength (mm)
(CUMLDimLDisplay=4)

[3/4]
3=
relative to
Extension line length mode CUMLExtLMode
text box
4=
constant
Extension
line over- CUMLExtLOver (mm)
run
[1/2]
CUMLTxtVJusti2 1 = Edge
2 = Center
Value
vertical
positioning
If extension line
is relative to
value text
CUMLExtLTxtVPos (mm)
(CUMLExtLMode
= 3)

[1/2]
CUMLTxtHJusti 1 = Edge
2 = Center
Value
horizontal
positioning
CUMLExtLTxtHPos (mm)
Extension
CUMLExtLLength (mm)
line length
[1/2]
CUMLTxtVJusti2 1 = Edge
2 = Center
[1/2/
3]
1=
Dimension
line
2 = Middle
of
extension
Value line
vertical CUMLExtLTxtRef 3 =
positioning Extension
line end
If extension line point
is constant (opposite
to
(CUMLExtLMode dimension

= 4) line)
CUMLExtLTxtVPos (mm)
[1/2]
CUMLTxtHJusti 1 = Edge
2 = Center
Value
horizontal
positioning
CUMLExtLTxtHPos (mm)
Curvilinear Length
Symbol
Option Description
Specifies whether the curvilinear length symbol should be
Display Symbol
displayed.
Height Indicates the height (in mm) of the curvilinear length symbol.
Indicates the spacing (in mm) between the curvilinear length
Spacing
symbol and the dimension value.
Underline value Specifies whether the dimension value should be underlined.
Length Indicates the length (in mm) of the curvilinear length symbol.

Indicates the minimum length (in mm) of the curvilinear length

Minimum Length
symbol.
Indicates the maximum length (in mm) of the curvilinear length
Minimum Length
symbol.
Intersection Point
Option Description
Specifies whether the intersection point should be printed. If you leave
this option unchecked, then the intersection point will be a construction
point and its style will be the default construction point style as defined
Print intersection points in the Styles > Point > Default section of the standard. If you check
this option, then the intersection point will not be a construction point
and its style can be chosen among the various point styles defined in
the Styles > Point section of the standard.
Indicates the style that should be used to represent the point (as
Point style
defined in the Styles > Point section of the standard).
Show construction lines Specifies whether construction lines should be displayed.
Specifies whether construction lines should be printed. This option is
Print construction lines
available when the Show construction lines option is checked.
Specifies the style that should be used to represent the construction
Line style
line (as defined in the LineTypes section of the standard).

Format Definitions
This section deals with dimension tolerance descriptions, which are user-defined
formats to be applied to dimension tolerances.
To create a new tolerance format, you must use the Standards editor. Select the
Tolerance Format type in the standards editor, and then click the Add Instance
button to add a new instance of a format. This will create a sample format definition
that you will then customize to suit your needs, by modifying one or several values of
the parameters defining the format.
Once defined, a format can be applied to dimensions just as any dimension attribute,
either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Dimension Properties toolbar.
These parameters are located in the Tolerance formats node of the standard file.
The tolerance format parameters drive the representation of a dimension tolerance,
and include parameters such as:
● Type of tolerance (numerical/alphanumerical)
● Separator between values
● position relatively to dimension value
● font size for tolerance
● trailing zeros display for numerical type
● and so forth.

Tolerance User-defined name that will be
Format TolName (8 char string) used as the description
Name identifier.

[1/2/3/4/5/
6/7]
1 = Numerical
side by side
2 = Numerical
super-imposed
3 = Resolved
Numerical side by
side
Tolerance Toltype 4 = Resolved
Format numerical super-
Type imposed
5
=Alphanumerical
Single Value
6=
Alphanumerical
side by side
7=
Alphanumerical
super-imposed
Before
TolSepar_1 [0...18 ]
Separators separator number
for super- as described in
imposed the Separator
tolerances After
Character Table
TolSepar_2
Before [0...18 ]
TolSepTo_1 separator number
Separators as described in
for side-by- Between the Separator
side TolSepTo_2 Character Table
tolerances
After
TolSepTo_3

Fraction
line on [2/1]
super- TolFractLine 2= Fraction line
imposed 1= No fraction line
tolerances
Separator
Character
Size
(real)
(Ratio
= separator
between TolSymbolH height / value
Separator
height
Character
(=B/A)
and Value
Text font
sizes)
Tolerance
Size
(real)
(Ratio
= tolerance
between TolScale height / value
Tolerance
height
Text and
(=C/A)
Value Text
font sizes)
[7/8/9]
Tolerance 7 =Top
TolPtOnValue
Position 8 = Middle
Anchor 9 = Bottom
Point (for [1/2/3]
offset 1 =Top
computing) TolAnchorPt
2 = Middle
3 = Bottom
Offset TolExtX
between
dimension (mm)
value and
tolerance
TolExtY

Offset TolIntX
between
the 2 (mm)
tolerance
values
TolIntY
[0/1/2]
0 = Display
(number of digits
Display of specified in the
tolerance value precision)
TolTrailing
trailing 1 = No Display
zeros 2 = Same
"display" mode as
the dimension
value
Display of
identical
[1/2]
Tolerance
1 = Display
Values
TolMergeSame common value
( for
2 = Display
numerical
separate values
tolerances
only)
[1/2/3]
Display of 1 = Display null
null value with sign
Tolerance 2 = Display null
Values value without sign
TolShowNull
( for 3 = No Display of
numerical null value
tolerances
only)

Separator Character Table

This table lists the characters that can be used as separators before, between or after
the tolerance values.
Separators
Symbol # Character
00 (none)
01 /
02 :
03 (
04 )
05 "
06 ,
07 <
08 >
09 X
10 *
11 .
12 ;
13 +
14 [
15 ]
16 -
17 _
18 (space)

Format Definitions
This section deals with dimension value descriptions, which are user-defined formats
to be applied to dimension values.
To create a new dimension value display format, you must use the Standards editor.
Select the Value Formats type in the standards editor, and then click the Add
Instance button to add a new instance of a format. This will create a sample format
definition that you will then customize to suit your needs, by modifying one or several
values of the parameters defining the format.
Once defined, a format can be applied to dimensions just as any dimension attribute,
either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Dimension Properties toolbar.
Dimension Value Display Formats
These parameters are located in the Value Formats node of the standard file.
The dimension value display style parameters drive the representation of a dimension
value, and include parameters such as:
● multiplying factor
● separators for thousands
● position relatively to dimension line
● display of fractional values
● trailing zeros display
● and so forth.

User-defined name that will be
Value Format
Name NDName (8 char string) used as the description
identifier

[1/2]
1 = length
(for length/
distance/
Value Magnitude radius/
(type) NDType
diameter
dimensions)
2 = Angle
(angle
dimensions)
[1/2/3/
4/5]
1 = mm Unit used to display the
Value Units NDUnit 2 = inch dimension value
3 = radian
4 = degree
5 = grade
The dimension measured
value is multiplied by this
factor prior to being displayed.
For example, to display a

Global distance in kilometers with
Multiplying NDGlobFact (real) units set to mm (NDUnit=1),
Factor use:
NDGlobFact = 0.000001
[1 / 2]
Display of
1 = No display
separator for
of separator
Thousands
2 = Display of
NDExise
separator
Separator
Characters for
Decimal [0...18 ]
Decimal and
Separator separator
Thousands
NDSepNum number as
described in
Thousands the Separator
Separator Character
NDSep1000 Table

[1 / 2]
1 = No display
of trailing
zeros
Display of 2 = Display of
Trailing Zeros NDFinZer trailing zeros
(number of
digits
specified in
the value
precision)
Fractional Rest Not yet

Justification NDAlignFrac
implemented
[1 / 2]
1 = Side by
Fractional Rest side
Display Mode NDTypFrac
2 = Super-
imposed
(real)
Fractional Rest = Unit
Height Ratio NDResScl height / value
height
(=B/A)
Fractional Rest
Positioning (real)
NDRestX
Offsets This value is a
(the horizontal ratio to the
offset also character
applies to height
NDRestY
decimal rests)

Offset between (real)

Fractional Rest This value is a
Numerator and NDOperY ratio to the
Denominator character
height
[1 / 2]
Position of Last 1 = Before
Term Unit NDSepDen fractional rest
2 = After
fractional rest
Number of Terms
in the Value NDFact [ 1...3 ]
Definition of each of the value terms
A value can be made of up to three terms plus a rest. All of the following parameters,
suffixed by the term number, apply to each of the possible 3 terms.
The numbering of the terms goes from right to left, #1 being the right-most term.

[1 / 2]
1 = No display
Display of Null
NDNulFac_1 of zeros
Terms
2 = Display of
zeros
[1 / 2]
Display of 1 = No display
Leading Zeros in NDNulFac_2 of zeros
Last Factor 2 = Display of
zeros
DEPRECATED NDNulFac_3 - -
[1 / 2]
Display of Null 1 = No display
Terms NDNulOther of zeros
2 = Display of
zeros

The term measured value is

multiplied by this factor prior
to being displayed (the global
multiplying factor is also
used). All 3 values must have
increasing and distinct values.
Term Multiplying NDFact_1

NDFact_2 ( real ) Example: to display a value
Factor
NDFact_3 with a term in centimeters and
a term in millimeters, with
NDUnit=mm and
NDGlobFact=1, set
NDFact_1 = 1
NDFact_2 = 10
NDSepar_1
Term Unit Suffix (16 char
NDSepar_2
string)
NDSepar_3
(real)
Term Unit Height NDSepScl_1 = Unit
Ratio NDSepScl_2 height / value
NDSepScl_3 height
(=B/A)
Term Vertical
Positioning Offset NDValPos_1
(relatively to the NDValPos_2 (mm)
left-most term) NDValPos_3
Term Unit
Vertical NDSepPos_1
Positioning Offset NDSepPos_2 (mm)
(relatively to its NDSepPos_3
term)


Pre-defined Formats
for Tolerance and Dimension Values
Some basic formats are provided by default for dimension tolerance and value display.
Some of these pre-defined formats can be modified while others cannot. All pre-defined
formats can be de-activated (i.e. taken out of the list of available styles).
Modifiable formats
They appear in the default standard files provided by Dassault Systemes, just as any
company defined style would appear. They can be modified or deleted using the
Standards Editor, or de-activated (i.e. taken out of the list of available styles) using the
Allowed* parameters described in the General Parameters section.
For Tolerance styles For Value Display styles
TOL_RES1 micron
mm
cm
m
km
in
ftinch
grade
Non-modifiable formats
They are not defined in the standard file, but in the code itself. They cannot be
modified, but can be de-activated (i.e. taken out of the list of available styles) using
the Allowed* parameters described in the General Parameters section. All styles
provided up to V5R8 are of this type.
For Tolerance styles For Value Display styles
TOL_NUM2 NUM.DIMM
ANS_NUM2 NUM,DIMM
DIN_NUM2 NUM.DINC
SGL_NUM2 NUM.DIMP
INC_NUM2 ANS.DIMM
TOL_RES2 DISTMM
TOL_ALP1 DISTINCH
TOL_ALP2 FEET-INC
TOL_ALP3 NUM.ADMS
TOL_0.7 NUM,ADMS
TOL_1.0 INC.ADMS
ISONUM NUM.ARAD
ISOALPH1 ANGLEDEC

ISOALPH2 ANGLEDMS
CPL_FLA1
CPL_FLA3
CPL_50A1
CPL_50A3
CPL_75A1
CPL_75A3
The following tables list these non-modifiable styles, along with an example of the
result when applied on a dimension. The right-most column contains a link to the style
definition, from which you can derive new formats, simply by copying all or part of their
definition.
Tolerance Formats
Link to the
Name Display Description style
definition
Numerical
TOL_NUM2 superimposed Click here
(small)
Numerical
ANS_NUM2 superimposed with
Click here
trailing zeros
(large)
Numerical
DIN_NUM2 superimposed Click here
(small)

Numerical
superimposed with
SGL_NUM2 Click here
trailing zeros and
parentheses (small)
Numerical
INC_NUM2 superimposed Click here
(large)
TOL_RES2 Numerical resolved Click here
Alphanumerical
TOL_ALP1 Click here
single value (large)
Alphanumerical
TOL_ALP2 double value side- Click here
by-side (large)
Alphanumerical
double value
TOL_ALP3 Click here
superimposed
(small)

Numerical
TOL_0.7 superimposed Click here
(small)
Numerical
TOL_1.0 superimposed Click here
(small)
Numerical
superimposed with
ISONUM Click here
trailing zeros and
parentheses (large)
Alphanumerical
ISOALPH1 Click here
Alphanumerical
double value
ISOALPH2 Click here
superimposed
(small)
Alphanumerical
CPL_FLA1 Click here

Alphanumerical
double value
CPL_FLA3 Click here
superimposed
(large)
Alphanumerical
CPL_50A1 Click here
single value (small)
Alphanumerical
double value
CPL_50A3 Click here
superimposed
(small)
Alphanumerical
CPL_75A1 single value Click here
(medium)
Alphanumerical
double value
CPL_75A3 Click here
superimposed
(medium)
Value Display Formats

Link to the
Name Display Description style
definition

NUM.DIMM Millimeters with

Click here
dot
NUM,DIMM Millimeters with

Click here
comma
NUM.DINC inches with

Click here
trailing zeros
NUM.DIMP inches with unit

Click here
display
Millimeters with
ANS.DIMM Click here
trailing zeros
Millimeters with
DISTMM Click here
dot

inches with unit

DISTINC Click here
display
feet and inch with

FEET-INC Click here
unit display
Degrees/minutes/
NUM.ADMS Click here
seconds with dot
Degrees/minutes/
NUM,ADMS seconds with Click here
comma
Degrees/minutes/
INC.ADMS seconds with dot Click here
and trailing zeros
NUM.ARAD radians Click here

Degrees with
ANGLEDEC Click here
decimal format
Degrees/minutes/
ANGLEDMS Click here
seconds with dot


This section lists pre-defined non-modifiable styles along with their definition. You can
use these styles as a reference when defining new formats, simply by copying all or
part of their definition.
TolName= TOL_NUM2
TolType= 2
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 2
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 8
TolAnchorPt= 2
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.6
TolExtX= 0.6
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 1
TolShowNull= 2
TolScale= 0.7
TolName= ANS_NUM2
TolType= 2
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 8
TolAnchorPt= 2
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.6
TolExtX= 0.6
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 1

TolShowNull= 2
TolScale= 1.0
TolName= DIN_NUM2
TolType= 2
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 2
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 8
TolAnchorPt= 2
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.6
TolExtX= 0.6
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 1
TolShowNull= 3
TolScale= 0.7
TolName= SGL_NUM2
TolType= 2
TolSepar_1= 3
TolSepar_2= 4
TolSymbolH= 2.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 8
TolAnchorPt= 2
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.6
TolExtX= 0.6
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 1
TolShowNull= 2
TolScale= 0.7
TolName= INC_NUM2

TolType= 2
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 2
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 8
TolAnchorPt= 2
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.6
TolExtX= 0.6
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 1
TolShowNull= 1
TolScale= 1.0
TolName= TOL_RES2
TolType= 4
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 2
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.6
TolExtX= 0.0
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 1
TolShowNull= 2
TolScale= 1.0
TolName= TOL_ALP1
TolType= 5
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0

TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 0
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.0
TolExtX= 0.6
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 1.0
TolName= TOL_ALP2
TolType= 6
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 1
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 0
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.6
TolIntY= 0.0
TolExtX= 0.6
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 1.0
TolName= TOL_ALP3
TolType= 7
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 8

TolAnchorPt= 2
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.6
TolExtX= 0.6
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 0.7
TolName= TOL_0.7
TolType= 2
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 2
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.250000
TolExtX= 0.5
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 1
TolShowNull= 3
TolScale= 0.715000
TolName= TOL_1.0
TolType= 2
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 2
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.5
TolExtX= 0.5
TolExtY= 0.0

TolMergeSame= 1
TolShowNull= 2
TolScale= 1.0
TolName= ISONUM
TolType= 2
TolSepar_1= 3
TolSepar_2= 4
TolSymbolH= 2.5
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.5
TolExtX= -0.5
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 2
TolShowNull= 2
TolScale= 1.0
TolName= ISOALPH1
TolType= 5
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 0
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.5
TolExtX= 0.5
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 1.0

TolName= ISOALPH2
TolType= 7
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.250000
TolExtX= 0.5
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 0.715000
TolName= CPL_FLA1
TolType= 5
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 25.4
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 0
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.0
TolExtX= 0.285714
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 1.0
TolName= CPL_FLA3
TolType= 7
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0

TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 8
TolAnchorPt= 2
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.5
TolExtX= 0.285714
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 1.0
TolName= CPL_50A1
TolType= 5
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 25.4
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 0
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.0
TolExtX= 0.214286
TolExtY= 0.250000
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 0.5
TolName= CPL_50A3
TolType= 7
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 1.0
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 1

TolPtOnValue= 8
TolAnchorPt= 2
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.250000
TolExtX= 0.214286
TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 0.5
TolName= CPL_75A1
TolType= 5
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 25.4
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 0
TolPtOnValue= 9
TolAnchorPt= 3
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.0
TolExtX= 0.250000
TolExtY= 0.125000
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 0.750000
TolName= CPL_75A3
TolType= 7
TolSepar_1= 0
TolSepar_2= 0
TolSymbolH= 25.4
TolSepTo_1= 0
TolSepTo_2= 0
TolSepTo_3= 0
TolTrailing= 0
TolFractLine= 1
TolPtOnValue= 8
TolAnchorPt= 2
TolIntX= 0.0
TolIntY= 0.375000
TolExtX= 0.250000

TolExtY= 0.0
TolMergeSame= 0
TolShowNull= 0
TolScale= 0.750000
NDName= NUM.DIMM
NDType= 1
NDUnit= 1
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 1
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 0.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1=
NDSepar_2=
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 0.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 1
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM,DIMM
NDType= 1
NDUnit= 1
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 1
NDNulFac_2= 2

NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 0.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1=
NDSepar_2=
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 0.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 6
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 1
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM.DINC
NDType= 1
NDUnit= 2
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 1
NDNulFac_2= 1
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 0.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1=
NDSepar_2=
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 0.0

NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 2
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 2
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 1
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM.DIMP
NDType= 1
NDUnit= 2
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 1
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 12.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1= "
NDSepar_2= '
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 1.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.2
NDSepPos_2= 0.2
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 2
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 2

NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= ANS.DIMM
NDType= 1
NDUnit= 1
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 1
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 0.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1=
NDSepar_2=
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 0.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 2
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 2
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 1
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= DISTMM
NDType= 1
NDUnit= 1
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 2
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0

NDFact_2= 0.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1=
NDSepar_2=
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 0.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 1
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= DISTINC
NDType= 1
NDUnit= 2
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 1
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 0.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1= "
NDSepar_2=
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 0.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0

NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 1
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= FEET-INC
NDType= 1
NDUnit= 2
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 1
NDNulFac_2= 1
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 12.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1= "
NDSepar_2= '
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 1.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 1
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 2
NDRestX= 0.5

NDName= NUM.ADMS
NDType= 2
NDUnit= 4
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 2
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1/3600
NDFact_2= 1/60
NDFact_3= 1.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1= "
NDSepar_2= '
NDSepar_3= °
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 1.0
NDSepScl_3= 1.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.2
NDSepPos_2= 0.2
NDSepPos_3= 0.2
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 3
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM,ADMS
NDType= 2
NDUnit= 4
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 1
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1/3600
NDFact_2= 1/60
NDFact_3= 1.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0

NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1= "
NDSepar_2= '
NDSepar_3= °
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 1.0
NDSepScl_3= 1.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.2
NDSepPos_2= 0.2
NDSepPos_3= 0.2
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 6
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 3
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= INC.ADMS
NDType= 2
NDUnit= 4
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 1
NDNulFac_2= 1
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1/3600
NDFact_2= 1/60
NDFact_3= 1.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1= "
NDSepar_2= '
NDSepar_3= °
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 1.0
NDSepScl_3= 1.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.2
NDSepPos_2= 0.2
NDSepPos_3= 0.2
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 2

NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 2
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 3
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= NUM.ARAD
NDType= 2
NDUnit= 3
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 2
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 0.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1=
NDSepar_2=
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 0.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 1
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= ANGLEDEC
NDType= 2

NDUnit= 4
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 2
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1.0
NDFact_2= 0.0
NDFact_3= 0.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1= °
NDSepar_2=
NDSepar_3=
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 0.0
NDSepScl_3= 0.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 1
NDRestX= 0.5
NDName= ANGLEDMS
NDType= 2
NDUnit= 4
NDGlobFact= 1.0
NDNulFac_1= 2
NDNulFac_2= 2
NDExise= 1
NDSep1000= 0
NDFact_1= 1/3600
NDFact_2= 1/60
NDFact_3= 1.0
NDValPos_1= 0.0
NDValPos_2= 0.0
NDValPos_3= 0.0
NDSepar_1= "

NDSepar_2= '
NDSepar_3= °
NDSepScl_1= 1.0
NDSepScl_2= 1.0
NDSepScl_3= 1.0
NDSepPos_1= 0.0
NDSepPos_2= 0.0
NDSepPos_3= 0.0
NDRestY= 0.0
NDFinZer= 1
NDSepNum= 11
NDTypFrac= 2
NDSepDen= 2
NDOperY= 0.5
NDNulOther= 1
NDResScl= 1.0
NDFact= 3
NDRestX= 0.5

The annotation parameters are located in the Annotation node of the standard editor. They
deal with the position of text leaders.
These parameters depend on a given parent standard.
Annotation Texts
Parent Parameter
Parameter Value Description
standard Name
Horizontal
offset between
the text and ANSI only Text > LeaderGap (mm)
the leader
extremity
Vertical offset
between the
bottom of the ISO and JIS Text >
text and the (mm)
only LeaderVertSpace
horizontal part
of the leader
Roughness Symbols
Parent Parameter
Parameter standard Value Description
Name

Specifies whether a given field

should be displayed (Authorized) or
hidden (Not authorized) in the
Roughness Symbol dialog box
Layout of
the All Roughness > Authorized /
roughness standards Layout Not authorized
symbol
Horizontal
offset
between
the ANSI Roughness >
roughness (mm)
only LeaderGap
and the
leader
extremity
Vertical
offset
between
the
bottom of
ISO and Roughness >
the (mm)
roughness JIS only LeaderVertSpace
and the
horizontal
part of
the leader

Frame Definition
Frame Definition
This section deals with fixed-size frame definition. A frame is a property which can be
applied to texts as well as certain types of annotations and dress up elements.
Defining Frames
Fixed-size frame definitions are located in the Frame node of the Standards editor,
available via Tools -> Standards. They specify the geometrical definition of fixed-size
frames (as opposed to variable-size frame).
Frame definitions available in the Standards editor are pre-defined, and their number
is fixed. You cannot add additional instances of frame definitions.
You can customize these definitions to suit your needs, by modifying one or several
values of the parameters defining the style. Once defined, a fixed-size frame can be
applied to any element which supports it, either via Edit -> Properties, or using the
Text Properties toolbar.
The fixed-size frame definitions include the following parameters:
● Name: identifies the frame - DO NOT EDIT
● Type: defines the geometrical type of the frame - DO NOT EDIT
● Behavior - DO NOT EDIT
● Length
● Height
● Radius
● Offset
● Vertical Margin - NOT YET IMPLEMENTED
● Horizontal Margin - NOT YET IMPLEMENTED
● The Name, Type and Behavior parameters MUST NOT BE EDITED, and are listed for
information and compliance purposes only.
● The Vertical Margin and Horizontal Margin parameters are not implemented yet, and
are listed for compliance purposes only.
● For each frame definition, all parameters are listed. However, depending on the
frame type, not all parameters are used to define the frame, but only some of them.

Frame Definition
Parameter Length Height Radius Offset Description
Rectangle Yes Yes N/A N/A

Frame Definition
Square Yes N/A N/A N/A
Circle N/A N/A Yes N/A
ScoredCircle N/A N/A Yes N/A
Diamond Yes N/A N/A N/A
Triangle Yes Yes N/A N/A

Frame Definition
RightFlag Yes Yes N/A Yes
LeftFlag Yes Yes N/A Yes
BothFlag Yes Yes N/A Yes
Oblong Yes Yes N/A N/A
Ellipse Yes Yes N/A N/A

Frame Definition
RightOblong Yes Yes N/A N/A
LeftOblong Yes Yes N/A N/A
Sticking N/A N/A Yes N/A
Set N/A N/A Yes Yes
Fixed support N/A N/A Yes N/A

Frame Definition
Nota Yes Yes N/A N/A
SymPart N/A N/A Yes N/A
SymSet N/A N/A Yes Yes
ScoredRectangle Yes Yes N/A N/A
Parallelogram Yes Yes N/A Yes

Frame Definition


This section deals with view generation definition. This lets you customize settings that should be
applied when generating views in a Generative Drafting context.
Defining View Generation Parameters
The view generation definition parameters are located in the View -> Generation node of the
Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards.
There are two parameters:

● ThicknessIndex: this parameter lets you customize the line thickness for geometry which is
automatically generated in views (this includes all geometry except fillet edges).
Specify the number of the line thickness definition parameter, as specified in the Line
Thickness node of the Standards editor. For more information, refer to Line Thickness
Definition.

● MaterialCutPattern: this parameter is used when generating views from parts which use a
material to which a specific pattern is associated.
❍ Select Material to use the pattern associated to a given material (instead of the patterns
defined in the standards), even if this pattern is not defined in the standards.
❍ Select Standard to use standard patterns only, instead of the pattern associated to a given
material.


This section deals with line thickness definition. Line thickness is a property which can
be applied to, and drives the representation of, almost all elements in a drawing, such
as lines, curves, dimension lines, etc. (Line thickness cannot be applied to fonts and
points).
● In releases up to V5 R9 SP2, line thickness used to be defined in Tools -> Options -

> General -> Display -> Thickness & Font for the Drafting workbench as well as
for other workbenches. For Drafting, line thickness is now defined in standards.
Therefore, line thickness in drawings does not depend on the options defined in
Tools -> Options, but on what is defined in the standards.
● When opening a drawing created with releases up to V5 R9 SP2 (i.e. a drawing which
does not contain its own line thickness parameters), the line thickness options
defined in Tools -> Options will be used. You can upgrade a CATDrawing document
to this new standard format at any time, by performing the following operations in
File -> Page Setup:
- changing the standard to another standard (ISO -> ANSI for instance)
- updating the current standard to the new format.
Defining Line Thickness
Line thickness definitions are located in the Line Thickness node of the Standards
editor, available via Tools -> Standards.
There are 55 line thickness definitions in the Standards editor. You cannot add
additional instances of line thickness definitions. Out of these 55 definitions,
● line thickness definitions ranging from 1 to 8 are pre-defined with different
parameters for each, and available.
● line thickness definitions ranging from 9 to 55 are pre-defined with the same
parameters for all, and unavailable.
You can customize these definitions to suit your needs, by modifying one or several
values of the parameters defining the style. Once defined, a thickness can be applied to
any element which supports it, either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Graphic
Properties toolbar.

Parameter Description
Indicates whether this definition is available for users to choose from:

Availability 1 = available
0 = unavailable.
Specifies the size in pixels, with a maximum of 16; reflects the result
Pixels
displayed on screen.
mm Specifies the size in millimeters; corresponds to the printed version.
The Availability parameter specifies whether or not a given line thickness should be
available in the thickness list for users to choose from, when creating or editing
elements. Users will only be able to assign "available" line thickness definitions to these
elements. However, existing element properties in drawings will not be affected: if an
existing element is assigned a line thickness which is flagged as "unavailable" in the
Standards editor, then this line thickness will be used for this element but it will not be
available in the thickness list, so that users cannot apply it to other elements.


Linetype Definition
Linetype Definition
This section deals with linetype definition. Linetypes can be applied to, and drive the representation of,
almost all elements in a drawing, such as lines, curves, dimension lines, etc. (Linetypes cannot be applied to
fonts and points).
● In releases before V5 R11, linetypes used to be defined in Tools -> Options -> General -> Display ->
Linetype for the Drafting workbench as well as for other workbenches. For Drafting, linetypes are now
defined in standards. Therefore, linetypes in drawings do not depend on the options defined in Tools ->
Options, but on what is defined in the standards.
● When opening a drawing created with releases before V5 R11 (i.e. a drawing which does not contain its
own linetype parameters), the linetype options defined in Tools -> Options will be used. You can
upgrade a CATDrawing document to this new standard format at any time, by performing the following
operations in File -> Page Setup:
- changing the standard to another standard (ISO -> ANSI for instance)
- updating the current standard to the new format.
Defining Linetypes
Linetype definitions are located in the LineTypes node of the Standards editor, available via Tools ->
Standards. Linetypes can either be mono-dimensional, i.e. defined by a sequence of non-continuous
segments, or bi-dimensional, i.e. defined by a polyline. Once defined, a linetype can be applied to any
element which supports it, either via Edit -> Properties, or using the Graphic Properties toolbar.
There are 63 linetype definitions in the Standards editor. You cannot add additional instances of linetype
definitions. Out of these 63 definitions,
● linetype definitions ranging from 1 to 8 are pre-defined with different parameters for each and cannot be
customized.
● linetype definitions ranging from 9 to 19 are pre-defined with different parameters for each and can be
customized.
● linetype definitions ranging from 20 to 63 are not pre-defined and can be customized.
You can customize the definitions of linetypes ranging from 9 to 63. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Click on the LineTypes node of the Standards editor.

Linetype Definition
2. In the right-hand panel, double-click on the linetype you want to define. The Linetype editor appears for
you to set the linetype properties. For more information on using the Linetype Editor, refer to Linetype in the
Infrastructure User's Guide.
3. For each linetype definition, you can also specify whether or not a given linetype should be available in
the linetypes list for users to choose from. In the right-hand panel, double-click on the number of the
linetype you want to make unavailable. Perform the same operation to make an unavailable linetype
available.
Users will only be able to assign "available" linetype definitions when creating or editing elements. However,
existing element properties in drawings will not be affected: if an existing element is assigned a linetype
which is flagged as "unavailable" in the Standards editor, then this linetype will be used for this element but
it will not be available in the linetypes list, so that users cannot apply it to other elements.

Pattern Definition
Pattern Definition
This section deals with pattern definition. Patterns are used for area fills or in a
Generative Drafting context when cutting through material in section views/cuts or
breakout views, for example.
Defining Patterns
Pattern definitions are located in the Patterns node of the Standards editor, available
via Tools -> Standards.
There are a number of pre-defined pattern definitions available in the Standards

editor. You can customize these definitions to suit your needs, by modifying one or
several values of the parameters defining the pattern.
You can also add additional instances of pattern definitions. To create a new pattern
definition, you must use the Standards editor. Select the Patterns type in the
standards editor, and then click the Add Instance button to add a new pattern
instance. This will create a sample pattern definition that you will then customize to
suit your needs, by modifying one or several values of the parameters defining the
pattern.
Once defined or customized, a pattern can be applied to area fills (either via Edit ->
Properties, or using the Graphic Properties toolbar), or it can be used when cutting
through material in generative section views/cuts or breakout views, for example.
General remarks about patterns

● If no pattern is defined in the standard XML file (i.e. if all instances of pattern
definitions are removed from the standards editor), the software will automatically
use its own selection of patterns. In this case, you will be able to edit all the
properties of these patterns via Edit -> Properties or the Graphic Properties
toolbar.
● You need to define at least one pattern for each type of pattern (hatching, dotting,
coloring, image) if you want this specific pattern type to be available from Edit ->
Properties or from the Graphic Properties toolbar.
● If you modify the standard of a drawing which already includes patterns (in area
fills, sections or breakouts, for example), existing patterns will not changed, even
when updating the drawing. However, if you create new area fills or if you create
section views/cuts or breakout views from new parts in this drawing, the newly-
defined patterns will be used.
● Some parts may use a material for which a specific pattern is associated. In this
case, you can either choose to use the pattern associated to this material (instead
of the patterns defined in the standards) even if this pattern is not defined in the

Pattern Definition
standards, or you can choose to use standard patterns only, instead of the pattern
associated to this material. Refer to View Generation Definition for more information.
● When editing the properties of a pattern associated with a part material (via Edit ->
Properties or the Graphic Properties toolbar), the software offers its own selection
of patterns, and not the patterns defined in the standard XML file.
Specific remarks about Image patterns

● It is recommended that you place images that you want to use for the Image
pattern in either one (or in both) of the directories set by the following variables:
- CATStartupPath (images used by materials)
- CATGraphicPath (images and icons).
Make sure you do not remove the files which are present in these directories when
placing your images there. For more information on the CATStartupPath and on the
CATGraphicPath variables, refer to the Infrastructure Installation Guide.
● Make sure that images referenced in the standard XML file are present on the
computer of each user who will use this standard.
● Once an Image pattern is used in a drawing, the corresponding file is embedded
inside it. You do not need to export the image files used in a given drawing.
● Images used as patterns must be bitmap images (not vector).
Parameter Parameter Name Description
Specifies whether users can modify all or only

some pattern properties via Edit -> Properties.
If Yes, all pattern properties can be modified in
the Properties dialog box.
If No: only some pattern properties will be
available from the Properties dialog box, namely:
EditAvailability EditAvailability - Hatching: users can only modify the angle, the
pitch and the offset, and choose a new pattern.
- Dotting: users can modify all properties.
- Coloring: users can modify all properties.
- Image: users can only use the images defined
in the standards. They can modify the image
angle and scale.
Specifies preferred angle values that will be used
when creating section views/cuts or breakout
AngleList Angle
views. These values will be available via Edit ->
Properties.
Name Specifies the name of this pattern.
Shows the current pattern type, in this case,
Type
hatching.

Pattern Definition
Defines the number of different hatchings to use

Number of Hatching in this pattern. A tab will be created for each
hatching, to let you define each one individually.
For each hatching used in this pattern, specifies
Angle
the angle value in degrees.
hatching Pitch
the pitch in millimeters.
Offset
the offset in millimeters.
Color
the color.
Linetype
the linetype.
Thickness
the linetype thickness.
Preview Lets you preview the resulting hatching pattern.
Type
dotting.
dotting Pitch Specifies the dotting pitch in millimeters.
Color Specifies the dotting color.
Zigzag Specifies whether dotting should zigzag.
Preview Lets you preview the resulting dotting pattern.
Type
coloring coloring.
Color Specifies the color.
Preview Lets you preview the resulting coloring pattern.
Type
image.
Lets you select the image to use for this pattern.
Browse button Refer to Specific remarks about Image patterns
image
for more information.
Angle Specifies the angle value in degrees.
Scale Specifies the scale.
Lets you preview the original image (not the
Preview
result after modifying the angle and scale).
[ Back ] [ Up ]


The Interactive Drafting workbench lets administrators set standard styles that will be used
as default values when creating new elements.
About styles
Learn more about style management.
Sheet styles
Define the style(s) that will be used by default when creating sheets.
Geometry styles
Define the style(s) that will be used by default when creating geometry.
Annotation styles
Define the style(s) that will be used by default when creating annotations.
Dimension styles
Define the style(s) that will be used by default when creating dimensions.
Dress-up and dress-up symbols styles

Define the style(s) that will be used by default when using dress-up elements or dress-
up symbols.
View callout styles

Define the style(s) that will be used by default when using callouts.
[ Back ] [ Up ]
About Styles
About Styles
Setting default values for elements using styles

Styles enable administrators to set the default values that will be applied to all
properties of such elements as sheets, geometry, annotations, dimensions, dress-up
and dress-up symbols, callouts, etc.
The default values are defined and stored in the standard XML file, where a set of
new parameters are defined, one parameter for each element property whose
default value can be set.
Default values are applied to elements as they are created. After creation, the user
can modify element values as required.
Modifying default values in the standard itself does NOT modify all the elements
which have been created, but will only have an impact on the next elements to be
created.
Styles replace the former management of default values (which was performed using
the Set as Default / Use Default functionalities), for drawings:
● created with version V5 R11 and later
● created with versions up to V5 R10, whose standard has been updated in V5 R11
For drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 and NOT updated, default values
still use the Set as Default / Use Default functionalities. For more information, refer
to Setting Properties As Default and Using Properties Set as Default.

About Styles
Defining default values

The default values for all element properties are
stored in a specific Styles section of the
standard XML file, and are defined by the
administrator.
Styles are defined for all Drafting element

types. By default, one style named Default is
predefined in the standard files for each type of
element. In this Default style, all element
properties are pre-defined, enabling the
administrator to set the value for this property.
This Default style cannot be renamed.
You can create your own styles (based on

existing styles), as well as delete styles
(providing there remains at least one style for
each type of element).
Using default values

When creating a Drafting element, default
values are automatically used. So, when users
select a command that creates a specific type
of element, the Style toolbar displays the
current style for this type:
● If only one style is defined for this type of
element, then this style is displayed in the
toolbar.
● If several styles are defined for this type of
element, then a style is defined as the
current style and is displayed in the toolbar.
Users can use the toolbar to select another
style of the same type before creating the
element.
The toolbar reflects the value of the style, but

users can always modify the value of specific
elements.
Re-applying a style to an
object
About Styles
When a Drafting element is selected, the Styles

toolbar displays the list of the styles that can be
applied to it. If the user selects one of these,
this style is re-applied to the element. This
enables users to reset to its default values an
element whose properties have been modified.
Customizing Styles
In this scenario, administrators will learn how to customize styles.
This scenario provides an example of style customization. The procedure differs

when customizing standard parameters (dimensions, annotations, dress-up
elements, etc.). For more information, refer to About Standard Parameters.
Note that a new style is always based on an existing style.
You want to create a new text style that you will use for adding notes. You want to
use the Verdana font, and you want a frame around the text. You then want to
delete the Default style.
1. Expand the Styles node in the editor.
2. Select the Text node.
3. Click on the Create style button in the right-hand pane. The Create style
4. Type the name of the new style in the appropriate field.

About Styles
The Duplicated from list is used when several styles exist for a given
type of element to specify which existing style the new style should be
based on. In our example, only the Default style exists. Therefore, the
new style will be created based on this Default style.
5. Click OK. A new style called Note is added under the Text node in the editor.
6. Expand the Note node in the editor, and then select the Name node.
7. Type Verdana in the Name field in the right-hand pane.

About Styles
8. Expand the Text node in the editor, and then select the Frame node.
9. Choose Rectangle from the Frame drop-down list in the right-hand pane.
10. Click OK to save your modifications and exit the standards editor.
11. Now, start creating a new text in a sheet. In the Style toolbar, you can notice
that two styles are now available: Default and Note.
11. Choose the Note style, click on the sheet to indicate where you want to
position the note, type your note in the text editor and then click OK. The note
is creating using the values you specified.
12. You will now delete the Default style. To do this, launch the standards editor
again.
13. Expand the Styles node and then select the Text node.
14. Click on the Delete style button in the right-hand pane. The Delete style

About Styles
15. Select Default as the style that you want to delete, and click OK. The Default
style is deleted from the Text node in the editor.
[ Up ] [ Next ]

Sheet Styles
Sheet Styles
This section deals with sheet styles. These let you define the default values that will be
used when creating sheets.
Defining Sheet Styles

Sheet styles are located in the Styles -> Sheet node of the Standards editor,
available via Tools -> Standards.
By default, a sheet style called Default is available.
Style Parameter Name Description
Real number that specifies the global scale that should

be applied to the sheet. For example, if you want a
GlobalScale
global scale of 1:2, you should enter 0.5 and if you
Sheet want a global scale of 1:1, you should enter 1.
Specifies whether projection views should be created

ProjectionMethod using the first angle standard, or the third angle
standard. Choose a projection method from the list.
Geometry Styles
Geometry Styles
This section deals with geometry styles. These let you define the default values that
will be used when creating geometry.
Defining Geometry Styles
Geometry styles are located in the following nodes of the Standards editor, available
via Tools -> Standards:
● Styles -> ConstructionPoint
● Styles -> ConstructionCurve
● Styles -> Point
● Styles -> Curve
By default, a style called Default is available for each geometry style.
Specifies the color that should be

Color used to represent construction
points.
ConstructionPoint
Specifies the type (e.g., cross,
PointType dot, etc.) that should be used to
represent construction points.

Color used to represent construction
curves.
Specifies the number of the

linetype (as defined in the
LineType LineTypes node of the current
standard) that should be used to
represent construction curves.
ConstructionCurve

Geometry Styles
Specifies the line thickness index

(as defined in the LineThickness
Thickness node of the current standard) that
should be used to represent
construction curves.

ControlPoints > Color used to represent control points in

dot, etc.) that should be used to
ControlPoints > PointType
represent control points in

Color
used to represent points.
Point Specifies the type (e.g., cross,
PointType dot, etc.) that should be used to
represent points.

Color
used to represent curves.

linetype (as defined in the
LineType LineTypes node of the current
standard) that should be used to
represent curves.

Curve
Thickness node of the current standard) that
curves.

ControlPoints > Color used to represent control points in
curves.

ControlPoints > PointType dot, etc.) that should be used to
represent control points in curves.

Geometry Styles

Annotation Styles
Annotation Styles
This section deals with annotation styles. These let you define the default values that
will be used when creating annotations.
Defining Annotation Styles

Annotation styles are located in the following nodes of the Standards editor, available
● Styles -> Text
● Styles -> Table
● Styles -> DatumFeature
● Styles -> DatumTarget
● Styles -> Tolerance
● Styles -> Balloon
● Styles -> RoughnessSymbol
● Styles -> WeldingSymbol
Text Styles
Parameter Name Description
Specifies the name of the font that should be used for

Font > Name texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default
font will be used.
Indicates whether or not texts should be displayed in

Font > Bold
bold.
Indicates whether or not texts should be displayed in

Font > Italic
italic.
Font > Size Indicates the font size that should be used for texts.
Font > Underline Indicates whether or not texts should be underlined.

Annotation Styles
Font > Color Specifies the color that should be used to display texts.
Font > Ratio Specifies the ratio that should be used to display texts.
Font > Slant Specifies the slant that should be used to display texts.
Specifies the spacing that should be used to display

Font > Spacing
texts.
Specifies the pitch (fixed or variable) that should be

Font > Pitch
used to display texts.
Indicates whether or not strikethrough should be used

Font > Strikethrough
for texts.
Font > Overline Indicates whether or not texts should be overlined.
Specifies the type of frame (e.g., rectangle, square,

fixed-size rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.) that
Text > Frame should be used to represent texts. Note that fixed-size
frames are defined in the Frame node of the current
standard.
Specifies the text position in relation to the anchor

Text > AnchorPoint
point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.).
Specifies the text position in relation to the anchor line

Text > AnchorLine
(e.g., top or bottom, cap or base, etc.).
Specifies the spacing that should be used between two

Text > LineSpacing
lines of text.
Specifies the spacing mode between two lines of text

Text > LineSpacingMode
(e.g., bottom to top, base to cap, etc.).
Text > Justification Specifies a justification for the text.
Text > WordWrap Specifies a width to wrap the text.
Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or 2D

Text > OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the
text orientation.
Specifies the text orientation angle according to the

Text > Angle
chosen reference.
Specifies whether a symmetry, and which one, should

Text > Mirroring
be applied to the text.
Specifies whether or not superscript and subscript

Text > Backfield
texts should be aligned above one another.

Annotation Styles
Specifies the offset value (as a percentage of the font

Text > SuperscriptOffset
height) for superscript texts.
Specifies the size (as a percentage of the font height)

Text > SuperscriptSize
of superscript texts.

Text > SubscriptOffset
height) for subscript texts.
Specifies the size (as a percentage of the font height)

Text > SubscriptSize
of subscript texts.
Text > DisplayUnit Specifies whether or not texts should be displayed.
Specifies whether or not the scale of the view or of the

Text > ApplyScale 2D reference component scale should be applied to the
display of the text.
Text > Blanking Indicates whether or not blanking should be used.
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in the

Graphic > Thickness LineThickness node of the current standard) that
should be used to represent text frames and leaders.
Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in the

Graphic > Linetype LineTypes node of the current standard) that should be
used to represent text frames and leaders.
Specifies the color that should be used to represent

Graphic > Color
text frames and leaders.
Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.)

Leader > Symbol
that should be used for text leaders.
Specifies the length of the first leader segment (i.e.

Leader > Delta the segment which is located before the first leader
breakpoint).

Annotation Styles
Specifies the leader position in relation to the anchor

point of the text frame.
When the Leader > StandardBehavior parameter is set

to Yes:
- 0 positions the leader automatically on the closest
anchor point.
- 1 positions the leader on the left-hand anchor point.
- 2 positions the leader on the right-hand anchor point.
Leader > AnchorPoint When the Leader > StandardBehavior parameter is set
to No:
anchor point.
- 1 to 8 position the leader on a specific anchor point.
Open the TextLeaderAnchorPoints.CATDrawing

document to know the value you should assign to the
Leader > AnchorPoint parameter, depending on where
you want to position the leader in relation to the
anchor point, and on the type of frame used.
Specifies whether or not the position of text leaders

Leader > StandardBehavior
can be different than left or right.
Table Styles

Cells > Font > Name text in table cells. If no font name is specified, the
system's default font will be used.
Indicates whether or not texts in table cells should be

Cells > Font > Bold
displayed in bold.

Cells > Font > Italic
displayed in italic.
Indicates the font size that should be used for texts in

Cells > Font > Size
table cells.

Annotation Styles

Cells > Font > Underline
underlined.
Specifies the color that should be used to display texts

Cells > Font > Color
in table cells.
Specifies the ratio that should be used to display texts

Cells > Font > Ratio
in table cells.
Specifies the slant that should be used to display texts

Cells > Font > Slant
in table cells.

Cells > Font > Spacing
texts in table cells.

Cells > Font > Pitch
used to display texts in table cells.

Cells > Font > Strikethrough
for texts in table cells.

Cells > Font > Overline
overlined.
Specifies the spacing that should be used between two

Cells > LineSpacing
lines of text in table cells.
Specifies the spacing mode between two lines of text

Cells > LineSpacingMode
in table cells (e.g., bottom to top, base to cap, etc.).
Specifies whether or not superscript and subscript

Cells > Backfield texts in table cells should be aligned above one
another.

Cells > SuperscriptOffset
height) for superscript texts in table cells .
Specifies the size of superscript texts (as a percentage

Cells > SuperscriptSize
of the font height) in table cells .
Specifies the offset value for subscript texts (as a

Cells > SubscriptOffset
percentage of the font height) in table cells .
Specifies the size of subscript texts (as a percentage

Cells > SubscriptSize
of the font height) in table cells.
Specifies whether or not texts in table cells should be

Cells > DisplayUnit
displayed.
Specifies the horizontal alignment for the contents of

Cells > HorizontalAlignment
table cells.

Annotation Styles
Specifies the vertical alignment for the contents of

Cells > VerticalAlignment
table cells.
Specifies the horizontal space between the contents

Cells > HorizontalMargin
and the inside border of a cell.
Specifies the vertical space between the contents and

Cells > VerticalMargin
the inside border of a cell.
Specifies the position of the table in relation to the

AnchorPoint
anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.).
Specifies whether the sheet, or whether the view or

OrientationReference 2D component should be used as the reference for the
orientation of the table.
Specifies the orientation angle of the table according

Angle
to the chosen reference.

should be used to represent table frames and leaders.

Graphic > Linetype LineTypes node of the current standard) that should
be used to represent table frames and leaders.

Graphic > Color
table frames and leaders.

Leader > Symbol
that should be used for table leaders.
Specifies the value of the delta that should be applied

Leader > Delta
between a table and its leader.
Blanking Indicates whether or not blanking should be used.

Annotation Styles
DatumFeature Styles

OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the orientation
of datum features.
Specifies the orientation angle of datum features according to

Angle
the chosen reference.
Specifies the position of datum features in relation to the

AnchorPoint
Choose the display mode you want for the datum feature:
- Show value: displays the datum feature, its leader and its
frame.
Display - Show box: replaces the datum feature and its frame by a
rectangular box and displays its leader.
- Hide value: hides the datum feature and its frame but
Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle, etc.) that

Leader > Symbol
should be used for datum feature leaders.
Specifies the name of the font that should be used for datum
Font > Name feature texts. If no font name is specified, the system's
default font will be used.
Indicates whether or not datum feature texts should be

Font > Bold
displayed in bold.
Indicates whether or not datum feature texts should be

Font > Italic
Indicates the font size that should be used for datum feature
Font > Size
texts.
Specifies the color that should be used to represent datum

Graphic > Color
feature frames, leaders and texts.

Annotation Styles
DatumTarget Styles
Diameter Indicates whether or not the surface is plane on a disk.

OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the orientation
of datum targets.
Specifies the orientation angle of datum targets according to

Angle
the chosen reference.
Specifies the position of datum targets in relation to the

AnchorPoint
Choose the display mode you want for the datum target:
- Show value: displays the datum target, its leader and its
frame.
Display - Show box: replaces the datum target and its frame by a
- Hide value: hides the datum target and its frame but
Specifies the name of the font that should be used for datum
Font > Name target texts. If no font name is specified, the system's default
font will be used.
Indicates whether or not datum target texts should be

Font > Bold
displayed in bold.
Indicates whether or not datum target texts should be

Font > Italic
Indicates the font size that should be used for datum target
Font > Size
texts.
Specifies the color that should be used to represent datum

Graphic > Color
target frames, leaders and texts.

Annotation Styles
Tolerance Styles
Specifies the tolerance type (e.g. straightness,

Type
circularity, etc.)
Value Specifies the tolerance value.
UpperText Specifies the tolerance upper text.
LowerText Specifies the tolerance lower text.

Font > Name tolerances. If no font name is specified, the system's
Indicates whether or not tolerances should be

Font > Bold
displayed in bold.
Indicates whether or not tolerances should be

Font > Italic
Indicates the font size that should be used for

Font > Size
tolerances.
Specifies the ratio that should be used to display

Font > Ratio
tolerances.

Font > Spacing
tolerances.
Specifies the tolerance text position in relation to the

Text > AnchorPoint

tolerance text orientation.
Specifies the tolerance text orientation angle according

Text > Angle

Annotation Styles

should be used to represent text frames and leaders.

used to represent tolerance frames and leaders.

Graphic > Color
tolerance frames and leaders.

Leader > Symbol
that should be used for tolerance leaders.

Leader > Delta
between a tolerance and its leader.

point of the tolerance frame.
Leader > AnchorPoint anchor point.
- 1 positions the leader on the middle-left anchor point.
- 2 positions the leader on the middle-right anchor
point.
Balloon Styles

Font > Name balloons. If no font name is specified, the system's
Indicates whether or not balloons should be displayed

Font > Bold
in bold.
Indicates whether or not balloons should be displayed

Font > Italic
in italic.
Font > Size Indicates the font size that should be used for balloons.
Indicates whether or not balloon fonts should be

Font > Underline
underlined.

Font > Ratio
balloons.

Annotation Styles
Specifies the slant that should be used to display

Font > Slant
balloons.

Font > Spacing
balloons.

Font > Pitch
used to display balloons.

Font > Strikethrough
in balloons.
Indicates whether or not overline should be used in

Font > Overline
balloons.

Text > Frame should be used to represent balloons. Note that fixed-
size frames are defined in the Frame node of the
current standard.
Specifies the balloon position in relation to the anchor

Text > AnchorPoint
point (e.g., top left, middle left, etc.).
Specifies the balloon position in relation to the anchor

Text > AnchorLine
line (e.g., top or bottom, cap or base, etc.).

balloon orientation.
Specifies the balloon orientation angle according to the

Text > Angle
chosen reference.
Specifies whether a symmetry, and which one, should

Text > Mirroring
be applied to the balloon.
Specifies whether or not the scale of the view or of the

Text > ApplyScale 2D reference component scale should be applied to the
display of the balloon.
Choose the display mode you want for the balloon:

- Show value: displays the balloon, its leader and its
frame.
Text > Display - Show box: replaces the balloon and its frame by a
- Hide value: hides the balloon and its frame but

Annotation Styles

LineThickness node of the current standard) that
Graphic > Thickness
should be used to represent balloon frames and
leaders.

used to represent balloon frames and leaders.

Graphic > Color
balloon frames, leaders and texts.

Leader > Symbol
that should be used for balloon leaders.
RoughnessSymbol Styles
Specifies the roughness symbol type (e.g. basic,

Values > Type
machining required, machining prohibited)
Specifies the roughness surface pattern (e.g. M, C,

Values > Mode
orthogonal, etc.)
Indicates whether or not the specification line should

Values > SpecificationLine
be displayed.
Indicates whether or not an all-around symbol should

Values > AllAround
be added.
Values > FirstRequirement Specifies the first requirement.
Values > SecondRequirement Specifies the second requirement.
Values > OtherRequirement Specifies another requirement.
Values > ProductionMethod Specifies the production method.
Values > MachiningAllowance Specifies the machining allowance.
Values > CutOff Specifies the cutoff value.
Values > Max Specifies the maximum value.

Annotation Styles
Values > Min Specifies the minimum value.
Specifies the position of roughness symbol texts in

Text > AnchorPoint relation to the anchor point (e.g., top left, middle left,
etc.).
Specifies the position of roughness symbol texts in

Text > AnchorLine relation to the anchor line (e.g., top or bottom, cap or
base, etc.).

Graphic > Color
roughness symbols.
Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined in

the LineTypes node of the current standard) that
Graphic > Linetype
should be used to represent roughness symbol
leaders.

Graphic > Thickness
should be used to represent roughness symbol
leaders.

Font > Name roughness symbols. If no font name is specified, the
Indicates whether or not roughness symbol fonts

Font > Bold
should be displayed in bold.
Indicates whether or not roughness symbol fonts

Font > Italic
should be displayed in italic.

Font > Size
roughness symbols.

Font > Ratio
roughness symbols.

Font > Spacing
roughness symbols.

Leader > Symbol
that should be used for roughness symbol leaders.

Leader > Delta
between a roughness symbol and its leader.

Annotation Styles

point of the roughness symbol.
anchor point.
Leader > AnchorPoint
- 1 positions the leader on the middle-left anchor
point.
- 2 positions the leader on the middle-right anchor
point.
WeldingSymbol Styles
Length1 Specifies the length of the first welding symbol.
Size1 Specifies the size of the first welding symbol.
Specifies the type (e.g. SquareWelding,

WeldingType1
UGrooveWelding, etc.) of the first welding symbol.
Specifies the surface shape (e.g. flat, convex, etc.) of

SurfaceShape1
the first welding symbol.
Specifies the finishing method (e.g. grinding,

FinishingMethod1
hammering, etc.) of the first welding symbol.
Length2 Specifies the length of the second welding symbol.
Size2 Specifies the size of the second welding symbol.
Specifies the type (e.g. SquareWelding,

WeldingType2
UGrooveWelding, etc.) of the second welding symbol.
Specifies the surface shape (e.g. flat, convex, etc.) of

SurfaceShape2
the second welding symbol.
Specifies the finishing method (e.g. grinding,

FinishingMethod2
hammering, etc.) of the second welding symbol.
Reference Specifies the reference of the welding symbol.
FieldWeld Indicates whether or not a field weld should be added.
Indicates whether or not a weld-all-around symbol

AllAround
should be added.

Annotation Styles
Indicates whether the reference line should be up or

ReferenceLine
down. This parameter works only for the ISO standard.

Text > Frame should be used to represent welding symbols. Note
that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node of
the current standard.

welding symbol orientation.
Specifies the welding symbol orientation angle

Text > Angle
according to the chosen reference.

Font > Name welding symbols. If no font name is specified, the
Indicates whether or not welding symbols should be

Font > Bold
displayed in bold.
Indicates whether or not welding symbols should be

Font > Italic
Indicates the font size that should be used for welding

Font > Size
symbols.

Font > Ratio
welding symbols.

Font > Spacing
welding symbols.

Graphic > Thickness
should be used to represent welding symbol frames
and leaders.

used to represent welding symbol frames and leaders.

Graphic > Color
welding symbol frames and leaders.

Leader > Symbol
that should be used for welding symbol leaders.

Annotation Styles

Dimension Styles
Dimension Styles
This section deals with dimension styles. These let you define the default values that
will be used when creating different types of dimensions.
Defining Dimension Styles
Dimension styles are located in the following nodes of the Standards editor, available
● Styles -> DistanceLengthDimension
● Styles -> AngleDimension
● Styles -> RadiusDimension
● Styles -> DiameterDimension
● Styles -> ChamferDimension
● Styles -> CoordinateDimension
DistanceLengthDimension Styles
Specifies whether the sheet, or

whether the view or 2D
Value > OrientationReference component should be used as the
reference for the distance length
dimension value orientation.
Specifies the distance length

Value > Angle dimension value orientation angle
Specifies the distance length

Value > Position
dimension value position.
Specifies the horizontal offset

Value > OffsetX value for distance length
dimension values.

Dimension Styles
Specifies the vertical offset value

Value > OffsetY for distance length dimension
values.
Choose the display mode you

want for the distance length
dimension:
- Show value: displays the
dimension, its leader and its
frame.
Value > Display - Show box: replaces the
dimension and its frame by a
rectangular box and displays its
leader.
- Hide value: hides the dimension
and its frame but displays its
leader.
Indicates whether or not distance

Driving length dimensions should be
driving dimensions.
Specifies whether there will be a

dual value display for the distance
DualValueDisplay length dimension, and, if any,
what kind (e.g. fractional, side-by-
side, etc.).
Specifies the name of the main

ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Name
value display format.

ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue >
displayed factor for the main
DisplayedFactorNumber
value.
Specifies whether the precision

mode for the main value will be
PrecisionMode
decimal or fractional.
Specifies the precision for the

ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > Precision
main value.
Specifies the name of the dual

ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Name
value display format, if any.

ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue >
displayed factor for the dual
value, if any.

Dimension Styles

mode for the dual value (if any)
PrecisionMode
will be decimal or fractional.

ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Precision
dual value, if any.
Indicates whether distance length

dimensions will be fake
Fake > Mode dimensions, and, if yes, of what
type (e.g. numerical or
alphanumerical).
Specifies the fake main value for

Fake > MainValue
distance length dimensions.
Specifies the fake dual value for

Fake > DualValue
Specifies the tolerance main value

Tolerance > MainValue > Format format for distance length
dimensions.
Specifies the first alphanumerical

Tolerance > MainValue > AlphanumericalValue1
value for the tolerance main value.
Specifies the second

Tolerance > MainValue > AlphanumericalValue2 alphanumerical value for the
tolerance main value.
Specifies the lower numerical for

Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalLower
the tolerance main value.
Specifies the upper numerical for

Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalUpper
Specifies the tolerance dual value

Tolerance > DualValue > Format format for distance length
dimensions.

Tolerance > DualValue > AlphanumericalValue1
value for the tolerance dual value.

Tolerance > DualValue > AlphanumericalValue2 alphanumerical value for the
tolerance dual value.

Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalLower
the tolerance dual value.

Dimension Styles

Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalUpper
Specifies how the dimension line

DimensionLine > Representation should be represented (e.g.
regular, one-part leader, etc.)

DimensionLine > Color
used to display dimension lines.

DimensionLine > Thickness node of the current standard) that
dimension lines.
In the case of Two parts or

Leader two parts for the
DimensionLine > SecondPartReference representation, specifies the
Reference for positioning the
second part of the dimension line.

representation, specifies the
DimensionLine > SecondPartAngle
angle for the second part of the
dimension line in relation to its
reference.
Specifies the angle for the

DimensionLine > LeaderAngle
dimension line leader.
Indicates whether or not the

DimensionLine > TillCenter dimension line should reach the
center.
Specifies the type of the first

symbol (e.g. arrow, filled circle,
Symbols > Symbol1 > Type
etc.) that should be used for
Specifies the color of the first

Symbols > Symbol1 > Color
symbol.

Symbols > Symbol1 > Thickness
node of the current standard) of
the first symbol.

Dimension Styles
Specifies the type of the second

Specifies the color of the second

symbol.

the second symbol.
Specifies the symbol mode (e.g.

Symbols > SymbolMode
inside, outside, etc.).
Specifies the color of the distance

ExtensionLine > Color
length dimension extension line.

ExtensionLine > Thickness node of the current standard) of
the distance length dimension
extension line.
Specifies the slant angle for the

extension line. This angle is
ExtensionLine > SlantAngle contained between 90 degrees
and -90 degrees excluded, the
default angle being 0 degree.
Indicates whether or not the left

ExtensionLine > Left > Hide
extension line should be hidden.
Specifies the overrun for the left

ExtensionLine > Left > Overrun
extension line.
Specifies the blanking for the left

ExtensionLine > Left > Blanking
extension line.
Indicates whether or not the right

ExtensionLine > Right > Hide
Specifies the overrun for the right

ExtensionLine > Right > Overrun
extension line.
Specifies the blanking for the

ExtensionLine > Right > Blanking
right extension line.

Dimension Styles

ExtensionLine > Funnel > Display extension line should be displayed
as a funnel.
ExtensionLine > Funnel > Height Specifies the funnel height.
ExtensionLine > Funnel > Width Specifies the funnel width.
ExtensionLine > Funnel > Angle Specifies the funnel angle.
Specifies the funnel mode

ExtensionLine > Funnel > Mode
(external or internal).
Specifies whether the funnel

should be applied on the left or
ExtensionLine > Funnel > Side
bottom, on the right or top, or on
both sides.
Specifies the prefix for the main

AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Prefix
value of the associated text.
Specifies the suffix for the main

AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Suffix
Specifies the text that should be

AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Before displayed before the main value
of the associated text.

AssociatedTexts > MainValue > After displayed after the main value of
the associated text.

AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Upper displayed above the main value of

AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Lower displayed below the main value of

AssociatedTexts > DualValue > Before displayed before the dual value of

AssociatedTexts > DualValue > After displayed after the dual value of

Dimension Styles

AssociatedTexts > DualValue > Upper displayed above the dual value of

AssociatedTexts > DualValue > Lower displayed below the dual value of
Specifies whether the frame

Framing > FramedSubpart subpart should display the value,
the value and tolerance, etc.
Specifies whether the framed

group should display the main
Framing > FramedGroup
value, the dual value, both values
separately, etc.
Specifies the type of frame (e.g.,

rectangle, square, fixed-size
rectangle, fixed-size square, etc.)
that should be used for distance
Framing > Frame
length dimensions. Note that
fixed-size frames are defined in
the Frame node of the current
standard.
Framing > MainValueScoring Specifies the main value scoring.
Framing > DualValueScoring Specifies the dual value scoring.
Specifies the name of the font

that should be used for distance
Font > Name length dimension texts. If no font
name is specified, the system's

Font > Bold length dimension texts should be
displayed in bold.

Font > Italic length dimension texts should be
Indicates the font size that should

Font > Size be used for distance length
dimension texts.

Dimension Styles

Font > Color used to display distance length
dimension texts.

length dimension texts should be
Font > Underline
underlined (in this case, overline
cannot be applied).
Indicates whether or not

Font > Strikethrough strikethrough should be used for
distance length dimension texts.

length dimension texts should be
Font > Overline
overlined (in this case, underline
cannot be applied).
AngleDimension Styles

reference for the angle dimension
value orientation.
Specifies the angle dimension

Value > Angle value orientation angle according
Specifies the angle dimension

Value > Position
value position.

Value > OffsetX
value for angle dimension values.

Value > OffsetY
for angle dimension values.

Dimension Styles

want for the angle dimension:
frame.
- Show box: replaces the
Value > Display
leader.
leader.
Indicates whether or not angle

Driving dimensions should be driving
dimensions.

dual value display for the angle
DualValueDisplay
dimension, and, if any, what kind
(e.g. fractional, side-by-side, etc.).


value.

PrecisionMode

main value.


value, if any.

PrecisionMode

dual value, if any.

Dimension Styles
Indicates whether angle

alphanumerical).

Fake > MainValue
angle dimensions.

Fake > DualValue
angle dimensions.

Tolerance > MainValue > Format
format for angle dimensions.





Tolerance > DualValue > Format
format for angle dimensions.







Dimension Styles

dimension lines.


reference.


center.

angle dimensions.

symbol.

the first symbol.

angle dimensions.

symbol.

Dimension Styles

the second symbol.

Specifies the color of the angle

dimension extension line.

the angle dimension extension
line.



extension line.

extension line.


extension line.


as a funnel.

Dimension Styles


both sides.












Dimension Styles

separately, etc.

Framing > Frame that should be used for angle
dimensions. Note that fixed-size
frames are defined in the Frame
node of the current standard.

that should be used for angle
Font > Name dimension texts. If no font name
is specified, the system's default
font will be used.

Font > Bold dimension texts should be
displayed in bold.

Font > Italic dimension texts should be

Font > Size
be used for angle dimension texts.

Font > Color used to display angle dimension
texts.

dimension texts should be
Font > Underline
cannot be applied).

angle dimension texts.

Dimension Styles

Font > Overline
cannot be applied).
RadiusDimension Styles

reference for the radius
Specifies the radius dimension

Specifies the radius dimension

Value > Position
value position.

Value > OffsetX
value for radius dimension values.

Value > OffsetY
for radius dimension values.

want for the radius dimension:
frame.
Value > Display
leader.
leader.

Dimension Styles
Indicates whether or not radius

dimensions.

dual value display for the radius
DualValueDisplay
dimension, and, if any, what kind
(e.g. fractional, side-by-side, etc.).


value.

PrecisionMode

main value.


value, if any.

PrecisionMode

dual value, if any.
Indicates whether radius

alphanumerical).

Fake > MainValue
radius dimensions.

Fake > DualValue
radius dimensions.

Dimension Styles

format for radius dimensions.





format for radius dimensions.







dimension lines.


Dimension Styles

reference.


center.

radius dimensions.

symbol.

the first symbol.

radius dimensions.

symbol.

the second symbol.


Foreshortened > IsForeshortened radius dimension should be
foreshortened.

Dimension Styles
Specifies whether the

foreshortened dimension value
Foreshortened > ValuePosition
should be positioned on the long
segment or on the short segment.

foreshortened dimension
Foreshortened > Orientation
orientation should be parallel or
convergent.
Specifies the foreshortened

Foreshortened > Angle
dimension angle.
Specifies the foreshortened

Foreshortened > Ratio
dimension ratio.
Specifies the scale that should be

Foreshortened > SymbolScale used for the foreshortened
dimension symbol.

Foreshortened > MoveEndPoint foreshortened dimension end
point can be moved.
Specifies the color of the radius


the radius dimension extension
line.



extension line.

extension line.


Dimension Styles

extension line.


as a funnel.


both sides.








Dimension Styles





separately, etc.

Framing > Frame that should be used for radius

that should be used for radius
font will be used.

displayed in bold.


Font > Size be used for radius dimension
texts.

Dimension Styles

Font > Color used to display radius dimension
texts.

Font > Underline
cannot be applied).

radius dimension texts.

Font > Overline
cannot be applied).
DiameterDimension Styles

reference for the diameter
Specifies the diameter dimension

Specifies the diameter dimension

Value > Position
value position.

Value > OffsetX value for diameter dimension
values.

Value > OffsetY
for diameter dimension values.

Dimension Styles

want for the diameter dimension:
frame.
Value > Display
leader.
leader.
Indicates whether or not diameter

dimensions.

dual value display for the
DualValueDisplay diameter dimension, and, if any,
what kind (e.g. fractional, side-by-
side, etc.).


value.

PrecisionMode

main value.


value, if any.

PrecisionMode

Dimension Styles

dual value, if any.
Indicates whether diameter

alphanumerical).

Fake > MainValue
diameter dimensions.

Fake > DualValue

format for diameter dimensions.





format for diameter dimensions.






Dimension Styles


dimension lines.


reference.


center.


symbol.

the first symbol.


symbol.

Dimension Styles

the second symbol.
Specifies the color of the diameter


the diameter dimension extension
line.



extension line.

extension line.


extension line.


as a funnel.


Dimension Styles

both sides.












Dimension Styles

separately, etc.

Framing > Frame that should be used for diameter

that should be used for diameter
font will be used.

displayed in bold.


Font > Size be used for diameter dimension
texts.

Font > Color used to display diameter
dimension texts.

Font > Underline
cannot be applied).

diameter dimension texts.

Dimension Styles

Font > Overline
cannot be applied).

dimensions should be displayed
OneSymbolDiameter
as one-symbol dimensions (as
opposed to two-symbols).
ChamferDimension Styles
Specifies whether the sheet,

or whether the view or 2D
component should be used
Value > OrientationReference
as the reference for the
chamfer dimension value
orientation.
Specifies the chamfer

dimension value orientation
Value > Angle
angle according to the
chosen reference.
Specifies the chamfer

Value > Position
dimension value position.
Specifies the horizontal

Value > OffsetX offset value for chamfer
dimension values.
Specifies the vertical offset

Value > OffsetY value for chamfer dimension
values.

Dimension Styles
Choose the display mode

you want for the chamfer
dimension:
frame.
Value > Display - Show box: replaces the
rectangular box and displays
its leader.
- Hide value: hides the
dimension and its frame but

Driving chamfer dimensions should
be driving dimensions.
Specifies whether there will

be a dual value display for
DualValueDisplay the chamfer dimension, and,
if any, what kind (e.g.
fractional, side-by-side, etc.).
Specifies the name of the

main value display format.

value.

precision mode for the main
ValueDisplayFormat > MainValue > PrecisionMode
value will be decimal or
fractional.
Specifies the precision for

the main value.

ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > Name dual value display format, if
any.

value, if any.

Dimension Styles

precision mode for the dual
ValueDisplayFormat > DualValue > PrecisionMode
value (if any) will be decimal
or fractional.
Specifies the precision for

the dual value, if any.
Indicates whether chamfer

Fake > Mode dimensions, and, if yes, of
what type (e.g. numerical or
alphanumerical).
Specifies the fake main

Fake > MainValue value for chamfer
dimensions.
Specifies the fake dual value

Fake > DualValue
for chamfer dimensions.
Specifies the tolerance main

Tolerance > MainValue > Format value format for chamfer
dimensions.
Specifies the first


Specifies the lower

Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalLower numerical for the tolerance
main value.
Specifies the upper

Tolerance > MainValue > NumericalUpper numerical for the tolerance
main value.
Specifies the tolerance dual

Tolerance > DualValue > Format value format for chamfer
dimensions.
Specifies the first


Dimension Styles

Specifies the lower

Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalLower numerical for the tolerance
dual value.
Specifies the upper

Tolerance > DualValue > NumericalUpper numerical for the tolerance
dual value.
Specifies how the dimension

line should be represented
DimensionLine > Representation
(e.g. regular, one-part
leader, etc.)
Specifies the color that

DimensionLine > Color should be used to display
dimension lines.
Specifies the line thickness

index (as defined in the
LineThickness node of the
DimensionLine > Thickness
current standard) that
dimension lines.

DimensionLine > SecondPartReference
second part of the dimension
line.

angle for the second part of
the dimension line in relation
to its reference.


DimensionLine > TillCenter dimension line should reach
the center.

Dimension Styles

symbol (e.g. arrow, filled
Symbols > Symbol1 > Type circle, etc.) that should be
used for chamfer
dimensions.
Specifies the color of the

first symbol.

Symbols > Symbol1 > Thickness LineThickness node of the
current standard) of the first
symbol.
Specifies the type of the

second symbol (e.g. arrow,
Symbols > Symbol2 > Type filled circle, etc.) that should
be used for chamfer
dimensions.

second symbol.

Symbols > Symbol2 > Thickness LineThickness node of the
current standard) of the
second symbol.

ExtensionLine > Color chamfer dimension
extension line.

LineThickness node of the
ExtensionLine > Thickness
current standard) of the
chamfer dimension
extension line.
Specifies the slant angle for

the extension line. This
angle is contained between
ExtensionLine > SlantAngle
90 degrees and -90 degrees
excluded, the default angle
being 0 degree.

Dimension Styles

ExtensionLine > Left > Hide left extension line should be
hidden.
Specifies the overrun for the

left extension line.

left extension line.

ExtensionLine > Right > Hide right extension line should
be hidden.
Specifies the overrun for the



ExtensionLine > Funnel > Display extension line should be
displayed as a funnel.


should be applied on the left
or bottom, on the right or
top, or on both sides.
Specifies the prefix for the

AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Prefix main value of the associated
text.
Specifies the suffix for the

AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Suffix main value of the associated
text.
Specifies the text that

should be displayed before
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Before
the main value of the
associated text.

Dimension Styles

should be displayed after the
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > After
main value of the associated
text.

should be displayed above
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Upper
associated text.

should be displayed below
AssociatedTexts > MainValue > Lower
associated text.

should be displayed before
AssociatedTexts > DualValue > Before
the dual value of the
associated text.

should be displayed after the
AssociatedTexts > DualValue > After
dual value of the associated
text.

should be displayed above
AssociatedTexts > DualValue > Upper
associated text.

should be displayed below
AssociatedTexts > DualValue > Lower
associated text.

subpart should display the
Framing > FramedSubpart
value, the value and
tolerance, etc.

framed group should display
Framing > FramedGroup the main value, the dual
value, both values
separately, etc.

Dimension Styles
Specifies the type of frame

(e.g., rectangle, square,
fixed-size rectangle, fixed-
size square, etc.) that should
Framing > Frame be used for chamfer
dimensions. Note that fixed-
size frames are defined in
the Frame node of the
current standard.
Specifies the main value

Framing > MainValueScoring
scoring.
Specifies the dual value

Framing > DualValueScoring
scoring.

font that should be used for
chamfer dimension texts. If
Font > Name
no font name is specified,
the system's default font will
be used.

Font > Bold chamfer dimension texts

Font > Italic chamfer dimension texts
Indicates the font size that

Font > Size should be used for chamfer
dimension texts.
Specifies the color that

Font > Color should be used to display
chamfer dimension texts.

chamfer dimension texts
Font > Underline should be underlined (in this
case, overline cannot be
applied).

Font > Strikethrough strikethrough should be used
for chamfer dimension texts.

Dimension Styles

chamfer dimension texts
Font > Overline should be overlined (in this
case, underline cannot be
applied).
Specifies whether chamfer

dimensions should be
Chamfer > DisplayType displayed with one extension
line or with two extension
lines.
Specifies the value format

for the chamfer dimension (e.
Chamfer > ValueFormat
g. length/length, angle/
length, etc.)

Chamfer > SecondaryValueDisplayFormat >
secondary value display
MainValue > Name
format for the main value.

MainValue > DisplayedFactorNumber
value.

secondary value display
DualValue > Name
format for the dual value.

DualValue > DisplayedFactorNumber
value.
CoordinateDimension Styles

OrientationReference component should be used as the reference for the
coordinate dimension orientation.
Specifies the coordinate dimension orientation angle

Angle

Dimension Styles
Specifies the coordinate dimension position in relation to the

AnchorPoint
Choose the display mode you want for the coordinate

dimension:
- Show value: displays the dimension, its leader and its
frame.
Display
- Show box: replaces the dimension and its frame by a
- Hide value: hides the dimension and its frame but displays
its leader.

Font > Name coordinate dimension texts. If no font name is specified, the
Indicates whether or not coordinate dimension texts should

Font > Bold
be displayed in bold.
Indicates whether or not coordinate dimension texts should

Font > Italic
be displayed in italic.
Indicates the font size that should be used for coordinate

Font > Size
dimension texts.

Graphic > Color
coordinate dimension texts frames and leaders.


This section deals with dress-up and dress-up symbols styles. These let you define the
default values that will be used when applying dress-up to elements.
Defining Dress-up and Dress-up Symbols Styles
Dress-up and dress-up symbols styles are located in the following nodes of the
Standards editor, available via Tools -> Standards:
● Styles -> AreaFill
● Styles -> AxisLine
● Styles -> CenterLine
● Styles -> Thread
● Styles -> Arrow
By default, a style called Default is available for each dress-up/dress-up symbol style.
Specifies the name of the pattern (as defined in

AreaFill Pattern the Patterns node of the current standard) that
should be used for area fills.
Specifies the color that should be used to

Graphic > Color
represent axis lines.
Specifies the number of the linetype (as defined

Graphic > LineType in the LineTypes node of the current standard)
that should be used to represent axis lines.
Specifies the line thickness index (as defined in

Graphic > Thickness the LineThickness node of the current standard)
AxisLine that should be used to represent axis lines.
Indicates whether or not the overrun between

the element and its axis line is computed
OverRunAuto
automatically. When set to Yes, this parameter
overrides any value set for OverRunLength.

When OverRunAuto is set to No, specifies the

OverRunLength length of the overrun between the element and
its axis line.

Graphic > Color
represent center lines.

that should be used to represent center lines.

CenterLine that should be used to represent center lines.

the element and its center line is computed
OverRunAuto

its center line.

Graphic > Color
represent threads.

that should be used to represent threads.

Thread that should be used to represent threads.

the element and its thread is computed
OverRunAuto

its thread.


Graphic > Color
represent arrows.

that should be used to represent arrows.

Arrow
that should be used to represent arrows.
Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle,

HeadSymbol
etc.) that should be used for arrow heads.
Specifies the symbol (e.g., simple arrow, circle,

TailSymbol
etc.) that should be used for arrow tails.

View Callout Styles
View Callout Styles

This section deals with view callout styles. These let you define the default values that
will be used for projection, section or detail view callouts.
Defining View Callout Styles

View callout styles are located in the following nodes of the Standards editor, available
● Styles -> ProjectionCallout
● Styles -> SectionCallout
● Styles -> DetailCallout
By default, a style called Default is available for each view callout style.
ProjectionCallout Styles
Indicates whether or not projection view callouts

ViewScaleDependant
should be dependent on the view scale.
Indicates the type of callout (e.g., lines and arrows,

Type lines, corners and arrows, etc.) that should be used to
represent section view callouts.

LineTypes node of the current standard) that should
Profile > LineType
be used to represent projection view callout profiles.
Available values range from 1 to 7.

Profile > Thickness
should be used to represent projection view callout
profiles. Available values range from 1 to 8.

View Callout Styles

Corners > Thickness
should be used to represent projection view callout
corners. Available values range from 1 to 8.
Specifies the length of projection view callout corners.

Corners > Length
Available values range from 10E-3 to 10E3mm.
Indicates whether callout arrows are attached by the

Attachment
head or the tail of projection view callout arrows.
Specifies the length of projection view callout arrows.

Arrows > Length
Specifies the angle used for projection view callout

Arrows > Head > Angle arrow heads. Available values range from 1 to 7.
Available values range from 5° to 175°.
Specifies the type used for projection view callout

Arrows > Head > Type arrow heads (e.g. filled arrow, blanked arrow, closed
arrow or simple arrow).
Specifies the length of projection view callout arrow

Arrows > Head > Length
heads. Available values range from 10E-3 to 10E3mm.
Specifies the color that should be used to display

Color
projection view callouts.

Text > Font > Name
projection view callouts.
Indicates whether or not projection view callouts texts

Text > Font > Bold

Text > Font > Italic

Text > Font > Size
projection view callouts texts.

Text > Font > Underline
should be underlined.

Text > Font > Color

Text > Font > Ratio

View Callout Styles

Text > Font > Slant

Text > Font > Spacing

Text > Font > Pitch
used to display projection view callouts texts.

Text > Font > Strikethrough
for projection view callouts texts.

Text > Font > Overline
should be overlined.

Text > Frame should be used to represent projection view callouts.
Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame
SectionCallout Styles
Indicates whether or not section view callouts should

ViewScaleDependant
be dependent on the view scale.
Indicates the type of callout (e.g., lines and arrows,

Type lines, corners and arrows, etc.) that should be used to
represent section view callouts.

Profile > LineType
be used to represent section view callout profiles.

Profile > Thickness
should be used to represent section view callout
profiles. Available values range from 1 to 8.

View Callout Styles

Corners > Thickness
should be used to represent section view callout
corners. Available values range from 1 to 8.
Specifies the length of section view callout corners.

Corners > Length
Indicates whether callout arrows are attached by the

Attachment
head or the tail of section view callout arrows.
Specifies the length of section view callout arrows.

Arrows > Length
Specifies the angle used for section view callout arrow

Arrows > Head > Angle
heads. Available values range from 5° to 175°.
Specifies the type used for section view callout arrow

Arrows > Head > Type heads (e.g. filled arrow, blanked arrow, closed arrow
or simple arrow).
Specifies the length of section view callout arrow

Arrows > Head > Length
heads. Available values range from 10E-3 to 10E3mm.

Color
section view callouts.

Text > Font > Name
section view callouts.
Indicates whether or not section view callouts texts

Text > Font > Bold

Indicates the font size that should be used for section

Text > Font > Size
view callouts texts.


Text > Font > Color
section view callouts texts.

Text > Font > Ratio

Text > Font > Slant

View Callout Styles


Text > Font > Pitch
used to display section view callouts texts.

for section view callouts texts.


Text > Frame should be used to represent section view callouts.
Note that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame
DetailCallout Styles
Indicates the type of callout (e.g., leader text, circle,

Type etc.) that should be used to represent detail view
callouts.

LineType
be used to represent detail view callouts. Available
values range from 1 to 7.

Thickness
should be used to represent detail view callouts.

Text > Font > Name
detail view callouts.
Indicates whether or not detail view callouts texts

Text > Font > Bold

View Callout Styles

Indicates the font size that should be used for detail

Text > Font > Size
view callouts texts.


Text > Font > Color
detail view callouts texts.

Text > Font > Ratio

Text > Font > Slant


Text > Font > Pitch
used to display detail view callouts texts.

for detail view callouts texts.


Text > Frame should be used to represent detail view callouts. Note
that fixed-size frames are defined in the Frame node
of the current standard.
[ Back ] [ Up ]

This section contains the list of the icons and menus which are specific to Interactive
Drafting workbench.
You may read these pages whenever you need to know greater details on these commands
documented in other parts of the guide.
Command Board
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugwd0000.htm10/19/2004 4:43:14 PM
Command Board
Command (and Option) Board
General
Grid Analysis Display Mode
Snap to Point Show Constraints
Detected Constraints Filter Generated Elements
Projected/Forced/True Length Dimension
Drawing
Sheets
New Sheet New View
2D Component Instantiate 2D Component
Frame Creation
Views
Multiple View Projection Define the view plane
Dimensioning
Dimensions Dimension Edition

Tolerancing

Command Board
Dimensions Create Interruption(s) Datum Feature
Geometrical
Cumulated Dimensions Remove Interruption(s)
Tolerances
Stacked Dimensions Re-route Dimension
Length/Distance Dimensions
Angle Dimensions
Technological Feature
Dimensioning
Radius Dimensions Technological Feature Dimensions
Length Technological Feature
Diameter Dimensions
Dimensions
Angle Technological Feature
Chamfer Dimensions
Dimensions
Radius Technological Feature
Thread Dimension
Dimensions
Diameter Technological Feature
Coordinate Dimensions
Dimensions
Hole Dimension Table
Points Coordinates Table
Annotations
Texts
Symbols
Text Roughness Symbol
Text with Leader Welding Symbol
Text Replicate Geometry Weld
Balloon
Datum Target
Text Template Placement
Table

Command Board
Dress-up Elements
Axis and Threads

Center Line (No Reference) Thread (No Reference)
Center Line (Reference) Thread (Reference)
Axis Line Axis Line and Center Line
2D Component
Re-use a component from a catalog
Sketched Geometry
Points Splines
Points Using Coordinates Connect
Equidistant Points Parabola by Focus
Create a point using intersection Hyperbola by Focus
Create a point using projection Conic
Lines Profiles
Create an infinite line Rectangles
Create a bi-tangent line Oriented rectangles
Create a bisecting line Parallelograms
Circles Hexagons
Three Point Circle Elongated Hole
Circles Using Coordinates Curved Elongated Hole
Create a tri-tangent circle Keyhole Profiles
Arcs

Command Board
Three point arc
Three point arc starting with limits
Ellipses
Operations on Sketched Geometry

Corners (Trim Both Elem.) Chamfer (Trim Both Elem.)
Corners (Trim One Elem.) Chamfer (Trim One Elem.)

Corners (Trim No Elem.) Chamfer (Trim No Elem.)
Symmetrical Elements Trim Both Elem.
Translate Elements Trim One Elem.
Rotate Elements Trim (Quick Trim)
Scale Elements Break Elements
Offset Elements Trim (Close Elem.)
Complement
Constraints
Quick dimensional/geometrical
Contact Constraint
constraints
Constraints (Dialog Box)
Graphic Properties
● line color Copy Object Format

● line type
● line weight Pattern

Command Board
Line Type
● Tolerance description
one part dimension ● Unit
● Precision
two part dimension
two part leader
Text Properties
Font Name
Font Size
Bold Superscript
Italic Subscript
Underline Left Justification
Strike-thru Center Justification
Over-line Right Justification
Anchor point Frame
Insert Symbol

Command Board
Style
Style
[ Up ] [ Next ]


This chapter describes the various menus, submenus and items specific to the Interactive Drafting
workbench. General menu commands are described in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
File
Save the document to the required format, customize the sheet and print it after modifying the
settings if needed. Refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide.
For... See...
New Entering the Interactive Drafting

workbench
Page Modifying a Sheet

Setup
Print Printing
Edit
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugwd0100.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 4:44:27 PM

Manipulate selected objects. Also refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide.

For... See...
Background Creating a Frame Title Block
Insert
Insert various types of elements.
For... See...
Views... Views
Drawing Sheets
Dimensioning... Dimensions

Annotations... Annotations
Dress Up... Dress-Up Elements
Geometry creation 2D Geometry
Geometry modification 2D Geometry Operations
Picture Images
Tools
Set user preferences. Also refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide.
For... See...
Visualization Filters Infrastructure User's Guide
Options Customization
Standards Standards Administration
Positioning Lining up Dimensions
Multi View (2.5D) Views
Reset All Defaults Setting Properties as Default
Import External Format File Export and Import


This section describes the various icons of the Interactive Drafting workbench. The toolbars
are located on each side of the workbench in the default set-up, except for the Tools palette
which appears only when specific tools are available for a given command.
Toolbar Purpose
Geometry Creation Create geometry
Geometry Modification Transform existing 2D elements and add constraints to

elements on the drawing
Annotations Add annotations to existing views by creating them
Dress-Up Add dress-up elements on the drawing
Dimensioning Create all types of dimensions needed for your drawing
Create sheets, views, 2D components and frame title
Drawing
blocks
Tools Activate display and positioning tools
Use specific options or value fields available for a given
Tools Palette
command
Properties
Text Properties Modify the text properties
Graphic Properties Modify the graphic properties of all kind of features
Dimension Properties Modify the dimensions properties
Style Set the style that will be used to create a new object
[ Back ] [ Up ]
Geometry Creation
Geometry Creation
See Points See Three Point Arc with Limits
See Points using Coordinates See Ellipses
See Equidistant Points See Profiles
See Intersection Points See Rectangles
See Projection Points See Oriented rectangles
See Lines See Parallelograms
See Infinite Lines See Hexagons
See Bi-Tangent Lines See Elongated Holes
See Bisecting Lines See Cylindrical Elongated Holes
See Lines Normal to Curves See Keyhole Profiles
See Circles See Splines
See Three Point Circle See Connect
See Circles Using Coordinates See Parabola by Focus
See Tri-Tangent Circle See Hyperbola by Focus
See Arcs See Conic
See Three Point Arc

[ Up ] [ Next ]
See Creating
See Modifying a Corner
Symmetrical Elements
See Translating
See Modifying a Chamfer
Elements
See Trimming Elements See Rotating Elements
See Breaking Elements See Scaling Elements

See Breaking and Trimming
See Offsetting Elements
Elements
See Creating Quick
See Closing Elements Dimensional/
See Creating
See Complementing an Arc
Constraints using a
(Circle or Ellipse)
Dialog Box
See Creating Contact
Constraints


Annotations
Annotations
See Creating Text
See Creating Text with Leader
See Replicating a Text
See Creating a Balloon
See Creating a Datum Target
See Annotate Drawings using Text Templates
See Creating a Roughness Symbol
See Creating a Welding Symbol
See Creating a Geometry Weld
See Creating/Modifying a Table

Dress-Up
Dress-Up
See Creating a Center Line and Modifying a Center line
See Creating a Center Line and Modifying a Center line
See Creating a Thread
See Creating a Thread
See Creating an Axis Line
See Creating an Area-Fill
See Creating an Arrow
Dimensioning
Dimensioning
See Creating a Dimension
See Creating a Cumulated Dimension
See Creating a Stacked Dimension
See Creating Explicit Dimensions
See Creating a Chamfer Dimension
See Creating Associative Thread Dimensions
See Creating a Coordinate Dimension
See Creating a Hole Dimension Table
See Creating a Points Coordinates Table

Dimensioning
See Creating Dimensions for Technological Features
See Re-routing Dimensions
See Interrupting Extension Lines
See Interrupting Extension Lines
See Creating a Geometrical Tolerance
See Creating a Datum Feature


Text Properties
Text Properties
See Setting Text Properties
Graphic Properties
Graphic Properties
See Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties
See Before You Begin (Dimensions)
Tools
Tools
See Using Tools
See Using Tools
See Using Tools
See Constraints
See Constraints
See Using Tools
Style
Style
This toolbar varies depending on whether the drawing was created with versions up
to V5 R10 or was created/updated with version V5 R11 and later.
Drawings created/updated with version V5 R11 and later
This toolbar is available with drawings created with version V5 R11 and later, or with
drawings created with older versions and whose standard has been updated or
changed in V5 R11 and later. These drawings use the styles which are defined in the
standard used by the drawing. Standards are managed by the administrator.
See Using Standard-Defined Styles
Drawings created with versions up to V5 R10
This toolbar is only available with drawings created with versions up to V5 R10.
See Using Default Values
Drawing
Drawing
See Defining a Sheet
See Creating a 2D Component
See Creating Views
See Re-Using a 2D Component
See Creating a Frame Title Block
Tools Palette
Tools Palette
The options or fields available in the Tools Palette depend on the selected command.
Only a few examples are provided here.
See Using Tools
[ Back ] [ Up ]

These sections explain how to customize settings for Drafting.
Customizing for Interactive Drafting
Customizing for Generative Drafting
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudr0000.htm10/19/2004 4:51:55 PM
General Settings
General Settings
This task shows you how to set general settings to be used in the Interactive Drafting
workbench.
2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting in the list of objects to the left of the
Options dialog box.
3. Select the General tab. It contains several categories of options:

● Ruler
● Grid
● Rotation
● Colors
● Tree
● View Axis
Ruler
Show ruler
Check this option to display the ruler in your sheet. It means you
visualize the cursor coordinates as you are drawing.
Grid
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudr0002.htm (1 of 5)10/19/2004 4:52:08 PM

General Settings
Display
Check this option to display the grid in your session. You will note that
this capability is also available via the Drafting Options toolbar.
Snap to point
You need to check this option if the geometry needs to begin or end on
the points of the grid.
Allow Distortions
Check this option to apply different graduations and spacing between H

and V.
H; V; Primary spacing; Graduations
To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the H and V
fields. The Primary spacing option lets you define the spacing between
the major lines of the grid. The Graduations field lets you set the
number of graduations between the major lines of the grid, which
actually consists in defining a secondary grid.
Rotation
Rotation Snap Angle
Specify the angle that should be used when rotating text elements (text,
frame, or leader) using snapping. In other words, this option defines the
snapping value used when rotating an element using the Select or
Rotate commands.
Automatic Snapping
This option automatically uses snapping when rotating an element.

General Settings
Colors
You can customize given options for modifying the drawing background color. You
can do this at any time.
Sheet background
Choose the color that will be used for the sheet background.
Detail background
Choose the color that will be used for the background of 2D components.
Graduated color
If you want the sheet background and/or the detail (i.e. 2D component)
background to be graduated, check the associated box.
For example, if you customize the color type as shown below:

General Settings
Tree
You can choose whether or not parameters and relations should be displayed in the
specification tree.
Display parameters
Check this option to display in the specification tree the formula

parameters used in the drawing.
Display relations
Check this option to display in the specification tree the relation

parameters used in the drawing.
View axis

General Settings
Display in the current view
Check this box if you want the view axis to be displayed when you
activate a view.
Zoomable
Check this box if you want to be able to zoom view axes (as you can do
with geometry).
Reference size
Enter the size that you want to use as a reference to display view axes
size.
4. Choose the options you want and then click OK to validate your settings.
[ Up ] [ Next ]


You can customize given options when creating views or when adding sheets.
Options dialog box.
3. Select the Layout tab. It contains the following sets of options:

● View Creation
● New Sheet
● Background View
● Section / Projection Callout
View creation
View name
Check this box if you want the view name to be created automatically
when creating views.
Scaling factor
Check this box if you want the scaling factor to be created automatically
View frame
Check this box if you want the view frame to be created automatically

Propagation of broken and breakout specifications
Check this box if you want broken and breakout specifications to be

reproduced.
Auxiliary and section views orientation according to profile
You can decide if auxiliary and section views will be oriented according to
the profile. In this case, the X axis will be parallel to the profile.
New sheet
Copy background view
Check this box if you want a background view to be copied into newly
created sheets.
Source sheet
Specify whether you want the source sheet for the background view to
be the first sheet of the current drawing, or a sheet from another
drawing by selecting the appropriate option.
Background view

Directory for frame and title block
You can specify the path to the directory containing the frame and title
block macros.
Section/Projection Callout
Size not dependent on view scale
Check this option if you do not want the size of projection and section
callout elements to be dependent on the view scale. This option will
apply to newly created callouts, i.e. selecting this option will not have
any impact on new callouts.


You can customize given options for controlling geometry and dress-up behavior when
generating views, as well as view generation.
Options dialog box.
3. Select the View tab. It contains several categories of options:

● Geometry generation / Dress-up
● View generation
Geometry generation / Dress-up

This category of options lets you specify what kind of geometry and dress-up elements
you want to generate when generating views.
Generate axis
Select to generate axis lines.
Generate threads
Select this option to generate threads.
Generate center lines
Select this option to generate center lines.
Generate hidden lines
Select this option to generate hidden lines.
Generate fillets
Select this option to generate fillets. Additionally, click the Configure

button to configure fillets generation. You can choose to generate either of
the following types of fillets:
Boundaries
Thin lines, representing the mathematical limits of
the fillets.
Boundaries will not be projected if they correspond

to two faces which are continuous in curvature.
They will be projected only if they correspond to a
smooth edge which is situated between two faces
whose curvature radii vary.
This mode will be used automatically to represent a

connection between two faces which are not joined
by a fillet, no matter what option you select.

Symbolic
Original edges, projected in a direction that is
normal to each corresponding surface.
Approximated Original Edges

Original edges, at the intersection of the two
surfaces joined by the fillet.
Projected Original Edges

Original edges, projected on fillet surfaces in the
direction of the view projection.
This projection mode is equivalent to the CATIA V4

fillet projection mode.
Inherit 3D colors
Select this option if you want the colors of a part to be automatically

generated onto the views.
In the case of parts whose color is white, the views generated with this
option selected will be white, and will therefore not be properly displayed.
Project 3D Wireframe
Select this option to visualize both the wireframe and the geometry on
generated views. Additionally, click the Configure button to configure the
3D wireframe projection mode. You can choose whether projected 3D
wireframe can be hidden (in some cases, depending on the projection
angle, part or all of 3D wireframe will possibly be hidden) or is always
visible (3D wireframe will be visible in all cases, independently of the
projection angle).

Project 3D Points
Select this option to project points from 3D (no construction element).

Additionally, click the Configure button to select the type of points
visualized in the projected drawing. In the 3D Point Projection dialog box,
you can choose between keeping the symbols that are used in the 3D or
using a new symbol.
Apply 3D specification
Select this option to specify that, in an assembly, given parts will or will
not be sectioned into section views or breakout views (Generative Drafting
workbench). For this, you select one view, then the Edit -> Properties
command from the menu bar from the Assembly Design workbench
(Mechanical tab, Drafting properties options) and either activate or de-
activate the Not cut in section views options.
View Linetype
Click the Configure button to configure linetypes for specific types of

views: section view, detail view, broken view, breakout view, skin section
view (in the case of wireframes and surfaces). In the Linetype and
Thickness dialog box, select the line type and the thickness you want for
each type of view, from the associated fields. Click Close when you are
done.

If you choose the zigzag linetype (linetype #8), note

that this linetype is just a graphical dress-up of the
view. This means that if one line is relimited on the
breakout line, then it will be relimited on the
theoretical line as shown here, and not on the
visualized zigzag line.
View generation

View generation mode
From this list, select how you want to generate views.
Exact view
Generates exact views from the Design mode, i.e. views for which the
geometry is available. The exact generation mode will be the best option in
most cases:
● This is the fastest generation mode.
● All types of views can be generated using this option.
● All functionalities (dress-up, dimensions, annotations, etc.) are available.
However, there are a few cases in which choosing the exact generation
mode will not be appropriate:
● In the case of sophisticated products or assemblies involving large
amounts of data, generating exact views may consume too much
memory.
● Polyhedral elements (such as dittos, surfaces, etc.) from V4 .model
documents are not supported.
CGR
Generates views using the CGR format (CATIA Graphical Representation).

CGR corresponds to a data format containing a graphical representation of
the geometry only, which is available with the Visualization mode (as
opposed to the exact geometry, which is available with the Design mode).
With CGR, only the external appearance of the component is used and
displayed; the geometry is not available. The corresponding .cgr file, if it
exists, is inserted from the cache system.
CGR views are not as high in quality as exact views, but they consume
much less memory during the generation. This may be useful when dealing
with sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data.
However, this generation mode is rather slow.
For more information about the advantages and restrictions associated

with the CGR generation mode, see Advantages and restrictions common
to CGR and Approximate modes below.

Approximate
You can now generate views in Approximate mode. Although Approximate

views are not as high in precision and quality as exact views, this
generation mode dramatically reduces memory consumption.
Performances may also be improved, depending on how you fine-tune
precision. Therefore, the Approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to
sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data.
The Approximate mode offers about the same advantages and restrictions
than the CGR generation mode (see above). However, there are some
differences:
● Approximate consumes even less memory than CGR.
● Approximate is faster than CGR, but performances largely depend on
fine-tuning.
● Approximate provides more approximate results than CGR, but these
results largely depend on how you fine-tune precision.
You can fine-tune the generation options according to your needs. Click
the Configure button. In the dialog box, move the cursor to set the
precision (i.e. the level of detail) with respect to the performances (i.e.
generation time). The higher the precision, the lower the performances,
and vice-versa. In any case, memory consumption will not be impacted.
Click Close when you are done.
For more information about the advantages and restrictions associated

with the Approximate generation mode, see Advantages and restrictions
common to CGR and Approximate modes just below.
Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate
Using CGR or Approximate to generate views offers the following

advantages:
● Optimize memory consumption when generating and handling
projection views for large products or assemblies.
● Generate views from third-party data (such as MultiCAD), as well as
from polyhedral elements (such as dittos, surfaces, etc.) in V4 .model
documents.
However, the CGR or Approximate generation mode involves a number of

restrictions:
● You cannot generate section views, section cuts, detail views, detail
view profile, breakout views, unfolded views and views from 3D.

● You cannot project 3D elements such as wireframe, points, etc. on CGR

or Approximate views.
● CGR or Approximate views cannot contain dress-up elements (axis,
center lines, threads).
● Auxiliary view profiles, annotations, dimensions, etc. are not associative
on CGR or Approximate views.
● CGR or Approximate views being only a graphical representation of the
geometry, only line segments are generated in such views. As
dimensions are not associative, the only elements that can be
dimensioned are these line segments.
As a result, it is impossible to create certain types of radius or diameter
dimensions in such views; to put it simply, you cannot create radius and
diameter dimensions on elements other than these line segments.
As a consequence of these restrictions, selecting either the CGR or the

Approximate option disables a number of other options on the View and
on the Generation tab.
Raster
Generates views as images. This enables you to quickly generate overall

views for large products or assemblies, regardless of drawing quality. Such
views are associative to the 3D geometry and can be updated when the
part or product changes.
Raster views offer a number of restrictions:

● You cannot generate the following types of views using this option: view
from 3D, section views, section cuts, detail views, breakout views,
unfolded views.
● Raster views cannot contain dress-up elements (axis, center lines,
threads).
● Creating dimensions is impossible.
● Generally speaking, all commands requiring the selection of geometry
are not available.
● Raster views cannot be edited (you can work around this by isolating
the view: double-clicking the image will then launch an image editor).
As a consequence of these restrictions, selecting this option disables a

number of other options on the View and on the Generation tab.

To optimize disk space and memory consumption, it is recommended that

you do not select the Inherit 3D colors option when generating views as
images.
Click the Configure button to configure the raster mode options.
From the Mode list, select the mode that you want to use: Dynamic
Hidden Line Removal, Shading, Shading with edges. These modes are
equivalent to the 3D rendering styles. For more information, refer to Using
Rendering Styles in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
Now, set the level of detail (i.e. the definition, in dpi) that will respectively
be used to visualize and to print the drawing. You can choose between
three pre-defined modes (Low quality, Normal quality and High quality)
and a custom mode (Customize). If you choose to customize the definition
yourself, set the dpi for visualization and for print in the appropriate fields.
Click Close when you are done.
The level of detail applies to the scale of the view. In some cases (when
the view would print with a considerable height or width), there may be
too many pixels to generate the view. In this case, the view will be
displayed as a red cross-mark. If this happens, try to reduce the scale of
the view and/or the level of detail.
If you want the colors of a part to be used when generating Raster views
using the Shading or Shading with edges mode, remember to select the
Inherit 3D Colors option. Otherwise, the view will be generated using
shades of grey.

To further improve performance when generating Raster or CGR views, we recommend

you work in Visualization mode: to do this, in the Options dialog box, go to
Infrastructure -> Product Structure -> Cache Management tab and select Work
with the cache system. (For more information, see Customizing Cache Settings in
the Infrastructure User's Guide and Visualization mode in the Product Structure User's
Guide.)
Exact preview for view generation
Make sure this option is selected if you want an exact preview when
generating views. As a result, the part or product will be loaded in Design
mode when previewing the view to generate, even if you are working in
Visualization mode. Deselect this option to get a quick preview of the 3D
document when generating views. In this case, a part or product open in
Visualization mode will not be loaded in Design mode for the preview,
which optimizes memory consumption.
Only generate parts larger than
To specify that you only want to generate parts which are larger than a
certain size, select this option and indicate the appropriate size by
providing a value in millimeters in the appropriate field.
Enable occlusion culling
Select this option if you want to save memory when generating exact
views from an assembly which is loaded in Visualization mode (i.e. when
the Work with the cache system option is active). This will load only the
parts which will be seen in the resulting view (instead of loading all of
them, which is the case by default), which optimizes memory consumption
and CPU usage.
To ensure the efficiency of this option, make sure that the Exact preview
for view generation option is not selected.
In the case of an assembly which is loaded in Design mode, or in the case
of a part, the Enable occlusion culling option will help increase
performance by reducing CPU usage.

Keep the following restrictions in mind when selecting the Enable

occlusion culling option:
● The Project 3D points option will be disabled.
● The only option available for Project 3D wireframe is Can be hidden.
● If you choose to project 3D wireframe, you will need to make sure that
your wireframe elements have been taken into account when the CGR
data was created: this is the case if you activated the Save lineic
elements in cache option from Tools -> Options -> General ->
Display -> Performances before the creation of CGR data (i.e. before
you launched the part or product in Visualization mode). If not, you
need to activate the Save lineic elements in cache option and then re-
create the CGR data. To do this:
1. Close all open parts and products and exit the application.
2. Delete your CGR data from the cache. (The cache location is
specified in Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product
Structure -> Cache Management tab, Path to the local cache
field.)
3. Re-open the product in Visualization mode.
These options are also available in the Properties dialog box for each view: from the
contextual menu, click Properties, click the View tab and then select the desired
options.

Generation
Generation
You can customize given options for controlling dimension and balloon generation in
generative views.
Options dialog box.
3. Select the Generation tab. It contains several categories of options:

● Dimension generation
● Balloon generation
Dimension generation
Generated dimensions are positioned according to the most representative views. In

other words, a dimension will appear on a view so that it does not need to be created
on another view.
The dimensions are generated on the views on the condition the settings were
previously switched to the dimension generation option.
Generate dimensions when updating the sheet
Check this option to generate dimensions automatically each time you

update the sheet.
Filters before generation

Generation
Check this option to display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box
before generation. This enables you to specify what type of dimensions
you want to generate. Also, in assembly or product views, this lets you
indicate what parts you want to generate dimensions for.
Automatic positioning after generation
Check this option if you want the dimensions to be automatically

positioned after generation.
Allow automatic transfer between views
Check this option if you want dimensions to be automatically transferred to

the most appropriate view when regenerating dimensions.
Analysis after generation
Check this option to display the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box
after generation.
Generate dimensions from parts included in assembly views
Check this option to extract 3D part constraints (on top of assembly

constraints) when generating product dimensions.
This option is particularly useful if you want to generate dimensions for all
parts included in assembly or product views, without displaying the
Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before dimension generation. Note
that if you display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before
generating dimensions, you will need to indicate what parts you want to
generate dimensions for (whether this option is selected or not).
Delay between generations for step-by-step mode
Specify the delay between each dimension generation when generating

dimensions step by step.
Balloon generation

Generation
Creation of a balloon for each instance of a product
If you select this option, a balloon will be generated for each instance of a
component: therefore, if a component is used two times within a product,
then the balloon will be generated twice.
If you leave this box unselected, a single balloon will be generated for all
instances of the same component, when a component is used several
times within a part or product.

Geometry Creation
You can customize given options when creating 2D geometry, either or not using
autodetection (or SmartPick), or still adding constraints to this geometry.
Options dialog box.
3. Select the Geometry tab. It contains several categories of options:

● Geometry
● Constraints creation
● Constraints Display
● Colors
Geometry
You can decide whether or not you want to create centers when creating
circles or ellipses. By default, this option is activated. Just uncheck it if
you do not need to create circle and ellipse centers.
Allow direct manipulation
Select this option to be able to move geometry using the mouse. When
moving geometry, you can move either the minimum number of
elements, the maximum number of elements, or still the minimum
number by modifying the shape of elements, if needed. Click the
Solving mode... button to configure manipulation.

The dialog box that appears offers the following options as regards the
solving mode:
Solving mode for moving elements
Standard mode
You move as many elements as possible and also respect existing
constraints.
Minimum move
You move as few elements as possible and also respect existing
constraints.
Relaxation
You move elements by re-distributing them over the sketch, globally
speaking. This method solves element moving by minimizing energy
cost.
Drag elements end points included
Furthermore, you can choose to drag elements along with their end
points by checking this box.

Show H and V fields in the Tools Palette
You can show the H and V fields in the Tools Palette when creating 2D
geometry or when offsetting elements. Leaving the option unchecked
enables you to directly enter the value corresponding to the type of
element you are creating: for example, the length when creating a line,
the radius when creating a circle or the offset value when offsetting
elements.
When a command (such as the Point creation command) does not have
any parameters other than H and V, then these two fields will remain in
the Tools Palette, whether you select this option or not.
Create end points when duplicating generated geometry
When duplicating geometry that was generated from the 3D, you can
choose to create end points for these geometrical elements.
Constraints creation
Create detected and feature-based constraints
Select this option if you want to create the geometrical or dimensional

constraints detected by the SmartPick tool. If all of the detection options
are unchecked, the Create detected and feature-based constraints
option is not available.
If this detection option is unchecked, the Create detected constraints

option will be inactive by default in the Tools toolbar. You will be able to
activate it at any time.
SmartPick... (switch button)
As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple

directions and positions, and more and more relationships with existing
elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting of

several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at

different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to
filter out undesired detections by clicking the SmartPick... button.
The SmartPick dialog box provides these options:

● Support lines and circles
● Alignment
● Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency
● Horizontality and verticality
Uncheck the elements you do not wish to detect when sketching.
Disabling SmartPick completely (i.e. unchecking all options in the

SmartPick dialog box) is particularly useful when your screen is full of
elements: in this case, it may be a good idea to disable SmartPick to
concentrate only on the geometry.
Constraints Display

Display constraints
Check this option to visualize the logical constraints specific to the

elements. Note that if the Display constraints option is unchecked, the
other options in this category are not available.
Reference size
Specify the size that will be used as a reference to display constraints

symbols. Changing this reference size will modify the size of all
constraints representations.
Constraints color
Choose the color that will be used to display constraints.
Constraints types... (switch button)
Click this button to define which types of constraints you will visualize as
you create the geometry.

The Constraints types dialog box provides these options:

● Horizontal
● Vertical
● Parallelism
● Concentricity
● Coincidence
● Tangency
● Symmetry
Uncheck the types of constraints you do not want to visualize as you

create the geometry.
Colors
Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors
correspond to colors illustrating:
Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the
Tools->Options dialog box.
OR
● Constraint diagnosis
Colors that represent constraint diagnoses are colors that are imposed to elements
whatever the graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in
accordance with given diagnoses. As a result, as soon as the diagnosis is solved,
the element is assigned the color as defined in the Tools->Options dialog box.
Visualization of diagnosis
Select this option if you want over-constrained, inconsistent, not-

changed or iso-constrained elements to be identified using specific
colors. Then, click the Colors... button to configure these colors.

In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following
types of elements:
Over-constrained elements
The dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions
were applied to the geometry.
Inconsistent elements
At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case
when elements are under-constrained and the system proposes defaults
that do not lead to a solution.
Not-changed elements
Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a
result, geometry that depend(s) on the problematic area will not be
recalculated.
Iso-constrained elements
All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and
cannot be moved from its geometrical support.
Other color of the elements
Click the Colors... button to configure the colors of other elements.

In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following
types of elements:
Isolated elements
Use-edge (projection, intersection, etc.) that does not depend on the 3D
anymore.
Protected elements
Non-modifiable elements.
Construction elements
A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only
visualized by, the sketch. This element is used as positioning reference.
It is not used for creating solid primitives.
SmartPick
Colors used for SmartPick assistant elements and symbols.
When opening a drawing, colors are not recomputed. Colors will not be displayed
until you create another element or move the geometry.

Dimension Creation
Dimension Creation
You can customize given options when creating or re-positioning dimensions.
Options dialog box.
3. Select the Dimension tab. It contains several categories of options:

● Dimension Creation
● Move
● Line-Up
● Analysis Display Mode
Dimension Creation

Dimension Creation
Dimension following the mouse (ctrl toggles)
You can decide that the dimension line is positioned according to the
cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process.
Constant offset between dimension line and geometry
The distance between the created dimension and the geometry remains
the same when you move the geometry.
Default dimension line/geometry distance
If you position the dimension according to the cursor, you can define the
value at which the dimension is created. If you create associativity
between the dimension and the geometry, you can define the value at
which the dimension will remain positioned.
Associativity on 3D
If you click the switch button, the Dimensions associativity on 3D dialog

box appears.
A link can be applied between a dimension and the 3D part. As a result,

when you update the drawing, the dimension is automatically re-
computed. If you do not check this option, when you perform the
update, you need to re-create the dimension afterwards.
Create driving dimensions
The dimensions you will create will drive the geometry.

Dimension Creation
A new field will appear in the Tools Palette during the creation process,
allowing you to enter the driving dimension value.
Detect chamfer
Automatically detects chamfers so that you can create chamfer

dimensions in a single click.
As chamfer detection may slow performance down, you may want to
deactivate this option for large products or assemblies.
By default, create dimensions on circle's
Specify whether the dimension you will create between a circle and
another element should be on the circle center or on the circle edge.
Move
Activate Snapping (shift toggles)
Select to activate the snapping option. Click the Configure button. In

the dialog box, specify whether the dimension should be snapped on the
grid, or whether the dimension value should be located at its default
position between symbols (it will work only if the cursor is between the
symbols), or both.

Dimension Creation
Pressing the Shift key allows you to temporarily deactivate or activate

this mode.
Move only selected sub-part
Activate this option if you want to move only a dimension sub-part (text,
line, etc.).
Line-Up
You can organize dimensions into a system with a linear offset. The offset will align
the dimensions to each other as well as the smallest dimension to the reference
element.
Default offset to reference
This allows you to set the offset between the smallest dimension and the
reference element.
Default offset between dimensions
This allows you to set the offset between dimensions.

Dimension Creation
Align stacked dimension values
Lets you align all the values of a group of stacked dimensions on the
value of the smallest dimension of the group.
Align cumulated dimension values
Lets you align all the values of a group of cumulated dimensions on the
value of the smallest dimension of the group.
Automatically add a funnel
Whenever the value of a cumulated dimension requires a funnel to be

displayed correctly, lets you have one added automatically.
Activate analysis display mode
Colors can be customized with this option. To activate this mode, select
this option and then click the Types and colors button. The Types and
colors of dimensions dialog box lets you assign the desired color(s) to
the selected dimension types. You will then be able to visualize the
different types of dimensions using their assigned colors.

Dimension Creation

Manipulators
These options apply to the Interactive Drafting workbench only.
You can decide that you will visualize given manipulators whenever creating or
modifying dimensions.
Options dialog box.
3. Select the Manipulators tab. It contains several categories of options:

● Manipulators
● Dimension Manipulators
Manipulators
These settings can be used for any type of manipulator (texts, leaders, center lines,
dimensions and so forth).
Reference size
Specify the reference size that should be used for manipulators. In the
case of texts, for example, this reference size corresponds to the diameter
of the rotation manipulators.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/bascudr_C2/bascudri0006.htm (1 of 4)10/19/2004 4:57:28 PM

Zoomable
Check this box if you want to make manipulators zoomable.
Dimension Manipulators
These settings let you define which manipulators you will visualize and therefore use
when creating and/or modifying dimensions:

Modify overrun
If you drag select one overrun manipulator, both overrun extension lines
are modified. To modify only the selected overrun extension line, use the
Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new
value in the dialog box that appears.
Modify blanking
If you drag select one blanking manipulator, both blanking are modified.
To modify only the selected blanking, use the Ctrl key. You can also
double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box
that appears.
Insert text before
Allow inserting a text before, without using the Properties dialog box. For
this, you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog
box that appears.
Insert text after
Allows inserting a text after, without using the Properties dialog box. For
this, you will click on the manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog
box that appears.
Move value
Allows moving the dimension value and only it.
Move dimension line
Allows moving the dimension line and only it by dragging to the new
location.
Move dimension line secondary part
Allows moving the dimension line secondary part and only it by dragging
to the new location.


Annotation and Dress-up

You can customize given options that will be used when creating annotations.
Options dialog box.
3. Select the Annotation and Dress-Up tab. It contains the following sets of
options:
● Annotation Creation
● Move
● 2D Component Creation
● Balloon Creation
Annotation Creation
In order for these options to be taken into account, the Activate Snapping (SHIFT
toggles) box must be checked. Note that the option selected in the Activate
snapping dialog box will be taken into account. See the Move section.
Create text along reference
Select this option if you want to create annotation texts along a

reference direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a
text, the text will be oriented parallel to the line.
Text
Select this option if you want to create the extremity of text leaders

normal to a reference direction. For example, if you select a line when

creating a text with leader, the leader will be normal to the line.
Geometrical tolerance
Select this option if you want to create the extremity of geometrical

tolerance leaders normal to a reference direction. For example, if you
select a line when creating a geometrical tolerance, the leader will be
normal to the line.
Move
Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles)
Select this option to activate snapping. Click the Configure button.
In the dialog box that appears, specify whether you want the annotation
to be snapped on the grid, according to the orientation, or both. This will
apply to the annotations selected in the Annotation Creation area. To
deactivate snapping when creating or moving annotations, press the
Shift key.
2D Component Creation

Create with a constant size
Select this option if you want all 2D component instances to have the
same size when you create them, no matter what the view scale is.
This lets you create 2D component instances whose size is independent

from the view scale so that they always look the same. You can use
them as symbols, for example.
If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both

the Create with a constant size setting and the Apply Scale property
for the text (in Edit -> Properties): the size of both the 2D component
and its text will then be independent from the view scale.
Balloon Creation
3D associativity
You can specify what kind of balloons you want to create (using the
Balloon command from the Annotation toolbar) or to generate (using the
Generate Balloons command from the Generation toolbar).
First, select the 3D associativity box to indicate that you want to
associate balloons with information from the 3D. Then, select from the
list the kind of balloons you want to create or generate: the numbering
of parts within an assembly (default option), the instance name or the
part number.

Administration
Administration Settings
You can customize settings for the management of drawings.
1. Select the Tools -> Options command.
Options dialog box.
3. Select the Administration tab. It contains the following sets of options:

● Drawing management
● Style
● Generative view style
● Dress-up
Drawing management
Prevent File>New
Check this box to make it impossible to create drawings using the File -
> New command. All drawings will be created using the File -> New
From... command instead.
Prevent switch of standard
Check this box to make it impossible to change standards, i.e. to use a

standard other than the one currently defined in the Page Setup dialog
box.
Prevent update of standard

Administration
Check this box to make it impossible to update standards for the current
document in the Page Setup dialog box.
Prevent background view access
Check this box to make it impossible to access the background view.
Style
Use style values to create new objects
Check this box if you want dialog boxes, Properties toolbars and the
Tools Palette to be pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the
Standards Editor) when creating new annotations. In this case,
Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be disabled during the
creation of the annotation.
If you leave this box unchecked, annotation dialog boxes, Properties
toolbars and the Tools Palette will be pre-filled with the last entered
values (except for Texts, Texts with leader, Balloons and Datum
features). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be
active during the creation of the annotation.
If you check this box, you will be able to reset the current style values in
dialog boxes at any time using the Reset button.

Administration
Create new sheet from
This setting lets you specify if the properties used for creating new
sheets should be those defined in the standards or those defined in the
first sheet in a drawing. These properties are the scale and the
projection method (first or third angle).
Select Style if you want the sheet to use the style defined in the
standards (in Tools -> Standards -> Drafting -> [StandardName] -
> Styles -> Sheet).
Select First sheet if you want the sheet to use the properties defined in
the first sheet in a drawing. For example, you can use this option if you
use an existing drawing to create a new one (i.e. when you want the
new drawing to have the same properties as the existing drawing).
Lock "User Default" Style
Check this box to make it compulsory to use User Defaults (i.e., user-
defined values set as default). The Styles drop-down list will be set to
Only User Defaults and will be inactive so that Original Defaults or
User Defaults cannot be selected.
This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10

whose standard has NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later.
Prevent "Set As Default" and "Reset All Defaults"
Check this box to use the current defaults and to make it impossible to
create, change and reset user defaults (i.e. user-defined values). This
disables the Set as Default and the Reset All Defaults commands.
This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10

whose standard has NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later.
Generative view style

Administration
Prevent generative view style creation
Check this box if you do not want to use generative view styles when
creating views. In this case, you will not be able to select a generative
view style after having selected a view creation command, which means
that the Generative View Style toolbar will not be displayed. (In the case
of advanced front views, it is the Generative view style list in the View
Parameters dialog box which will not be displayed).
Dress-up
Prevent dimensions from driving 3D constraints
Check this box to make it impossible to modify a 3D constraint via a 2D

dimension that was generated from it.

Toolbars
Customizing Toolbars
You can customize the appearance of some fields in the following properties toolbars:
Styles, Graphic Properties, Text Properties, Dimension Properties.
1. Right-click the toolbar field you want to customize. A contextual menu is

displayed.
2. If necessary, scroll down this contextual menu to display the toolbar customization
options.
The customization options that you can apply to the selected field are displayed.
The options available depend on the selected field. For more information on what
options will be available for each field, see the table below.
3. Click the option you want. Depending on the option you selected, the
corresponding dialog box appears.
4. Enter the appropriate value in the dialog box.

Toolbars
● Set text width: sets the width used to display the field in the toolbar, in number
of characters to be displayed (based on 'W').
● Set list width: sets the width used to display the drop-down list, in number of
characters to be displayed (based on 'W').
● Set list height: sets the height used to display the list, in number of lines to be
displayed (up and down arrows will make it possible to scroll within the list).
● Icons display: defines whether icons should be displayed in this field, or only in
the list, when the list is collapsed.
● Precision: sets the precision used to display a numerical value in this field, in
number of digits after the separator.
The table below indicates which fields you can customize in each toolbar, along with
what you can customize for each field.
Set text Set list Set list Icons

Set precision
width width height display
Style toolbar
Style Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Text Properties toolbar
Font Name Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Font Size Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Dimension Properties toolbar
Tolerance
Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Description
Tolerance Yes Yes Yes No No
Numerical
Display Yes Yes Yes No No
Description
Precision Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Graphic Properties toolbar
Color Yes No No No No
Thickness Yes No Yes No No

Toolbars
Linetype Yes No Yes No No

Point type Yes No Yes No No

Glossary
Glossary
Numerics
An instance of a 2D element that is stored on a detail sheet. Also
2D component
called ditto.
A
absolute position A sheet coordinates.
A view in which all the modifications will be performed. For instance,
active view all the 2D geometry and dressup elements that will be added to the
draft views to be created.
angle dimension A dimension applied to one or two linear elements or to circular
elements.
A closed area on which you will then apply graphical dressup element
area fill
called hatching pattern.
B
background sheet A sheet dedicated to frames and title blocks.
A blank added between the dimensioned element on the view and one
blanking
extremity on the extension line.
C
chained dimension A dimension presentation mode made of a system.
A bevelled corner between any types of curves: lines, splines, arcs
chamfer
and so forth.
chamfer dimension A dimension applied to a chamfer.
An arc tangent between lines, arcs, circles and any types of curves
corner
(consecutive or that intersect).
D
datum feature An element defining a contacting surface on a part.
An element defining a contacting surface on a part and represented by
datum target
spherical or pointed locating pins.
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driuggl.htm (1 of 3)10/19/2004 4:59:08 PM

Glossary
detail sheet A sheet that is used as an intermediate catalog for positioning 2D

geometry elements that will be instantiated afterwards.
diameter dimensionA dimension representing either a radius or a diameter.
distance dimension A dimension representing the dimension between two elements be
they linear or circular type.
An instance of a 2D element that is stored on a detail sheet. Also
ditto
called 2D component.
document A common unit of data (typically a file) used in user tasks and
exchanged between users. When saved on disk, a document is given a
unique filename by which it can be retrieved.
The root feature. Sheets are aggregated in the drawing. Views are
drawing
aggregated in the sheets.
drawing repository A drawing document containing 2D re-usable components.
dress-up A graphical attribute of a 2D element.
F
A representation of the dimensions which allows inserting the
funnel
dimension value between the dimension symbols.
O
object In the Drafting workbench, there are two kinds of object: activated
and selected. The view frame of an activated object is displayed in red.
overrun A part of a dimension corresponding to the extended extension line.
P
part A 3D entity obtained by combining different features in the Part
Design workbench.
R
radius dimension A dimension applied to a circle, semi-circle or arc of a circle.
roughness symbol A symbol that is used for defining a surface.
S
sheet A set of views. Several sheets may be created in the Drafting
workbench.
standard An international convention that is supported in the Drafting
workbench: ANSI, ISO and JIS.

Glossary
T
template In the Drafting workbench, an object that is included in the document
(for example, the title block).
Text templates rely on attributes defined in the 3D for technological
text template features. They can be used when creating texts associated to such
features.
A projection method that allows projecting views from a part
third angle
according to ISO/ANSI international standards.
title block A frame which contains the title.
V
A square or rectangular frame that contains the geometry and
view frame
dimensions of the view.
W
welding symbol A symbol that is used for representing welds.

Index
Index
Numerics
2D component creation (annotation and dress-up settings)
2D components
creating
creating catalogs
editing instance properties
exploding
exposing from a catalog
re-using
re-using from a catalog
2D geometry, editing feature properties
3D elements
intersecting
projecting
3D silhouette edges
creating
projecting
A
adding leaders to annotations
administering
standard parameters
styles
administration settings
advanced search
analysis display mode (dimension settings)
analyzing
http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/driug_C2/driugix.htm (1 of 28)10/19/2004 4:59:34 PM

Index
geometry
sketch
angle dimensions, creating
annotating drawings using text templates
annotation creation (annotation and dress-up settings)
annotation settings
annotations
activating/deactivating
adding leaders
editing properties
handling leaders
modifying positioning
overview
positioning leader breakpoints
querying links
standard parameters
styles
text templates, creating
text templates, using
Annotations toolbar
Approximate views
arc, creating
area fills
arrows
associated text, creating
associative balloons, creating
associative thread dimensions, creating
attributes
adding links to text
replicating for texts
Autocad2000
autodetection
axis lines

Index
creating
creating with center lines
axis, creating
B
background view (view and sheet layout settings)
balloon creation (annotation and dress-up settings)
balloon generation (generation settings)
balloons
creating
creating associative balloons
modifying
Best Practices
DXF/DWG Small Entities
STEP Quality of Conversion
bisecting line, creating
blanking in dimensions, modifying
breaking
breaking elements
C
catalogs
creating
exposing 2D components from
re-using 2D components from
catalogs, storing text templates in
CATAnnDefaultStyleMigration
CATAnnStandardTools
center lines
creating with axis lines
creating with no reference

Index
creating with reference

modifying
CGM
Export
cgm
extension
CGR views
chamfer
detecting
dimensions, creating
Choice of Standard
DXF/DWG
circle using coordinates, creating
circle, creating
closing elements
CMG
insert
colors (geometry creation settings)
command
1 Symbol
3D Silhouette Edges
Add an Interruption
Arc
Area Fill
Arrow
Attribute link
Axis
Axis Line
Axis Line and Center Line
Balloon

Index
Bisecting Line
Break
Center Line
Center Line with Reference
Chamfer Dimensions
Circle
Circle Using Coordinates
Close
Conic
Connect (with a spline)
Connect (with an arc)
Constraint with Dialog Box
Coordinate Dimension
Coordinate Dimension Table
Copy
Copy Object Format
Create Constraints
Create Detected Constraints
Create Interruption(s)
Cumulated Dimensions
Datum Feature
Datum Target
Delete
Dimension
Ellipse
Equidistant Points
Explode 2D Component
Expose 2D Component
Extend to Center
Filter Generated Elements
Force Dimension on Element

Index
Force Horizontal Dimension in View

Force Vertical Dimension in View
Frame
Frame Creation
Geometrical Constraint
Geometrical Tolerance
Grid
Half Dimension
Hide Folding Lines
Hole Dimension Table
Hyperbola by Focus
Infinite Line
Intersect 3D Elements
Intersection Point
Isolate
Isolate Text
Line
Line Normal to Curve
Line-Up
Mirror
Multiple View Projection
New
New Detail Sheet
New View
Output Feature
Page Setup
Parabola by Focus
Paste
Point
Point Using Coordinates
Position and Orientation
Profile

Index
Project 3D Elements
Projected Dimension
Projection Point
Query Object Links
Quick Trim
Radius Center
Rectangle
Remove Interruption(s)
Remove One Interruption
Re-route Dimension
Reset All Defaults
Reset with Standard Properties
Roughness Symbol
Search
Set as Default
Show Constraints
Show Folding Lines
Snap to Point
Spline
Stacked Dimensions
Swap to Radius
Symbol Shape
Symmetrical Extension
Symmetry
Table
Text
Text Properties
Text Template Placement
Text with Leader
Thread
Thread Dimension
Thread with Reference

Index
Three Point Arc

Three Point Circle
Three Points Arc Using Limits
Translation
Trim
Trim All Elements
Trim First Element
Trim No Element
Tri-Tangent Circle
Update
View Plane Definition
Weld
conic curves
creating
connecting curves
with a spline
with an arc
constraints
creating between 2D and generated elements
creating quickly
creating via a dialog box
creating via smartpick
setting relations between dimensional constraints
constraints creation (geometry creation settings)
constraints display (geometry creation settings)
Constraints toolbar
constraints, driving via dimensions
construction element, creating
coordinate dimension table
coordinate dimensions, creating and modifying
copying
elements
geometrical tolerances

Index
graphic properties
copying/pasting elements
corner
with construction lines trimmed
with standard lines trimmed
creating
2D components
a point using projection
a point using projection along a direction
an arc
angle dimensions
area fills
arrows
associated text
associative balloons on views from products
associative thread dimensions
axis
axis and center lines
axis lines
balloons
bisecting line
center lines with no reference
center lines with reference
chamfer dimensions
chamfer with both elements trimmed
chamfer with no element trimmed
chamfer with one element trimmed
circle
circle using coordinates
component catalogs

Index
conic curves
constraints between 2D and generated elements
constraints via a dialog box
constraints via smartpick
coordinate dimensions
corner with both elements trimmed
corner with no element trimmed
corner with one element trimmed
cumulated dimensions
curvilinear length dimensions
datum features
datum targets
dimensions
dimensions along a reference direction
dimensions between element and view axis
dimensions between intersection points
drawings
driving dimensions
ellipses
equidistant points
explicit dimensions
frames and title blocks
free text
half dimensions
holes dimensions table
hyperbola by focus
infinite line
mirrored elements
multiple view projection
output features
overall curve dimensions

Index
points coordinates table

quick constraints
radius curvature dimensions
roughness symbols
spline offset
stacked dimensions
styles
tables
technological feature dimensions
text frames
text templates
text with a leader
threads with no reference
threads with reference
three point circle
views
views using folding lines
welding symbols
welds
cumulated dimensions, creating
curves
connecting with a spline
connecting with an arc
curvilinear length dimensions, creating
customizing
administration settings
annotation and dress-up settings
dimension creation settings
general settings
generation settings
geometry creation settings
manipulators settings
standard parameters

Index
styles
toolbars
view and sheet layout settings
view generation settings
D
data exchange
datum features
creating
modifying
datum targets
creating
modifying
deactivating
annotations
table rows
default properties, setting
default values
dimension
dress-up
geometry
sheet
view callout
defining
sheets
standard formats
deleting
sheets
styles
Design mode
using
detecting chamfer
dimension creation (dimension settings)

Index
dimension creation settings

dimension generation (generation settings)
dimension manipulators (manipulators settings)
Dimension Properties toolbar
Dimensioning toolbar
dimensions
along a reference direction
angle dimensions
associative thread dimensions
between element and view axis
between intersection points
chamfer dimensions
creating
cumulated dimensions
curvilinear length dimensions
dimension extension line properties
dimension line properties
dimension text properties
dimension tolerance properties
editing dimension value properties
explicit dimensions
half dimensions
holes dimensions table
lining up (free space)
lining up (reference)
modifying blanking
modifying dimension line location
modifying dimension type
modifying overrun
modifying text before/after
modifying value text position

Index
overall curve dimensions

pre-defined value formats in standards
radius curvature dimensions
re-routing
searching dimension status
setting relations between dimensional constraints
specifying value position
stacked dimensions
standard parameters
styles
tolerance formats in standards
value formats in standards
drawing management (administration settings)
Drawing toolbar
drawings
creating
migrating pre-R11 drawings to use styles
dress-up
settings
standard parameters
styles
dress-up (administration settings)
dress-up generation (view generation settings)
Dress-Up toolbar
driving dimensions, creating
DWG
Import
DXF/DWG
Choice of Standard
Export
Export unit
Export VBScript Macros

Index
Extension
Import
Import VBScript Macros
Imported Elements
Multi-sheet export
Report File
Trouble Shooting
What about the elements you export
DXF/DWG CATIA V4
Trouble Shooting
DXF/DWG File Size
Trouble Shooting
DXF/DWG Kanji or unicode characters
Trouble Shooting
DXF/DWG Small Entities
Best Practices
DXF/DWG VBScript Macros
utility
E
editing
annotation leaders
dimension value properties
images
elements
trimming
elements, closing
ellipse, creating
equidistant points, creating
exact views
explicit dimensions, creating
exploding 2D components

Index
Export
CGM
DXF/DWG
Export unit
DXF/DWG
Export VBScript Macros
DXF/DWG
exposing 2D components from a catalog
Extension
DXF/DWG
extension
cgm
extension lines, interrupting
F
file, export and import
finding text
frames
creating for text
standard parameters
frames and title blocks
creating
frames and title blocks, creating
free text
G
general parameters
standards
general settings
generation
settings
generative view style (administration settings)

Index
copying
creating
modifying
geometry
analyzing
diagnosis
geometry (geometry creation settings)
geometry creation settings
Geometry Creation toolbar
geometry generation (view generation settings)
Geometry Modification toolbar
geometry styles
geometry welds, creating
graphic properties
copying
editing
Graphic Properties toolbar
grid
H
half dimension, creating
handling annotation leaders
hexagon
holes dimensions table, creating
hyperbola by focus, creating
I
images
editing
inserting

Index
overview
Import
DWG
DXF/DWG
DXF/DWG
Import VBScript Macros
DXF/DWG
Imported Elements
DXF/DWG
importing tables
infinite line, creating
insert
CMG
inserting
images
views in tables
interrupting extension lines
intersecting 3D elements
intersections, isolating
isolating
intersections
projections
K
Knowledgeware
activating/deactivating annotations
activating/deactivating table rows
L
leaders
adding to annotations

Index
handling
positioning breakpoints
line thickness, standard parameters
lines normal to curves, creating
lines, creating
linetypes, standard parameters
line-up (dimension settings)
lining up dimensions
free space
reference
M
managing standards
manipulators (manipulators settings)
manipulators settings
menu bar
migrating pre-R11 to drawings using standard-defined styles
mirrored element, creating
modifying
annotation positioning
balloons
center lines
datum features
datum targets
dimension line location
dimension text before/after
dimension type
dimensions overrun and blanking
sheets

Index
tables
move (annotation and dress-up settings)
move (dimension settings)
multiple view projection
creating
multiple view projection, creating
Multi-sheet export
DXF/DWG
N
new sheet (view and sheet layout settings)
O
objects, querying links
occlusion culling
offsetting
operations on profiles, performing
orientation of text
output features, creating
overall curve dimensions, creating
overrun in dimensions, modifying
P
parabola by focus, creating
patterns
editing properties
standard parameters
point using intersection, creating
points coordinates table

Index
points using coordinates, creating

points, creating
positioning
dimension value text
leader breakpoints
printing
after modifying current display settings
overview
quickly
using clipping operator
profile
creating
projections, isolating
properties
2D component instance properties
2D element graphic properties
2D geometry feature properties
annotation font properties
dimension extension line properties
dimension line properties
dimension text properties
dimension tolerance properties
dimension value properties
pattern properties
text properties
properties set as default, using
Q
querying object links
quick constraints
quickly analyzing, geometry

Index
R
radius curvature dimensions, creating
raster images, inserting
raster views
rectangle, creating
reframing views
Relimitations toolbar
replacing text
Report File
DXF/DWG
re-routing dimensions
re-using
2D components
2D components from a catalog
roughness symbols, creating
rows, activating/deactivating in tables
ruler (general settings)
S
search (advanced)
section/projection callout (view and sheet layout settings)
setting default properties
settings
administration
annotation and dress-up
dimension creation
general
generation
geometry creation
manipulators

Index
view and sheet layout

view generation
sheet layout settings
sheet styles
sheets
defining
deleting
modifying
simple profiles, sketching
sketch
analyzing
sketching, simple profiles
smartpick
smartpick, using
smartpicking
specifying dimension value position
spline
creating
spline offset
creating
splitting tables
stacked dimensions, creating
standard element
standards
annotation parameters
annotation styles
concepts
customizing parameters
defining formats
dimension parameters
dimension styles
dimension tolerance formats
dimension value formats

Index
dimension value formats (pre-defined )

dress-up parameters
dress-up styles
frame parameters
general parameters
geometry styles
line thickness parameters
linetypes parameters
overview
pattern parameters
pre-defined styles
sheet styles
structure
switching standards
syntax for standard editor values
tolerance formats (pre-defined )
updating in drawings
upgrading
view callout styles
view generation
STEP Quality of Conversion
Best Practices
storing text templates in a catalog
style (administration settings)
Style toolbar
styles
annotations
creating
deleting
dimension
dress-up
geometry
migrating pre-R11 drawings to use styles

Index
overview
sheet
using
view callout
switching drawing standards
symmetrical elements
moving
symmetrical extension, creating
T
tables
activating/deactivating rows
creating
creating points coordinates table
importing
inserting views in
modifying
splitting
text
adding attribute links to
associated text
creating frames
creating free text
creating text with a leader
editing properties
finding and replacing
making an existing text associative
replicating text and attribute
specifying orientation
text before/after dimension value, modifying

Index
Text Properties toolbar

text templates
annotating drawings with
creating
storing in a catalog
threads
creating with no reference
creating with reference
three point circle, creating
three points arc using limits, creating
three points arc, creating
tolerances, pre-defined formats in standards
toolbars
Annotations
Constraints
customizing
Dimensioning
Drawing
Dress-Up
Geometry Creation
Graphic Properties
Relimitations
Style
Text Properties
Tools
Tools Palette
Transformations
Tools Palette toolbar
Tools toolbar
tools, using
Transformations toolbar

Index
translating elements
trimming
elements
trimming
tri-tangent circle, creating
Trouble Shooting
DXF/DWG
DXF/DWG CATIA V4
DXF/DWG File Size
DXF/DWG Kanji or unicode characters
U
updating standards
upgrading standards
using
properties set as default
styles
using smartpick
utility
CATAnnDefaultStyleMigration
CATAnnStandardTools
DXF/DWG VBScript Macros
V
vector images, inserting
view axis (general settings)
view callout styles
view creation (view and sheet layout settings)
view generation
settings
standards

Index
view generation (view generation settings)

view layout settings
view plane
defining
views
creating
creating using folding lines
defining view plane
generating Approximate views
generating CGR views
generating exact views
generating raster views
inserting in tables
reframing
Visual clipping
Visualization mode
improving performance
saving memory
W
welding symbols, creating
welds, creating
What about the elements you export
DXF/DWG
Y
yellow, colors

!!!catia V5R12 Mechanical Design Solutions 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

!!!catia V5R12 Mechanical Design Solutions 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part Design

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/prtugCATIAfrs.htm (1 of 5)10/18/2004 7:42:43 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/prtugCATIAfrs.htm (2 of 5)10/18/2004 7:42:43 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/prtugCATIAfrs.htm (3 of 5)10/18/2004 7:42:43 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/prtugCATIAfrs.htm (4 of 5)10/18/2004 7:42:43 PM

Using This Guide

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/CATIAfr_C2/prtugCATIAfrs.htm (5 of 5)10/18/2004 7:42:43 PM

Using This Guide

Using This Guide

Where to Find More Information

Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...)

Right-click (to select contextual menu)

Graphic conventions are denoted as follows:

indicates a target of a task.

indicates the prerequisites.

indicates the scenario of a task.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/icons_C2/conventions.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 7:43:22 PM

indicates basic concepts.

indicates methodological information.

indicates reference information.

indicates information regarding settings, customization, etc.

indicates the end of a task.

indicates functionalities that are new or enhanced with this Release.

indicates functionalities that are P1-specific.

indicates functionalities that are P2-specific.

indicates functionalities that are P3-specific.

allows you to switch back the full-window viewing mode.

These icons in the table of contents correspond to the entries or mode.

"Split View" mode.

"User Tasks" or the "Advanced Tasks".

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/icons_C2/conventions.htm (2 of 3)10/18/2004 7:43:22 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/icons_C2/conventions.htm (3 of 3)10/18/2004 7:43:22 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwn.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:43:40 PM

Customizing General Settings

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtugwn.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:43:40 PM

The main tasks described in this section are:

Entering the Part Design Workbench

The final part will look like this:

Now, let's get to sketching the profile!

Entering the Part Design Workbench

2. Select Part in the List of Types field and click OK.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs02.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:07 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs02.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:07 PM

Open the GettingStarted1_R04.CATPart document to open the required profile.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs04.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:22 PM

2. As you prefer to create a larger pad, enter 60 mm in the Length field.

The application previews the pad to be created.

The pad is created. The extrusion is performed in a direction which is normal

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs04.htm (2 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:22 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs04.htm (3 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:22 PM

1. Click the Draft Angle icon .

2. Select the face as shown by the arrow as the face to be drafted.

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs05.htm (1 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:39 PM

5. Click OK. The part is drafted:

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs05.htm (2 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:39 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs05.htm (3 of 3)10/18/2004 7:44:39 PM

1. Click the Edge Fillet icon .

3. Enter 7 mm as the new radius value and Click OK.

Here is your part:

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs06.htm (1 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:48 PM

http://pop.dia.uniroma3.it/catia/online/prtug_C2/prtuggs06.htm (2 of 2)10/18/2004 7:44:48 PM

Editing the Pad

You can do it in the specification tree if you wish.